五种理趣的注释巴利 Pañcavidhanayavaṇṇanā
1. 根本法门品复注 · 833 段
欢喜旋绕的注释巴利
1. Nandiyāvaṭṭanayavaṇṇanā
在《一切法根本理趣经》等经文中,通过含摄“一切法根本”和含摄“妄想”,就含摄了渴爱、慢和邪见。因为这也说明了“妄想本身也是妄想的因”这个道理。通过“未闻凡夫”等语句,则含摄了无明、慢和邪见,或者说含摄了一切杂染法;同样,通过含摄“想未遍知”也是如此。而在“漏已尽者、已尽后有结”这句中,则是从自相上含摄了诸漏和诸结;同样,通过含摄“喜”和含摄“渴爱”而含摄了渴爱。因此在这里,从自相和从方便两种方式,含摄了渴爱、无明以及随属于它们的诸法。其中,对于渴爱来说,色法是它特别的立足处;对于无明来说,无色法是它特别的立足处。而这些色法和无色法,其实已经通过含摄“一切法”以及含摄“地”等显示出来了。对于这些渴爱和无明等,止和观是它们的对治,它们在这里应当被把握的方式前面已经显示过了。止的果是心解脱,观的果是慧解脱。事实上,心解脱和慧解脱正是通过“离贪”等差别而宣说的;因此,对这两者的含摄,应当依据“正知解脱”“离贪”等语句来理解。在这里,渴爱和无明是集谛,而随属于它们的诸法,由于已被含摄在渴爱和无明的含摄中,应当知道它们也被含摄了。作为它们立足处的、上述各种类型的色法和无色法,是苦谛;它们的不生起是灭谛;了知灭是道谛。在这里,通过含摄渴爱,应当以幻术、欺诈、慢、过慢、放逸、懈怠、恶欲、恶友、无惭、无愧等行相引出不善的一方;通过含摄无明,应当以颠倒作意、忿、覆、诳、谄、嫉、悭、竞争、恶语、有见、无有见等行相引出不善的一方;与上述相反的,以不幻术、不欺诈、不颠倒作意等行相,同样,以属于止一方的信根等、属于观一方的无常想等行相,应当引出清净的一方。这就是《喜旋理趣》的领域,不是别的什么。巴利
‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’ntiādīsu sabbadhammamūlaggahaṇena maññanāgahaṇena ca taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo gahitā. Maññanānampi hi maññanā kāraṇanti dassitoyamattho. ‘‘Assutavā’’tiādinā avijjāmānadiṭṭhiyo gahitā, sabbepi vā saṃkilesadhammā, tathā saññāapariññātaggahaṇena. ‘‘Khīṇāsavo parikkhīṇabhavasaññojano’’ti ettha pana āsavā saññojanāni ca sarūpato gahitāni, tathā nandiggahaṇena taṇhāgahaṇena ca taṇhā, evampettha sarūpato pariyāyato ca taṇhā avijjā tappakkhiyadhammā ca gahitā. Tattha taṇhāya visesato rūpadhammā adhiṭṭhānaṃ, avijjāya arūpadhammā, te pana sabbadhammaggahaṇena pathavīādiggahaṇena ca dassitā eva. Tāsaṃ samatho vipassanā ca paṭipakkho, tesamettha gahetabbākāro heṭṭhā dassito eva. Samathassa cetovimutti phalaṃ , vipassanāya paññāvimutti. Tathā hi tā ‘‘rāgavirāgā’’tiādinā visesetvā vuccanti, imāsamettha gahaṇaṃ sammadaññāvimuttavītarāgādivacanehi veditabbaṃ. Tattha taṇhāvijjā samudayasaccaṃ, tappakkhiyadhammā pana taggahaṇeneva gahitāti veditabbā. Tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhūtā vuttappabhedā rūpārūpadhammā dukkhasaccaṃ, tesaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccaṃ. Taṇhāgahaṇena cettha māyā-sāṭheyya-mānātimāna-madappamāda-pāpicchatā-pāpamittatā-ahirikānottappādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo, avijjāgahaṇena viparītamanasikāra-kodhūpanāha-makkha-paḷāsa-issā-macchariya- sārambhadovacassatā-bhavadiṭṭhi-vibhavadiṭṭhiādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo, vuttavipariyāyena amāyāasāṭheyyādiaviparītamanasikārādivasena, tathā samathapakkhiyānaṃ saddhindriyādīnaṃ vipassanāpakkhiyānaṃ aniccasaññādīnañca vasena vodānapakkho netabboti. Ayaṃ nandiyāvaṭṭassa na yassa bhūmi.
2. 三圆满理趣的注释巴利
2. Tipukkhalanayavaṇṇanā
按照前面所说的方式,从自相和教说两方面把握了渴爱、无明以及与它们同类的法之后,渴爱就是贪,无明就是痴;与无明相应的情况下,就像脓依于血一样,当渴爱存在时,正在生起的嗔怒就是嗔。这样,通过把握三不善根,再通过对治它们——即否定妄执、遮止和遍知等——善根也就自然成立了。在这里也应当了知四谛的联结方式:比如“贪等一切有漏的善与不善根是集谛,由它们所生的、作为它们依止和行境的取蕴是苦谛”等等。这里的果是三种解脱。再者,依三不善根,应当把三类恶行、杂染、垢秽、邪行、不善想、不善寻等归入不善一边;同样,依三善根,应当把三类善行、平等、善、善想、善寻、正法、定、解脱门、解脱等归入善一边。这就是三丛理趣的范畴。巴利
Tathā vuttanayena sarūpato pariyāyato ca gahitesu taṇhāvijjātappakkhiyadhammesu taṇhā lobho, avijjā moho, avijjāya sampayutto lohite sati pubbo viya taṇhāya sati sijjhamāno āghāto doso, iti tīhi akusalamūlehi gahitehi, tappaṭipakkhato maññanāpaṭikkhepapariññāgahaṇādīhi ca kusalamūlāni siddhāniyeva honti. Idhāpi ‘‘lobho sabbāni vā sāsavakusalākusalamūlāni samudayasaccaṃ, tehi nibbattā, tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānagocarabhūtā ca upādānakkhandhā dukkhasacca’’ntiādinā saccayojanā veditabbā. Phalaṃ panettha tayo vimokkhā, tīhi pana akusalamūlehi tividhaduccarita-saṃkilesamala-visamaakusala-saññā-vitakkādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo. Tathā tīhi kusalamūlehi tividhasucarita-samakusala-saññā-vitakka-saddhamma-samādhi-vimokkhamukha-vimokkhā-divasena kusalapakkho netabboti. Ayaṃ tipukkhalassa nayassa bhūmi.
3. 狮子游戏理趣的注释巴利
3. Sīhavikkīḷitanayavaṇṇanā
按照前面所说的方式,从自相和间接方式所摄取的、属于渴爱和无明一方的诸法中,特别应当了知:依渴爱与邪见的力量,把不净执为“净”、把苦执为“乐”的颠倒;依无明与邪见的力量,把无常执为“常”、把无我执为“我”的颠倒。以它们的对治法——也就是通过遮止妄想、遍知、执取等而成就的念根、精进根、定根、慧根——四念处自然就成就了。在这里,应当用这四根来说明四种人。怎么说明呢?贪行者有两种:钝根的和利根的;见行者同样也有两种。其中,第一种是执取不净为“净”的颠倒者,他靠念的力量如实观察身体的自性,断除那个颠倒之后,进入正性决定。第二种是执取苦为“乐”的颠倒者,他靠精进的力量——也就是经中说的“不忍受生起的欲寻”等所说的精进防护——摧破那个颠倒之后,进入正性决定。第三种是把无常执为“常”的不如实执取者,他靠定的力量令心得定,通过观察诸行的刹那性,断除那个颠倒之后,进入圣者的境地。第四种是因为被相续、积聚、作用、所缘的密集所蒙蔽,把仅仅是触等诸法积聚的无我,错误地执为“我”的人,他靠四重空性的作意,摧破那种邪执之后,亲证沙门果。巴利
Tathā vuttanayena sarūpato pariyāyato ca gahitesu taṇhāvijjātappakkhiyadhammesu visesato taṇhādiṭṭhīnaṃ vasena asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti , dukkhe ‘‘sukha’’nti ca vipallāsā, avijjādiṭṭhīnaṃ vasena anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti, anattani ‘‘attā’’ti ca vipallāsā veditabbā. Tesaṃ paṭipakkhato maññanāpaṭikkhepapariññāgahaṇādisiddhehi sativīriyasamādhipaññindriyehi cattāri satipaṭṭhānāni siddhāneva honti. Tattha catūhi indriyehi cattāro puggalā niddisitabbā. Kathaṃ? Duvidho hi taṇhācarito mudindriyo tikkhindriyoti, tathā diṭṭhicarito. Tesaṃ paṭhamo asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti vipariyāsaggāhī satibalena yathābhūtaṃ kāyasabhāvaṃ sallakkhento taṃ vipallāsaṃ samugghāṭetvā sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati. Dutiyo asukhe ‘‘sukha’’nti vipariyāsaggāhī ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.310; ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.14, 114; a. ni. 6.58) vuttena vīriyasaṃvarabhūtena vīriyabalena taṃ vipallāsaṃ vidhamento sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati. Tatiyo anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti ayāthāvaggāhī samādhibalena samāhitacitto saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikabhāvasallakkhaṇena taṃ vipallāsaṃ samugghāṭento ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati. Catuttho santatisamūhakiccārammaṇaghanavañcitatāya phassādidhammapuñjamatte anattani ‘‘attā’’ti micchābhinivesī catukoṭikasuññatāmanasikārena taṃ micchābhinivesaṃ viddhaṃsento sāmaññaphalaṃ sacchikaroti.
在这里也应当知道四谛的搭配:以净想、乐想等四种颠倒为集谛,以它们所依止和所缘的五取蕴为苦谛等等。不过,这里的果是四种沙门果。以四种心颠倒,以及四漏、四暴流、四轭、四系、四非道、四渴爱生起、四箭、四取、四识住、四不遍知等方式,应归入不善一边。同样,以四念处,以及四种禅那、四种住、四种依处、四乐分法、四无量、四正勤、四神足等方式,应归入清净一边。这就是《师子游戏》理趣的范围。巴利
Idhāpi subhasaññāsukhasaññāhi catūhipi vā vipallāsehi samudayasaccaṃ, tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānārammaṇabhūtā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccantiādinā saccayojanā veditabbā. Phalaṃ panettha cattāri sāmaññaphalāni, catūhi cittavipallāsehi caturāsavogha-yoga-kāyagantha-agati-taṇhuppāda-sallupādāna-viññāṇaṭṭhiti-apariññādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo. Tathā catūhi satipaṭṭhānehi catubbidhajhāna-vihārādhiṭṭhāna-sukhabhāgiyadhamma-appamaññā-sammappadhāna-iddhipādā- divasena vodānapakkho netabboti. Ayaṃ sīhavikkīḷitassa nayassa bhūmi.
4-5. 方向观察与钩棒两种理趣的注释巴利
4-5. Disālocana-aṅkusanayadvayavaṇṇanā
不过,只要这三种义理方式能够成立,那么按通行的说法,这两种理趣自然也就成立了。就像这样,对义理方式所对应的、成为方向的法进行观察,就是“方向观察”;把它们统摄起来,就是“钩”。因此应当知道,这五种理趣都是被运用的。巴利
Imesaṃ pana tiṇṇaṃ atthanayānaṃ siddhiyā vohārena nayadvayaṃ siddhameva hoti. Tathā hi atthanayānaṃ disābhūtadhammānaṃ samālocanaṃ disālocanaṃ, tesaṃ samānayanaṃ aṅkusoti pañcapi nayā niyuttāti veditabbā.
《教法发趣论》的注释巴利
Sāsanapaṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
这部经在十六种经的发趣分类里,属于杂染、决择、学者这一类,也可以归入一切这一类,因为在《一切法根本经》里,用“一切法”这个说法已经把世间善法也包括进去了。不过在二十八种经的发趣分类里,应当知道,这部经是以世间和出世间一切法为所依、属于智所应了知的范畴,应当见、应当修,是自说语,应当记说,涉及善与不善,有开许也有遮止。巴利
Idañca suttaṃ soḷasavidhe suttantapaṭṭhāne saṃkilesanibbedhāsekkhabhāgiyaṃ, sabbabhāgiyameva vā ‘‘sabbadhammamūlapariyāya’’nti ettha sabbadhammaggahaṇena lokiyakusalānampi saṅgahitattā. Aṭṭhavīsatividhena pana suttantapaṭṭhāne lokiyalokuttarasabbadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ ñāṇañeyyaṃ dassanabhāvanaṃ sakavacanaṃ vissajjanīyaṃ kusalākusalaṃ anuññātaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ cāti veditabbaṃ.
《一切漏经》的注释巴利
2. Sabbāsavasuttavaṇṇanā
14 14. 对未出现过词的解释:以解释含义的方式,对前面没有提到的、未曾出现的新词作解释,也就是分析它的含义。因为已经说过“舍弃了又反复回来的含义”。“曾住的住处”:是过去曾住的住处;或者是在住处出生、生起的,就叫曾住的住处,意思是在那里建造的。就像迦干提、马干提、憍赏弥:迦干仙人的住处所建的城市叫迦干提,马干仙人的住处所建的城市叫马干提,库萨子的住处所建的城市叫憍赏弥,同样地说明舍卫城。拿来靠近而可受用,所以是upabhogo(受用),是有识之物。遍取一切时常可受用,所以是paribhogo(享用),是衣服、卧具等无识之物。这里一切义都具足,故以词源方式说明sāvatthī一词的成立。“与商队相遇”:与商队之城的相遇,即商队进入该城之义。被商队之人询问。巴利
14.Apubbapadavaṇṇanāti atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena heṭṭhā aggahitatāya apubbassa abhinavassa padassa vaṇṇanā atthavibhajanā. ‘‘Hitvā punappunāgatamattha’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Nivāsaṭṭhānabhūtā bhūtapubbanivāsaṭṭhānabhūtā, nivāsaṭṭhāne vā bhūtā nibbattā nivāsaṭṭhānabhūtā, tattha māpitāti attho. Yathā kākandī mākandī kosambīti yathā kākandassa isino nivāsaṭṭhāne māpitā nagarī kākandī, mākandassa nivāsaṭṭhāne māpitā mākandī, kusambassanivāsaṭṭhāne māpitā kosambīti vuccati, evaṃ sāvatthīti dasseti. Upanetvā samīpe katvā bhuñjitabbato upabhogo, saviññāṇakavatthu. Parito sabbadā bhuñjitabbato paribhogo, nivāsanapārupanādi aviññāṇakavatthu. Sabbamettha atthīti niruttinayena sāvatthī-saddasiddhimāha. Satthasamāyogeti satthassa nagariyā samāgame, satthe taṃ nagaraṃ upagateti attho. Pucchite satthikajanehi.
“聚集”是指妥善积存。“悦意”是指城内和城外的地形与园林景观都令人欢喜。“好看”是指街道布局的整齐和殿堂楼阁等的庄严,看起来漂亮、值得观赏。“令人心生欢喜”是指受用物和资具的丰足以及居住的安乐,让长期住在这里的人和其它众生都心生欢喜。十种声音,就是象声、马声、车声、鼓声、螺声、腰鼓声、琵琶声、歌声、铙钹声,还有“来吃、来喝、来嚼”这样的招呼声。由于这十种声音,“不远离”就是说不安静,意思是时时刻刻都在喧闹。巴利
Samohitanti sannicitaṃ. Rammanti anto bahi ca bhūmibhāgasampattiyā ceva ārāmuyyānasampattiyā ca ramaṇīyaṃ. Dassaneyyanti visikhāsannivesasampattiyā ceva pāsādakūṭāgārādisampattiyā ca dassanīyaṃ passitabbayuttaṃ. Upabhogaparibhogavatthusampattiyā ceva nivāsasukhatāya ca nibaddhavāsaṃ vasantānaṃ itaresañca sattānaṃ manaṃ rametīti manoramaṃ. Dasahi saddehīti hatthisaddo, assa-ratha-bheri-saṅkha-mudiṅga-vīṇā-gīta sammatāḷasaddo, asnātha-pivatha-khādathāti-saddoti imehi dasahi saddehi. Avivittanti na vivittaṃ, sabbakālaṃ ghositanti attho.
达到增长和广大:住在那里的众生增长,城市也随之增长;由于这种增长而达到广大,意思是人口众多、人群密集。因为财富和用具充足而繁荣。因为一切时候都容易得到食物而丰饶。甚至就连吃残食的人,所有贫穷、困苦、乞讨的人,也都能随自己的愿望在那里得到满足,感到欢喜,更何况那些有权势的人呢——为了说明这一点,又说“令人愉悦的”。如阿喇咖曼达城:在《阿塔那塔经》等经典中,多闻天王有十座城市,其中有一座名叫阿喇咖曼达,世间就称它为“阿罗迦”。就像这座有福之人所居的城市,因为园林等令人欢喜而具足美妙,舍卫城也是如此,所以说“如阿喇咖曼达城”。诸天神:指多闻天王部属的四大王天众诸天神。巴利
Vuddhiṃ vepullataṃ pattanti tannivāsī sattavuddhiyā vuddhiṃ, tāya parivuddhitāyeva vipulabhāvaṃ pattaṃ, bahujanaṃ ākiṇṇamanussanti attho. Vittūpakaraṇasamiddhiyā iddhaṃ. Sabbakālaṃ subhikkhabhāvena phītaṃ. Antamaso vighāsāde upādāya sabbesaṃ kapaṇaddhikavanibbakayācakānampi icchi tatthanipphattiyā manuññaṃ jātaṃ, pageva issariye ṭhitānanti dassanatthaṃ puna ‘‘manorama’’nti vuttaṃ. Aḷakamandāvāti āṭānāṭādīsu dasasu vessavaṇamahārājassa nagarīsu aḷakamandā nāma ekā nagarī, yā loke aḷākā eva vuccati . Sā yathā puññakammīnaṃ āvāsabhūtā ārāmarāmaṇeyyakādinā sobhaggappattā, evaṃ sāvatthīpīti vuttaṃ ‘‘aḷakamandāvā’’ti. Devānanti vessavaṇapakkhiyānaṃ cātumahārājikadevānaṃ.
胜者这个词,通过这里显示出jeta这个词是主动者义,就像sota一词是听者义一样。所谓王,是指波斯匿王、憍萨罗王。把国王取得的胜利安在王子身上,说王子因为战胜而被称为祇陀。又通过吉祥语等说法,显示在最胜这个意义上用了祇陀一词。一切欲乐成就,意思是因为一切受用和资具都丰足,所以财富圆满。虽然富有,但悭吝的人什么也不施舍,所以接着说离垢无悭吝,意思是没有贪、嗔等染污,也没有悭吝。虽然富有且不悭吝,但若缺乏慈悲、信等功德,也不会把自己的财物施给别人,所以说具足慈悲等功德。所谓以此,是指以给无依者的团食。然而从词义上说,因为值得施与,所以无依者的团食在任何时候都为他准备着,这是他的给孤独。以五种坐卧具支圆满:不太远、不太近,方便来往是一支,白天不喧闹,夜晚少声少响是一支,少虻蚊风热蛇触是一支,在那坐卧处居住时,轻易生起衣……等资具是一支,在那坐卧处,有长老比丘、多闻者居住是一支,如此以这五种坐卧具支圆满。如果祇园是这样,是给孤独长者的园林,所以说他确实等。巴利
Jinātīti iminā sota-saddo viya kattusādhano jeta-saddoti dasseti. Raññāti pasenadikosalarājena. Rājagataṃ jayaṃ āropetvā kumāro jitavāti jetoti vutto. Maṅgalakabyatāyātiādinā ‘‘jeyyo’’ti etasmiṃ atthe ‘‘jeto’’ti vuttanti dasseti. Sabbakāmasamiddhitāyāti sabbehi upabhogaparibhogavatthūhi phītabhāvena vibhavasampannatāyāti attho. Samiddhāpi maccharino kiñci na dentīti āha ‘‘vigatamalamaccheratāyā’’ti, rāgadosādimalānañceva macchariyassa ca abhāvenāti attho. Samiddhā amaccharinopi ca karuṇāsaddhādiguṇavirahitā attano santakaṃ paresaṃ na dadeyyunti āha ‘‘karuṇādiguṇasamaṅgitāya cā’’ti. Tenāti anāthānaṃ piṇḍadānena. Saddatthato pana dātabbabhāvena sabbakālaṃ upaṭṭhapito anāthānaṃ piṇḍo etassa atthīti anāthapiṇḍiko. Pañcavidhasenāsanaṅgasampattiyāti ‘‘nātidūraṃ naccāsannaṃ gamanāgamanasampanna’’nti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘‘divā appākiṇṇaṃ rattiṃ appasaddaṃ appanigghosa’’nti ekaṃ, ‘‘appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassa’’nti ekaṃ, ‘‘tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane viharantassa appakasirena uppajjanti cīvara…pe… parikkhārā’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane therā bhikkhū viharanti bahussutā’’ti ekaṃ, evametehi pañcavidhasenāsanaṅgehi sampannatāya. Yadi jetavanaṃ tathaṃ anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmoti āha ‘‘so hī’’tiādi.
从买下的时候起,那片树林就已经属于给孤独长者了,那为什么还要用两个人的名字来合称呢?所以接着就说“祇园”等等。有人说:“虽然那块地是长者用千万金铺地买下的,但树并没有被祇陀王子卖掉,所以这才得到了‘祇园’这个叫法。”巴利
Kītakālato paṭṭhāya anāthapiṇḍikasseva taṃ vanaṃ, atha kasmā ubhinnaṃ parikittananti āha ‘‘jetavane’’tiādi. ‘‘Yadipi so bhūmibhāgo koṭisantharena mahāseṭṭhinā kīto, rukkhā pana jetena na vikkītāti jetavananti vattabbataṃ labhī’’ti vadanti.
有人问:世尊为什么要说这部经?这是就“安立此经”的用意发问。因为一般来说,世尊说法的因缘本来就是明摆着的。那么,这里所谓“安立此经”又是指什么呢?是指世尊自己的心意倾向。有些老师认为:世尊并没有受别人劝请,而是随自己的心意宣说了这部经。但也有些老师认为:世尊是因为看出当时比丘们内心有染污,心想“这些比丘通过这次开示净除内心的染污之后,就能走向漏尽”,所以才开始了这次开示,因此这属于随他人的心意。然而这两种说法都是合理的。因为自己的心意倾向等与结合之别的可能性,前面已经说明了。这里说的“那些比丘”,就是指那时领受佛法的比丘们;“净化染污”,就是指从止与观的垢染中净化其心。因为世尊首先以渐次说法等修行方法去除垢染,然后才宣说无上教法,就像先把田里的树桩、荆棘、草丛等清除掉再耕作一样,因此,其意趣是:没有先讲业处,而是以这渐次的开示来进行说法。巴利
Kasmā idaṃ suttamabhāsīti kathetukamyatāya suttanikkhepaṃ pucchati. Sāmaññato hi bhagavato desanākāraṇaṃ pākaṭamevāti. Ko panāyaṃ suttanikkhepoti? Attajjhāsayo. Parehi anajjhiṭṭho eva hi bhagavā attano ajjhāsayena imaṃ suttaṃ desetīti ācariyā. Yasmā panesa bhikkhūnaṃ upakkiliṭṭhacittataṃ viditvā ‘‘ime bhikkhū imāya desanāya upakkilesavisodhanaṃ katvā āsavakkhayāya paṭipajjissantī’’ti ayaṃ desanā āraddhā, tasmā parajjhāsayoti apare. Ubhayampi pana yuttaṃ. Attajjhāsayādīnañhi saṃsaggabhedassa sambhavo heṭṭhā dassitovāti. Tesaṃ bhikkhūnanti tadā dhammapaṭiggāhatabhikkhūnaṃ. Upakkilesavisodhananti samathavipassanupakkilesato cittassa visodhanaṃ. Paṭhamañhi bhagavā anupubbikathādinā paṭipattiyā saṃkilesaṃ nīharitvā pacchā sāmukkaṃsikaṃ desanaṃ deseti khette khāṇukaṇṭakagumbādike avaharitvā kasanaṃ viya, tasmā kammaṭṭhānameva avatvā imāya anupubbiyā desanā pavattāti adhippāyo.
成为律仪:即戒律仪等律仪,其本质是防护,是一种因;但从意义上看,应当知道它指的就是见等。被防护:指以不令生起的方式而正确地防护,或者说,以一切方式被遮止。由于这样的状态关闭了生起的门,所以被称为封闭,因此说“成为关闭者”。以上说明了不究竟的律仪是究竟律仪的因;现在要说明究竟律仪本身:当那种见等存在时,本该生起的诸漏不再生起,这种不生起就称为灭、尽、断,从意义上说,那只是不再转起而已,而那个见等就是它的因。因此说:“由于那个因,那些漏达到称为不生与灭的尽,被断除而不再转起;那个因就是它的因,这就是它的含义。”巴利
Saṃvarabhūtanti sīlasaṃvarādisaṃvarabhūtaṃ saṃvaraṇasabhāvaṃ kāraṇaṃ, taṃ pana atthato dassanādi evāti veditabbaṃ. Saṃvaritāti pavattituṃ appadānavasena sammā, sabbathā vā vāritā. Evaṃbhūtā ca yasmā pavattidvārapidhānena pihitā nāma honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘vidahitā hutvā’’ti. Evaṃ accantikassa saṃvarassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ anaccantikaṃ saṃvaraṃ dassetvā idāni accantikameva saṃvaraṃ dassento yasmiṃ dassanādimhi sati uppajjanārahā āsavā na uppajjanti, so tesaṃ anuppādo nirodho khayo pahānanti ca vuccamāno atthato appavattimattanti tassa ca dassanādi kāraṇanti āha ‘‘yena kāraṇena anuppādanirodhasaṅkhātaṃ khayaṃ gacchanti pahīyanti nappavattanti, taṃ kāraṇanti attho’’ti.
从眼门……乃至从意门:在眼识等心路以及紧随其后的意识心路中,虽然善心等也会生起活动,但只有欲漏等烦恼,像脓从疮口流出那样,以不断淌出不净的方式流泻,所以只有它们才被称为“漏”。在这里,“漏”这个词确实是固定用来指那种流出的不净。就法而言,说到“直到种姓心为止”,是因为在种姓心之后,道心和果心中它们不再生起。这些漏以所缘的方式在诸法中运行,不会越过种姓心之后的范围。有人问:难道种姓心之后的有分心等不也以法为所缘而生起吗?不是的。因为有分心等所缘取的,是先前已经缘取过的世间法,而这些法仍然属于有漏,所以早已被包含在之前的范围内,并不存在越过种姓心之后的情况。这里应当知道,说到“种姓心”,实际上已经包含了种姓心、净心、果等至的前行和预备心。或者,这里只是以初道的前行种姓心作为代表,来划定一个界限。从此之后,在其余道心的道心路、等至心路,以及道心和果心与涅槃中,诸漏的生起都被遮止了,应当这样理解。“流动”的意思是:它们运行、前进,以造作所缘的方式生起。前缀“ā”有“直到”的意思,而“直到”又分为两种:界限和遍越。其中,把界限作用排除在外而运行,比如“雨下到华氏城为止”。遍越则是遍及作用而运行,比如“世尊的声名远播到有顶天”。这里取的是遍越义的“ā”,所以说“有内含之义”。巴利
Cakkhutopi…pe… manatopīti (dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 14-19) cakkhuviññāṇādivīthīsu tadanugatamanoviññāṇavīthīsu ca kiñcāpi kusalādīnampi pavatti atthi, kāmāsavādayo eva pana vaṇato yūsaṃ viya paggharaṇakaasucibhāvena sandanti, tasmā te eva ‘‘āsavā’’ti vuccanti. Tattha hi paggharaṇaasucimhi niruḷho āsava-saddoti. Dhammato yāva gotrabhunti tato paraṃ maggaphalesu appavattanato vuttaṃ. Ete hi ārammaṇavasena dhamme gacchantā tato paraṃ na gacchanti. Nanu tato paraṃ bhavaṅgādīnipi gacchantīti ce? Na, tesampi pubbe ālambitesu lokiyadhammesu sāsavabhāvena antogadhattā tato paratābhāvato. Ettha ca gotrabhuvacanena gotrabhuvodānaphalasamāpattipurecārikaparikammāni vuttānīti veditabbāni. Paṭhamamaggapurecārikameva vā gotrabhu avadhinidassanabhāvena gahitaṃ, tato paraṃ pana maggaphalasamānatāya aññesu maggesu maggavīthiyaṃ samāpattivīthiyaṃ nirodhānantarañca pavattamānesu phalesu nibbāne ca āsavānaṃ pavatti nivāritāti veditabbaṃ. Savantīti gacchanti, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattantīti attho. Avadhiattho ā-kāro, avadhi ca mariyādābhividhibhedato duvidho. Tattha mariyādaṃ kiriyaṃ bahi katvā pavattati yathā ‘‘āpāṭaliputtā vuṭṭho devo’’ti. Abhividhi pana kiriyaṃ byāpetvā pavattati yathā ‘‘ābhavaggā bhagavato yaso pavattatī’’ti. Abhividhiattho cāyaṃ ā-kāro idha gahitoti vuttaṃ ‘‘antokaraṇattho’’ti.
“酒等”中的“等”字,应当理解为也包括了辛度瓦酒、阿丹巴利迦酒、迦波提迦酒等。“久住”的意思是长期被包围、是旧有的状态。“无明还不存在……”等处,其中的“等”字含摄了《增支部》10.62 中“诸比丘,存在的渴爱,其前际不可知”这部经。由于已经说明了无明漏和有漏是久远以来就存在的,那么与它们性质相同的欲漏,其久远存在也就自然被说明了。再者,当慢等其他所说的法以空间和所缘为条件而转起时,以执取“我”“我所”等方式遍满一切,以令人陶醉的作用而与漏相似——这些特征只属于这些烦恼,而不属于其他法。因此应当知道,“漏”这个词是唯独固定用在它们身上的。在这里,不应认为“见漏”没有被包含进来,因为就像对“有”的渴爱一样,对“有”的邪见也已经被“有漏”这个词所摄取了。“长久”是因为无始以来。“流出”的意思是产生果报。事实上,没有任何一种轮回的痛苦能够在没有漏的情况下生起。这里的“前三种”是指在这四种义释中,前三种。这里的“其中”是指在那些经与论母的语句中。在那里,它们只适用于烦恼,因为所说的三种义理在烦恼中是可能的。最后一种“长久或流出轮回之苦”是所说的词源解释。它也适用于业,因为产生痛苦是烦恼与业所共通的。巴利
Madirādayoti ādi-saddena sindhavakādambarikāpotikādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Cirapārivāsiyaṭṭho viraparivutthatā purāṇabhāvo. Avijjā nāhosītiādīti ettha ādi-saddena ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati bhavataṇhāyā’’ti (a. ni. 10.62) idaṃ suttaṃ saṅgahitaṃ. Avijjāsavabhavāsavānaṃ ciraparivutthatāya dassitāya tabbhāvabhāvino kāmāsavassa ciraparivutthatā dassitāva hoti. Aññesu ca yathāvutte dhamme okāsañca ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānesu mānādīsu vijjamānesu attattaniyādiggāhavasena abhibyāpanaṃ madakaraṇavasena āsavasadisatā ca etesaṃyeva, na aññesanti etesveva āsava-saddo niruḷhoti daṭṭhabbo. Na cettha diṭṭhāsavo nāgatoti gahetabbaṃ bhavataṇhāya viya bhavadiṭṭhiyāpi bhavāsavaggahaṇeneva gahitattā. Āyataṃ anādikālikattā. Pasavantīti phalanti. Na hi taṃ kiñci saṃsāradukkhaṃ atthi, yaṃ āsavehi vinā uppajjeyya. Purimāni cetthāti ettha etesu catūsu atthavitappesu purimāni tīṇi. Yatthāti yesu suttābhidhammapadesesu. Tattha yujjanti kilesesuyeva yathāvuttassa atthattayassa sambhavato. Pacchimaṃ ‘‘āyataṃ vā saṃsāradukkhaṃ savantī’’ti vuttanibbacanaṃ. Kammepi yujjati dukkhappasavanassa kilesakammasādhāraṇattā.
“见法”指的是当下亲证的五蕴;“现法所生”指的是在现法中存在的。“成为争论根源的”指的是成为争论根本原因的那些法:忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、诳、谄、顽固、激愤、慢、过慢。巴利
Diṭṭhadhammā vuccanti paccakkhabhūtā khandhā, diṭṭhadhamme bhavā diṭṭhadhammikā. Vivādamūlabhūtāti vivādassa mūlakāraṇabhūtā kodhūpanāha-makkha-paḷāsa-issā-macchariya-māyā-sāṭheyya-thambha-sārambha-mānātimānā.
“以那种漏,我或许能投生到天界”——这里的意思是:以那种属于业与烦恼的漏,我或许能在诸天中投生、受生。应这样连接理解。“或者成为乾闼婆,即能在空中飞行的众生”——这句要转换语法格位后理解为我或许能成为乾闼婆,即那些能在空中飞行的众生。在这里,“天”这个词已经涵盖了除夜叉和乾闼婆形态之外的所有天道众生。“以及其余的不善法”——意思是:除了不善业之外,其余的不善法也称为漏。应这样连接理解。巴利
Yena devūpapatyassāti yena kammakilesappakārena āsavena devesu upapatti nibbatti assa mayhanti sambandho. Gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo ākāsacārī assanti vibhattiṃ pariṇāmetvā yojetabbaṃ. Ettha ca yakkhagandhabbatāya vinimuttā sabbā devagati devaggahaṇena gahitā. Avasesā ca akusalā dhammāti akusalakammato avasesā akusalā dhammā āsavāti āgatāti sambandho.
“为了遮止”就是禁止、阻挡的意思。“他人的谴责……等等灾祸”——这是说:如果世尊不制定学处,那么由于有人亲近恶法、不与取、杀生等,就会产生他人谴责等种种现世可见的损害;还有因为那些恶行而投生到地狱等处,遭受五种束缚、种种刑罚等巨大痛苦之类的损害。这段话就是针对这些损害而说的。“而这些”——指的是欲贪等烦恼、三界范围内的业,以及他人谴责等灾祸,这些都属于漏的类别。“在何处”——是指在律藏等典籍的哪些段落中。“如何”——是指以两种等方式,以及在其他经典中被提到的。应当这样连接起来理解。巴利
Paṭighātāyāti paṭisedhanāya. Parūpavā…pe… upaddavāti idaṃ yadi bhagavā sikkhāpadaṃ na paññapeyya, tato asaddhammappaṭisevanaadinnādānapāṇātipātādihetu ye uppajjeyyuṃ parūpavādādayo diṭṭhadhammikā nānappakārā anatthā, ye ca tannimittā eva nirayādīsu nibbattassa pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇādivasena mahādukkhānubhavādippakārā anatthā, te sandhāya vuttaṃ. Te paneteti ete kāmarāgādikilesa-tebhūmakakammaparūpavādādiupaddavappakārā āsavā. Yatthāti yasmiṃ vinayādipāḷipadese. Yathāti yena duvidhādippakārena aññesu ca suttantesu āgatāti sambandho.
“导向地狱”就是指会把人引向地狱的(漏)。这在《六集·应供经》里说到。在那里,漏以六种方式出现。因为“漏”这个词所指的含义有种种分类,所以借用分类的方式,在“漏”这个词项下说有不同的种类,因此称为“漏品”。或者,“品”这个词有“部分”的意思,那么“漏品”就是指漏的种类,也就是名称上的部分或含义上的部分。巴利
Nirayaṃ gamentīti nirayagāminiyā. Chakkanipāte āhuneyyasutte. Tattha hi āsavā chadhā āgatā āsava-saddābhidheyyassa atthassa pabhedopacārena āsava-pade pabhedoti vutto, koṭṭhāsattho vā pada-saddoti āsavapadeti āsavappakāre saddakoṭṭhāse atthakoṭṭhāse vāti attho.
“因为这样”的意思是:因此,防护就是关闭、遮挡,不让它生起;正是由于这个原因。当所指是戒等律仪时,因为它们在“不让生起”这一点上都具有遮挡的共同性质,所以也举了“关上门”作为例子。“戒律仪”等这段话,虽然在前面解释《根本法门经》时已经说过,但为了把这部经的含义完整地讲清楚,所以又再说一次。戒、念、慧具有防护的意义,这当然是恰当的,因为经典里就是这样说的;但忍耐和精进又怎么能成为防护呢?于是说“而它们……”等等。它的意思是:虽然在详细解释“他能忍耐……寒冷”“对已生起的欲贪寻思,他不容忍”这些地方,并没有直接出现忍耐和精进是“防护”的同义说法,但在“一切漏的防护”这一总纲中,它们已经被防护这一说法包含进去了,所以忍耐和精进确实具有防护的意义。巴利
Tathāhīti tasmā saṃvaraṇaṃ pidahanaṃ pavattituṃ appadānaṃ, teneva kāraṇenāti attho. Sīlādisaṃvare adhippete pavattituṃ appadānavasena thakanabhāvasāmaññato dvāraṃ saṃvaritvāti gehadvārasaṃvaraṇampi udāhaṭaṃ. Sīlasaṃvarotiādi heṭṭhā mūlapariyāyavaṇṇanāya vuttampi imassa suttassa atthavaṇṇanaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā vattukāmo puna vadati. Yuttaṃ tāva sīlasatiñāṇānaṃ saṃvarattho pāḷiyaṃ tathā āgatattā, khantivīriyānaṃ pana kathanti āha ‘‘tesañcā’’tiādi. Tassattho – yadipi ‘‘khamo hoti…pe… sītassa uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādiniddese khantivīriyānaṃ saṃvarapariyāyo nāgato, uddese pana sabbāsavasaṃvarapariyāyanti saṃvarapariyāyena gahitattā attheva tesaṃ saṃvarabhāvoti.
前面已经通过不同的经文说明戒、念、慧具有防护的性质,现在为了说明这一点也被这部经所涵盖,所以说了“再者”等话。忍耐和精进的防护,已经通过“能忍耐寒冷”等经文显示过了。至于“那不合适的坐卧处,那不合适的行境”,这里指的是戒防护。也就是经文中“对于那类……”所说的,那些不合适、对象不固定、隐蔽的坐卧处,以及前面所说的妓女等不合适的行境;而经文里说的“经过简择、如理作意而回避”,这种回避就是这部经中所说的戒防护,这就是它的意思。因为回避不合适的坐卧处,就等于说回避了不正行;回避不正行和不合适的行境,就是具备正行的戒防护。正因为这样,世尊在分别解说巴帝摩卡防护、说明“他安住于具足巴帝摩卡防护”时,为了显示正行和行境的圆满,也用“有不正行,有不合适的行境”等方式,把不正行和不合适的行境分别开示出来。这里应当理解为以部分显示整体,就像以大海或山岳的一部分来代表整个大海或山岳一样。巴利
Pubbe sīlasatiñāṇānaṃ pāṭhantarena saṃvarabhāvo dassitoti idāni taṃ imināpi suttena gahitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Khantivīriyasaṃvarā vuttāyeva ‘‘khamo hoti sītassā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.14) pāḷiyā dassanavasena. ‘‘Tañca anāsanaṃ, tañca agocara’’nti ayaṃ panettha sīlasaṃvaroti tañca ‘‘yathārūpe’’tiādinā vuttaṃ ayuttaṃ aniyatavatthukaṃ raho paṭicchannāsanaṃ, tañca yathāvuttaṃ ayuttaṃ vesiyādigocaraṃ, ‘‘paṭisaṅkhāyoniso parivajjetī’’ti āgataṃ yaṃ parivajjanaṃ, ayaṃ pana ettha etasmiṃ sutte āgato sīlasaṃvaroti attho. Anāsanaparivajjanena hi anācāraparivajjanaṃ vuttaṃ, anācārāgocaraparivajjanaṃ cārittasīlatāyasīlasaṃvaro. Tathā hi bhagavatā ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatī’’ti (vibha. 508) sīlasaṃvaravibhajane ācāragocarasampattiṃ dassentena ‘‘atthi anācāro, atthi agocaro’’tiādinā (vibha. 513, 514) anācārāgocarā vibhajitvā dassitā. Idañca ekadesena samudāyanidassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ samuddapabbatanidassanaṃ viya.
对于“于一切处简择智防护”这句话,这里应当说:“如理作意,就是简择的智防护。”因为在讲见所断的部分里并没有提到“简择”,只说了“如理作意”。不过,如理作意从实质上说就是简择的智防护;如果按这个意思来理解,这才合理。但有些论师说:“凡是出现‘在此简择、如理’的地方,那全都是就‘于一切处简择智防护’而说的。”按他们的看法,“如理作意‘这是苦’”这类情况就可能不被智防护所包含,而且“见、受用、修习是智防护”这个说法也会相违。所以,这里的含义应当按前面说的方式来理解。“于一切处简择智防护”这句话,显示的是在七种场合中的那种智就是智防护,而通过回避等方式所说的戒等,则是戒防护等,这就是它的意思。这样一来,各种防护就好像混在一起了。为了说明它们并不混杂,才说“以摄未摄”。意思是:回避的差别、防护、忍受、遣除,已经作为戒防护等的体性被纳入,现在再把还没纳入的也纳入其中。为了按它们各自的特性显示那些还没纳入的内容,就说“见、受用、修习”。巴利
Sabbattha paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaroti ettha ‘‘yonisomanasikāro, paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaro’’ti vattabbaṃ . Na hi dassanapahātabbaniddese paṭisaṅkhāgahaṇaṃ atthi, ‘‘yoniso manasi karotī’’ti pana vuttaṃ. Yonisomanasikaraṇampi atthato paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaramevāti evaṃ pana atthe gayhamāne yuttametaṃ siyā. Keci pana ‘‘yattha yattha ‘idha paṭisaṅkhā yoniso’ti āgataṃ , taṃ sabbaṃ sandhāya ‘sabbattha paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaro’ti vutta’’nti vadanti. Tesaṃ matena ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādikassa ñāṇasaṃvarena ca asaṅgaho siyā, ‘‘dassanaṃ paṭisevanā bhāvanā ca ñāṇasaṃvaro’’ti ca vacanaṃ virujjheyya, tasmā vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo. ‘‘Sabbattha paṭisaṅkhā ñāṇasaṃvaro’’ti iminā sattasupi ṭhānesu yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, so ñāṇasaṃvaroti parivajjanādivasena vuttā sīlādayo sīlasaṃvarādayoti ayamattho dassito. Evaṃ sati saṃvarānaṃ saṅkaro viya hotīti te asaṅkarato dassetuṃ ‘‘aggahitaggahaṇenā’’ti vuttaṃ parivajjanavisesasaṃvarādhivāsanavinodanānaṃ sīlasaṃvarādibhāvena gahitattā, tathā aggahitānaṃ gahaṇenāti attho. Te pana aggahite sarūpato dassento ‘‘dassanaṃ paṭisevanā bhāvanā’’ti āha.
通过这个以戒防护等作为手段、作为原因的(缘)。“诸法”指善法和不善法。意思是:以戒防护等作为俱生缘或亲依止缘,未生起的善法得以生起、产生;同样地,未灭尽的不善法得以灭尽、被灭除。不过,在巴利经文中,只说了“未生起的漏不生起,已生起的漏被断除”,只提到了不善法的“令不生起”和“断除”,并没有提到善法的生起等,不是吗?不应这样看。因为“比丘们,如理作意时”等经文也表明了善法的生起,这是由于此处以防护诸漏为重点来把握的。事实上,在末尾也以“那些应通过见而断除的漏,通过见而被断除”等方式,以断除诸漏为重点作了总结。巴利
Etena sīlasaṃvarādinā karaṇabhūtena, kāraṇabhūtena vā. Dhammāti kusalākusaladhammā. Sīlasaṃvarādinā hi sahajātakoṭiyā, upanissayakoṭiyā vā paccayabhūtena anuppannā kusalā dhammā uppattiṃ gacchanti uppajjanti, tathā aniruddhā akusalā dhammā nirodhaṃ gacchanti nirujjhantīti attho. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘anuppannā ceva āsavā na uppajjanti, uppannā ca āsavā pahīyantī’’ti akusaladhammānaṃ anuppādapahānāni eva vuttāni, na kusaladhammānaṃ uppādādayoti? Nayidamevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, ‘‘yoniso ca kho, bhikkhave, manasikaroto’’tiādinā kusaladhammānampi uppatti pakāsitāva āsavasaṃvaraṇassa padhānabhāvena gahitattā. Tathā hi pariyosānepi ‘‘ye āsavā dassanā pahātabbā, te dassanā pahīnā hontī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.28) āsavappahānameva padhānaṃ katvā nigamitaṃ.
15 对于“知者、见者”这句,这里的“见”也是指以慧眼来见,不是以肉眼或天眼来见,所以说“这两个词是同一个意思”。即便如此——即使这两个词意义相同——“智的特相”是指智的本性,也就是如实地通达对象的真实状态,所以说“了知的特相就是智”。“智的威力”指智的作用,也就是照亮所缘,所以说“以智令诸法开显”。又因为“知者、见者”是通过“知”和“见”这两个入口,以补特伽罗为安立基点来展开教说,所以说“是依智的特相和智的威力来指称补特伽罗”。所谓“知者、见者”,由于后面将讲到“如理作意与非如理作意”,所以这里是指对如理作意境的知,对非如理作意境的见。而且,这并非仅停留在所缘层面,而是着眼于生起与不生起的层面,旨在揭示漏灭尽之方便的本质,这样才合理,所以说:“如理作意……这是此处要义”。巴利
15.Jānato passatoti ettha dassanampi paññācakkhunāva dassanaṃ adhippetaṃ, na maṃsacakkhunā dibbacakkhunā vāti āha ‘‘dvepi padāni ekatthānī’’ti. Evaṃ santepīti padadvayassa ekatthatthepi. Ñāṇalakkhaṇanti ñāṇassa sabhāvaṃ, visayassa yathāsabhāvāvabodhananti attho. Tenāha ‘‘jānanalakkhaṇañhi ñāṇa’’nti. Ñāṇappabhāvanti ñāṇānubhāvaṃ, ñāṇakiccaṃ visayobhāsananti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘ñāṇena vivaṭe dhamme’’ti. ‘‘Jānato passato’’ti ca jānanadassanamukhena puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā pavattāti āha ‘‘ñāṇalakkhaṇaṃ ñāṇappabhāvaṃ upādāya puggalaṃ niddisatī’’ti. Jānato passatoti ‘‘yoniso ca manasikāraṃ ayoniso ca manasikāra’’nti vakkhamānattā yonisomanasikāravisayajānanaṃ, ayonisomanasikāravisayadassanaṃ. Tañca kho pana nesaṃ āsavānaṃ khayūpāyasabhāvassa adhippetattā uppādanānuppādanavasena na ārammaṇamattenāti ayamattho yuttoti āha ‘‘yonisomanasikāraṃ…pe… ayamettha sāro’’ti.
在说到“知者”时,这里所说的“知”,并不是指靠传闻、或仅凭推敲思量那种程度上的知;而是像眼识对色等那样,把如理作意和非如理作意直接呈现于前,再依它们生起的方面而说“见”。为了说明这个含义,才说了“见者”。这里的含义也可以这样理解。因为在其他地方,比如“如此知者、如此见者”“知者知、见者见”“如此知者、如此见者”“不知者、不见者”等用法中,这两个词都是用来显示智的作用的共通与差别的。有些论师,也就是无畏山寺的论师们,他们这样展开解释:“以定而知者是知者,以观而见者是见者”“知者知、见者见”“如此,知是止,见是观”等等。这些展开解释,在“知者”等经文语句所确定的意义范围内并不成立,因为经中已经说明,这里的知和见是以如理作意和非如理作意为对象的。巴利
‘‘Jānato’’ti vatvā jānanañca anussavākārapaṭivitakkamattavasena na idhādhippetaṃ, atha kho rūpādi viya cakkhuviññāṇena yonisomanasikārāyonisomanasikāre paccakkhe katvā tesaṃ uppādavasena dassananti imamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘passato’’ti vuttanti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Aññatthāpi hi ‘‘evaṃ jānato evaṃ passato (itivu. 102), jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati (ma. ni. 1.203), evaṃ jānantā evaṃ passantā (ma. ni. 1.407), ajānataṃ apassata’’nti ca ādīsu ñāṇakiccassa sāmaññavisesadīpanavasenetaṃ padadvayaṃ āgatanti. Kecīti abhayagirivāsisārasamāsācariyā. Te hi ‘‘samādhinā jānato vipassanāya passato jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati, evaṃ jānanā samatho, passanā vipassanā’’ti ca ādinā papañcenti. Teti papañcā. Imasmiṃ attheti ‘‘jānato’’tiādinayappavatte imasmiṃ suttapadaatthe niddhāriyamāne. Na yujjanti jānanadassanānaṃ yonisomanasikārāyonisomanasikāravisayabhāvassa pāḷiyaṃ vuttattā.
断漏,就是彻底断除诸漏。而所谓彻底断除,就是它们完全不生起、彻底灭尽、不复存在,所以说“诸漏的彻底灭尽、不再生起、灭尽之相,即无有”。随顺正直道者,是指因为断除了烦恼的邪曲和身邪曲等而变得正直,随念着带观智的下地诸道。对他而言,这就是学。在灭尽中,第一智生起;紧接着之后,生起另一种智,即正智。也就是说,在名为灭尽的最上道中,属于该道的智首先生起;紧接着之后,则是另一种智——阿拉汉果。虽然偈颂中只说了“于灭尽”,但依正断而言,因为诸漏已灭尽,所以道被称为漏尽,因此说“道被说为漏尽”。沙门,是指已寂灭罪恶的人,也就是诸漏已尽者。因此,这里的“诸漏尽”是就果的同义表达来说的;若依严格的实际含义,漏尽是指道,而果是依道所应证得的。由此也应理解为,涅槃也可被称为漏尽。巴利
Āsavappahānaṃ āsavānaṃ accantappahānaṃ. So pana nesaṃ anuppādo sabbena sabbaṃ khīṇatā abhāvo evāti āha ‘‘āsavānaṃ accantakhayamasamuppādaṃkhīṇākāraṃ natthibhāva’’nti. Ujumaggānusārinoti kilesavaṅkassa kāyavaṅkādīnañca pahānena ujubhūte savipassane heṭṭhimamagge anussarantassa. Tadeva hissa sikkhanaṃ. Khayasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tato aññā anantarāti khayasaṅkhāte aggamagge tappariyāpannameva ñāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ uppajjati , tadanantaraṃ pana aññaṃ arahattanti. Yadipi gāthāyaṃ ‘‘khayasmiṃ’’icceva vuttaṃ, samucchedavasena pana āsavehi khīṇotīti maggo khayoti vuccatīti āha ‘‘maggo āsavakkhayoti vutto’’ti. Samaṇoti samitapāpo adhippeto. So pana khīṇāsavo hotīti ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayā’’ti imassa phalapariyāyatā vuttā, nippariyāyena pana āsavakkhayo maggo, tena pattabbato phalaṃ. Eteneva nibbānassapi āsavakkhayabhāvo vuttoti veditabbo.
对于“知者、见者”这句话,这里要表达的是:只对知者、只对见者,这种限定才是所主张的,不是别的意思;因为如果换成别的说法,就失去了这种特殊性,也会导致不想要的结果。为了说明这个限定的果,才说“不是对不知者,不是对不见者”。对此又说:“那个既不知也不见的人,我不对他说。”意思是:通过这句话,这里意指被排除的不如理作意,同时也说明如理作意是漏尽的决定性原因。通过“不是对不知者,不是对不见者”这句话,那些邪见也被否定了。是哪些邪见呢?就是像“愚者和智者流转轮回之后,将会终结苦”、“众生没有因、没有缘就得以清净”这一类主张。在这些主张中,有些人认为仅凭高贵的出身投生、仅凭某种生存状态的投生就能使轮回清净;另一些人则认为是通过自在天、生主、时间等而使轮回清净。应当知道,这一切全都包括在“轮回等”这个说法里。巴利
‘‘Jānato passato’’ti jānato eva passato evāti evamettha niyamo icchito, na aññathā visesābhāvato aniṭṭhasādhanato cāti tassa niyamassa phalaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘no ajānato noapassato’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘yo pana na jānāti na passati, tassa neva vadāmīti attho’’ti. Iminā dūrīkatāyonisomanasikāro idhādhippeto, yonisomanasikāro ca āsavakkhayassa ekantikakāraṇanti dasseti. Etenāti ‘‘no ajānato no apassato’’ti vacanena. Te paṭikkhittāti ke pana teti? ‘‘Bāle ca paṇḍite ca sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karissanti (dī. ni. 1.168; ma. ni. 2.228), ahetū apaccayā sattā visujjhantī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.168; ma. ni. 2.227) evamādivādā. Tesu hi keci abhijātisaṅkantimattena bhavasaṅkantimattena ca saṃsārasuddhiṃ paṭijānanti, aññe issarapajāpatikālādivasena, tayidaṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘saṃsārādīhī’’ti ettheva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“前一组词”指的是“知者、见者”这一组词。这里说到了方法,从“漏尽”这个重点就能看出来。而“另一组词”指的是“不知者、不见者”这一组词。因为对诸漏的灭尽来说,真正的非方法恰恰就是:对如理作意和不如理作意都不知、不见。由于这个缘故,就谈不上如实修行,而是错误修行。
那么,难道借着“见者”这个词,当“见”被认可时,不如理作意就不会生起,所以前面就已经否定了非方法吗?并不是这样。因为即使不如理作意不生起,也可能成为方法;就像靠正念的力量,眼根等虽然被遮护却仍然生起一样,仅仅靠正知的力量,就不会有以“常”等颠倒方式产生的虚妄认知。所以他说“简要地……成为”。这里的“简要地”,是指以概括的方式来说,也就是不展开顺向和逆向的详细解说。
通过“知者”等词,因为只取了“智”,所以智……被显示出来。如果真是这样,那么“这个防护”等经文又怎么接得上呢?为了显示智的主导地位,才这样开示。这并没有过失。同样,在其他地方也有详细说明,比如“比丘们,我要为你们说神圣的正定,它带有前行,带有资具”。巴利
Purimena vā padadvayenāti ‘‘jānato, passato’’ti iminā padadvayena. Upāyo vutto ‘‘āsavakkhayassā’’ti adhikārato viññāyati. Imināti ‘‘no ajānato, no apassato’’ti iminā padadvayena. Anupāyo eva hi āsavānaṃ khayassa yadidaṃ yoniso ca ayoniso ca manasikārassa ajānanaṃ adassanañca, tena tathattāya appaṭipattito micchāpaṭipattito ca. Nanu ‘‘passato’’ti iminā ayonisomanasikāro yathā na uppajjati, evaṃ dassane adhippete purimeneva anupāyapaṭisedho vutto hotīti? Na hoti, ayonisomanasikārānuppādanassapi upāyabhāvato satibalena saṃvutacakkhundriyāditā viya sampajaññabaleneva niccādivasena abhūtajānanābhāvo hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhepena…pe… hotī’’ti. Tattha saṅkhepenāti samāsena, anvayato byatirekato ca vitthāraṃ akatvāti attho. Ñāṇaṃ…pe… dassitaṃ hoti ‘‘jānato’’tiādinā ñāṇasseva gahitattā. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘svāyaṃ saṃvaro’’tiādi kathaṃ nīyatīti? Ñāṇassa padhānabhāvadassanatthaṃ evamayaṃ desanā katāti nāyaṃ doso, tathā aññatthāpi ‘‘ariyaṃ vo bhikkhave sammāsamādhiṃ desessāmi saupanisaṃ saparikkhāra’’nti (ma. ni. 3.136) vitthāro.
“有贤善本性的人”就是指具有贤善实体的人。因为“dabba”(实体)一词,正如在“实体之物会毁灭,非实体之物则不灭”等语句中所说的那样。或者,“有贤善本性的人”是指本质坚实的人,也就是具有相应戒行与行为规范的人。正如经中所说:“贤善的人啊,贤善者并不会这样辩解。” “站在义务的前头而行”是指把义务当作首要之事,或者以职责为核心来行事。因为一个活命清净的比丘,如果为了那些不知道该怎么做的同梵行者,或者为了替自己遮挡风寒暑热等而制作伞盖等物品,这就叫作“站在义务的前头而行”。“不应说它不是立足处”是说:不应说它不是立足处,因为它是以作为能作依怙之法的亲依止之状态而存在。因为经中确实说过:“对于同梵行者们的各种大小事务,他都能善巧胜任。”等等。巴利
Dabbajātikoti dabbarūpo. So hi drabyoti vuccati ‘‘drabyaṃ vinassati nādrabya’’ntiādīsu. Dabbajātiko vā sārasabhāvo, sāruppasīlācāroti attho. Yathāha ‘‘na kho dabba dabbā evaṃ nibbeṭhentī’’ti (pārā. 384, 391; cūḷava. 193). Vattasīse ṭhatvāti vattaṃ uttamaṅgaṃ, dhuraṃ vā katvā. Yo hi parisuddhājīvo kātuṃ ajānantānaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ, attano vā vātātapādipaṭibāhanatthaṃ chattādīni karoti, so vattasīse ṭhatvā karoti nāma. Padaṭṭhānaṃ na hotīti na vattabbā nāthakaraṇadhammabhāvena upanissayabhāvato. Vuttañhi ‘‘yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṃ uccāvacāni kiccakaraṇīyāni, tattha dakkho hotī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.497).
“方便作意”是指作为善法生起的因的作意。“最初作意”是指那同一个作为道的作意。“于无常等上,以无常等方式”是指在具有无常、苦、不净、无我自性的诸法上,以“无常、苦、不净、无我”等这样的方式,也就是以不颠倒的自性——这是它的意思。或者说“随顺于谛”,是指随顺于谛现观的方式。“心的转向”等,是以果的名称来说那作为转向之缘、在它之前生起的意门善速行。因为依靠它,它就成为善法生起的亲依止。使有分心转向的,叫“转向”;一再地转向,叫“随转向”;从有分的所缘倾向其他所缘的,叫“倾向”;平等地注意那个所缘的,叫“等引”;把生起的心安置在所缘上的,叫“作意”。这就叫作具足方便作意和最初作意特征的如理作意,依靠它,一个人才能转向苦等圣谛。在不如理作意中,“与谛相违”是指不顺随于谛现观。其余部分应当按与如理作意相反的方式来理解。巴利
Upāyamanasikāroti kusaladhammappavattiyā kāraṇabhūto manasikāro. Pathamanasikāroti tassā eva maggabhūto manasikāro. Aniccādīsu aniccantiādināti aniccadukkhaasubhaanattasabhāvesu dhammesu ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ asubhaṃ anattā’’tiādinā eva nayena, aviparītasabhāvenāti attho. Saccānulomikena vāti saccābhisamayassa anulomavasena. Cittassa āvaṭṭanātiādinā āvaṭṭanāya paccayabhūtā tato purimuppannā manodvārikā kusalajavanappavatti phalavohārena tathā vuttā. Tassā hi vasena sā kusaluppattiyā upanissayo hoti. Āvajjanā hi bhavaṅgacittaṃ āvaṭṭayatīti āvaṭṭanā. Anu anu āvaṭṭetīti anvāvaṭṭanā. Bhavaṅgārammaṇato aññaṃ ābhujatīti ābhogo. Samannāharatīti samannāhāro. Tadevārammaṇaṃ attānaṃ anubandhitvā uppajjamānaṃ manasi karoti ṭhapetīti manasikāro. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ upāyapathamanasikāralakkhaṇo yonisomanasikāro nāma vuccati, yassa vasena puggalo dukkhādīni saccāni āvajjituṃ sakkoti . Ayonisomanasikāre saccapaṭikūlenāti saccābhisamayassa ananulomavasena. Sesaṃ yonisomanasikāre vuttavipariyāyena veditabbaṃ.
“相应”是指能成立再生的相应道理,也就是“原因”的意思。所以他说“因为……”等。“在这里”是指在“诸比丘,不如理……被舍断”这段经文里。“在那里”是指对文句的说明。那么,为什么在这里开示和解说的顺序被调换了呢?针对这个问难,他说“如理”等。在那里,因为“作意”这个词是两者共通的,所以他的意思是说:“首先,就用‘如理’和‘不如理’这两个词来说。”因为“如理”就是如理作意,“不如理”就是不如理作意,在此承接着前文,而且后文将会更详细地解说。纵然在不生起利益这一点上是共同的,可是为了说明:对诸有等当中的补特伽罗来说,这一点更为普遍;于是把前后顺序调换过来,以显示其差别。应当看到,这里举出了以船等为首的三种比喻。他们称水车为“被带来的汲水轮”。巴利
Yuttinti upapattisādhanayuttiṃ, hetunti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi. Etthāti ‘‘ayoniso bhikkhave…pe… pahīyantī’’ti etasmiṃ pāṭhe. Tatthāti vākyopaññāsanaṃ. Kasmā panettha ayamuddesaniddeso parivattoti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yoniso’’tiādi. Tattha manasikārapadaṃ dvinnaṃ sādhāraṇanti adhippāyena ‘‘yoniso ayonisoti imehi tāva dvīhi padehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yonisoti hi yonisomanasikāro, ayonisoti ca ayonisomanasikāro tattha anuvattanato vakkhamānattā ca. Satipi anatthuppattisāmaññe bhavādīsu puggalassa bahulisāmaññaṃ dassetvā taṃ parivattitvā visesadassanattaṃ nāvādi upamāttayaggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Cakkayantaṃ āhaṭaghaṭīyantanti vadanti.
“未生起”就是还没有产生。应当知道,这是就所缘的差别来说它没有产生,而不是就色所缘等所缘的共同性来说,也不是就漏本身来说。因此他说:“对于过去从未经验过的所缘……否则,在无始的轮回中,根本不存在所谓的‘未生起’的漏。”“处”是指有识和无识等不同分类的、令漏生起的原因。“所缘”是指作为所缘缘的色等。现在,为了说明即使就漏本身来说也能得到“未生起”这个角度,所以说了“即使是过去已经经验过的”等。“以本性清净”:因过去生中长时修习,烦恼已远离,以此成就的清净本性。巴利语的诵习是“诵习”,义理的讲述是“问难”。读诵是“学”,缝衣等新作是“新作”,止观相应是“如理作意”。“如此的”:以那样的“可意处”等作意等,贪漏等可能生起,以那样的。“漏的增长”应当就缠缚和增盛来了知,而那又由屡屡生起、数数修习而来,所以那些获得习行、达到多修者,践踏、遍满、覆盖、作黑暗,一再一再地生起,以同一相续的方式被称为“已生起而增长”。因此说:“一再一再生起的已生起者,被称为增长。”从此之外:从这之后,对于次第生起者的执为一,除此之外,由于刹那性,并没有所谓的增长。巴利
Anuppannāti anibbattā. Ārammaṇavisesavasena tassa anuppatti veditabbā, na rūpārammaṇādiārammaṇasāmaññena, nāpi āsavavasena. Tenāha ‘‘ananubhūtapubbaṃ ārammaṇaṃ…pe… aññathā hi anamatagge saṃsāre anuppannā nāma āsavā na santī’’ti. Vatthunti saviññāṇakāviññāṇakappabhedaṃ āsavuppattikāraṇaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ ārammaṇapaccayabhūtarūpādīni . Idāni āsavavasenapi anuppannapariyāyo labbhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘anubhūtapubbepī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pakatisuddhiyāti pubbacariyato kilesadūrībhāvasiddhāya suddhipakatitāya. Pāḷiyā uddisanaṃ uddeso, atthakathanaṃ paripucchā. Ajjhayanaṃ pariyatti, cīvarasibbādi navakammaṃ, samathavipassanānuyogo yonisomanasikāro. Tādisenāti yādisena ‘‘manuññavatthū’’timanasikārādinā kāmāsavādayo sambhaveyyuṃ, tādisena. Āsavānaṃ vaḍḍhi nāma pariyuṭṭhānatibbatāya veditabbā, sā ca abhiṇhuppattiyā bahulīkāratoti te laddhāsevanā bahulabhāvaṃ pattā maddantā pharantā chādentā andhākāraṃ karontā aparāparaṃ uppajjamānā ekasantānanayena ‘‘uppannā pavaḍḍhantī’’ti vuccanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ uppajjamānā uppannā pavaḍḍhantīti vuccantī’’ti. Ito aññathāti ito aparāparuppannānaṃ ekattaggahaṇato aññathā vaḍḍhi nāma natthi khaṇikabhāvato.
他说“而他知”,是为了说明不存在法掉举的状态。这里说的“确实是那个实际造作的人”,指的是真正与修行相应的人。接着用“然而对于任何人……”等话,把前面没有特别指出的道理,通过展示过去那位殊胜人物的修行方式,让它变得更加清楚,所以才说“就像住在曼陀罗园的玛哈帝萨长老那样”等等。因为这种事能成为同梵行者未来如此修行的因缘,所以才说出这样的例子来。“就在那里”:就是在曼陀罗园那里。“向导师告假之后”:为了去取业处而向自己的诵经导师告假之后。“礼敬导师之后”:礼敬给予业处的玛哈拉奇达长老之后。“诵经之路”:如已开始的诵经相续。据说那时他们只是以口诵令许多人共同诵经,然后以意随念的方式诵习法。在那里,这位长老因为智慧具足,对正在受持诵经的比丘们很有耐力,他“我现在已是不来,我还需要诵经做什么”这样不退缩,在第二天诵经时接近了导师。“已生而被断除”这里,说与已生相似的为“已生”,不是指现在存在的。因为对于现在的诸漏,以道断除是不可能的,所以说“然而那些……不存在”。现在已生的是具足三刹那的。对于它们的断除,不是通过修行;对于将要生起的,以摧毁其缘而令不生起,就是通过那种(道)断除。巴利
So ca jānātīti dhammuddhaccaviggahābhāvamāha. Kārakassevāti yuttayogasseva. Yassa panātiādinā anuddesikaṃ katvā vuttamatthaṃ purātanassa purisātisayassa paṭipattidassanena pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘maṇḍalārāmavāsīmahātissabhūtattherassa viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tañhi sabrahmacārīnaṃ āyatiṃ tathāpaṭipattikāraṇaṃ hoti, yato edisaṃ vatthu vuccati. Tasmiṃ yevāti maṇḍalārāmeyeva. Ācariyaṃ āpucchitvāti attano uddesācariyaṃ kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇatthaṃ gantuṃ āpucchitvā. Ācariyaṃ vanditvāti kammaṭṭhānadāyakaṃ mahārakkhitattheraṃ vanditvā. Uddesamagganti yathāāraddhaṃ uddesapabandhaṃ. Tadā kira mukhapāṭheneva bahū ekajjhaṃ uddisāpetvā manosajjhāyavasena dhammaṃ sajjhāyanti. Tatthāyaṃ thero paññavantatāya uddesaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhorayho, so ‘‘idānāhaṃ anāgāmī, kiṃ mayhaṃ uddesenā’’ti saṅkocaṃ anāpajjitvā dutiyadivase uddesakāle ācariyaṃ upasaṅkami. ‘‘Uppannā pahīyantī’’ti ettha uppannasadisā ‘‘uppannā’’ti vuttā, na paccuppannā. Na hi paccuppannesu āsavesu maggena pahānaṃ sambhavatīti āha ‘‘ye pana…pe… natthī’’ti. Vattamānuppannā khaṇattayasamaṅgino. Tesaṃ paṭipattiyā pahānaṃ natthi uppajjanārahānaṃ paccayaghātena anuppādanameva tāya pahānanti.
16 如果这样,那第二个词是做什么用的呢?取两个词,一方面是为了显示诸漏有已生和未生这两种可能情况,另一方面是为了按能断者的分类来显示所应断除的分类。因此他说“只取这一个词”。其他的:是指除了智之外,还有念防护等其他方式。见:这里的“见”是原因格,他用表示原因的具格“以见”来阐明这个意思。这个道理是相通的。以见:是指以入流道。因为那个道最先见到涅槃,所以被称为“见”。虽然种姓智更早见到,但它在见到之后并没有做断除烦恼这件该做的事,所以不被称为“见”。因为那种姓智是为道转向所缘的智,这里是从它也有涅槃为所缘的共通性来说的,而不是指它真正证悟了涅槃。因此,是由法眼一再地生起,未达到修习,这才称为“见”;而且法眼是透过遍知等作用来见四圣谛法,也就是现观。所以在这里,种姓智并不能成立为“见”。这个讨论在稍后的注释书里会被提到。一切处:是指“应通过防护断除”等各处。以防护:透过防护,这里的“防护”应知是指念防护。受用:透过它而受用,是指对于资具的知量。忍受:透过它而容忍,即是以忍耐的方式现起的无嗔,或是以那个为主的四种善蕴。回避:透过它而避开,便是以回避猛兽等的方式所生起的思,或是那样现起的四种善蕴。驱除:透过它去驱除、排除欲寻等,就是指善精进。由于以初道见到了四谛法而通过修习生起的,就是“修”,即是指其余的三道。因为那其余的道不会再见到任何先前没见过的,所以如此,见等各个词义应当这样来理解。巴利
16. Yadi evaṃ dutiyapadaṃ kimatthiyanti? Padadvayaggahaṇaṃ āsavānaṃ uppannānuppannabhāvasambhavadassanatthañceva pahāyakavibhāgena pahātabbavibhāgadassanatthañca. Tenāha ‘‘idameva padaṃ gahetvā’’ti. Aññampīti ñāṇato aññampi satisaṃvarādiṃ. Dassanāti idaṃ hetumhi nissakkavacananti dassanenāti hetumhi karaṇavacanena tadatthaṃ vivarati. Esa nayoti tamevatthaṃ atidisati. Dassanenāti sotāpattimaggena. So hi paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato ‘‘dassana’’nti vuccati. Yadipi taṃ gotrabhu paṭhamataraṃ passati, disvā pana kattabbakiccassa kilesappahānassa akaraṇato na taṃ dassananti vuccati. Āvajjanaṭṭhāniyañhi taṃ ñāṇaṃ maggassa, nibbānārammaṇattasāmaññena cetaṃ vuttaṃ, na nibbānapaṭivijjhanena, tasmā dhammacakkhu punappunaṃ nibbattanena bhāvanaṃ appattaṃ dassanaṃ nāma, dhammacakkhuñca pariññādikiccakaraṇavasena catusaccadhammadassanaṃ tadabhisamayoti nutthettha gotrabhussa dassanabhāvappatti . Ayañca vicāro parato aṭṭhakathāyameva (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.22) āgamissati. Sabbatthāti ‘‘saṃvarā pahātabbā’’tiādīsu. Saṃvarāti saṃvarena, ‘‘saṃvaro’’ti cettha satisaṃvaro veditabbo. Paṭisevati etenāti paṭisevanaṃ, paccayesu idamatthikatāñāṇaṃ. Adhivāseti khamati etāyāti adhivāsanā, sītādīnaṃ khamanākārena pavatto adoso, tappadhānā vā cattāro kusalakkhandhā. Parivajjeti etenāti parivajjanaṃ, vāḷamigādīnaṃ pariharaṇavasena pavattā cetanā, tathāpavattā vā cattāro kusalakkhandhā. Kāmavitakkādike vinodeti vitudati etenāti vinodanaṃ, kusalavīriyaṃ. Paṭhamamaggena diṭṭhe catusaccadhamme bhāvanāvasena uppajjanato bhāvanā, sesamaggattayaṃ. Na hi taṃ adiṭṭhapubbaṃ kiñci passati, evaṃ dassanādīnaṃ vacanattho veditabbo.
关于见道所断之漏的注释巴利
Dassanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
17 即使被善不善法取作所缘的那些所缘法,也只是通过转向这一入口才呈现出那样的状态。为了说明这一点,他在解释“应作意”这个词时,说的是“应被转向的”这个意思。因为能带来利益和安乐,所以值得作意,这就是“应作意的”;与此相反的就是“不应作意的”,所以他说“不应作意的,就是与此相反的那些”。在其他文句中也是如此,比如“于应作意法无知”等。因为对于善法,如果以美好、快乐、恒常等方式去作意,就会成为耽著等的原因,是有过失的,会带来不利和痛苦;对于不善法,如果以无常等方式去作意,就会成为厌离等的原因,是没有过失的,能带来利益和安乐。所以他说“从法本身来说,并没有固定规则”,但接着又说“从行相来说,却是有的”。巴利
17. Kusalākusaladhammehi ālambiyamānāpi ārammaṇadhammā āvajjanamukheneva tabbhāvaṃ gacchantīti dassento ‘‘manasikaraṇīye’’ti padassa ‘‘āvajjitabbe’’ti atthamāha. Hitasukhāvahabhāvena manasikaraṇaṃ arahantīti manasikaraṇīyā, tappaṭipakkhato amanasikaraṇīyāti āha ‘‘amanasikaraṇīyeti tabbiparīte’’ti. Sesapadesūti ‘‘manasikaraṇīye dhamme appajānanto’’tiādīsu. Yasmā kusaladhammesupi subhasukhaniccādivasena manasikāro assādanādihetutāya sāvajjo ahitadukkhāvaho akusaladhammesupi aniccādivasena manasikāro nibbidādihetutāya anavajjo hitasukhāvaho, tasmā ‘‘dhammato niyamo natthī’’ti vatvā ‘‘ākārato pana atthī’’ti āha.
“vā”这个词,在大多数情况下,比如在“mamaṃ vā hi bhikkhave, devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā”这类句子里,都是表示选择的意思,而不是表示并列。所以,为了说明它也可以表示并列,就举出了“yathā”等语句来展示。这样处理之后,这段经文就被引用来说明并列的含义了。巴利
Vā-saddo yebhuyyena ‘‘mamaṃ vā hi bhikkhave (dī. ni. 1.5, 6), devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.186; ma. ni. 2.79, 80) vikappattho diṭṭho, na samuccayatthoti tattha samuccayatthe payogaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā samuccayatthadīpakaṃ panetaṃ suttapadaṃ samudāhaṭaṃ.
欲漏,是指对被称为五种欲乐的诸欲生起的漏,所以称为欲漏。因此说“对五种欲乐的贪”。不过,如果排除有漏,那么把一切贪都说是欲漏,也许还说得通。在色有、无色有中,是指依业与投生的区别而分为两种的色有与无色有中的欲贪。禅那喜爱,是指对禅那的味著。有人以“这个地方很美,是恒常的、坚固的”等想法去味著时,生起伴随常见和断见的贪,这就是对有的漏,称为有漏。如此,因为一切恶见都归摄在常见和断见中,所以见漏已被有漏所摄,理由就是它属于与那些见相应的贪。这是论师的意图。不过另有一些论师说:“见漏也被无明漏所摄。”在这里,依照“有漏在四种与恶见不相应、伴随贪的心生起时生起”这句话,与见相应的贪到底是不是有漏,应该加以考察。其次,像“与欲俱行的想和作意”等处那样,如果“俱行”的意思是作为所缘的作用,那么把见漏归摄进有漏就无法成立了。因为,若没有与之相应等条件,就不适合说它被那者所摄。所以,按照前面所说的经文,与恶见相应的贪也应是欲漏,这样才说得通。因为,作为现世与来世之苦原因的欲漏等,也被分为两种。巴利
Kāmāsavoti pañcakāmaguṇasaṅkhāte kāme āsavo kāmāsavo. Tenāha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo’’ti. Bhavāsavaṃ pana ṭhapetvā sabbo lobho kāmāsavoti yuttaṃ siyā. Rūpārūpabhaveti kammupapattibhedato duvidhepi rūpārūpabhave chandarāgo. Jhānanikantīti jhānassādo. ‘‘Sundaramidaṃ ṭhānaṃ niccaṃ dhuva’’ntiādinā assādentassa uppajjamāno sassatucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhave āsavoti bhavāsavo. Evanti sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ sassatucchedadiṭṭhisaṅgahato bhavāsaveneva diṭṭhāsavo gahito taṃsahagatarāgatāyāti adhippāyo. Apare pana ‘‘diṭṭhāsavo avijjāsavena ca saṅgahito’’ti vadanti. Ettha ca ‘‘bhavāsavo catūsu diṭṭhigatavippayuttalobhasahagatacittuppādesu uppajjatī’’ti (dha. sa. 1465) vacanato diṭṭhisampayuttarāgassa bhavāsavabhāvo vicāretabbo, atha ‘‘kāmasahagatā saññāmanasikārā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.332) viya ārammaṇakaraṇattho sahagatattho, evaṃ sati bhavāsave diṭṭhāsavassa samodhānagamanaṃ kataṃ na siyā. Na hi tampayogatabbhāvādike asati taṃsaṅgaho yutto, tasmā yathāvuttapāḷiṃ anusārena diṭṭhigatasampayuttalobhopi kāmāsavoti yuttaṃ siyā. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikadukkhānañhi kāraṇabhūtā kāmāsavādayopi dvidhā vuttā.
在《阿毗达摩》(《法集论》1103)解释欲漏的地方,说“于诸欲中”,意思是:欲贪、见贪等的所缘,即属于三界的事欲。这个解释是说得通的。因为在那里生起的一切渴爱,并不能都得到“欲贪”等名称。然而,如果有一种贪既不属于欲漏也不属于有漏,那么,当它在与恶见不相应的心中生起时,与它相应的无明漏就成了不与漏相应,就像与忧、疑、掉举相应的法一样。这样一来,那种贪也应当被说成不与漏相应,正如“在与恶见不相应、有贪的四种心中,所生的痴可能与漏相应,也可能不与漏相应”这句话所说的那样。可是,根据“欲漏在八种有贪的心中生起”(《法集论》1465),以及“缘于欲漏而有见漏、无明漏”(《发趣论》3.3.109)这些说法,就不能说与见相应的贪不是欲漏。再说,即使贪欲和欲贪真有差别,那也只是二漏或一漏的问题,而不应该去考察贪欲的非漏性、以及非漏贪的存在。因为在阿毗达摩中,并没有第七问和第九问:“漏及非漏诸法,对于漏法,以及对于漏及非漏法,是因缘”(《发趣论》3.3.16-17)。而且在计数时也只说“因缘有七种”(《发趣论》3.3.40),没有说“九种”。然而,如果与见相应的贪中确实有非漏存在,那么第七问和第九问也应该得到解答,计数时也应该说“因缘有九种”,但并没有这样说。如果与见不相应的贪中确实有非漏存在,那么该说的也已经说过了。可是,因为经教的说法是方便说,不像阿毗达摩教法那样是非方便说,所以为了显示只有强力的欲贪才是欲漏,才说“欲漏,就是对五种欲的贪染”,同样也说了“对有有的欢喜”。巴利
Abhidhamme (dha. sa. 1103) ca kāmāsavaniddese ‘‘kāmesūti kāmarāgadiṭṭhirāgādīnaṃ ārammaṇabhūtesu tebhūmakesu vatthukāmesū’’ti attho sambhavati. Tattha hi uppajjamānā sā taṇhā sabbāpi na kāmacchandādināmaṃ na labhatīti. Yadi pana lobho kāmāsavabhavāsavavinimuttopi siyā, so yadā diṭṭhigatavippayuttesu cittesu uppajjati, tadā tena sampayutto avijjāsavo āsavavippayuttoti domanassavicikicchuddhaccasampayuttassa viya tassapi āsavavippayuttatā vattabbā siyā ‘‘catūsu diṭṭhigatavippayuttalobhasahagatacittuppādesu uppanno moho siyā āsavasampayutto, siyā āsavavippayutto’’ti. ‘‘Kāmāsavo aṭṭhasu lobhasahagatacittuppādesu uppajjatī’ti (dha. sa. 1465), ‘‘kāmāsavaṃ paṭicca diṭṭhāsavo avijjāsavo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.3.109) ca vacanato diṭṭhisahagatarāgo kāmāsavo na hotīti na sakkā vattuṃ. Kiñca abhijjhākāmarāgānaṃ viseso āsavadvayaekāsavabhāvo siyā, na abhijjhāya ca noāsavabhāvoti noāsavalobhassa sabbhāvo vicāretabbo. Na hi atthi abhidhamme ‘‘āsavo ca noāsavo ca dhammā āsavassa dhammassa āsavassa ca noāsavassa ca dhammassa hetupaccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.3.16-17) sattamo navamo ca pañho. Gaṇanāyañca ‘‘hetuyā sattā’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.3.40) vuttaṃ, no ‘‘navā’’ti. Diṭṭhisampayutte pana lobhe noāsave vijjamāne sattamanavamāpi pañhā vissajjanaṃ labheyyuṃ, gaṇanāya ca ‘‘hetuyā navā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, na pana vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhivippayutte ca lobhe noāsave vijjamāne vattabbaṃ vuttameva. Yasmā pana suttantadesanā nāma pariyāyakathā, na abhidhammadesanā viya nippariyāyakathā, tasmā balavakāmarāgasseva kāmāsavaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kāmāsavoti pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo’’ti vuttaṃ, tathā bhavābhinandananti.
这里以通名把见漏归入有漏之中,所以只说了三种漏。为了说明见漏确实包含在有漏里,才说了“如是,见漏……”等话。因为下文将会说到,有漏是和无相解脱相对立的。至于“对四圣谛无知”这一句,是依据经的体裁来说的,因为这是对经的注释;或者也可以说,是因为过去际等已经包含在内了。就像从意义上确定了欲漏等,为了说明它们的生起和增长,他又说了“对五种欲……”等话。从味著的角度去作意,就是指以“美好、快乐”等方式随味著而作意的人。以四种颠倒为近因,就是以“美好想”等为基础。与上面所说的道理相反的一面是:通过“这些所谓的欲,都是无常、苦、会变坏的”等方式,先看到五种欲的过患,然后走上出离的修行之路,从而镇伏并断除欲贪。这样,未生起的欲漏就不会生起,已生起的也被断除。同样,对广大之法以及整个三界之法,先看到它们的过患,再以无常等作意的方式走上出离的修行之路,未生起的有漏和无明漏就不会生起,已生起的也被断除。这样,与渴爱那一方所说的道理相反,在清净善巧的这一方,应当详细了知。巴利
Sāmaññena bhavāsavo diṭṭhāsavaṃ antogadhaṃ katvā idha tayo eva āsavā vuttāti tassa tadantogadhataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ diṭṭhāsavo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati bhavāsavassa animittavimokkhapaṭipakkhataṃ. Catūsu saccesu aññāṇanti idaṃ suttantanayaṃ nissāya vuttaṃ. Suttantasaṃvaṇṇanā hesāti, tadantogadhattā vā pubbantādīnaṃ. Yathā atthato kāmāsavādayo vavatthāpitā, tathā nesaṃ uppādavaḍḍhiyo dassento ‘‘kāmaguṇe’’tiādimāha. Assādato manasikarototi ‘‘subhasukhā’’tiādinā assādanavasena manasi karontassa. Catuvipallāsapadaṭṭhānabhāvenāti subhasaññādīnaṃ vatthubhāvena. Vuttanayapaccanīkatoti ‘‘kāmā nāmete aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’’tiādinā kāmaguṇesu ādīnavadassanapubbakanekkhammapaṭipattiyā chandarāgaṃ vikkhambhayato samucchindantassa ca anuppanno ca kāmāsavo na uppajjati, uppanno ca pahīyati. Tathā mahaggatadhammesu ceva sakalatebhūmakadhammesu ca ādīnavadassanapubbakaaniccādimanasikāravasena nissaraṇapaṭipattiyā anuppannā ca bhavāsavaavijjāsavā na uppajjanti, uppannā ca pahīyantīti evaṃ taṇhāpakkhe vuttassa nayassa paṭipakkhato sukkapakkhe vitthāro veditabbo.
为什么这里只说了三种漏,而没有像阿毗达摩那样说“四种”呢?在这段讨论“见所断”的内容里,应当这样理解:欲漏因为属于渴爱和发愿的状态,所以是“无愿解脱”的直接对治。有漏通常随顺对诸有的“恒常”执取,而且大多数情况下与有贪相应,所以是“无相解脱”的直接对治;至于把“见漏”归入有漏之中,就不需要再单独说明了。无明漏则要靠智慧的力量成就无我想,所以是“空解脱”的直接对治。这里说的“在此”,就是指在这段关于漏的讨论中。“已说明”是指已阐释清楚。“无差别”是指从共通/概括而言。巴利
Tayo evāti abhidhamme viya ‘‘cattāro’’ti avatvā kasmā tayo eva āsavā idha imissaṃ dassanāpahātabbakathāyaṃ vuttā? Tattha kāmāsavassa taṇhāpaṇidhibhāvato appaṇihitavimokkhapaṭipakkhatā veditabbā. Bhavesu niccaggāhānusārato yebhuyyato bhavarāgasampattito bhavāsavassa animittavimokkhapaṭipakkhatā, bhavadiṭṭhiyā pana bhavāsavabhāve vattabbameva natthi, anattasaññāya ñāṇānubhāvasiddhito avijjāsavassa suññatavimokkhapaṭipakkhatā. Etthāti etissaṃ āsavakathāyaṃ. Vaṇṇitanti kathitaṃ. Abhedatoti sāmaññato.
18 18. “欲漏等”:是指能导向人界和天界的欲漏等。而能导向地狱等的欲漏等,则已经归在“见所断之漏”那一段里了。或者也可以说,从那个见所断诸漏被安立为所依时起,欲漏等也就同样被安立了。因为并不是名称不同,事物本身就不同,所以为了说明这一点,才说了“至此”等话。也正因为这样,他才说“从共称而说”。那么,为什么在这里本该展示见所断诸漏的时候,却用“我过去是否存在呢?”这样的方式来表示疑呢?他回答说:“此处是以疑为头绪……”等等。意思是说,正如十六种事相的疑会生起那样,非理作意也是如此。巴利
18.Kāmāsavādīnanti manussalokadevalokagamanīyānaṃ kāmāsavādīnaṃ. Nirayādigamanīyā pana kāmāsavādayo ‘‘dassanā pahātabbe āsave’’ti ettheva samāruḷhā. Atha vā yadaggena so puggalodassanāpahātabbānaṃ āsavānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, tadaggena kāmāsavādīnampi adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Na hi samaññābhedena vatthubhedo atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ettāvatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sāmaññato vuttāna’’nti. Kasmā panettha dassanāpahātabbesu āsavesu dassetabbesu ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho aha’’ntiādinā vicikicchā dassitāti āha ‘‘vicikicchāsīsena cetthā’’tiādi. Evanti yathā soḷasavatthukā vicikicchā uppajjati, evaṃ ayonisomanasikāroti.
对于“存在性”和“不存在性”这两点:依靠常见(认为灵魂永恒),他怀疑过去世的自己确实存在,心想“我过去世确实存在过吗?”;依靠无因生论,他怀疑过去世的自己不存在,心想“从我出生以来,在那之前我难道不曾存在过吗?”为什么会有这种怀疑呢?因为疑是以这两种行相为所缘的。又因为这种疑执取了过去的事情为对象,所以显示出它依赖于常见和无因生论这两种行相。这样一来,疑就像蛇一样蜿蜒盘绕地活动,在任何地方都不能确定一个固定的原因。为了说明不应当对此提出“是什么原因”的责难,论师说“不应当说‘是什么原因’”。这本身就是凡夫的状态。如果这样的话,那岂不是他就必然只是不如理作意了吗?对此论师说“难道凡夫也会如理作意吗?”这里指的是如理作意。巴利
Vijjamānataṃ avijjamānatañcāti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.20) sassatāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhāna’’nti atīte attano vijjamānataṃ, adhiccasamuppattiāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘yato pabhuti ahaṃ, tato pubbe na nu kho ahosi’’nti atīte attano avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Kasmā? Vicikicchāya ākāradvayāvalambanato. Tassā pana atītavatthutāya gahitattā sassatādhiccasamuppattiākāranissayatā dassitā. Evaṃ āsappanaparisappanāpavattikaṃ katthacipi appaṭivattihetubhūtaṃ vicikicchaṃ kasmā uppādetīti na codetabbametanti dassento āha ‘‘kiṃ kāraṇanti na vattabba’’nti. Sveva puthujjanabhāvo eva. Yadi evaṃ tassa ayonisomanasikāreneva bhavitabbanti āpannanti āha ‘‘nanu ca puthujjanopi yoniso manasi karotī’’ti. Tatthāti yonisomanasikaraṇe.
“生、相、再生”指的是:刹帝利、婆罗门等出身,在家、出家等外在形相,以及天、人等不同的受生方式。“依止”就是执取。巴利
Jātiliṅgūpapattiyoti khattiyabrāhmaṇādijātiṃ gahaṭṭhapabbajitādiliṅgaṃ devamanussādiupapattiñca. Nissāyāti upādāya.
那时众生的身量是中等,与这种身量相应的,就是“有量”;因为不再有那种身量,或者已经超越了它,所以应当知道是“无量”。有些精要论师这样说。他们确实说过:“他这样思惟:‘到底是怎么回事?是由自在天、梵天神、前世所作,还是无因而生?’”因此说“他们说这是对因生疑”。因为即使是对无因而生的疑惑,也正是在追究因。巴利
Tasmiṃ kāle sattānaṃ majjhimappamāṇaṃ, tena yutto pamāṇiko, tadabhāvato, tato atītabhāvato vā appamāṇiko veditabbo. Kecīti sārasamāsācariyā. Te hi ‘‘kathaṃ nu khoti issarena vā brahmunā vā pubbakatena vā ahetuto vā nibbattoti cintetī’’ti āhu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘hetuto kaṅkhatīti vadantī’’ti. Ahetuto nibbattikaṅkhāpi hi hetuparāmasanamevāti.
“相续”是指前后不断生起的过程。“长时”是时间的另一种说法,这里应当理解为表示处所的宾格。巴利
Paramparanti pubbāparappavattiṃ. Addhānanti kālādhivacanaṃ, tañca bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
对于“存在”和“不存在”:依靠对常有的疑惑——“我在未来时还会存在吗?”这是对未来自己的存在生疑;依靠对断灭的疑惑——“在这样一个个体的生命之后,我是否就不再存在了?”这是对未来自己的不存在生疑。这里应按照前面所说的方式连接理解。巴利
Vijjamānataṃ avijjamānatañcāti sassatāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘bhavissāmi nu kho ahamanāgatamaddhāna’’nti anāgate attano vijjamānataṃ, ucchedāsaṅkaṃ nissāya ‘‘yasmiñca attabhāve ahaṃ, tato paraṃ na nu kho bhavissāmī’’ti anāgate attano avijjamānatañca kaṅkhatīti heṭṭhā vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ.
“现在时”是指:因为这里要说的正是“现在时”,所以说了“以结生为开始……”等话。由于心中反复生起“这是怎么回事?这是怎么回事?”这样的念头,所以叫“疑议”,也就是疑;某人有这种疑,就说他“是有疑者”,因此说“成为有疑者”。这里有什么可思虑的呢?因为愚痴凡夫就像疯子一样,这个意思前面早就说过了。那个大母亲的儿子。关于“剃发者”:因为剃发,不愿者在觉醒时无法再睡,所以剃了睡着者的头发,这是某些家族修行者传下来的习惯;也有人说,是出于对国王的恐惧等等。巴利
Paccuppannamaddhānanti addhāpaccuppannassa idhādhippetattā ‘‘paṭisandhiṃ ādiṃ katvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ kathaṃ idaṃ katha’’nti pavattanato kathaṃkathā, vicikicchā, sā assa atthīti kathaṃkathīti āha ‘‘vicikiccho hotī’’ti. Kā ettha cintā, ummattako viya hi bālaputhujjanoti paṭikacceva vuttanti adhippāyo. Taṃ mahāmātāya puttaṃ. Muṇḍesunti muṇḍena anicchantaṃ jāgaraṇakāle na sakkāti suttaṃ muṇḍesuṃ kuladhammatāya yathā taṃ ekacce kulatāpasā, rājabhayenāti ca vadanti.
“清凉”这个词,是为了说明达到甘甜状态的原因。也有写成“变白”的读法,意思是由于长时间待在水里而变成了白色。巴利
Sītibhūtanti idaṃ madhurakabhāvappattiyā kāraṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Setibhūta’’ntipi pāṭho, udake ciraṭṭhānena setabhāvaṃ pattanti attho.
他怀疑自己是不是刹帝利出身,就像耳(Kaṇṇa)误以为自己是车夫的儿子一样。当出身被说明清楚时,他针对那执取“我”的想法,才说“这样确实会有疑惑”。而“人们也像国王一样”,意思是有些人也像国王那样。巴利
Attano khattiyabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati kaṇṇo viya sūtaputtasaññī. Jātiyā vibhāviyamānāya ‘‘aha’’nti tassa attano parāmasanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘evañhi siyā kaṅkhā’’ti. Manussāpi ca rājāno viyāti manussāpi keci ekacce rājāno viyāti adhippāyo.
还是按照前面说的方式,也就是“依靠形态和样貌”等等。“在这里”指的是“我究竟是怎样呢”这句话。所谓“内部的生命”,说的是他人虚构出来的内在自我。“十六种等”里的“等”字,涵盖了身体大小、圆形、拇指量、大麦粒量、极微尘量之类的说法。巴利
Vuttanayameva ‘‘saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāyā’’tiādinā. Etthāti ‘‘kathaṃ nu khosmī’’ti pade. Abbhantare jīvoti paraparikappitaṃ antarattānaṃ vadati. Soḷasaṃsādīnanti ādi-saddena sarīra-parimāṇa-parimaṇḍala-aṅguṭṭhayavaparamāṇu-parimāṇatādike saṅgaṇhāti.
“七施设以命为境”,这只是执持邪见者的想法;但从究竟真实义来看,它其实是以“有身”为境,所以说“有身的来去处”,意思是:这个人从哪里来,又将去哪里,那个地方就是来去处。巴利
‘‘Sattapaññatti jīvavisayā’’ti diṭṭhigatikānaṃ matimattaṃ, paramatthato pana sā attabhāvavisayāvāti āha ‘‘attabhāvassa āgatigatiṭṭhāna’’nti, yatāyaṃ āgato, yattha ca gamissati, taṃ ṭhānanti attho.
19 疑是怎样生起的呢?前面所说的各种疑,是在人不如理作意时生起的。这里说的是:疑以执取我为依止。就像疑依着执取我的倾向而活动——因此疑被说成是执取常、无因生、常见与断见等行相——同样,执取我的倾向也依着疑而活动。比如在“我过去存在吗?”这类疑惑中,就包含了“我”慢的犹豫状态,因为它以执取我为所依。所以论中说:“有疑者的不如理作意力量增强。”“分别义”就是不确定的意思,因为经中说“某一种见生起”。“由于极其坚固的倾向”,就是偏见极力增强。“处处”,就是在那个生命存在中。“唯现在有”,通过这一限定,否定了未来的存在,而不是否定过去;因为如果过去也存在,就会引发对断见的执取。意思是:过去不存在,未来也不存在。巴利
19.Yathā ayaṃ vicikicchā uppajjatīti ayaṃ vuttappabhedā vicikicchā yathā uppajjati, evaṃ ayoniso manasikaroto. Etena vicikicchāya attābhinivesasannissayatamāha. Yathā hi vicikicchā attābhinivesaṃ nissāya pavattati, yato sā sassatādhiccasamuppattisassatucchedākārāvalambinī vuttā, evaṃ attābhinivesopi taṃ nissāya pavattati ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho aha’’ntiādinā antogadhāhaṃkārassa kathaṃkathibhāvassa attaggāhasannissayabhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘savicikicchassa ayonisomanasikārassa thāmagatattā’’ti. Vikappatthoti aniyamattho. ‘‘Aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Suṭṭhu daḷhabhāvenāti abhinivesassa ativiya thāmagatabhāvena. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ bhave. Paccuppannamevāti avadhāraṇena anāgate atthibhāvaṃ nivatteti, na atīte tatthapi sati atthitāya ucchedaggāhassa sabbhāvato. Atīte eva natthi, na anāgatepīti adhippāyo.
以想蕴为首,意思是以想蕴为头领,把想蕴放在最前面。诸蕴,指的是五蕴全部。执取为我,就是顽固地认定能知觉的自性就是我的我。就像需要被照亮的物品,又像灯既能照亮自身也能照亮所缘,有人认为能知觉者既能知觉自身也能知觉所缘;持这种见解的人,也就落入了恶见。因此说以自己认知自己。这个意思,是把想蕴以及其他法执为我也好、执为非我也好,都是通过执取的方式形成的,所以说以想蕴为首等等。在这里,如果执取蕴之外有我,就是常见;如果执取蕴本身就是我,就是断见。因此说这一切都只是常见和断见。巴利
Saññākkhandhasīsenāti saññākkhandhapamukhena, saññākkhandhaṃ pamukhaṃ katvāti attho. Khandheti pañcapi khandhe. Attāti gahetvāti ‘‘sañjānanasabhāvo me attā’’ti abhinivissa. Pakāsetabbaṃ vatthuṃ viya, attānampi pakāsento padīpo viya, sañjānitabbaṃ nīlādiārammaṇaṃ viya attānampi sañjānātīti evaṃdiṭṭhitopi diṭṭhigatito hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘attanāva attānaṃ sañjānāmī’’ti. Svāyamattho saññaṃ tadaññataradhamme ca ‘‘attā anattā’’ti ca gahaṇavasena hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘saññākkhandhasīsenā’’tiādi. Ettha ca khandhavinimutto attāti gaṇhato sassatadiṭṭhi, khandhaṃ pana ‘‘attā’’ti gaṇhato ucchedadiṭṭhīti āha ‘‘sabbāpi sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyovā’’ti.
“执取的行相”就是颠倒的行相。说“说”,是用这一点来说明自己有能力让造作者和感受者等众生明白利益和安乐。因此说“语业的作者”。感受者就是能感受的人,能感受的人就是受者。对于这类词,很多语言学家认为它们多数是使动语态的含义。有生起的东西,必定会灭;既然有生有灭,就不是恒常的。为了揭示主张“常”的人的真正意图,所以说“非生非灭”。“坚实的本质”就是指因为恒常才有坚实性。“一切时存在”就是在一切时间都存在。“自性”就是自然存在的本性,或者按“说”等语所说的、被称为自然的自性。“与常等同”就是与常相同,即常等同,意思是坚固、恒常不变。就以那种方式安住,意思是:以先前安住的方式,现在也安住,未来也以那种方式安住。巴利
Abhinivesākārāti vipariyesākārā. Vadatīti iminā kārakavedakasattānaṃ hitasukhāvabodhanasamatthataṃ attano dīpeti. Tenāha ‘‘vacīkammassa kārako’’ti. Vedetīti vediyo, vediyova vedeyyo. Īdisānañhi padānaṃ bahulā kattusādhanataṃ saddasatthavidū maññanti. Uppādavato ekanteneva vayo icchitabbo, sati ca udayabbayatte neva niccatāti ‘‘nicco’’ti vadantassa adhippāyaṃ vivaranto āha ‘‘uppādavayarahito’’ti. Sārabhūtoti niccatāya eva sārabhāvo. Sabbakālikoti sabbasmiṃ kāle vijjamāno. Pakatibhāvanti sabhāvabhūtaṃ pakatiṃ, ‘‘vado’’tiādinā vā vuttaṃ pakatisaṅkhātaṃ sabhāvaṃ. Sassatisamanti sassatiyā samaṃ sassatisamaṃ, thāvaraṃ niccakālanti attho. Tatheva ṭhassatīti yenākārena pubbe aṭṭhāsi, etarahi tiṭṭhati, tatheva tenākārena anāgatepi ṭhassatīti attho.
这是为了显示“这些”这个词表示生等苦的缘,近在眼前的现前可见。说“见本身就是恶见”,只是为“gata”这个词补足音节。说“已入于见中”,意思是含摄在邪见之中。因此说“包含在六十二见中”。“只是见的执取”,就是对见的执取而已。就像山、河、险阻难以走出一样,邪见的执取也难以脱离,所以说“以难出之义为稠林”。那叫做水的地方,因为取了水就必须越过它,所以叫荒漠;没有水的树林也叫旷野。另外,有些林野之地因为难以越过,就像荒漠一样,邪见也是如此,所以说“以难越之义”等。穿刺就是刺穿。违逆就是变易的状态。由于本性不稳固而动摇、挣扎,所以说“有时”等。就像藤蔓缠缚等一样,以不给予逃脱机会的方式使人失去自主,这是结缚之义;以烦恼、业、异熟轮回的缘的方式,即使远在他方也牵引过来而系缚,这是结缚之义;见也是如此,所以说“见结”。显示结缚之义,意趣是通过作用成就来说明的。因此说“以见结……乃至……解脱”。其中,“以这些”是指以这个来说明生等苦的缘。对于生等苦法,即使从自相上显示之后,世尊说“不能从苦解脱”,以显示见结名为一切不利、极大过失、一切苦的根本,这个道理已经阐明,所以说“何必多说,连整个轮回之苦也不能解脱”。巴利
Paccakkhanidassanaṃ idaṃ-saddassa āsannapaccakkhabhāvaṃ katvā. Diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigatanti gata-saddassa padavaḍḍhanamattataṃ āha. Diṭṭhīsugatanti micchādiṭṭhīsu pariyāpannanti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiantogadhattā’’ti. Diṭṭhiyā gamanamattanti diṭṭhiyā gahaṇamattaṃ. Yathā pana pabbatajalaviduggāni dunniggamanāni, evaṃ diṭṭhiggāhopīti āha ‘‘dunniggamanaṭṭhena gahana’’nti. Taṃ nāma udakaṃ, taṃ gahetvā taṃ atikkamitabbato kantāro, nirudakavanaṃ, taṃ pavanantipi vuccati. Añño pana araññapadeso duratikkamanaṭṭhena kantāro viyāti, evaṃ diṭṭhipīti āha ‘‘duratikkamanaṭṭhenā’’tiādi. Vinivijjhanaṃ vitudanaṃ. Vilomanaṃ vipariṇāmabhāvo. Anavaṭṭhitasabhāvatāya vicalitaṃ vipphanditanti āha ‘‘kadācī’’tiādi. Andubandhanādi viya nissarituṃ appadānavasena aseribhāvakaraṇaṃ bandhanaṭṭho, kilesakammavipākavaṭṭānaṃ paccayabhāvena dūragatampi ākaḍḍhitvā saṃyojanaṃ saṃyojanaṭṭho, diṭṭhipi tathārūpāti vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhisaṃyojana’’nti. Bandhanatthaṃ dassento kiccasiddhiyāti adhippāyo. Tenevāha ‘‘diṭṭhisaṃyojanena…pe… muccatī’’ti. Tattha etehīti iminā jātiādidukkhassa paccayabhāvamāha. Jātiādike dukkhadhamme sarūpato dassetvāpi ‘‘na parimuccati dukkhasmā’’ti vadantena bhagavatā diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ nāma sabbānatthakaraṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ sabbassapi dukkhassa mūlabhūtanti ayamattho vibhāvitoti dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃ vā bahunā, sakalavaṭṭadukkhatopi na muccatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
20 这里有人问:既然已经通过显示“见结”来显示“戒禁取”,那就应该也把它显示出来才对,因为这样一来,由“见”所应断的诸漏就毫无剩余地被显示出来了。针对这个责难,才说了“由于……”等话。戒禁取其实已经被“欲漏”等说法所包含,因为它是欲漏等的因。那些还没有断除欲贪等的人,为了追求欲乐,或者为了追求有的清净,就会执取戒禁,认为“靠这个戒、这个禁、这个苦行、这个梵行,我会成为天人,或者成为某类天人”,认为“在那里我是常的、恒的、永久的、不变易的,我将永远那样存在”,还有经里说的“戒清净、禁清净、戒禁清净”。这里“为有乐、为有清净”,意思就是为了有的快乐和有的清净。戒禁取是被“见”的执取一起执取进去的,就像“为了断除恶见”等地方所说的那样。“那些”指的是应当由见来断除的漏。这是依着补特伽罗的安立来开示。与此相反的情况,就是如理作意的善凡夫。巴利
20. Nanu cettha diṭṭhisaṃyojanadassanena sīlabbataparāmāsopi dassetabbo, evañhi dassanena pahātabbā āsavā anavasesato dassitā hontīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi. Sīlabbataparāmāso kāmāsavādiggahaṇeneva gahito hoti kāmāsavādihetukattā tassa. Appahīnakāmarāgādiko hi kāmasukhatthaṃ vā bhavasuddhatthaṃ vā evaṃ bhavavisuddhi hotīti sīlabbatāni parāmasanti, ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.186; ma. ni. 2.79), ‘‘tattha nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṃ tatheva ṭhassāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.19), ‘‘sīlena suddhi vatena suddhi sīlabbatena suddhī’’ti (dha. sa. 1222) ca suttevuttaṃ sīlabbataṃ parāmasanti. Tattha bhavasukhabhavavisuddhiatthanti bhavasukhatthañca bhavavisuddhiatthañca. Tassa gahitattāti sīlabbataparāmāsassa diṭṭhiggahaṇena gahitattā yathā ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 277). Tesanti dassanapahātabbānaṃ. Dassetuṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya. Tabbiparītassāti yonisomanasikaroto kalyāṇaputhujjanassa.
“它”指的是“多闻”等这一句。“至此”的意思是:从“多闻”开始,一直到“他遍知此是苦”这一句为止,把这一句作为界限。“依照前面所说的方式”:对于“圣善士、圣法、善士法、应作意、不应作意”这些词,应当按它们在《根本法门》中依次出现的方式来理解其含义。“由所说的对立面”:对于“多闻圣弟子、见过诸圣者、见过诸善士”这些词,应当从前面所说的全部相反方面来理解其含义;但“善巧”“善调伏”这些词,则不是从全部相反方面来说的。因为阿拉汉究竟在圣法上是善巧的,在圣法上也是善调伏的。因此说“从对立面以及从全部方面……应理解为圣弟子”。行舍智是达到顶峰的观。然而有些人说“从坏灭智开始就是达到顶峰的观”,那是不对的。“以与其相应的义”:是以与那个人相应的圣义而说,并非以证得之义而说,因为此人尚是善凡夫。正如在《有学经》中,从“即使是善凡夫”开始,以“他也被称为有学,因为他正在学”这样以引申的方式说了有学性;同样,这里也说了圣弟子性。对于以出起观为特征的、被称为圣善士法与律的菩提分法,或者三学,凡是以这些而成立的,就依它们说了此人的圣弟子等性。因此说“以与其相应的义”。或者说,“圣者的弟子”就是以圣弟子的意义而说,如同“佛去王舍城”一样。这里取“达到顶峰的观”,是为了表示安住于不退转道、已激发观的人的摄取。如上所说的义释,更加妥善地成立。巴利
Tassāti ‘‘sutavā’’tiādipāṭhassa. Tāvāti ‘‘sutavā’’ti ito paṭṭhāya yāva ‘‘so idaṃ dukkha’’nti padaṃ, tāva imaṃ padaṃ avadhiṃ katvāti attho. Heṭṭhā vuttanayenāti ariyasappurisa-ariyadhamma-sappurisadhamma-manasikaraṇīya-amanasikaraṇīyapadānaṃ yathākkamaṃ mūlapariyāye idha gahetvā vuttanayena attho veditabboti sambandho. Vuttapaccanīkatoti ‘‘sutavā ariyasāvako, ariyānaṃ dassāvī, sappurisānaṃ dassāvī’’ti etesaṃ padānaṃ sabbākārena vuttaviparītato attho veditabbo, kovidavinītapadānaṃ pana na sabbappakārena vuttaviparītato. Arahā hi nippariyāyena ariyadhamme kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto ca nāma. Tenāha ‘‘paccanīkato ca sabbākārena…pe… ariyasāvakoti veditabbo’’ti. Saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ sikhāppattavipassanā. Keci pana ‘‘bhaṅgañāṇato paṭṭhāya sikhāpattavipassanā’’ti vadanti, tadayuttaṃ . Tadanurūpena atthenāti tassa puggalassa anurūpena ariyaṭṭhena, na paṭivedhavasenāti adhippāyo. Kalyāṇaputhujjano hi ayaṃ. Yathā cassa ‘‘yopi kalyāṇaputhujjano’’ti ārabhitvā ‘‘sopi vuccati sikkhatīti sekkho’’ti pariyāyena sekkhasutte (saṃ. ni. 5.13) sekkhabhāvo vutto, evaṃ idha ariyasāvakabhāvo vutto. Vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanālakkhaṇehi ye ariyasappurisadhammavinayasaṅkhātā bodhipakkhiyadhammā tisso sikkhā eva vā sambhavanti, tesaṃ vasena imassa ariyasāvakādibhāvo vutto . Tenāha ‘‘tadanurūpena atthenā’’ti. Ariyassa sāvakoti vā ariyasāvakatthena eva vutto yathā ‘‘agamā rājagahaṃ buddho’’ti (su. ni. 410). Sikhāppattavipassanāggahaṇañcettha vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā anivattipaṭipadāyaṃ ṭhitassa gahaṇatthanti yathāvuttā atthasaṃvaṇṇanā suṭṭhutaraṃ yujjateva.
21 就像有人以界为门而专注于观,他就是以界为业处的人;有人以处等为门而专注于观,他就是以处等为业处的人;同样地,有人以谛为门而专注于观,就说他是“以四谛为业处的人”。因为这是想要渡越四瀑流的人应当做的事,所以叫作业,也就是修习。业本身就是殊胜证得的立足处和原因;或者,按前面所说的意义,在业中立足、安住,就是修习的起点——业处,而这是以四谛为门而生起的,所以具有这个的人,就是“以四谛为业处的人”。两者在此不转起,所以是“不转起”。所谓“已领受四谛业处的人”,就是从巴利与义理两方面领受四谛业处,令其成为适合作意之后而安住。所谓“登上观道”,就是立足于有缘的名色之见后,对那同样的名色从无常等角度作观。所谓“作意”,是就观之转向而说的,因此,正如“这是苦”的观智生起那样,他作意、转向,这就是其含义。那么,这里以“作意”一词,是否就表达了“观”的含义呢?他说“这里……乃至……所说”。而“这里”的意思就是在这部经中。所谓“观”,就是为了令上分殊胜证得生起,以智眼而观、观察,这就是其含义。道也应说。因为前二谛因甚深而难见,其余二谛因难见而甚深。巴利
21. Yathā dhātumukhena vipassanaṃ abhiniviṭṭho dhātukammaṭṭhāniko āyatanādimukhena abhiniviṭṭho āyatanādikammaṭṭhāniko, evaṃ saccamukhena abhiniviṭṭhoti vuttaṃ ‘‘catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko’’ti. Caturoghanittharaṇatthikehi kātabbato kammaṃ, bhāvanā. Kammameva visesādhigamassa ṭhānaṃ kāraṇanti, kamme vā yathāvuttanaṭṭhena ṭhānaṃ avaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvanārambhokammaṭṭhānaṃ, tadeva catusaccamukhena pavattaṃ etassa atthīti catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko. Ubhayaṃ nappavattati etthāti appavatti. Uggahitacatusaccakammaṭṭhānoti ca catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ pāḷito atthato ca uggahetvā manasikārayoggaṃ katvā ṭhito. Vipassanāmaggaṃ samāruḷhoti sappaccayanāmarūpadassane patiṭṭhāya tadeva nāmarūpaṃ aniccādito sammasanto. Samannāharatīti vipassanāvajjanaṃ sandhāyāha, tasmā yathā ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti vipassanāñāṇaṃ pavattati, evaṃ samannāharati āvajjatīti attho. Kathaṃ panettha ‘‘manasi karotī’’ti iminā ‘‘vipassatī’’ti ayamattho vutto hotīti āha ‘‘ettha…pe… vuttā’’ti. Etthāti ca imasmiṃ sutteti attho. Vipassatīti ca yathā upari visesādhigamo hoti, evaṃ ñāṇacakkhunā vipassati, oloketīti attho. Maggopi vattabbo. Purimañhi saccadvayaṃ gambhīrattā duddasaṃ, itaraṃ duddasattā gambhīraṃ.
“执取”指的是观的执取,也就是观的修行。“以彼为所缘”指的是以色蕴为所缘而现起的(观)。“确定了如实自相”指的是,把不颠倒的自身所缘——比如区分自性等作用,以及无明等相——不混杂地安放在心中。这表明:即使先前已经做了名色分别,通过把握缘,诸法的自相确定才算是真正善巧地确定了,就像“绑两次才算绑得牢”一样。这样,遍知的作用才算真正完成。由于已经从缘和缘生法两方面确定了,那些以明显的方式成立的法,其成立也是明显的,所以说“先无而后有”。他赋予无常相:因为非有者应当由生起而有,不是有者;又因为它们有生起,所以必然要希求缘所支配的状态;若有生起,灭必定随之而来,因此完全没有常的余地。又由于无常相善现,故由生灭诸法不断压迫,以苦之义为苦。因此说“由生灭压迫故苦,他赋予苦相”。在任何地方,对于诸行,都不能得到“不要老、不要病”,所以没有自在支配,因此说“由不得自在故无我,他赋予无我相”。次第地,即依生灭智等的次第。巴利
Abhinivesoti vipassanābhiniveso vipassanāpaṭipatti. Tadārammaṇeti taṃ rūpakkhandhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatte. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ vavatthapetvāti aviparītaṃ attano ārammaṇaṃ sabhāvacchedanādikiccañceva aññāṇādilakkhaṇañca asaṅkarato hadaye ṭhapetvā. Iminā pubbe nāmarūpaparicchede katepi dhammānaṃ salakkhaṇavavatthāpanaṃ paccayapariggahena suvavatthāpitaṃ nāma hotīti dasseti yathā ‘‘dvikkhattuṃ baddhaṃ subaddha’’nti. Evañhi ñātapariññāya kiccaṃ siddhaṃ nāma hoti. Paccayato paccayuppannato ca vavatthāpitattā pākaṭabhāvena siddhenapi siddhabhāvo pākaṭo hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ahutvā hontī’’ti. Aniccalakkhaṇaṃ āropetīti asato hi uppādena bhavitabbaṃ, na sato, uppādavantato ca nesaṃ ekantena icchitabbā paccayāyattavuttibhāvato, sati uppāde avassaṃbhāvī nirodhoti nattheva niccatāvakāsoti. Sūpaṭṭhitāniccatāya ca udayabbayadhammehi abhiṇhapaṭipīḷanato dukkhamanaṭṭhena dukkhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘udayabbayapaṭipīḷitattā dukkhāti dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ āropetī’’ti. Katthacipi saṅkhāragate ‘‘mā jīri mā byādhiyī’’ti alabbhanato natthi vasavattananti āha ‘‘avasavattanato anattāti anattalakkhaṇaṃ āropetī’’ti. Paṭipāṭiyāti udayabbayañāṇādiparamparāya.
在“那个刹那”这句里,指的是入流道的刹那。“以一次通达”指的是以同一个智去通达。通达,是因为没有障碍、在境界中无滞而行的穿透。现观,是不偏离地证得境界,也就是觉了。“这是苦,苦只有这么多,不会超过这个”——这样限定之后去了知,按前面说的方式,就是通达,也就是遍知通达。这是就智生起之后,对苦的自相等加以限定时不再有迷乱那样来说的,并不是说道智也以“这是苦”等方式生起。所以说“因为那时他没有……”。已经断了的,就不必再断,所以殊胜的断、舍、根除就是断;按前面说的方式,断本身就是通达,这就是断通达。这也是就这种情况说的:如果某个烦恼没被断掉,就不该有道的发展;如果没有道的发展,某个烦恼就可能生起;而智打击那个烦恼,使它达到不再生起的法性,智这样生起时没有障碍、无滞而行,所以就这样说。作证就是现前做成,抛开传闻、推理等,从自相上取为所缘,也就是“这是这样”地如实把握;按前面说的方式,那本身就是通达,这就是作证通达。而这是就这种情况说的:由于某种障碍没有被根除,智就不能缘取灭;由于根除了那种障碍,那个灭就从自相上被明了地生起,所以就这样说。巴利
Tasmiṃ khaṇeti sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe. Ekapaṭivedhenevāti ekañāṇeneva paṭivijjhanena. Paṭivedho paṭighātābhāvena visaye nissaṅgacārasaṅkhātaṃ nibbijjhanaṃ. Abhisamayo avirajjhitvā visayassa adhigamasaṅkhāto avabodho. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti paricchinditvā jānanameva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti pariññāpaṭivedho. Ayaṃ yathā ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavattiṃ gahetvā vutto, na pana maggañāṇassa ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādināpi vattanato. Tenāha ‘‘na hissa tasmiṃ samaye’’tiādi. Pahīnassa puna appahātabbatāya pakaṭṭhaṃ hānaṃ cajanaṃ samucchindanaṃ pahānaṃ, pahānameva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti pahānapaṭivedho. Ayampi yena kilesena appahīyamānena maggabhāvanāya na bhavitabbaṃ, asati ca maggabhāvanāya yo uppajjeyya, tassa kilesassa padaghātaṃ karontassa anuppattidhammataṃ āpādentassa ñāṇassa tathāpavattiyā paṭighātābhāvena nissaṅgacāraṃ upādāya evaṃ vutto. Sacchikiriyā paccakkhakaraṇaṃ, anussavākāraparivitakkādike muñcitvā sarūpato ārammaṇakaraṇaṃ idaṃ tanti yathāsabhāvato gahaṇaṃ, sā eva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti sacchikiriyāpaṭivedho. Ayaṃ pana yassa āvaraṇassa asamucchindanato ñāṇaṃ nirodhaṃ ālambituṃ na sakkoti, tassa samucchindanato taṃ sarūpato vibhāvitameva pavattatīti evaṃ vutto.
修习有生起和增长两层意思。其中,在初道阶段是“生起”的意思,在第二道等阶段是“增长”的意思;或者也可以说,在两种情况下都兼具这两种意思。因为初道也随着适当的情形,让导向出起过程中的遍知等不断增长、持续运作,所以在这里也可以用“增长”的意思来理解修习。在第二道等阶段,因为断除了尚未断除的烦恼、成就了不同的人,所以修习是“生起”的意思;而按照前面所说的方式,这本身就是通达,因此修习就是通达。因为这也是在智生起之后,对诸道法的自性分别不再迷惑,所以就依这种生起来说。暂且放下已证得的道法不谈,在依此而生起的果法当中,对已证得的谛法也同样不再迷惑。因此说“见法者、得法者、知法者、深入法者”。又因为受到法性的推动,依止于已证得的谛法,在道的过程之后,便生起对道果所断除的残余烦恼以及涅槃的观察。因为苦谛法就是有身见等。这一义释也应当在“以遍知现观”等处加以说明。为了让“以一现观而现观”这个已经说过的意思更加清楚明白,所以说了“然而并非以彼此不同的智”等话。巴利
Bhāvanā uppādanā vaḍḍhanā ca, tattha paṭhamamagge uppādanaṭṭhena, dutiyādīsu vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena, ubhayatthāpi vā ubhayathāpi veditabbaṃ. Paṭhamamaggopi hi yathārahaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminiyaṃ pavattaṃ parijānanādiṃ vaḍḍhento pavattoti tatthāpi vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena bhāvanā sakkā viññātuṃ. Dutiyādīsupi appahīnakilesappahānato puggalantarasādhanato uppādanaṭṭhena bhāvanā, sā eva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti bhāvanā paṭivedho. Ayampi hi yathā ñāṇe pavatte pacchā maggadhammānaṃ sarūpaparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavattimeva gahetvā vutto, tiṭṭhatu tāva yathādhigatamaggadhammaṃ yathāpavattesu phaladhammesupi ayaṃ yathādhigatasaccadhammesu viya vigatasammohova hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ti (dī. ni. 1.299, 356; mahāva. 27, 57). Yato cassa dhammatāsañcoditā yathādhigatasaccadhammāvalambiniyo maggavīthito parato maggaphalapahīnāvasiṭṭhakilesanibbānānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā pavattanti. Dukkhasaccadhammā hi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo. Ayañca atthavaṇṇanā ‘‘pariññābhisamayenā’’tiādīsupi vibhāvetabbā. Ekābhisamayena abhisametīti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhūtataraṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘no ca kho aññamaññena ñāṇenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
诡辩者却说:“圣道智对四谛是以种种现观的方式执行作用的,不是以一种现观。因为它有时了知苦,有时舍断集,有时证悟灭,有时修习道;否则,一个智在一个刹那执行四种作用,就说不通了。而且,这样的经典在哪里也未曾见过。”应当对他说:如果圣道智是以种种现观的方式现观诸谛,而不是以一种现观,那么这样一来,即使单独一个道,也应当对诸谛以不同刹那生起,而不是以一个刹那生起。若真是那样,就会变成只是部分部分地了知苦等、只是部分部分地舍断,于是在种种现观的情况下,由初道等所应舍断的三结等也会只是部分部分地被舍断,从而成为“部分住于入流道者”,并由此成为“部分入流者”,因为出世间善法是无间果的缘故——这是不合理的。因为如果不依时间差别,就无法理解“他既是入流者又不是入流者”。巴利
Vitaṇḍavādī panāha ‘‘ariyamaggañāṇaṃ catūsu saccesu nānābhisamayavasena kiccakaraṇaṃ, na ekābhisamayavasena. Tañhi kālena dukkhaṃ pajānāti, kālena samudayaṃ pajahati, kālena nirodhaṃ sacchikaroti, kālena maggaṃ bhāveti, aññathā ekassa ñāṇassa ekasmiṃ khaṇe catukiccakaraṇaṃ na yujjati. Na hidaṃ katthaci diṭṭhampi suttaṃ atthī’’ti. So vattabbo – yadi ariyamaggañāṇaṃ nānābhisamayavasena saccāni abhisameti, na ekābhisamayavasena, evaṃ sante paccekampi saccesu nānakkhaṇeneva pavatteyya, na ekakkhaṇena, tathā sati dukkhādīnaṃ ekadesekadesameva parijānāti pajahatīti āpajjatīti nānābhisamaye paṭhamamaggādīhi pahātabbānaṃ saññojanattayādīnaṃ ekadesekadesappahānaṃ siyāti ekadesasotāpattimaggaṭṭhāditā, tato eva ekadesasotāpannāditā ca āpajjati anantaraphalattā lokuttarakusalānaṃ, na ca taṃ yuttaṃ. Na hi kālabhedena vinā so eva sotāpanno ca asotāpanno cāti sakkā viññātuṃ.
另外,这位主张种种现观的人应该这样被反问:道智在通达诸谛的时候,是从所缘的角度通达,还是从作用的角度通达?如果他懂,就会说“从作用”。那就对他说:“既然是从作用通达,那怎么还会有种种现观呢?”然后用没有次第的展示让他信服。如果他说“从所缘”,那这样一来,他那个智就像观智一样,对苦的彻底遍知和对集的彻底断除就都不合理了,因为还没有脱离。对道的见也同样不合理。因为道不可能以自己为所缘而生起,而且如果这样设想,就会陷入对其他道的无穷设想,站不住脚。所以,三谛是从作用通达,灭谛则既从作用也从所缘通达。这样,以不迷惑的方式通达的道智,根本不存在种种现观。这已经有经文说:“诸比丘,见苦的人,也见苦集”等等。而且这话并不是就不同时间见而说的。因为“朋友,见苦的人,也见苦集……也见趣向苦灭之道”这个说法,是具寿嘎旺巴提长老为了探讨具有一种见的人是否也具有对其他谛的见,而引用来成立这个道理的,并且是把见三谛单独连起来说的;否则,先前已见的后来不再见,那么见集等就无法连起来了。因为出世间道不像世间道那样以“已做者”的状态生起,它是断除者。这样通过连接,一切见都以见为最终,见就不再延续。所以,从教理和正理来看,种种现观都不合理,应该这样让他信服。如果他因此信服,那就很好。如果不信服,就应该用阿毗达摩《论事》第274节中关于范围的讨论让他信服。巴利
Apicāyaṃ nānābhisamayavādī evaṃ pucchitabbo ‘‘maggañāṇaṃ saccāni paṭivijjhantaṃ kiṃ ārammaṇato paṭivijjhati, udāhu kiccato’’ti? Jānamāno ‘‘kiccato’’ti vadeyya, ‘‘kiccato paṭivijjhantassa kiṃ nānābhisamayenā’’ti vatvā paṭipāṭiyānidassanena saññāpetabbo. Atha ‘‘ārammaṇato’’ti vadeyya, evaṃ sante tassa ñāṇassa vipassanāñāṇassa viya dukkhasamudayānaṃ accantapariññāsamucchedā na yuttā anissaṭattā. Tathā maggadassanaṃ. Na hi maggo sayameva attānaṃ ārabbha pavattatīti yuttaṃ, maggantaraparikappanāya pana anavaṭṭhānaṃ āpajjati, tasmā tīṇi saccāni kiccato, nirodhaṃ kiccato ca ārammaṇato ca paṭivijjhatīti evaṃ asammohato paṭivijjhantassa maggañāṇassa nattheva nānābhisamayo. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yo bhikkhave dukkhaṃ passati, dukkhasamudayampi so passatī’’tiādi. Na cetaṃ kālantaradassanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yo nu kho, āvuso, dukkhaṃ passati, dukkhasamudayampi …pe… dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadampi so passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1100) ekaccadassanasamaṅgino aññasaccadassanasamaṅgibhāvavicāraṇāyaṃ tadatthasādhanatthaṃ āyasmatā gavampatittherena ābhatattā, paccekañca saccattayadassanassa yojitattā, aññathā purimadiṭṭhassa puna adassanato samudayādidassanamayojaniyaṃ siyā. Na hi lokuttaramaggo lokiyamaggo viya katakārībhāvena pavattati samucchedakattā, tathā yojanena ca sabbadassanaṃ dassanantaraparamanti dassanānuparamo siyāti evaṃ āgamato yuttito ca nānābhisamayo na yujjatīti saññāpetabbo. Evaṃ ce saññattiṃ gacchati, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce gacchati, abhidhamme (kathā. 274) odhisokathāya saññāpetabboti.
“以灭为所缘”这个限定应当理解为:就是“以灭本身为所缘”,而不是“或者以它为所缘”。这样一来,通过作用通达灭也就成立了。“那时”是指在现观诸谛的时候。“二十事”等,是对前面所说的“三结”显示其具体内容。“在四漏中”这一说法是依阿毗达摩的方式说的,不是依经藏的方式说的。因为经里任何地方都没有出现过“四漏”。如果疑不是漏,那为什么说“有身见、疑、戒禁取,比丘们,这些称为见所断的漏”呢?所以接着说了“见所断”等。这里的“被包含故”,是用来说明:就像正思惟因为在慧蕴中作用相同而被归入慧蕴一样,这里疑也因为作用相同而被归入漏。巴利
Nirodhaṃ ārammaṇatoti nirodhameva ārammaṇatoti niyamo gahetabbo, na ārammaṇatovāti. Tena nirodhe kiccatopi paṭivedho siddho hoti. Tasmiṃ samayeti saccānaṃ abhisamaye. Vīsativatthukātiādi ‘‘tīṇi saññojanānī’’ti vuttānaṃ sarūpadassanaṃ. Catūsu āsavesūti idaṃ abhidhammanayena vuttaṃ, na suttantanayena. Na hi sutte katthaci cattāro āsavā āgatā atthi. Yadi vicikicchā na āsavo, atha kasmā ‘‘sakkāyadiṭṭhi vicikicchā sīlabbataparāmāso, ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā dassanā pahātabbā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘dassanā pahātabbā’’tiādi. Ettha pariyāpannattāti etena sammāsaṅkappassa viya paññākkhandhe kiccasabhāgatāya idha vicikicchāya āsavasaṅgaho katoti dasseti.
据说“一切我执都离不开有身见”,所以才说“六种见……已分别说明”。那种见在心念生起时、以及在相续中,都安立在同一个位置上。其中,前者是与心念同时生起的同一处,后者是断除同一处。为了把这两者都确定下来并显示出来,才说了“以见漏”等话。“以一切方式”就是以一切方式,意思是按同时生起的同一处和断除同一处这两种方式。“其余”是指从见漏中剩下的那些。三种漏就是欲漏、有漏、无明漏。因为前面确实说过“在四漏中”。因此,由于这里有许多漏应当断除,所以用了复数来表达:“比丘们,这些就叫做应当由见来断除的漏。”“古师”是指注释书的老师们,也有人说是“古代的中部诵者”。巴利
Sabbo attaggāho sakkāyadiṭṭhivinimutto natthīti vuttaṃ ‘‘channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ…pe… vibhattā’’ti. Sā hi diṭṭhi ekasmiṃ cittuppāde santāne ca ṭhitaṃ ekaṭṭhaṃ, tattha paṭhamaṃ sahajātekaṭṭhaṃ, itaraṃ pahānekaṭṭhaṃ, tadubhayampi niddhāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘diṭṭhāsavehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbathāpīti sabbappakārena, sahajātekaṭṭhapahānekaṭṭhappakārehīti attho. Avasesāti diṭṭhāsavato avasiṭṭhā. Tayopi āsavāti kāmāsavabhavāsavaavijjāsavā. Tathā hi pubbe ‘‘catūsu āsavesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā bahū evettha āsavā pahātabbā, tasmā bahuvacananiddeso kato ‘‘ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, āsavā dassanā pahātabbā’’ti. Porāṇānanti aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ, ‘‘purātanānaṃ majjhimabhāṇakāna’’nti ca vadanti.
在“见所断”等部分中,凡是应当说明的内容,前面都已经讲过了。巴利
Dassanā pahātabbātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
“律仪所断诸漏”的注释巴利
Saṃvarāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
22 “律仪等”是指律仪、受用、忍受、回避、除去这几种方式。“一切”是指四种圣道。应当这样理解:关于律仪所断等的解说,属于前分修行。因为前文已经说过,经教的用意在于:以清净随烦恼为开端,为显示漏尽的修行。因为确实不可能从一开始就直接修习圣道;实际情况是:人已经受持戒法、在诸根上守护根门,就实践所说的四方面修行——如理省察后受用一部分,如理省察后忍受一部分,如理省察后回避一部分,如理省察后除去一部分——由此进入思择的方法,次第勉力修习观,然后按圣道的次第断尽诸漏。因此世尊说:诸比丘,犹如大海次第倾斜、次第低下、次第深入,不是陡然像悬崖一样。正是这样,诸比丘,在这个法和律中,有次第学、次第作、次第行道,不是陡然就能证得现观。巴利
22.Saṃvarādīhīti saṃvarapaṭisevanaadhivāsanaparivajjanavinodanehi. Sabbesampīti catunnampi ariyamaggānaṃ. Ayanti saṃvarāpahātabbādikathā pubbabhāgapaṭipadāti veditabbā. Tathā hi heṭṭhā ‘‘upakkilesavisodhanaṃ ādiṃ katvā āsavakkhayapaṭipattidassanattha’’nti suttantadesanāya payojanaṃ vuttaṃ. Na hi sakkā ādito eva ariyamaggaṃ bhāvetuṃ, atha kho samādinnasīlo indriyesu guttadvāro ‘‘saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṃ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṃ vinodetī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348; ma. ni. 2.168) evaṃ vuttaṃ caturāpassenapaṭipattiṃ paṭipajjamāno sammasanavidhiṃ otaritvā anukkamena vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggapaṭipāṭiyā āsave khepeti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahāsamuddo anupubbaninno anupubbapoṇo anupubbapabbhāro, na āyatakeneva papāto, evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, imasmiṃ dhammavinaye anupubbasikkhā anupubbakiriyā anupubbapaṭipadā, na āyatakeneva aññāpaṭivedho’’ti (a. ni. 8.20; udā. 45; cūḷava. 385).
这里说的“此处”,这个“此处”一词,从各方面都说明:它是作为以根律仪防护自身的修行人所依靠的教法,同时也否定其他教法有同样的性质,所以说“在这个教法中”。“观察过患”就是审察过患。“被摩擦”就是被触碰。“随形好”是指手、脚、笑、谈话、看等各类细节部分。因为对这些不如理作意时,烦恼就会随着这些细节逐一产生,所以称为“随形好”。“执取总相”是指执取女人、男人等总体相,或者执取那些成为烦恼基础的相。“依燃烧法门之理路”是指应按照《燃烧经》中所传述的理路来理解“观察过患”,这是连接。犹如“女人的根”是女根,不是这样,这里只是眼就是根,所以是眼根。“犹如岸边的乌鸦”是指岸边的乌鸦,是停留在渡河的岸边不动的乌鸦。“如瓮中的乌龟”等也是如此。巴利
Idhāti ayaṃ idha-saddo sabbākārato indriyasaṃvarasaṃvutassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano, aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane’’ti. Ādīnavapaṭisaṅkhāti ādīnavapaccavekkhaṇā. Sampalimaṭṭhanti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.6.58) ghaṃsitaṃ. Anubyañjanasoti hatthapādahasitakathitavilokitādippakārabhāgaso. Tañhi ayoniso manasikaroto kilesānaṃ anu anu byañjanato ‘‘anubyañjana’’nti vuccati. Nimittaggāhoti itthipurisanimittādikassa vā kilesavatthubhūtassa vā nimittassa gāho. Ādittapariyāyanayenāti ādittapariyāye (saṃ. ni. 4.28; mahāva. 54) āgatanayena veditabbā ādīnavapaṭisaṅkhāti yojanā. Yathā itthiyā indriyanti itthindriyaṃ, na evamidaṃ, idaṃ pana cakkhumeva indriyanti cakkhundriyanti. Titthakāko viyāti titthe kāko titthakāko, nadiyā samatikkamanatitthe niyataṭṭhitiko. Āvāṭakacchapotiādīsupi eseva nayo.
像这样,因为它是与那(眼根)相系而运作的,所以安立在眼根上、以眼根为确定处所的防护,就是眼根律仪。忘失正念,是指与念对立的不善法。虽然在其他地方,有分心也能不计其数地无间生起,但在净色被撞击和转向心生起之间,只有两个有分心生起——这就是心的定律。因此,论中说有分心“生起两次后灭去”。巴利
Evaṃ tappaṭibaddhavuttitāya cakkhundriye niyataṭṭhāno saṃvaro cakkhundriyasaṃvaro. Muṭṭhassaccaṃ satipaṭipakkhā akusaladhammā. Yadipi aññattha asaṅkheyyampi bhavaṅgacittaṃ nirantaraṃ uppajjati, pasādaghaṭṭanāvajjanuppādānaṃ pana antare dve eva bhavaṅgacittāni uppajjantīti ayaṃ cittaniyāmoti āha bhavaṅge ‘‘dvikkhattuṃ uppajjitvā niruddhe’’ti.
在速行刹那中,如果出现“若有破戒……”等说法,为了不再重复说明,这里已经把全部内容都讲完了,所以应当按六门中各自可能出现的情况来配合理解。因为在五门里,并没有所谓以身语恶行为特征的破戒与律仪;所以那一部分应依意门来说明,另一部分则要配合六门来说明。像失念这类与念对立的不善法,可能在五门中生起;但表现为身语违犯的破戒,绝不可能在五门中生起,因为五门的速行心不会产生表知。巴利
Javanakkhaṇepana sace dussīlyaṃ vātiādi (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.15; dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 1352) puna avacanatthaṃ idheva sabbaṃ vuttanti chasu dvāresu yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Na hi pañcadvāre kāyavacīduccaritasaṅkhāto dussīlyasaṃvaro atthīti so manodvāravasena, itaro channampi dvārānaṃ vasena yojetabbo. Muṭṭhassaccādīnañhi satipaṭipakkhādilakkhaṇānaṃ akusaladhammānaṃ siyā pañcadvāre uppatti, na tveva kāyikavācasikavītikkamabhūtassa dussīlyassa tattha uppatti pañcadvārikajavanānaṃ aviññattijanakattāti.
如何是在问:以什么样的方式,在速行中生起的不律仪被称为“眼门的不律仪”?这就是举这个例子要说明的意思。用“如同……”等比喻来说明:就像城门口没有防护时,与城门相关的房舍等也就没有防护;同样,当速行中有不律仪时,与它相关的诸门和有分等也就处于没有防护的状态。这只是用比喻指出:一种不律仪与另一种没有防护之间,仅仅在“没有防护”这一点上是共同的,并不是说前后有共同性,也不是说内外有共同性。而速行与诸门等的关联,应当理解为它们属于同一个相续流。从因缘的角度看,先前已生起的有分等,在速行发生的当下虽然不存在,但就像眼等感官因能成就果报而被称为“存在”一样,它也被称为“存在”。因为并不是只有正在持续存在的东西才被称为“存在”。因此,把在诸门和有分等之后生起的速行看作外在的,比喻为城门;把另一边(有分等)比喻为城内的房舍等。因为在究竟意义上,速行并没有真正的外在性,另一边也没有真正的内在性。然而,根据佛陀的开示:“诸比丘,此心是光明的,但它被外来的随烦恼所染污”(《增支部》1.49)等,可以方便地说:作为外来者、只是偶尔生起的速行是外在的,而与之性质相反的另一边(有分等)是内在的。或者也可以这样理解:当速行中的不律仪生起之后,诸门和有分等就因此成为不律仪的因,于是就像城门口一样,速行进入之后,破戒等盗贼就在诸门和有分等中偷盗、毁坏善法财宝。因为当不律仪生起时,诸门等显然成为它的因,而它一生起,就必然排斥诸门等作为防护所依的状态。以上就是不律仪等运作的方式。在五门中,当色等所缘呈现于面前时,不善速行随因缘而生起,然后沉入有分;接着意门的速行以同一个所缘为对象,又沉入有分;然后又在同一门中,以“女人、男人”等确定对象之后,速行沉入有分;再一次,以贪染等的方式速行;如果再次有那样的所缘来到面前,在五门中就会对色等生起与之前相似的速行。针对这一点,才说“同样,当速行中破戒等生起时,由于有不律仪,门也就没有守护”等等。以上是先就不律仪这一方面所作的解释。巴利
Yathā kinti yena pakārena javane uppajjamāno asaṃvaro ‘‘cakkhudvāre asaṃvaro’’ti vuccati, taṃ nidassanaṃ kinti attho. Yathātiādinā nagaradvāre asaṃvare sati taṃsambandhānaṃ gharādīnaṃ asaṃvutatā viya javane asaṃvare sati taṃsambandhānaṃ dvārādīnaṃ asaṃvutatāti aññāsaṃvare aññāsaṃvutatāsāmaññameva nidasseti, na pubbāparasāmaññaṃ, antobahisāmaññaṃ vā. Sambandho ca javanena dvārādīnaṃ ekasantatipariyāpannatāya eva daṭṭhabbo. Paccayabhāvena purimanipphannaṃ javanakāle asantampi bhavaṅgādi phalanipphattiyā cakkhādi viya santaṃyeva nāma. Na hi dharamānaṃyeva ‘‘santa’’nti vuccati, tasmā sati dvārabhavaṅgādike pacchā uppajjamānaṃ javanaṃ bāhiraṃ viya katvā nagaradvārasamānaṃ vuttaṃ. Itarañca antonagaragharādisamānaṃ. Javanassa hi paramatthato asatipi bāhirabhāve itarassa ca abbhantarabhāve ‘‘pabhassaramidaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, tañca kho āgantukehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭha’’nti (a. ni. 1.49) ādivacanato āgantukabhūtassa kadāci kadāci uppajjamānassa javanassa bāhirabhāvo, tabbidhurasabhāvassa itarassa abbhantarabhāvo ca pariyāyato veditabbo. Javane vā asaṃvare uppanne tato paraṃ dvārabhavaṅgādīnaṃ asaṃvarahetubhāvāpattito nagaradvārasadisena javanena pavisitvā dussīlyādicorānaṃ dvārabhavaṅgādīsu musanaṃ kusalabhaṇḍavināsanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Uppanne hi asaṃvare dvārādīnaṃ tassa hetubhāvo paññāyati, so ca uppajjamānoyeva dvārādīnaṃ saṃvarūpanissayabhāvaṃ paṭibāhentoyeva pavattatīti ayañhettha asaṃvarādīnaṃ pavattinayo. Pañcadvāre rūpādiārammaṇe āpāthagate yathāpaccayaṃ akusalajavane uppajjitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otiṇṇe manodvārikajavanaṃ taṃyeva ārammaṇaṃ katvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, puna tasmiṃyeva dvāre ‘‘itthī puriso’’tiādinā visayaṃ vavatthapetvā javanaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, puna vāre rajjanādivasena javanaṃ javati, punapi yadi tādisaṃ ārammaṇaṃ āpāthamāgacchati, taṃsadisameva pañcadvāre rūpādīsu javanaṃ uppajjati. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘evameva javane dussīlyādīsu uppannesu tasmiṃ asaṃvare sati dvārampi agutta’’ntiādi. Ayaṃ tāva asaṃvarapakkhe atthavaṇṇanā.
在防护这一方面,也应当用同样的方法来理解其含义。具足防护的人被称为“防护者”,所以论中说“也就是指‘已具备’”。“合在一起说”,是指把“具足巴帝摩卡防护”这一语句,在意义上视为毫无差别、同一含义而说。这一解释与后面圣典的内容相吻合,所以更为优胜、更为善巧。因此说“正如……”等等。“那个yanti是词尾变化”,这句是在显示:词性变化的同时也造成了格的变化;或者,这个yanti是不变词,意思是“各个、众多”。“能造成损害”,是指使心受损恼、产生心苦。如前面所说,以烦恼为因、伴随燃烧的果报,就是“果报的热恼”。这里为了说明诸漏以及其他能造成损害的烦恼如何产生热恼,便说了“于眼门……”等等,这很容易理解。在这里应当知道这样的区分:防护的方法、应防护的对象、防护本身、防护从何而来、防护在何处发生,以及防护的果。怎么区分呢?“如理思择”是防护的方法;眼根是应防护的对象;被“防护”一词所包含的念就是防护;“对于没有防护的人……”说明防护的界限,因为防护正是从无防护而来。依据“应防护的对象”这一说法,此处防护的范围得以成立;由于眼根与防护智是在色所缘上受到防护,所以这一义理虽未明说也自然成立。诸漏不生,以及由彼等所缘相而来的烦恼等热恼不再存在——这就是防护之果。对于耳门等,也应如此配合理解。“于一切处”,即在意门与五门,于一切门中。巴利
Saṃvarapakkhepi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Saṃvarena samannāgato puggalo saṃvutoti vuttoti āha ‘‘upetoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Ekajjhaṃ katvāti ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’ti padañca atthato abhinnaṃ samānaṃ katvā. Ayameva cettha atthosundarataro uparipāḷiyā saṃsandanato. Tenāha ‘‘tathāhī’’tiādi. Yanti ādesoti iminā liṅgavipallāsena saddhiṃ vacanavipallāso katoti dasseti, nipātapadaṃ vā etaṃ paccattaputhuvacanatthaṃ. Vighātakarāti cittavighātakaraṇā cittadukkhanibbattakā ca. Yathāvuttakilesahetukā dāhānubandhā vipākā eva vipākapariḷāhā. Yathā panettha āsavā aññe ca vighātakarā kilesavipākapariḷāhā sambhavanti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhudvārehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva. Ettha ca saṃvaraṇūpāyo, saṃvaritabbaṃ, saṃvaro, yato so saṃvaro, yattha saṃvaro, yañca saṃvaraphalanti ayaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo. Kathaṃ? Paṭisaṅkhā yonisoti hi saṃvaraṇūpāyo. Cakkhundriyaṃ saṃvaritabbaṃ. Saṃvaraggahaṇena gahitā sati saṃvaro. Asaṃvutassāti saṃvaraṇāvadhi. Asaṃvarato hi saṃvaraṇaṃ. Saṃvaritabbaggahaṇena siddho idha saṃvaravisayo. Cakkhundriyañhi saṃvarañāṇaṃ rūpārammaṇe saṃvarīyatīti avuttasiddhoyamattho. Āsavatannimittakilesādipariḷāhābhāvo phalaṃ. Evaṃ sotadvārādīsupi yojetabbaṃ. Sabbatthevāti manodvāre pañcadvāre cāti sabbasmiṃ dvāre.
关于应当通过受用来断除的漏的注释巴利
Paṭisevanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
23 在“如理省思之后受用衣”等语句中,“为了防御寒冷”等所说的那种省察,就是如理省思。“这样的”指像这样可爱的所缘。“通过有爱的途径而享受”指以有爱为门径,对已修习的所缘加以享受的人。“衣”指下裙等任何衣物。“受用”指以下裙等方式来使用。“仅仅为了”是对目的与限量的界定。因为修行者受用衣的目的,确实就是为了防御寒冷等。“寒冷的”指由界的扰动或季节变化而产生的寒冷。“为了防御”指为了遮止、为了消除以寒冷为缘所生的变异。“暑热的”指由火的热恼所产生的暑热。“蚊虻等”是显而易见的。再者,“仅仅为了”是对确定目的与限量的界定。因为受用衣的确定目的,就是遮蔽羞处,其他目的只是偶尔的。“羞处”指隐秘的部位。因为在哪个肢体暴露时,羞耻被扰乱、被破坏,那个由于会扰乱羞耻而称为“羞处”;为了遮蔽它而受用衣。巴利
23.Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvarantiādīsu ‘‘sītassa paṭighātāyā’’tiādinā vuttaṃ paccavekkhaṇameva yoniso paṭisaṅkhā. Īdisanti evarūpaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ. Bhavapatthanāya assādayatoti bhavapatthanāmukhena bhāvitaṃ ārammaṇaṃ assādentassa. Cīvaranti nivāsanādi yaṃ kiñci cīvaraṃ. Paṭisevatīti nivāsanādivasena paribhuñjati. Yāvadevāti payojanaparimāṇaniyamanaṃ. Sītapaṭighātādiyeva hi yogino cīvarapaṭisevane payojanaṃ. Sītassāti dhātukkhobhato vā utupariṇāmato vā uppannasītassa. Paṭighātāyāti paṭibāhanatthaṃ tappaccayassa vikārassa vinodanatthaṃ. Uṇhassāti aggisantāpato uppannassa uṇhassa. Ḍaṃsādayo pākaṭāyeva. Puna yāvadevāti niyatapayojanaparimāṇaniyamanaṃ. Niyatañhi payojanaṃ cīvarapaṭisevanassa hirikopīnapaṭicchādanaṃ, itaraṃ kadāci kadāci . Hirikopīnanti sambādhaṭṭhānaṃ . Yasmiñhi aṅge vivaṭe hirīkuppati vinassati, taṃ hiriyā kopanato hirikopīnaṃ, tassa paṭicchādanatthaṃ cīvaraṃ paṭisevati.
团食:指任何一种食物。因为它是靠乞食、以食团落入钵中的方式得来的,各处乞得的食团在早晨聚集在一起,所以称为“团食”。不为了嬉戏:不是为了玩乐。不为了骄逸:不是为了力骄、慢骄、人骄的缘故。不为了装饰:不是为了身体各部分丰满。不为了庄严:不是为了那些部分的美丽,意思是说不是为了肤色圆满。应当知道,这些词句依次是为了断除痴、嗔、身形、容色、贪的所依。或者说,前两句是为了防止自己生起染污,后两句也是为了防止他人生起染污。这四句都应当理解为是为了断除沉溺于欲乐。为了此身:为了这个色身。为了存续、延续:是为了让相续安住,为了不间断地维持,为了长久安住,为了让命根持续运作。为了止息伤害:是为了平息饥饿之苦。为了资助梵行:是为了资助教法之道与梵行。如是:就是以这种方式。我当制止旧受:我当制止因未进食为缘而生起的旧受。我当不令新受生起:我当不令因已进食为缘而生起的新受生起。因为当新受尚未生起时,他受用食物正是为了令它不生起。在这里,所谓因未进食为缘而生起的受,就是像那样生起、以饥饿为因的受。因为对于未进食的人,这种受会越来越增长地生起;而因已进食为缘而生起的受,也是以饥饿为因的肢体灼热、刺痛等受,尚未生起。因为这种受以已进食为缘,未生起的就不会生起。应当知道,这些受以伤害为因,所以在伤害上有差别。巴利
Piṇḍapātanti yaṃ kiñci āhāraṃ. So hi piṇḍolyena bhikkhanāya patte patanato tattha tattha laddhabhikkhāpiṇḍānaṃ pāto sannipātoti ‘‘piṇḍapāto’’ti vuccati. Neva davāyāti na kīḷanāya. Na madāyāti na balamadamānamadapurisamadatthaṃ. Na maṇḍanāyāti na aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ pīṇanabhāvatthaṃ. Na vibhūsanāyāti na tesaṃyeva sobhanatthaṃ, chavisampatiatthanti attho. Imāni ca padāni yathākkamaṃ moha-dosa-saṇṭhāna-vaṇṇa-rāgūpanissaya-pahānatthāni veditabbāni. Purimaṃ vā dvayaṃ attano attano saṃkilesuppattinisedhanatthaṃ, itaraṃ parassapi. Cattāripi kāmasukhallikānuyogassa pahānatthaṃ vuttānīti veditabbāni. Kāyassāti rūpakāyassa. Ṭhitiyā yāpanāyāti pabandhaṭṭhitatthañceva pavattiyā avicchedanatthañca cirakālaṭṭhitatthaṃ jīvitindriyassa pavattāpanatthaṃ. Vihiṃsūparatiyāti jighacchādukkhassa uparamaṇatthaṃ. Brahmacariyānuggahāyāti sāsanamaggabrahmacariyānaṃ anuggahatthaṃ. Itīti evaṃ iminā upāyena. Purāṇañca vedanaṃ paṭihaṅkhāmīti purāṇaṃ abhuttapaccayā uppajjanakavedanaṃ paṭihanissāmi. Navañca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmīti navaṃ bhuttapaccayā uppajjanakavedanaṃ na uppādessāmīti. Tassā hi anuppannāya anuppajjanatthameva āhāraṃ paribhuñjati. Ettha ca abhuttapaccayā uppajjanakavedanā nāma yathāpavattā jighacchānimittā vedanā. Sā hi abhuñjantassa bhiyyo bhiyyo pavaḍḍhanavasena uppajjati, bhuttapaccayā uppajjanakavedanāpi khudānimittāva aṅgadāhasūlādivedanā appavattā. Sā hi bhuttapaccayā anuppannāva na uppajjissatīti. Vihiṃsānimittatā cetāsaṃ vihiṃsāya viseso.
我将这样维持生存,让四种威仪(行、住、坐、卧)不间断地持续下去。这里说的“维持生存”,指的是命根的延续;而此处说的“维持生存”,是指四种威仪不间断,这就是两者之间的差别。“无过失”和“安乐住”:通过避免不如法的寻求、接受和受用,就是无过失;通过限量受用,就是安乐住。或者也可以说,因为以不适合、不节制的饮食为缘,避免了不满、懈怠、打哈欠、被智者呵责等过失,所以是无过失;因为以适合、节制的饮食为缘,身体力量得以产生,所以是安乐住。通过避免吃得满腹、撑饱肚子,就不会有躺得舒服、触感舒服、睡得舒服等情形,所以是无过失;通过只吃四五口团食、了知适量,成就了适合四种威仪的状态,所以是安乐住。对此确实有这样的说法:巴利
Yātrā ca me bhavissatīti yāpanā ca me catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ bhavissati. Yāpanāyāti iminā jīvitindriyayāpanā vuttā, idha catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ avicchedasaṅkhātā yāpanāti ayametāsaṃ viseso. Anavajjatā ca phāsuvihāro cāti ayuttapariyesanapaṭiggahaṇaparibhogaparivajjanena anavajjatā, parimitaparibhogena phāsuvihāro. Asappāyāparimitabhojanapaccayā aratitandīvijambhitāviññugarahādidosābhāvena vā anavajjatā, sappāyaparimitabhojanapaccayā kāyabalasambhavena phāsuvihāro. Yāvadatthaudarāvadehakabhojanaparivajjanena seyyasukhapassasukhamiddhasukhādīnaṃ abhāvato anavajjatā, catupañcālopamattaññīnabhojanena catuiriyāpathayogyatāpādanato phāsuvihāro. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“ 四五口饭食不吃,喝水。
这足以让发勤精进的比丘安住于安乐了。”巴利
‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
到这里,目的就已经交代清楚了,中道也得到了说明。巴利
Ettāvatā payojanapariggaho, majjhimā ca paṭipadā dīpitā hoti.
坐卧具就是卧具和坐具。因为人在精舍等处躺下、睡觉,或者坐下,那个地方就叫坐卧具。为了去除时节带来的危险,并且乐于独处:时节本身就是一种折磨,所以叫危险,它会引起身体疾病和内心散乱;或者也可以说,前面所说的时节,以及狮子、老虎等明显可见的危险,还有贪、嗔等隐藏不露的危险,都叫时节危险。为了去除这些危险,也为了获得独处的快乐。而且,就像受用衣服是为了遮蔽羞处一样,这也是它固定的用途,所以又说“只是为了”。巴利
Senāsananti sayanañca āsanañca. Yattha hi vihārādike seti nipajjati, āsati nisīdati, taṃ senāsanaṃ. Utuparissayavinodanapaṭisallānārāmatthanti utuyeva parisahanaṭṭhena parissayo, sarīrābādhacittavikkhepakaro, atha vā yathāvutto utu ca sīhabyagghādipākaṭaparissayo ca rāgadosādipaṭicchannaparissayo ca utuparissayo, tassa vinodanatthañceva ekībhāvasukhatthañca. Idañca cīvarapaṭisevane hirikopīnapaṭicchādanaṃ viya tassa niyatapayojananti puna ‘‘yāvadevā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“病缘药资具”是指:对治疾病而现起的,就是病缘;因为这是医生所允许的东西,所以是药;又因为这是维持生命所需诸物的性质,所以是资具——这样合起来,就是病缘药资具,即那个。“已生的”:已经生起、已经产生的。“诸病苦受”:由疾病、由界扰动以及由那所生的病而生的那些受。“为达无苦最胜”:就是为了达到无苦的最高状态而受用,这是把文句连起来理解。这里应当只按简要的方式理解经文的解释。“由生起新受”:不只是未来会有果报的热恼,更应当知道,以过度饮食为缘,就像阿拉萨咤迦等例子那样,也会生起新的苦受。巴利
Gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhāranti rogassa paccanīkappavattiyā gilānapaccayo, tato eva bhisakkassa anuññātavatthutāya bhesajjaṃ, jīvitassa parivārasambhārabhāvehi parikkhāro cāti gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhāro, taṃ. Uppannānanti jātānaṃ nibbattānaṃ. Veyyābādhikānanti byābādhato dhātukkhobhato ca tannibbattarogato ca jātānaṃ. Vedanānanti dukkhavedanānaṃ. Abyābajjhaparamatāyāti niddukkhaparamabhāvāya paṭisevāmīti yojanā. Evamettha saṅkhepeneva pāḷivaṇṇanā veditabbā. Navavedanuppādanatopīti na kevalaṃ āyatiṃ eva vipākapariḷāhā, atha kho atibhojanapaccayā alaṃsāṭakādīnaṃ viya navavedanuppādanatopi veditabbāti attho.
关于“应当通过忍耐来断除的漏”的注释巴利
Adhivāsanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
24 堪忍就是能忍耐。业处行者动摇,就叫舍弃业处,所以说“动摇、飘摇、放弃业处”。即使极热也能忍受,但他忍受时不像裸形沙门等人那样忍受,而是以不舍弃业处的方式忍受,因此说“就像那位长老一样”。在外部经行:指洞窟外面的经行处。正因为害怕热,也就是害怕地狱之火的热,所以说“省察无间大地狱”,他这样省察:“我在过去无数次经历过那种热,而现在这个比那个要轻微得多。”在这里:指在这个地方。应当知道,这里说的热恼如同火的热恼,因为接下来要说到太阳的热恼。巴利
24.Khamoti khamanako. Kammaṭṭhānikassa calanaṃ nāma kammaṭṭhānapariccāgoti āha ‘‘calati kampati kammaṭṭhānaṃ vijahatī’’ti. Adhimattampi uṇhaṃ sahati, sahanto ca na naggasamaṇādayo viya sahati, atha kho kammaṭṭhānāvijahanenāti āha ‘‘sveva thero viyā’’ti. Bahicaṅkameti leṇato bahi caṅkame. Uṇhabhayenevāti narakaggiuṇhabhayeneva. Tenāha ‘‘avīcimahānirayaṃ paccavekkhitvā’’ti, tampi ‘‘mayā anekakkhattuṃ anubhūtaṃ, idaṃ pana tato mudutara’’nti evaṃ paccavekkhitvā. Etthāti etasmiṃ ṭhāne. Aggisantāpova veditabbo sūriyasantāpassa parato vuccamānattā.
他心里想“我是戒行清净的人”,在任何情况下都不把死亡放在首位,而是生起了以无悔为根源的喜。随着喜的生起:也就是遍满的喜一生起的同时。毒退散了:毒被喜的力量所压制,就在被咬的当下消散了。就在那里:就是在被蛇咬的那个部位。获得心一境性之后:按照“心中有喜的人,身体就会轻安”等经文所说的方式,达到了定。巴利
Parisuddhasīlohamasmīti sabbathāpi ‘‘visuddhasīlohamasmī’’ti maraṇaṃ aggahetvā avippaṭisāramūlikaṃ pītiṃ uppādesi. Saha pītuppādāti pharaṇapītiyā uppādena saheva. Visaṃ nivattitvāti pītivegena ajjhotthataṃ daṭṭhamukheneva bhassitvā. Tatthevāti sappena daṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva. Cittekaggataṃ labhitvāti ‘‘pītimanassa kāyo passambhatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.466; 3.359; saṃ. ni. 5.376; a. ni. 3.96; 11.12) nayena samādhānaṃ pāpuṇitvā.
对资具知足,并以修习为应当安住的处所,因此有“安住之处”,这就是“资具知足修习安住”;它的状态就是资具知足修习安住性,以那个(安住性)。大长老,就是年长的长老。言语本身即为欲使人了解其义者的路径,就是言语之道。巴利
Paccayesu santoso bhāvanāya ca āramitabbaṭṭhānatāya ārāmo assāti paccayasantosabhāvanārāmo, tassa bhāvo paccaya…pe… rāmatā, tāya. Mahātheroti vuḍḍhataro thero. Vacanameva tadatthaṃ ñāpetukāmānaṃ pathoti vacanapatho.
或者从“不乐”的意思来说,就是剧烈。凡是不能带来快乐的,就是不可意的,被称为“剧烈”。“如此性质者”这句话,是在解释“忍耐种类”这个词的意思。仅仅在片刻之间,风一吹起,就好像要把心脏劈开一样。成为不来者之后般涅槃,就是证得阿拉汉果之后般涅槃。巴利
Asukhaṭṭhena vā tibbā. Yañhi na sukhaṃ, taṃ aniṭṭhaṃ ‘‘tibba’’nti vuccati. Evaṃsabhāvoti ‘‘adhivāsanajātiyo’’ti padassa atthamāha. Muhuttena khaṇeva vāte hadayaṃ phāletuṃ āraddheyeva. Anāgāmī hutvā parinibbāyīti arahattaṃ patvā parinibbāyi.
“一切处”是这样:就像“被热触到的人想要冷”等等所说的,在一切情况下都应当知道,以热等为所缘的欲漏会生起;这里的意思是,冷或热是不可意的。有了“我”的执取,就会有“我所有的”执取,所以说“这是我的冷、热,这种执取就是见漏”。冷等来临时,能承受、能忍耐的人,就好像把它们承放到自己身上安住着,所以说“承当而安住”。不摒弃,就是不抖落。因为谁忍受不了冷等,谁就好像在摒弃、在抖落它们。巴利
Evaṃ sabbatthāti ‘‘uṇhena phuṭṭhassa sītaṃ patthayato’’tiādinā sabbattha uṇhādinimittaṃ kāmāsavuppatti veditabbā, sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā aniṭṭhanti adhippāyo. Attaggāhe sati attaniyaggāhoti āha ‘‘mayhaṃ sītaṃ uṇhanti gāho diṭṭhāsavo’’ti. Sītādike upagate sahantī khamantī te attano upari vāsentī viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘āropetvā vāsetiyevā’’ti . Na nirassatīti na vidhunati. Yo hi sītādike na sahati, so te nirassanto vidhunanto viya hotīti.
关于应当通过避开而断除的漏的注释巴利
Parivajjanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
25 “我是沙门”这句话的意思是:他没有这样想过——“我是沙门,我的生或死又算什么呢?”“省察之后”是指对村落、地方、利益等加以省察之后。“回避”是指从大象等附近离开。“荆棘处”是指荆棘所在的地方。“非人所污处”是指被非人游荡所染污的地方,也就是有危险的意思。“平坦”就是平坦,意思是没有不平坦。或者,曾做过那样的非行。巴利
25.Ahaṃsamaṇoti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.6.58) ‘‘ahaṃ samaṇo, kiṃ mama jīvitena vā maraṇena vā’’ti evaṃ acintetvāti adhippāyo. Paccavekkhitvāti gāmappadesaṃ payojanādiñca paccavekkhitvā. Paṭikkamatīti hatthiādīnaṃ samīpagamanato apakkamati. Kaṇṭakā yattha tiṭṭhanti, taṃ kaṇṭakaṭṭhānaṃ. Amanussaduṭṭhānīti amanussasañcārena dūsitāni, saparissayānīti attho. Samānanti samaṃ, avisamanti attho. Akāsi vā tādisaṃ anācāraṃ.
所谓“戒律仪”,这里如果要说明“怎样回避才算是戒”,那在前面已经讲过了。另外,从“回避凶暴的象”这种说法来看,回避象等也是奉行世尊的话语,所以应当知道,这本身就是行仪戒。巴利
Sīlasaṃvarasaṅkhātenāti ‘‘kathaṃ parivajjanaṃ sīla’’nti yadettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Apica ‘‘caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjetī’’ti vacanato hatthiādiparivajjanampi bhagavato vacanānuṭṭhānanti katvā ācārasīlamevāti veditabbaṃ.
通过遣除而断除的漏的注释巴利
Vinodanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
26 26. “以此因由”是说:由于这个原因——因为它由非如理作意所生起,也因为它与贪等俱行,还因为它是善法的对立面等等——所以这个寻是不善的,这就是它的含义。用同样的方式,“有罪”等说法也应该这样理解。在这里,通过“不善”等词,显示的是欲寻在现世中的过患;通过“有苦报”,显示的是后世的过患。“导致自苦”等处,也应该用同样的方式来说明其过患。对于已经生起的欲寻,“不忍受”就是指不再让那样的寻生起,而这也可以说就是断除它、遣除它、消除它、使它归于无有。因此,经文先说了“不忍受已生起的欲寻”,然后才说“断除”等。为了说明这个意思,就说了“不忍受时,他做什么呢?断除”等等。这里所说的断除,只是镇伏,而不是正断。为了说明这一点,接着说了“遣除”等;这是以镇伏的方式显示其含义。巴利
26.Itipīti iminā kāraṇena, ayonisomanasikārasamuṭṭhitattāpi lobhādisahagatattāpi kusalapaṭipakkhatopītiādīhi kāraṇehi ayaṃ vitakko akusaloti attho. Iminā nayena sāvajjotiādīsupi attho veditabbo. Ettha ca akusalotiādinā diṭṭhadhammikaṃ kāmavitakkassa ādīnavaṃ dasseti, dukkhavipākoti iminā samparāyikaṃ. Attabyābādhāya saṃvattatītiādīsupi imināva nayena ādīnavavibhāvanā veditabbā. Uppannassa kāmavitakkassa anadhivāsanaṃ nāma puna tādisassa anuppādanaṃ, taṃ panassa pahānaṃ vinodanaṃ byantikaraṇaṃ anabhāvagamananti ca vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’ti vatvā ‘‘pajahatī’’tiādi vuttanti tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘anadhivāsento kiṃ karotīti pajahatī’’tiādimāha. Pahānañcettha vikkhambhanameva, na samucchedoti dassetuṃ ‘‘vinodetī’’tiādi vuttanti vikkhambhanavaseneva attho dassito.
欲寻思:从相应和所缘两方面来说,就是与欲俱行的寻思。因此说“与欲相应的寻思”等等。所谓“与欲相应”,就是与称为欲贪的欲相应,并且系着于称为事欲的所缘。“已生起、已生起”:这可能是说对这些恶寻思每次生起时的执取,也可能是说无余的执取。对于前者,所以说“刚生起”,意思是才一生起;为了显示无余执取的含义,则说“纵使生起百次”。“亲里寻思”:由于在家情感的依恋,对亲属生起“我们的亲属生活快乐、具足成就”之类的寻思。“地方寻思”:由于同样的在家情感的依恋,对地方生起“我们的地方食物丰足、谷物丰收、令人愉悦”之类的寻思。“不死寻思”:以为通过蹲踞勤苦等苦行折磨自身,未来自我便能快乐不死,与这种难行相关的、为了不死的寻思;或者以不死为所缘,伴随不死矫乱见的寻思——这个既是不死也是寻思,所以叫不死寻思。“与怜愍他人相应”:对他人,如侍者等,以随喜等方式生起的、类似怜愍而在家情感依恋所相应的寻思。“与利养、恭敬、名声相应”:以衣服等利养、恭敬和名声为所缘而相应。“与不被轻视相应”:生起“但愿别人不轻视我,不把我看低,像石头伞一样尊重我”这样的寻思。巴利
Kāmavitakkoti sampayogato ārammaṇato ca kāmasahagato vitakko. Tenāha ‘‘kāmapaṭisaṃyuttotakko’’tiādi. Kāmapaṭisaṃyuttoti hi kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena sampayutto vatthukāmasaṅkhātena paṭibaddho ca. Uppannuppanneti tesaṃ pāpavitakkānaṃ uppādāvatthāgahaṇaṃ vā kataṃ siyā anavasesaggahaṇaṃ vā. Tesu paṭhamaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘upannamatte’’ti, sampatijāteti attho. Anavasesaggahaṇaṃ byāpanicchāya hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘satakkhattumpi uppanne’’ti vuttaṃ. Ñātivitakkoti ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātayo sukhajīvino sampattiyuttā’’tiādinā gehassitapemavasena ñātake ārabbha uppannavitakko. Janapadavitakkoti ‘‘amhākaṃ janapado subhikkho sampannasasso ramaṇīyo’’tiādinā gehassitapemavaseneva janapadaṃ ārabbha uppannavitakko. Ukkuṭikappadhānādīhi dukkhe nijjiṇṇe samparāye attā sukhī hoti amaroti dukkarakārikāya paṭisaṃyutto amaratthāya vitakko, taṃ vā ārabbha amarāvikkhepadiṭṭhisahagato amaro ca so vitakko cāti amaravitakko. Parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyuttoti paresu upaṭṭhākādīsu sahanandikādivasena pavatto anuddayatāpatirūpako gehassitapemena paṭisaṃyutto vitakko. Lābhasakkārasilokapaṭisaṃyuttoti cīvarādilābhena ceva sakkārena ca kittisaddena ca ārammaṇakaraṇavasena paṭisaṃyutto. Anavaññattipaṭisaṃyuttoti ‘‘aho vata maṃ pare na avajāneyyuṃ, na heṭṭhā katvā maññeyyuṃ, pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garuṃ kareyyu’’nti uppannavitakko.
欲寻思之所以叫欲寻思,是因为它的本质就是欲的思惟,而且在欲思惟的生起中最突出,具有欲的行相,所以说“在这里,欲寻思就是欲漏”。所谓“其差别”,就是欲漏的差别,意思是与贪俱行。所谓“遣除”,就是以此把欲寻思等从自己的相续中驱除出去,所以叫遣除,也就是精进。因此说“以名为精进防护的遣除”。巴利
Kāmavitakko kāmasaṅkappanasabhāvattā kāmasaṅkappapavattiyā sātisayattā ca kāmanākāroti āha ‘‘kāmavitakko panettha kāmāsavo’’ti. Tabbisesoti kāmāsavaviseso, rāgasahavuttīti adhippāyo. Kāmavitakkādike vinodeti attano santānato nīharati etenāti vinodanaṃ, vīriyanti āha ‘‘vīriyasaṃvarasaṅkhātena vinodanenā’’ti.
关于应当通过修习断除的漏的注释巴利
Bhāvanāpahātabbaāsavavaṇṇanā
27 由于“修习、多修习七觉支,能圆满明与解脱”这一说法,不能证得明与解脱、不能超越整个轮回之苦,就是不修习的过患;反过来,以成为世尊的亲生子等角度来看,就是修习的功德,应当了知。所谓“上三道刹那所生”,是指在第二道等刹那中生起,因为以修习为增上,所以属于第二道等所摄,这是它的意思。难道那些不就是出世间吗?为什么要加这个限定呢?这并不是限定,而是需要被限定的对象,这里所指的正是出世间觉支,而它们确实是上三道刹那所生。关于觉支,“于觉支中无迷乱”,是指在观、禅那、道、果这些觉支中,没有迷乱的意思。因为当以混合方式宣说觉支时,是依彼分等远离之见来分别说明观觉支等,并不是只说已生起的出世间觉支,所以在觉支中不会产生迷乱,而且觉支修习的实践之道也已经完全阐明。然而在这里,即在这部经中,或在这一部分中,因为修习道是增上的,所以只应采用出世间的方式。巴利
27. ‘‘Satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā bahulīkatā vijjāvimuttiyo paripūrentī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.187) vacanato vijjāvimuttīnaṃ anadhigamo tato ca sakalavaṭṭadukkhānativatti abhāvanāya ādīnavo, vuttavipariyāyena bhagavato orasaputtabhāvādivasena ca bhāvanāya ānisaṃso veditabbo. Uparimaggattayasamayasambhūtāti dutiyādimaggakkhaṇe jātā, bhāvanādhikārato dutiyamaggādipariyāpannāti attho. Nanu ca te lokuttarā eva, kasmā visesanaṃ katanti? Nayidaṃ visesanaṃ, visesitabbaṃ panetaṃ, lokuttarabojjhaṅgā eva adhippetā, te ca kho uparimaggattayasamayasambhūtāti. Bojjhaṅgesu asammohatthanti vipassanājhānamaggaphalabojjhaṅgesu sammohābhāvatthaṃ. Missakanayena hi bojjhaṅgesu vuccamānesu tadaṅgādivivekadassanavasena vipassanābojjhaṅgādayo vibhajitvā vuccanti, na nibbattitalokuttarabojjhaṅgā evāti bojjhaṅgesu sammoho na hoti bojjhaṅgabhāvanāpaṭipattiyā ca sammadeva pakāsitattā. Idha panāti imasmiṃ sutte, imasmiṃ vā adhikāre. Lokuttaranayo eva gahetabbo bhāvanāmaggassa adhikatattā.
“开头的词”是指像“念觉支”这样,在各自那句话里作为开头出现的词。从词义上说,是按特殊性和一般性两方面来解释词义。从相、作用、现起等来说,就是从相、作用、现起来说明。按次第来说,就是依照先后顺序。不缺少也不多出,就是刚好那么多。为智者阐明,就是为有智慧的人说明。巴利
Ādipadānanti (a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.418) ‘‘satisambojjhaṅga’’nti evamādīnaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ vākye ādibhūtānaṃ padānaṃ. Atthatoti visesavasena sāmaññavasena ca padatthato. Lakkhaṇādīhīti lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānato. Kamatoti anupubbito. Anūnādhikatoti tāvattakato. Vibhāvināti viññunā.
在“念觉支”这个词里,说的是“念觉支”这个词语。以忆念的意义来说,就是随念的意义。对于很久以前所做等种种不同的所缘,前去并安住,或者不舍弃地现前,这就是现前。就像水里的葫芦,不让它漂浮着漂走,而像石头一样,把不动的所缘稳稳地安放住,这就是忆持,就是让不忘失、不漂浮。这在《弥兰陀问经》里也说过。“库藏官”就是守护库藏的人。他让不漂浮,就是令不漂浮。这是那先长老所说的。与忘失相反的作用是不忘失,并不是仅仅没有忘失而已。以面向行境为现起,就是以身体等所缘为面向而现起。巴利
Satisambojjhaṅgeti satisambojjhaṅgapade. Saraṇaṭṭhenāti anussaraṇaṭṭhena. Cirakatādibhedaṃ ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhānaṃ, anissajjanaṃ vā upaṭṭhānaṃ. Udake alābu viya pilavitvā gantuṃ adatvā pāsāṇassa viya niccalassa ārammaṇassa ṭhapanaṃ sāraṇaṃ asammuṭṭhatākaraṇaṃ apilāpanaṃ. Vuttampi hetaṃ milindapañhe. Bhaṇḍāgārikoti bhaṇḍagopako. Apilāpe karoti apilāpeti. Therenāti nāgasenattherena. Sammosapaccanīkaṃ kiccaṃ asammoso, na sammosābhāvamattaṃ. Gocarābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānāti kāyādiārammaṇābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā.
“菩提的诸法聚合”中,“支”是组成部分;或者,对觉悟者或圣弟子来说,“支”是原因。在《瀑流经注》中关于“住立与积集”的注释里。巴利
Bodhiyā dhammasāmaggiyā, aṅgo avayavo, bodhissa vā ariyasāvakassa aṅgo kāraṇaṃ. Patiṭṭhānāyūhanā oghataraṇasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.1) –
以烦恼为立足处,以造作为积集。以渴爱和邪见为立足处,以其余烦恼和造作为积集。以渴爱为立足处,以邪见为积集。以常见为立足处,以断见为积集。以昏沉为立足处,以掉举为积集。以耽溺欲乐为立足处,以自我折磨为积集。以一切不善造作为立足处,以一切世间善造作为积集。巴利
‘‘Kilesavasena patiṭṭhānaṃ, abhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanā. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi patiṭṭhānaṃ, avasesakilesābhisaṅkhārehi āyūhanā. Taṇhāvasena patiṭṭhānaṃ, diṭṭhivasena āyūhanā. Sassatadiṭṭhiyā patiṭṭhānaṃ, ucchedadiṭṭhiyā āyūhanā. Līnavasena patiṭṭhānaṃ, uddhaccavasena āyūhanā. Kāmasukhānuyogavasena patiṭṭhānaṃ, attakilamathānuyogavasena āyūhanā. Sabbākusalābhisaṅkhāravasena patiṭṭhānaṃ, sabbalokiyakusalābhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanā’’ti –
对于前面已经说过的那些类别,这里应当依据没有说到的类别来理解。这里说的“菩提”,应当和“觉”连接起来理解。因为“觉”这个词的意思是“醒过来”,所以说“从烦恼相续的沉睡中醒来”。而这个醒觉,从实际含义来说,就是通达四圣谛,或者说是亲证涅槃,因此说“四”等等。就像禅支、道支等那样——正如那些支本身就是禅那和圣道,并不是离开了支另有禅那和圣道,这里也是如此。就像军支、车支等那样——以此说明补特伽罗的安立是不存在的假名安立。巴利
Vuttesu pakāresu idha avuttānaṃ vasena veditabbā. Yā hi ayaṃ bodhīti vuccatīti yojetabbaṃ . ‘‘Bujjhatī’’ti padassa paṭibujjhatīti atthoti āha ‘‘kilesasantānaniddāya uṭṭhahatī’’ti. Taṃ pana paṭibujjhanaṃ atthato catunnaṃ saccānaṃ paṭivedho, nibbānasseva vā sacchikiriyāti āha ‘‘cattārī’’tiādi. Jhānaṅgamaggaṅgādayo viyāti yathā aṅgāni eva jhānamaggā, na aṅgavinimuttā, evamidhāpīti attho. Senaṅgarathaṅgādayo viyāti etena puggalapaññattiyā avijjamānapaññattibhāvaṃ dasseti.
“能导向觉悟,所以叫觉支”——这是把“支”字理解成“原因”才这样说的。“觉悟,就是觉;觉本身就是支,所以叫觉支”——这是说“因为觉悟,所以叫觉支”。“随觉”是指,对于观等能觉之因以及所应觉知的诸谛,随顺地觉知。“对觉”是指,从烦恼的沉睡中醒来,或者以现前亲证的方式面对而觉。“正觉”是指,以不颠倒的方式正确地觉知。应当这样理解各个前缀所显示的不同含义。因为“觉”这个词,是把一切具有特殊限定作用的觉悟,以笼统的方式统摄起来而安立的。巴利
Bodhāya saṃvattantīti bojjhaṅgāti idaṃ kāraṇattho aṅga-saddoti katvā vuttaṃ. Bujjhantīti bodhiyo, bodhiyo eva aṅgāti bojjhaṅgāti vuttaṃ ‘‘bujjhantīti bojjhaṅgā’’ti. Anubujjhantīti vipassanādīnaṃ kāraṇānaṃ bujjhitabbānañca saccānaṃ anurūpaṃ bujjhanti. Paṭibujjhantīti kilesaniddāya uṭṭhahanato paccakkhabhāvena vā paṭimukhaṃ bujjhanti. Sambujjhantīti aviparītabhāvena sammā ca bujjhanti. Evaṃ upasaggānaṃ atthavisesadīpanatā daṭṭhabbā. Bodhi-saddo hi sabbavisesayuttaṃ bujjhanaṃ sāmaññena gahetvā ṭhito.
“简择”是指以“这是苦”等方式进行观察。“光照”是指驱除遮蔽诸法如实自性的愚痴,就像光明驱除黑暗一样。当某法存在时便名为“英雄”,那法就是“英雄状态”。“应当发动”,意思是应当令其运转。当倾向懈怠一边、即将堕落时,以不给它机会的方式策励相应诸法,这就是“策励”。“支持”,就是给予辅助的力量。“沉没”,就是陷入迟钝;应当知道,与它相反的就是“不沉没”。“令满足”,就是使之满足或使之增长。“遍满”,就是以殊胜微妙的触遍满全身。“满足”就是喜。“欣悦”,就是“振奋”,意思是身心被提升。“平息身心之粗重”,就是平息、止静身的粗重和心的粗重。这里的“身”,指受、想、行三蕴。“粗重”就是躁动,是对以苦、忧为因的掉举等烦恼,或以这些烦恼为主的四蕴的称呼。应当知道,它(轻安)是与掉举等烦恼相对立的状态;因此在这里,轻安应理解为一种没有躁动、清凉的状态,因为它没有躁动。所以世尊说:“身轻安,无躁动。”(《中部》1.52)巴利
Vicinātīti ‘‘tayidaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā vīmaṃsati. Obhāsanaṃ dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvapaṭicchādakassa sammohassa viddhaṃsanaṃ yathā āloko andhakārassa. Yasmiṃ dhamme sati vīro nāma hoti, so dhammo vīrabhāvo. Īrayitabbatoti pavattetabbato. Kosajjapakkhato patituṃ appadānavasena sampayuttānaṃ paggaṇhanaṃ paggaho. Upatthambhanaṃ anubalappadānaṃ. Osīdanaṃ layāpatti, tappaṭipakkhato anosīdanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pīṇayatīti tappeti vaḍḍheti vā. Pharaṇaṃ paṇītarūpehi kāyassa byāpanaṃ. Tuṭṭhi nāma pīti. Udaggabhāvo odagyaṃ, kāyacittānaṃ ukkhipananti attho. Kāyacittadarathapassambhanatoti kāyadarathassa cittadarathassa ca passambhanato vūpasamanato. Kāyoti cettha vedanādayo tayo khandhā. Daratho sārambho, dukkhadomanassapaccayānaṃ uddhaccādikilesānaṃ, tappadhānānaṃ vā catunnaṃ khandhānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Uddhaccādikilesapaṭipakkhabhāvo daṭṭhabbo, evañcettha passaddhiyā aparipphandanasītibhāvo daṭṭhabbo asāraddhabhāvato. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘passaddho kāyo asāraddho’’ti (ma. ni. 1.52).
“等持”是指把心妥善安放、令心稳定。“不散乱”是指相应诸法不散乱的状态;由于那种法,相应诸法成为不散乱的,所以那种法就是“不散乱”。“不散逸”是指自身具有不散逸的特性。“聚集”是指让相应诸法不分散,就像水让沐浴粉末聚在一起那样。“以心住为现起”,因为经上说“心的安住”,所以是以心的相续安住为现起。“中舍”是指处于不偏不倚的状态。这里的“舍”就是舍觉支。对于平等转起的诸法,它随生起而观察,以那种方式转起,所以具有“简择”的特征;这样一来,由于舍的作用特别强,就说“简择、安住、执取中的中舍性”,也就是行舍。作为让相应诸法各自依其作用平等转起的缘,就是“等运”。作为让不消沉、不掉举而转起的缘,就是防止不足与过度。它像是切断了导致相应诸法不能平等转起的偏袒倾向,所以说“有断除偏执的作用”。中舍,就是中立的状态。巴利
Samādhānatoti sammā cittassa ādhānato ṭhapanato. Avikkhepo sampayuttānaṃ avikkhittatā, yena sasampayuttā dhammā avikkhittā honti, so dhammo avikkhepoti. Avisāro attano eva avisaraṇasabhāvo. Sampiṇḍanaṃ sampayuttānaṃ avippakiṇṇabhāvāpādanaṃ nhānīyacuṇṇānaṃ udakaṃ viya. Cittaṭṭhitipaccupaṭṭhānoti ‘‘cittassa ṭhitī’’ti (dha. sa. 11) vacanato cittassa pabandhaṭhitipaccupaṭṭhāno. Ajjhupekkhanatoti udāsīnabhāvato. Sāti bojjhaṅgaupekkhā . Samappavatte dhamme paṭisañcikkhati upapattito ikkhati tadākārā hutvā pavattatīti paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇā, evañca katvā ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā gahaṇe majjhattatā’’ti upekkhākiccādhimattatāya saṅkhārupekkhā vuttā. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ yathāsakakiccakaraṇavasena samaṃ pavattanapaccayatā samavāhitā. Alīnānuddhatappavattipaccayatā ūnādhikatānivāraṇaṃ. Sampayuttānaṃ asamappavattihetukapakkhapātaṃ upacchindantī viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pakkhapātupacchedarasā’’ti. Ajjhupekkhanameva majjhattabhāvo.
在一切消沉和掉举的状态中,它都存在、值得追求、应当希求,所以叫“一切处所需”,这就是那种一切处所需的特性。在同一刹那生起的七觉支中,如果按照言语解说的次第来依次讲说,为什么不先讲其他任何一支,而偏偏先讲念觉支呢?原因就是念觉支对所有的觉支都有帮助,所以注释里才说“对所有的”等等。这里说的“所有的”,指的是属于消沉和掉举两边的心;如果不是这样理解,那么实际上一切觉支彼此都是互为条件的关系。巴利
Sabbasmiṃ līnapakkhe uddhaccapakkhe ca atthikā patthanīyā icchitabbāti sabbatthikā, taṃ sabbatthikaṃ. Samānakkhaṇapavattīsu sattasupi sambojjhaṅgesu vācāya kamappavattito paṭipāṭiyā vattabbesu yaṃ kiñci paṭhamaṃ avatvā satisambojjhaṅgasseva paṭhamaṃ vacanassa kāraṇaṃ sabbesaṃ upakārakattanti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbesa’’ntiādi. Sabbesanti ca līnuddhaccapakkhikānaṃ, aññathā sabbepi sabbesaṃ paccayāti.
有人质问说:“为什么只说是七觉支?”这个质问的人就怀疑,信、贪等法也可能有觉支的身份。另一方为了说明只有念等觉支对修习有帮助,就说了“因为它们是昏沉和掉举的对立面,而且在一切情况下都不可缺少”等话。其中,“昏沉的心”是指因为精进太软弱等原因,心还没有进入修习的轨道,缩成一团。那时候不应该修习轻安觉支、定觉支、舍觉支。因为用这些去对治那种心,就像往小火堆里加湿草等东西,很难把火点旺。所以世尊说:“比丘们,譬如有人想点燃一小堆火,却往里面投湿草……”等等(《相应部》5.234)。但这时候应该修习择法觉支、精进觉支、喜觉支。因为这些觉支能让昏沉的心,就像往小火堆里加干草等东西一样,很容易就被振奋起来。因此才说“而在那种情况下……”等等。在这里,应当知道择法觉支等的修习,是依照各自相应的食来进行的。因为经中这样说:“比丘们,有善法、不善法……乃至……能助长喜觉支……”(《相应部》5.232)。在那里,通过洞察诸法的自相与共相而运作的作意……乃至……就叫做修习择法觉支等。巴利
‘‘Kasmā satteva bojjhaṅgā vuttā’’ti codako saddhālobhādīnampi bojjhaṅgabhāvaṃ āsaṅkati, itaro satiādīnaṃyeva bhāvanāya upakārataṃ dassento ‘‘līnuddhaccapaṭipakkhato sabbatthikato cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha līnassāti atisithilavīriyatādīhi bhāvanāvīthiṃ anotaritvā saṃkuṭitassa cittassa. Tadā hi passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgā na bhāvetabbā. Tañhi etehi allatiṇādīhi viya paritto aggi dussamuṭṭhāpiyaṃ hotīti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletukāmo assa, so tattha allāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyyā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Dhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgā pana bhāvetabbā, sukkhatiṇādīhi viya paritto aggi līnaṃ cittaṃ etehi susamuṭṭhāpiyaṃ hotīti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmiñca kho’’tiādi. Tattha yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā…pe… pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya…pe… saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232). Tattha sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇapaṭivedhavasena pavattamanasikāro…pe… dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti nāma.
所谓掉举,就是指心因为精进过度等原因,没能进入清凉安住的状态。这时候不应该修择法觉支、精进觉支、喜觉支。因为用这些觉支去对治那样的心,就像往大火堆里扔干草之类的东西,很难让它平息下来。所以世尊说:“诸比丘,譬如有人想灭掉一大堆火,却往里面扔干草……”等等(《相应部》5.234)。这时候应该修轻安觉支、定觉支、舍觉支,就像往大火堆里加湿草之类的东西,掉举的心用这些觉支就很容易平息下来。因此经文才说“而于某情况……”等等。在这里也应当知道,轻安觉支等的修习是依照各自相应的食来进行的。经中确实这样说:“诸比丘,有身轻安、心轻安……乃至……能助舍觉支增长……”(《相应部》5.232)。其中,对于轻安等过去已经生起的状态,留意它的相状,以让它生起的方式如理作意,这就叫作修习轻安觉支等。而念觉支在一切情况下都很有帮助。因为它能保护心:不因为偏向沉滞一类的轻安等法而陷入迟钝,也不因为偏向掉举一类的择法等法而陷入掉举。所以它就像盐一样,在一切菜肴中都需要;又像处理一切王事的大臣一样,在一切王事中都需要。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,我说念在一切处都需要。”(《相应部》5.234)巴利
Uddhaccassāti cittassa accāraddhavīriyatādīhi sītibhāvapatiṭṭhitabhāvaṃ anotiṇṇatāya, tadā dhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgā na bhāvetabbā. Tañhi etehi sukkhatiṇādīhi viya aggikkhandho duvūpasamayaṃ hoti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetukāmo assa, so tattha sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyyā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgā pana bhāvetabbā, allatiṇādīhi viya aggikkhandho uddhataṃ cittaṃ etehi suvūpasamayaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmiñca kho’’tiādi. Etthāpi yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena passaddhisambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kāyapassaddhi cittapassaddhi…pe… upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232). Tattha yathāssa passaddhiādayo uppannapubbā, taṃ ākāraṃ sallakkhetvā tesaṃ uppādanavasena tathā manasikarontova passaddhisambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti nāma. Satisambojjhaṅgo pana sabbattha bahūpakāro. So hi cittaṃ līnapakkhikānaṃ passaddhiādīnaṃ vasena layāpattito, uddhaccapakkhikānañca dhammavicayādīnaṃ vasena uddhaccapātato rakkhati, tasmā so loṇadhūpanaṃ viya sabbabyañjanesu sabbakammikaamacco viya ca rājakiccesu sabbattha icchitabbo. Tenāha ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234).
已经了知应当了知的事,这是句子的连接关系。所谓“增长”,就是变得广大、成倍增加、一再地生起,所以说“令再三地生起”。使它达到殊胜的增长,就是使它产生。“远离性”,就是远离的状态。凡是可被远离而正在被远离的,以及远离之后而安住的,这两者在这里都以远离状态的共同名称被称为“远离性”。在这两者中,前者因为正处于从可远离之法中远离的状态,具足了那称为远离的能离作用,所以这个法聚就是依据那能离作用本身而被说为“远离”。后者则是因为在一切方面都具有从种种法中彻底远离的自性。在这里,当念觉支在某一法聚中通过能离作用而运作时,它就是依于前面所说的那种“正在被远离的状态”而运作,也就是依于被称为远离的状态;而其余的法聚,则是以倾向于它、以它为所缘而运作,所以说“依于远离”。又或者,就像依远离之力而生起的禅那被称为“远离所生”一样,依远离之力而生起的觉支,应当被理解为“依于远离”。而“依止”这个含义,应当以观与道为方式,来理解道与果。即使没有前后的次第,正如“缘起”一语中诸缘的生成一样,以不分离诸法为依止的修习也可成立。就是这个,就是远离本身。因为远离与断除、调伏、离贪、灭尽,都是同义的。巴利
Ñatvā ñātabbāti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.129) sambandho. Vaḍḍhi nāma vepullaṃ bhiyyobhāvo punappunaṃ uppādo evāti āha ‘‘punappunaṃ janetī’’ti. Abhivuddhiṃ pāpento nibbatteti. Vivittatāti vivittabhāvo. Yo hi vivecanīyato viviccati, yaṃ viviccitvā ṭhitaṃ, tadubhayaṃ idha vivittabhāvasāmaññena ‘‘vivittatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tesu purimo vivecanīyato viviccamānatāya vivekasaṅkhātāya viviccanakiriyāya samaṅgī dhammasamūho tāya eva viviccanakiriyāya vasena vivekoti gahito. Itaro sabbaso tato tato vivittasabhāvatāya. Tattha yasmiṃ dhammapuñje satisambojjhaṅgo viviccanakiriyāya pavattati, taṃ yathāvuttāya viviccamānatāya vivekasaṅkhātaṃ nissāyeva pavattati, itaraṃ pana tanninnatātadārammaṇatāhīti vuttaṃ ‘‘viveke nissita’’nti. Yathā vā vivekavasena pavattaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘vivekaja’’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ vivekavasena pavatto bojjhaṅgo ‘‘vivekanissito’’ti daṭṭhabbo. Nissayaṭṭho ca vipassanāmaggānaṃ vasena maggaphalānaṃ veditabbo. Asatipi pubbāparabhāve ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādā’’ti ettha paccayānaṃ samuppādanaṃ viya abhinnadhammādhārā nissayanabhāvanā sambhavantīti. Ayamevāti viveko eva. Viveko hi pahānavinayavirāganirodhā ca samānatthā.
先说了依止对治舍离、断舍离、出离这三种远离,却没有提到依止寂止远离,这是因为这里讲的是“修习念觉支”等应当修习的觉支。因为对于已修习的觉支来说,那些应当证得的果觉支,它们的作用就是寂止远离。从意乐方面来说,就是出于“我要证悟涅槃”这样的大意乐。即使在观的刹那,心虽然以诸行为所缘,但因为已经清楚地看到诸行的过患,心就倾向于与它们相反的涅槃,由于这种意乐而依止出离远离,就像被酷热所逼迫的人,内心自然倾向清凉一样。以观为基础的遍处所缘等禅那中的念等,并不被排除,因为它们能成为抉择分的缘故。然而,不像观那样,禅那并不是菩提之道的邻近因,也不是那样绝对的决定因;禅那的作用也不像观的作用那样,完成它就是道,所以不特别提出来。在这里应当看到,以遍处为代表,依于遍处的无色定也被包含在内,因为它们同样可以成为观的基础和抉择分;这样说才合理,因为确实存在倾向于彼的状态。因为,既然有倾向于涅槃的状态,也就可能有倾向于果的状态,像“我什么时候才能证入并安住于那个境界”这样的话,也能证明这个意思。巴利
Tadaṅgasamucchedanissaraṇavivekanissitataṃ vatvā paṭipassaddhivivekanissitatāya avacanaṃ ‘‘satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādinā bhāvetabbānaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ idha vuttattā. Bhāvitabbojjhaṅgassa hi ye sacchikātabbā phalabojjhaṅgā, tesaṃ kiccaṃ paṭipassaddhiviveko. Ajjhāsayatoti ‘‘nibbānaṃ sacchikarissāmī’’ti mahantaajjhāsayato. Yadipi vipassanākkhaṇe saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ, saṅkhāresu pana ādīnavaṃ suṭṭhu disvā tappaṭipakkhe nibbāne adhimuttatāya ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitatā dāhābhibhūtassa puggalassa sītaninnacitattā viya. Na paṭisiddhā vipassanāpādakesu kasiṇārammaṇādijhānesu satiādīnaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyattā. Anuddharantā pana vipassanā viya bodhiyā maggassa āsannakāraṇaṃ jhānaṃ na hoti, nāpi tathā ekantikaṃ kāraṇaṃ, na ca vipassanākiccassa viya jhānakiccassa niṭṭhānaṃ maggoti katvā na uddharanti. Ettha ca kasiṇaggahaṇena tadāyattāni āruppānipi gahitānīti daṭṭhabbāni. Tānipi hi vipassanāpādakāni nibbedhabhāgiyāni ca hontīti vattuṃ vaṭṭati tanninnabhāvasabbhāvato. Yadaggena hi nibbānaninnatā, tadaggena phalaninnatāpi siyā. ‘‘Kudāssu nāmāhaṃ tadāyatanaṃ upasampajja vihareyya’’nti (ma. ni. 1.465) ādivacanampetassa atthassa sādhakaṃ.
“舍”这个词有“舍弃”和“跃入”两个意思,所以说舍有两种。因为舍就是断除,也是以无所牵挂、无顾虑的状态持续运行;因此,在观智刹那,是以彼分断的方式舍;在圣道刹那,则是以正断的方式舍,这就是对敌对法的断除。同样,在观智刹那,是以心倾向于彼的方式;在圣道刹那,则是以取彼为所缘的方式,由于那种全然无顾虑的状态,便成为舍。应当这样来理解。所谓“按照所说的方式”,就是指依彼分断与正断的方式,以及心倾向于彼、取彼为所缘的方式。因为前面已经解释过舍这个词的含义,所以说“用完整的语句”。“pariṇamantaṃ”指的是在观智刹那正在转变;“pariṇataṃ”则指在圣道刹那已经转变。所谓转变,就是成熟的意思,因此说“正在成熟的和已经成熟的”。这里的成熟,是指通过反复修习获得力量,烦恼变得可被彻底舍弃并跃入涅槃的那种锋利而清净鲜明的状态。所以接下来说“因为这个”等等。此中的道理——也就是在念觉支中以“依彼分远离”等方式所说明的——在其余的法择觉支等诸觉支中,也依照这个理路类推适用。巴利
Vossagga-saddo pariccāgattho pakkhandanattho cāti vossaggassa duvidhatā vuttā. Vossajjanañhi pahānaṃ, vissaṭṭhabhāvena nirāsaṅkapavati ca, tasmā vipassanākkhaṇe tadaṅgavasena, maggakkhaṇe samucchedavasena paṭipakkhassa pahānaṃ vossaggo, tathā vipassanākkhaṇe tanninnabhāvena, maggakkhaṇe ārammaṇakaraṇena vissaṭṭhasabhāvato vossaggoti veditabbaṃ. Yathāvuttena pakārenāti tadaṅgasamucchedapakārena tanninnatadārammaṇakaraṇapakārena ca. Pubbe vossagga-padasseva atthassa vuttattā āha ‘‘sakalena vacanenā’’ti. Pariṇamantaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe, pariṇataṃ maggakkhaṇe. Pariṇāmo nāma paripākoti āha ‘‘paripaccantaṃ paripakkañcā’’ti. Paripāko ca āsevanalābhena āhitasāmatthiyassa kilesassa pariccajituṃ nibbānañca pakkhandituṃ tikkhavisadasabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādi. Esa nayoti yvāyaṃ ‘‘tadaṅgavivekanissita’’ntiādinā satisambojjhaṅge vutto, sesesu dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādīsupi esa nayoti evaṃ tattha netabbanti attho.
像这样,先为初学者讲了在觉支中不迷惑的混合方法,现在要依已生起的出世间觉支来说明其含义,所以接着说了“然而在此处”等话。“然而在此处”,是指在《一切漏经》这部经中。只有圣道才是以舍为转变的,因为这里所指的就是作为修道一部分的圣道。而那个念觉支,“以正断而言”,是从断除的意义来说的。巴利
Evaṃ ādikammikānaṃ bojjhaṅgesu asammohatthaṃ missakanayaṃ vatvā idāni nibbattitalokuttarabojjhaṅgavasena atthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘idha panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idha panāti imasmiṃ sabbāsavasuttante. Maggo eva vossaggavipariṇāmī bhāvanāmaggassa idha adhippetattā. Tañca khoti satisambojjhaṅgaṃ. Samucchedatoti samucchindanato.
因为“见漏”是初道所断的,所以经中说“三漏”。这三种漏也应理解为不会堕入恶趣的,因为会导致堕入恶趣的漏在见道时就已经断除了。虽然觉支大多数情况下是指圣道,但这里是依据各处具有觉支自性的道法,说为与三道相应的觉支。当以“觉支的修习”这一说法统摄这些时,注释就说“与三道相应”。巴利
Diṭṭhāsavassa paṭhamamaggavajjhattā ‘‘tayo āsavā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tepi anapāyagamanīyā eva veditabbā apāyagamanīyānaṃ dassaneneva pahīnattā. Satipi sambojjhaṅgānaṃ yebhuyyena maggabhāve tattha tattha sambojjhaṅgasabhāvānaṃ maggadhammānaṃ vasena vuttamaggattayasampayuttā bojjhaṅgāti paccekabojjhaṅge ‘‘bojjhaṅgabhāvanāyā’’ti iminā gaṇhanto ‘‘maggattayasampayuttāyā’’ti āha.
28 28.“称赞”:因为断尽诸漏实在太难做到,所以就用这种难行之事来赞叹那位比丘。“彼之”:指已经断尽诸漏的比丘。“功德”:指从斩断渴爱等一直到苦彻底灭尽这样的最终利益。“以这些”:就是通过上面这些宣说断除等的列举。“激发精勤”:意思是,连法主世尊都这样称赞,而且断尽诸漏的功德又极其广大,因此让人生起带着殷重心的精进。“仅由见即可断除的”:就是只凭见道就能断除的。因此才说“并非在尚未断除的烦恼上,生起已经断除的想法”。巴利
28.Thomentoti āsavappahānassa sudukkarattā tāya eva dukkarakiriyāya taṃ abhitthavanto. Assāti pahīnāsavabhikkhuno. Ānisaṃsanti taṇhācchedādidukkhakkhayapariyosānaṃ udrayaṃ. Etehi pahānādisaṃkittanehi. Ussukkaṃ janentoti evaṃ dhammassāmināpi abhitthavanīyaṃ mahānisaṃsañca āsavappahānanti tattha ādarasahitaṃ ussāhaṃ uppādento. Dassaneneva pahīnāti dassanena pahīnā eva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na appahīnesuyeva pahīnasaññī’’ti.
用“一切”这个词,从它与诸漏以及防护诸漏的关联方式来看,应当知道第二种和第一种解释之间的差别。“以见现观”:是通过遍知现观,因为遍知的作用已经完成。因此说“依作用”,意思是以不迷惑的通达。“积聚”就是身体,或者说是自体。巴利
Sabba-saddena āsavānaṃ, āsavasaṃvarānañca sambandhavasena dutiyapaṭhamavikappānaṃ bhedo daṭṭhabbo. Dassanābhisamayāti pariññābhisamayā pariññākiccasiddhiyā. Tenāha ‘‘kiccavasenā’’ti, asammohapaṭivedhenāti attho. Samussayo kāyo, attabhāvo vā.
与没有过失的喜和悦相伴的心,因为能带来利益,所以配得上被称为“自己的”;与此相反的心因为不能带来利益,所以不配。这是针对与喜相应的心而说的,所以说“自意,就是自己的意”。因此又说“欢喜意”。“自意”也可以理解为被喜和悦所占据的心。不过,因为被它们占据就是与它们相应,所以又说“或者指与喜和悦相应之意”。这里在义理上没有详细分辨的地方,应当知道是因为依照前面所说的方式就能很好理解,或者本身容易明白。巴利
Anavajjapītisomanassasahitaṃ cittaṃ ‘‘attano’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati atthāvahattā, na tabbiparītaṃ anatthāvahattāti pītisampayuttacittataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘attamanāti sakamanā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘tuṭṭhamanā’’ti. Attamanāti vā pītisomanassehi gahitamanā. Yasmā pana tehi gahitatā sampayuttatāva, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pītisomanassehi vā sampayuttamanā’’ti. Yadettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ vuttanayattā suviññeyyattā cāti veditabbaṃ.
3.《法嗣经》注释巴利
3. Dhammadāyādasuttavaṇṇanā
29 因此,先说明这一点:因为先交代经文的出处背景,再讲解注释,注释才会清楚明白;又因为这部《法嗣经》的出处背景是依因缘而说的,所以先说明那个出处背景,意思就是先讲清楚。“关于利养恭敬”这句,有些注释者说,是指以利养恭敬为因由的因缘;另一些人则说,是指在利养恭敬方面的因缘。当时因为利养恭敬的缘故,比丘们当中出现了资具丰盛的情况,世尊就是以这个因缘为出发点,开示了这部经。“双大云”是指那种向下垂、向上涌,形成百层云、千层云成对出现的大云。世尊在某个地方安住时,它们就停在那里;世尊外出游化时,它们就跟着走。比丘们大多数因为在十万劫甚至更长时间里,圆满了布施巴拉密的积累,所以那时生起了极大的利养恭敬,因此说“比丘僧团也是如此”。巴利
29.Tasmātaṃ dassetvāti yasmā suttantavaṇṇanā suttanikkhepaṃ dassetvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hoti, yasmā cassa dhammadāyādasuttassa aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo, tasmā taṃ nikkhepaṃ dassetvā, kathetvāti attho. Lābhasakkāreti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.63) lābhasakkārasaṅkhātāya aṭṭhuppattiyāti keci, lābhasakkāre vā aṭṭhuppattiyāti apare. Yā hi lābhasakkāranimittaṃ tadā bhikkhūsu paccayabāhullikatā jātā, taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā bhagavā imaṃ desesīti. Yamakamahāmeghoti heṭṭhāolambanaupariuggamanavasena satapaṭalo sahassapaṭalo yugaḷamahāmegho. Tiṭṭhanti ceva bhagavati katthaci nibaddhavāsaṃ vasante, cārikaṃ pana gacchante anubandhanti ca. Bhikkhūnampi yebhuyyena kappasatasahassaṃ tato bhiyyopi pūritadānapāramisañcayattā tadā mahālābhasakkāro uppajjīti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassapī’’ti.
被恭敬,是指得到了恭敬。被尊重,是指得到了尊重。被看重,是指被人高度珍视,也被人从心里喜爱。被供养,是指以花鬘等供养以及四种资具的殊胜供养而受到供养。被礼敬,是指得到了礼敬。具体来说:如果有人恭敬地备办殊胜精良的四种资具来奉施,这个人就是被恭敬的。如果有人在对方身上建立起尊重之心再作布施,这个人就是被尊重的。如果人们从心里喜爱他、高度看重他,这个人就是被看重的。如果人们以一切供养的方式为他做这些事,这个人就是被供养的。如果人们以起立迎接、合掌作礼等方式对他行最高的恭敬,这个人就是被礼敬的。世间对世尊和比丘僧团就是这样做的。因此说“那时,诸资具……”等等。达到利养和称誉的顶峰,是指达到了利养和称誉的最高处。巴利
Sakkatoti sakkārappato. Garukatoti garukārappatto. Mānitoti bahumato manasā piyāyito ca. Pūjitoti mālādipūjāya ceva catupaccayābhipūjāya ca pūjito. Apacitoti apacāyanappatto. Yassa hi cattāro paccaye sakkatvāpi abhisaṅkhate paṇītapaṇīte upanenti, so sakkato. Yasmiṃ garubhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā te denti, so garukato. Yaṃ manasā piyāyanti bahumaññanti ca, so bahumato. Yassa sabbametaṃ pūjāvasena karonti, so pūjito. Yassa abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānañjalikammādivasena paramanipaccakāraṃ karonti, so apacito. Bhagavati bhikkhusaṅghe ca loko evaṃ paṭipanno. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tena kho pana…pe… parikkhārāna’’nti. Lābhaggayasaggapattanti lābhassa ca yasassa ca aggaṃ ukkaṃsaṃ pattaṃ.
把衣服等资具当作值得看重的东西,这就是“看重资具”,意思是贪著世间利益的人。对资具贪求、执著,为了得到更多资具而努力,就是“资具丰盛者”。即使是世尊,也是通过他们平常的行为举止而清楚知道的;如果不是这样,那些不明显的情况世尊就不可能知道。“法之悚惧”是指以思惟法的自性而生起的、伴随惭愧的智慧。但在这里,应当理解为因比丘们看重利养等非法之事而生起的悚惧。“做沙门之法”就是履行沙门的本分。“那个”是指关于法嗣的教导。“全身镜”是指能照见全身影像、适合用来观察整个身体的镜子。巴利
Paccayā cīvarādayo garukātabbā etesanti paccayagarukā, āmisacakkhukāti attho. Paccayesu giddhā gadhitā paccayānaṃ bahulabhāvāya paṭipannāti paccayabāhulikā. Bhagavatopi pākaṭā ahosi pakaticārittavasenāti adhippāyo aññathā apākaṭasseva abhāvato. Dhammasabhāvacintāvasena pavattaṃ sahottappañāṇaṃ dhammasaṃvego, idha pana so bhikkhūnaṃ lābhagarutādhammavasena veditabbo. Samaṇadhammavuttīti samaṇadhammakaraṇaṃ. Sāti dhammadāyādadesanā. Paṭibimbadassanavasena sabbakāyassa dassanayoggo ādāsoti sabbakāyikaādāso.
父亲的遗产,本应由父亲给予,儿子从父亲那里得到,因为具有值得领受的资格而领受,所以叫“嗣子”,也就是儿子。这在世间指的就是物质利益,但在教法里,法也可以算。因此,世尊排除了那些有过失、不能导向解脱的,教导比丘们致力于那能导向解脱、没有过失的,于是说:“比丘们,你们要作我的法嗣,不要作财嗣。”“作我的法嗣”意思是:深入我的法,成为法的份额的拥有者。正如后面将要说的:“唯是法之份额的拥有者。”“已生起法”是指以无杂染、无上等法的通性而确定的法。“方便”是指以自性转变而使人了知,因此称为方便,即权说、权说的理由。由于没有那个,所以是“无方便法”,因为依道之证得而彻底遮止了堕入恶趣等。另一种则与所说的相反,是“方便法”,因为彻底遮止了恶趣苦和轮回苦,或者因为次第遮止。譬如世间善法,如布施、持戒等,是为了涅槃而生的,这虽然不能成就那涅槃,但以能成就那涅槃的法的生起原因之方便,称为方便法;同样,那为了轮回而生的,被渴爱等特别执取,因此在世间明显是遮蔽、饮食等物质,对于那物质和与它相似的果的差别,以作为象征之方便,称为方便物质。为了说明这一点,他说:“然而这里……乃至……这称为方便物质。”巴利
Pitu-dāyaṃ, tena dātabbaṃ, tato laddhabbaṃ arahabhāvena ādiyantīti dāyādā, puttā. Tañca loke āmisameva, sāsane pana dhammopīti tattha yaṃ sāvajjaṃ aniyyānikañca, taṃ paṭikkhipitvā, yaṃ niyyānikaṃ anavajjañca, tattha bhikkhū niyojento bhagavā avoca ‘‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’’ti. Dhammassa me dāyādāti mama dhammassa ogāhino, dhammabhāgabhāginoti attho. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘dhammakoṭṭhāsasseva sāmino’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha.1.29). Nibbattitadhammoti asaṃkilesikānuttarādibhāvena dhammasāmaññato niddhāritadhammo. Pariyāyeti sabhāvato parivattetvā ñāpeti etenāti pariyāyo, leso, lesakāraṇaṃ vā. Tadabhāvato nippariyāyadhammo maggappattiyā apāyapatanādito accantameva vāraṇato. Itaro vuttavipariyāyato pariyāyadhammo accantaṃ apāyadukkhavaṭṭadukkhapātanato paramparāya vāraṇato. Yathā hi lokiyaṃ kusalaṃ dānasīlādi vivaṭṭaṃ uddissa nibbattitaṃ, ayaṃ taṃ asampādentampi taṃ sampāpakassa dhammassa nibbattakāraṇabhāvapariyāyena pariyāyadhammo nāma hoti, evaṃ taṃ vaṭṭaṃ uddissa nibbattitaṃ, yaṃ taṇhādīhi savisesaṃ āmasitabbato āmisanti loke pākaṭaṃ acchādanabhojanādi, tassa, taṃsadisassa ca phalavisesassa nimittabhāvapariyāyena pariyāyāmisanti vuccatīti dassento āha ‘‘yaṃ panidaṃ…pe… idaṃ pariyāyāmisaṃ nāmā’’ti.
阿难,这整个梵行,就是善友(《相应部》5.2, 3)等经文这样说,因此,即使是声闻弟子所证得的出世间法,也应当说就是属于导师的,所以说“非迂回法也唯是世尊所有”。因为对声闻来说,即使是以法见为条件的如理作意的殊胜条件,以及从他人那里听闻的音声,都依赖于如来,所以他们证得的法,理应说是法主所有的。因此说“由世尊……”等等。其中,“未生起的道”:是指从迦叶世尊的教法隐没之后,直到这位佛陀出现之前,由于没有证得正觉而“未生起”的圣道。“令生起者”:就是令它产生的人。而世尊令道生起,不像独觉佛那样只在自己相续中,而是也在他人相续中令它生起。为了显示这一点,所以说“未生起的道的令生起者,未宣说的道的宣说者”。那令道生起和了知,其意义就是知,因为它是无迷乱的证悟,所以说“知道者、了知道者”。而他宣说,因为极为善巧,所以说“善巧于道者”。“追随导师所行的道而行,称为随道者”:因为他们正是随世尊很好地证得了那个道。“之后,从他人那里正确地、随顺地、一一到达而行持,因此是后随者”。巴利
‘‘Sakalameva hidaṃ, ānanda, brahmacariyassa yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.2, 3) ādivacanato sāvakehi adhigatopi lokuttaradhammo satthuyevāti vattabbataṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘nippariyāyadhammopi bhagavatoyeva santako’’ti. Sāvakānañhi dhammadiṭṭhipaccayassapi yonisomanasikārassa visesapaccayo paratoghoso ca tathāgatādhīnoti tehi paṭividdhopi dhammo dhammassāminoyevāti vattuṃ yuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavatā hī’’tiādi. Tattha anuppannassa maggassāti kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānato pabhuti yāva imasmā buddhuppādā asambodhavasena na uppannassa ariyamaggassa. Uppādetāti nibbattetā. Taṃ panetaṃ maggassa bhagavato nibbattanaṃ, na paccekabuddhānaṃ viya sasantāneyeva, atha kho parasantānepīti dassetuṃ ‘‘asañjātassa maggassa sañjanetā,anakkhātassa maggassa akkhātā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tayidaṃ maggassa uppādanaṃ sañjānanañca atthato jānanaññeva asammohapaṭivedhabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘maggaññū maggavidū’’ti. Akkhānaṃ panassa sukusalabhāvenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘maggakovido’’ti. Satthārā yathāgataṃ maggaṃ anugacchantīti maggānugā bhagavato eva taṃ maggaṃ suṭṭhu adhigamanato. Pacchā parato sammā anu anu āgatā paṭipannāti pacchā samannāgatā.
知道者,就是真正知道应当知道的一切。这里说的“应当知道”,包括应当遍知等各类法,因为他一向只做对众生有利益的事。看见者,就是真正看见应当看见的一切。或者说,知道者,是以一切知智如实知道一切应当知道的法;因为他不是只靠局部范围的智慧就能完全知道一切应当知道的。看见者,是以天眼通、慧眼、法眼、佛眼、一切眼这五种眼,真正看见应当看见的一切。或者说,知道者,是说别人怀着颠倒,宣称遍知欲界和色界,他们虽然也知道,却是以颠倒的方式知道;世尊不是这样。世尊已经断除颠倒,所以知道时就是真正知道;又因为没有邪见的过失,所以看见时就是真正看见。这就是这段话的意思。成为眼者,是因为世尊成就了慧眼,获得了慧眼,又能让众生心中生起慧眼,从引导众生看见正法这一点来说,他就像世间的眼睛一样,所以确实成为眼。成为智者,也应当按同样的道理理解。法是菩提分法,梵是圣道;因为世尊由这些法而生起,或者说获得、证得了这些法,又能让世间生起这些法,所以应当知道他是成为法者、成为梵者。说者,是因为他宣说四圣谛之法,所以是说者。令转起者,是因为他长久地让对真理的证悟持续运转,所以是令转起者。把真理引导出来的人,是把被称为法性的究竟真理和涅槃揭示出来给人看,或者说引导人达到那里。不死法的施与者,是因为他让众生证得不死法,把不死法给予众生,所以是不死法的施与者。因为菩提分法都依他而有,所以他是法主。巴利
Jānaṃ jānātīti jānitabbameva abhiññeyyādibhedaṃ jānāti ekantahitapaṭipattito. Passaṃ passatīti tathā passitabbameva passati. Atha vā jānaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇena jānitabbaṃ jānātiyeva. Na hi padesañāṇena jānitabbaṃ sabbaṃ ekantato jānāti. Passaṃ passatīti dibbacakkhu paññācakkhu dhammacakkhu buddhacakkhu samantacakkhusaṅkhātehi pañcahi cakkhūhi passitabbaṃ passatiyeva. Atha vā jānaṃ jānātīti yathā aññe savipallāsā kāmarūpapariññāvādino jānantāpi vipallāsavasena jānanti, na evaṃ bhagavā. Bhagavā pana pahīnavipallāsattā jānanto jānātiyeva, diṭṭhidassanassa ca abhāvā passanto passatiyevāti attho. Cakkhubhūtoti paññācakkhumayattā tassa ca pattattā sattesu ca taduppādanato dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhena lokassa cakkhu viya bhūto. Ñāṇabhūtoti etassa ca evameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Dhammā bodhipakkhiyā, brahmā maggo, tehi uppannattā, tesaṃvā pattattā adhigatattā, lokassa ca taduppādanato ‘‘dhammabhūto,brahmabhūto’’ti ca veditabbo. Vattāti catusaccadhammaṃ vadatīti vattā. Ciraṃ saccappaṭivedhaṃ pavattento vadatīti pavattā. Atthassa ninnetāti dhammatāsaṅkhātaṃ paramatthaṃ nibbānañca niddhāretvā dassetā, pāpayitā vā. Amatassa dātāti amataṃ sacchikiriyaṃ sattesu uppādento amataṃ dadātīti amatassa dātā. Bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ tadāyattabhāvato dhammassāmī.
“ 而涅槃之成就,皆由此而得。
善行的果报是快乐,心中的愿望都能实现。巴利
‘‘Yā ca nibbānasampatti, sabbametena labbhati; Sukho vipāko puññānaṃ, adhippāyo samijjhati. (peṭako. 23);
与涅槃相连,能给予一切成就——”巴利
Nibbānapaṭisaṃyutto, sabbasampattidāyako’’ti –
比丘们听了世尊这样等的说法,就知道布施等福德是依靠还灭的,不是别的样子,所以说“迂回法……获得”。对于“这样的应当受用”的如法衣服等资具,如果没有世尊的说法,比丘们连接受都不可能,何况受用呢?所以说“非迂回的利益……”等等。巴利
Evamādiṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ sutvā eva bhikkhū dānādipuññānaṃ vivaṭṭasannissayataṃ jānanti, na aññathāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyāyadhammopi…pe… paṭilabhatī’’ti. ‘‘Edisaṃ paribhuñcitabba’’nti kappiyassa ca cīvarādipaccayassa bhagavato vacanena vinā paṭiggahopi bhikkhūnaṃ na sambhavati, kuto paribhogoti āha ‘‘nippariyāyāmisampī’’tiādi.
世尊拥有“迂回所得的利益”,这一点正是通过“迂回之法本来就属于世尊”这一事实本身来说明的。“正是为了显示它属于主人”——这就是前后句的关联。所谓“因此”,是因为它由自己主宰而领受、接受,并且归自己所有。所谓“在此处”,就是指在那法与利益之中。巴利
Pariyāyāmisassa bhagavato santakabhāvo pariyāyadhammassa tabbhāveneva dīpito. Tadeva sāmibhāvaṃ dassentoti sambandho. Tasmāti attādhīnapaṭilābhapaṭiggahatāya attano santakattā ca. Tatthāti tasmiṃ dhammāmise.
以资具为最上者:衣等资具是应当获得的终极之物,这是他的最高标准;而少欲等上人法并不是。所以叫“以资具为最上者”,意思是以利得为重。在渴爱生起之处:就是在这四种渴爱生起的情况中,如经中所说:“诸比丘,比丘因衣而生起的渴爱,生起时就生起;诸比丘,比丘因团食、坐卧具、有此无此而生起的渴爱,生起时就生起。”少欲等:指少欲、知足、头陀苦行、远离等。巴利
Paccayā cīvarādayo paramā pāpuṇitabbabhāvena uttamamariyādā etassa na uttarimanussadhammā appicchatādayo cāti paccayaparamo, lābhagarūti attho. Taṇhuppādesūti ‘‘cīvarahetu vā, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, piṇḍapātasenāsanaitibhavābhavahetu vā, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.311; a. ni. 4.9; itivu. 105) evaṃ vuttesu catūsu taṇhuppattikoṭṭhāsesu. Appicchatāsantuṭṭhisallekhapavivekādayo appicchatādayo.
这里“对此”是指对那个教诫,或者指那些接受法的比丘们。也可以这样连接:或者对那些将会……的比丘们,“对此”就是指对那个教诫。在后一种理解中,“对此”应当只理解为“对那个教诫”。他的意图是:对由于成为财物的继承者而生起的无意义的不生起,以及对由于成为法的继承者而生起的真正利益的生起,抱有期盼。因此他说“他看见……”等等。其中,“在财物上绊倒的人”是指因为财物而行为走偏的人。“在过去时”是指在迦叶正自觉佛的时代。迦毗罗比丘的事迹,应当通过《迦毗罗经》以及“僧伽帝衣也燃烧起来”等内容的《相经》来说明。“以财物为重的人”:应当这样连接——就像因为价值低劣而失去光泽的伪币咖哈巴那一样,他无法以沙门的光辉闪耀,如同已经熄灭、冷却的火炭一样没有光亮。“从此”是指从以资具缘为重的状态起。“心已回转的人”就是心意已经逆转过来的人,意思是他走上了严峻少欲之道。巴利
Tatthāti tasmiṃ ovāde, tesu vā dhammapaṭiggāhakesu bhikkhūsu. Bhavissati vā yesaṃ tatthāti yojanā. Imasmiṃ pakkhe tatthāti tasmiṃ ovāde icceva attho daṭṭhabbo. Adhippāyo āmisadāyādatāya uppajjanakaanatthānuppādassa dhammadāyādatāya uppajjanakaaṭṭhuppattiyā ca ākaṅkhā. Tenāha ‘‘passatī’’tiādi. Tattha āmise upakkhalitānanti āmisahetu vippaṭipannānaṃ. Atītakāleti kassapasammāsambuddhakāle. Kapilassa bhikkhuno vatthu kapilasuttena, ‘‘saṅghāṭipiādittā hotī’’tiādinā lakkhaṇasuttena (saṃ. ni. 2.218) ca vibhāvetabbaṃ. Āmisagaruko appagghabhāvena kūṭakahāpaṇo viya nittejo samaṇatejena anujjalato nibbutaṅgāro viya nippabho ca hotīti yojanā. Tatoti paccayagarukabhāvato. Vivattitacittoti vinivattitamānaso, sallekhavuttīti attho.
“法的继承者”这句话本身就已经包含了限定的意思。为了说明这个限定所排除的内容,就举出“不要做财物的继承者”这一否定。同样地,为了说明意图和利益,也举出了这一点;并且通过说明过患,也否定了“法的继承者”的反面。“不应被贬低地称呼”就是不应被看作低劣、不应被放在下面来说。“以……为界限”在这里,因为前缀“ā”有“界限”的意思,所以“以财物继承者的身份为界限”是指:以与法的继承者身份相违背的财物继承者身份作为原因,或者作为手段,来对它加以辨别;这就是智者应当分开判定、明确区分的事。因此说“应当把他们区分开来”。由此而说:“这就是说:你们应当被智者所呵责。”巴利
Dhammadāyādāti ettāvatā antogadhāvadhāraṇaṃ vacananti tena avadhāraṇena nivattitamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘mā āmisadāyādā’’ti paṭikkhepo dassito. Tatheva ca vibhāvetuṃ adhippāyānisaṃsavibhāvanesupi dassito, tathā ādīnavavibhāvanena dhammadāyādatāpaṭikkhepo. Apadisitabbāti heṭṭhā katvā vattabbāti. Ādiyāti ettha yasmā ā-kāro mariyādattho, tasmā dhammadāyādatāvidhurena āmisadāyādabhāvena hetubhūtena, karaṇabhūtena vā ādiyaṃ vivecanaṃ viññūhi visuṃ karaṇaṃ vavatthānassa hotīti āha ‘‘visuṃ kātabbā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘viññūhi gārayhā bhaveyyāthāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
我对你们有慈悯……而不是财物上的继承者——这样在比丘们面前宣说自己对他们的悲悯,是为了让他们心变柔软。而“我也是以此……”等话,则是在此之上让他们特别地心变柔软,所以说“为了极其柔软其心”。巴利
‘‘Atthi me tumhesu anukampā…pe… no āmisadāyādā’’ti bhikkhūsu attano karuṇāyanākittanaṃ tesaṃ mudukaraṇaṃ, ‘‘ahampi tenā’’tiādi pana tatopi savisesaṃ mudukaraṇanti āha ‘‘atīva mudukaraṇattha’’nti.
那拉咖道等,是在《那拉咖经》等(《经集》684-728)中讲到的修行方法。不过,因为这些是那拉咖长老等人所修的、属于极端少欲知足的、最高层次的修行方法,所以在这里被引用来作为法嗣修行方法的例子。作为证人:当讲到那种修行方法时,有些人心里不信,想“除了我以外,还有谁在修行呢”,为了让这些人亲眼看到,就以这些修行者作为证人。在这个句子里:指的是“比丘们,你们是我的法嗣”这类句子。其余的:指的是“你们也”等在白分中出现的巴利文句子。以所说方式的相反者:指的是“以那个法嗣身份,而不是以财物继承者身份”这样在黑分中所说方式的相反者。巴利
Nāḷakapaṭipadādayo nāḷakasuttādīsu (su. ni. 684-728) āgatapaṭipattiyo. Tā pana yasmā nāḷakattherādīhi paṭipannā paramasallekhavuttibhūtā atiukkaṭṭhapaṭipattiyo, tasmā idha dhammadāyādapaṭipadāya udāharaṇabhāvena uddhaṭā. Sakkhibhūtāti tāya paṭipattiyā vuccamānāya ‘‘kiṃ me vinā paṭipajjanako atthī’’ti asaddahantānaṃ paccakkhakaraṇena sakkhibhūtā. Imasminti ‘‘tumhe ca me bhikkhave dhammadāyādā’’tiādike vākye. Sesanti ‘‘tumhe ca me’’tiādikaṃ sukkapakkhe āgataṃ pāḷipadaṃ. Vuttanayapaccanīkenāti ‘‘tena dhammadāyādabhāvena no āmisadāyādabhāvenā’’ti evaṃ kaṇhapakkhe vuttanayassa paṭipakkhena.
30 听到称赞:指听到对那位修行人的称赞,也就是听到对具足弟子众的具寿伍巴塞那修行戒德的称赞。“不变化词”:以此说明“在此地”这个词在这里没有实义。“被自恣了”:就是被拒绝了。一个人吃饭时已经因食物而饱足,把侍者送来的食物拒绝掉,他就被称为被那“已自恣者”所拒绝。所以说“被自恣了的意思是……被说为”。“以种种方式见等而遮止”:用来让僧众等乞求、用来作食事等,这称为“自恣”,就是为了令犯戒清净而作的自我舍出、给予机会。然而,由于这大多数被说为是“雨安居已竟者应作之事”,所以特称为“雨安居自恣”。“用来令人对资具生起欲求”:这也称为“自恣”,即用衣等资具来作邀请。“与方式相应的遮止”:这称为“自恣”,指伴有“食事未完毕”等四个条件的拒绝进食。然而,由于这成为以“非残食”为缘的犯戒之因,所以特称为“非残食自恣”。“足量食的自恣”即是“足量自恣”,意思是:对于已经完结的进食,拒绝被呈上的食物。巴利
30.Thomanaṃ sutvāti paṭipajjanakassa puggalassa pasaṃsanaṃ sutvā yathā taṃ saparisassa āyasmato upasenassa paṭipattiyā sīlathomanaṃ sutvā. Nipātapadanti iminā idha-saddassa anatthakatamāha. Pavāritoti paṭikkhepito. Yo hi bhuñjanto bhojanena titto parivesakena upanītabhojanaṃ paṭikkhipati, so tena pavāritena paṭikkhepito nāma hoti. Tenāha ‘‘pavāritoti…pe… vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Pakārehi diṭṭhādīhi vāreti saṅghādike yācāpeti bhatte karoti etāyāti pavāraṇā, āpattivisodhanāya attavossaggo okāsadānaṃ. Sā pana yasmā yebhuyyena vassaṃvutthehi kātabbā vuttā, tasmā ‘‘vassaṃvutthapavāraṇā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pavāreti paccaye icchāpeti etāyāti pavāraṇā, cīvarādīhi upanimantanā. Pakārayuttā vāraṇāti pavāraṇā, vippakatabhojanatādicaturaṅgasahito bhojanapaṭikkhepo. Sā pana yasmā anatirittabhojananimittāya āpattiyā kāraṇaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘anatirittapavāraṇā’’ti vuttā. Yāvadatthabhojanassa pavāraṇā yāvadatthapavāraṇā, pariyositabhojanassa upanītāhārapaṭikkhepoti attho.
从“已食”这个说法来看,这里指的是以食物填满的状态,所以说“圆满,就是以食物而圆满”。在“已完结”这个词上也是同样的道理,就是“以食物、以进食行为而完结”。不过,在义注中,为了把所指的含义清楚地显示出来,便省略了“食物”这个词来说。所谓“满足”,就是饱足。所谓“能令人了知的”,就是能使人明白的。通过“已完结的进食”“饱足”“足量”这些说法,就能让人理解“已食”等词;反过来,通过“已食”等说法,也能让人理解其余的词。为了显示它们彼此之间互为能知与所知的关系,所以说了“凡……”等话。如此,通过这六个词,说明了填饱肚子的进食,而那只是借由假设而说的。因为世尊并不是那样进食的。因此说:“这一切都是假设而说的。”巴利
‘‘Bhuttāvī’’ti vacanato bhojanapāripūritā idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘paripuṇṇoti bhojanena paripuṇṇo’’ti. Pariyositoti etthāpi eseva nayo ‘‘bhojanena bhojanakiriyāya pariyosito’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana adhippetatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ bhojana-saddassa lopo vutto. Dhātoti titto. Sādhakānīti ñāpakāni. Pariyositabhojanaṃ suhitayāvadatthatāgahaṇehi bhuttāvitādayo, bhuttāvitādiggahaṇehi vā itare bodhitā hontīti aññamaññaṃ nesaṃ ñāpakañāpetabbataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ chahipi padehi udarāvadehakaṃ bhojanaṃ dassitaṃ , tañca kho parikappanāvasena. Na hi bhagavā evaṃ bhuñjati. Tenāha ‘‘sabbañcetaṃ parikappetvā vutta’’nti.
“可能有,也可能没有”:这两种含义在这里都能成立,所以说“此处两种都可以”。“随即”:意思是紧接着,也就是在我吃完饭之后立刻。不过,因为这是对前面所说时间的指称,所以就说成“在那时”。“没有嫩绿植物处”:指没有正在生长的草等绿色植物的地方。这里的“无”(appa)字,就像“少欲”(appiccha)等词里的用法一样,是表示“不存在”的意思。巴利
‘‘Siyā eva, nāpi siyā’’ti ca idaṃ atthadvayampi idha sambhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘idha ubhayampi vaṭṭatī’’ti. Athāti anantaraṃ, mama bhojanasamanantaramevāti attho. Taṃ pana yasmā yathāvuttakālapaccāmasanaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘tamhi kāle’’ti vuttaṃ. Apparuḷhahariteti ruhamānatiṇādiharitarahite. Abhāvattho ca ayaṃ appa-saddo ‘‘appiccho’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.252, 336; saṃ. ni. 2.148) viya.
“已说”这里的“pi”字,有把没说到的意思也一并收摄进来的作用。因此,它也涵盖了平整、填平等意思。实际上,这个“说”(vutta)字,在“不作回应而平息”(no ca kho paṭivutta)等语句中(巴拉基格 289),可见它用于“平整、填平”的意思;在“俯首、依他而活”(pannalomo paradattavutto)等语句中(小品 332),用于“谋生方式”的意思;在“如枯叶已脱离系缚”(paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto)等语句中(巴拉基格 92;巴吉帝亚 666;大品 129;中部 3.59),用于“脱离”的意思;在“所唱的、所说的、所集合的”(gītaṃ pavuttaṃ samihita)等语句中(长部 1.285),用于“作为圣典而流传”的意思;而在世间,例如在“所说为皈依处”(vuttaṃ parāyaṇa)等语句中(大疏 7.2.26),可见它用于“学习、读诵、课诵”的意思。巴利
Kathitepīti pi-saddo avuttasamuccayattho. Tena vāpasamīkaraṇādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā hesa vutta-saddo ‘‘no ca kho paṭivutta’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 289) vāpasamīkaraṇe dissati, ‘‘pannalomo paradattavutto’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 332) jīvitavuttiyaṃ, ‘‘paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto’’tiādīsu (pārā. 92; pāci. 666; mahāva. 129; ma. ni. 3.59) apagame, ‘‘gītaṃ pavuttaṃ samihita’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.285) pāvacanabhāvena pavattite, loke pana ‘‘vuttaṃ parāyaṇa’’ntiādīsu (mahābhāsa 7.2.26) ajjhene dissatīti.
这里也不是说,靠吃钵食就障碍了成为法的继承者;而是为了说明不看重钵食、依教法去实践随法行这个道理,才说“对钵食……应当打发过去”。其中“应当打发过去”的意思是,通过持续投入修行功课来把它消磨过去。因此他说“应当像头上着火一样地观察”。所谓“像头上着火一样”,指的就是《头上着火譬喻经》。巴利
Na ettha piṇḍapātabhojanena dhammadāyādatā nivāritā, piṇḍapātabhojanaṃ pana anādaritvā dhammānudhammapaṭipattīti ettha kāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘piṇḍapātaṃ…pe… vītināmeyyā’’ti. Tattha vītināmeyyāti kammaṭṭhānānuyogena khepeyya. Tenāha ‘‘ādittasīsūpamaṃ paccavekkhitvā’’ti. Ādittasīsūpamantiādittasīsūpamasuttaṃ.
“Kiñcāpi”这个词,和“yadipī”是同义的虚词。虚词的特点是:它用在句子的哪个地方,就能把那个地方要表达的意思显示出来。所以这里为了说明它显示的是以“托钵”等开头的许可和赞叹之义,就说它是“表示许可和赞叹的虚词”。不过,对于许可和赞叹这一开头,如果说它是“表示不可能之义”,那应该是因为前面已经先说明了可能性的展现,而且从随顺的理路来看,这种说法更为优先。巴利
Kiñcāpīti ayaṃ ‘‘yadipī’’ti iminā samānattho nipāto. Nipāto ca nāma yattha yattha vākye payujjati, tena tena vattabbatthajotako hotīti idha ‘‘piṇḍapāta’’ntiādinā anuññāpasaṃsāvasena vuccamānassa atthassa jotakoti adhippāyena ‘‘anujānanapasaṃsanatthe nipāto’’ti vuttaṃ, anuññāpasaṃsārambhe pana ‘‘asambhāvanatthe’’ti vuttaṃ siyā purimeyeva sambhāvanāvibhāvanato adhikattānulomato ca.
有人质问说:只发生过一次的拒绝团食,怎么能成为长久少欲等功德的因呢?针对这个质问,注释者才说了“对于他……”等话。
其中,“极度欲求”是指:在这里,“欲求”就是贪求,具有这种贪求状态的就是极度欲求,从含义上说,就是希求别人所得的东西。正如《分别论注》中所说:“对先前自己所得的一切不满足,又希求别人的所得,这就是极度欲求的特征。”
“邪恶欲求”是指:内心盘算着让别人对自己并不具备的功德产生尊敬。有这种邪恶欲求的人就叫邪恶欲求者,这种状态就是邪恶欲求。正如《分别论注》中所说:“让别人对自己并不具备的功德产生尊敬,并且在接受供养时不知节制,这就是邪恶欲求的特征。”
“大欲求”是指:想要贵重庞大的物品,或者他的欲求本身很大,这就叫大欲求者,这种状态就是大欲求。关于这一点,论注中说:“让别人对自己已经具备的功德产生尊敬,并且在接受供养时不知节制,这就是大欲求的特征。”
“当他省察时,将会制止”——应当这样连接文意。拒绝团食这件事,对这个比丘来说将会达成。巴利
Ekavāraṃ pavattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkhipanaṃ kathaṃ dīgharattaṃ appicchatādīnaṃ kāraṇaṃ hotīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādi. Tattha atricchatāti atra icchatīti atriccho, tassa bhāvo atricchatā, atthato paralābhapatthanā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘purimeyeva sakalābhena asantuṭṭhi, paralābhe ca patthanā, etaṃ atricchatālakkhaṇa’’nti (vibha. aṭṭha. 849). Pāpicchatāti asantaguṇasambhāvanādhippāyatā. Pāpā icchā etassāti pāpiccho, tassa bhāvo pāpicchatā. Yathāha ‘‘asantaguṇasambhāvanatā paṭiggahaṇe ca amattaññutā, etaṃ pāpicchalakkhaṇa’’nti (vibha. aṭṭha. 851). Mahantāni vatthūni icchati, mahatī vā tassa icchāti mahiccho, tassa bhāvo mahicchatā. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘santaguṇasambhāvanatā paṭiggahaṇe ca amattaññutā, etaṃ mahicchalakkhaṇa’’nti. Paccavekkhamāno nivāressatīti yojanā. Assa bhikkhuno saṃvattissati piṇḍapātapaṭikkhepo.
贪欲大的人,当施主们依资具布施来供养时,他没法被养活;同样,当他自己去寻求生活资具时,也是难以养活的。所以经文才说“连自己都难养活,连侍奉他的人也难养活”。他把信众布施的东西糟蹋掉,丢到别人家里去。“空着钵回来”的意思是:他挨家挨户地乞食,把在每一家所得的最后一团食物都给了出去,到最后什么都没得到,只好空着钵回到精舍,因为饥饿虚弱而躺倒——这就是这段话要表达的意思。应当知道:受用随所得的生活资具,不再另外去寻求,自己就容易养活;受用随所得的资具而不轻蔑它,因为知足,侍奉他的人也容易养活。巴利
Mahiccho puggalo yathā paccayadānavasena paccayadāyakehi bharituṃ asakkuṇeyyo, evaṃ paccayapariyesanavasena attanāpīti vuttaṃ ‘‘attanopiupaṭṭhākānampi dubbharo hotī’’ti. Saddhādeyyassa vinipātavasena pavattiyā aññassa ghare chaḍḍento. Rittapattovāti yesu kulesu paṭipiṇḍavasena pavattati, tesaṃ sabbapacchimaṃ attano yathāladdhaṃ datvā tattha kiñci aladdhā rittapatto vihāraṃ pavisitvā nipajjati jighacchādubbalyenāti adhippāyo. Yathāladdhapaccayaparibhogena, puna pariyesanānāpajjanena attano subharatā, yathāladdhapaccayena avaññaṃ akatvā santosāpattiyā upaṭṭhākānaṃ subharatā veditabbā.
“论事”是指与少欲等相关的谈论所依的基础,所以叫论事,也就是少欲等本身。“三种”就是三种论事。“能深削”是指能极其深切地削除烦恼,所以叫深削,也就是少欲等功德的集合;这些谈论具有这种意义,所以是能深削的,因为它们适合让多欲等变得微薄,并且与少欲等相应。“适合心离盖”是指能让障碍善心生起的诸盖远离,因此对被称为“心离盖”的止和观很适合。或者说,因为能令止观之心显现,对其有助益,所以叫适合心离盖。“一向厌离”等话,是为了说明:这些谈论通过厌离等利益,而被称为能深削和适合心离盖。其中,“一向厌离”是指决定地为了厌离轮回之苦。“为了离贪、为了息灭”是指为了对那轮回离染以及令它灭尽。“为了止息”是指为了平息一切烦恼。“为了证知”是指为了证知一切应证知之法。“为了正觉”是指为了四种道的正觉。“为了涅槃”是指为了无余涅槃。因为前面三个说的是观,接着三个说的是道,最后一个说的是涅槃。由此显示:从止观开始,以涅槃为终点,这整个超越凡夫之法,对于获得这十种论事的人来说都能成就。“他们圆满”是指从那种性质和助益来说,它们会促成圆满。因为少欲等一旦生起一次,往后就会为那目的而促成圆满。论事的圆满和学处的圆满,应当按所说的方式理解。巴利
Kathāvatthūnīti appicchatādipaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ kathānaṃ vatthūnīti kathāvatthūni, appicchatādayo eva. Tīṇīti tīṇi kathāvatthūni. Abhisallekhikāti ativiya kilese sallikhatīti abhisallekho, appiccha tādiguṇasamudāyo, so etissā atthīti abhisallekhikā, mahicchatādīnaṃ tanubhāvāya yuttarūpā appicchatādipaṭisaṃyuttatā. Cetovinīvaraṇasappāyāti kusalacittuppattiyā nivārakānaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ dūrībhāvakaraṇena cetovinīvaraṇasaṅkhātānaṃ samathavipassanānaṃ sappāyā. Samathavipassanācittasseva vā vibhūtibhāvakaraṇāya sappāyā upakārikāti cetovinīvaraṇasappāyā. Ekantanibbidāyātiādi yena nibbidādiānisaṃsena ayaṃ kathā abhisallekhikā cetovinīvaraṇasappāyā ca nāma hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ekantanibbidāyāti ekaṃsena vaṭṭadukkhato nibbindanatthāya. Virāgāya nirodhāyāti tasseva virajjanatthañca nirujjhanatthañca. Upasamāyāti sabbakilesavūpasamāya. Abhiññāyāti sabbassapi abhiññeyyassa abhijānanāya. Sambodhāyāti catumaggasambodhāya. Nibbānāyāti anupādisesanibbānāya. Etesu hi ādito tīhi vipassanā vuttā, puna tīhi maggo, itarena nibbānaṃ. Tena samathavipassanā ādiṃ katvā nibbānapariyosāno ayaṃ sabbo uttarimanussadhammo dasakathāvatthulābhino sambhavatīti dasseti. Paripūressantīti taṃsabhāvato upakārato ca saṃvattissanti. Appicchatādayo hi ekavārauppannā upari tadatthāya saṃvattissanti. Kathāvatthuparipūraṇaṃ sikkhāparipūraṇañca vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
“不死”就是涅槃,指的是无余涅槃界。其他的则有学法和无学法因圆满而圆满。这里所说的涅槃圆满,应当理解为:是就那些能带来涅槃的法的圆满而作的间接说法。现在,为了用譬喻来证明由少欲等逐步增长而达到功德圆满,说了“譬如”等话。其中,“雨季所生者”:指在雨季月份生起的水流,因为它长久持续流淌。“山涧”:指从山上高处等流下的瀑布、河流等。“湖泊”:指水从高处流下后停聚并继续流淌的地方。“小池”:指小的水池。“小溪”:指从山脚流出的细小河流。它们流入大河,使大河满溢。“最上法之继承者”:指最上、最殊胜的法之继承地位,或者最上的法遗产。“那些比丘”:指那些接受法的比丘们。“令其结合”:令他们与根本功德——少欲等相结合。巴利
Amataṃ nibbānanti anupādisesanibbānadhātuṃ. Itarā pana sekkhāsekkhadhammapāripūriyā paripuṇṇā. Nibbānapāripūri cettha tadāvahadhammapāripūrivasena pariyāyato vuttāti veditabbā. Idāni yāyaṃ appicchatādīnaṃ anukkamaparivuddhiyā guṇapāripūritā, taṃ upamāya sādhento ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādimāha. Tattha pāvussakoti vassānamāse uṭṭhito. So hi cirānuppavatti hoti. Pabbatakandarā pabbatesu upaccakādhiccakāpabhavanijjharādinadiyo. Sarasākhāti yattha upariunnatapadesato udakaṃ āgantvā tiṭṭhati ceva sandati ca, te. Kusobbhā khuddakataḷākā. Kunnadiyoti pabbatapādato nikkhantā khuddakanadiyo. Tā hi mahānadiyo otarantiyo paripūrenti. Paramadhammadāyādanti paramaṃ uttamaṃ dhammadāyādabhāvaṃ, paramaṃ dhammadāyajjaṃ vā. Te bhikkhūti te dhammapaṭiggāhake bhikkhū. Sanniyojentoti mūlaguṇehi appicchatādīhi yojento.
“领会”:就是从含义和文句两方面牢牢把握,正确地把握,不颠倒地把握。“贯通”:就是随顺我的教导,不偏离我的意趣。“正如在此处所思考的”:就像在这次法嗣开示中所思考的那样,他为了在其他地方也赞颂法,进入香室时也是这样思考的。“同一意图”:就是有相同的志向。“以慧”:就是以智慧。“此开示最为殊胜”等:这是世尊单从功德方面推许法将,才这样说的。巴利
Uggahetvāti atthato byañjanato ca upadhāraṇavasena gahetvā aviparītaṃ gahetvā. Saṃsandetvāti mama desanānusārena mamajjhāsayaṃ avirajjhitvā. Yathā idheva cintesīti yathā imissā dhammadāyādadesanāya cintesi, evaṃ aññatthāpi dhammathomanatthaṃ gandhakuṭiṃ pavisanto cintesi. Ekajjhāsayāyāti samānādhippāyāya. Matiyāti paññāya. Ayaṃ desanā aggātiādi bhagavā dhammasenāpatiṃ guṇato eva paggaṇhātīti katvā vuttaṃ.
以心的动向来说:就是依靠心,通过转化身体,带着“愿这个身体变得像这个心一样”的决意,让身体和心具有相同的动向。可是,身体运作迟缓,怎么能和转变轻快的心具有相同的动向呢?并不是在一切方面都完全相同。就像依靠身体来转化心时,心也不是在一切方面都和身体具有相同的动向。因为那时的心不能不以自性所成的自身刹那运作,而去按运作迟缓的物质法的刹那运作;然而,通过“愿这个心变得像这个身体一样”的决意,心跟随迟缓的身体,直到到达想要去的地方,它只是随顺身体的动向,以相续的方式运作,这样就说心被转化成身体的动向了。同样,通过“愿这个身体变得像这个心一样”的决意,因为事先已经修成了轻快想和微细想,身体就不会像没有修成神足的人那样迟缓地运作,而是很快地只在几个心路过程中就到达想去的地方。这样运作的身体,就是被转化成以心的动向为状态,但并不是只在一个心识刹那中就能完成运作。这样说来,屈伸手臂的譬喻即使不借假说,也非常贴切;否则就会违背法性。因为诸法的自相不可能用神通力改变,只能改变它们的状态。巴利
Cittagatiyāti cittavasena kāyassa pariṇāmanena ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo idaṃ cittaṃ viya hotū’’ti kāyassa cittena samānagatikatādhiṭṭhānena. Kathaṃ pana kāyo dandhappavattiko lahuparivattanacittena samānagatiko hotīti? Na sabbathā samānagatiko. Yatheva hi kāyavasena cittapariṇāmane cittaṃ sabbathā kāyena samānagatikaṃ na hoti. Na hi tadā cittaṃ sabhāvasiddhena attano khaṇena avattitvā dandhavuttikassa rūpadhammassa khaṇena vattituṃ sakkoti, ‘‘idaṃ cittaṃ ayaṃ kāyo viya hotū’’ti pana adhiṭṭhānena dandhagatikassa kāyassa anuvattanato yāva icchitaṭṭhānappatti, tāva kāyagatiṃ anulomentameva hutvā santānavasena pavattamānaṃ cittaṃ kāyagatikaṃ katvā pariṇāmitaṃ nāma hoti, evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo idaṃ cittaṃ viya hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhānena pageva lahusaññāya sukhumasaññāya ca sampāditattā abhāvitiddhipādānaṃ viya dandhaṃ avattitvā yathā lahuṃ katipayacittavāreheva icchitaṭṭhānappatti hoti , evaṃ pavattamāno kāyo cittagatikabhāveneva pariṇāmito nāma hoti, na ekacittakkhaṇeneva pavattiyā. Evañca katvā bāhusamiñjanappasāraṇūpamāpi upacārena vinā suṭṭhutaraṃ yuttā hoti, aññathā dhammatāvilomitā siyā. Na hi dhammānaṃ lakkhaṇaññathattaṃ iddhibalena kātuṃ sakkā, bhāvaññathattameva pana sakkāti.
31 “了知世尊的意趣以及比丘们的意乐,随顺而说”这是省略的说法。大长老说法时,会先观察说法的时机和对象,就像观察时机一样也观察听法者是否堪受,然后才说法。“已离去者”这一说法,是为了表明这里用的是表示不敬的属格,所以接着说了“已离去、已远行者”等话。“以多少”是指以什么为衡量标准。那个衡量标准,因为是对所衡量之义的限定,所以说“‘多少’是表示限定的说法”。“nu这个音表示疑问”,是说这个nu音在这里就是用来表达疑问的。这里由nu音所显示的意义,以及由kiṃ音所表达的量、所衡量的对象之义。在这里,杂染这一方面是不修习远离,即成为财食的继承者;清净这一方面是修习远离,即成为法的继承者。“三种远离”:之所以举出三种远离,是因为五种远离已经包含在其中。但如果举五种远离,那么身远离本身就不会被单独把握到;或者说,因为当时导师所运用的远离开示是依于这三种远离而说的,所以说了“三种远离”等。为什么说“任何一者”呢?难道仅凭身远离,法的继承者身份就不能成立吗?不是的,因为这里所说的身远离,是依止于前两种远离的。这样说来,心远离的把握也就成立了。因为仅仅证得世间禅那,并不是究竟意义上成为导师的法继承者;而是因为证得涅槃,才被认为是法继承者。因此,教法中一切修习远离,都是朝向涅槃、以涅槃为趋向、汇入涅槃的,所以说“三种远离中的任何一者”。就像没有光明就是黑暗一样,如果没有法的继承,就必然只有财食的继承,所以说“就会仅仅成为财食的继承者”。“这个道理也适用于白分”:这是以与黑分共通的方式指出意义上的共同点,而不是指出其意义的不同,因为两者性质不同;或者,这是用不相似事物的譬喻方式,来指出意义的不同。“三种远离中的任何一种”这一说法,在这里并不适用。因为那三种远离,或者其中一种依止于另外两种,在这里是可以适用的。巴利
31.Bhagavato adhippāyānurūpaṃ bhikkhūnañca ajjhāsayaṃ ñatvāti vacanaseso. Desakāle viya bhājanampi oloketvā eva mahāthero dhammaṃ katheti. Pakkantassāti idaṃ anādare sāmivacananti dassento ‘‘pakkantassa sato’’tiādimāha. Kittakenāti kena parimāṇena. Taṃ pana parimāṇaṃ yasmā parimeyyassa atthassa paricchindanaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘kittāvatāti paricchedavacana’’nti āha. Nukāro pucchāyanti ayaṃ nu-saddo idheva pucchāyaṃ āgatoti katvā vuttaṃ. Nu-saddena hettha jotiyamāno attho kiṃ-saddena parimāṇo attho parimeyyattho ca. Ettha saṃkilesapakkho vivekassa ananusikkhanaṃ āmisadāyādatā, vodānapakkho tassa anusikkhanaṃ dhammadāyādatāti. Tīhi vivekehīti vivekattayaggahaṇaṃ tadantogadhattā vivekapañcakassa. Vivekapañcakaggahaṇe panassa sarūpena kāyaviveko gahito na siyā, tadāyattattā vā satthārā tadā payujjamānavivekadassanavasena ‘‘tīhi vivekehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aññatarampīti kasmā vuttaṃ. Na hi kāyavivekamattena dhammadāyādabhāvo sijjhatīti? Na, vivekadvayasannissayasseva kāyavivekassa idhādhippetattā. Evañca katvā cittavivekaggahaṇampi samatthitaṃ hoti. Na hi lokiyajjhānādhigamamattena nippariyāyato satthudhammadāyādabhāvo icchito, nibbānādhigamena pana so icchito, tasmā sabbāpi sāsane vivekānusikkhanā nibbānapoṇā nibbānapabbhārā nibbānogadhā cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ vivekānaṃ aññatarampī’’ti. Asati āloke andhakāro viya asati dhammadāyādatāya ekaṃsiyā āmisadāyādatāti āha ‘‘āmisadāyādāva hontī’’ti. Esa nayo sukkapakkhepīti kaṇhapakkhato sādhāraṇavasena labbhamānaṃ atthasāmaññaṃ atidisati, na atthavisesaṃ tassa visadisattā, atthavisesameva vā atidisati visadisūdāharaṇūpāyañāyena. ‘‘Tiṇṇaṃ vivekānaṃ aññatara’’nti idaṃ idha na labbhati. Tayopi hi vivekā, tesu eko vā itaradvayasannissayo idha labbhati.
“从远处”是指从遥远的地方。因此说“即使从别的国家来”等等。当然,在“请显现”这个词里,由于搭配“paṭi-”这个前缀,语法上“舍利弗”用的是工具格,但意思应该按属格来理解。为了说明这一点,所以说“请尊者舍利弗您的”。“请成为一份”:这是表明“paṭi-”在这里是“份”的意思,因为相、特征等其他含义在这里都不适用。因此说“这样就与词的特征相符合”。“请显现”:意思是请以智慧显现,或者请看见。“请现前(upaṭṭhātu)”:请现前于智慧之前。“请领会(Uggahessanti)”:将作口诵受持。所谓作口诵受持,就是领会。“请通利(Pariyāpuṇissanti)”:那是同一个意思的异名。或者,通过反问等使义理在心中生起、建立、通利。“表示原因之语”:作为所述之原因而说的话语,如说“在因由中使用工具格”。以“那”一词来回顾所述之义。因此说“因为”等等。巴利
Dūratopīti dūraṭṭhānatopi. Tenāha ‘‘tiroraṭṭhatopī’’tiādi. Kāmaṃ ‘‘paṭibhātū’’ti ettha paṭi-saddāpekkhāya ‘‘sāriputta’’nti upayogavacanaṃ, attho pana sāmivacanavaseneva veditabboti dassento āha ‘‘āyasmatoyeva sāriputtassā’’ti. Bhāgo hotūti iminābhāgattho paṭi-saddoti dasseti lakkhaṇādiatthānaṃ idha ayujjanato. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ saddalakkhaṇena sametī’’ti. Dissatūti ñāṇena dissatu, passatūti vā attho. Upaṭṭhātūti ñāṇassa paccupatiṭṭhatu. Uggahessantīti vācuggataṃ karissanti. Vācuggatakaraṇañhi uggaho. Pariyāpuṇissantīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Puripucchanādinā vā atthassa citte āpādanaṃ paṭṭhapanaṃ pariyāpuṇanaṃ. Kāraṇavacananti yathāvuttassa kāraṇabhāvena vacanaṃ ‘‘hetumhi karaṇavacana’’nti katvā. Vuttatthapaccāmasanaṃ taṃ-saddena karīyatīti. Tenāha ‘‘yasmā’’tiādi.
“以一种方式”:就是只以一种名为“执取”的方式,而这种方式是由“财食继承”的成立而确立的。正是针对这种方式,才说“世尊所说的义理”。否则,长老也只用一种方式说出了那个义理:“导师住在远离中时,弟子们却不随学远离。”“以三种方式”:就是以构成财食继承的修行方式,也就是不随学三种远离的方式。“至此为止”:就是“在此,朋友……中略……不随学”这一整段属于黑分的诵出文。巴利
Ekenevākārenāti āmisadāyādatāsiddhena ādiyatāsaṅkhātena ekeneva pakārena. Tameva hi ākāraṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘bhagavatā vuttamattha’’nti. Aññathā ‘‘satthu pavivittassa viharato sāvakā vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’ti ekeneva ākārena so attho therenapi vutto. Tīhi ākārehīti āmisadāyādapaṭipadābhūtehi tiṇṇaṃ vivekānaṃ ananusikkhanākārehi. Ettāvatāti ‘‘idhāvuso…pe… nānusikkhantī’’ti ettakena kaṇhapakkhe uddesapāṭhena.
从广说的角度看,它被善加分别,因为已经毫无遗漏地正确标明了。有人问:在诵出时,世尊不是也以“执取者”的身份提到了导师的执取吗?但那并没有被标明啊。针对这个追问,他说“而此确实”等。对于摄受弟子者,是指为了也遮止他人以“导师的弟子们是财食继承者”对导师的非难,而以“你们应当成为法的继承者”来慈悯弟子。那对弟子们来说并不合适,因为那不是如法的行持——这是句子的连接方式。此理趣,就是通过“至此,世尊”等语句,在黑分中显示诵出文的义理区分,从而显示其连结;这同样的理趣也适用于白分,用来显示白分的连结——这是他的意图。因此他说“这是此处按连结次第的接续方式”,意思是:由导师开示的诵出说法,以及由大长老开示的说法,都依连结的次第而结合。在这里,应当知道连结就是依于连结的次第本身。巴利
Vitthārato suvibhatto hoti anavasesato sammadeva niddiṭṭhattā. Nanu ca uddese satthunopi ādiyatā bhagavatā gahitā, sā na niddiṭṭhāti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘so ca kho’’tiādi. Sāvake anuggaṇhantassāti ‘‘āmisadāyādā satthu sāvakā’’ti satthu parappavādapariharaṇatthampi ‘‘tumhehi dhammadāyādehi bhavitabba’’nti evaṃ sāvake anukampamānassa. Sāvakānaṃ taṃ na yuttaṃ sāmīciabhāvatoti yojanā. Esa nayoti yadidaṃ ‘‘ettāvatāyaṃ bhagavā’’tiādinā kaṇhapakkhe uddesassa atthavibhāgadassanamukhena sambandhadassanaṃ, esa nayo sukkapakkhepi sambandhadassaneti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ tāvettha anusandhikkamayojanā’’ti, satthārā desitāya uddesadesanāya mahātherena desitāya ca anusandhikkamena sambandhoti attho. Yathānusandhi eva cettha anusandhi veditabbo.
“极度远离”是指:就像究竟的依止远离一样,其他两种远离也是导师究竟性的体现。“修学”的意思是反复地圆满,所以用否定来说“不圆满”,意思就是“不修习”或“不守护”。从他们不修学远离的那一刻起,就不能圆满、不能守护。那么,为什么这里在总说“不修学远离”时,只取了身远离呢?针对这个质疑,他说“然而如果”等。“在问难中”:如果问和答没有区别,就无法区分,答案也就无法区分。难道经文中因为“不修学远离”是无差别的说法,就得不到区别了吗?并非如此,因为通过其他词句已经作了区分。因此他说“哪些法”等。“记说分”就是解答分。而解答并不像提问那样只显示无差别,而是按所想的义理进行分别——这是其意图。“以此词”即用“不修学远离”这个词,来显示身远离未被圆满——这是意图。对心远离和依止远离,也是同样的道理。巴利
Accantapavivittassāti ekantaupadhiviveko viya itarepi viveko satthu ekantikāvāti. Anusikkhanaṃ nāma anu anu pūraṇanti tappaṭikkhepena āha ‘‘na paripūrentī’’ti, na paribrūhentīti attho, na paripūrentīti vā na paripālentīti attho. Yadaggena hi vivekaṃ nānusikkhanti, tadaggena na paribrūhenti, na paripālentīti vā vattabbataṃ labhantīti. Kasmā panettha ‘‘vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’ti uddese viya avisesavacane kāyavivekasseva gahaṇaṃ katanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yadi panā’’tiādi. Pucchāyāti pucchāto aviseso siyā vibhāgassa alabbhamānattā vissajjanassa. Nanu ca ‘‘vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’ti avisesavacanato pāḷiyaṃ vibhāgo na labbhatevāti? Na, padantarena vibhāvitattā. Tenāha ‘‘yesañca dhammāna’’ntiādi. Byākaraṇapakkhoti vissajjanapakkho. Vissajjanañca na pucchā viya avisesajotanā , atha kho yathādhippetatthavibhajananti adhippāyo. Iminā padenāti ‘‘vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’ti iminā padena kāyavivekaṃ aparipūriyamānaṃ dassetīti adhippāyo. Cittavivekaṃ upadhivivekanti etthāpi eseva nayo.
在这里,“不舍断”这句话,是在说应当断除的诸法并没有被断除,从而表明以断除为特征的远离并不存在。说完这一点之后,又说“在远离中放下了重担”,这是在表明比那更殊胜的远离也不存在。因此,通过显示这两种远离都不存在,应当明白:正是以“哪些法”等说法作为排除其余可能的方式,用“不修学远离”这句话,显示了作为这两种远离之根本的身远离不存在。由于渴爱没有断除,他们大量执取各种资具,所以叫“多取者”;多取者就是生活奢侈的人,就像“调伏者”这个构词方式一样。然而,因为他们确实致力于资具的丰盛,所以论中说“致力于衣服等资具的丰盛”。由于对学处缺乏尊重,他们松散地、不牢固地受持,所以被称为“懈怠者”。“松散”是中性形式的表述;或者可以这样理解:依据与“松散”同义的“sāthala”一词,形成了“sāthalikā”这个词。“以下堕的意义”就是向下的意义,也就是下劣状态的意思。“于依止远离”:因为弃舍了一切依止,所以从依止中远离。“放下重担者”:就是舍弃了精进努力。巴利
Ettha ca nappajahantīti pahātabbadhammānaṃ pahānābhāvavacanaṃ pahānalakkhaṇavivekābhāvadīpanaṃ, taṃ vatvā puna ‘‘viveke nikkhittadhurā’’ti vacanaṃ tato sātisayavivekābhāvadīpananti tadubhayavivekābhāvadassanena ‘‘yesañca dhammāna’’ntiādināva pārisesañāyena ‘‘vivekaṃ nānusikkhantī’’ti iminā vivekadvayamūlabhūtakāyavivekābhāvadassanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avigatataṇhatāya taṃ taṃ parikkhārajātaṃ bahuṃ lanti ādiyantīti bahulā, bahulā eva bāhulikā yathā ‘‘venayiko’’ti (ma. ni. 1.246; a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8). Te pana yasmā paccayabahulabhāvāya yuttappayuttā nāma honti, tasmā āha ‘‘cīvarādibāhullāya paṭipannā’’ti. Sikkhāya ādarabhāvābhāvato sithilaṃ adaḷhaṃ gaṇhantīti ‘‘sāthalikā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sithilanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, sithila-saddena vā samānatthassa sāthala-saddassa vasena ‘‘sāthalikā’’ti padasiddhi veditabbā. Avagamanaṭṭhenāti adhogamanaṭṭhena , orambhāgiyabhāvenāti attho. Upadhiviveketi sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggatāya upadhīhi vivitte. Oropitadhurāti ujjhitussāhā.
“不限定地”是指不涉及任何差别,只用“弟子们”这种不加区分的说法。“限定”则是指用“长老们”等来区分。“从十腊开始”就是从十腊起算。“关于自在”就像在“长者位、将军位”等说法中那样。凭刹那间的闪电光就能射中目标的,就是“瞬即射者”。“于住立”是指于安住的状态。“于住处”是指就在那当下。他“住立”是指以依止、所依的方式而存在,所以说“以依止于那状态而存在”。修习舍,即对诸行保持中舍,也是证得无为法的途径,因此反过来,装饰衣钵等并不能成就依止远离的圆满,所以说“以不圆满地修习衣、钵……”。“在那时”是指在长老的场合。“在此”是指在中间九人等的场合。因此说“中年长老时”等。巴利
Aniyamenevāti kiñci visesaṃ anāmasitvā ‘‘sāvakā’’ti aviseseneva. Niyamento‘‘therā’’tiādinā. Dasavasse upādāyāti dasavassato paṭṭhāya. Issariyeti ‘‘seṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ senāpatiṭṭhāna’’ntiādīsu viya. Acirakkhaṇobhāsena lakkhavedhako akkhaṇavedhi. Ṭhitiyanti avaṭṭhāne. Ṭhānasoti taṅkhaṇeyeva. Tiṭṭhatīti ādhārādheyyabhāvenāti āha ‘‘tadāyattavuttibhāvenā’’ti. Upekkhānubrūhanā sattasaṅkhāresu udāsīnatāpi asaṅkhatādhigamassa upāyoti tabbipariyāyato cīvarādimaṇḍanā na upadhivivekapāripūriyā saṃvattatīti āha ‘‘cīvarapatta…pe… apūrayamānā’’ti. Tatthāti theravāre. Idhāti majjhimanavakavāresu. Tathā hi ‘‘majjhimatherakāle’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
32 32.“而在这个黑分中”:这是指在解说部分里的黑分,不是总说部分里的黑分。至于总说部分里的黑分,则应依与所说相反的方式去理解它的含义,这一点已通过“这个理路在白分中也一样”的类比显示出来。“依所说的相反理路”:就是依与“不修学、不圆满身远离”等等已说内容相反的理路,也就是依“修学、圆满身远离”等等理路。“在此”:就是在白分中。“简略”:就是义理的纲要。“依由旬的次第”:就是按离村落一由旬、两由旬、三由旬这样,一由旬一由旬依次排列。“阿兰若丛林深处”:就是各阿兰若中像密林一样的地方。“边远的”:就是处在最边缘的地方。适合前往的时机,是指衰老朽迈的时候,因为那时已无力往返于较远的行境村落。用“啊,苏丁那者,这样对具德者布施,真是苏丁那!”这样的话,让布施资具的人生起净信。“应受称赞”:就是值得赞叹。“这位大长老也……”等等:这话是针对这样一些人说的——他们指出有一位长老已进入远离处,年纪更长,住于不放逸。“已进入远离处”,是说他傍晚出来时,用意在于以如理作意来培育。他修习遍处业处,而不是去做别的什么杂事;他成就禅定,而不是作无意义的作意。“完全地”等:先以彼分的方式让心从烦恼中脱离,再以镇伏、以正断、以止息的方式,以一切方式圆满心远离。“持粪扫衣”:以此表明不追求多物;“以不松弛的教法受持”:以此表明不松懈;“已离盖”:以此表明进入禅那时已放下重担;“果定”等:以此表明以远离为先导。巴利
32.Imasmiñca kaṇhapakkheti imasmiñca niddesavāre kaṇhapakkhe, na uddesavāre kaṇhapakkhe. Uddesavāre pana kaṇhapakkhe vuttavipariyāyena gahetabbattho ‘‘esa nayo sukkapakkhepī’’ti atidesena dassito. Vuttapaccanīkanayenāti ‘‘kāyavivekaṃ nānusikkhanti na paripūrentī’’tiādinā vuttassa atthassa paccanīkanayena, ‘‘kāyavivekaṃ anusikkhanti paripūrentī’’tiādinā nayena. Etthāti etasmiṃ sukkapakkhe. Saṅkhepoti atthasaṅkhepo. Yojanaparamparāyāti gāmantato dūrabhāvena ekaṃ dve tīṇīti evaṃ yojanānaṃ paṭipāṭiyā. Araññavanapatthānīti araññesu vanasaṇḍabhūtāni. Pantānīti pariyantāni. Upagantuṃ yuttakālo jarājiṇṇakālo gocaragāme dūre gamanāgamanasamatthatābhāvato. ‘‘Evaṃ guṇavantesu dinnaṃ aho sudinna’’nti paccayadāyakānaṃ pasādaṃ janenti. Pāsaṃsāti pasaṃsitabbā. Ayampi mahātherotiādi ekaṃ appamādavihārinaṃ vuddhataraṃ niddisitvā vadantānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Paviṭṭho vivekaṭṭhānaṃ. Sāyaṃ nikkhamati yonisomanasikāraṃ upabrūhetvāti adhippāyo. Kasiṇaparikammaṃ karoti, na yaṃ kiñci kiccantaraṃ. Samāpattiyo nibbatteti, na moghamanasikāraṃ. Sabbathātiādito tāva tadaṅgavasena kilesehi cittaṃ vivecento tato vikkhambhanavasena samucchedavasena paṭipassaddhivasenāti sabbappakārena cittavivekaṃ pūreti. Paṃsukūlāni dhāretīti iminā bāhulikatābhāvaṃ dasseti, asithilaṃ sāsanaṃgahetvāti iminā sāthalikatābhāvaṃ, vigatanīvaraṇoti iminā okkamane nikkhittadhurataṃ, phalasamāpattintiādinā pavivekapubbaṅgamataṃ dasseti.
33 “在此,朋友”这句话里,“iti”这个词是“等等”的意思。用它就把“贪是罪恶的”等后面要展开的全部内容毫无遗漏地涵盖了。什么是连结呢?世尊配合杂染这一边,宣说了与法遗产的行持相应的开示——“诸比丘,你们要做我法的继承者,不要做物质的继承者”等等——这则开示提出之后,从“导师住于远离”等开始,用十八番庄严的解说加以详细分析,接着便问:它与后面“在此,朋友,贪是罪恶的”等说法之间的关联是什么——这就是在问“连结”。所谓“如此”,是说:在杂染这一边,通过显示“不断除”来指出未断除;在清净这一边,通过显示“能断除”来指出已断除,就是这样。前面用“那”“这”等词以及“法”这个词,只是笼统地提到应当断除的种种法,还没有明确它们各自的体性。现在为了明确显示它们各自的体性,所以把它们连接起来说。为什么这里只把贪等说成应当断除的法呢?难道没有愚痴、邪见、疑等其他应当断除的法吗?确实有。不过那些法因为与贪等处在同一处,所以已经被包含在内了。另一种说法是,这里只选取这些法的理由,后面会说明。巴利
33.Tatrāvusoti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Tena ‘‘lobho ca pāpako’’tiādinayappavattaṃ uparidesanaṃ anavasesato pariyādiyati. Ko anusandhīti yā sā bhagavatā saṃkilesapakkhena saha dhammadāyādapaṭipattibhāvinī ‘‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’’tiādinā desanā uddiṭṭhā, taṃ ‘‘satthu pavivittassa viharato’’tiādinā ārabhitvā aṭṭhārasavārapaṭimaṇḍitāya niddesadesanāya vibhajitvā tato paraṃ ‘‘tatrāvuso lobho ca pāpako’’tiādinayāya uparidesanāya sambandhaṃ pucchati. Evanti saṃkilesapakkhe ‘‘nappajahantī’’ti pahānābhāvadassanavasena, vodānapakkhe ‘‘pajahantī’’ti pahānasabbhāvadassanavasenāti evaṃ. Aniddhāritasarūpā yaṃ-taṃ-saddehi dhamma-saddena sāmaññato ye pahātabbadhammā vuttā, te sarūpato dassetunti yojanā. Ime teti ettha kasmā lobhādayo eva pahātabbadhammā vuttā, nanu ito aññepi mohadiṭṭhivicikicchādayo pahātabbadhammā santīti? Saccaṃ santi, te pana lobhādīhi tadekaṭṭhatā gahitā eva hontīti vuttā. Atha vā imesaṃyevettha gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ parato āvi bhavissati.
现在,为了从“积累”的角度说明前后文的连接,所以说了“而且另者”等话。在这里,导师所欢喜的是弟子们继承法而不是继承物质,但前文并没有用“修习四念处”这类说法来展开,而是用“他们随学远离,舍断那些法,不生活奢侈”等话来讲述,因此可以说,前面只是用间接的方式讲了“法”。而“他们不舍断那些法,以堕落为先导”等话,则是用间接的方式讲了“物质”。至于“愿我有团食”等话,以及“他们生活奢侈”等话,则是用直接的方式也讲了“物质”。或者也可以说:世尊禁止继承物质、开示继承法,而大长老为了详细解释其中的含义,又讲述了自己随学远离等内容;为了从原因的角度说明这两方面,所以说了“在此,朋友,贪是罪恶的”等话。因为随着因的灭除,杂染这一边就会止息;而通过修成灭除之因,清净这一边就能实现,所以这样说是在阐明这两者能由此止息与实现。巴利
Idāni upacayena anusandhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sāvakānaṃ yassa dhammassa dāyādabhāvo satthu abhirucito, so ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāvetī’’tiādinā akatthetvā ‘‘vivekaṃ anusikkhanti, te ca dhamme pajahanti, na ca bāhulikā’’tiādinā kathitattā heṭṭhā pariyāyeneva dhammo kathitoti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Te ca dhamme nappajahanti, okkamane pubbaṅgamā’’tiādinā āmisaṃ pariyāyenapi kathitaṃ. ‘‘Siyā ca me piṇḍapāto’’tiādinā, ‘‘bāhulikā ca hontī’’tiādinā ca āmisaṃ nippariyāyenapi kathitaṃ. Atha vā yāyaṃ bhagavatā āmisadāyādapaṭikkhepanā dhammadāyādatā vuttā, yañca tadatthaṃ vibhajantena mahātherena attanā vivekānusikkhanādi vuttaṃ, tadubhayaṃ hetuvasena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tatrāvuso, lobho cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ . Hetunirodhena hi saṃkilesapakkhassa, nirodhahetusampādanena ca vodānapakkhassa tappāpakatā.
“过去开示的例示”是指对长老过去所说的教导的回顾。因此才说:“由于导师远离……的教导,这话已经说了。”其中“于此”是指特别说到“导师说哪些法应当断除”的这一句。因为在那里,只是笼统地说了贪等应当断除的法。“低劣”就是下等。贪和嗔,从因、缘、自性、果报和流出来看,都是本性杂染的;或者因为会在未来带来痛苦,所以是恶的。贪的特征是执取所缘。也就是说,众生因它而贪求,它自己也在贪求,或者它本身就是贪求,所以称为“贪”。在味等作用上,它是执著的味,表现为不肯舍弃,生起的基础是对那些会被束缚的法看到乐味。嗔的特征是对所缘起排斥。也就是说,众生因它而愤怒,它自己也在愤怒,或者它本身就是愤怒,所以称为“嗔”。在味等作用上,它是扩散的味,或者是依附燃烧的味,表现为伤害,生起的基础是嗔恨的因由。巴利
Atītadesanānidassananti atītāya therena yathādesitāya desanāya ca paccāmasanaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘satthu pavivittassa…pe… desanāyanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Tatthāti yaṃ vuttaṃ visesato ‘‘yesaṃ dhammānaṃ satthā pahānamāhā’’ti, etasmiṃ pade. Tattha hi pahātabbadhammā lobhādayo sāmaññato vuttā. Lāmakāti nihīnā. Lobhadosā hi hetuto paccayato sabhāvato phalato nissandato saṃkiliṭṭhapakatikā, āyatiṃ dukkhassa pāpanaṭṭhena vā pāpakā. Lubbhanalakkhaṇoti ārammaṇassa abhigijjhanalakkhaṇo. Tathā hi so lubbhanti tena, sayaṃ vā lubbhati, lubbhanamattameva vā tanti ‘‘lobho’’ti vuccati. Rasādīsu abhisaṅgaraso, apariccāgapaccupaṭṭhāno, saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādadassanapadaṭṭhāno. Dussanalakkhaṇoti ārammaṇe byāpajjanalakkhaṇo. Tathā hi so dussanti tena, sayaṃ vā dussati, dussanamattameva vā tanti ‘‘doso’’ti vuccati. Rasādīsu visappanaraso, sanissayadahanaraso vā, dussanapaccupaṭṭhāno, āghātavatthupadaṭṭhāno.
“于他们中”等语,是通过这样的开示来说明:贪和嗔是绝对应当断除的。说“成为物质遗产的继承者,在获得资具时生起贪”,这是就贪以执取所缘为自性的特点而说的;但若是就依渴爱而起的执取来说,则说“渴求未得之物”。把文意接过来就是:成为物质遗产的继承者,在得不到资具时生起嗔。“未得到者”这里,应把“资具”这个词的格位转换过来配合理解。“被恼害者”,是因为有“凡所求不得,那也是苦”的说法,所以是指被欲望所恼害的人。贪也发生在应施之物上,这是就物质遗产继承者而言的,应当这样连接。接下来的句子也依此类推。而说“应施之物”,只是举例而已,因为对有情产生爱著等情况时,贪也同样会生起。“缘渴爱而有寻求,缘寻求而有获得”等九个,都是以渴爱为根源的。“使圆满”——应当知道这里要转换格位来理解,即物质遗产继承者使之圆满。对住处等的悭吝,共有五种悭吝。巴利
Tesūtiādinā dassanena lobhadosānaṃ ekantato pahātabbatādassanaṃ. Āmisadāyādassa paccayānaṃ lābhe hotīti idaṃ lobhassa ārammaṇaggahaṇasabhāvataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṇhāya vasena pana anugijjhanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘aladdhaṃ patthetī’’ti āha. Alābhe paccayānaṃ āmisadāyādassa hotīti ānetvā yojanā. Alabhantoti ettha ‘‘paccaye’’ti vibhattiṃ pariṇāmetvā yojetabbaṃ. Vighātavāti ‘‘yampicchaṃ na labhati, tampi dukkha’’nti (ma. ni. 1.120; vibha. 190) vacanato icchāvighātavā. Lobho ca deyyadhamme hoti āmisadāyādassāti sambandho. Esa nayo anantarapadepi. Deyyadhammeti ca idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ sattakelāyanādivasenapi tassa lobhuppattisabbhāvato. ‘‘Taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho’’ti evamādayo nava taṇhāmūlakā. Paripūreti āmisadāyādoti vibhattivipariṇāmo veditabbo. Āvāsamacchariyādīni pañca macchariyāni.
所谓“道”,就是圣道。因为它灭除烦恼而向前行进,又被希求涅槃的人所寻求,或者它自己通过亲证现观的方式而导向涅槃,所以从究竟意义上说,它被称为“道”。“一端”,是说它不与另一端混杂,是单独的一部分;或者从低劣的角度说,是卑劣的一端。虽然其他善法也不与这些极端相应,因而那些善法是从这些极端中脱离出来的,但圣道却是在彻底解脱中也不与它们相应,所以说“从这些极端中解脱”。因此,是因为从两端解脱出来。“处在这些的中间而存在”——这是就圣道从两端解脱而说的,并不是说圣道被包含在这两端之中,而且这是为了希求出离轮回之苦的人应当修行的。所谓“同样地”,意思是:就像贪因为不与其他混杂以及低劣的意义而成为一端,同样地,放纵欲乐也是这个意思的一端。其余的也照此类推。至于圣道不接近这些极端,应当理解为它使这些极端完全不再生起。所谓“依前理”,是指依照前面说过的“不接近这两端”等道理。巴利
Magganti ariyamaggaṃ. So hi kilese mārento gacchati, nibbānatthikehi ca maggīyati, sayaṃ vā sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nibbānaṃ maggatīti nippariyāyena ‘‘maggo’’ti vuccati. Eko antoti itarena asammisso eko koṭṭhāso, hīnatāya vā lāmakaṭṭhena eko anto. Kāmaṃ aññepi kusaladhammā ete ante asampayogato na upenti, tehi vimuttā eva, ayaṃ pana accantavimuttiyā na upetīti āha ‘‘vimutto etehi antehī’’ti. Tasmāti antadvayavimuttattā. Etesaṃ majjhe bhavattāti idaṃ maggassa ubhayantavimuttatāya eva vuttaṃ, na tappariyāpannatāya, vaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthikehi paṭipajjitabbato ca. Tathāti yathā itarena asammissaṭṭhena lāmakaṭṭhena ca lobho eko anto, tathā kāmasukhallikānuyogoti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Maggassa anupagamanañca nesaṃ antānaṃ sabbaso appavattikaraṇeneva daṭṭhabbaṃ. Purimanayenāti ‘‘ete dve ante na upetī’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayena.
“诸谛”指四圣谛。“以见为导引之义”,是指以见——包括遍知、现观等各类——从各方面彻底引导、推动的意思。“能作眼”,是指能作法眼、能令法眼生起。这个道理,虽然就修行之道本身来说,它与法眼并无不同,但若按各支分来成就的角度来说,则可以说是由整体完成的,所以应当理解为这是依假立的方式而说。正如接下来要说的:“道本身就是为了道的意义而运作,因为通过道来完成应当完成的作用。”所谓“智”,是指如实地了知。因此说“以令知之义”,因为使特别的了解状态生起,就叫作令知。所谓“以寂止”,是指以断除的方式而寂止。就像苦等有应遍知等性质一样,诸谛应被证知的特性也是唯有依道才变得明显,所以说“显示四圣谛应被证知的状态”,意思是使之显明。所谓“正觉”,是因为“通过它而正觉”,所以道就是正觉。“为了这个意义”,是指为了道的功用这个意义。因为在道之外,没有别的能完成道之功用的东西。因此说“道本身”等等。或者,当正见生起时,它以俱生缘等方式使其余的道支生起,其余的道法也是如此。应当这样理解道为道义而运作。为了亲证,即为了现前作证。为了涅槃,或者是为了无余涅槃。为了寂止,这里是指有余涅槃。这“此”,就是前面所说的“它确实是诸谛的……”等义理。在这里,即在“能作眼”等语句中。精华、善妙、不被移除。与此不同,即从“为了遍知苦而作见清净,所以能作眼”等义理注释的详细展开,纯粹是为了广说的缘故。巴利
Saccānanti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ. Dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhenāti dassanassa pariññābhisamayādibhedassa parito sabbathā nayanaṭṭhena pavattanaṭṭhena. Cakkhukaraṇīti dhammacakkhussa karaṇī nipphādikā. Tayidaṃ satipi paṭipadāya dhammacakkhuto anaññatte avayavavasena sijjhamāno attho samudāyena kato nāma hotīti upacāravasena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘maggoyeva hi maggatthāya saṃvattati maggena kātabbakiccakaraṇato’’ti. Ñāṇāyāti yāthāvato jānanāya. Tenāha ‘‘viditakaraṇaṭṭhenā’’ti. Visesañātabhāvāpādanañhi viditakaraṇaṃ. Vūpasamanatoti samucchindanavasena vūpasamanato. Dukkhādīnaṃ pariññeyyādibhāvo viya abhiññeyyabhāvopi maggavaseneva pākaṭo hotīti āha ‘‘catunnampi saccānaṃ abhiññeyyabhāvadassanato’’ti, vibhāvanatoti attho. Sambodhoti maggo ‘‘sambujjhati etenā’’ti katvā. Tassatthāyāti maggakiccatthāya. Na hi maggato añño maggakiccakaro atthi. Tenāha ‘‘maggoyeva hī’’tiādi. Atha vā sammādiṭṭhi uppajjamānā sahajātādipaccayabhāvena itare uppādeti, evaṃ sesamaggadhammāpīti evampi maggatthāya saṃvattanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sacchikiriyāya paccakkhakammāyāti sacchikaraṇasaṅkhātapaccakkhakammāya. Nibbānāyāti vā anupādisesanibbānāya. Upasamāyāti iminā saupādisesanibbānaṃ gahitanti. Ayanti ‘‘sā hi saccāna’’ntiādinā yathāvutto atthanayo. Etthāti ‘‘cakkhukaraṇī’’tiādīsu padesu. Sāro sundaro anapanīto. Ito aññathāti ‘‘dukkhassa pariññāya diṭṭhivisuddhiṃ karotīti cakkhukaraṇī’’tiādinā atthavaṇṇanāpapañco kevalaṃ vitthāratthāya.
“唯此”这里,“此”是在显示:他自己和其他人,以及当时那个集会中的诸圣者,对圣道有直接亲证。因为“此”这个词,表达的是非常切近的直接经验。“为了遮止其余的道”,是为了否定“还有另一条通往涅槃的道存在”。这里所说的遮止,就是否定存在,因为根本找不到另一条圣道。佛与佛弟子们所共有的性质,就是没有差别。因此,娑婆主梵天说:巴利
Ayamevāti ettha ayanti iminā attano aññesañca tassaṃ parisāyaṃ ariyānaṃ maggassa paccakkhabhāvaṃ dasseti. Āsannapaccakkhavācī hi ayaṃ-saddo. Aññamaggapaṭisedhanatthanti aññassa nibbānagāmimaggassa atthibhāvapaṭisedhanatthaṃ. Sattāpaṭikkhepo hi idha paṭisedhanaṃ alabbhamānattā aññassa maggassa. Buddhādīnaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvo anaññatā. Tenāha brahmā sahampati –
“ 见生尽者,悲悯为利,
了知此一道。
过去的人就是沿着这条道路渡过去的,
未来的人将会渡过,而现在的人正在渡过这瀑流。”巴利
‘‘Ekāyanaṃ jātikhayantadassī, Maggaṃ pajānāti hitānukampī; Etena maggena tariṃsu pubbe, Tarissanti ye ca taranti ogha’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 5.384, 409; mahāni. 191; cūḷani. 107, 121; netti. 170);
“圣”这个词,是通过“远离”这个语源来说明它成立的。“为了舍断敌人”只是字面上的解释。那些不善法被称为“敌人”,因为依靠它而离去、远离,所以叫“圣”。在“圣者所说”这句里,因为是从圣者世尊那里来的,所以叫“圣”。在“为了获得圣性”这句里,能使人成为圣者的就是“圣”,这里应当知道是通过省略后一个词来成立“圣”这个说法。因为对道支的集合使用“道”这个称呼,而集合就是具有各个组成部分的,所以说“由八支具足”。因此,自身组成部分有八个支,就是“八支的”。然而从究竟意义上说,支本身就是道,所以说“并非离开支另有道”,就像说“六支的吠陀”一样。为了显示类似的例子,又说“如五支的音乐等”。这里的“等”字,包含了四支的军队等等。以“杀者”而行走,这是通过语源来说明词的成立。“寻求”就是寻找。因为圣道以涅槃为所缘,它就像在寻找涅槃一样。从为求解脱涅槃的人修集福业、作为出离的依托开始,直到为了这个目标而实践,所以被称为“应被寻求”。以“可被了知”等,通过开头和结尾的互换来说明词的成立,就像“kakū”一样。说了“seyyathidaṃ 是虚词”之后,由于它对一切性、格、数的表达都通用,所以问“哪些是那八支呢”。难道不是支合起来才是道吗?因为至少缺少一支的圣道是不存在的。确实如此,从通达真理来说是这样;但从作为道的条件来说,各支各自完成自己的作用,所以单独每一支也是道,因此说“每一支就是道”。否则,即使它们合在一起,道的作用也不能成立。现在为了用经文来证明这个意思,说了“正见既是道,也是因”等等。巴利
Ārakattāti iminā niruttinayena ariya-saddasiddhimāha. Aripahānāyāti atthavacanamattaṃ. Arayo pāpadhammā yanti apagamanti etenāti ariyo. Ariyena desitoti ettha ariyassa bhagavato ayanti ariyo. Ariyabhāvappaṭilābhāyāti ettha ariyakaro ariyoti uttarapadalopena ariya-saddasiddhi veditabbā. Yasmā maggaṅgasamudāye maggavohāro hoti, samudāyo ca samudāyīhi samannāgato nāma hotīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhahi aṅgehi upetattā’’ti, tasmā attano avayavabhūtāni aṭṭha aṅgāni etassa santīti aṭṭhaṅgiko. Yasmā pana paramatthato aṅgāniyeva maggo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘na ca aṅgavinimutto’’ti yathā ‘‘chaḷaṅgo vedo’’ti. Sadisūdāharaṇaṃ pana dassento ‘‘pañcaṅgikatūriyādīni viyā’’ti āha. Ādi-saddena caturaṅginī senāti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Mārento gacchatīti niruttinayena saddasiddhimāha. Maggatīti gavesati. Ariyamaggo hi nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karonto taṃ gavesanto viya hotīti. Maggīyati nibbānatthikehi vivaṭṭūpanissayapuññakaraṇato paṭṭhāya tadatthaṃ paṭipattito. Gammatīti etena ādiantavipariyāyena saddasiddhimāha yathā ‘‘kakū’’ti. ‘‘Seyyathidanti nipāto’’ti vatvā tassa sabbaliṅgavibhattivacanasādhāraṇatāya ‘‘katamāni tāni aṭṭhaṅgānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Nanu ca aṅgāni samuditāni maggo antamaso sattaṅgavikalassa ariyamaggassa abhāvatoti? Saccametaṃ saccapaṭivedhena, maggapaccayatāya pana yathāsakaṃ kiccakaraṇena paccekampi tāni maggoyevāti āha ‘‘ekamekañhi aṅgaṃ maggoyevā’’ti, aññathā samuditānampi nesaṃ maggakiccaṃ na sambhaveyyāti. Idāni tamevatthaṃ pāḷiyā samatthetuṃ ‘‘sammādiṭṭhimaggo ceva hetu cā’’ti vuttaṃ.
正见:以正确、无颠倒的方式,通过遍知、现观等,照见并通达四圣谛,这是它的特相,所以叫正见相。正思惟:以正确、无颠倒的方式,把相应法安置于涅槃所缘的安止,这是它的特相,所以叫正安止相。正语:虚妄语等有欺诳等作用,是粗涩的、不摄受的,而正语是它们的对立面;正语本性润泽,能摄受相应法,也能正确摄受那些因为正语而听到善说的人,所以叫正摄受相。正业:就像身业能令某些应作之事生起,自身就是发起和活动;同样,称为正业的离行也是如此,所以叫正生起相,正业就是正生起相。或者说,提起相应法,就像身业举起重担一样,这就是生起。正命:对活着的众生,或对相应法,或对活命的运作,由此而清净、纯净,所以叫正清净相。正精进:不让相应法堕入懈怠一边,策励它们、给它们助力,这就是策励。正念:接近所缘而住,或者不舍弃所缘,这就是近住。正定:于所缘,正确、平等地安置相应法,这就是等持。正思惟:正确地将相应法安置于所缘、投入所缘,就是正思惟。正语:以此而正确地说,就是正语。正业:以此而正确地做,就是正业,也就是正业。正命:以此而正确地活命,就是正命。正精进:以此而正确地努力、奋发,就是正精进。正念:正确地忆念、随念,就是正念。正定:以此而使心正确地等持,就是正定。应当这样理解正思惟等词的语源解释。巴利
Sammā aviparītaṃ pariññābhisamayādivasena catunnaṃ saccānaṃ dassanaṃ paṭivijjhanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti sammādassanalakkhaṇā. Sammā aviparītaṃ sampayuttadhamme nibbānārammaṇe abhiniropanaṃ appanālakkhaṇaṃ etassāti sammāabhiniropanalakkhaṇo musāvādādīnaṃ visaṃvādanādikiccatāya lūkhānaṃ apariggāhakānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvato siniddhasabhāvattā sampayuttadhamme, sammāvācappaccayasubhāsitasotārañca janaṃ sammadeva pariggaṇhātīti sammāvācā sammāpariggaho lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti sammāpariggahalakkhaṇā. Yathā kāyikā kiriyā kiñci kattabbaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, sayañca samuṭṭhahanaṃ ghaṭanaṃ hoti, tathā sammākammantasaṅkhātā viratipīti sammāsamuṭṭhānalakkhaṇo sammākammanto. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā ukkhipanaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ kāyikakiriyāya bhārukkhipanaṃ viya. Jīvamānassa sattassa, sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā suddhi vodānaṃ, ājīvasseva vā jīvitappavattiyā suddhi vodānaṃ etenāti sammāvodānalakkhaṇo sammāājīvo. Kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adatvā sampayuttadhammānaṃ paggaṇhanaṃ anubalappadānaṃ paggaho. Ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhānaṃ, tassa vā anissajjanaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ. Ārammaṇe sampayuttadhammānaṃ sammā, samaṃ vā ādhānaṃ samādhānaṃ. Sammā saṅkappeti sampayuttadhamme ārammaṇe abhiniropetīti sammāsaṅkappo. Sammā vadati etāyāti sammāvācā. Sammā karoti etenāti sammākammaṃ, tadeva sammākammanto. Sammā ājīvati etenāti sammāājīvo. Sammā vāyamati ussahati etenāti sammāvāyāmo. Sammā sarati anussaratīti sammāsati. Sammā samādhiyati cittaṃ etenāti sammāsamādhīti evaṃ sammāsaṅkappādīnaṃ nibbacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“邪见”是指一切错误的见解。在“它的对立烦恼”这句话里,“它”指的是正见。因为诸烦恼并不是邪见的对立者,而是正见的对立者。接着特别提到“无明”,是因为无明在那些染污法中是最首要的。所以世尊说:“诸比丘,无明是不善法生起的前导。”(《相应部》5.1)通过断除障碍见的迷乱,所以称为不迷。在这里,“断除邪见……舍弃邪见”显示的是断现观;“以涅槃为所缘”显示的是证现观;“以相应法等”显示的是修现观——这样就表明了正见的作用。而遍知现观,因为是无间引接的,从义理上说已经提到了。巴利
Micchādiṭṭhinti sabbampi micchādassanaṃ. Tappaccanīyakileseti ettha taṃ-saddena sammādiṭṭhi. Na hi micchādiṭṭhiyā kilesā paccanīyā, atha kho sammādiṭṭhiyā. Avijjañcāti avijjāggahaṇaṃ tassā saṃkilesadhammānaṃ pamukhabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘avijjā, bhikkhave, pubbaṅgamā akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1). Dassananivārakassa sammohassa samugghātena asammohato. Ettha ca micchādiṭṭhiṃ…pe… pajahatīti etena pahānābhisamayaṃ, nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karotīti etena sacchikiriyābhisamayaṃ, sampayuttadhammetiādinā bhāvanābhisamayaṃ sammādiṭṭhikiccaṃ dasseti. Pariññābhisamayo pana nānantariyatāya atthato vutto eva hotīti daṭṭhabbo.
那么,难道一种智在一个刹那中完成四种作用,这怎么可能成立呢?不能这样说:“世间没见过这样的事,圣教里也没有这种说法。”就像一盏灯在同一个刹那中,燃烧灯芯、耗尽灯油、驱散黑暗、显现光明,应当这样理解这种智。这里可以引用《分别论》的经文:“对于具备道的人,这是关于苦的智,这是关于苦集的智,这是关于苦灭的智,这是关于趣向苦灭之道的智。”(《分别论》754)又像正见在前分阶段对苦等各别地生起,到了道刹那则成为唯一一个,完成四种智的作用;同样,正思惟等在前分阶段名为出离思惟等,以断除欲思惟等方式各别地生起,到了道刹那则完成三种或四种作用。而正定在前分阶段和道刹那中,都是多种不同地生起的。在这里,对于正见来说,虽然一切恶法都是与它对立相反的,但为了说明正见的作用,特别举出以直接违逆为相的邪见。正因为如此,才说“以及它的对立烦恼”。巴利
Kathaṃ pana ekameva ñāṇaṃ ekasmiṃ khaṇe cattāri kiccāni sādhentaṃ pavattati. Na hi tādisaṃ loke diṭṭhaṃ, na āgamo vā tādiso atthīti na vattabbaṃ. Yathā hi padīpo ekasmiṃyeva khaṇe vaṭṭiṃ dahati, snehaṃ pariyādiyati, andhakāraṃ vidhamati, ālokañca vidaṃseti, evametaṃ ñāṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Maggasamaṅgissa ñāṇaṃ dukkhepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudayepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ , dukkhanirodhepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāyapetaṃ ñāṇanti suttapadaṃ (vibha. 754) ettha udāharitabbaṃ. Yathā ca sammādiṭṭhi pubbabhāge dukkhādīsu visuṃ visuṃ pavattitvā maggakkhaṇe ekāva catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kiccaṃ sādhentī pavattati, evaṃ sammāsaṅkappādayo pubbabhāge nekkhammasaṅkappādināmakā hutvā kāmasaṅkappādīnaṃ pajahanavasena visuṃ visuṃ pavattitvā maggakkhaṇe tiṇṇaṃ catunnañca kiccaṃ sādhentā pavattanti. Sammāsamādhi pana pubbabhāgepi maggakkhaṇepi nānāyeva hutvā pavattatīti kāmañcettha sammādiṭṭhiyā sabbepi pāpadhammā paṭipakkhā, ujuvipaccanīkatādassanavasena pana sammādiṭṭhiyā kiccaniddese micchādiṭṭhiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Teneva ca ‘‘tappaccanīyakilese cā’’ti vuttaṃ.
对于哪些烦恼,如果不去断除,正见就不会生起,这些烦恼就应当被看作是与邪见同生、同属一类的,是正见的对立烦恼。在解释正思惟等的作用时,也是同样的道理。这里把入流道等四种出世间道,按照它们同属出世间道的共性合在一起说。贪和嗔是集谛,这个集所依附的是苦谛,断除的状态是道谛,那个断除所指向的是灭谛——这就是四谛。那么,为什么这里要把贪和嗔分开,并且放在最前面来说呢?分开来说,首先是为了随顺那些这样理解的人的意乐;也是为了说明:有了这些贪和嗔,就有了财物的继承,而断除它们,就有了法的继承;同时也是为了说明,按照这个顺序把四谛联系起来,每一谛都能成为出离之门。在其余各项中,也是同样的道理。至于放在最前面来说,应当知道是因为它们极为粗显、非常明显,是后面将要讲到的其他恶法的根本,并且与这些恶法同属一类。巴利
Yesaṃ kilesānaṃ anupacchindane sammādiṭṭhi na uppajjeyya, te micchādiṭṭhiyā sahajekaṭṭhatāya tadekaṭṭhāva tappaccanīyakilesā daṭṭhabbā. Sammāsaṅkappādīnaṃ kiccaniddesepi eseva nayo. Sotāpattimaggādivasena cattāro lokuttaramaggabhāvasāmaññena ekato katvā. Lobhadosā samudayasaccaṃ, yassa pana so samudayo taṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, pahānabhāvo maggasaccaṃ, yattha taṃ pahānaṃ, taṃ nirodhasaccanti imāni cattāri saccāni. Kasmā panettha lobhadosānaṃ visuṃ ādito ca gahaṇaṃ? Visuṃ gahaṇaṃ tāva tathābujjhanakānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena, imehi lobhadosehi āmisadāyādatā, tappahānena ca dhammadāyādatāti dassanatthaṃ, tadanusārena catusaccayojanāya evaṃ ekekassa niyyānamukhaṃ hotīti dassanatthañca. Sesavāresupi eseva nayo. Ādito gahaṇaṃ pana ativiya oḷārikatāya supākaṭabhāvato vakkhamānānaṃ aññesañca pāpadhammānaṃ mūlabhāvato tadekaṭṭhatāya ca veditabbaṃ.
“有愤恨相”是指有愤怒的本性,意思是心被损害。“凶暴”是指残忍、粗暴的状态。“有造成怨恨的作用”是指以“他对我做了不利的事”等方式,在心中造成怨恨的作用。“现起为损恼”是指像得到机会的怨敌一样,现起为对自己和他人心相续的破坏。“一再系缚”是说对种种方式一次又一次地系缚,因此这样说。关于这一点,也说“有不舍弃怨恨的作用,以持续忿怒的状态为现起”。后面的“怀恨”等——“等”字包含了《分别论》891中所说“怀恨、怀恨状态、固执、僵持、安立、确立、稳固安置、一再结合、一再连接、坚固作用”这些解说词的含义。因为具足怀恨的人,由于不舍弃怨恨,就像燃烧的腐臭火把一样燃烧;他的心在洗涤时,就如同未鞣的生皮,又像沾了墨汁的碎布,无论如何都洗不干净。巴利
Kujjhanalakkhaṇoti kuppanasabhāvo, cittassa byāpajjanāti attho. Caṇḍikkaṃ luddatā, kururabhāvoti attho. Āghātakaraṇarasoti ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādinā citte āghātassa karaṇaraso. Dussanapaccupaṭṭhānoti saparasantānassa vināsanapaccupaṭṭhāno laddhokāso viya sapatto. Upanandhanaṃ nānappakārassa uparūpari nandhanaṃ viya hotīti katvā. Tathā hesa ‘‘veraappaṭinissajjanaraso, kodhānupabandhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti ca vutto. Aparakāle upanāhotiādīti ādi-saddena ‘‘upanayhanā upanayhitattaṃ āṭhapanā ṭhapanā saṇṭhapanā anusaṃsandanā anuppabandhanā daḷhīkamma’’ntiādīnaṃ (vibha. 891) niddesapadānaṃ atthavaṇṇanaṃ saṅgayhati. Upanāhasamaṅgī hi puggalo verassa anissajjanato ādittapūtialātaṃ viya jalati eva, cittañcassa dhoviyamānaṃ acchacammaṃ viya, masimakkhitapilotikā viya ca na sujjhateva.
“贬损他人功德”的特征是:就像擦水的布把水抹掉一样,它的本性就是抹掉别人的功德。应当这样看:这样的人就像把粪便扔向对自己有恩的人,粪便反而先弄脏了自己,他也是先弄脏了自己。因为这样的人会玷污自己和他人相续中的功德,所以称为“贬损”。
“执取轭端”是指执取同一轭,也就是把并不相等、甚至根本不存在的东西强行说成相等。令成平等,就是作平等之态。它是以他人功德的尺度来显发自己的功德,使之呈现出来,所以说“以他人功德的尺度为现起”。正因为如此,他像咬住他人的功德,再用自己的功德去和它拉平,所以称为“执取轭端”。巴利
Paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇoti udakapuñchaniyā udakaṃ viya paresaṃ guṇānaṃ makkhanasabhāvo. Tathābhūto cāyaṃ attano kārakaṃ gūthena paharantaṃ gūtho viya paṭhamataraṃ makkheti evāti daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hessa saparasantānesu guṇaṃ makkhetīti makkhoti vuccati. Yugaggāho samadhuraggahaṇaṃ asamānassapi abhūtassa samāropanaṃ. Samabhāvakaraṇaṃ samīkaraṇaṃ. Paresaṃ guṇappamāṇena attano guṇānaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti āha ‘‘paresaṃ guṇappamāṇena upaṭṭhānapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti. Tathā hesa paresaṃ guṇe ḍaṃsitvā viya attano guṇehi same karotīti paḷāsoti vuccati.
嫉妒他人的成就,就是对他人的成就心怀不满。因为无法忍受他人的成就,所以称为嫉妒。同样地,这种心所被称为“以无法忍受他人成就为特征”。其中,“于彼”指对他人的成就。它以不欢喜为味,作用是直接与欢喜对立。它以背对为现起,因为连看他人的成就都不愿意。它以覆藏为特征,因为无法忍受自己的成就与他人共有。不悦就是不舒服、不快乐,意思是心里不喜欢。巴利
Parasampattikhīyanaṃ parasampattiyā usūyanaṃ. Issati parasampattiṃ na sahatīti issā. Tathā hesā ‘‘parasampattiyā akkhamanalakkhaṇā’’ti vuccati. Tatthāti parasampattiyaṃ. Anabhiratirasā abhiratipaṭipakkhakiccā. Vimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā parasampattiṃ passitumpi appadānato. Nigūhanalakkhaṇaṃ attano sampattiyā parehi sādhāraṇabhāvāsahanato. Asukhāyanaṃ na sukhanaṃ dukkhanaṃ, arocananti adhippāyo.
覆藏已做的身恶行等恶业,就是掩盖已造的恶。它以那恶业作为障碍而显现,所以叫“以彼为障碍而现起”,这就是诡诈。具足这种诡诈的人,就像灰里盖着的火炭,像水里泡着的树桩,又像破布裹着的刀。宣扬不存在的功德,就是把自己身上根本没有的戒等功德显示出来。具足这种虚伪的人,靠吹嘘自己并不具备的功德,随着心念去行动,别人很难看透他“心是这样、行为是这样”,根本摸不清他的底细。因此——巴利
Katassa kāyaduccaritādipāpassa paṭicchādanaṃ katapāpapaṭicchādanaṃ. Tassa pāpassa āvaraṇabhāvena paccupatiṭṭhatīti tadāvaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānā, māyā, yāya samannāgato puggalo bhasmachanno viya aṅgāro, udakachanno viya khāṇu, pilotikapaṭicchāditaṃ viya ca satthaṃ hoti. Avijjamānaguṇappakāsanaṃ attani avijjamānasīlādiguṇavibhāvanaṃ, yena sāṭheyyena samannāgatassa puggalassa asantaguṇasambhāvanena cittānurūpakiriyāviharato ‘‘evaṃcitto, evaṃkiriyo’’ti dubbiññeyyattā kucchiṃ vā piṭṭhiṃ vā jānituṃ na sakkā. Yato –
‘‘Vāmena sūkaro hoti, dakkhiṇena ajāmigo; Sarena nelako hoti, visāṇena jaraggavo’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.296; vibha. aṭṭha. 894; mahāni. aṭṭha. 166) –
就像前面所说的药叉猪那样。巴利
Evaṃ vuttayakkasūkarasadiso hoti.
心的膨胀状态和僵硬粗涩状态。所谓“不谦卑而住”,就是不谦卑地生活。“以不柔和的方式现起”,就是以不柔和的方式出现,或者令不柔和性现前,这就是固执。具足这种固执的人,就像吞下犁头的蟒蛇,又像充满气的皮囊,僵硬挺直,见到应受尊敬的人也不肯弯腰,仅以局限的方式行事。“作上”,指进一步的造作。“特别相违”,指格外敌对——别人做了某件事,他便以加倍的方式生起争斗。巴利
Cittassa uddhumātabhāvo thaddhalūkhabhāvo. Appatissayavuttīti anivātavutti. Amaddavākārena paccupatiṭṭhati, amaddavataṃ vā paccupaṭṭhapetīti amaddavatāpaccupaṭṭhāno, thambho, yena samannāgato puggalo gilitanaṅgalasīso viya ajagaro, vātabharitabhastā viya ca thaddho hutvā garuṭṭhāniye ca disvā onamitumpi na icchati, pariyanteneva carati. Karaṇassa uttarakiriyā karaṇuttariyaṃ. Visesato paccanīkabhāvo vipaccanīkatā. Parena hi kismiñci kate taddiguṇaṃ karaṇavasena sārambho pavattati.
以“优越”等种种形态表现出来的抬举自己,就是高举。因为卑慢也是通过这种造作方式,以抬高自己的形态生起的。“我是优越的”等等,这种执取自我的抬高,就是我慢。压过别人之后更加抬举自己,就是极慢。针对这一点,才有这样的说法:“先前把自己看成低劣,后来却把自己看成优越。”(vibha. 877)巴利
Seyyādiākārehi unnamanaṃ unnati. Omānopi hi evaṃ karaṇamukhena sampaggahavaseneva pavattati. ‘‘Ahamasmi seyyo’’tiādinā ahaṃkaraṇaṃ sampaggaho ahaṅkāro. Pare abhibhavitvā adhikaṃ unnamanaṃ abbhunnati. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbakāle attānaṃ hīnato dahati aparakāle seyyato’’ti (vibha. 877).
陶醉的状态:依靠出身等,心呈现出的沉醉样子;或者,由于某种法,一个人被称为陶醉,那个法就是陶醉的状态。它的作用是执取醉味,也就是执取陶醉的作用。因为陶醉转起时,好像让与它相应的法执取自己的沉醉样子,也好像让具有这些法的人变成那样。它借由我慢,把这个人变得不可意,就像心的迷乱一样,所以以迷乱为现起。不摄持念而舍弃心,就是心的放逸,意思是缺少正念。前面所说的放逸,若不断提供,也就是反复舍弃,就称为放逸的不断提供。这些包括忿怒等,或者贪等。相、味、现起等已经说明。足处因为没有别的法,所以这里没有取。释词方面,像“kujjhatīti kodho,upanayhatīti upanāho”这样,很容易理解,所以没有说。但从义理上说,kodho就是嗔恚,upanāho也是这样。它们只是转起行相上的差别而已。贬损、恼害、斗诤,是那时以那种行相转起的与嗔俱起的心生起法。诡诈、虚伪、固执、陶醉、放逸,是那时以那种行相转起的与贪俱起的心生起法。固执,或者是慢的一种差别,因为要从心的僵硬状态来理解。陶醉也是这样。因此,它在《分别论》中以“māno maññanā”等说明。但在这里,因为慢和过慢已经分开取了,所以应以沉醉行相转起的法本身作为“陶醉”来理解。其余法的不同性质,本来就很明显。巴利
Mattabhāvo jātiādiṃ paṭicca cittassa majjanākāro, yassa vā dhammassa vasena puggalo matto nāma hoti, so dhammo mattabhāvo. Madaggāhaṇaraso madassa gāhaṇakicco. Mado hi attano majjanākāraṃ sampayuttadhamme gāhento viya pavattamāno taṃsamaṅgiṃ puggalampi tathā karonto viya hoti. Ahaṅkāravasena puggalaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ karonto cittassa ummādabhāvo viya hotīti ummādapaccupaṭṭhāno. Satiyā aniggaṇhitvā cittassa vossajjanaṃ cittavossaggo, sativirahitoti attho. Yathāvuttassa vossaggassa anuppadānaṃ punappunaṃ vissajjanaṃ vossaggānuppadānaṃ. Imesaṃ kodhādīnaṃ lobhādīnampi vā. Lakkhaṇādīnīti lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānāni. Padaṭṭhānaṃ pana dhammantaratāya na gahitaṃ. Nibbacanaṃ ‘‘kujjhatīti kodho, upanayhatīti upanāho’’tiādinā suviññeyyamevāti na vuttaṃ, atthato pana kodho doso eva, tathā upanāho. Pavattiākāramattato hi kato nesaṃ bhedo, makkhapaḷāsasārambhā tadākārappavattā paṭighasahagatacittuppādadhammā, māyāsāṭheyyathambhamadappamādā tadākārappavattā lobhasahagatacittuppādadhammā. Thambho vā mānaviseso cittassa thaddhabhāvena gahetabbato, tathā mado. Tathā hi so ‘‘māno maññanā’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 878) niddiṭṭho. Idha pana mānātimānānaṃ visuṃ gahitattā majjanākārena pavattadhammā eva ‘‘mado’’ti gahetabbā. Sesānaṃ dhammantarabhāvo pākaṭo eva.
为什么这里只取了这八个二法?难道除此之外就没有别的烦恼法了吗?不是没有。不过,对贪图利养的人来说,这些法特别容易导致烦恼。为了说明这种特别之处,显示贪图利养者的贪等生起的方式,所以才开始说“特别”等语。其中,“这里”是指在贪等这些法当中。“得不到”是指得不到利养,这是要表达的意思。“因此更生起的忿怒”应当连起来理解。“即使存在”就是虽然存在。“嫉妒”就是生起嫉妒。“愤恨”是它的同义词。因为注文中就这样以“嫉妒、愤恨、愤恨”等语来解说它。或者说,由于生起嫉妒的人必定是心已败坏,所以说“愤恨”。“他的”就是指那贪著财利者。“如此行道”就是行于宣扬不实功德之道。“不能劝诫”这一句显示所谓憍慢是令人难以受教之法。“说些什么”是指从给予教诫方面来说。以“由憍慢……乃至……自认为”这一句显示憍慢是慢的一种差别,或者说是以憍慢为因的意思。“成为陶醉”就是处于陶醉状态。以“欲……乃至……放逸”这一句显示由于陶醉必定会陷入放逸。巴利
Kasmā panettha ete eva aṭṭha dukā gahitā, kimito aññepi kilesadhammā natthīti? No natthi, ime pana āmisadāyādassa savisesaṃ kilesāya saṃvattantīti taṃ visesaṃ vibhāventena āmisadāyādassa lobhādīnaṃ pavattanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘visesato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha etthāti etesu lobhādīsu. Alabhanto āmisanti adhippāyo. Tatuttari uppanno kodhoti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Santepīti vijjamānepi. Issatīti issaṃ janeti. Padussatīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Tathā hi sā ‘‘issati dussati padussatī’’tiādinā niddiṭṭhā. Yasmā vā issaṃ janento ekaṃsato paduṭṭhacitto eva hoti, tasmā ‘‘padussatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Assāti āmisadāyādassa. Evaṃ paṭipannoti evaṃ asantaguṇappakāsanaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipanno. Ovadituṃ asakkuṇeyyoti etena thambho nāma dovacassakaraṇo dhammoti dasseti. Kiñci vadati ovādadānavasena. Thambhena…pe… maññantoti iminā ca thambhassa mānavisesabhāvaṃ dasseti, thambhena vā hetunāti attho. Matto samānoti matto honto. Kāma…pe… pamajjatīti etena madavasena ekaṃsato pamādamāpajjatīti dasseti.
“如此”这句话应当这样理解:正是通过显示贪著财利者的贪等生起次第,这里也显示了经文中它们的说法次第。应当这样连接:不只是被这些恶法束缚,还被其他同类的恶法束缚,所以并未从中解脱。“哪些呢?”就是过度的贪欲、极大的贪欲等。贪著财利有这么大的过患,因此应当生起比那更强烈的悚惧感——这是此处应知的教导。“于此”指在这部经中。“一切处”指所有部分。“无差别”应当理解为:用这里首先显示的真理连接方式,就可以贯通到所有部分。巴利
Evanti iminā āmisadāyādassa lobhādīnaṃ uppattikkamadassaneneva idha pāḷiyaṃ nesaṃ desanākkamopi dassitoti daṭṭhabbo. Na kevalaṃ imeheva, atha kho aññehi ca evarūpehi pāpakehi dhammehi aparimutto hotīti sambandho. Ke pana teti? Atricchatāmahicchatādayoti. Evaṃ mahādīnavā āmisadāyādatāti tato balavataro saṃvego janetabboti ayamettha ovādo veditabbo. Etthāti etasmiṃ sutte. Sabbatthāti sabbesu vāresu. Nibbisesoyevāti eteneva paṭhamataraṃ idha dassitasaccayojanānayena sabbavāresu yojetabboti veditabbo.
“智的熟悉与明净的基础”是指:为了说明圣道有时是八支、有时是七支等差别,以反复修习为“熟悉”之义,称为“智的熟悉”,它的目的是让智明净、善巧。“于此”是指在圣道中。“差别”是指不同之处。“次第”是指各支说法的先后顺序。“修习方式”是指修习的方法。为了解释前面简略说的“有时是八支,有时是七支”,又说了“这确实……”等话。其中,“依出世间初禅那”是指依出世间初禅那。在这里,有些禅那的法本身就是道的体性,所以不能把禅那和道完全分开来说,因此不说“与出世间初禅那俱行”,而只说“依出世间初禅那”。或者,“依出世间初禅那”的意思是:成为出世间之后,依初禅那的方式,应这样理解。因为圣道是依作为观禅基础的初禅那、或依已遍熟了的初禅那而成为八支的。或者,对于没有获得禅那的纯观行者,或者对于获得禅那但不以初禅那为基础的人,或者对于在杂多行中遍熟而生起的圣道,也是八支;为了显示它的八支性来自初禅那的状态,所以说“依初禅那的方式”。同样,“依其余禅那的方式”等处,应随情况理解其义。巴利
Ñāṇaparicayapāṭavatthanti maggassa aṭṭhaṅgasattaṅgatādivisesavibhāvanāya ñāṇassa āsevanaṭṭhena paricayo ñāṇaparicayo, tassa paṭubhāvatthaṃ kosallatthaṃ. Etthāti ariyamagge. Bhedoti viseso. Kamoti aṅgānaṃ desanānupubbī. Bhāvanānayoti bhāvanāvidhi. ‘‘Kadāci aṭṭhaṅgiko, kadāci sattaṅgiko’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto puna ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha lokuttarapaṭhamajjhānavasenāti lokuttarassa paṭhamajjhānassa vasena. Ettha ca keci jhānadhammā maggasabhāvāti ekantato jhānaṃ maggato visuṃ katvā vattuṃ na sakkāti ‘‘lokuttarapaṭhamajjhānasahito’’ti avatvā ‘‘lokuttarapaṭhamajjhānavasena’’icceva vuttaṃ. Atha vā lokuttarapaṭhamajjhānavasenāti lokuttarā hutvā paṭhamajjhānassa vasenāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Ariyamaggo hi vipassanāya pādakabhūtassa, sammasitassa vā paṭhamajjhānassa vasena aṭṭhaṅgiko hoti. Atha vā ajhānalābhino sukkhavipassakassa, jhānalābhino vā pādakamakatvā paṭhamajjhānassa, pakiṇṇakasaṅkhārānaṃ vā sammasane uppanno ariyamaggo aṭṭhaṅgiko hoti, svāssa aṭṭhaṅgikabhāvo paṭhamajjhānikabhāvenāti dassento ‘‘paṭhamajjhānavasenā’’ti āha. Evaṃ ‘‘avasesajjhānavasenā’’ti etthāti yathārahaṃ attho veditabbo.
如果圣道也可以是七支,那为什么经里只说是“八支”呢?他回答说“这是从最殊胜的角度来说的”等等。就像在这里,从修行道的角度来说,道有八支和七支的差别;同样地,从觉支的角度来说,也应该知道有七支和六支的差别,因为无喜的禅那只有六支。不过,这里是按照道的角度来开示的,这个差别在注疏里并没有单独提出来。所谓“在这之后”,意思是:从这个八支再往上,从最殊胜的角度来说,或者从这个七支再往上,从最低的角度来说,再也没有别的道支了。有人问:在《分别论》的道分别五支部分里,不是只提到了五种道支吗?而且在《中部·大六处经》里也说:“如实者的见、如实者的思惟、如实者的精进、如实者的念、如实者的定,这就是他的正定。”但在这之前又说:“其实他的身业、语业、活命,在此之前就已经完全清净了。”这样一来,正语等道支不也包含在内了吗?回答:确实如此。不过那样说,是为了显示正见等这五种道支还有让其他支分成就的额外作用。所以不应该认为存在缺少正语等支分的圣道。因此说“在这之后再也没有别的道支”,这个说法是非常妥当的。巴利
Yadi ariyamaggo sattaṅgikopi hoti, atha kasmā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgiko’’icceva vuttanti āha ‘‘ukkaṭṭhaniddesato’’tiādi. Yathā cettha paṭipadāya maggavasena aṭṭhaṅgikasattaṅgikabhedo , evaṃ bojjhaṅgavasena sattaṅgikachaḷaṅgikabhedo veditabbo appītikajjhānavasena chaḷaṅgikattā, maggavasena pana desanā āgatāti svāyaṃ bhedo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na uddhaṭo. Ito paranti ito aṭṭhaṅgato paraṃ ukkaṃsato, avakaṃsato pana sattaṅgato paraṃ maggaṅgaṃ nāma natthīti. Nanu maggavibhaṅge (vibha. 493-502) pañcaṅgikavāre pañceva maggaṅgāni uddhaṭāni, mahāsaḷāyatane (ma. ni. 3.431) ca ‘‘yā tathābhūtassa diṭṭhi, yo tathābhūtassa saṅkappo, yo tathābhūtassa vāyāmo, yā tathābhūtassa sati, yo tathābhūtassa samādhi, svāssa hoti sammāsamādhī’’ti vatvā pubbabhāgavasena pana ‘‘pubbeva kho panassa kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ ājīvo suparisuddho hotī’’ti sammāvācādayo āgatāti? Saccametaṃ, taṃ pana sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ kārāpakaṅgānaṃ atirekakiccadassanavasena vuttaṃ, tasmā na ariyamaggo sammāvācādivirahito atthīti ‘‘ito parañhi maggaṅgaṃ natthī’’ti suvuttametanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“一切善法”指的是所有善法。这里的属格表示区分关系。在欲界等各类善法中,正见是最殊胜的。正因为正见殊胜,才说“以慧为生的人,其生活被称为最殊胜”。至于道正见在一切法中最殊胜,那更不用说了。“在善的场合”指善心生起的时候。正见被称为“前导”,是因为它能如实了知善法等诸法的自性,从而引导同时生起的诸法。因此说“他了知正见就是正见”等等。正见是正思惟的来源,所以正思惟是“从正见而生”,因为依靠正见才有正思惟。“从那里产生”指从那个来源生起。虽然是从那个来源生起,却说成“从彼生起”,这是把近因方便地说成原因。因此说“其余的道支都从那个来源生起”。于是又说“有正见的人”等等。就像正见是正思惟的殊胜助缘,正思惟是正知的殊胜助缘,正知是正发起的殊胜助缘,正发起是正清净的殊胜助缘,正清净是正精进的殊胜助缘,正精进是正安立的殊胜助缘,正安立是正定的殊胜助缘。因此,前前是后后的殊胜助缘。正是以这个显示殊胜助缘的道理,才依次说出正见等这些道支。巴利
Sabbakusalānanti sabbesaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Kāmāvacarādivasena taṃtaṃkusaladhammesu sā sammādiṭṭhi seṭṭhā. Tassā seṭṭhabhāvena hi ‘‘paññājīviṃ jīvitamāhu seṭṭha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 184) vuttaṃ, maggasammādiṭṭhiyā pana sabbaseṭṭhabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Kusalavāreti kusaluppattisamaye. Pubbaṅgamā kusalādidhammānaṃ yāthāvasabhāvabodhena sampayuttadhammānaṃ pariṇāyakabhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhiṃ sammādiṭṭhīti pajānātī’’tiādi. Sā sammādiṭṭhi pabhavo etassāti tappabhavo, sammāsaṅkappo. Sammādassanavasena hi sammāsaṅkappo hoti. Tato abhinibbattānīti tappabhavābhinibbattāni. Tappabhavābhinibbattānipi ‘‘tadabhinibbattānī’’ti vuccanti kāraṇakāraṇepi kāraṇūpacāratoti āha ‘‘tappabhavābhinibbattāni sesaṅgānī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhissā’’tiādi. Yathā hi sammādassanaṃ sammāvitakkanassa visesapaccayo, evaṃ sammāvitakkanaṃ sammāpariggahassa sammāpariggaho sammāsamuṭṭhānassa, sammāsamuṭṭhānaṃ sammāvodānassa, sammāvodānaṃ sammāvāyāmassa, sammāvāyāmo sammāupaṭṭhānassa, sammāupaṭṭhānaṃ sammādhānassa visesapaccayo, tasmā ‘‘purimaṃ purimaṃ pacchimassa pacchimassa visesapaccayo hotī’’ti iminā visesapaccayabhāvadassanatthena kamena etāni sammādiṭṭhiādīni aṅgāni vuttānīti dassitāni.
“修行方式”是指止与观双运而展开的修行方法。这也就是在圣道刹那的修行方法。不过在它之前的前分阶段,有些人的修行方式以止为先导,有些人的修行方式以观为先导。为了说明这种方式,才开始说“有某一类人”等。其中,第一种是依止行者的角度说的,第二种是依观行者的角度说的。因此他说“在这里,有某一类人”等。“那”是指止、定,或者也可以理解为禅那法。“与彼相应”是指与定相应、或与禅那相应的法。而这种方式,主要是考虑到止行者大多通过无色界的方式,并且在那里也通过禅那的方式投入修观,所以才这样说。“修习观”是指从行道知见清净开始,让已经如实证得的初阶观继续增长。“道生起”是指前分阶段的世间道生起。“亲近”是依厌离随观来说的。“修习”是依想要解脱的意愿来说的。“多修习”是依审察随观来说的。或者,“亲近”是依怖畏现起智来说的,“多修习”是依出起随观来说的。诸结被断除,随眠被彻底消灭,这是依照道的次第来说的。巴利
Bhāvanānayoti samathavipassanānaṃ yuganaddhabhāvena pavatto bhāvanāvidhi. Ayañhi ariyamaggakkhaṇe bhāvanāvidhi. Tassa pana pubbabhāge bhāvanānayo kassaci samathapubbaṅgamo hoti , kassaci vipassanāpubbaṅgamoti. Taṃ vidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kocī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha paṭhamo samathayānikassa vasena vutto, dutiyo vipassanāyānikassa. Tenāha ‘‘idhekacco’’tiādi. Tanti samathaṃ samādhiṃ, jhānadhammeti vā attho. Taṃsampayutteti samādhisampayutte, jhānasampayutte vā dhamme. Ayañca nayo yebhuyyena samathayānikā arūpamukhena, tatthāpi jhānamukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ karontīti katvā vutto. Vipassanaṃ bhāvayatoti paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiṃ ārabhitvā yathādhigataṃ taruṇavipassanaṃ vaḍḍhentassa. Maggo sañjāyatīti pubbabhāgiyo lokiyamaggo uppajjati. Āsevati nibbidānupassanāvasena. Bhāveti muñcitukamyatāvasena. Bahulīkaroti paṭisaṅkhānupassanāvasena. Āsevati vā bhayatūpaṭṭhānañāṇavasena. Bahulīkaroti vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāvasena. Saṃyojanāni pahīyanti,anusayā byantī honti maggapaṭipāṭiyā.
没有生起止,这里用这个限定词是为了排除近行定,不是排除刹那定。因为离开了刹那定,观就不可能生起。由于观的圆满,是指由于观达到圆满,从而到达出起随观的状态。于那时所生的,是指在那个圣道刹那中生起的正见等法。这里的属格表示区分。以最舍为所缘,是指以最舍为所缘。最舍、遣舍、弃舍和究竟,意义上是同一个,说的就是涅槃,所以意思是以涅槃为所缘。心的一境性,说的是道正定。因为圣道完全入定,这是由于它彻底断除了不能入定的因——烦恼。其余部分应按照前面已说的方法来理解。巴利
Samathaṃ anuppādetvāvāti avadhāraṇena upacārasamādhiṃ nivatteti, na khaṇikasamādhiṃ. Na hi khaṇikasamādhiṃ vinā vipassanā sambhavati. Vipassanāpāripūriyāti vipassanāya paripuṇṇatāya vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvappattiyā. Tatthajātānanti tasmiṃ ariyamaggakkhaṇe uppannānaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Vavassaggārammaṇatoti vavassaggassa ārammaṇatāya. Vavassaggo vossaggo paṭinissaggoti ca apavaggoti ca atthato ekaṃ, nibbānanti vuttaṃ hoti, tasmā nibbānassa ārammaṇakaraṇenāti attho. Cittassa ekaggatāti maggasammāsamādhimāha. Ariyamaggo hi ekanta samāhito asamādhānahetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ samucchedanato. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
那时它们成为双运,因为定与慧的平衡状态是值得期许的。确实,在圣道刹那,定不像修止时那样在作用上更值得期许,慧也不像修观时那样在作用上更值得期许;而是由于二者的平衡,彼此互不超越,所以两者犹如双运一般共同运作。因此说:“止与观成为双运。”巴利
Yuganaddhāvahonti tadā samādhipaññānaṃ samarasatāya icchitabbato. Maggakkhaṇe hi na samathabhāvanāyaṃ viya samādhi, vipassanābhāvanāyaṃ viya ca paññā kiccato adhikā icchitabbā, samarasatāya pana aññamaññassa anativattanaṭṭhena dvepi yuganaddhā viya pavattanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samathavipassanā yuganaddhāva hontī’’ti.
《怖畏惊骇经》注疏 4.巴利
4. Bhayabheravasuttavaṇṇanā
34 “如是我闻”这句,是《怖畏惊骇经》。怎么安立呢?有些人先说:“这是依问安立。”问有两种,按明显和不明显来分。其中,如果某个开示的引子——也就是想要了解的意义——是通过带“kiṃ”这个词的方式表达出来,那就是明显的问,比如“世间什么财物对人最殊胜?”(《相应部》1.246;《经集》183)。但如果某个开示的引子,想要了解的意义不用“kiṃ”这个词,只是靠单纯的语言表达来显示,那就是不明显的问。因为想要了解的意义就叫作“问、询问”,所以这里“ye me bho gotamā”等话就是不明显的问,因此说是“依问安立”。但这种说法站不住脚,因为那位婆罗门说“ye me bho gotamā”等话时,并不是带着疑惑、犹豫、困惑才说的,而是为了说出自己内心所想要表达的意义,表达对世尊的净信和推崇,所以才说“于世尊得净信”等(《中部》注疏1.34)。“Vihāreti”是指在精舍中居住。“Avicchinneyeva”是指正在持续进行当中。这两个词也都含有“住于”的意思。这个国师的地位,连同顶髻等庄严宝物一起,是这样得到的,他们也说“这是国王赐给他的”。因此说“那是国王赐给他的”。“Brahma”是指吠陀。它按咒语和梵行的类别分为三种。其中,咒语是主要的,因为是根本;那些由八诵等所诵出的,其余的是依它而生的,所以只取那些,说“他诵习咒语”。它们因为应当被守护、应当被诵说,所以称为“mantā”。这里用“idameva hi”这个限定,是为了否定“从梵天所生”之类的说法。巴利
34.Evaṃme sutanti bhayabheravasuttaṃ. Ko nikkhepo? Keci tāva evamāhu ‘‘pucchāvasiko nikkhepo’’ti. Duvidhā hi pucchā pākaṭāpākaṭabhedato. Tattha yassā desanāya nimittabhūto ñātuṃ icchito attho kiṃ-saddapubbakena pakāsīyati, sā pākaṭā pucchā yathā ‘‘kiṃsūdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’nti evamādi (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 183). Yassā pana desanāya nimittabhūto ñātuṃ icchito attho kiṃ-saddarahitena kevaleneva saddapayogena pakāsīyati, sā apākaṭā pucchā. Ñātuṃ icchito hi attho ‘‘pañhā, pucchā’’ti vuccati, tasmāyeva idha ‘‘ye me bho gotamā’’tiādikā apākaṭāti ‘‘pucchāvasiko nikkhepo’’ti. Tayidaṃ akāraṇaṃ, yasmā so brāhmaṇo ‘‘yeme bho gotamā’’tiādīni vadanto na tattha kaṅkhī vicikicchī saṃsayamāpanno avoca, atha kho attanā yathānicchitamatthaṃ bhagavati pasādabhāvabahumānaṃ pavedento kathesi. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavati pasādaṃ alatthā’’tiādi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34). Vihāreti vihārake nivāse. Avicchinneyevāti pavattamāneyeva. Padadvayassapi vasante evāti attho. Etaṃ purohitaṭṭhānaṃ uṇhīsādikakudhabhaṇḍehi saddhiṃ laddhaṃ, tathā ca ‘‘assa raññā dinna’’nti vadanti. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ tassa raññā dinna’’nti. Brahmanti vedaṃ. So pana mantabrahmakappavasena tividho. Tattha mantā padhānaṃ mūlabhāvato, ye aṭṭhakādīhi pavuttā, itare tannissayena jātā, tena tesaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ ‘‘mante sajjhāyatī’’ti . Te hi guttabhāsitabbatāya ‘‘mantā’’ti vuccanti. Idameva hīti avadhāraṇena ‘‘brahmato jātā’’tiādikaṃ niruttiṃ paṭikkhipati.
“以某因由故”这句话里,这里的具格是表示原因。所谓原因,是指动作的起因,而不是像工具那样表示动作义。所以,这里所说的“前往”这一动作,是为了证得种种不同的殊胜功德;就像“依食而住”等说法一样,这里的具格只适合表示原因,不能表示工具,因为工具义在这里不成立。因此才说“以某因由故”等等。世尊因为正法之果恒常相续、无上、甘美、广大、具有甘露之味,所以被譬喻为一棵恒常结出甘美果实的大树。实际上,正是因为执取了想享用甘美果实的意图,才执取了大树具有甘美果实这一点。巴利
Yena vā kāraṇenāti (sārattha. ṭī. verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ 2; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1; a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.16) hetumhi idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Hetuattho hi kiriyākāraṇaṃ, na karaṇaṃ viya kiriyattho, tasmā nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamatthā idha upasaṅkamanakiriyāti ‘‘annena vasatī’’tiādīsu viya hetuatthamevetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ yuttaṃ, na karaṇatthaṃ tassa ayujjamānattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yena vā kāraṇenā’’tiādi. Bhagavato satatappavattaniratisayasāduvipulāmatarasasaddhammaphalatāya sāduphalaniccaphalitamahārukkhena bhagavā upamito, sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyaggahaṇeneva hi mahārukkhassa sāduphalatā gahitāti.
“前往”就是已经到达。因为想要到达某个地方而行走的人,每经过一个又一个区域,就称为“前往”,或者说,这样才配得上“已前往”这个说法。所以解释说“意思就是已经去了”,也就是已经到达的意思。“前往之后”是对先前动作的说明,因此解释说“显示前往已经完成”。“从那里”是指到达了被称为“前往”的那个地方之后,从已经到达的那个地点。就像《相应部复注》1.1.112中所说,在询问“能安忍吗”等内容时,就像世尊以“婆罗门,能安忍吗?能维持吗?”等语询问能安忍等事,与那位婆罗门一起生起完全欢悦之情,由于先前已交谈,模仿那一点,那位婆罗门也与世尊一起生起完全欢悦之情,这是句义连接。为了以譬喻显示那完全欢悦之情,说了“如凉水”等。其中,“sammodita”是相会合的意思。“ekībhāva”指透过欢悦这个动作而成为等同、成为一味。“能安忍吗”是问:“这个有四轮、九门的身体机器,因刹那坏灭性,从自性上说难以忍受,能忍得了吗?”“能维持吗”是问:依靠诸缘而存续的、被称为长久相续的维持,能维持得了吗?以没有头痛等疾病故,问“少病吗?”以没有痛苦生活故,问“少恼吗?”以作种种应作之事时起身轻快故,问“轻快起身吗?”以具有与之相应的体力故,问“有力吗?”以有安乐住故,问“有安乐住吗?”应于各处配上“kacci”一词而理解其义。巴利
Upasaṅkamīti upasaṅkanto. Sampattukāmatāya hi kiñci ṭhānaṃ gacchanto taṃtaṃpadesātikkamanena upasaṅkami, upasaṅkantoti vā vattabbataṃ labhati. Tenāha ‘‘gatoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti, upagatoti attho. Upasaṅkamitvāti pubbakālakiriyāniddesoti āha ‘‘upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpana’’nti. Tatoti yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patto ‘‘upasaṅkamī’’ti vutto, tato upagataṭṭhānato. Yathā khamanīyādīni pucchantoti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.112) yathā bhagavā ‘‘kacci te brāhmaṇa khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīya’’ntiādinā khamanīyādīni pucchanto tena brāhmaṇena saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosi pubbabhāsitāya, tadanukaraṇena evaṃ sopi brāhmaṇo bhagavatā saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosīti yojanā. Taṃ pana samappavattamodataṃ upamāya dassetuṃ ‘‘sītodakaṃ viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sammoditanti saṃsanditaṃ. Ekībhāvanti sammodanakiriyāya samānataṃ ekarūpataṃ. Khamanīyanti ‘‘idaṃ catucakkaṃ navadvāraṃ sarīrayantaṃ khaṇabhaṅguratāya sabhāvato dussahaṃ, kacci khamituṃ sakkuṇeyya’’nti pucchati. Yāpanīyanti paccayāyattavuttikaṃ cirappabandhasaṅkhātāya yāpanāya kacci yāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ. Sīsarogādiābādhābhāvena kacci appābādhaṃ. Dukkhajīvikābhāvena kacci appātaṅkaṃ. Taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇe uṭṭhānasukhatāya kacci lahuṭṭhānaṃ. Tadanarūpabalayogato kacci balaṃ. Sukhavihārasabbhāvena kacci phāsuvihāro atthīti tattha tattha kacci-saddaṃ yojetvā attho veditabbo.
强有力的喜,本身就是喜。初生的喜是欢悦。它能让人欢喜、使人欢喜,所以叫“能令人欢喜”,而它本身就是“应当被欢喜的”,因此说“因为能产生欢喜”。所谓“应当被欢喜”,是因为值得被欢喜;为了说明这个意思,就说“因为适合被欢喜”。所谓“应当被忆念的状态”,是指应当随念的状态。本来该说“应当被忆念的”,把元音拉长后就说成了“应当被忆持的”。所谓“因为听闻之乐”,是说听起来甜美悦耳;所谓“因为随念之乐”,是说反复品味时感到愉悦。“因为言辞清净”,是说以自然通俗的语言展现出说话的善巧;“因为义理清净”,是说所表达的意义远离一切杂染。“以种种方式”,是指以种种原因。巴利
Balavappattā pīti pītiyeva. Taruṇapīti pāmojjaṃ. Sammodanaṃ janeti karotīti sammodanikaṃ, tadeva sammodanīyanti āha ‘‘sammodajananato’’ti. Sammoditabbato sammodanīyanti imaṃ pana atthaṃ dassento ‘‘sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato’’ti āha. Saritabbabhāvatoti anussaritabbabhāvato. ‘‘Saraṇīya’’nti vattabbe dīghaṃ katvā ‘‘sāraṇīya’’nti vuttaṃ. Suyyamānasukhatoti āpāthamadhurataṃ āha, anussariyamānasukhatoti vimaddaramaṇīyataṃ. Byañjanaparisuddhatāyāti sabhāvaniruttibhāvena tassā kathāya vacanacāturiyamāha, atthaparisuddhatāyāti atthassa nirupakkilesataṃ. Anekehi pariyāyehīti anekehi kāraṇehi.
通过排除太远和太近,就确定了所谓的“不太远也不太近”;而从最低标准来说,应当理解为两个人伸直手臂时手指相碰。所谓“伸出脖子”,是指转动脖子把它伸出去。巴利
Abhidūraaccāsannapaṭikkhepena nātidūranāccāsannaṃ nāma gahitaṃ, taṃ pana avakaṃsato ubhinnaṃ pasāritahatthasaṅghaṭṭanena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gīvaṃ pasāretvāti gīvaṃ parivattanavasena pasāretvā.
这里“ye me”是因为连音关系省略了i音,为了说明它原本是“ye ime”这样的形式,所以说了“ye ime”等。因为出身高贵,从种姓方面说是出身良家的人,也就是种姓良家子弟,因此说“出身于高贵家族”。因为品行端正,从行为方面说是品行良家的人,也就是品行良家子弟,因此说“具足正行”。无论在哪里,即使是在不为人知的家族中。那位婆罗门所指的良家子弟,在比丘中两种都存在,所以他说:“但在这里,因为这两种原因,他们都是真正的良家子弟。”巴利
Yemeti ettha sandhivasena ikāralopoti dassento ‘‘ye ime’’tiādimāha. Uccākulīnatāya jātivasena abhijātā jātikulaputtā. Tenāha ‘‘uccākulappasutā’’ti. Ācārasampattiyā abhijātā ācārakulaputtā. Tenāha ‘‘ācārasampannā’’ti. Yattha katthaci apākaṭepi kule. Tena brāhmaṇena adhippetā bhikkhūsu duvidhāpi saṃvijjantīti āha ‘‘idha pana dvīhipi kāraṇehi kulaputtāyevā’’ti.
关于“信”这个词,这里是依工具格的意义而用主格来说,所以说“以信”;或者“信”就是“信解之后”的意思。照这一解释来看,应当知道经文中是省略了ya这个音节的表达。“从家”就是从居家生活出离,这是省略了后一个词,或者也可以说是用所依来代指的说法。以乞食等为特征的比丘身份,是与出家一起生起的比丘身份,所以他说“出家与比丘身份”。不过,当特指以甘马语为特征的比丘身份时,就应当知道ca这个词是表示集合的意思。“无家状态”:以此标示了依出家所成的极净戒行功德特质,而这里对农耕、牧牛等业的遮止,应当通过此处所说的“无生起”等来理解。然而,在“其余”的摄取中,由于以皈依等为方式的出家、以皈依等为方式的达上各有多种差别,所以他说“以一切方式”,意思是“以种种方式”。由于是以前行而趣入,即以修行而趣入,不是以身体而趣入,所以他说“导师”,意思是依正行而使人到达涅槃。对于利益行,即对于现世等利益之行。对于“执取”,是在增上戒等上的彻底致力于,不是仅仅言说,为了显示这一点,说了“使执取”之后,又说“使学”。对于“见随行”,即依见的随行,为了显示这一点,说了“见随行”之后,又摄三类学而说世尊的教法;因为以彼而见,所以是见,对于那同一者以忍可的方式是忍,以欢喜的方式是欲,那些具足彼见、忍、欲者就是世尊的弟子,所以他说“具如是见者”等。巴利
Saddhāti idaṃ karaṇatthe paccattavacananti āha ‘‘saddhāyā’’ti, saddhāti vā saddahitvāti attho. Imasmiṃ pakkhe pāḷiyaṃ ya-kāralopena niddesoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Agāratoti agāravāsato, uttarapadalopena, nissayūpacārena vā ayaṃ niddesoti. Bhikkhanasīlatādilakkhaṇo bhikkhubhāvo pabbajjāsahacaritāya saddhiṃ bhikkhubhāvaṃ anvācinantoti āha ‘‘pabbajjaṃ bhikkhubhāvañcā’’ti. Kammavācālakkhaṇe pana bhikkhubhāve adhippete samuccayattho ca-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Anagārassa bhāvoti etena pabbajjānissito suvisuddho sīlācāraguṇaviseso gahito, kasigorakkhādikammapaṭikkhepo idha anuppādādīhi veditabbo. Sesaggahaṇe pana saraṇagamanādivasena pabbajjāya, saraṇagamanādivasena upasampadāya ca anekabhedattā āha ‘‘sabbathāpī’’ti, tena tena pakārenāti attho. Puratogāmitā paṭipattigamanena, na kāyagamanenāti āha ‘‘nāyako’’ti , sammāpaṭipattiyā nibbānasampāpakoti attho. Hitakiriyāyāti diṭṭhadhammikādihitacariyāya. Gāhaṇaṃ adhisīlādīsu accantāya niyojanaṃ, na kathanamattanti dassento ‘‘gāhetā’’ti vatvā ‘‘sikkhāpetā’’ti āha. Diṭṭhānugatinti diṭṭhiyā anugamananti dassento ‘‘dassanānugati’’nti vatvā sikkhāttayasaṅgahaṃ bhagavato sāsanaṃ tena diṭṭhattā diṭṭhi, tassa tasseva khamanavasena khanti, ruccanavasena ruci, taṃdiṭṭhikhantirucikāva bhagavato sāvakāti āha ‘‘yaṃdiṭṭhiko’’tiādi.
“这位据说得到了”,这是连接语。“如同对天子”等话,是为了说明没有任何衰败,从而把前面以“以信心”等所说的出家状态明确显示出来。“以信心从家出离,出家之后”,这是对欢喜雀跃等状态的原因说明。“以食物和衣服为最高限度而满足”,这应当理解为对没有恐惧、没有担忧这一点所作的原因说明。巴利
Esa kira alatthāti sambandho. Devaputte viyātiādi kassaci pārijuññassa abhāvadīpanato ‘‘saddhāyā’’tiādinā vuttassa pabbajitabhāvassa pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ. Saddhāya gharā nikkhamma pabbajitvāti idaṃ haṭṭhapahaṭṭhādibhāvassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭheti idaṃ anussaṅkitāparisaṅkitatāya kāraṇavacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“如此这般”这类重复的语句,应当理解为是为了表示称赞,或者是为了表示净信。因为“如此”这个词确实被说成具有接受和随喜的意思。“我的”是表示业格义的属格,或者应当理解为这个词是与“我”同义的小品词。“等”这个词,用“等”字涵盖了非邪命出家等内容。这只是针对那些依信心出家而彰显无贪等本性的人说的,不是针对其他有贪等本性的人。这确实已经说过了——巴利
Evametantiādinā āmeḍitavacanaṃ sampahaṃsanavasena, pasādavasena vā katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi evaṃ-saddo sampaṭicchanattho abbhanumodanattho ca vutto. Mamanti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, nipātapadaṃ vā etaṃ ‘‘ma’’nti iminā samānatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ādīnīti ādi-saddena najīvikāpakatādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti īdisānaṃyevāti saddhāpabbajjāya vibhāvitaanabhijjhāluādisabhāvānaṃyeva, na itaresaṃ abhijjhālusabhāvānaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,就算有比丘抓住我桑喀帝的衣角,紧跟我身后,一步一步踩着我的脚印走,但他如果贪求财物、对诸欲有强烈的贪染、心怀嗔害、心存恶意、忘失正念、没有正知、心不安定、心意散乱、诸根外放——那么,他其实离我很远,我也离他很远。巴利
‘‘Saṅghāṭikaṇṇe cepi me, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gahetvā piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandho assa pade padaṃ nikkhipanto, so ca hoti abhijjhālu kāmesu tibbasārāgo byāpannacitto paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo muṭṭhassati asampajāno asamāhito vibbhantacitto pākaṭindriyo, atha kho ārakāva mama ahañca tassā’’ti (itivu. 92).
把“深入而成就所欲之义”理解为“苦”,就是指难以成办、难以达成。注释书里为了说明住在那种地方本身就是苦,所以说“难以成办、难以忍受”。所谓“阿兰若林野”,是指具备阿兰若特征的森林丛聚。“林野”这个词也用于树木密集成丛之处,所以这里用“阿兰若”来涵盖。“虽且”是一个表示允许、认可的助词。允许什么呢?就是毫不含糊地说“村外就是阿兰若”。因此说“无余地说”等等。认可什么呢?认可能成就阿兰若支分这件事。凡是能成就阿兰若支分的,才特别称为“阿兰若”,所以说“即那五百弓”等等。“出至门槛外”:走出到门槛之外,意思是从那之外开始。关于“门槛外”,如果有两三道门槛,就从最外面的门槛开始算;如果没有门槛,就从适当的位置开始算。因为从门槛外开始,人的活动范围内并没有怖畏恐惧,所以这里并不是所指的意思。巴利
Ajjhogāhetvā adhippetatthaṃ sambhavituṃ sādhetuṃ dukkhānīti durabhisambhavāni. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana tattha nivāsoyeva dukkhoti dassetuṃ ‘‘sambhavituṃ dukkhāni dussahānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Araññavanapatthānīti araññalakkhaṇappattāni vanasaṇḍāni. Vanapattha-saddo hi saṇḍabhūte rukkhasamūhepi vattatīti araññaggahaṇaṃ. Kiñcāpīti anujānanasambhāvanatthe nipāto. Kiṃ anujānāti? Nippariyāyato araññābhāvaṃ ‘‘gāmato bahi arañña’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘nippariyāyenā’’tiādi. Kiṃ sambhāveti? Āraññakaṅganipphādakattaṃ. Yañhi āraññakaṅganipphādakaṃ, taṃ visesato ‘‘arañña’’nti vuttanti. Tenevāha ‘‘yaṃ taṃ pañcadhanusatika’’ntiādi. Nikkhamitvā bahiindakhīlāti indakhīlato bahi nikkhamitvā, tato bahi paṭṭhāyāti attho. Bahi indakhīlāti yattha dve tīṇi indakhīlāni, tattha bahiddhā indakhīlato paṭṭhāya, yattha taṃ natthi, tattha tadarahaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāyāti vadanti. Yasmā bahi indakhīlato paṭṭhāya manussūpacāre bhayabheravaṃ natthi, tasmā idha nādhippetanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
村边,就是村子附近。不是该去的地方,是指日常事务上不该去的地方。所以说“那里不耕不种”。边远:这里因为经文中采用了“边远”这个同义词,所以说“抛开‘边远’这一个同义词”;而“远”这个同义词则应该抛开,因为它的意思已经被“边远”这个词涵盖了。如果这样,就会变成连“不是人活动的地方”这类也要抛开,所以只从字面上来理解该抛开的范围。远离:从各种方式来说,或者以各种方式来隔离;对色等种种不同的所缘,以行走等威仪的各种方式对自己身体的隔离,无论行走、站立或坐着,都只是独自生起。正因为如此,由于可隔离者和隔离方式的差别多种多样,将它们总括为一,以单数说为“远离”。或者,远离难作:行远离并非易事。独一处:独一身。乐二二:喜好二人相随的状态。如吞食者:如以产生伤害而收摄,即如以产生恐惧和惊慌而来欲食的夜叉、罗刹、毗舍遮等。所以说“如吞食者”。如是者:未得定者。由草叶鹿等声:风吹草叶等声,及鹿、鸟等可怖之声,乃至种种树桩等显现似夜叉等可怖之相。如此难作、难以成办,啊,稀有难得,他感到惊奇。巴利
Gāmantanti gāmasamīpaṃ. Anupacāraṭṭhānanti niccakiccavasena nupacaritabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yattha na kasīyati na vapīyatī’’ti. Pantānīti iminā ‘‘pariyantāna’’nti imassa pariyāyassa idha pāḷiyaṃ gahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyantānanti imamekaṃ pariyāyaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Dūrānanti pana ayaṃ pariyāyo ṭhapetabbo siyā tassāpi ‘‘pantānī’’ti imināva atthato gahitattā, tathā sati ‘‘na manussūpacārāna’’nti edisānampi ṭhapetabbatā āpajjati, tasmā saddato eva ṭhapanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pavivekanti pakārato, pakārehi vā vivecanaṃ, rūpādiputhuttārammaṇe pakārato gamanādiiriyāpathappakārehi attano kāyassa vivecanaṃ gacchatopi tiṭṭhatopi nisajjatopi ekasseva pavattati. Teneva hi vivecetabbānaṃ vivecanākārassa ca bhedato bahuvidhattā te ekattena gahetvā ‘‘paviveka’’nti ekavacanena vuttaṃ. Dukkaraṃ pavivekanti vā pavivekaṃ kattuṃ na sukhanti attho. Ekībhāveti ekikabhāve. Dvayaṃdvayārāmoti dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ bhāvābhirato. Haranti viyāti saṃharanti viya vighātuppādanena. Tenāha ‘‘ghasanti viyā’’ti, bhayasantāsuppādanena khādituṃ āgatā yakkharakkhasapisācādayo viyāti adhippāyo. Īdisassāti aladdhasamādhino. Tiṇapaṇṇamigādisaddehīti vāteritānaṃ tiṇapaṇṇādīnaṃ migapakkhiādīnañca bhiṃsanakehi bheravehi saddehi vividhehi ca aññehi khāṇuādīhi yakkhādiākārehi upaṭṭhitehi bhiṃsanakehi. Evaṃ dukkaraṃ durabhisambhavaṃ nāma karonto aho acchariyā eteti vimhito.
身业品讨论注释巴利
Kāyakammantavārakathāvaṇṇanā
35 “在十六处”是指经中从“凡是任何”等开始将要讲到的十六种原因。身业不清净等,对于住在阿兰若的人来说,因为会成为心生恐惧的相,所以特别容易导致散乱;而身业清净等,因为没有那些相,所以不会导致他们散乱。因此说“以身业不清净的过失为因”等。所谓“十六”,是只取清净那一方面来说的;提到杂染,也只是为了显示清净。“未取所缘者”,是指对于在阿兰若中所见的那个身业不清净等所缘,缺乏以经中“凡是任何”等所说的方法去把握之智的人。“已取所缘者”,这里应当理解为与前面相反的意思。“自己”,是指世尊,意思是“自身”。“如是者”,就是已取所缘的人。巴利
35.Soḷasasuṭhānesūti ‘‘ye kho kecī’’tiādinā pāḷiyaṃ vakkhamānesu soḷasasu kāraṇesu. Aparisuddhakāyakammantatādayo araññe viharantānaṃ cittutrāsanimittatāya visesato vikkhepāvahā, parisuddhakāyakammantatādayo pana tadabhāvato tesaṃ avikkhepāvahā. Tenāha ‘‘aparisuddhakāyakammantasandosahetū’’tiādi. Soḷasasūti ca vodānapakkhaṃyeva gahetvā vuttaṃ. Saṃkilesaggahaṇampi yāvadeva vodānadassanatthanti. Ārammaṇapariggaharahitānanti aparisuddhakāyakammantādikassa araññe diṭṭhassa tassa ārammaṇassa ‘‘ye kho kecī’’tiādinā pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayena pariggaṇhanañāṇarahitānaṃ. Ārammaṇapariggahayuttānanti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Attanāti bhagavantaṃ sandhāya vadati, sayanti attho. Tādisoti ārammaṇapariggahayutto.
依此而觉悟,所以叫正觉,也就是圣道,因此说“由于证得圣道”。诸佛能证得一切知智,是依靠证得最上之道,所以说“未正觉者”就是指尚未通达四谛的人。应当毫无遗漏地了知、应当觉悟,所以叫菩提。有情在菩提这件事上,因为与大精进等有特殊的相应,所以说“觉悟的有情”。因此说“正等觉”等。大士从获得决定性授记之时起,他的修行就不会再退失,也不会停滞不前,而是不断增胜、趋向抉择,正因为这样修行,所以对菩提完全倾向、完全朝向,因此说“菩萨正是于菩提黏着不舍的有情”。因此说到“燃灯佛时”等。这是由八种法的和合具足——巴利
Sambujjhati etenāti sambodho, ariyamaggoti āha ‘‘ariyamaggappattito’’ti. Aggamaggādhigamādhīno buddhānaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamoti āha ‘‘anabhisambuddhassāti appaṭividdhacatusaccassā’’ti. Anavasesato ñeyyaṃ, bujjhituṃ arahatīti bodhi, mahāvīriyatādinā tattha visesayogato sattoti āha ‘‘bujjhanakasattassā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘sammāsambodhi’’ntiādi. Niyatabhāvappattito paṭṭhāya mahāsattā yathā mahābodhiyānapaṭipadā hānabhāgiyā, ṭhitibhāgiyā vā na hoti, atha kho visesabhāgiyā nibbedhabhāgiyā ca hoti, tathā paṭipajjanato bodhiyaṃ ninnagoṇapabbhārā evāti āha ‘‘bodhiyā vā sattasseva laggassevā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘dīpaṅkarassa hī’’tiādi. Aṭṭhadhammasamodhānenāti –
“ 人身、男根具足,因、见佛;
出家、具德,胜行与欲愿。”巴利
‘‘Manussattaṃ liṅgasampatti, hetu satthāradassanaṃ; Pabbajjā guṇasampatti, adhikāro ca chandatā’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.59) –
由这八种构成发起修行目标的法共同聚合、汇集在一起。巴利
Imesaṃ abhinīhārassa aṅgabhūtānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ dhammānaṃ samodhānena samavadhānena.
已出家,就是已经走上出家之路。这里是要说明:他们仅仅因为出家这个身份就被叫作沙门,并不是因为已经止息了罪恶。这里所说的婆罗门,只是就出身而言,所以说“惯于称呼‘贤者’的人”。因为他们有开口就称“贤者啊,贤者啊”的习惯,所以经文说:“如果还有贪染,那他就只是个惯称贤者的人。”(《法句经》396;《经集》625)
“杀生等”中的“等”字,把不与取和非梵行也包括进来了。而“不清净”这个修饰语,是就身业而言,不是就杀生等而言;因为杀生等的前分加行,本来就谈不上有什么可称为清净的。“怖”有令人畏惧之义,“畏”有令人惊惧之义。“有浊因”就是具有烦恼之因。这里的“有”字,是说有随烦恼,因此说“自己烦恼之因”。怖完全以心恐惧相为特征,依其力而说为“有罪”。因为心恐惧完全是有罪的,依令人畏惧之义就是怖。“不安稳”这一句,是就两方面来说的:因为心恐惧能导致身心无益,所以是不安稳;同样,可怖的所缘也是不安稳。然而在义注中,这两种意思被依次配合。他们自己臆想出可怖的所缘之相,以令心生恐惧的方式带来怖畏,就像在呼唤一样,所以说“呼唤,就是叫唤”。他们是那些被杀之人的亲戚朋友等。“走”指走入茂密的大荆棘丛,他们说灌木丛不太大。然而“走”应理解为走入草丛,如说“走入茂密草丛”;灌木丛则是充满荆棘藤蔓等、未长高者。被绑、被打,就像被绑住后遭受捶打一样。巴利
Pabbajjūpagatāti pabbajjaṃ upagatā. Tena pabbajjāmattena samaṇā, na samitapāpatāyāti dasseti. Jātimattena idha brāhmaṇāti adhippetāti āha ‘‘bhovādino vā’’ti. Te hi ‘‘bho bho’’ti vadanasīlā, tenāha ‘‘bhovādī nāma so hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano’’ti (dha. pa. 396; su. ni. 625). Pāṇātipātādināti ādi-saddena adinnādānaṃ abrahmacariyañca saṅgaṇhāti. Aparisuddhenāti ca visesanaṃ kāyakammantāpekkhāya, na pāṇātipātādiapekkhāya. Na hi pāṇātipātādiko tassa pubbabhāgapayogo ca koci parisuddho nāma atthi. Bhāyanaṭṭhena bhayaṃ, bhīrutāvahaṭṭhena bheravaṃ. Sandosahetūti sadosahetu. Sa-saddo hi idha sānusāro vutto. Tenāha ‘‘attano dosassa hetū’’ti. Ekantena cittutrāsalakkhaṇassa bhayassa vasena ‘‘sāvajja’’nti vuttaṃ. Cittutrāso hi ekantasāvajjo bhāyanaṭṭhena bhayañcāti. Akkhemanti idaṃ ubhayavasena. Cittutrāsopi hi sarīracittānaṃ anatthāvahato akkhema, tathā bhayānakārammaṇampīti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana atthadvayaṃ yathāsaṅkhyaṃ yojitaṃ. Sayaṃ parikappitabhayānakārammaṇanimittaṃ cittutrāsasamuppādanavasena ānentā bhayabheravaṃ avhāyanti viya hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘avhāyantīti pakkosantī’’ti. Teti māritamanussānaṃ ñātimittādayo. Gacchaṃ gahanabhūtaṃ mahantaṃ kaṇṭakasaṇḍaṃ, gumbaṃ nātimahantanti vadanti. Gacchanti pana tiṇavanaṃ veditabbaṃ, ‘‘gacche ruḷhatiṇe’’ti vuttaṃ, gumbaṃ kaṇṭakalatādibharitāviruḷhaṃ. Baddhā vadhitā viyāti baddhā hutvā tāḷiyamānā viya.
在“Na kho pana”这一句里,“kho”是不变词,表示强调、确定的意思;“pana”是表示区别的词。由此说明:“我不像其他沙门、婆罗门那样,以不清净的身业去受用那些山林、荒野、偏远的坐卧处;我正是以清净的身业去受用那些坐卧处。”这里也可以这样理解句义。因为“我是清净身业者”这一强调,把已经明确的意义显示了出来。“我是他们中的一员”,意思是:凭那种清净的身业,我是那些圣者中的一员;也就是以清净的身业,菩萨把自己归入圣者之列。因为当时菩萨的身业清净,以及语业等清净,都已达到极为精纯的程度,所以魔罗虽然连续六年不断寻找可乘之机,也始终找不到任何空隙。因此说——巴利
‘‘Na kho panāti ettha khoti avadhāraṇatthe nipāto, panā’’ti visesatthe. Tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘aññe samaṇabrāhmaṇā viya ahaṃ aparisuddhakāyakammanto hutvā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni na kho pana paṭisevāmi, parisuddhakāyakammantoyeva pana hutvā tāni paṭisevāmī’’ti. Evaṃ vā ettha atthayojanā veditabbā. ‘‘Parisuddhakāyakammantohamasmī’’ti hi tena avadhāraṇena vibhāvitatthadassanaṃ. Tesamahaṃ aññataroti tāya parisuddhakāyakammatāya tesaṃ ariyānaṃ ahaṃ aññataroti kāyakammapārisuddhiyā mahāsatto attānaṃ ariyesu pakkhipati. Paramasallekhabhāvappattā hi tadā bodhisattassa kāyakammapārisuddhi , tathā vacīkammādipārisuddhi, yato māro randhagavesī hutvā chabbassāni nirantaraṃ anubandho antaraṃ na labhati. Tenāha –
“ 我跟随世尊七年,步步紧随,
却未能寻得正觉具念者的可乘之隙。”巴利
‘‘Satta vassāni bhagavantaṃ, anubandhiṃ padāpadaṃ; Otāraṃ nādhigacchissaṃ, sambuddhassa satīmato’’ti. (su. ni. 448);
“更多”是指超出、特别,或者一层层往上。心怀恐惧、惊慌的人,因为怖畏和灾祸而身体发抖、汗毛竖立;没有恐惧、不惊慌的人,因为不存在怖畏和灾祸,所以汗毛不竖,安稳、平安地安住。因此,他们达到安稳、获得平安,就通过汗毛柔顺表现出来,所以经文中说“柔顺”。由此才说“汗毛柔顺”等。这里,“我更获得了柔顺,住在林野中”是在说明所许诺的事;“我是清净身业的人”是在显示原因;“那些圣者们”是在举出同类的例子;“无论哪些沙门或婆罗门”是在举出不同类的例子;其余部分,应当看作顺向和逆向的阐明。这就是这里对义理的阐发。按这个方法,在其余各节中也应当了知对义理的阐发。巴利
Bhiyyoti adhikaṃ savisesaṃ, uparūpari vā. Bhītatasitā bhayūpaddavena chambhitasarīrā haṭṭhalomā honti, abhītātasitā pana bhayūpaddavābhāvato ahaṭṭhalomā khemena sotthinā tiṭṭhantīti tesaṃ khemappatti sotthibhāvo vā pannalomatāya pākaṭo hotīti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘palloma’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pannalomata’’ntiādi. Ettha ca bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṃ araññe vihārāyāti paṭiññāniddeso. Parisuddhakāyakammantohamasmīti hetudassanaṃ. ‘‘Ye hi vo ariyā’’ti sadisūdāharaṇadassanaṃ. Ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vāti visadisūdāharaṇadassanaṃ. Sesāni anvayabyatirekavibhāvanānīti daṭṭhabbanti ayamettha yuttivibhāvanā. Iminā nayena sesavāresupi yuttivibhāvanā veditabbā.
语业品等的释文巴利
Vacīkammantavārādikathāvaṇṇanā
36 36.“以不清净的妄语等”——这里应当说明的内容,和前面所说的方法完全一样。不过,为了通过“怖畏恐惧”这个名目,把“等”字所包含的那些妄语等行为的现行差别显示出来,才说了“如何”这一段。其中应当说明的内容,也和前面所说的一样。巴利
36.Aparisuddhena musāvādādināti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Ādi-saddena pana saṅgahitaṃ tesañca musāvādādīnaṃ pavattibhedaṃ bhayabheravāvhānamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
在财物方面:指有知觉和没有知觉的财物。生起:以自己的变更为缘由,生起被称为贪欲的不正之贪。发怒:以想要毁灭的想法对他人发怒。因为这样一来,他们之后就可能产生这样的猜疑:“我们得罪过那些人,他们现在追过来了。”应当看到,这里是针对这样一种意业而说“他们对他人”等话的:就像别人从旁能看出他们的贪欲和嗔害在活动,认为“这些人想必是想夺取我们的所属物,想必是想加以破坏”。诚然,在不善的身业和语业活动时,贪欲等也确实在活动,但那时它们属于思的范畴,或者不须论及,所以只在意的部分以贪欲等来搭配说明。或者,就像在其他门活动的杀生等不具备语业等的性质一样,在其他门活动的贪欲等也不具备身业等的性质,而只有意业的性质成立,因此只在意的部分举出贪欲等。正如所说:巴利
Bhaṇḍesūti saviññāṇakāviññāṇakesu bhaṇḍesu. Uppādetvāti attano pariṇāmavasena abhijjhāsaṅkhātaṃ visamalobhaṃ uppādetvā. Kujjhitvāti vināsacintāvasena parassa kujjhitvā. Evañhi nesaṃ ‘‘yesaṃ aparajjhimhā, te idāni anubandhitvā’’tiādinā pacchā āsaṅkuppatti siyā. ‘‘Ete amhākaṃ pariggahavatthuṃ gahetukāmā maññe, vināsaṃ kātukāmā maññe’’ti yathā pare parato tesaṃ abhijjhābyāpādappavattiṃ pariggaṇhanti, tādisaṃ manokammantaṃ sandhāya ‘‘te paresa’’ntiādi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kāmaṃ akusalakāyakammavacīkammapavattikālepi abhijjhādayo pavattantiyeva, tadā pana te cetanāpakkhikā vā abbohārikā vāti manokammantavāre eva abhijjhādivasena yojanā katā. Atha vā dvārantare pavattānampi pāṇātipātādīnaṃ vacīkammādibhāvābhāvo viya dvārantare pavattānampi abhijjhādīnaṃ kāyakammādibhāvābhāvo, manokammabhāvo eva pana siddhoti katvā manokammantavāre eva abhijjhādayo uddhaṭā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
“ 诸业行于门处,而非诸门行于门;
是故依诸门,诸业互相分判。”巴利
‘‘Dvāre caranti kammāni, na dvārā dvāracārino; Tasmā dvārehi kammāni, aññamaññaṃ vavatthitā’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1.kāyakammadvāra);
虽然在注释里,关于活命这一部分,是站在教法中出家者的角度,把“怖畏恐惧”这个说法联系进去的;但根据“凡有任何沙门或婆罗门”这句话,就应该知道,这也是从外道和在家人的角度来联系的。因为在家人的活命,也会因为违背出身之法、家族之法、地域之法等而以其他方式成为邪命;也正是由于这种活命的败坏,或者以其他方式,他们的林中居住才可能产生怖畏恐惧。巴利
Kiñcāpi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ sāsane pabbajitavasena ājīvavāre bhayabheravāvhānaṃ yojitaṃ, ‘‘ye kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā’’ti pana vacanato bāhirakavasena gahaṭṭhavasena ca yojanā veditabbā. Gahaṭṭhānampi hi jātidhammakuladhammadesadhammavilomanavasena aññathāpi micchājīvo labbhateva, tāya eva ca ājīvavipattiyā aññathā vā nesaṃ araññavāso sambhaveyyāti.
37 37. 这样,先依活命第八戒清净的角度,说明怖畏恐惧;接下来,为了从断除诸盖等方面来说明这一点,开示进一步展开。为了阐明这个含义,论师说出“从此以后”等话。其中,“再从盖的角度来说”的意思是:仅仅戒清净,就能让住在阿兰若的人没有怖畏恐惧,更何况舍弃诸盖、成就安止定,或者哪怕只是成就近行定呢?因此,为了说明由定具足而带来没有怖畏恐惧,后面的开示进一步展开。贪欲和嗔恚虽然已经作为不善意业而被提及,但这里又从盖的角度再次宣说,这就是论师的意趣。前缀 abhi 加 jhā 一词有“贪求”之义,所以说“以贪求他人财物等为性”。在“事欲”中,即在色等作为烦恼欲之事的诸欲中。“粗重烦恼贪”指因根深难拔而执取、烦恼欲显著。这里,贪欲是希求未得之境,强盛贪是耽着已得之境。那些被贪所制伏的人,由于对自身有强烈贪着,被贪所制伏,所以所缘不定、境不决定,住在阿兰若中不观察种种境界,不能如实观察绳索等物。因此说“彼等”等语。以心寂静而现起。正如说“心散乱”。说“现在完蛋了”是指他们惊惧、恐惧,像是来了之后被侵害一样;这样,以将那种怖畏恐惧归到自己身上的意义,呼唤、召请,故有此连接,论师说“其余同样”。在“我不贪”这一巴利句中,由于长久串习无贪的意乐,如莲花叶上的水滴一样心不附着,于一切处无所希求,这就是其义。巴利
37. Evaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlavasena bhayabheravaṃ dassetvā tato paraṃ nīvaraṇappahānādivasena taṃ dassetuṃ desanā vaḍḍhitāti tadatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘ito para’’ntiādimāha. Tattha nīvaraṇavasena puna vuttāti ayamadhippāyo – evaṃ sīlavisuddhimattampi araññe viharato bhayabheravābhāvaṃ āvahati, kimaṅgaṃ pana nīvaraṇāni pahāya appanāsamādhiṃ, upacārasamādhimeva vā sampādayatoti samādhisampadāya bhayabheravābhāvahetukaṃ dassetuṃ upari desanā vaḍḍhitāti akusalamanokammantabhāvena gahitāpi abhijjhābyāpādā nīvaraṇavasena puna vuttāti adhippāyo. Abhi-pubbo jhā-saddo abhijjhāyanatthoti āha ‘‘parabhaṇḍādiabhijjhāyanasīlā’’ti. Vatthukāmesūti rūpādīsu kilesakāmassa vatthubhūtesu kāmesu. Bahalakilesarāgāti thiramūladummocanīyatāhi ajjhosāne pabhūtakilesakāmā. Abhijjhā cettha appattavisayapatthanā, tibbasārāgo sampattivisayābhiniveso. Te hi lobhābhibhūtā puggalā attani tibbasāpekkhatāya eva lobhābhibhūtatāya avavatthitārammaṇā avinicchitavisayā araññe taṃ taṃ visayaṃ anupadhāritvā viharanti, rajjuādīni yāthāvato na sallakkhenti. Tenāha ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi. Upaṭṭhāti santacittatāya. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘ākulacittā’’ti. ‘‘Idānimha naṭṭhā’’ti tasanti vitasanti, āgantvā bādhiyamānā viya honti, evaṃ taṃ bhayabheravaṃ attani samāropanaṭṭhena avhāyanti pakkosantīti yojanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sesaṃ tādisamevā’’ti. ‘‘Anabhijjhāluhamasmī’’ti pāḷipade ciraparicitaalobhajjhāsayatāya kamaladale jalabindu viya alaggamānasattā sabbattha anapekkhohamasmīti attho.
38 舍断本性状态,是指舍断被称为清净状态的本性状态。因为当有罪的法生起时,心的无罪状态就被舍断了。心败坏,是指心被烦恼的不净所污染而混乱。因此说随烦恼……乃至……腐臭。心有嗔思惟,是指像掺了毒液的尿液一样,被嗔恚污染的心之思惟。依前面所说的方式,就是按贪欲部分所说的他们成为所缘不定等那样。正如因贪而如此,因嗔等也同样成为所缘不定。于一切处,是指下方、上方等一切处,都应这样解说。巴利
38.Pakatibhāvavijahanenāti parisuddhabhāvasaṅkhātassa ca pakatibhāvassa vijahanena. Sāvajjadhammasamuppattiyā hi cittassa anavajjabhāvo jahito hotīti. Vipannacittāti kilesāsucidūsitatāya kuthitacittā. Tenāha ‘‘kilesānugataṃ…pe… pūtikaṃ hotī’’ti. Paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappāti visasaṃsaṭṭhamuttaṃ viya dosena padūsitacittasaṅkappā. Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘te avavatthitārammaṇā hontī’’tiādinā abhijjhāluvāre vuttanayeneva. Yathā hi lobhavasena, evaṃ dosādivasenapi avavatthitārammaṇā hontīti. Sabbatthāti heṭṭhā upari cāti sabbattha ṭhānesu vaṇṇetabbā.
39 因为“心的不适、不堪作业”这句话,昏沉是以心的病态被理解的,所以说“以作为心病的昏沉”。同样,因为“身的不适、不堪作业”这句话,睡眠特别是以名身的病态被理解的,所以说“以作为其余名身病的睡眠”。这里说“其余”,是为了排除心。而且应当知道,这睡眠也会给色身带来病,因为它是睡眠的原因。它也被说为“睡眠、懒散”。因此说“他们成为多睡眠者”。巴利
39. ‘‘Yā cittassa akallatā akammaññatā’’ti vacanato thinaṃ cittassa gelaññabhāvena gahaṇaṃ gacchatīti āha ‘‘cittagelaññabhūtena thinenā’’ti. Tathā ‘‘yā kāyassa akallatā akammaññatā’’ti (dha. sa. 1163) vacanato middhaṃ visesato nāmakāyassa gelaññabhāvena gahaṇaṃ gacchatīti āha ‘‘sesanāmakāyagelaññabhūtena middhenā’’ti. Sesaggahaṇañcettha cittanivattanatthaṃ. Idañca middhaṃ rūpakāyassapi gelaññāvahanti daṭṭhabbaṃ niddāya hetubhāvato. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘niddā capalāyikā’’ti niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘te niddābahulā hontī’’ti.
40 “有掉举本性者”:就是有掉举的习惯,本性不能安定。因为掉举的作用就是不能安定。所以经文说“心躁动者”等等。这里:在“心未寂止”这个词中,也可以把悔恨包括进去。因为按照注释,悔恨也会让心追悔而不寂静。不过,掉举是直接按它自身的性质来取的,这是这里的意趣。巴利
40.Uddhaccapakatikāti uddhaccasīlā anavaṭṭhitasabhāvā. Anavaṭṭhānarasañhi uddhaccaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vipphandamānacittā’’tiādi. Idhāti ‘‘avūpasantacittā’’ti imasmiṃ pade. Kukkuccaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati saṃvaṇṇanāvasena pacchānutāpassapi cittassa avūpasamakarattā. Uddhaccaṃ pana sarūpeneva gahitanti adhippāyo.
41 这第五盖其实就是一种,也就是疑和犹豫。如果是这样,为什么把它分成两种来说呢?所以经文说“为什么”等。“以疑故”:就是由于犹豫。而“犹豫”的意思是:“在抉择法的自性时,以此而困惑”,或者解释为“无可治疗”。巴利
41.Ekamevidaṃ pañcamaṃ nīvaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ kaṅkhā vicikicchāti ca. Yadi evaṃ kasmā dvidhā katvā vuttanti āha ‘‘kiṃ nu kho’’tiādi. Kaṅkhanatoti saṃsayanato. Vicikicchāti vuccati ‘‘dhammasabhāvaṃ vicinanto etāya kicchati, vigatā tikicchā vā’’ti katvā.
42 42. 这样,先通过称说没有盖,来显示由于定具足而没有怖畏恐惧;现在,再通过称说没有自赞等,来显示由于慧具足而没有怖畏恐惧。于是以“凡有诸”等语,把上面的开示进一步展开。为了阐明其中的含义,就说出了“自赞者”等语。“抬高”:就是以慢心把人举扬起来,所以说“置于高显之处”。在昏沉睡眠、掉举恶作、疑这几个部分中,所涉及的内容与贪欲那一段相似。因此,在那里不提及这些,而在自赞者这一段中,有什么不同之处呢?为了说明这一点,就说出了“他们如何”等语。巴利
42. Evaṃ nīvaraṇābhāvakittanamukhena samādhisampadāya bhayabheravābhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni attukkaṃsanādiabhāvakittanamukhena paññāsampadāya bhayabheravābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye kho kecī’’tiādinā upari desanā vaḍḍhitā, tadatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘attukkaṃsanakā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ukkaṃsenti mānavasena paggaṇhanena. Tenāha ‘‘ucce ṭhāne ṭhapentī’’ti. Thinamiddhauddhaccakukkuccavicikicchāvāresu gayhamānaṃ abhijjhāluvārasadisanti tattha taṃ anāmasitvā attukkaṃsakavāre kiñci visadisaṃ atthīti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘te katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
43 惊悚就是使身体发抖的强烈内心恐惧。因为他们有这种惊悚,所以叫“惊悚者”。因此说“身体僵硬”等。“有畏惧习性者”:就是习性上容易害怕的人。这同一种有过失的恐惧,既能令身体惊悚,也能令心和身体变得僵硬,所以被称为“惊悚、恐惧”。因此,具有这种状态的沙门婆罗门就被称为“惊悚者、畏惧习性者”。在这里,怖畏恐惧是按其本身的样子来把握的。巴利
43. Chambhanaṃ chambho, kāyassa chambhitattahetubhūto balavacittutrāso. So etesaṃ atthīti chambhī. Tenāha ‘‘kāyathambhanā’’tiādi. Bhīrukajātikāti bhāyanakasīlā. Ekameva cetaṃ sāvajjabhayaṃ kāye chambhitattassa, citte ca kāye ca thaddhabhāvassa uppādanavasena ‘‘chambho bhīrutā’’ti ca vuccatīti taṃsamaṅgino samaṇabrāhmaṇā ‘‘chambhī bhīrukajātikā’’ti vuttā, idha bhayabheravaṃ sarūpeneva gahitaṃ.
44 “可得到、能证得”这句话,是在说明“利得”一词是依宾语结构(kammasādhana)来理解的。“应恭敬地做、应施与”就是恭敬(sakkāra)。“显示其义”(tadatthadīpaka):意思是舍弃利养等而住在森林中的人,不会生起怖畏恐惧,这正显示了这一点。据说,他正是因为看重利养而贪爱那个可意的村落,所以得到“喜爱村落者”(piyagāmiko)这个名字。“从业解脱”(kammamutto):因年老衰败而不能作务,因此被主人释放的人。巴利
44.Labbhati pāpuṇīyatīti lābhasaddassa kammasādhanattamāha. Sakkaccaṃ kātabbo dātabboti sakkāro. Tadatthadīpakanti lābhādiṃ pahāya araññe vasato bhayabheravāvhāyanaṃ natthīti dīpakaṃ. So kira lābhagarutāyeva piyo gāmo etassāti ‘‘piyagāmiko’’ti nāmaṃ labhati. Kammamuttoti jarājiṇṇattā kammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkotīti sāmikehi vissaṭṭho.
45 45. 因为以懈怠为本质而不实行正精进,所以被称为可鄙的、沉沦的人,也就是“懈怠者”。勇者的状态或行为就是精进;或者,精进是指应当以方法策励、推动而使之生起的,这就是正精进。在这方面低劣的人,就是“劣精进者”。以身表为生起之门而运转的精进是身精进,应当在履行事务、经行等活动中去理解。坐着或躺下之后,以对业处作意而运转的精进是心精进。其中,前者特别以对治懈怠而显示,后者以发起精进努力而显示,为了说明这一点,所以说“懈怠者”等话。那些精进低劣的人,正因为懒惰,连对所缘作一点决定都做不到。巴利
45. Alasabhāvena sammāvāyāmassa akaraṇato kucchitaṃ sīdantīti kusītā. Vīrassa bhāvo, kammaṃ vā vīriyaṃ, vidhinā vā īretabbaṃ pavattetabbanti vīriyaṃ, sammāvāyāmo. Tena hīnā hīnavīriyā. Kāyaviññattiyā samuṭṭhānavasena pavattavīriyaṃ kāyikavīriyaṃ, vattakaraṇacaṅkamanādīsu daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nisajja sayitvā ca kammaṭṭhānamanasikāravasena pavattavīriyaṃ cetasikavīriyaṃ. Tattha purimaṃ visesato kosajjapaṭipakkhatāvasena, dutiyaṃ vīriyārambhatāvasena pākaṭaṃ hotīti dassento ‘‘kusītā’’tiādimāha. Te hi hīnavīriyā alasatāyeva ārammaṇavavatthānamattampi kātuṃ na sakkonti.
46 “失念者”是指念不存在的人。因为助缘欠缺,即使念还在,也无法发挥念的作用,所以这样说。“不正知”就是没有正知。这个否定前缀“a-”表示不具备相应的状态,就像“无因法”“没有比丘的住处”等说法一样,所以注释者说他们是“没有慧的人”。有人问:第十六章不是讲慧、这一章是讲念吗?那为什么在杂染这部分取了“慧”来说呢?针对这个质疑,注释者说了“对于此也……”等话。其实这是念的分别,也就是第十四章的内容;不过在这里,慧在第十四章中只是被附带提到,为了显示单靠念是薄弱的,所以用“不正知”这种遮止的说法来点出念的薄弱。现在为了让已经说过的意思更加清楚,就说了“有两种……”等话。巴利
46.Naṭṭhassatīti alabbhamānassati, paccayavekallena vijjamānāyapi satiyā satikiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthatāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Na sampajānāti asampajānā. Taṃyoganivattiyañcāyaṃ a-kāro ‘‘ahetukā dhammā (dha. sa. 2.dukamātikā), abhikkhuko āvāso’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 76) viyāti āha ‘‘paññārahitā’’ti. Nanu soḷasamo paññāvāro, ayaṃ sativāro, tattha kasmā saṃkilesapakkhe paññā gahitāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘imassa cā’’tiādi. Satibhājanīyamevetaṃ, yadidaṃ cuddasamo vāro, paññā panettha cuddasame vāre kevalā sati dubbalāti satidubbalyadīpanatthaṃ ‘‘asampajānā’’ti paṭikkhepamukhena vuttā. Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘duvidhā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
47 心通过安止定或近行定,才能平稳地安住在所缘上,才算真正正确地安立,否则就不是——为了说明这一点,所以他说“心不等持者”就是指“缺乏近行定和安止定的人”。“心散乱者”就是“心不能安住的人”。前面根据与诸盖共通的性质,把掉举理解为“高举、心未寂止”;这里则是从缺乏等持的角度,说由掉举之因所生的心散乱,即“心不等持、心散乱”。这就是它们之间的差别。“依前述的方法”,就是依照前面所说的:“由于掉举,心在同一所缘上颤动,就像旗杆上的旗帜被风吹动一样。”他说“一切都与前面相同”,指的是:就怖畏恐惧这一名目而言,与贪欲那一节所说的情形相似。巴利
47. Appanāsamādhinā, upacārasamādhinā vā cittaṃ ārammaṇe samaṃ, sammā vā āhitaṃ nāma hoti, nāññathāti dassento ‘‘asamāhitāti upacārappanāsamādhivirahitā’’ti āha . Vibbhantacittāti anavaṭṭhitacittā. Pubbe nīvaraṇabhāvasāmaññena uddhaccaṃ gahitaṃ ‘‘uddhatā avūpasantacittā’’ti, idha samādhānābhāvena uddhaccahetuko cittavibbhamo vutto ‘‘asamāhitā vibbhantacittā’’ti, ayametesaṃ viseso. Pubbe vuttanayenāti pubbe ‘‘uddhaccena hi ekārammaṇe cittaṃ vipphandati dhajayaṭṭhiyaṃ vātena paṭākā viyā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.40) vuttanayena. Sabbaṃ pubbasadisamevāti bhayabheravāvhāyanassa abhijjhāluvāre vuttasadisataṃ sandhāya vadati.
48 “恶慧者”这里,“恶”这个字,就像“恶戒者”等词里那样,是“没有”的意思,不是像“恶趣”“邪行道者”等词里那样表示“应受呵责”。为了说明这一点,先说了“这是无慧者的别称”,然后又说“然而,慧本身并没有所谓恶劣这回事”。“他们”就是指这些恶慧者。“一切处”是指在四种地界的区分中都是如此。“恶”也叫过失。因此说:“那种言语柔和、悦耳。”同样,戒被称为“无过失之支”。恶慧者说话时,因为愚痴,说的就是带有过失的话。因此说:“他们是说恶语的人。”所以,由于他们自身带有过失,他们的口也成为过失之口,因此称为“恶口者”——在这里也可以这样理解其含义。为了从反面说明,依于那种慧而称为“具慧者”,所以接着说了“然而并非……”等等。难道菩萨们不是具备大量观慧吗?是的,他们具备,但那时菩萨并没有开始修观,而且这里也不是指观慧,所以说“然而并非以观慧”。巴利
48.Duppaññāti ettha du-saddo ‘‘dussīlo’’tiādīsu viya abhāvattho, na ‘‘duggati, duppaṭipanno’’tiādīsu viya garahatthoti dassetuṃ ‘‘nippaññānametaṃ adhivacana’’nti vatvā ‘‘paññā pana duṭṭhā nāma natthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Teti duppaññā. Sabbatthāti catūsupi pāṭhavikappesu. Elanti vā doso vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā’’ti. Tathā hi sīlaṃ ‘‘nelaṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Duppaññā ca kathentā sadosameva kathaṃ kathenti apaṇḍitabhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘dubbhāsitabhāsī’’ti. Tasmā elasabbhāvato elaṃ mukhaṃ etesanti elamūgāti vuttāti evampi vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yāya paññāya vasena ‘‘paññāsampanno’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘no ca kho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nanu ca bodhisattā bahulavipassanāpaññāya samannāgatā hontīti? Honti, tadā pana bodhisattena na vipassanārambho kato, no ca vipassanāpaññā adhippetāti vuttaṃ ‘‘no ca kho vipassanāpaññāyā’’ti.
不过,这里有些人说:“就像那些没有信心、身业等不清净的人一样,怖畏恐惧有它特别的原因;而有信心者也不会因此就毛发平复、泰然无畏,所以‘信’这一部分没有被单独提出来。”这种说法是站不住脚的。因为一个相信业果的人,正是依靠以业为归宿这一点,才不把怖畏恐惧看得比一根草更重,从而变得毛发平复、泰然无畏。然而,由于精进等法没有信就不能生起,所以信作为它们的依止缘和俱生缘,在把握精进等法时就已经被一并把握了,因此没有单独列出。同样,信在禅那的前行修行阶段中也没有被单独列出。再说,要这个信做什么呢?在把握所缘的这个阶段,信确实是不必单独把握的,所以法主佛陀在这里没有把它单独列出来。在其他类似的地方,也应该这样判定。因为经文的教导是随顺而说的。巴利
Keci panettha ‘‘saddhāvirahitā aparisuddhakāyakammantādayo viya bhayabheravāvhāyanassa visesakāraṇaṃ, nāpi saddhālutā pallomatāyāti saddhāvāro anuddhaṭo’’ti vadanti, taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Kammaphale hi saddahanto kammapaṭisaraṇataṃyeva nissāya bhayabheravaṃ tiṇāyapi amaññamāno pallomatamāpajjeyya. Yasmā pana vīriyādayo saddhāya vinā nappavattantīti tesaṃ upanissayabhūtā sahajātā ca sā taggahaṇeneva gahitā hotīti visuṃ na uddhaṭā. Tathā hi sā jhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāyampi na uddhaṭā, kiṃ vā etāya saddhāya, addhā sā imasmiṃ ārammaṇapariggahaṭṭhāne na gahetabbāva, tato dhammassāminā idha na uddhaṭā, evaṃ aññesupi edisesu ṭhānesu nicchayo kātabbo. Yathānulomadesanā hi suttantakathāti.
怖畏恐惧的住处等内容的注释巴利
Bhayabheravasenāsanādivaṇṇanā
49 十六种所缘,指的是十六种处所和所缘。在像这样的夜晚里,说的是十四日等那些将在下文提到的夜晚。在像这样的住处中,这里也同样适用这个道理。无论哪些,是指那些被不特定地举出来的,再用它们这个词,就像在指示一样。所以说:无论哪些和它们,这两者正是对那些夜晚的列出与指明的话。称阿毗,这个词用在相的意义上,就像在其他有名的婆罗门大家等处的用法一样。可是在这里怎么能知道它是相的意义呢?回答说:凡依此而被了知的,就是相,所以解释说:例如月圆满等。意思是:在月圆日,因为月亮的圆满;在新月日,因为月亮的耗尽;用等这个词,就包含了月亮呈半圆、星宿凌犯等情形。它的用意是:这个阿毗前缀,仅仅是一个前缀;由于它和被了知这个词结合在一起,使它所表示的相的意义得以被理解。巴利
49.Soḷasārammaṇānīti soḷasaṭṭhānāni ārammaṇāni. Evarūpāsu rattīsūti cātuddasīādikā upari vakkhamānā rattiyo sandhāya vadati . Evarūpe senāsaneti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yāti aniyamato uddiṭṭhānaṃ puna ‘‘tā’’ti vacanaṃ niddeso viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘yā tāti ubhayametaṃ rattīnaṃyeva uddesaniddesavacana’’nti. Abhīti lakkhaṇatthe ‘‘aññe ca abhiññātā brāhmaṇamahāsālā’’tiādīsu viya. Kathaṃ panettha lakkhaṇatthatā veditabbā? Lakkhīyati etenāti lakkhaṇanti āha ‘‘candapāripūriyā’’tiādi. Puṇṇamāsiyaṃ candapāripūriyā amāvāsiyaṃ candaparikkhayena. Ādi-saddena candassa upaḍḍhamaṇḍalatārāhuggahatādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Upasaggamattameva abhi-saddo lakkhitasaddeneva lakkhaṇatthassa viññāyamānattāti adhippāyo.
从第一天起,就是从第一个新月日(伍波萨他日)开始。因为诘问者在世尊在世时,那些日子还不被标记为特殊,后来才被标记为特殊,所以他就抓住这个“被标记为特殊”的问题来质问:“遍知的世尊为什么不选第五日呢?”另一方则这样回应:“十四日等是任何时候都可以采用的日子,那为什么还要采用不是任何时候都能用的日子呢?”他的意思是:因为那不是任何时候都能用的。巴利
Paṭhamadivasato pabhutīti paṭhamapāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya. Yasmā codako bhagavato kāle anabhilakkhitāpi aparabhāge abhilakkhitā jātā, tasmā taṃ abhilakkhaṇīyataṃ upādāya ‘‘sabbadassinā bhagavatā pañcamī kasmā na gahitā’’ti codeti, itaro sabbakālikāsu cātuddasīādīsu gayhamānāsu asabbakālikāya kathaṃ gahaṇanti adhippāyena ‘‘asabbakālikattā’’ti pariharati.
像这样一类的,就是前面用“众所周知的”等话所说的那种,也就是那样一类的。因为依靠天神的住持,园林等地方就成了世间的支提,所以他说“以值得供养之义”。人们大多数在村落、城镇等的入口处,把那样的树当作支提处来称呼,所以他说“在村落、城镇等的入口处”等。仅仅因为看见、仅仅因为听见,就能让普通众生心生恐惧,所以是令人恐惧的。因此他说“能生恐惧”等。因为它使人害怕,所以称为恐惧;极其可怕、具有怖畏的,就是怖畏。巴利
Tathāvidhāsūti ‘‘abhiññātā’’tiādinā yathā vuttā, tathāvidhāsu. Devatādhiṭṭhitabhāvena ārāmādīnaṃ lokassa cetiyabhāvoti āha ‘‘pūjanīyaṭṭhenā’’ti. Manussā yebhuyyena gāmādīnaṃ dvāresu tathārūpe rukkhe cetiyaṭṭhāniye katvā voharantīti āha ‘‘gāmanigamādidvāresū’’tiādi. Dassanamattenapi savanamattenapi bhayuppādanena pākatikasatte bhiṃsentīti bhiṃsanakāni. Tenāha ‘‘bhayajanakānī’’tiādi. Bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ, ativiya sappaṭibhayaṃ bheravaṃ.
适合接受祈请与供养,适合做种种献供和发愿的仪式。从花、香……一直到铺地的席子,这是按照顺序展示用簸箕等器具来做供养的情形。“Koṭṭento”就是敲打的意思,指的是用角顶、用蹄踢来发出声音。这里把一切四足动物都叫作“鹿”,并不是像“熊皮、鹿皮、羊皮”等说法里那样用,而是特指赤鹿等特定种类的鹿,这是它的意思。“Cāletvā”是通过按压顶端来使它摇动。这里提到孔雀,是作为举例,因此说“这里指的是抓取一切鸟类”。其中的道理是:就像“或者孔雀”里的“或者”是用来表示没有说出来的其他选项,同样地,“或者鹿”里的用法也是如此——这是针对“鹿”这个词在这里被用于特定含义而说的。“从此以后”,是指从“我何不在那些夜晚……”这样思惟、寻求怖畏恐惧的时候开始算起,不是从实际开始寻求的时候算起。因为即使在“我或许会见到怖畏恐惧”这句话里,怖畏恐惧也只是所缘而已。就像以乐受为所缘的色,和乐本身一样,在“色是乐、随乐、入乐”等说法中就是这样。那么,如何由取怖畏而取色所缘呢?所以说“有限的……”等等。由于有“来到”这个说法,所以从开始寻求的时候起,“这是怖畏”就是所指的所缘——有些人认为,因为“他不见那”指的是用眼睛看,所以应该按照前面所说的方式来理解其含义。“希望怖畏”是指:我以观察的方式希望得到怖畏的所在而住;那有什么目的呢?意思是:哪怕只是这样思惟怖畏,对我来说也是不合适的。巴利
Āyācanaupahārakaraṇārahanti taṃtaṃbalikammapaṇidhikammakaraṇayoggaṃ. Pupphadhūpa…pe… dharaṇitalanti idaṃ yathāpaṭisūtena suppādinā upahārakaraṇadassanaṃ. Koṭṭentoti paharanto, siṅgappahārakhurappahārehi saddaṃ karontoti adhippāyo. Sabbacatuppadānaṃ idha magoti nāmaṃ, na ‘‘acchacammaṃ migacammaṃ eḷakacamma’’ntiādīsu (mahāva. 259) viya, rohitotiādi migavisesānanti adhippāyo. Cāletvāti aggamaddanena cāletvā. Moraggahaṇañcettha upalakkhaṇanti dassento āha ‘‘idha sabbapakkhigahaṇaṃ adhippeta’’nti. Esa nayoti idaṃ yathā ‘‘moro vā’’ti ettha vā-saddo avuttavikappanattho, evaṃ ‘‘migo vā’’ti etthāpīti migasaddassa visesatthavuttitaṃ sandhāyāha. Ito pabhūtīti ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ yā tā rattiyo’’tiādinā bhayabheravassa gavesanacintanato pabhuti, na gavesanārambhato pabhuti. ‘‘Appeva nāmāhaṃ bhayabheravaṃ passeyya’’nti etthāpi hi ārammaṇameva bhayabheravaṃ. Sukhārammaṇaṃ rūpaṃ sukhamiva ‘‘rūpaṃ sukhaṃ sukhānupatitaṃ sukhāvakkanta’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.60). Kathaṃ bhayaggahaṇena ca rūpārammaṇaggahaṇanti āha ‘‘parittassa cā’’tiādi. ‘‘Āgacchatī’’ti vacanato gavesanārambhato pabhuti ‘‘etaṃ bhaya’’nti ārammaṇaṃ adhippetanti keci ‘‘taṃ na passeyya’’nti cakkhunā dassanassa adhippetattā, tasmā vuttanayeneva attho gahetabbo. Bhayaṃ ākaṅkhamānoti upaparikkhanavasena ahaṃ bhayavatthuṃ ākaṅkhanto viharāmi, taṃ kimatthiyaṃ, ettakopi bhayasamannāhāro mayhaṃ ayuttoti adhippāyo.
“以某种姿态而存在”是指如实而存在,这里所说的“姿态”是就威仪而言的,因为经文里就是这样出现的,所以论师说:“以某种威仪而存在的。”应当看出,“bhavitassa”这个词和“bhūtassa”是同义的。为了说明“samaṅgībhūtassa”这个词是因为省略了前面的部分才说成“bhūtassa”,论师又说:“或者具足而存在的。”在怖畏恐惧的所缘上,就是在被认作怖畏恐惧的所缘上。大士既不站立等等,这是为了显示“处于那种状态的人应当排除它”,也就是像他所思惟的那样去实践。所谓威仪的顺序,说的是站、行、坐、卧;而逆序则应当理解为:先是卧,再是坐,再是站,最后是行。就邻近的顺序来说:行的邻近是站,站的邻近是坐和行,坐的邻近是卧和站,卧的邻近是坐。在这里,行与站、站与行、坐与卧、卧与坐,是作为邻近来把握的,其余的则应当依前后相续的关系来了知。然而对比丘来说,威仪是依照成就的次第,以次第生起的方式来说的。巴利
Yaṃ pakāraṃ bhūto yathābhūto, so panettha pakāro iriyāpathavasena yutto pāḷiyaṃ tathā āgatattāti āha ‘‘yena yena iriyāpathena bhūtassā’’ti. Bhavitassāti idaṃ ‘‘bhūtassā’’ti iminā samānatthaṃ padanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Samaṅgībhūtassā’’ti padaṃ purimapadalopena bhūtassāti vuttanti dassento ‘‘samaṅgībhūtassa vā’’ti āha. Bhayabheravārammaṇeti bhayabheravābhimate ārammaṇe. Neva mahāsatto tiṭṭhatītiādi ‘‘tathābhūto ca taṃ paṭivineyya’’nti yathā cintitaṃ, tathā paṭipannabhāvadassanaṃ. Iriyāpathapaṭipāṭi nāma ṭhānagamananisajjānipajjāti vadanti, uppaṭipāṭi pana paṭhamaṃ nipajjā, puna nisajjā, puna ṭhānaṃ, pacchā gamananti evaṃ veditabbā. Āsannapaṭipāṭiyāti gamanassa tāva ṭhānaṃ āsannaṃ, ṭhānassa nisajjā gamanañca, nisajjāya nipajjā ṭhānañca, nipajjāya nisajjā āsannā. Idha pana gamanassa ṭhānaṃ, ṭhānassa ca gamanaṃ, nisajjāya ca nipajjā, nipajjāya ca nisajjā āsannabhāvena gahitā, itare paramparāvasenāti veditabbā. Bhikkhussa pana iriyāpathā sampattapaṭipāṭiyā viya aparāparuppattivasena vuccanti.
无迷乱住的注释巴利
Asammohavihāravaṇṇanā
50 我完全没有怖畏恐惧,这尤其是因为无迷乱的法性。为了说明这一点,后面用“然而,确实存在……”等语进一步展开开示,这就是这里的连结。“关于禅修者的迷乱处”这句话,是在说明:对于禅修者来说,在迷乱之处根本没有什么可说的。“atthi”这个虚词也可以表示复数,就像“atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā”等句子中那样,所以为了解释“santi”这个词的含义,才这样说。问:它们是因为具备刹那三性而存在吗?不是。回答说“存在、可得”,意思是:在广大的世间聚落中,这样的法也存在,因为可以以智慧执取,所以是可得。白遍的获得者,即无量白遍的获得者。如此,对他来说,就像周围一片光明一样显现。“加行”是指等至之前的部分。只这样,太阳落山时我起来,然而并不是在时间限定方面善巧,只是生起了“白天才起来”的作意。一切都成为明了的所缘,以天眼观看时如同显现分明。“不明了”在这里应依所说的相反之义理解。“如是想者”,即夜间想“白天”,白天想“夜间”,如是想着。巴利
50. Ayañca me sabbaso bhayabheravābhāvo visesato asammohadhammattāti dassetuṃ ‘‘santikho panā’’tiādinā upari desanā vaḍḍhitāti ayaṃ vā ettha anusandhi. Jhāyīnaṃ sammohaṭṭhānesūti iminā ajjhāyīnaṃ sammohaṭṭhānesu vattabbameva natthīti dasseti. Atthīti idaṃ nipātapadaṃ puthuvacanampi hoti ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.373-374; ma. ni. 1.110; 3.154; saṃ. ni. 4.127; khu. pā. 3.dvatiṃsākāra) viyāti ‘‘santī’’ti padassa atthadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Kiṃ khaṇattayasamaṅgitāya te atthi, noti āha ‘‘saṃvijjanti upalabbhantī’’ti, mahati lokasannivāse edisāpi saṃvijjanti ñāṇena gahetabbatāya upalabbhantīti. Odātakasiṇalābhīti appamāṇaodātakasiṇalābhī. Evaṃ hissa samantato āloko viya upaṭṭhāti. Parikammanti samāpattipubbabhāgamāha. Ettakaṃ sūriye gate vuṭṭhahāmīti,no ca kho addhānaparicchede kusalo hoti, kevalaṃ ‘‘divā eva vuṭṭhahāmī’’ti manasikāraṃ uppādesi. Visadaṃ hoti sabbaṃ ārammaṇajātaṃ, dibbacakkhunā passantassa viya vibhūtaṃ. Avisadanti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Evaṃsaññinoti rattiṃ ‘‘divā’’ti, divā ca ‘‘rattī’’ti evaṃsaññino.
在住所里面,夜间坐着——这里必须补上“夜间”这个词。可能是因为轻微的恐惧等原因,也可能是因为别的什么缘故。那些地方深得像地穴一样,被浓密的树林遮住,被极其厚密的枝叶网络覆盖着。在阳光消失的时候——光凭这一句,虽然没有明说“白天”,意思也已经成立了。迷乱住有很多种,所以注释里说“属于迷乱住中的某一种”。巴利
Antosenāsane rattiṃ nisinno hotīti ratti-saddo ajjhāharitabbo. Parittāsanādīhi, aññehi vā kāraṇehi. Gambhīrāya bhūmigabbhasadisāya ghanavanapaṭicchannāya bahalatarajālavanapaṭalapaṭicchannāya. Antarahitasūriyāloke kāleti eteneva divāti avuttasiddho. Sammohavihāro nāma bahuvidhoti āha ‘‘sammohavihārānaṃ aññatara’’nti.
菩萨对昼夜的划分是清清楚楚的,哪怕短到一瞬一刹那,也都好好确定了;同样,夜晚与白天各时段的划分,也是按自己该做的事和知时的智慧来确定的。巴利
Pākaṭo bodhisattassa rattindivaparicchedo antamaso lavatuṭikhaṇassapi upādāya suvavatthitattā, tathā rattidivasakoṭṭhāsaparicchedo attanā kātabbakiccavasena kālañāṇavasena ca.
根据日晷柱的影子来判定时间,当影子达到两指长的时候。敲击报时板,是为了让僧团各自去做该做的事。“木槌”指的是敲击报时板用的槌子。“报时装置落下”,意思是说由其他比丘来操作让它落下。在其他比丘走向食堂的这段时间里,他就前往白天修行的处所,履行沙门的本分。巴利
Kālathambhe laddhabbachāyāvasena dvaṅgulakāle. Yāmaghaṇṭikaṃ paharati saṅghassa taṃtaṃvattakaraṇatthaṃ. Muggaranti ghaṇṭikappaharaṇamuggaraṃ. Yāmayantaṃ patati aññehi bhikkhūhi yojitanti adhippāyo. Yāva aññe bhikkhū bhojanasālaṃ upagacchanti, tāva divāvihāraṭṭhānaṃ gantvā samaṇadhammaṃ karoti.
这里,“yaṃ”是不定指代词,“kho”表示强调,意思是“正是那个人”。“taṃ”是称呼所指对象的词。“mameva”就是“正是我”。“无迷乱的自性”指本性上就是无迷乱。因为前面说的是“已生起”,所以这里说“在人界”。“以慧的成就”是指以能如实了知利益的智慧功德,不只是靠发心想要利益他人,而是确实付诸行动,所以接着说“开示利益的人”。而发心利益他人,则由“出于对世间的悲悯”这句话表明。没有资具就绝不可能有受用欲乐之乐,而布施资具是以施舍成就为因的,所以说“以施舍成就……布施者”。以慈的成就,通过带来利益而守护;以悲的成就,通过去除痛苦而保护。难道前面不是已经说过“为了利益,为了安乐”吗?那么为什么这里又再次提到它呢?针对这个责难,说“这里以天和人的举出”等。以此表明:前面是笼统地显示利益等,现在则特别地连同目的一起显示它们。从涅槃之后,没有比它更高的利益了,所以说“为了究竟利益”。导向涅槃的,是利益,即道。从最胜方面说,为了安乐,是圣果,所以说“因为从此以上没有更殊胜的安乐”。巴利
Yaṃ kho tanti ettha yanti aniyamuddeso, khoti avadhāraṇe, yameva puggalanti attho. Tanti vuccamānākāravacanaṃ. Mamevāti maṃ eva. Asammohasabhāvoti sabhāvabhūtaasammoho. ‘‘Uppanno’’ti vuttattā ‘‘manussaloke’’ti vuttaṃ. Paññāsampattiyāti yāthāvato hitassa jānanasamatthena attano paññāguṇena, na kevalaṃ ajjhāsayeneva hitesitā, atha kho payogenāti dassento ‘‘hitūpadesako’’ti āha. Ajjhāsayena pana hitesitā ‘‘lokānukampāyā’’ti iminā dassitā. Upakaraṇehi vinā na kadāci bhogasukhaṃ upakaraṇadānañca cāgasampattihetukanti āha ‘‘cāgasampattiyā…pe… dāyako’’ti. Mettāsampattiyā hitūpasaṃhārena rakkhitā. Karuṇāsampattiyā dukkhāpanayanena gopāyitā. Nanu ca pubbepi vuttaṃ ‘‘hitāya sukhāyā’’ti, atha kasmā puna taṃ gahitanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘idha devamanussaggahaṇenā’’tiādi. Tena pubbe avisesato hitādīni dassitāni, idāni visesato saha payojanena tāni dassitānīti dīpeti. Nibbānato paro paramo attho nāma natthīti āha ‘‘paramatthattāyā’’ti. Hinoti nibbānaṃ gacchatīti hitaṃ, maggo. Ukkaṃsato sukhatthaṃ ariyaphalanti āha ‘‘tato uttari sukhābhāvato’’ti.
前行道等的注释巴利
Pubbabhāgapaṭipadādivaṇṇanā
51 无迷乱而住:就是无迷乱的行动,或者也可理解为无迷乱的正觉。它指的是被称为止与观修习的那条修行道路。从前行阶段开始:就是从修习的前行阶段、精进努力等开始。某些人:指那些住在北寺(无畏山寺)的人。巴利
51.Asammohavihāranti asammohavuttiṃ, asammohasambodhinti vā attho. Tanti samathavipassanābhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ paṭipadaṃ. Pubbabhāgato pabhutīti bhāvanāya pubbabhāgavīriyārambhādito paṭṭhāya. Kecīti uttaravihāravāsino.
菩提场:指被称为“菩提”的智慧达到精华状态的地方。四支:就是经里说的“即使皮、筋、骨都留下来……”这样具备四支。提起:指不让努力变得松懈,以被称为坚定精进的奋勇状态来把握,所以说“不松懈地运转”。不懈怠:指不萎缩,没有因为懈怠而陷入退缩。巴利
Bodhimaṇḍeti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.11.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 3.8.11) bodhisaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa maṇḍabhāvappatte ṭhāne. Caturaṅganti ‘‘kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasissatū’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.237; a. ni. 2.5; 8.13; mahāni. 17, 196) vuttacaturaṅgasamannāgataṃ. Paggahitanti ārambhaṃ sithilaṃ akatvā daḷhaparakkamasaṅkhātussahanabhāvena gahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘asithilappavattitanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Asallīnanti asaṅkucitaṃ kosajjavasena saṅkocaṃ anāpannaṃ.
“近住”是指以投入所缘、不漂浮散乱的方式接触所缘并安住下来。因此说“以面向所缘的状态”。“无忘失”是指由于迷乱已被破除而现起,所以不忘失,这就是无忘失。虽然就像心一样,以心轻安的力量,身体也仅因身轻安而变得轻安;但身轻安生起时,必定与心轻安同时生起,不会离开心轻安而单独生起,所以说“由身轻安与心轻安共同生起”。物质身体也确实变得轻安,因为身轻安能带来两种身体的安稳。而这个身体,“离躁动”就是指远离了烦恼的躁动。因为当名身远离躁动时,物质身体的热恼和躁动也会止息。“善安置”是指切断心在种种所缘上奔驰的散乱,使心不散乱地安住在单一所缘上,妥善地安立。因此说“妥善安置”等。心的不专一状态,就是因散乱而摇摆不定;当心一境性存在时,那种动摇就不存在了,所以说“一境、不动、无摆动”。“至此”是指通过“然而已发勤……”等文,显示精进、念、轻安、定这些支分的功能已经成就。难道信和慧的功能成就,不也是禅那前行道所需要的吗?确实需要,但它们并非以直接无间的方式被提及,所以没有单独列出。因为如果没有信,精进的发起等就不可能;如果没有慧的摄持,也就不会有慧的发起等状态。同样,不退缩、不忘失等属于精进等支分,因此应当理解,通过“不退缩”等表述,慧的功能成就已经被包含在内了。或者,为了显示在禅那修习中,定的功能特别重要,应当理解:这里只说到定为止,作为禅那的前行道。巴利
Upaṭṭhitāti ogāhanasaṅkhātena apilāpanabhāvena ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhitā. Tenāha ‘‘ārammaṇābhimukhībhāvenā’’ti. Sammosassa viddhaṃsanavasena pavattiyā na sammuṭṭhāti asammuṭṭhā. Kiñcāpi cittamiva cittapassaddhivasena kāyapassaddhivaseneva kāyo passaddho hoti, tathāpi yasmā kāyapassaddhi uppajjamānā cittapassaddhiyā saheva uppajjati, na vinā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyacittapassaddhisambhavenā’’ti . Rūpakāyopi passaddhoyeva hoti kāyapassaddhiyā ubhayesampi kāyānaṃ passambhanāvahattā. So ca kho kāyo. Vigatadarathoti vigatakilesadaratho. Nāmakāye hi vigatadarathe rūpakāyopi vūpasantadarathapariḷāho hoti. Sammā āhitanti nānārammaṇesu vidhāvanasaṅkhātavikkhepaṃ vicchinditvā ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe avikkhittabhāvāpādānena sammadeva āhitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘suṭṭhu ṭhapita’’ntiādi. Cittassa anekaggabhāvo vikkhepavasena cañcalatā, sā sati ekaggatāya na hotīti āha ‘‘ekaggaṃ acalaṃ nipphandana’’nti. Ettāvatāti ‘‘āraddhaṃ kho panā’’tiādinā vīriyasatipassaddhisamādhīnaṃ kiccasiddhidassanena. Nanu ca saddhāpaññānampi kiccasiddhi jhānassa pubbapaṭipadāya icchitabbāti? Saccaṃ icchitabbā, sā pana nānantariyabhāvena avuttasiddhāti na gahitā. Asati hi saddhāya vīriyārambhādīnaṃ asambhavoyeva, paññāpariggahe ca nesaṃ asati paññāyārambhādibhāvo na siyā. Tathā asallīnāsammosatādayo vīriyādīnanti asallīnatādiggahaṇenevettha paññākiccasiddhi gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jhānabhāvanāyaṃ vā samādhikiccaṃ adhikaṃ icchitabbanti dassetuṃ samādhipariyosānāva jhānassa pubbapaṭipadā kathitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
已经说过,所以这里不再说。《清净道论》确实是这部注释的一部分,因此它的义理已经讲过了。“住”这个说法,是因为以他者(第三人称)来叙述住处而引来的;“在这里住过”这个说法,则是因为以自己(第一人称)来叙述住处而引来的。据说这是一切佛陀都不舍弃的,所以说是“入出息念业处”。以修习色离欲而现起的四种无色定差别,都归在第四禅里,所以说“四禅”。首先,心一境性作为投生到有的意义,以及作为修观的基础,也是四禅共通的,因此依它们说“四禅”;但作为神通的基础和作为灭尽的基础,只属于第四禅,那怎么能说是四禅共通的呢?因为是以辗转的方式作为依止。就像近因的近因也被称为近因,因的因也被称为因,比如“以草席成就众生”那样。这样理解之后,在说明用意时提到八等至也就说得通了。“为心一境性”:就是为了让心得定,为了现法乐住的意思。因为以心一境性为首来说现法乐住,这是就纯观行者和漏尽者说的。因此说“愿以一境之心安乐度日”。“为趣入有”:就是投生到诸有的意思。巴利
Vuttaṃ, tasmā idha na vattabbaṃ. Visuddhimaggo hi imissā saṃvaṇṇanāya ekadesabhūtoti vuttovāyamatthoti. Viharatīti āgataṃ paruddesikattā vihārassa. Idha vihāsinti āgataṃ atthuddesikattā. Idaṃ kira sabbabuddhānaṃ avijahitanti āha ‘‘ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhāna’’nti. Rūpavirāgabhāvanāvasena (sārattha. ṭī. 1.12.nerañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā) pavatto catubbidhopi arūpajjhānaviseso catutthajjhānasaṅgaho evāti āha ‘‘cattāri jhānānī’’ti. Yuttaṃ tāva cittekaggatā bhavokkamanatthatā viya vipassanāpādakatāpi catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sādhāraṇāti tesaṃ vasena ‘‘cattāri jhānānī’’ti vacanaṃ, abhiññāpādakatā pana nirodhapādakatā ca catutthasseva jhānassa āveṇikā, sā kathaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sādhāraṇā vuttāti? Paramparādhiṭṭhānabhāvato. Padaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānampi hi padaṭṭhānanteva vuccati, kāraṇakāraṇampi kāraṇanti yathā ‘‘tiṇehi sattaṃ siddha’’nti, evañca katvā payojananiddese aṭṭhasamāpattiggahaṇaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Cittekaggatatthānīti cittasamādhānatthāni, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthānīti attho. Cittekaggatāsīsena hi diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāro vutto, sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ekaggacittā sukhaṃ divasaṃ viharissāmā’’ti. Bhavokkamanatthānīti bhavesu nibbattiatthāni.
菩萨在最后一生中,前往菩提道场之前,虽然也曾经生起过第四禅,但那时只是刚刚生起而已,并没有成为修观等的根基,所以才特别区分开来,说成“在菩提树下生起”。所谓“作为观的基础”,就是在开始修观时,作为观所依靠的基础。“作为神通的基础”也是同样的道理。因为诸佛只在最初开始修行时,需要以基础禅那来起作用,此后就不再需要它来证得更高的道果、果定、神通等。从证得正等觉那一刻起,一切智与定的一切作用,都只是随着心愿而当下实现。“能成办一切事”,是指能成办次第住等一切功德作用。“能给予一切世间与出世间功德”,在这里应当理解:正是因为第四禅具有作为观和神通基础的性质,所以它才是世尊一切世间、出世间功德的给予者。因为道智是一切知智的基础,一切知智是道智的基础,而证得道智又是依止第四禅的。在证得正等觉的同时,世尊的一切佛陀功德就已握在手中,而证得道智正是以第四禅为依止。巴利
Yasmā (sārattha. ṭī. 1.12.nerañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā) bodhisattena bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamanato pubbepi carimabhave catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattitapubbaṃ, tadā pana taṃ nibbattitamattameva ahosi, na vipassanādipādakaṃ , tasmā ‘‘bodhirukkhamūle nibbattita’’nti tato visesetvā vuttaṃ. Vipassanāpādakanti vipassanārambhe vipassanāya pādakaṃ. Abhiññāpādakanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Buddhānañhi paṭhamārambhe eva pādakajjhānena payojanaṃ ahosi, na tato paraṃ uparimaggādhigamaphalasamāpattiabhiññāvaḷañjanādiatthaṃ. Abhisambodhisamadhigamato paṭṭhāya hi sabbaṃ ñāṇasamādhikiccaṃ ākaṅkhamattapaṭibaddhamevāti. Sabbakiccasādhakanti anupubbavihārādisabbakiccasādhakaṃ. Sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakanti ettha vipassanābhiññāpādakattā eva catutthassa jhānassa bhagavato sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakatā veditabbā. Sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi maggañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ abhisambodhi, tadadhigamasamakālameva bhagavato sabbe buddhaguṇā hatthagatā ahesuṃ, catutthajjhānasannissayo ca maggādhigamoti.
前世宿住论的注释巴利
Pubbenivāsakathāvaṇṇanā
52 52.“两种明”指的是被称为宿住智和天眼智的两种明。“逐句解释”就是对这两种明的经文逐句加以解释。“修习方法”就是生起它们的方式。为了说明经文里的“彼”这个第三人称词跟“我”这个词是怎么衔接的,所以说了“我转向”等话。或者在圣典中,“我转向”是第一人称的表达,把它用“我”这个词引出来说明时,它的意思就变得很清楚,因此说“彼即我”。“转向”的意思是:把心从禅那的所缘上移开,引向宿住的方向,使心倾向于宿住、朝向宿住、俯向宿住。巴利
52.Dvinnaṃvijjānanti pubbenivāsañāṇadibbacakkhuñāṇasaṅkhātānaṃ dvinnaṃ vijjānaṃ. Anupadavaṇṇanāti tāsaṃ vijjānaṃ niddesapāḷiyā anupadavaṇṇanā. Bhāvanānayoti uppādanavidhi. ‘‘So’’ti paccattavacanassa ahaṃ-saddena sambandhane kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘abhininnāmesi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ vā ‘‘abhininnāmesi’’nti uttamapurisassa yogoti ahaṃ-saddena ānetvā vuccamāne tadattho pākaṭo hotīti ‘‘so aha’’nti vuttaṃ. Abhinīharinti cittaṃ jhānārammaṇato apanetvā pubbenivāsābhimukhaṃ pesesiṃ, pubbenivāsaninnaṃ pubbenivāsapoṇaṃ pubbenivāsapabbhāraṃ akāsinti attho.
宿住是指过去诸生中曾住过的诸蕴。所谓“住过”,是指已经居住过、已经体验过,在自己的生命相续中生起后又灭去了的;或者,依所缘而说“住”,是指被自己的识所认知的法,也包括被他人的识所认知的法,比如随念断头鬼等的情形。以那样的念去随念那个宿住,与那种念相应的智,就是宿住随念智。“转回时”是指在随念宿住时,按自己的意愿一直往前追溯,然后再返回的时候。“因此”是对已经说过的道理,以它为原因而重新提出来,意思是说“当返回时进行观察”。“于此再生”是指在此最后一生中的投生。“无间”是指紧接着过去。“于某处”意思是在某个存在中。“生起”就是产生了。“从那些天神”是指从兜率天神。“同姓”是指与兜率天同一族姓。因为大菩萨在生命相续的最后阶段,导致投生天界的那个业,并没有被不善业所干扰,基于这个意图,所以只说“只是行苦的苦”。然而,即使是大福德的天子,在前兆出现等时候,也确实会有遇到不可意所缘的情况,因此不能说“连苦苦也完全不可能发生”。五十七……乃至……为边际:这是按人间的年数来说的。其中,如果按天神的年数来算,就只有四千。巴利
Pubbeatītajātīsu nivutthakkhandhā pubbenivāso. Nivutthāti ca ajjhāvutthā anubhūtā attano santāne uppajjitvā niruddhā, gocaranivāsena nivutthadhammā vā attano viññāṇenaviññātā, paraviññāṇaviññātāpi vā chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsu, taṃ pubbenivāsaṃ yāya satiyā anussarati, tāya sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiññāṇaṃ. Paṭinivattantassāti pubbenivāsaṃ anussaraṇavasena yāvadicchakaṃ gantvā paccāgacchantassa. Tasmāti vuttassevatthassa kāraṇabhāvena paccāmasanaṃ, paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇabhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Idhūpapattiyāti idha carimabhave upapattiyā. Anantaranti atītānantaramāha. Amutrāti amukasmiṃ bhaveti attho. Udapādinti uppajjiṃ. Tāhi devatāhīti tusitādevatāhi. Ekagottoti tusitagottena ekagotto. Mahābodhisattānaṃ santānassa pariyosānāvatthāya devalokūpapattijanakaṃ nāma akusalena kammunā anupaddutameva hotīti adhippāyena ‘‘dukkhaṃ pana saṅkhāradukkhamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāpuññānampi pana devaputtānaṃ pubbanimittuppattikālādīsu aniṭṭhārammaṇasamāyogo hotiyevāti ‘‘kadāci dukkhadukkhassapi sambhavo natthī’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ. Sattapaññāsa…pe… pariyantoti idaṃ manussānaṃ vassagaṇanāvasena vuttaṃ. Tattha devānaṃ vassagaṇanāya pana catusahassameva.
在过去世中,诸蕴以及和它们相关联的名与姓,全都包括在“宿住”里面,所以经文说:“令知什么?宿住。”愚痴由于能覆盖、遮蔽,所以称为“黑暗”,也就是说它“像黑暗一样”。关于“能带来光明”这一说法:因为应当被做,所以叫“作”;光明本身就是“作”,意思是,依靠自己的缘,应当以光明的状态生起。其余的话是赞叹之语,因为它们说明了与对立面斗争并生起作用的种种差别。由于“无明已被破除”这句话,也显示出“以明了知”这层意思,应当这样理解。因为“明已生起”这句话,说明与明对立的无明,以及它与明相对立、应当被断除,而明则是能断除者。这个道理在另外两个词上也是如此,以此说明黑暗已被破除、已消失。为什么?因为“光明已生起”这句话暗示了这个意思。“已策励心者”:朝向如所意欲的义利成就,而释放其心。“如不放逸者”:其意趣是,其他任何像我这样的人也是如此。巴利
Atītabhave (sārattha. ṭī. 1.12.pubbenivāsakathāyaṃ) khandhā tappaṭibaddhanāmagottāni ca sabbaṃ pubbenivāsanteva saṅgahitanti āha ‘‘kiṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsa’’nti. Moho paṭicchādakaṭṭhena‘‘tamo’’ti vuccati ‘‘tamo viyā’’ti katvā. Obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhenāti kātabbato karaṇaṃ, obhāsova karaṇaṃ, attano paccayena obhāsabhāvena nibbattetabbaṭṭhenāti attho. Sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacananti paṭipakkhavidhamanapavattivisesānaṃ bodhanato vuttaṃ. Avijjā vihatāti etena vijjanaṭṭhena vijjāti ayampi attho dīpitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā vijjā uppannāti etena vijjāpaṭipakkhā avijjā, paṭipakkhatā cassā pahātabbabhāvena vijjāya ca pahāyakabhāvenāti dasseti. Esa nayo itarasmimpi padadvayeti iminā tamo vihato vinaṭṭho. Kasmā? Yasmā āloko uppannoti imamatthaṃ atidisati. Pesitattassāti yathādhippetatthasiddhiṃ pati vissaṭṭhacittassa. Yathā appamattassāti aññassapi kassaci mādisassāti adhippāyo.
天眼智论的注释巴利
Dibbacakkhuñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
53 这里说的“此处”,是指《怖畏惊骇经》里所说的内容。这里的“这个差别”是用来连接说明的。和前面说过的内容一样,只是换成了“由我”等说法。所谓“遍作之事”,就像前面说的“从作为神通基础的第四禅出定后,应当作意最后一次坐姿”等等,以及“以遍相为所缘、作为神通基础的禅那,要让它以一切方式都能胜任引导”等等;按照这样说的遍作,在这里并没有功用和必要。以那种修习方式,在此处巴利的义释中并无此义,因为那种修习在此处并非所欲,这就是这里的意旨。巴利
53.Idhāti bhayabheravasutte vuttaṃ. Idha ayaṃ visesoti yojanā. Vuttasadisameva ‘‘meti mayā’’tiādinā. Parikammakiccanti ‘‘abhiññāpādakacatutthajjhānato vuṭṭhāya sabbapacchimā nisajjā āvajjitabbā’’tiādinā, kasiṇārammaṇaṃ abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ sabbākārena abhinīhārakkhamaṃ katvā’’tiādinā ca vuttena parikammena kiccaṃ payojanaṃ natthi. Natena idha atthoti tena bhāvanānayena idha pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanāyaṃ attho natthi tathābhāvanāya idha anadhippetattāti adhippāyo.
漏尽智论述的注释巴利
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
54 “以观为前行”是指作为观的基础。观按修行人的类型差别分为三种。大菩萨和独觉菩萨的观,因为是由思所成智培育起来的,所以是自生智;其他人的观,因为是由闻所成智培育起来的,所以是从他人的教导产生的。这种观,如“除了非想非非想处,从其余色界、无色界禅那中的任何一个出定之后”等所说的那样,在《清净道论》中,通过多种无色禅门,依四界差别里所述各种摄界门中的某一门,以多种方式详细阐明。然而大菩萨的观智,以二十四万亿又一千种门类展现差别,因此成为一切知智所依的圣道智的根本依止,是前行部分智的内在种性,逐渐成熟,极为甚深、细密、微细,不共于他人。这种观智在注释书中被称为“大金刚智”。这种智以展现种种门类差别为前行因,若依此修行而成就,则称为世尊日常受用的二十四万亿又一千数等至。诸如来这种观行境界,在《胜义宝函》中的《清净道论释》里已按纲要形式阐明,想要了解的人应当从那里取来。巴利
54.Vipassanāpādakanti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.14.āsavakkhayañāṇakathāyaṃ; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.248; a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.59) vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Vipassanā ca tividhā vipassanakapuggalabhedena. Mahābodhisattānañhi paccekabodhisattānañca vipassanā cintāmayañāṇasaṃvaddhitattā sayambhuñāṇabhūtā, itaresaṃ sutamayañāṇasaṃvaddhitattā paropadesasambhūtā, sā ‘‘ṭhapetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ avasesarūpārūpajjhānānaṃ aññatarato vuṭṭhāyā’’tiādinā anekadhā arūpamukhavasena catudhātuvavatthāne vuttānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ dhātupariggahamukhānaṃ aññataramukhavasena anekadhāva visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.306) nānānayato vibhāvitā. Mahābodhisattānaṃ pana catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassamukhena pabhedagamanato nānānayaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇasannissayassa ariyamaggañāṇassa adhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pubbabhāgañāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ paramagambhīrasaṇhasukhumataraṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ hoti, yaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu mahāvajirañāṇanti vuccati. Yassa ca pavattivibhāgena catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassappabhedassa pādakabhāvena samāpajjiyamānā catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā devasikaṃ satthu vaḷañjanakasamāpattiyo vuccanti, svāyaṃ buddhānaṃ vipassanācāro paramatthamañjūsāya visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāya (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.144) uddesato dassito, atthikehi tato gahetabboti.
诸漏的灭尽,因为能舍断、能彻底根除诸漏,所以叫“漏尽”,这是指圣道;从最殊胜的说明方式来看,是指阿拉汉道。为了显示“于漏尽之智”就是关于漏灭的智,先说了“对此,有此智”,然后为了显示“灭”这个词是依处格而不是所缘格,就说“依于漏灭而得名”。说“这是苦”,是显示当时对苦圣谛已现前了知。说“这些是苦”,是显示对苦圣谛已通过限定而了知。说“没有比这更多的苦”,是显示毫无剩余地完全了知。因此说“这一切都是苦谛”等等。“以自性相通达”,是指对被称为自性的相无迷乱地通达。所谓无迷乱的通达,就是说当那种智生起之后,在判别苦的自相、差别等等时不会产生迷乱,它就是那样运作的。因此说“如实了知”。“到达之处”,是指涅槃,因为涅槃以所缘缘的意义成为道的因,依此而到达。具有厌逆与无厌逆两者的修行者所获得的,就称为“厌逆与无厌逆两者的获得”。或者,“到达”就是达到的因。“无转起”,就是无转起的相状。或者说“在那里,它们不再转起”,这就叫“无转起”,也就是涅槃。“彼”,是指苦的灭。“善能令至”,就是通过现证的方式完全正确地引导到那里。巴利
Āsavānaṃ khepanato samucchindanato āsavakkhayo, ariyamaggo, ukkaṭṭhaniddesavasena arahattamaggaggahaṇaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇanti dassento ‘‘tatra cetaṃ ñāṇa’’nti vatvā khayeti ca ādhāre bhummaṃ, na visayeti dassento ‘‘tappariyā pannattā’’ti āha. Idaṃ dukkhanti dukkhassa ariyasaccassa tadā paccakkhato gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Ettakaṃ dukkhanti dukkhassa ariyasaccassa tadā paccakkhato gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Ettakaṃ dukkhanti tassa paricchijja gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Na ito bhiyyoti anavasesetvā gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbampidukkhasacca’’ntiādi. Sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti sabhāvasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa asammohato paṭivijjhanena. Asammohapaṭivedhoti ca yathā tasmiṃ ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavatti. Tenāha ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsi’’nti. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvāti yaṃ nibbānaṃ maggassa ārammaṇapaccayaṭṭhena kāraṇabhūtaṃ āgamma. Tadubhayavato hi puggalassa patti tadubhayassa pattīti vuttaṃ. Patvāti vā pāpuṇanahetu. Appavattinti appavattinimittaṃ. Te vā nappavattanti etthāti appavatti, nibbānaṃ. Tassāti dukkhanirodhassa. Sampāpakanti sacchikiriyāvasena sammadeva pāpakaṃ.
从烦恼的角度来说,就是依名为“漏”的烦恼来说。因为诸漏属于苦谛,被苦谛所包含,而其余诸谛也有各自的集起等同义说法,所以才这样说。“从同义语的角度”——这样开示诸谛,就是句子的连接方式。这里只取诸漏,是因为开头就以“为漏尽之智”作为起点。同样,因为以漏的解脱为首要,所以说一切烦恼的解脱。像“此是苦,如实了知”这样的说法,在这里是说明与观混合在一起的道,所以说“开示与观一同达到顶点的道”。而且在这里,虽然那时对诸谛的通达已经是过去的事,说了“如实了知”,但依据现观时的当下性,又以“如是知、如是见”这样的现在时来表述。再者,从道的那一刹那之后直到现在,固然都是过去时,但它最初的过去性应当从果的那一刹那来理解,所以说“以‘便解脱’显示果的刹那”。“知者、见者”,这是从原因方面来说的。也就是说,因为知、因为见,心才从欲漏中解脱——应当这样连接。这里提到有漏,正如有贪被包含一样,有见也被包含,因此应当理解为也包含了见漏。巴利
Kilesavasenāti āsavasaṅkhātakilesavasena. Yasmā āsavānaṃ dukkhasaccapariyāyo tappariyāpannattā, sesasaccānañca taṃsamudayādipariyāyo atthi, tasmā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pariyāyato’’ti. Dassento saccānīti yojanā. Āsavānaṃyeva cettha gahaṇaṃ ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyā’’ti āraddhattā. Tathā hi āsavavimutti sīseneva sabbasaṃkilesavimutti vuttā. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsi’’ntiādinā missakamaggo idha kathitoti ‘‘saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ kathetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca saccapaṭivedhassa tadā atītakālikattā ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsi’’nti vatvāpi abhisamayakāle tassa paccuppannataṃ upādāya ‘‘evaṃ jānato evaṃ passato’’ti vattamānakālena niddeso kato. So ca kāmaṃ maggakkhaṇato paraṃ yāvajjatanā atītakāliko eva, sabbapaṭhamaṃ panassa atītakālikattaṃ phalakkhaṇena veditabbanti āha ‘‘vimuccitthāti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ dassetī’’ti. Jānato passatoti vā hetuniddesoyaṃ. Jānanahetu dassanahetu kāmāsavā cittaṃ vimuccitthāti yojanā. Bhavāsavaggahaṇeneva cettha bhavarāgassa viya bhavadiṭṭhiyāpi samavarodhoti diṭṭhāsavassapi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
以“生已尽”等词句来说。“它的”指的是观察智。“地”指的是生起的立足处。意思是:对他来说,过去的生并不是靠修道的力量才灭尽的。这里说明原因说“因为先前就已灭尽”。“未来的生并非已灭尽”——应当这样连接。而说“非未来”,是取“未来”的共相,用含蓄的方式指出。因此说“因为对未来没有努力”,但这里指的是未来的特殊部分,为了灭尽它,努力还是有的。所以接着说“然而,对于道的……”等。在“一蕴有、四蕴有、五蕴有”当中,总举三有,是为了按前面所说的方式,显示生已无余地灭尽。“此”指前面所说的那种生。“彼”指世尊。巴利
Khīṇājātītiādīhi padehi. Tassāti paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa. Bhūmīnti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ. Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā maggabhāvanāyāti adhippāyo. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘pubbeva khīṇattā’’ti. Na anāgatā assajāti khīṇāti yojanā. Na anāgatāti ca anāgatattasāmaññaṃ gahetvā lesena codeti. Tenāha ‘‘anāgate vāyāmābhāvato’’ti, anāgataviseso panettha adhippeto, tassa ca khepane vāyāmopi labbhateva. Tenāha ‘‘yā pana maggassā’’tiādi. Ekacatupañcavokārabhavesūti bhavattayaggahaṇaṃ vuttanayena anavasesato jātiyā khīṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tanti yathāvuttaṃ jātiṃ. Soti bhagavā.
这里所说的“梵行住”,就是指在今生让圣道的梵行生起,所以说“已完成”。当正见在四圣谛中以遍知等作用的方式运作时,正思惟等其他道支在苦谛中也同样随顺遍知现观而运作;在其余三谛中,它们则以断、证等方式运作,这是很明显的。因此说“通过四道,以遍知、断、证、修习的方式”。关于“为此状态”:这些种类就是“如此”,那种状态就是“此性”,所以意思是“为了那个目的”。这里所指的,就是作为圣道作用的遍知等,因此说“为了这十六种作用的状况”。因为当人观察圣道时,依靠圣道的威力,这些作用会清晰地显现出来;而在遍知等作用中,断才是主要的,其余的都是为了这个目的,所以说“为了烦恼的灭尽”。或者,这也是就观察已断除的烦恼而说的。“为此状态”是以与格形式表示夺格意义的用法,所以解释为“从这种状态”。其余的是指未来。而这里指的是被称为最后有的五蕴。说“它们被遍知后而住立”,是要显示它们已无处可立。因为以不遍知为根本,才会有立足处。正如经中说:“诸比丘,若于段食有贪、有喜、有渴爱,识即于彼住立、增长。”因此说“如断根之树”等。巴利
Brahmacariyavāso nāma idha maggabrahmacariyassa nibbattanamevāti āha ‘‘niṭṭhita’’nti. Sammādiṭṭhiyā catūsu saccesu pariññādikiccasādhanavasena pavattamānāya sammā saṅkappādīnampi dukkhasacce pariññābhisamayānuguṇā pavatti, itarasaccesu ca nesaṃ pahānābhisamayādivasena pavatti pākaṭā eva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasenā’’ti. Itthattāyāti ime pakārā itthaṃ, tabbhāvo itthattaṃ, tadatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Te pana pakārā ariyamaggabyāpārabhūtā pariññādayo idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘evaṃsoḷasakiccabhāvāyā’’ti. Te hi maggaṃ paccavekkhato maggānubhāvena pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, pariññādīsu ca pahānameva padhānaṃ tadatthattā itaresanti āha ‘‘kilesakkhayāyavā’’ti. Pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇavasena vā etaṃ vuttaṃ. Itthattāyāti nissakke sampadānavacananti āha ‘‘itthabhāvato’’ti. Aparaṃ anāgataṃ. Ime pana carimattabhāvasaṅkhātā pañcakkhandhā. Pariññātā tiṭṭhantīti etena tesaṃ appatiṭṭhataṃ dasseti. Apariññāmūlakā hi patiṭṭhā. Yathāha ‘‘kabaḷīkāre ce, bhikkhave, āhāre atthi rāgo atthi nandī atthi taṇhā, patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ virūḷha’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.64; mahāni. 7; kathā. 296). Tenevāha ‘‘chinnamūlakā rukkhā viyā’’tiādi.
这段的意趣是:此智被观察智所含摄,并不像前两种智证得时那样只是单独成立。阐明这一点,是以总结的方式来说的。因为就它自身的体性而言,前面已经显示过了。由于宿住智也以过去为所缘,并且与过去分智同类,所以把过去分智也收摄进来,应当这样连接理解。这里说的“过去分智”,是指在被称为过去蕴、处、界的过去部分中无碍通达的智。“以天眼”,是指天眼智连同它的附属成分。现在分和未来分合起来就是现在未来分,对这两部分的智就是现在未来分智。“一切世间与出世间功德”,通过这一说法应当知道,它含摄了像一切知智那样超越并胜过整个世间而安住的其余不共智,以及十力、佛不共法等不与他人共有的佛陀功德。因此说“把一切知智的一切功德都收摄进来”。巴利
Paccavekkhaṇañāṇapariggahitaṃ, na paṭhamadutiyañāṇadvayādhigamaṃ viya kevalanti adhippāyo. Dassento nigamanavasenāti adhippāyo. Sarūpato hi taṃ pubbe dassitamevāti. Pubbenivāsañāṇena atītārammaṇasabhāgatāya tabbhāvībhāvato ca atītaṃsañāṇaṃ saṅgahetvāti yojanā. Tattha atītaṃsañāṇanti atītakhandhāyatanadhātusaṅkhāte atītakoṭṭhāse appaṭihataṃ ñāṇaṃ. Dibbacakkhunāti saparibhaṇḍena dibbacakkhuñāṇena. Paccuppannaṃso ca anāgataṃso ca paccuppannānāgataṃsaṃ, tattha ñāṇaṃ paccuppannānāgataṃsañāṇaṃ. Sakalalokiyalokuttaraguṇanti etena sabbaṃ lokaṃ uttaritvā abhibhuyya ṭhitattā sabbaññutaññāṇassa viya sesāsādhāraṇañāṇassa balañāṇaāveṇikabuddhadhammādīnampi anaññasādhāraṇānaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ saṅgaho veditabbo. Tenāha ‘‘sabbepi sabbaññuguṇe saṅgahetvā’’ti.
关于住在阿兰若的因缘的注释巴利
Araññavāsakāraṇavaṇṇanā
55 在“婆罗门,你或许会这样想吧”这句话里,“或许”是一个不变词,和“appeva”(也许)意思相同,所以意思是:“婆罗门,你也许确实会这样认为吧。”注释书里说的“有时”,也是就同一个意思而说的,目的是先驳掉婆罗门所设想的那种没有根据的说法,然后显示他自己主张的根据。义利本身就是果,因为它依赖于那个果而运作,所以叫“义利之力”(atthavaso);或者在这里也可以把“atthavaso”理解为“因由”(hetu)。至于“以及我自己的现法乐住”,导师是用这句话来说明自己对远离的欢喜,于是接着说了“名为现法”等话。其中,“威仪之住”指的是威仪的运作。这些运作之所以叫“住”,是因为在一种威仪中生起的苦,能通过换另一种威仪来截断并去除。所谓“也哀愍后世的众人”,导师是把婆罗门最初说的“尊贵的乔达摩是他们的先行者……大家便随顺追随”,以及他自己认可的“确实如此,婆罗门”等话,用归纳的方式显示出来,顺着这个脉络,导师就把这次说法结束了。巴利
55.Siyā kho pana te brāhmaṇāti ettha siyāti ‘‘appevā’’ti iminā samānattho nipāto , tasmā ‘brāhmaṇa, appeva kho pana te evamassā’ti attho. Yaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kadācī’’ti vuttaṃ, tampi imamevatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ akāraṇaṃ brāhmaṇena parikappitamatthaṃ paṭipakkhipitvā attano adhippetaṃ kāraṇaṃ dassento. Atthova phalaṃ tadadhīnavuttitāya vaso etassāti atthavaso, hetūti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāranti etena satthā attano vivekābhiratiṃ pakāsetīti dassento ‘‘diṭṭhadhammo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha iriyāpathavihārānanti iriyāpathapavattīnaṃ. Tappavattiyo hi ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe uppannadukkhaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā haraṇato vihārāti vuccanti. Pacchimañca janataṃ anukampamānoti etena yo ādito brāhmaṇena ‘‘bhavaṃ tesaṃ gotamo pubbaṅgamo…pe… diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjatī’’ti vutto, yo ca tathā ‘‘evametaṃ brāhmaṇā’’tiādinā attanā sampaṭicchito, tameva atthaṃ nigamanavasena dassento yathānusandhināva satthā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
对说法随喜的注释巴利
Desanānumodanāvaṇṇanā
56 56. 开示这样圆满结束之后,那位婆罗门为了表达自己对世尊的净信,就说了“abhikkanta”等话。“abhikkanta”的意思是已经过去、已经消逝,所以他说“在耗尽时显现”。正因为这样,才说“初夜已过”。“abhikkantataro”则是极其可意、令人欢喜。那样的状态就是美好、善妙,所以说“在美好中显现”。巴利
56. Evaṃ niṭṭhāpitāya desanāya brāhmaṇo tattha bhagavati pasādaṃ pavedento ‘‘abhikkanta’’ntiādimāha. Abhikkantāti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.15.desanānumodanakathā; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.250; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.1; a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.16) atikkantā, vigatāti atthoti āha ‘‘khaye dissatī’’ti. Teneva hi ‘‘nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhikkantataroti ativiya kantataro manoramo. Tādiso ca sundaro bhaddako nāma hotīti āha ‘‘sundare dissatī’’ti.
在天、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等众之中,是哪一位?所谓“我”,就是我的。所谓“双足”,就是两足。所谓“以神通”,就是以这样天界的神通。所谓“以名声”,就是以这样的随从和眷属。“照耀着”,就是闪闪发光。“以极其可意”,就是以极其可爱、令人欢喜、端正庄严的。“以容貌”,就是以肤色,也就是凭身体的光泽。“照破一切诸方”,就是照亮、照显十个方向,像月亮和太阳一样,使一切成为一片光明、一片亮光——这就是这首偈颂的含义。“端正”,就是在广大、殊妙的容貌中,具足圆满的容色。巴利
Koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu ko katamo. Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde. Iddhiyāti imāya evarūpāya deviddhiyā. Yasasāti iminā edisena parivārena parijanena. Jalanti vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kamanīyena abhirūpena. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya. Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti dasapi disā obhāsento pabhāsento, cando viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karontoti gāthāya attho. Abhirūpeti uḷārarūpe sampannarūpe.
在“贼啊,贼啊”“蛇啊,蛇啊”这类说法里,是恐惧时的重复。在“射啊,射啊”“打啊,打啊”这类说法里,是愤怒时的重复;在“萨度,萨度”这类说法里,是赞叹时的重复;在“走啊,走啊”“割啊,割啊”这类说法里,是匆忙时的重复;在“来啊,来啊”这类说法里,是好奇时的重复;在“佛陀,佛陀,正在想着”这类说法里,是惊讶时的重复;在“前进吧,尊者!前进吧,尊者!”这类说法里,是嬉笑时的重复;在“独子在哪里?独子在哪里?”这类说法里,是忧伤时的重复;在“啊,真是乐!啊,真是乐!”这类说法里,是清净信心时的重复。“ca”这个词有总括未说之事的含义,因此应当理解为它也涵盖了讥嫌、不恭敬等情形。其中,在“恶啊,恶啊”这类说法里,是讥嫌时的重复;在“漂亮家伙,漂亮家伙”这类说法里,应当理解为不恭敬时的重复。巴利
‘‘Coro coro, sappo sappo’’tiādīsu bhaye āmeḍitaṃ. ‘‘Vijjha vijjha, pahara paharā’’tiādīsu kodhe, ‘‘sādhu sādhūtiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.327; saṃ. ni. 2.127; 3.35; 5.1085) pasaṃsāyaṃ, ‘‘gaccha gaccha, lunāhi lunāhī’’tiādīsu turite, ‘‘āgaccha āgacchā’’tiādīsu kotūhale, ‘‘buddho buddhoti cintento’’tiādīsu (bu. vaṃ. 2.44) acchare, ‘‘abhikkamathāyasmanto, abhikkamathāyasmanto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.20; a. ni. 9.11) hāse, ‘‘kahaṃ ekaputtaka, kahaṃ ekaputtakā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.353; saṃ. ni. 2.63) soke, ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’ntiādīsu (udā. 20; dī. ni. 3.305; cūḷava. 332) pasāde. Ca-saddo avuttasamuccayattho. Tena garahāasammānādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha ‘‘pāpo pāpo’’tiādīsu garahāyaṃ. ‘‘Abhirūpaka abhirūpakā’’tiādīsu asammāne daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这并不是因为重复叠用才说了两次,而是基于两种含义,为了说明这一点,才说了“或者”等话。“abhikkantaṃ”这个词是考虑到“言说”而以中性词性说出的,但那其实是世尊的话语,因为它是法的开示,所以才那样表述。或者,这只是显示其含义而已,因此应当知道,这是随含义而改变了词性和格位。第二句也是同样的道理。所谓“由过失灭尽”,是指断除了贪等烦恼过失;所谓“由功德证得”,是指成就了戒等功德。在开示所令证得的那些功德中,应当显示其中最主要的,为了先显示那些最主要的,所以说“由于令生信,由于令生慧”。因为世间功德以信为首,出世间功德以慧为首。由于成就了戒等义利,所以是有义利的;由于成就了自性词源,所以是有文句的。由于运用了极易了知的词语,所以是文句显了的;由于微细幽玄,义理难以了知,所以是义理甚深的。由于运用了润滑、柔软、甜美的词语,所以是悦耳的;由于义利广大、清净、可意可爱,所以是惬心的。由于摧破慢与过慢而不抬高自己,所以是不自赞的;由于摧破顽固与忿而对他人不轻蔑,所以是不毁他的。由于依利益意趣而行,以及息灭他人的贪热恼等,所以是以悲愍而清凉的;由于破除烦恼的黑暗,所以是以智慧而清净的。由于如迦陵频伽鸟的悦耳音声,所以是入耳适意的;由于前后无违、极为清净之义,所以是堪受反复推敲的。由于入耳适意,所以是听闻时快乐的;由于堪受反复推敲,以及依利益之志趣而行,所以是审察时有益的。所谓“等”字,应当知道摄收了如下诸义:令轮回之轮止息,令正法之轮转起,摧破邪说,安立正说,拔出不善根,种植善根,关闭恶趣之门,开启趣向天界与解脱道之门,止息烦恼缠缚,根除随眠烦恼等。巴利
Nayidaṃ āmeḍitavasena dvikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ, atha kho atthadvayavasenāti dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Abhikkantanti vacanaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakaliṅgavasena vuttaṃ, taṃ pana bhagavato vacanaṃ dhammassa desanāti katvā tathā vuttaṃ. Atthamattadassanaṃ vā etaṃ, tasmā atthavasena liṅgavibhattivipariṇāmo veditabbo. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Dosanāsanatoti rāgādikilesadosavidhamanato, guṇādhigamanatoti sīlādiguṇānaṃ sampāpanato. Ye guṇe desanā adhigameti, tesu padhānabhūtā dassetabbāti te padhānabhūte tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhājananato paññājananato’’ti vuttaṃ. Saddhāpamukhā hi lokiyā guṇā, paññāpamukhā lokuttarā. Sīlādiatthasampattiyā sātthato, sabhāvaniruttisampattiyā sabyañjanato. Suviññeyyasaddapayogatāya uttānapadato, saṇhasukhumabhāvena dubbiññeyyatthatāya gambhīratthato. Siniddhamudumadhurasaddapayogatāya kaṇṇasukhato, vipulavisuddhapemanīyatthatāya hadayaṅgamato. Mānātimānavidhamanena anattukkaṃsanato, thambhasārambhamaddanena aparavambhanato. Hitādhippāyapavattiyā paresaṃ rāgapariḷāhādivūpasamanena ca karuṇāsītalato, kilesandhakāravidhamanena paññāvadātato. Karavīkarutamañjutāya āpātharamaṇīyato, pubbāparāviruddhasuvisuddhatthatāya vimaddakkhamato. Āpātharamaṇīyatāya eva suyyamānasukhato, vimaddakkhamatāya hitajjhāsayappavattitatāya ca vīmaṃsiyamānahitato. Evamādīhīti ādisaddena saṃsāracakkanivattanato, saddhammacakkappavattanato, micchāvādavidhamanato, sammāvādapatiṭṭhāpanato, akusalamūlasamuddharaṇato, kusalamūlasaṃropanato, apāyadvārapidhānato, saggamaggadvāravivaraṇato, pariyuṭṭhānavūpasamanato, anusayasamugghātanatoti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
朝下放着的,是指被某人特意朝下放的。本性就是朝下的,是指它本身就是朝下的。能掀开,是指能把它打开。握住他的手,是指不说“你朝东走”或“你朝北走”之类的话,而是握着他的手说:“这条路没问题,就这么走。”黑分十四日,就是黑分里的第十四天。巴利
Adhomukhaṭṭhapitanti kenaci adhomukhaṃ ṭhapitaṃ. Heṭṭhāmukhajātanti sabhāveneva heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ. Ugghāṭeyyāti vivaṭaṃ kareyya. Hatthe gahetvāti ‘‘puratthābhimukho, uttarābhimukho vā gacchā’’tiādīni avatvā hatthe gahetvā ‘‘nissandehaṃ esa maggo, evaṃ gacchā’’ti vadeyya. Kāḷapakkhacātuddasīti kāḷapakkhe cātuddasī.
把倒扣的容器翻正过来,是为了让它能盛放东西——原本它扣着,没法当容器用,现在通过让它变成能盛物的状态,就把它翻正了。“面朝下”是说它天生就朝下,比喻心背离了正法;“被朝下放着”是说它被人朝下搁置,比喻心沉陷在非正法里。这两句要按各自合适的意思来搭配理解,不是按顺序一一对应。欲贪等确实也能遮蔽,但邪见的遮蔽特别严重,所以经文说“被邪见稠林所遮蔽”。因此世尊开示:“比丘们,我说邪见是最大的过失。”一切通向恶趣的道路都是邪道,因为它是卑劣之道。邪见等八种邪性法与正见等正性法正好相反,所以它们是邪道。正是为了说明这两者的对立,才说“在开示通往天界与解脱之道时”。以酥油等为燃料的灯,不如以油为燃料的灯那么明亮,所以这里举油灯为例。“以种种理趣”,是指通过这些倒扣、翻正、遮蔽、开显等譬喻和所喻之事;或者是指按前面所说的,通过把握十六所缘、无混乱住、天住的开显,以及以三明开显为标志,来开显自己一切知者功德的种种理趣。因此说:“以种种理趣,法已被阐明。”巴利
Nikujjitaṃ ādheyyassa anādhārabhūtaṃ bhājanaṃ ādhārabhāvāpādanavasena ukkujjeyya. Heṭṭhāmukhajātatāya saddhammavimukhaṃ, adhomukhaṭṭhapitatāya asaddhamme patitanti evaṃ padadvayaṃ yathārahaṃ yojetabbaṃ, na yathāsaṅkhyaṃ. Kāmaṃ kāmacchandādayopi paṭicchādakā, micchādiṭṭhi pana savisesaṃ paṭicchādikāti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchanna’’nti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ, bhikkhave, vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310). Sabbo apāyagāmimaggo kummaggo ‘‘kucchito maggo’’ti katvā. Sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ ujupaṭipakkhatāya micchādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha micchattadhammā micchāmaggo. Teneva hi tadubhayapaṭipakkhataṃ sandhāya ‘‘saggamokkhamaggaṃ ācikkhantenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sappiādisannissayo padīpo na tathā ujjalo, yathā telasannissayoti telapajjotaggahaṇaṃ. Etehi pariyāyehīti etehi nikujjitukkujjanapaṭicchannavivaraṇādiupamopamitabbapakārehi, etehi vā yathāvuttehi soḷasārammaṇapariggahaasammohavihāradibbavihāravibhāvanapariyāyehi vijjāttayavibhāvanāpadesena attano sabbaññuguṇavibhāvanapariyāyehi ca. Tenāha ‘‘anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito’’ti.
净信所作注释巴利
Pasannakāravaṇṇanā
净信所作是指有净信的人应当做的恭敬之事。皈依是指庇护之处。因此说“彼岸”。而成为彼岸,是通过遮止无义和成就有义来实现的,所以说“恐怖的救护者、利益的施与者”。“恐怖的”是指苦,他们这样说;但理解为恶才合适。这里这个词是属格,表示“从……中”。在这里,“去”这个动词词根不像“引导”等词根那样能带两个宾语,所以不能说“我去乔达摩皈依”,而应当说“我去皈依”。这里的“iti”是省略未直接说出的,它的意思是:为了显示“去”就是依照那个意图的亲近,或者同样是了知,所以说“即以此意图”等。在这里,“我亲近”等语句中,后一句是前一句的义理解说。或者,“亲近”是依皈依的意图而接近,“侍奉”是在身边行持,“承事”是通过履行义务和服务来侍奉——如此在一切方面都只是表明不以其他为皈依。“我去”这个词,怎样才能得到“我觉了”这个意思呢?为了说明这一点,所以说“因为,对于那些……”等。巴利
Pasannakāranti pasannehi kātabbaṃ sakkāraṃ. Saraṇanti paṭisaraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘parāyaṇa’’nti. Parāyaṇabhāvo ca anatthanisedhanena atthasampaṭipādanena ca hotīti āha ‘‘aghassa tātā hitassa ca vidhātā’’ti. Aghassāti dukkhatoti vadanti, pāpatoti pana yuttaṃ. Nissakke cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Ettha ca nāyaṃ gami-saddo nī-saddādayo viya dvikammako, tasmā yathā ‘‘ajaṃ gāmaṃ netī’’ti vuccati, evaṃ ‘‘gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vattuṃ na sakkā, ‘‘saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti pana vattabbaṃ. Iti-saddo cettha luttaniddiṭṭho, tassa cāyamattho – gamanañca tadadhippāyena bhajanaṃ, tathā jānanaṃ vāti dassento ‘‘iti iminā adhippāyenā’’tiādimāha . Tattha bhajāmītiādīsu purimassa purimassa pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Bhajanaṃ vā saraṇādhippāyena upasaṅkamanaṃ, sevanaṃ santikāvacaratā, payirupāsanaṃ vattapaṭivattakaraṇena upaṭṭhānanti evaṃ sabbathāpi anaññasaraṇataṃyeva dīpeti. ‘‘Gacchāmī’’ti padassa kathaṃ ‘‘bujjhāmī’’ti ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘yesañhī’’tiādi.
已经到达道位和已经证得灭尽,这两个词其实都只是在说明已经安住在果位的人,而不是还在道位的人。为了指出这一点,所以接着说“当人依照教导去实践的时候”。难道说善凡夫不也算是依照教导去实践吗?虽然也可以这么说,但严格来讲,只有安住在道位的人才能这样称呼,其他人不算,因为他们还没有进入决定之位。也正因如此,只有这些人才被称为“护持那些不堕入恶趣的人”。因为只有进入正性决定,才有可能从恶趣中解脱出来。
“被称为”这里,“iti”这个词有“等等”的意思,或者有“种类”的意思。用这个就可以涵盖经文里说的:“比丘们,无论是有为法还是无为法,离染在它们当中被称为最上。”或者也可以说,用“详细来说”这个词来涵盖。而在这里,因为圣道具有导出的作用,涅槃则是那道成就其意义的因,所以这两者在严格意义上都被称为“法”。因为涅槃作为所缘缘被获得之后,圣道才能成就它的意义;而对于圣果来说,由于“因为依着那信心,当它还没有平息的时候……”等说法,由道所断除的烦恼得以止息和舍断,并且随顺于导出、以导出为归宿。至于教法之法,则是达成导出之法的一个因,因此从这个角度来说,它也仍然可以获得“法”的资格。这个道理其实已经出现在经文里了,为了说明这一点,所以接着说“不只是……”等等。巴利
Adhigatamagge,sacchikatanirodheti padadvayenapi phalaṭṭhā eva dassitā, na maggaṭṭhāti te dassento ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne cā’’ti āha. Nanu ca kalyāṇaputhujjanopi yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjatīti vuccatīti? Kiñcāpi vuccati, nippariyāyena pana maggaṭṭhā eva tathā vattabbā, na itare niyāmokkamanābhāvato. Tathā hi te eva ‘‘apāyesu apatamāne dhāretī’’ti vuttā. Sammattaniyāmokkamanena hi apāyavinimuttisambhavo. Akkhāyatīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā. Tena ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti suttapadaṃ (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) saṅgaṇhāti, vitthāroti vā iminā. Ettha ca ariyamaggo niyyānikatāya, nibbānaṃ tassa tadatthasiddhihetutāyāti ubhayamevettha nippariyāyena dhammoti vutto. Nibbānañhi ārammaṇapaccayabhūtaṃ labhitvā ariyamaggassa tadatthasiddhi, ariyaphalānaṃ ‘‘yasmā tāya saddhāya avūpasantāyā’’tiādivacanato maggena samucchinnānaṃ kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhipahānakiccatāya niyyānānuguṇatāya niyyānapariyosānatāya ca. Pariyattidhammassa pana niyyānadhammasamadhigamahetutāyāti iminā pariyāyena dhammabhāvo labbhati eva, svāyamattho pāṭhāruḷho evāti dassento ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādimāha.
欲贪、有贪等种种不同类别的贪,都通过它而离染、被断除,所以称为“贪离染”——这是就道而说的。对于被称为“动”的渴爱,以及以内在烧灼为特征的忧愁,由于它们的生起已彻底灭尽,所以称为“无动无愁”——这是就果而说的。“不违逆”:因为显示不相对立,所以不与任何事物相冲突;或者意思是“可意的、殊胜的”。“娴熟的”:因为以熟练的方式生起,或者因为彰显殊胜的功德,所以是娴熟的。正如经文所说:“梵天神啊,我因顾虑徒增劳苦,未在人间宣说这娴熟殊胜之法。”一切法蕴都已宣说——这是整句的连属关系。巴利
Kāmarāgo bhavarāgoti evamādibhedo sabbopi rāgo virajjati pahīyati etenāti rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya antonijjhānalakkhaṇassa sokassa ca taduppattiyaṃ sabbaso parikkhīṇattā anejamasokanti phalaṃ kathitaṃ. Appaṭikūlanti avirodhadīpanato kenaci aviruddhaṃ, iṭṭhaṃ paṇītanti vā attho. Paguṇarūpena pavattitattā, pakaṭṭhaguṇavibhāvanato vā paguṇaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vihiṃsasaññī paguṇaṃ na bhāsiṃ, dhammaṃ paṇītaṃ manujesu brahme’’ti. Sabbadhammakkhandhā kathitāti yojanā.
“以见与戒的集合”这句话的意思是:所谓“见”,指“凡是这种见是圣的、能导出的,能引导实践它的人正确地灭尽苦;以这样的见,与见同分而住”;所谓“戒”,指“凡是那些戒,无缺、无穿、无斑点、无污点,令自在,为智者所称赞,不执取,能引生定;以这样的戒,与戒同分而住”。就是这见与这戒,因为它们聚合在一起,所以叫“以见与戒同分”。“集合”就是聚合在一起。因为圣者们无论在哪里,即使站在很远的地方,也凭自身功德的聚合而成为聚合的。
“有八种人,是法见者”:八种人,即使按一对一对来计算只有四种,但按单人计算就是八种。因为他们亲眼见到了圣法,所以叫“法见者”。“三事为皈依”:通过皈依的行动以及进行三次的行动,就有三种皈依。“他表白”:他通过言语,把存在于自己内心的表达出来。巴利
Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātenāti ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā, ‘‘yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni , tathārūpehi sīlehi sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.12; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttānaṃ sīlānañca saṃhatabhāvena, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññenāti attho. Saṃhatoti ghaṭito. Ariyapuggalā hi yattha katthaci dūre ṭhitāpi attano guṇasāmaggiyā saṃhatā eva. Aṭṭha ca puggala dhammadasā teti te purisayugavasena cattāropi puggalavasena aṭṭheva ariyadhammassa paccakkhadassāvitāya dhammadasā. Tīṇi vatthūni saraṇanti gamanena tikkhattuṃ gamanena ca tīṇi saraṇagamanāni. Paṭivedesīti attano hadayagataṃ vācāya pavedesi.
皈依趋往论说的注释巴利
Saraṇagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
就像为了让人在皈依的所缘差别、果报差别、染污差别以及皈依者本身这些方面获得善巧,才说“为于诸皈依而得善巧……应当了知皈依”一样;因为若没有这些说明,皈依本身就根本无法成立。那么,这里为什么不把“清净”也纳入呢?难道阐明清净不也能让人在皈依上获得善巧吗?确实如此,但清净之义已经通过“染污”的摄取而在意义上间接说明了,所以不再单独纳入。因为那些造成染污的原因——无明等等——完全不再生起,已生起的也被断除,这就是清净。应当依“害”义的“sara”一词来看待此句,说了“害故为皈依”之后,为了澄清“那害是谁的、如何害、对谁害”的责难,而说“皈依者”等语。其中,“怖畏”指轮回的怖畏。“恐惧”指心的战栗。由于以此已经摄取了心所苦,所以这里的“苦”指身苦。“恶趣之苦”指属于恶趣的一切苦。这一切将在后面的果报论中显现。“此”指“皈依”一词。巴利
Saraṇagamanassa visayapabhedaphalasaṃkilesabhedānaṃ viya kattu ca vibhāvanā tattha kosallāya hotīti ‘‘saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃsaraṇaṃ…pe… veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ tena vinā saraṇagamanasseva asambhavato. Kasmā panettha vodānaṃ na gahitaṃ, nanu vodānavibhāvanāpi tattha kosallāvahāti? Saccametaṃ, taṃ pana saṃkilesaggahaṇeneva atthato dīpitaṃ hotīti na gahitaṃ. Yāni hi tesaṃ saṃkilesakāraṇāni aññāṇādīni, tesaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ anuppannānaṃ anuppādanena, uppannānañca pahānena vodānaṃ hotīti. Hiṃsatthassa sara-saddassa vasenetaṃ padaṃ daṭṭhabbanti ‘‘hiṃsatīti saraṇa’’nti vatvā taṃ pana hiṃsanaṃ kesaṃ, kathaṃ, kassa vāti codanaṃ sodhento ‘‘saraṇagatāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha bhayanti vaṭṭabhayaṃ. Santāsanti cittutrāsaṃ. Teneva cetasikadukkhassa gahitattā dukkhanti idha kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ. Duggatiparikilesanti duggatipariyāpannaṃ sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ. Tayidaṃ sabbaṃ parato phalakathāyaṃ āvi bhavissati. Etanti ‘‘saraṇa’’nti padaṃ.
像这样,先从没有分别的角度说明了“皈依”这个词的含义,现在为了从有分别的角度来说明,就说了“或者又……”等话。“令住立于利益”,是指通过“比丘们,你们要具足戒而安住”这样的教诫,让人投入到利益中去。“及从不善遮止”,是指通过“杀生确实会招来恶的果报,会带来不好的来世”这种指出过患等方式,让人从不善中退回来。“伤害怖畏”,是说以在利益中不转起、在不善中转起为因的灾祸,通过令不转起而摧毁。法是八圣道,因为能度脱有旷野;其余二者,则因为赐予安稳,所以能伤害众生的怖畏,应该这样结合起来理解。“应施物”,是指通过布施与恭敬的方式所呈献上来的那些恭敬物品。以令获得广大果报,伤害众生之怖畏,因为是无上应供者之义,这是要义。“以此行相”,意思就是用这种分别解说的方式。巴利
Evaṃ avisesato saraṇasaddassa atthaṃ dassetvā idāni visesato dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Hite pavattamānenāti ‘‘sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharathā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.64, 69) atthe niyojanena. Ahitā ca nivattanenāti ‘‘pāṇātipātassa kho pāpako vipāko pāpakaṃ abhisamparāya’’ntiādinā ādīnavadassanādimukhena anatthato vinivattanena. Bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti hitāhitesu appavattipavattihetukaṃ byasanaṃ appavattikaraṇena vināseti . Bhavakantārā uttāraṇena maggasaṅkhāto dhammo, itaro assāsadānena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti yojanā. Kārānanti dānavasena pūjāvasena ca upanītānaṃ sakkārānaṃ. Vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvatoti adhippāyo. Imināpi pariyāyenāti imināpi vibhajitvā vuttena kāraṇena.
正自觉的世尊、善说的法、善行的僧伽——对这三宝生起的这种信心,就是“彼信”;对那个人来说,三宝是值得尊重的,所以叫“彼尊重”;这种状态就是“彼尊重性”。彼信和彼尊重性合在一起,就是“彼信与彼尊重性”。依靠这些,就能摧破邪见、疑、迷乱、无信等烦恼。心以“这三宝就是我的依怙、归宿、救护、庇护所”这样的方式生起,这种以三宝为归趣的心念生起,就是皈依,意思是“依此而走向皈依”。“具足彼者”,就是指具足刚才所说的这种心念。“如是归向”,意思是这样地亲近、奉侍、承事,或者这样地了知、觉悟,应当这样理解其含义。在这里,通过“信”这一项,说的是世俗层面的皈依,因为这种皈依以信心为主,不以智慧为主。通过“尊重”这一项,说的是出世间的皈依。因为圣者们如实了知三宝的功德,把三宝看得像石伞盖一样值得尊重。所以应当这样结合理解:凭借彼信,以暂时压伏的方式摧破烦恼;凭借彼尊重性,以彻底断除的方式摧破烦恼。而这里的“彼归趣性”,指的就是归向三宝的状态,应当知道,它已经涵盖了下面将要讲的四种皈依。或者也可以这样理解:不分别地显示信与尊重,通过“信”这一项就包含了不坏净信和其他信,通过“尊重”这一项也同样包含了其他,所以用这两者,就可以把两种皈依都连接起来。巴利
‘‘Sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti evaṃ pavatto tattha ratanattaye pasādo tappasādo, tadeva ratanattayaṃ garu etassāti taggaru, tassa bhāvo taggarutā, tappasādo ca taggarutā ca tappasādataggarutā, tāhi. Vidhutadiṭṭhivicikicchāsammohaassaddhiyāditāya vihatakileso. ‘‘Tadeva ratanattayaṃ parāyaṇaṃ gati tāṇaṃ leṇa’’nti evaṃ ākārena pavattiyā tapparāyaṇatākārapavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ ‘‘saraṇanti gacchati etenā’’ti. Taṃsamaṅgīti tena yathāvuttacittuppādena samannāgato. Evaṃ upetīti evaṃ bhajati sevati payirupāsati, evaṃ vā jānāti bujjhatīti evamattho veditabbo. Ettha ca pasādaggahaṇena lokiyasaraṇagamanamāha. Tañhi pasādappadhānaṃ, na ñāṇappadhānaṃ. Garutāgahaṇena lokuttaraṃ. Ariyā hi ratanattayaṃ guṇābhiññātāya pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garuṃ katvā passanti, tasmā tappasādena vikkhambhanavasena vihatakileso taggarutāya samucchedavasenāti yojetabbaṃ. Tapparāyaṇatā panettha taggatikatāti tāya catubbidhampi vakkhamānaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avisesena vā pasādagarutā jotitāti pasādaggahaṇena aveccappasādassa itarassa ca gahaṇaṃ, tathā garutāgahaṇenāti ubhayenapi ubhayaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
在道的刹那成就,应当这样结合起来理解。依靠“以涅槃为所缘”这句话,从意义上其实是在显示:四圣谛的体证本身就是出世间的皈依。因为在那里,涅槃法是通过亲证通达,道法是通过修习通达,正是在被如实通达的当下,就成就了皈依的性质;而佛的功德作为声闻弟子的行境,是通过遍知通达,圣僧的功德也同样是通过遍知通达。因此说“从作用上说,是在完整的三宝上成就”,而且这种成就是与三宝同时成就的,不像世俗皈依那样按次序发生,因为它是以毫无迷惑的悟入方式证得的,这就是要点所在。有些人主张:“皈依并不是以涅槃为所缘之后才生起的,只是因为证得了圣道,才说已经得到了皈依,就像三明等圣者生起世间明等一样。”照他们这样说,皈依就只能是世俗的,不能是出世间的。但这是不合理的,因为两种皈依都应该被认可。“彼”指的是世俗皈依。“获得信”是指通过“正自觉者、世尊”等语句而获得的信心。“以信为根本”是指以上面所说的信为先导的正见。这种正见只是以世间理解的方式,依照正确的方法,去看清佛陀的善自觉、法的善法性以及僧伽的善行道。通过“以信为根本的正见”这句话,表明以信为依止、具有上述特征的智慧,就是世俗的皈依。因此说“这被称为正见之端正”,意思是“正见被它自身的诸因所端正”。或者说,正见以此而端正,所以叫正见之端正,如此生起的心念也是如此。这样,“以彼为归趣的行相所生起的心念”这句话也就得到了成立。而“以信为先导的正见”这一表述,应当理解为心念以它为主导。通过“获得信”这句话,显示了像被父母鼓励的孩子那样,与智不相应的皈依;通过“正见”这句话,则显示了与智相应的皈依。巴利
Maggakkhaṇe ijjhatīti yojanā. Nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvāti etena atthato catusaccādhigamoyeva lokuttaraṃ saraṇagamananti dasseti. Tattha hi nibbānadhammo sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena, maggadhammo bhāvanābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhiyamānoyeva saraṇagamanattaṃ sādheti, buddhaguṇā pana sāvakagocarabhūtā pariññābhisamayavasena, tathā ariyasaṅghaguṇā. Tenāha ‘‘kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhatī’’ti, ijjhantañca saheva ijjhati, na lokiyaṃ viya paṭipāṭiyā asammohapaṭivedhena paṭividdhattāti adhippāyo. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘na saraṇagamanaṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā pavattati, maggassa adhigatattā pana adhigatameva hoti ekaccānaṃ tevijjādīnaṃ lokiyavijjādayo viyā’’ti, tesaṃ lokiyameva saraṇagamanaṃ siyā, na lokuttaraṃ, tañca ayuttaṃ duvidhassapi icchitabbattā. Tanti lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ. Saddhāpaṭilābho ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’tiādinā. Saddhāmūlikāti yathāvuttasaddhāpubbaṅgamā sammādiṭṭhi buddhasubuddhataṃ dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipatiñca lokiyāvabodhavaseneva sammā ñāyena dassanato. ‘‘Saddhāmūlikā sammādiṭṭhī’’ti etena saddhūpanissayā yathāvuttalakkhaṇā paññā lokiyasaraṇagamananti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhijukammanti vuccatī’’ti ‘‘diṭṭhi eva attano paccayehi ujuṃ karīyatī’’ti katvā. Diṭṭhi vā ujuṃ karīyati etenāti diṭṭhijukammaṃ, tathā pavatto cittuppādo . Evañca katvā ‘‘tapparāyaṇatākārapavatto cittuppādo’’ti idañca vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Saddhāpubbaṅgamasammādiṭṭhiggahaṇaṃ pana cittuppādassa tappadhānatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Saddhāpaṭilābho’’ti iminā mātādīhi ussāhitadārakādīnaṃ viya ñāṇavippayuttasaraṇagamanaṃ dasseti, ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti iminā ñāṇasampayuttasaraṇagamanaṃ.
这些属于世间的皈依。“自我献出”是指以此把自己交出去、托付出去、舍弃出去,也就是前面所说的令见正直的行为。“以彼为皈依”是指以三宝为依靠、为归宿的人,或者指那样的心念;这种状态就是“以彼为皈依性”,同样就是前面所说的令见正直的行为。“弟子归向”是指怀着皈依的心意,以此而进入弟子、学童的身份。“顶礼”是指同样怀着皈依的心意,以此而低头礼拜。在所有这些情况下,都应当依据前面所说的令见正直的行为来理解其含义。“舍弃自我”是指为了渡过轮回之苦,而舍弃自己的这个身体。其余几个词也遵循同样的道理。“唯独对佛等”这一限定,也应当根据情况套用到其他各种皈依的差别上。这样一来,就排除了对其他对象的执取。巴利
Tayidaṃ lokiyaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ. Attā sanniyyātīyati appīyati pariccajīyati etenāti attasanniyyātanaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ diṭṭhijukammaṃ. Taṃ ratanattayaṃ parāyaṇaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ etassāti tapparāyaṇo, puggalo, cittuppādo vā, tassa bhāvo tapparāyaṇatā, yathāvuttadiṭṭhijukammameva. Saraṇanti adhippāyena sissabhāvaṃ antevāsikabhāvaṃ upagacchati etenāti sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ. Saraṇagamanādhippāyeneva paṇipatati etenāti paṇipāto. Sabbattha yathāvuttadiṭṭhijukammavaseneva attho veditabbo. Attapariccajananti saṃsāradukkhanittharaṇatthaṃ attano attabhāvassa pariccajanaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Buddhādīnaṃyevāti avadhāraṇaṃ itaresupi saraṇagamanavisesesu yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Evañhi tadaññanivattanaṃ kataṃ hoti.
像这样,先用一种方式说明了“自我施与”等之后,现在为了再用其他方式来说明,就开始说“复次……”等话。通过这,他指出:即使从别的角度来说,“自我施与”等也还是同一个东西,因为其含义并没有不同。“阿拉瓦迦等”中的“等”字,应当理解为把沙塔基利、黑玛瓦德等也包括在内。难道这些阿拉瓦迦等不是依圣道而获得皈依的吗?为什么说他们的皈依是“以彼为归宿的皈依”呢?即使他们是依圣道而获得皈依,由于他们自己也通过“我将从一村到一村游行”等话,表露了心向三宝的那种状态,所以才那样说。巴利
Evaṃ attasanniyātanādīni ekena pakārena dassetvā idāni aparehipi pakārehi dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tena pariyāyantarehipi attasanniyyātanādi katameva hoti atthassa abhinnattāti dasseti. Āḷavakādīnanti ādi-saddena sātāgirihemavatādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Nanu cete āḷavakādayo maggeneva āgatasaraṇagamanā, kathaṃ tesaṃ tapparāyaṇatāsaraṇagamanaṃ vuttanti? Maggenāgatasaraṇagamanehipi ‘‘so ahaṃ vicarissāmi gāmā gāma’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.246) tehi tapparāyaṇatākārassa paveditattā tathā vuttaṃ.
在“由亲族……等等”这里,“由”这个字要分别跟“由亲族”“由怖畏”“由老师”“由应受供养者”搭配来理解。其中,“由亲族”是指以亲族的身份关系而来。其余几种也是这样理解。“以对可受供养者的顶礼”:是指以对方值得受供养为因由而做的顶礼。“以其他”:是指以亲族关系等三种因由所起的顶礼。为了把“以其他”等简要说的内容详细展开说明,才说了“因此……”等话。“他顶礼”:是描述顶礼这个动作本身的话。“如是类”:是就现世利益而说的。因为一个人如果期待来世利益或能导向解脱的教诫,他就只会对值得受供养的对象顶礼,这是这里的要点。“皈依的类别”:是指皈依的不同分类。巴利
Ñāti…pe… vasenāti ettha ñātivasena bhayavasena ācariyavasena dakkhiṇeyyavasenāti paccekaṃ ‘‘vasenā’’ti padaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tattha ñātivasenāti ñātibhāvavasena. Evaṃ sesesupi. Dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātenāti dakkhiṇeyyatāhetukena paṇipātena. Itarehīti ñātibhāvādivasappavattehi tīhi paṇipātehi. Itarehītiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vandatīti paṇipātassa lakkhaṇavacanaṃ. Evarūpanti diṭṭhadhammikaṃ sandhāya vadati. Samparāyikañhi niyyānikaṃ vā anusāsanaṃ paccāsīsanto dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātameva karotīti adhippāyo. Saraṇagamanappabhedoti saraṇagamanavibhāgo.
圣道本身就是出世间的皈依,所以(注释者)说“四沙门果是异熟果”。一切苦尽,是指整个轮回之苦彻底止息,不再生起。此,是指见圣谛,即如(《法句经》190)所说的“以正慧观见四圣谛”。巴利
Ariyamaggoyeva lokuttarasaraṇagamananti āha ‘‘cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphala’’nti. Sabbadukkhakkhayoti sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa anuppādanirodho. Etanti ‘‘cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passatī’’ti (dha. pa. 190) evaṃ vuttaṃ ariyasaccadassanaṃ.
“因为不执取为常等”:也就是不通过“这是常”这类方式去执取。“非处”:是对原因的否定。“无机会”:是对条件的否定。这两者都是对原因的否定。“以此”:就是凭这个原因。“具见者”:指具足道见的入流者。“于任何行”:指在四地范围内的有为诸行中,对任何一个行。“会执取为常”:就会执取说“这是常”。“会执取为乐”:这是指依据“自我成为一向乐者、无病、死后更无所有”(如《长部》1.76所说)这样的我见而执取为乐。然而,如果用不与见相应的心,圣弟子为了止息苦迫,就像被醉象惊吓的阔行婆罗门逃入粪坑一样,也会对一些行执取为乐。在“自我”的句子里,为了包含遍业等施设,所以不说“行”而说“任何法”。在这些句子里,也应该知道是以四地或者三地来区划的。因为,凡夫以执取的方式执取任何事物,圣弟子就相应地从那种执取中解开。“于母”等句子中:亲生母亲为母,亲生父亲为父,这里指的应是已证得阿拉汉的人。然而,难道圣弟子会夺取其他生命吗?这也是不可能的情况,但为了显示凡夫状态的大罪过性,以及为了说明圣弟子的果德,才这样说。“以染污心”:指以杀心而使内心染污的人。“令其流血”:即使在活着的身体上,也要令流出哪怕小苍蝇啜饮那么少的血。“分裂僧团”:把同住在一起、处于同一界内的僧团,通过这样的五种方式——“以甘马、以说戒、以分别说、以唱说、以筹票”(见《律藏·小品·附随》458)——来分裂。“其他导师”:指去执取其他的外道师,认为“这位是我的导师”,这是不可能存在的情况——这就是它的意思。巴利
Niccato anupagamanādivasenāti niccanti aggahaṇādivasena. Aṭṭhānanti hetupaṭikkhepo. Anavakāsoti paccayapaṭikkhepo. Ubhayenapi kāraṇameva paṭikkhipati. Yanti yena kāraṇena. Diṭṭhisampannoti maggadiṭṭhiyā sampanno sotāpanno. Kañci saṅkhāranti catubhūmakesu saṅkhatasaṅkhāresu ekasaṅkhārampi. Niccato upagaccheyyāti ‘‘nicco’’ti gaṇheyya. Sukhato upagaccheyyāti ‘‘ekantasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.76) evaṃ attadiṭṭhivasena sukhato gāhaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhivippayuttacittena pana ariyasāvako pariḷāhavūpasamanatthaṃ mattahatthiparittāsito viya cokkhabrāhmaṇo ukkārabhūmiṃ kañci saṅkhāraṃ sukhato upagacchati. Attavāre kasiṇādipaññattisaṅgahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘saṅkhāra’’nti avatvā ‘‘kañci dhamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Imesupi vāresu catubhūmakavaseneva paricchedo veditabbo tebhūmakavaseneva vā. Yaṃ yañhi puthujjano gāhavasena gaṇhāti, tato tato ariyasāvako gāhaṃ viniveṭheti. Mātarantiādīsu janikā mātā, janako pitā, manussabhūto khīṇāsavo arahāti adhippeto. Kiṃ pana ariyasāvako aññaṃ jīvitā voropeyyāti? Etampi aṭṭhānaṃ, puthujjanabhāvassa pana mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ ariyasāvakassa phaladīpanatthañcevaṃ vuttaṃ. Duṭṭhacitto vadhakacittena paduṭṭhacitto. Lohitaṃ uppādeyyāti jīvamānakasarīre khuddakamakkhikāya pivanamattampi lohitaṃ uppādeyya. Saṅghaṃ bhindeyyāti samānasaṃvāsakaṃ samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitaṃ saṅghaṃ ‘kammena uddesena voharanto anussāvanena salākaggāhenā’’ti (pari. 458) evaṃ vuttehi pañcahi kāraṇehi bhindeyya . Aññaṃ satthāranti aññaṃ titthakaraṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me satthā’’ti evaṃ gaṇheyyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti attho.
他们不会堕入恶趣之地:那些已经皈依佛陀的人,不会因为这份皈依而堕入恶趣,而是会投生到天界中去。这就是这句话的意思。巴利
Na te gamissanti apāyabhūminti te buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā tannimittaṃ apāyabhūmiṃ na gamissanti, devakāyaṃ pana paripūressantīti attho.
“以十种理由”就是指以十种原因。“胜超”就是胜过、压伏。“也根据《韦喇玛经》等”这里要按《韦喇玛经》来说明这个意思:有人连续七年零七个月不间断地举行韦喇玛大布施,布施八万四千头象,每头象都依次配好装满碎银、黄金、金币的金钵、银钵、铜钵,每钵分量相当于四分之一迦梨沙,并且这些象都装饰齐全;又有八万四千匹马、八万四千辆车、八万四千头乳牛、八万四千名童女、八万四千张床座、八万四千俱胝套衣服,还有无量种类的嚼食、啖食等食物。相比这样的大布施,供养一位具见者果报更大;相比供养一百位入流者,供养一位一来者果报更大;相比供养一来者,供养一位不来者果报更大;相比供养不来者,供养一位阿拉汉果报更大;相比供养阿拉汉,供养一位独觉佛果报更大;相比供养独觉佛,供养正自觉者果报更大;相比供养正自觉者,供养以佛陀为首的僧团果报更大;相比这些,为了四方僧团而建寺院果报更大;相比建寺院,皈依三宝果报更大。这里说的就是阐明这个道理的《韦喇玛经》。经中这样说:“居士啊,韦喇玛婆罗门所行的那场大布施,如果有人供养一位具见者,这比那场大布施果报更大。”等等。“《韦喇玛经》等”中的“等”字,应当理解为也包括《最上信解经》等。巴利
Dasahiṭhānehīti dasahi kāraṇehi. Adhiggaṇhantīti adhibhavanti. Velāmasuttādivasenāpīti ettha ‘‘caturāsītisahassasaṅkhānaṃ suvaṇṇapātirūpiyapātikaṃsapātīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ rūpiyasuvaṇṇahiraññapūrānaṃ karīsassa catutthabhāvappamāṇānaṃ sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitānaṃ caturāsītiyā hatthisahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā assasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā rathasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā dhenusahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā kaññāsahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā pallaṅkasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā vatthakoṭisahassānaṃ aparimāṇassa ca khajjabhojjādibhedassa āhārassa pariccajanavasena sattamāsādhikāni satta saṃvaccharāni nirantaraṃ pavattavelāmamahādānato ekassa sotāpannassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato sataṃ sotāpannānaṃ dinnadānato ekassa sakadāgāmissa, tato ekassa anāgāmissa, tato ekassa arahato, tato ekassa paccekabuddhassa, tato sammāsambuddhassa, tato buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa vihārakaraṇaṃ, tato saraṇagamanaṃ mahapphalatara’’nti imamatthaṃ dīpentassa velāmasuttassa (a. ni. 9.20) vasena. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ gahapati, velāmo brāhmaṇo dānaṃ adāsi mahādānaṃ, yo ekaṃ diṭṭhisampannaṃ bhojeyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalatara’’ntiādi (a. ni. 9.20). Velāmasuttādīti ādi-saddena aggappasādasuttādīnaṃ (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
对三事的功德不了知,这就是无知;在“这是佛陀吗?这不是佛陀吗?”等等想法中犹豫不决,这就是疑;把那三事的功德颠倒地执取为非功德,这就是邪智。“等”这个字,涵盖了不敬、不尊重等说法。“非大光明”就是不明亮,意思是不清净、不纯净。“非大遍满”就是不广大。“有过失”就是由于邪见、渴爱等而有污点。世间的皈依和受持学处,就像这样,并没有限定只到某个时候为止,而是以寿命终尽为期限,因此说“于寿尽时无过失”。这是说无过失的皈依的坏灭。即使没有过失,也不会产生可意的果报,因此说“无果报”。巴利
Aññāṇaṃ vatthuttayassa guṇānaṃ ajānanaṃ tattha sammoho, ‘‘buddho nu kho, na nu kho buddho’’tiādinā vicikicchā saṃsayo,micchāñāṇaṃ tassa guṇānaṃ aguṇabhāvaparikappanena viparītaggāho. Ādi-saddena anādarāgāravādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Na mahājutikanti na ujjalaṃ, aparisuddhaṃ apariyodātanti attho. Na mahāvipphāranti anuḷāraṃ. Sāvajjoti diṭṭhitaṇhādivasena sadoso. Lokiyaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ sikkhāsamādānaṃ viya aggahitakālaparicchedaṃ jīvitapariyantameva hoti, tasmā tassa khandhabhedena bhedoti āha ‘‘anavajjo kālakiriyāyā’’ti. Soti anavajjo saraṇagamanabhedo. Satipi anavajjatte iṭṭhaphalopi na hotīti āha ‘‘aphalo’’ti.
在家男众行仪论注释巴利
Upāsakavidhikathāvaṇṇanā
“近事男是什么?”这是问他的特相,因此就是在问:具备什么样特相的人才能称为近事男?“为什么?”是问原因,目的是说明:凭什么样的生起因缘,“近事男”这个名称才安立在那个人身上。“他的戒怎样?”意思是这位近事男的戒是什么样的?要具足多少戒才称得上戒具足?“他的活命方式怎样?”意思是他的正命是什么?而正命又要通过远离邪命来实现,所以这一点也要分别说明。“什么是失败?”是指戒的失败或活命方式的失败。紧接着的内容,或是从正面说明,或是从反面排除。“什么是成就?”这里也是同样的道理。巴利
Koupāsakoti sarūpapucchā, tasmā kiṃlakkhaṇo upāsakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmāti hetupucchā. Tena kena pavattinimittena upāsakasaddo tasmiṃ puggale niruḷhoti dasseti. Kimassa sīlanti kīdisaṃ assa upāsakassa sīlaṃ, kittakena sīlenāyaṃ sīlasampanno nāma hotīti attho. Ko ājīvoti ko assa sammāājīvo, so pana micchājīvassa parivajjanena hotīti sopi vibhajīyatīti. Kā vipattīti kā assa sīlassa, ājīvassa vā vipatti. Anantarassa hi vidhi vā paṭisedho vā. Kā sampattīti etthāpi eseva nayo.
“无论哪一位”,是指在刹帝利等种姓中的任何一个人。这就说明,在这里,皈依才是真正的关键,而不是出身等差别。“亲近侍奉”,就是通过那皈依,并以恭敬、尊重、敬仰等方式,在那里认真用心地亲近服侍。“远离怨仇”:“怨仇”指的是杀生等破戒行为,由于对它的粉碎、打击、毁灭,所以称为远离怨仇,也就是五种远离,因为这种戒以远离为核心。因此经中处处都说:“成为远离者。”巴利
Yo kocīti khattiyādīsu yo koci. Tena saraṇagamanamevettha kāraṇaṃ, na jātiādivisesoti dasseti. Upāsanatoti teneva saraṇagamanena tattha ca sakkaccakāritāya ādaragāravabahumānādiyogena payirupāsanato. Veramaṇiyoti veraṃ vuccati pāṇātipātādidussīlyaṃ, tassa maṇanato hananato vināsanato veramaṇiyo, pañca viratiyo viratippadhānattā tassa sīlassa. Tenevāha tattha tattha ‘‘paṭivirato hotī’’ti.
邪买卖是指不正当的买卖、不合宜的买卖、不相称的买卖。舍弃是指以不去做的方式彻底放下。依法是指不偏离法。这样就遮止了其他不如法的谋生方式。平等是指不偏斜。这样就说明避开身邪行等恶行,而以身体平等行等善行来生活。武器买卖是指制造武器货品,或让人制造,或取得已制成的武器后加以贩卖。众生买卖是指贩卖人口。肉买卖是指像屠夫等人那样,饲养鹿、猪等动物,做成肉之后再贩卖。酒买卖是指调配任何酒类之后加以贩卖。毒买卖是指调配毒物,或取得毒物之后加以贩卖。其中,武器买卖因为以伤害他人为因,所以说不应做;众生买卖因为它使众生失去自由;肉买卖和毒买卖因为它们是杀生的因缘;酒买卖因为它是放逸的根源。巴利
Micchāvaṇijjāti na sammāvaṇijjā ayuttavaṇijjā asāruppavaṇijjā. Pahāyāti akaraṇeneva pajahitvā. Dhammenāti dhammato anapetena. Tena aññampi adhammikaṃ jīvikaṃ paṭikkhipati. Samenāti avisamena. Tena kāyavisamādiduccaritaṃ vajjetvā kāyasamādinā sucaritena jīvanaṃ dasseti. Satthavaṇijjāti āvudhabhaṇḍaṃ katvā vā kāretvā vā yathākataṃ vā paṭilabhitvā tassa vikkayo. Satthavaṇijjāti manussavikkayo . Maṃsavaṇijjāti sūnakārādayo viya migasūkarādike posetvā maṃsaṃ sampādetvā vikkayo. Majjavaṇijjāti yaṃ kiñci majjaṃ yojetvā tassa vikkayo. Visavaṇijjāti visaṃ yojetvā, visaṃ gahetvā vā tassa vikkayo. Tattha satthavaṇijjā paroparodhanimittatāya akaraṇīyā vuttā, sattavaṇijjā abhujissabhāvakaraṇato, maṃsavisavaṇijjā vadhahetuto, majjavaṇijjā pamādaṭṭhānato.
“正是此”是指具有五远离相的戒,以及具有五邪命相的活命方式。“坏失”是指破坏和败坏。“以何种”是指以哪种修行方式。“贱民”是指近事男中的贱民。“垢秽”是指近事男的垢秽。“卑劣”是指近事男中的下劣者。对佛陀等以及业与业果的信受,其颠倒就是不信和邪胜解。具足上面所说的不信,就是无信者。由于上面所说的戒坏失和活命坏失,就是坏戒者。“凭这所见闻觉知的东西,就能有某种吉祥吧”——像这样,具足愚人凭空构想出来、名为怪异的所见所闻所觉之祥瑞,就是计怪异为祥瑞者。“信祥瑞”是指专门信受所见祥瑞等类别的祥瑞。“不信业”是指不信受业的自性。“从此之外”是指从这遍知佛陀的教法之外,也就是在其他外道的教法中。“寻求应供者”是指把修行恶劣的人误认为值得供养的人而去寻找。“先于彼处作”是指先在那些外道那里做布施、恭敬等善行。在这里,应把“寻求应供者”和“先于彼处作”合为一组,加上前面的四项,一共应当知道是五种法。巴利
Tassevāti pañcaveramaṇilakkhaṇassa sīlassa ceva pañcamicchāvaṇijjālakkhaṇassa ājīvassa ca. Vipattīti bhedo pakopo ca. Yāyāti yāya paṭipattiyā. Caṇḍāloti upāsakacaṇḍālo. Malanti upāsakamalaṃ. Patikiṭṭhoti upāsakanihīno. Buddhādīsu kammakammaphalesu ca saddhāvipariyāyo assaddhiyaṃ micchādhimokkho. Yathāvuttena assaddhiyena samannāgato assaddho. Yathāvutta sīlavipatti ājīvavipattivasena dussīlo. ‘‘Iminā diṭṭhādinā idaṃ nāma maṅgalaṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ bālajanaparikappitakotūhalasaṅkhātena diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalena samannāgato kotūhalamaṅgaliko. Maṅgalaṃ paccetīti diṭṭhamaṅgalādibhedaṃ maṅgalameva pattiyāyati. No kammanti kammassakataṃ no pattiyāyati. Ito bahiddhāti ito sabbaññubuddhasāsanato bahiddhā bāhirakasamaye. Dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesatīti duppaṭipannaṃ dakkhiṇārahasaññī gavesati. Pubbakāraṃ karotīti dānamānanādikaṃ kusalakiriyaṃ paṭhamaṃ karoti. Ettha ca dakkhiṇeyyapariyesanapubbakāre ekaṃ katvā pañca dhammā veditabbā.
对于坏失,应该按相反的方式来理解成就。不过这里有个区别:因为能让四众弟子都心生欢喜,所以近事男本身就是宝,叫近事男宝。因为具足功德的辉耀、美好的名声和戒香的芬芳,所以近事男本身就是莲花,叫近事男莲花。同样地,近事男本身就是白莲花,叫近事男白莲花。巴利
Vipattiyaṃ vuttavipariyāyena sampatti ñātabbā. Ayaṃ pana viseso – catunnampi parisānaṃ ratijananaṭṭhena upāsakova ratanaṃ upāsakaratanaṃ. Guṇasobhākittisaddasugandhatāhi upāsakova padumaṃ upāsakapadumaṃ. Tathā upāsakapuṇḍarīko.
“在开头”指的是最初的意思。“在末端”指的是最终边际。“以精舍的部分”指的是以房间、隔间为部分,意思是:“住在这些房间里的人,能得到这种叫做某某果的果实”等等,也就是以各自居住的场所部分来区分。“在今天”就是“在今天”的意思。巴利
Ādimhīti ādiatthe. Koṭiyanti pariyantakoṭiyaṃ. Vihāraggenāti ovarakakoṭṭhāsena, ‘‘imasmiṃ gabbhe vasantānaṃ idaṃ nāma panasaphalaṃ pāpuṇātī’’tiādinā taṃtaṃvasanaṭṭhānakoṭṭhāsenāti attho. Ajjatanti ajjaicceva attho.
“以生命皈依”这句话,是在说明这种皈依是尽形寿的。说了“只要我的生命还在延续”等话之后,又用生命来恭敬这三项皈依对象,为了阐明那位婆罗门心中生起的“我护持皈依”的意图,接着说了“确实我”等话。所谓“以生命皈依”,意思是:只要我的生命还在维持,我就已经皈依了;而且皈依并不是只靠嘴上说说,也不是只生起一次心念就算数,而是即使舍弃生命,也要尽此一生都皈依。这里应当这样理解。巴利
Pāṇehiupetanti iminā tassa saraṇagamanassa āpāṇakoṭikataṃ dassento ‘‘yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattatī’’tiādinā vatvā puna jīvitena taṃ vatthuttayaṃ paṭipūjento ‘‘saraṇagamanaṃ rakkhāmī’’ti uppannaṃ tassa brāhmaṇassa adhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘ahañhī’’tiādimāha. Pāṇehi upetanti hi yāva me pāṇā dharanti, tāva saraṇaṃ upetaṃ, upento ca na vācāmattena, na ekavāraṃ cittuppādanamattena, atha kho pāṇe pariccajitvāpi yāvajīvaṃ upetanti evamettha attho veditabboti.
5. 《无垢经》的注释巴利
5. Anaṅgaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
57 57. 在“具寿舍利弗”这句话里,“iti”(如是)这个词表示开端,意思是“像这样开头的”。它统摄了从“世尊对比丘们说”开始的所有经文,因此称为《无垢经》。这部经是以什么为发起的因由呢?是舍利弗自己的意愿。因为这位大长老并没有受人请求,就自己开始了这次开示。不过也有人这样说:“是因为看到一些比丘内心有染污,为了断除他们内心的染污,也为了让另一些人在将来不再生起这种染污,才开始了这次开示。”所谓“如此于一切经中”,意思是:就像在这部《无垢经》里一样,在接下来的所有经中,也只对那些不显眼、之前没有出现过、含义不明的词作注释。因此才说“所以”等语。所谓“以数目限定”,就是用数目来界定。这里先按少尘垢和大尘垢两种根性,把众生分为两类,再在每一类中按通达义理和不通达义理各分为两种,这样“四种”就完全涵盖了,没有遗漏。不应该像犊子部那些人那样,把它理解为有“人我”的说法,因为这是随顺世间的共同认知、针对能够通达义理的人而开始的开示;为了显示这种开示方式确实是依止世尊的,所以说了“这部经确实……”等语。巴利
57.Āyasmāsāriputtoti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, evamādikanti attho. Tena ‘‘bhikkhū āmantesī’’tiādikaṃ sabbaṃ suttaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tenāha ‘‘anaṅgaṇasutta’’nti. Tassa ko nikkhepo? Attajjhāsayo. Parehi anajjhiṭṭhoyeva hi mahāthero imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Keci panāhu ‘‘ekacce bhikkhū saṃkiliṭṭhacitte disvā tesaṃ cittasaṃkilesappahānāya ceva ekaccānaṃ āyatiṃ anuppādanāya ca ayaṃ desanā āraddhā’’ti. Evaṃ sabbasuttesūti yathā ettha anaṅgaṇasutte, evaṃ ito paresūti sabbesupi suttesu anuttānaapubbapadavaṇṇanā eva karīyati. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Gaṇanaparicchedoti gaṇanena paricchindanaṃ. Idañhi apparajakkhamahārajakkhatāvasena duvidhe satte paccekaṃ atthaññutānatthaññutāvasena dvidhā katvā ‘‘cattāro’’ti anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Vajjīputtakādayo viya puggalavādīti na gahetabbaṃ lokasamaññānusārena atthaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ samatthānaṃ vasena desanāya āraddhattā, ayañca desanānayo satthu nissāya evāti dassento ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādimāha.
关于世俗与究竟两种教说的注释。巴利
Sammutiparamatthadesanākathāvaṇṇanā
在这里,依世俗的教说就是世俗教说,依究竟义的教说就是究竟义教说。这里说的“在此”,是指在世俗教说和究竟义教说之中,而不是在世俗和究竟义本身之中。因此说:“这样的就是世俗教说,这样的就是究竟义教说。”这里,世俗和究竟义的特征是这样的:当某物被拆开,或者在心中被分析成各个部分之后,它原来的名称就不再适用了,像瓶、布等这些可以被分解的东西,就是世俗;与这种情况相反的,就是究竟义。因为在坚硬、触等自性法中,这个道理是找不到的。在那里,依着色法等诸法以聚集和相续的方式生起,在此基础上施设“人”等称呼,所以说“补特伽罗是世俗教说”。其余的词句也是同样的道理。具有生灭的自性法不是恒常的,所以说“无常是究竟义教说”。这个道理在其余的词句中也一样适用。难道蕴的教说不也是世俗教说吗?因为蕴的意思是积聚,或者部分的意思?确实如此。不过,蕴这个名称就像依触等法而产生的同类施设一样,是以究竟义为依托的,比补特伽罗等名称更接近究竟义,不像补特伽罗等名称那样疏远,因此说它被包含在究竟义中;或者说,以蕴为首,它所包含的自性法本身就被取用了。难道不是一切自性法都是通过世俗言说的门径才进入教说的,而不是直接进入的吗?这样一来,一切教说岂不都成了世俗教说?并非如此。因为教说的区分是根据所应教导之法的区分来设定的;而且,语言如果没有某种生起的因缘,是无法阐明意义的。巴利
Tattha (a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.170) sammutiyā desanā sammutidesanā, paramatthassa desanā paramatthadesanā. Tatthāti sammutiparamatthadesanāsu, na sammutiparamatthesu. Tenāha ‘‘evarūpā sammutidesanā, evarūpā paramatthadesanā’’ti. Tatridaṃ sammutiparamatthānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ – yasmiṃ bhinne, buddhiyā avayavavinibbhoge vā kate na taṃsamaññā, sā ghaṭapaṭādippabhedā sammuti, tabbipariyāyato paramattho. Na hi kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāve ayaṃ nayo labbhati, tattha rūpādidhammaṃ samūhasantānavasena pavattamānaṃ upādāya puggalavohāroti āha ‘‘puggaloti sammutidesanā’’ti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Uppādavayavanto sabhāvadhammā na niccāti āha ‘‘aniccanti paramatthadesanā’’ti. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Nanu khandhadesanāpi sammutidesanāva. Khandhaṭṭho hi rāsaṭṭho, koṭṭhāsaṭṭho vāti? Saccametaṃ, ayaṃ pana khandhasamaññā phassādīsu tajjāpaññatti viya paramatthasannissayā tassa āsannatarā, puggalasamaññādayo viya na dūreti paramatthasaṅgahatā vuttā, khandhasīsena vā tadupādānā sabhāvadhammā eva gahitā. Nanu ca sabhāvadhammā sabbepi sammutimukheneva desanaṃ ārohanti, na samukhenāti sabbāpi desanā sammutidesanāva siyāti? Nayidamevaṃ desetabbadhammavibhāgena desanāvibhāgassa adhippetattā, na ca saddo kenaci pavattinimittena vinā atthaṃ pakāsetīti.
听了依世俗言说方式所说的教法之后,意思是:像“在这里,有一种人自我折磨,热衷于自我折磨的实践”这样,通过世俗言说的门径所宣说的教法,以生起闻所成智的方式听闻之后。通达了义理之后,意思是:随顺那教法,连同观照一起,以道通达了称为四圣谛的义理之后。断除了愚痴之后,意思是:连同与它同住的烦恼一起,毫无剩余地断除了愚痴之后。殊胜,指的是称为涅槃的殊胜和称为阿拉汉果的殊胜。对他们,指的是对那样可受教化的众生。依究竟义而言,意思是:像“诸比丘,有五根”这样,依究竟法的层面。其余部分与紧接着的前文所说相同。在那里,意思是在那依世俗言说方式和依究竟方式所说的教法中。通达地方语言者,意思是善于种种地方语言。三吠陀,仅是举例,意思是也包括三吠陀和技艺典籍;因为下面将会说到学习技艺。或者,把技艺包括在吠陀之内,而说“三吠陀”。它们以应当讲述的状态而住,并非以在任何地方收藏的状态而住;为了说明吠陀也仅以应当讲述的状态而住,驳斥“密藏三吠陀被取来”的邪说。种种不同地方语言为这些人所有,因此是种种地方语言者。巴利
Sammutivasena desanaṃ sutvāti ‘‘idhekacco puggalo attantapo hoti attaparitāpānuyogamanuyutto’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.413; pu. pa. 10.25 mātikā) sammutimukhena pavattitaṃ desanaṃ sutamayañāṇuppādanavasena sutvā. Atthaṃ paṭivijjhitvāti tadanusārena catusaccasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ saha vipassanāya maggena paṭivijjhitvā. Mohaṃ pahāyāti tadekaṭṭhehi kilesehi saddhiṃ anavasesaṃ mohaṃ pajahitvā. Visesanti nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ arahattasaṅkhātañca visesaṃ. Tesanti tādisānaṃ vineyyānaṃ. Paramatthavasenāti ‘‘pañcimāni, bhikkhave, indriyānī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 5.472-474) paramatthadhammavasena. Sesaṃ anantaranaye vuttasadisameva. Tatthāti tassaṃ sammutivasena paramatthavasena ca desanāyaṃ. Desabhāsākusaloti nānādesabhāsāsu kusalo. Tiṇṇaṃ vedānanti nidassanamattaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ sippaganthānampīti adhippāyo sippuggahaṇañhi parato vakkhati. Sippāni vā vedantogadhe katvā ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ vedāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Kathetabbabhāvena ṭhitāni, na katthaci sannihitabhāvenāti vedānampi kathetabbabhāveneva avaṭṭhānaṃ dīpento ‘‘guyhā tayī nihitā gayhatī’’ti micchāvādaṃ paṭikkhipati. Nānāvidhā desabhāsā etesanti nānādesabhāsā.
最高、最上的义理就是究竟义,也就是诸法如实存在的自性。仅仅靠世间约定而成立的,就是世俗。如果是这样,那为什么世俗的说法也有真实性呢?回答说“以世间共称为因”,因为它是依靠世间的共同称呼而进行的。因为,不执著于世间共同称呼的告知,就像让人听到某种声音一样,这并不是虚妄,也不应该对这一点过度追究。所以世尊说:“不应该执著于地方方言,不应该过度追逐共同称呼。”(《中部》3.332)“诸法”即自性诸法;“以真实为因”,是因为依于如实自性而转起。“宣说世俗者”,就是说“补特伽罗”、“有情”等世间共称的人。巴利
Paramo uttamo attho paramattho, dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvo. Lokasaṅketamattasiddhā sammuti. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sammutikathāya saccatātiāha ‘‘lokasammutikāraṇā’’ti, lokasamaññaṃ nissāya pavattanato. Lokasamaññāya hi abhinivesena vinā ñāpanā ekaccassa sutassa sāvanā viya na musā anatidhāvitabbato tassā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘janapadaniruttiṃ nābhiniveseyya, samaññaṃ nātidhāveyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.332). Dhammānanti sabhāvadhammānaṃ. Bhūtakāraṇāti yathābhūtasabhāvaṃ nissāya pavattanato. Sammutiṃ voharantassāti ‘‘puggalo satto’’tiādinā lokasamaññaṃ kathentassa.
为了说明惭与愧:这是为了从作用上阐明作为世间守护者的惭与愧这两种法。因为惭与愧的作用,只有在有情的相续中才明显,所以应当用依人安立的方式来讲述。这个道理对其他的法也同样适用。因为业在哪一个心生起时生起,它的果就在那个相续中生起,这就是业的自性。这样一来,“已造的业不会消失,未造的业不会遇到”这个道理,也只有用依人安立的方式才能说明。有情应当做的布施等善行,以及各人自己的精进,也都是依于相续而得以成就的,所以只有用依人安立的方式才能说明。巴利
Hirottappadīpanatthanti lokapālanakicce hirottappadhamme kiccato pakāsetuṃ. Tesañhi kiccaṃ sattasantāneyeva pākaṭaṃ hotīti puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya taṃ vattabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Yasmiñhi cittuppāde kammaṃ uppannaṃ, taṃsantāne eva tassa phalassa uppatti kammassakatā. Evañhi kataviññāṇanāso akatāgamo vā natthīti sā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya eva kathāya dīpetabbā. Tehi sattehi kātabbā puññādikiriyā paccattapurisakāropi santānavasena nipphādetabbato puggalādhiṭṭhānāya eva kathāya dīpetabbo.
为了说明“无间业”这个词的意思:死后紧接着生起的果报,就叫“无间”;致力于这个无间果报的,因为能引生它而具有造作无间果报的性质,或者以无间果报为目的,所以叫“无间业”,比如杀母之类的行为。这些业也要依照心相续才能完成,所以必须通过像“他夺走了母亲的生命”这样以人为立足点的说法来说明。同样,像“他以与慈相应的心遍满一方而住”这类话,以及“他回忆起种种过去生,一生、二生……”这类话,“有布施从施者方面清净,不从受者方面清净”这类话,所说的梵住、宿命通、布施清净等内容,也都要通过以人为立足点的说法来说明,因为它们都是以有情的相续为对象。而“八种人”、“非时解脱的人”这类说法,即使是在讲胜义,也是为了不舍弃世间共许的说法,才讲了以人为立足点的言论。应当知道,由此已经以概括的方式涵盖了其余说法中以人为立足点的目的。虽然这一切都是就尚未遍知所缘的人而说的,但对已经遍知所缘的人来说,这样的说法也能带来安乐。巴利
Ānantariyadīpanatthanti cutianantaraṃ phalaṃ anantaraṃ nāma, tasmiṃ anantare niyuttāni, tannibbattanena anantarakaraṇasīlāni, anantarapayojanāni vāti ānantariyāni, mātughātādīni, tesaṃ dīpanatthaṃ. Tānipi hi santānavasena nipphādetabbato ‘‘mātaraṃ jīvitā voropetī’’tiādinā (paṭṭhā. 1.1.423) puggalādhiṭṭhānāya eva kathāya dīpetabbāni, tathā ‘‘so mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.556; 3.308; ma. ni. 1.77; 2.309; 3.230; vibha. 642, 643) ‘‘so anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati ekampi jāti’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 1.244, 245; ma. ni. 1.148, 384, 431; pārā. 12) ‘‘atthi dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati, no paṭiggāhakato’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.381) ca pavattā brahmavihārapubbenivāsadakkhiṇāvisuddhikathā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya eva kathāya dīpetabbā sattasantānavisayattā. ‘‘Aṭṭha purisapuggalā (saṃ. ni. 1.249), na samayavimutto puggalo’’tiādinā (pu. pa. 1) ca paramatthaṃ kathentopi lokasammutiyā appahānatthaṃ puggalakathaṃ kathesi. Etena vuttāvasesāya kathāya puggalādhiṭṭhānabhāve payojanaṃ sāmaññavasena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kāmañcetaṃ sabbaṃ apariññātavatthukānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, pariññātavatthukānampi pana evaṃ desanā sukhāvahā hoti.
“大众”指的是世间的普通人。他们因为无法拆解事物的密集组合,也觉察不到法的运作,所以不知道。在这种情况下,他们陷入“这是什么?这是怎么回事?”的疑惑,变得迷惑。因为固执于对立的见解,他们成了敌对者。但对于长期熟悉其含义的事物,他们通过惯用的言说而知道。正因为如此,他们不迷惑,也不成为敌对者。巴利
Mahājanoti lokiyamahājano. Na jānāti ghanavinibbhogābhāvena dhammakiccassa asallakkhaṇena. Tattha ‘‘kiṃ nāmetaṃ, kathaṃ nāmeta’’nti saṃsayapakkhandatāya sammohaṃ āpajjati. Viruddhābhinivesitāya paṭisattu hoti. Jānāti ciraparicitatthā vohārakathāya. Tato eva na sammohamāpajjati, na paṭisattu hoti.
他们不放弃,因为这是通过惯用表达的方式来说明胜义。以共许名称来把握的方式,被世间认知、共许、惯用,所以叫世间共许,依着这个世间共许。对于每一种意义的阐明,被世间确定或决定而说、而惯用的,就叫世间通称,依着这个世间通称。同样地,被世间所称呼的,就是世间言说,因为他们就安住在这个世间言说中而不放弃。不像补特伽罗论者那样,不按胜义来执取。巴利
Nappajahanti vohāramukhena paramatthassa dīpanato. Samaññāgahaṇavasena lokena ñāyati samaññāyati voharīyatīti lokasamaññā, tāya lokasamaññāya. Tassa tassa atthassa vibhāvane lokena nicchitaṃ, niyataṃ vā vuccati voharīyatīti lokanirutti, tassaṃ lokaniruttiyaṃ. Tathā lokena abhilapīyatīti lokasamaññatāya lokābhilāpo, tasmiṃ lokābhilāpe ṭhitāyeva appahānato. Puggalavādino viya paramatthavasena aggahetvā.
在这里,“寂静者”(santa)一词:在“长时疲劳的由旬”等(《法句经》70)中,是表示疲劳;在“此寻与此伺已寂静、已止息”等(《分别论》576)中,是表示已息灭;在“我已证得此法,甚深、难见、难觉、寂静、殊胜”等(《长部》2.67;《中部》1.281;2.337;《相应部》2.172;《大品》7)中,是因为它是寂静之智的行境;在“已寂静者常具念”等(《优陀那》27)中,是指烦恼的止息;在“善人确实与善人共相告知”等(《法句经》15)中,是指善人;在“诸比丘,有这五种大贼存在于世”等(《巴拉基格》195)中,是表示存在。这里也是表示存在。而因为它是就人而言所说,所以是依世间通行的说法,为了说明这一点,他说“依世间约定而存在”。“存在”(atthi)这个词应当看作小品词,就像“于此身中有头发”等(《长部》2.373-374;《中部》1.110;3.154;《增支部》6.29;10.60)中那样。为了说明“现存”(saṃvijjamānā)一词的含义,他说“可得”。凡是现存的,就是可得的。
“垢”(aṅga):因为具足这些法的人会因此走向低劣,所以这些法叫“垢”(aṅgaṇāni),也就是贪等。“涂抹、染污”(añjati)故为“垢”(aṅgaṇa),即污垢等。“显现”(añjeti)——它使住于其中的人因不清净而显露出来,所以叫“垢”(aṅgaṇa),即空旷的地面。由于嗔等生起的行相有差别,所以有种种不同;由于反复生起,所以是粗重的烦恼。“诸恶”即卑劣的。“诸不善”即从不善巧所生的。“诸贪欲行境”即依贪欲而生起的。与垢俱(saha aṅgaṇena):即与如上所说、名为“垢”的烦恼一起存在。巴利
Santoti ettha santasaddo ‘‘dīghaṃ santassa yojana’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 70) kilantabhāve āgato, ‘‘ayañca vitakko ayañca vicāro santā honti samitā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 576) niruddhabhāve āgato, ‘‘adhigato kho myāyaṃ dhammo gambhīro duddaso duranubodho santo paṇīto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.67; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; saṃ. ni. 2.172; mahāva. 7) santañāṇagocaratāya, ‘‘upasantassa sadā satimato’’tiādīsu (udā. 27) kilesavūpasame, ‘‘santo have sabbhi pavedayantī’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 15) sādhūsu, ‘‘pañcime, bhikkhave, mahācorā santo saṃvijjamānā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 195) atthibhāve, idhāpi atthibhāveyeva. So ca puggalasambandhena vuttattā lokasamaññāvasenāti dassento ‘‘lokasaṅketavasena atthī’’ti āha. Atthīti cetaṃ nipātapadaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.373-374; ma. ni. 1.110; 3.154; a. ni. 6.29; 10.60) viya. Saṃvijjamānāti padassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘upalabbhamānā’’ti āha. Yañhi saṃvijjati, taṃ upalabbhatīti. Aṅganti etehi taṃsamaṅgipuggalā nihīnabhāvaṃ gacchantīti aṅgaṇāni, rāgādayo. Añjati makkhetīti aṅgaṇaṃ, malādi. Añjeti tattha ṭhitaṃ ahundaratāya abhibyañjetīti aṅgaṇaṃ, vivaṭo bhūmipadeso. Dosādīnaṃ pavattiākāravisesatāya nānappakārā bahulappavattiyā tibbakilesā. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Akusalānanti akosallasambhūtānaṃ. Icchāvacarānanti icchāvasena pavattānaṃ. Saha aṅgaṇenāti aṅgaṇanti laddhanāmena yathāvuttakilesena saha vattati.
连“存在”也不知道,因为缺少那样的如理作意。为了说明:对于那些烦恼的存在,应当特别了知它们具有可怖畏性,所以说了“这些名为烦恼”等话。其中,“粗犷”就是粗暴。“凶暴”就是残忍。“不应取着”就是不应令其生起。“依如实味”就是从如实本性而言。“如是以”就是按上文“这些名为烦恼”等方式所说。“以某种方式”指或在修建之事中,或在教理、头陀支等任何一种方式中。“于中”是表示简别的处格。为了表明这种简别是从有烦恼与无烦恼的总聚中作出的,先说了“于四补特伽罗中”,然后再显示其中的一部分,说“或于那两种有烦恼的补特伽罗中”。因为那两者先按劣与胜来简别,而且是最先列出的。简别本来也可以从某处、从某处、以某种方式而成立。巴利
Atthītipi na jānāti tādisassa yonisomanasikārassa abhāvā. Yesaṃ kilesānaṃ atthitā, tesaṃ sappaṭibhayatā visesato jānitabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ime kilesā nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kakkhaḷāti pharusā. Vāḷāti kururā. Na gahitabbāti na uppādetabbā. Yāthāvasarasatoti yathābhūtasabhāvato. Evañcāti ‘‘ime kilesā nāmā’’tiādinā vuttappakārena. Yena vā tena vāti navakammesu vā pariyattidhutaṅgādīsu vā yena vā tena vā. Tatrāti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Taṃ pana niddhāraṇaṃ saṅgaṇānaṅgaṇasamudāyatoti dassento ‘‘catūsu puggalesū’’ti vatvā puna tadekadesato dassento ‘‘tesu vā dvīsu sāṅgaṇesū’’ti āha. Tañhi dvayaṃ paṭhamaṃ hīnaseṭṭhabhāvena niddhārīyati paṭhamaṃ uddiṭṭhattā. Niddhāraṇañhi kvaci kutoci kenaci hotīti.
58 虽然在别处,因和缘是分开来讲的,比如“能生的是因,执持的是缘;不共的是因,共的是缘;同分的是因,异分的是缘;前时的是因,俱起的是缘”等等,但在这里,就像“诸比丘,四大种是因,四大种是缘,为了表达色蕴”等经文那样,是为了说明“因”和“缘”这两个词意思相同,所以才说“两者都只是在问原因”。这里说的“两者”,就是指“因”和“缘”这两种说法。大目犍连尊者是为了把开示展开得更充分才发问的。“虽然”这个词是表示允许和推测的语气词。允许什么呢?就是允许说:即使两人同样都有烦恼,但了知或不了知的原因,使他们有高下之分。推测什么呢?就是推测:依靠长老那丰富多彩的辩才,用种种原因和譬喻来庄严它,使所问的含义变得清楚明白。因此才说“不了知”等等。因和缘,就是在高下之分中被宣说的,这也是它们所指向的内容。巴利
58. Kiñcāpi aññattha ‘‘janako hetu, pariggāhato paccayo, asādhāraṇo hetu, sādhāraṇo paccayo, sabhāgo hetu, asabhāgo paccayo, pubbakāliko hetu, sahappavatto paccayo’’tiādinā hetupaccayā vibhajja vuccanti, idha pana ‘‘cattāro kho, bhikkhave, mahābhūtā hetū, cattāro mahābhūtā paccayā rūpakkhandhassa paññāpanāyā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.85) viya hetupaccayasaddā samānatthāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ubhayenapi kāraṇamevapucchatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ubhayenāti hetupaccayavacanadvayena. Pucchati āyasmā mahāmoggallāno desanaṃ vaḍḍhetukāmo. Kiñcāpīti anujānanasambhāvanatthe nipāto. Kiṃ anujānāti? Samānepi dvinnaṃ sāṅgaṇabhāve tassā pajānanāppajānanahetukataṃ tesaṃ seṭṭhahīnataṃ. Kiṃ sambhāveti? Therassa vicittapaṭibhānatāya nānāhetūpamāhi alaṅkatvā yathāpucchitassa atthassa pākaṭakaraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nappajānātī’’tiādi. Hetu ceva paccayo ca seṭṭhahīnabhāve. Tathāakkhātabbatāpi hi tesaṃ tannimittā evāti.
59 “彼”是指那两种人之所以有劣有胜的原因。为了用譬喻把它说得更清楚明白。“此”是指在经中紧接着所说的、由于没有发起精进所以没有断除烦恼垢。因此说“不欲……就是指这个”。“欲作之欲”是指被称为“欲作”的、以想要断除烦恼垢而生起的善法欲。不会生起,就是不会产生。所谓善的精进,比欲更有力,所以说“不会做出比那更强的精进”,意思是:连欲都不生起,又怎么能做出与那相应的精进呢?“有力精进”是指已达到勇悍、坚固的精进。仅仅通过提到“有烦恼垢”,就说明烦恼垢是烦恼的根源、心已被染污;为了显示信再次被染污时具有特别的染污状态,所以说“更加杂染的心”。在“秽心”等处,应把“由他们”引来连接。就像擦锅的布、像吸了油的粗布一样,因为难以摆脱而沾上污垢,这就是秽性;压迫、伤害、使之不能舒展,就是逼迫;由于产生恼热而烧灼、热恼,就是焦热;“时”就是杀灭,意思是让已经执取的有身耗尽,也就是命尽。“将作”是指将会转起,将会达到,意思就是将会到。处于那种状态的人,就叫做舍弃生命,所以说“将会死”。巴利
59.Tanti tesaṃ dvinnaṃ puggalānaṃ hīnaseṭṭhatāya kāraṇaṃ. Opammehi pākaṭataraṃ katvā dassetuṃ. Etanti sutte anantaraṃ vuccamānaṃ vīriyārambhābhāvena aṅgaṇassa appahānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘na chandaṃ…pe… sandhāyāhā’’ti. Kattukamyatāchandhanti kattukamyatāsaṅkhātaṃ aṅgaṇassa pahātukamyatāvasena uppajjanakakusaladhammacchandaṃ. Na janessatīti na uppādessati. Kusalo vāyāmo nāma chandato balavāti āha ‘‘tato balavataraṃ vāyāmaṃ na karissatī’’ti, chandampi anuppādento kathaṃ tajjaṃ vāyāmaṃ karissatīti adhippāyo. Thāmagatavīriyaṃ ussoḷhībhāvappattaṃ daḷhaṃ vīriyaṃ. Sāṅgaṇaggahaṇeneva aṅgaṇānaṃ kilesavatthutāya cittassa saṃkiliṭṭhatāya saddhāya puna saṃkiliṭṭhaggahaṇaṃ savisesaṃ kiliṭṭhabhāvavibhāvananti āha ‘‘suṭṭhutaraṃ kiliṭṭhacitto’’ti. Malinacittotiādīsupi ‘‘tehiyevā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Ukkhalipucchanacoḷakassa viya vasāpītapilotikā viya ca dummocanīyabhāvena malaggahaṇaṃ malīnatā, pīḷanaṃ hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ vibādhanaṃ darathapariḷāhuppādanena paridahanaṃ upatāpanaṃ, kālanti kālanaṃ, yathāgahitassa attabhāvassa khepanaṃ āyukkhayanti attho. Karissatīti pavattessati, pāpuṇissatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathābhūto ca pāṇaṃ cajissati nāmāti āha ‘‘marissatī’’ti.
“犹如”这个词,是用在显示譬喻的地方。为了说明它的意思,就说“正如名称所示”。在“尘土等”中,“等”这个字包含了尘土等;“摩擦等”中,“等”这个字包含了用灰擦拭等。就像“应嫁给美貌女子”这类说法,虽然没有直接用比较词,但通过表示殊胜意义的词,就能知道殊胜之义,所以说“就是更加执垢”。这是许可式反问的一种特殊说法。“被如此处置”,是指因为不让受用、不让清洁、被丢在尘土路上,而变得染污的状态。“令譬喻相合”,是指把所举的譬喻与譬喻所表之义等同起来而加以说明,也就是相合的意思。“有烦恼的补特伽罗”,是指在那个生命中不能清净的有烦恼的补特伽罗。譬如从市场等处拿到家中的、执垢的铜器,因为在那个家中得不到所能得到的清净,所以逐渐变得更加染污;同样,从家出家的人,因为得不到由出家所能得到的清净,所以逐渐变得更加染污。为了说明这一点,就说“染污的铜器”等。而所谓变得更加染污,对出家者来说,或者由于邪命失败,或者由于行为、见解、戒律失败中的某一种。为了把这一切都统摄起来说明,就说“那个补特伽罗”等。因为举出犯波罗提帝萨尼,也就统摄了某些见解失败。这里“站在这上面的”,是指站在这种邪命失败上的。以这种方法,在其余各项中也应随宜说明。这是大众共通的、大长老的说法,因此也应当以在家人的方式加以配合。其中,为了说明达到极点的更加染污,就说“杀母等无间业”。未清净,是指没有像自己的戒或见解那样清净,没有清净烦恼垢秽的心相续。巴利
Seyyathāpīti upamānidassane nipāto. Tadatthaṃ dassento ‘‘yathā nāmā’’ti āha. Paṃsuādināti ādi-saddena jallādīnaṃ saṅgaho, ghaṃsanādīhīti ādi-saddena chārikāparimajjanādīnaṃ saṅgahoti. ‘‘Abhirūpāya kaññā dātabbā’’tiādīsu viya antarenapi atisayatthabodhakasaddena atisayattho ñāyatīti āha ‘‘malaggahitatarāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Paṭipucchāvacananti anumatipucchāviseso. Evaṃkariyamānāti aparibhoga-apariyodapanarajopathanikkhipanehi kiliṭṭhabhāvaṃ āpādiyamānā. Opammaṃ sampaṭipādentoti yathūpanītaṃ upamaṃ upameyyatthena samaṃ katvā paṭipādento, saṃsandentoti attho. Sāṅgaṇo puggaloti sāṅgaṇo tasmiṃ attabhāve asujjhanakapuggalo. Āpaṇādito kulagharaṃ ānītassa malaggahitakaṃsabhājanassa tattha laddhabbāya visuddhiyā alābhato yathā anukkamena saṃkiliṭṭhatarabhāvo, evaṃ gharato nikkhantassa puggalassa pabbajjāya laddhabbāya visuddhiyā alābhato anukkamena saṃkiliṭṭhatarabhāvoti dassento ‘‘saṃkiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā’’tiādimāha. Saṃkiliṭṭhatarabhāvo ca nāma pabbajitassa ājīvavipattivasena vā siyā ācāradiṭṭhisīlavipattīsu aññataravasena vāti taṃ sabbaṃ saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tassa puggalassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pācittiyavītikkamanaggahaṇena hi ekaccadiṭṭhivipattiyāpi saṅgaho hotīti. Ettha ṭhitassāti etissaṃ ājīvavipattiyaṃ ṭhitassa. Iminā nayena sesesupi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Sabbaparisasādhāraṇā mahātherassa desanā, tasmā gahapativasenapi yojetabbaṃ. Tattha ukkaṃsagatasaṃkiliṭṭhatarabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘mātughātādiānantariyakaraṇa’’nti āha. Avisodhetvāti yathā attano sīle vā diṭṭhiyā vā visuddhi hoti, evaṃ kilesamalinacittasantānaṃ avisodhetvā.
堪能者:因为具备了亲近依止等条件的圆满,在那一生中就是清净的人。从……开始:这是说以洗涤、摩擦等净化方式作为开端。清净的地方:也就是那里不会被灰尘撒落。作了处罚:就是作出“要取这么多水或沙子来”的处罚。站在这上面的人:就是站在完全清净的戒上的人。通过正行和正持这两种戒,显示了戒清净。因为正行和正持也能压制内心的污垢。同样地,这里用譬喻的方式说明了污秽铜盆变得清净洁白的状态。住在偏僻的坐卧处,是对烦恼的压制,是对烦恼的暂时阻断。证得入流果……中间省略……证悟阿拉汉果,在这七个地方,都应该把“犹如清净洁白的状态”这句话引过来连接。对出家人来说,所谓清净,最低限度可以是通过戒清净,或者通过修业处,或者通过独住远离,或者通过证得禅那,或者通过修观,或者通过证得沙门果。巴利
Bhabbapuggaloti upanissayādisampattiyā tasmiṃ attabhāve visuddhapuggalo. Ādiṃ katvāti iminā dhovanaghaṃsanādīhi pariyodapanaṃ ādimantaṃ katvā vadati. Suddhaṭṭhānaṃ yattha vā na rajena okirīyati. Daṇḍakammaṃ katvāti ‘‘ettakā udakā, vālukā vā ānetabbā’’ti daṇḍakammaṃ katvā. Ettha ṭhitassāti parisuddhe sīle ṭhitassa. Sammāvattapaṭipattisīlehi sīlavisuddhi dassitā. Vattapaṭipattiyāpi hi aṅgaṇānaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ siyā. Tathā hissā saṃkiliṭṭhakaṃsapātiyā parisuddhapariyodātabhāvo upamābhāvena vutto. Pantasenāsanavāso kilesavikkhambhanaṃ kilesānaṃ tadaṅganivāraṇaṃ. Sotāpattiphalādhigamo…pe… arahattasacchikiriyāti sattasupi ṭhānesu ‘‘parisuddhapariyodātabhāvo viyā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Pabbajitassa hi visuddhi nāma heṭṭhimantena sīlavisuddhiyā vā siyā kammaṭṭhānānuyogavasena vivekavāsena jhānassādhigamena vā vipassanābhāvanāya vā sāmaññaphalādhigamena vāti.
“贪的立足处”是指成为贪生起之因的。这是针对不相合的所缘而说“可爱所缘”。“于此”就是在可爱所缘上。“念已败坏”就是失念。“那个相”就是净美相。“将会作意”就是将会不如理作意。这是它自己单独生起的,不与其他法混杂。这里应当把善法被中断理解为不破坏。“其余”是指“有垢、有染污心”等。“依照所说的方式”就是依照第一处所说的方式。“一切”包括杀母等无间业最终完成在内的一切,这是譬喻对应的话。巴利
Rāgaṭṭhāniyanti rāguppattihetubhūtaṃ. Visabhāgārammaṇaṃ sandhāya vadati ‘‘iṭṭhārammaṇa’’nti. Tasminti iṭṭhārammaṇe. Vipannassatīti muṭṭhassati. Taṃ nimittanti subhanimittaṃ. Āvajjissatīti ayoniso āvajjissati. Sayameva aññena avomisso. Kusalavārapacchindanameva cettha anuddhaṃsanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sesanti ‘‘sāṅgaṇo saṃkiliṭṭhacitto’’tiādi. Vuttanayānusārenāti paṭhamavāre vuttanayānusārena. Sabbanti mātughātādiānantariyakaraṇapariyosānaṃ sabbaṃ upamāsaṃsandanavacanaṃ.
“由于不存在完全远离的状态”,意思是由于没有忘失正念,也就是正念现前的状态。“其余”是指“彼无贪”等。依照第二段的说法,即通过洗涤、摩擦、细灰、擦拭等来说明。“谁能”等是以提问的方式出现的,而这里是作为总结的方式,这就是唯一的区别。巴利
Ativirahābhāvatoti satisammosābhāvato, upaṭṭhitassati bhāvatoti attho. Sesanti ‘‘so arāgo’’tiādi. ‘‘Dhovanaghaṃsanasaṇhachārikāparimajjanādīhī’’tiādinā dutiyavārānusārena. ‘‘Ko nu kho’’tiādi pucchāvasena āgataṃ, idaṃ nigamanavasenāti ayameva viseso.
60 “垢秽”这个说法,在各处只是从名称上加以说明,并没有从自性或分类上加以阐明,所以为了从自性等方面加以说明,才说“为了使它从种种行相上明显起来”。“顺欲而行者”,就是依着欲而活动的人。“渗入者”,就是渗入心相续的人。它们因为依缘而生起,所以称为“已转起”,因此说“已转起者”。“种种”,是因为所缘的差别和生起方式的差别而成为种种。“以什么原因”——并不只是贪求利养而已,还应当把有福德、受恭敬、受尊重也作为这里的原因,为了显示这一点,所以说了“本性亦”等话。这是为了说明,即使贪求利养的人,也不是随便谁都会这样生起心,而是有福德、值得尊重的人才会。上座们因为害怕覆藏过失,便向中辈比丘告知;同样,中辈向新学比丘告知;新学比丘则因为自己新学,向侍者等人告知:“请看你们上座的所作所为。”所谓的侍者等人,又向比丘尼们告知:“你们是为了求教诫才来到这样的人身边的。”而“且诸比丘莫知”应当理解为:但愿诸比丘不知道我,啊,但愿诸比丘不知道我。“然而确有这种情况”——这里的“确”字表示强调,“然而”是说话时的修饰,因此说“确实有”。“先前”按照讲说欲生起部分时所说的方式理解。这里的“如此”一词表示接近的原因,为了说明这一点,所以说“以这个原因”。这里只是就嗔与恼怒而说的。“那样的”,意思是以嗔与恼怒为主的人。巴利
60.Aṅgaṇanti tattha tattha nāmato eva vibhāvitaṃ, na pana sabhāvato, pabhedato vāti sabhāvādito vibhāvanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘nānappakārato pākaṭaṃ kārāpetukāmenā’’ti. Icchāya avacarānanti icchāvasena avacaraṇānaṃ. Otiṇṇānanti cittasantānaṃ anupaviṭṭhānaṃ. Te pana tattha paccayavasena nibbattattā pavattā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘pavattāna’’nti. Nānappakārānanti visayabhedena pavattiākārabhedena ca nānāvidhānaṃ. Yenakāraṇena. Na kevalaṃ lābhatthikatā eva, atha kho puññavantatā sakkatagarukatā ca ettha kāraṇabhāvena gahetabbāti dassento ‘‘pakatiyāpi cā’’tiādimāha. Tena lābhatthikopi na yo koci evaṃ cittaṃ uppādeti puññavā sambhāvanīyoti dasseti. Therā avajjapaṭicchādanabhayena majjhimānaṃ ārocenti, tathā majjhimā navakānaṃ, navakā pana attano navakabhāvena vighāsādādīnaṃ ārocenti ‘‘passatha tumhākaṃ therassa kamma’’nti. Vighāsādādayo nāma ‘‘īdisassa santike ovādatthaṃ tumhe āgatā’’ti bhikkhunīnaṃ ārocenti. Na ca maṃ bhikkhū jāneyyunti na ca vata maṃ bhikkhū jāneyyuṃ, aho vata maṃ bhikkhū na jāneyyunti yojanā. Ṭhānaṃ kho panetanti ettha kho-saddo avadhāraṇattho, pana-saddo vacanālaṅkāroti āha ‘‘atthiyevā’’ti. Pubbe icchuppādavāravaṇṇanāya vuttanayena. Iti-saddo idha āsannakāraṇatthoti taṃ dassento ‘‘iminā kāraṇenā’’ti āha . Idañca kopaappaccayānameva gahaṇaṃ. Tādisānanti kopaappaccayādhibhūtānanti adhippāyo.
Anuraha的意思是“在合适的僻静处”。为了说明这个意思,才说了“在寺院边”等话。与前面相似,就是说,和前面用“想求利养的人确实……”等所说的连接方式一样。巴利
Anurahoti anurūpe rahasi. Evameva hi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vihārapaccante’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Purimasadisamevāti ‘‘lābhatthiko hī’’tiādinā vuttena purimena yojanānayena sadisameva.
被举罪时存在相对之人,而举罪又涉及犯戒,所以被举罪者和举罪者处于同等地位,因为他已犯戒,因此说“同等”就是指“他是有犯戒的人”。为了说明他正是因为有了相对之人,才想要被举罪,所以说了“他……”等话。他并不是只因为犯戒才希望同等,而是也希望在其他方面同等,为了表明这一点,又说了“而且……”等话。或者,由另一位相对之人而成为有相对之人。因为他这样想:“必须有一个相对之人来举罪我,这样我就能和那些相对之人同心同欲,从而有机会对他说些什么或做些什么。”但在这一种情况下,“无相对之人”应当理解为:对这个人来说,不存在相对之人,所以叫无相对之人。巴利
Codanāya paṭipuggalabhāvo, codanā ca āpattiyāti cuditakena codakassa samānabhāvo āpattiāpannatāyāti āha ‘‘samānoti sāpattiko’’ti. Sappaṭipuggalenevassa codanicchāya kāraṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘aya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Na cāyaṃ sāpattikatāya eva samānataṃ icchati, atha kho aññathāpīti dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Aññena vā paṭipuggalena sappaṭipuggalo. Ayañhi ‘‘sappaṭipuggalova maṃ codeyyā’’ti icchati ‘‘evāhaṃ tassa paṭipuggalehi saddhiṃ ekajjhāsayo hutvā tassa upari kiñci vattuṃ kātuṃ vā labhissāmī’’ti maññamāno. Imasmiṃ pana pakkhe no appaṭipuggaloti natthi etassa paṭipuggaloti appaṭipuggaloti evamattho veditabbo.
“啊,但愿”这个词出现了,这就是前后关联所在。因为这个人安住在随心所欲的状态里,又因为“愿他给比丘们说法”这句话,所以说“而那是在征求同意的情况下”。他并不希望世尊用“比丘,听说你确实……”这类方式,针对任何违犯来提问自己。他也不想让世尊把道、果或观当作中间环节来反问自己。也就是说,他不愿世尊以修习道、证得果、修习已达顶峰的观、入灭尽定或入禅那定作为中间的理由,来反问自己。他只希望世尊以“常、无常”等征得同意的方式来提问,也就是希望世尊直截了当地问。应理解为“看见正在取用(供养)的人”。由于他成了不应共住的比丘,他们便会把他从教法中驱逐出去。巴利
‘‘Aho vatā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ dissatīti sambandho, imassa puggalassa icchācāre ṭhitattā bhikkhūnaṃ dhammaṃ deseyyāti vacanato ‘‘tañca kho anumatipucchāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hesa ‘‘saccaṃ kira tvaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādinā kiñci vītikkamaṃ uddissa bhagavatā pucchitabbataṃ icchati. No maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā antaraṃ katvāti maggabhāvanaṃ vā phalasacchikiriyaṃ vā sikhāppattavipassanānuyogaṃ vā nirodhasamāpajjanaṃ vā jhānasamāpajjanameva vā antaraṃ kāraṇaṃ katvā bhagavatā attānaṃ paṭipucchitabbaṃ no icchati. Niccaṃ aniccantiādinā anumatiggahaṇavasena pucchitabbaṃ icchati, uttānameva katvā pucchitabbaṃ icchatīti attho. Upaharante passatīti sambandho. Abhabbaṭṭhānabhikkhutāya niharissanti sāsanato.
那种成就是指眷属方面的成就,以及比丘们给予的恭敬和尊重方面的成就。当我在分配时,他们就拿去享用。她亲自出现的意思是,她自己走到比丘们面前,把自己展示出来;而对于住在她前面的比丘,她则让他走在前面,自己跟在他后面走——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Taṃ sampattinti parivārasampattiñceva bhikkhūhi kariyamānaṃ sakkāragarukārasampattiñca. Gahetvā paribhuñjanti mayā saṃvibhāge kariyamāne. Sayameva paññāyatīti sayameva gantvā bhikkhūnaṃ purato attānaṃ dasseti, purato vasantaṃ pana bhikkhu purakkhatvā gacchantiyevāti adhippāyo.
供养水是指从前方递上来的供养水。因为这里有“唯”这个字,所以限定为只在此处、不在别处。或者,把“唯”字理解为表示决定,那么“唯我应得”就是“我应得”,应当这样理解这个决定——他正是怀着这个意思说:“‘唯我应得’这种欲求并非很大的过失”。否则,如果按照字面意思来理解这个决定,就会变成“别人不应得”。这里的意思就是如此。成为令人欢喜的,这是为了说明他希求最上座等的原因。巴利
Dakkhiṇodakanti aggato upanīyamānaṃ dakkhiṇodakaṃ. Yato eva-kāro, tato aññattha niyamo icchito. Avadhāraṇatthaṃ vā eva-kāraggahaṇanti katvā ahameva labheyyanti ahaṃ labheyyamevāti evametaṃ avadhāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbanti adhippāyenāha ‘‘ahameva labheyyanti icchā nātimahāsāvajjā’’ti, aññathā yathārutavasena avadhāraṇe gayhamāne ‘‘na aññe labheyyu’’nti ayamevettha attho siyāti. Pāsādiko hotīti idaṃ tassa aggāsanādipaccāsīsanāya kāraṇadassanaṃ.
“随喜”是指在吉利和不吉利的场合中,以随喜的方式应当宣说的法谈。“分随喜”是指随喜的一部分。没有说“请先前已经随喜过的人随喜”,而只是长老这样说了之后就直接(随喜)的情况。巴利
Anumodananti maṅgalāmaṅgalesu anumodanāvasena pavattetabbadhammakathaṃ. Khaṇḍānumodananti anumodanekadesaṃ. ‘‘Pubbe anumoditapubbo anumodatū’’ti avatvā therena vuttamatteyeva.
“在这样的地方”是指那些善好、多闻的人居住的地方。因为一切喜乐都在那里生起,所以叫“整夜”。“善巧于裁决者”是指在种种令人疑惑的地方,为了断除疑惑,对各个问题的裁决都很善巧、很熟练的人。当那些说法者被邀请,依次说法时,那位被请来主持说法的人以“这个人很聪慧”为由邀请了他,因此他没有得到机会。巴利
Tādisesu ṭhānesūti tādisesu pesalānaṃ bahussutānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānesu. Sabbampi ratiṃ pavattanato sabbarattikāni. Vinicchayakusalānanti anekavihitesu kaṅkhaṭṭhāniyesu kaṅkhāvinayanāya taṃ taṃ pañhānaṃ vinicchaye kusalānaṃ chekānaṃ. Tesu tesu dhammakathikesu ajjhiṭṭhesu vārena dhammaṃ kathentesu ‘‘ayaṃ byatto’’ti dhammajjhesakena ajjhiṭṭhattā okāsaṃ alabhamāno.
“应当恭敬地去做”是说:比丘们对我所做的礼拜、起身迎接、合掌致敬、如法侍奉等行为,他们应当怀着敬意去做;他们为我准备的种种资具,也应当做得完好、妥善周全。这就是这句话的意思。“应视为重”是说应当像石伞一样被看重。“此礼仪”是指前面“应恭敬”等所说的恭敬等一套礼仪。“因此”是说由于这个原因,正因为多闻等功德殊胜,才值得受人恭敬等,这就是它的意思。“此理趣”是指像“可爱、可敬”等(增支部7.37)所说的那种。“应当如是去做”是说应当像前面“应恭敬”等所说的那样去做恭敬等。“这是理趣”是说凡在此比丘章节中所说的规则,同样亦是此理趣。从此之后,在比丘尼章节等各章节中也是如此。巴利
Sakkaccañcakareyyunti bhikkhū yaṃ mama abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānañjalikammasāmīcikammādiṃ karonti. Taṃ ādareneva kareyyuṃ, yañca me parikkhārajātaṃ paṭiyādenti, tampi sundaraṃ sammadeva abhisaṅkhataṃ kareyyunti attho. Bhāriyanti pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukātabbaṃ. Etaṃ vidhinti etaṃ ‘‘sakkareyyu’’ntiādinā vuttasakkārādividhiṃ. Tenāti tena kāraṇena, bāhusaccādiguṇavisesavato eva sakkārādīnaṃ arahattāti attho. Evarūpanti īdisaṃ ‘‘piyo garū’’tiādinā (a. ni. 7.37) vuttappakāraṃ. Evaṃ kareyyunti evaṃ ‘‘sakkareyyu’’ntiādinā vuttappakāraṃ sakkārādiṃ kareyyuṃ. Esa nayoti yoyaṃ bhikkhuvāre vuttavidhi, eseva nayo. Ito paresu bhikkhunīvārādīsu vāresu.
“只有我才应该是利养的获得者”在这里也同样要按照前面所说的方式,理解为强调限定。由于以浇汁等方式使团食变得精美,所以他说“充满酥油、油、蜂蜜、糖等”。“床、椅等”只是举例,因为时节适宜、避风、触感柔软、门窗紧闭的卧具等也属于精美坐卧具。或者通过“等”字,也应当理解为包含了这些。“于一切处”是指在所有这四种资具的章节中都是如此。巴利
Ahameva lābhī assanti etthāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva avadhāraṇaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Piṇḍapātassa paṇītatā upasecanādivasenāti āha ‘‘sappitelamadhusakkharādipūritāna’’nti . Mañcapīṭhādīnanti nidassanamattaṃ utusappāyānaṃ nivātānaṃ phassitatalānaṃ pihitadvārakavāḷavātapānādīnampi paṇītasenāsanabhāvato. Ādi-saddena vā tesampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sabbatthāpīti sabbesu tesu catūsupi paccayavāresu.
61 看见身业:这里并不是说身业是眼所能认识的,而是说,与身业同时发生的嘴唇颤动、皱眉,以及身体姿态等的显现,看起来就像看见了身业一样,所以才这么说。听闻语业在这里也是同样的道理。因此,能引生身体变化的诸法被称为“被看见”,能引生语言变化的诸法被称为“被听闻”。也正因为如此,这些法在当面、面对面的时侯,称为“被看见”;在背后、不在面前的时侯,称为“被听闻”。随顺地执取就是随护。所谓“林野住者性”,是随顺那位比丘的头陀功德来执取的,所以说“随护林野住者性”。住在林野的人就是林野住者。坐卧处偏远、极为边远的人,就是边远坐卧处者。这里为了说明其意义,所以说“住在边远坐卧处”。名为乞食的团食,早晨落下的团食就是早晨的团食,寻求这种团食的人就是常乞食者。或者,为了团食而行走、游化,以此作为誓愿的人就是团食者,他也就是常乞食者。远离了切断、割截,就是无切断;与无切断俱行,就是次第,也就是不割截。习惯挨家挨户次第行乞的人,就是次第乞食者。因为高起,所以像粪扫一样;或者因为像尘垢一样卑劣而称为“去”的,就是粪扫衣;受持它,在这里就是粪扫衣,具备这种戒行的人就是粪扫衣者。巴利
61.Kāyakammaṃ disvāti idaṃ na kāyakammaṃ cakkhuviññeyyaṃ, kāyakammunā pana saha pavattaṃ oṭṭhaparipphandanaṃ bhākuṭikaraṇaṃ kāyaṅgādidassanaṃ kāyakammadassanaṃ viya hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Vacīkammaṃ sutvāti etthāpi eseva nayo, tasmā kāyavikārajanakā dhammā ‘‘dissantī’’ti vuttā, vacīvikārajanakā ‘‘sūyantī’’ti. Tato eva ca te paccakkhakāle sammukhakāle dissanti nāma. Tirokkhakāle asammukhakāle sūyanti nāma. Anurūpato gahaṇaṃ anuggaho. Āraññikattanti tassa bhikkhuno dhutaguṇattānurūpato gaṇhāti. Tenāha ‘‘āraññikattaṃ anuggaṇhātī’’ti. Araññe nivāso assāti āraññiko. Pantaṃ pariyantaṃ dūrataraṃ senāsanaṃ assāti pantasenāsano. Taṃ pana atthamattena dassentena ‘‘pantasenāsane vasatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhikkhāsaṅkhātānaṃ piṇḍānaṃ pāto piṇḍāpāto, taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ uñchati gavesatīti piṇḍapātiko. Piṇḍāya patituṃ carituṃ vatametassāti vā piṇḍapāti, so eva piṇḍapātiko. Dānato avakhaṇḍanato apetaṃ apadānaṃ, saha apadānena sapadānaṃ, anavakhaṇḍanaṃ. Anugharaṃ caraṇasīlo sapadānacārī. Unnatabhāvena paṃsukūlaṃ viya paṃsukūlaṃ, paṃsu viya vā kucchitabhāvaṃ ulati gacchatīti paṃsukūlaṃ, tassa dhāraṇaṃ idha paṃsukūlaṃ, taṃ sīlamassāti paṃsukūliko.
粪扫衣应当从三个方面理解为粗劣:价值、触感、色泽的减损。连不是粪扫衣的都这样,更何况粪扫衣呢——这就是这里的意思。“以粗长线”是指用下垂的粗长线。“以色”:这里也应该说触感同样会减损,因为在那上面触感也是粗涩的。那么,为什么经文中只举出林野住者等就说了四种头陀功德呢?因为它们是根本,而且通过举出这些,就能以随喜受用的方式把其余的头陀支也一并涵盖进来。因为一位林野住者、住在偏远坐卧处的人,他的露地住、树下住、常坐不卧、随得敷具、冢间住这些支分都圆满具备。而一位常乞食者、次第乞食者,他的但取钵食、过午不食、一食这些支分也一样具备。至于一位粪扫衣者,他的三衣支分则很容易护持。正因为它们是根本,世尊也在各处说“我什么时候能见到难陀,住林野、著粪扫衣”等等,只举出林野住者等。“至此”是对经文中已出现的头陀支作限定性的举出,并不是说这些全部一定会在同一个人身上具足,也不是说只有这些恶法应当断除。因为,即使覆蔽、恼害等烦恼没有断除,同梵行者并非不恭敬……中略……不尊崇。巴利
Tīhikāraṇehi lūkhaṃ veditabbaṃ agghaphassavaṇṇaparihānito apaṃsukūlampi, ko pana vādo paṃsukūlanti adhippāyo. Thūladīghasuttakenāti thūlena olambamānena dīghasuttakena. Vaṇṇenāti ettha phassenapi parihāyatīti vattabbaṃ. Tañhi tattha kharaphassampi hotiyevāti. Kasmā pana pāḷiyaṃ āraññikādiggahaṇena cattārova dhutaguṇā vuttāti? Padhānattā, taggahaṇeneva ca ito paresampi sukhaparibhogatāya gahaṇasambhavato. Yo hi āraññiko pantasenāsano, tassa abbhokāsika-rukkhamūlika-nesajjika-yathāsanthatika-sosānikaṅgāni suparipūrāni. Yo ca piṇḍapātiko sapadānacārī ca, tassa pattapiṇḍikakhalupacchābhattikaekāsanikaṅgāni. Yo pana paṃsukūliko, tassa tecīvarikaṅgaṃ supariharamevāti. Padhānattā hi bhagavatāpi ‘‘kadāhaṃ nandaṃ passeyyaṃ, āraññaṃ paṃsukūlika’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.242; netti. 100) tattha tattha āraññikādayo eva gayhanti. Ettakāti pāḷiyaṃ āgatānaṃ paricchijja gahaṇametaṃ, na ettakā sabbepi ekassa ekaṃsato sambhavanti, nāpi ettakāyeva pāpadhammā pahātabbā. Na hi makkhapaḷāsādīnaṃ appahīnabhāvepi sabrahmacārī neva sakkaronti…pe… na pūjentīti.
“彼义”是指“无论何人”等所说的意义。用譬喻把它说明清楚,就是通过顺喻、逆喻和举例来阐明。蛇尸等之所以极其不净、极其可厌,是因为极度恶臭。而他们说,蛇之所以如此,是因为蛇有尖锐的嗔怒;狗和人之所以如此,是因为吃了米饭和粥,身体才变成这样。“这些”指蛇等。“堆加”就是一层又一层地往上扔,堆成一大堆。那堆起来的东西把容器装满了,所以说“堆加令满溢”。“适合给众人看的”就是好看、可爱,那是极其清净、令人欢喜的,所以说“极净”。“新娶”指婆婆,也就是新媳妇。而她因为有生孩子的能力,用吉祥话称为“生母”;为她送去的礼物由生母带来,所以叫“可爱”。“于两处”指两种意义。“重叠”说的是重复的言辞。“此于彼不可意”就是不可意,它的状态就是不可意性,这样生起的心,所以说“此不可意……中略……之称谓”。因为具有佛陀的形貌,所以相状就像洁净的铜板。如同塞满了腐物一样,心相续被欲贪充满。而那是因为没有断除那些,所以说“未断欲贪”。巴利
Tamatthanti ‘‘yassa kassacī’’tiādinā vuttamatthaṃ. Upamāya pākaṭaṃ karontoti anvayato byatirekato ca udāharaṇena vibhāvento. Ahikuṇapādīnaṃ atipaṭikūlajigucchanīyatā ativiya duggandhatāya. Sā ca ahīnaṃ tikhiṇakopatāya, kukkuramanussānaṃ odanakummāsūpacayatāya sarīrassa hotīti vadanti. Imesanti ahiādīnaṃ. Vaḍḍhetvāti uparūpari khipanena racitaṃ katvā. Taṃ pana vaḍḍhitaṃ tena ca bhājanaṃ pūritaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘vaḍḍhetvā paripūretvā’’ti. Janassa dassanayogyaṃ dassanīyaṃ jaññaṃ, taṃ paramaparisuddhaṃ manoharañca hotīti āha ‘‘cokkhacokkha’’nti. Abhinavaniviṭṭhā mahāmātā vadhukā. Sā pana puttalābhayogyataṃ upādāya maṅgalavacanena ‘‘janī’’ti vuccati, tassā niyyamānaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ janiyā haratīti jaññaṃ. Ubhayatthāti atthadvaye. Punaruttanti āmeḍitavacanamāha. Na manāpaṃ etassāti amanāpo, tassa bhāvo amanāpatā, tathāpavatto cittuppādoti āha ‘‘amanāpaṃ idanti…pe… adhivacana’’nti. Buddhavesattā liṅgassa parisuddhakaṃsapātisadisakā. Kuṇaparacanaṃ viya icchāvacarehi santānassa bharitabhāvo. So pana tesaṃ appahīnatāyāti āha ‘‘icchāvacarānaṃ appahāna’’nti.
62 本来应该说“他护持村落边住”,但书上却写成“阿兰若行”。因为在白分经文里,并没有提到阿兰若行;而且如果已经断除了欲贪,就绝不该拒绝村落边住——对这类人来说,反而更应该期待村落边住,因为他们能覆藏超人法。正如下文将会说“由少欲所生起”等等。就像精心调制的上等米饭一样,断除欲贪既令人满意,也是满足的因。巴利
62. ‘‘Tena gāmantavihāraṃ anuggaṇhātī’’ti vattabbe ‘‘āraññikatta’’nti pana potthake likhitaṃ. Na hi sukkapakkhe pāḷiyaṃ āraññikaggahaṇaṃ atthi, sati ca icchāvacarappahāne gāmantavihāro ekantena na paṭikkhipitabbo, icchitabbova tādisānaṃ uttarimanussadhammapaṭicchādanato . Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘appicchatāsamuṭṭhānehī’’tiādi. Sālivarabhattaracanaṃ viya icchāvacarappahānaṃ manuññabhāvato tittihetuto ca.
63 “我”这个词是受格的说法,因为和“对”这个词连在一起;但它的意思其实是与格,所以解释说“于我、于你”。“时”这个词是处格的意思,所以“时”是受格。以灵鹫山、般荼婆、伊湿耆利、毗婆罗、毗富罗五山为准,四面被群山环绕。“于王舍城”是表示近处的处格,所以解释说“我依止它而住”。巴利
63.Maṃtanti ca upayogavacanaṃ paṭi-saddayogena, attho pana sampadānamevāti āha ‘‘mayhaṃ tuyha’’nti ca. ‘‘Samaye’’ti bhummatthe ‘‘samaya’’nti upayogavacanaṃ. Gijjhakūṭapaṇḍavaisigilivebhāravepullapabbatānaṃ vasena samantato giriparikkhepena. Rājagaheti samīpatthe bhummavacananti āha ‘‘taṃ nissāya viharāmī’’ti.
旧车匠之子这个称呼,是因为他过去出家之前是车匠之子,所以这样被人知道。弯曲是指像牛尿那样弯弯曲曲。因此说像蛇走过的路一样。他是指般度之子。另一位是指三弥提。所念之处即是所念之处:这位车匠之子切削的,正是所念与所思之处;而且他不是顺着那人的心意,而是顺着自己弹下的墨线来切削。心:就像用自己的心能知道我的心一样。巴利
Purāṇayānakāraputtoti purāṇe pabbajitato pubbe yānakāraputto tathāpaññāto. Jimhanti gomuttakuṭilaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sappagatamaggasadisa’’nti. Soti paṇḍuputto. Itaroti samiti. Cintitaṭṭhānamevāti cintitacintitaṭṭhānameva tacchati, tañca kho na tassa cittānusārena, atha kho attano suttānusārena tacchanto yānakāraputto. Cittanti attano cittena mama cittaṃ jānitvā viya.
“不是因信而出家”这句话本身就说明,他们没有对业果的信心,所以说“无信者,就是对佛、法、僧没有信心”。以活命为目的而出家的人,就是“为活命者”。因此说“因债务、怖畏等”。诡诈称为奸诈。诡诈者就像假装有德行的商人那样行事,所以说“因为诡诈……”。慢的本质是空洞的,就像芦苇一样,所以叫“芦”;他们具有这种像芦苇一样高耸的慢,所以是“高慢者”。因此说“生起空洞傲慢的人”。或者因为轻率而浮躁;因为言语粗恶而说粗话;因为大量谈论畜生论等,所以说无益之语、废话连篇。“业门不防护”:这是说,由于生起之门不防护,才有业门等的不防护,所以这样说。或者,“于六根”是依处格,意思是在作为所缘的六根上,业门不防护。“节量”:在饮食方面,避开不正当的寻求、不正当的接受、不正当的受用之后,正当寻求、正当接受、正当受用的分量,就是不放逸者应当知道的。因此说“适当”。“于觉寤”:指在昼夜中,以能障碍之法净化自心的觉寤。为了说明那些在觉寤和增上戒学上缺乏尊重的人,在其他诸学上根本没有立足之处,说了“于诸学处不尊重”之后,又以自性阐明那种不尊重,说“多犯、多越”。巴利
‘‘Na saddhāya pabbajito’’ti imināva kammaphalasaddhāya abhāvo nesaṃ pakāsitoti āha ‘‘assaddhāti buddhadhammasaṅghesu saddhāvirahitā’’ti. Pabbajitānaṃ jīvikā attho etesanti jīvikatthā. Tenāha ‘‘iṇabhayādīhī’’tiādi. Kerāṭikaṃ vuccati sāṭheyyaṃ. Saṭhānaṃ guṇavāṇijakānaṃ kammaṃ sāṭheyyanti āha ‘‘sāṭheyyañhī’’tiādi. Tucchasabhāvena māno naḷo viyāti naḷo, mānasaṅkhāto uggato naḷo etesanti unnaḷā. Tenāha ‘‘uṭṭhitatucchamānā’’ti. Lahukatāya vā capalā. Pharusavacanatāya kharavacanā. Tiracchānakathābahulatāya niratthakavacanapalāpino. Asaṃvutakammadvārāti idaṃ kammadvārādīnaṃ asaṃvutabhāvo uppattidvārānaṃ asaṃvutatāya eva hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Atha vā chasu indriyesūti nimitte bhummaṃ, chasu indriyesu nimittabhūtesu asaṃvutakammadvārāti attho. Yā mattāti bhojane ayuttapariyesana-ayuttapaṭiggahaṇa-ayuttaparibhoge vajjetvā yuttapariyesana-yuttapaṭiggahaṇa-yuttaparibhogasaṅkhātā yā mattā appamattehi jānitabbā. Tenāha ‘‘yuttatā’’ti. Jāgareti rattindivaṃ āvaraṇiyehi dhammehi cittaparisodhanasaṅkhāte jāgare. Tesaṃ jāgaritāya adhisīlasikkhāya gāravarahitānaṃ itarasikkhāsu patiṭṭhā eva natthīti dassento ‘‘sikkhāpadesu bahulagāravā na hontī’’ti vatvā tameva gāravābhāvaṃ sarūpena vibhāvento ‘‘āpattivītikkamabahulā’’ti āha.
即使只是本来就已经具备的、对三宝的信和对业果的信,这也算是信。他们就像得到了液状的甘露一样喝下去,就像得到了浓稠坚实的美食一样咀嚼吞咽,口中发出欢喜的话:“萨度!萨度!”同时把这赞叹放在心里,随喜赞叹。这里,发出欢喜的话被比作“喝”,因为它是向外表现出来的;而内心的随喜,因为是内在的,所以被比作“咀嚼吞咽”——所谓咀嚼吞咽,就是咬碎后吞下去。当“萨度”是短音、单数时,就是说这赞叹是指向舍利弗之上的;当它是长音、复数时,就是说指向同梵行者们。“在上面”这个词要结合上下文来理解。“因懈怠或亲友遭难等”:就是因为懈怠,或者因为亲友遭遇灾难等等。说了“被称为大龙”之后,为了阐明其中的原因,论中说了“在这里……”等话。在这里,为了审察并显示所期望的种种词义——比如“不行走,所以叫龙”“不回来,所以叫龙”“不作恶,所以叫龙”——而说了“以欲等”等话,但这只是为了让智者理解而作的简要说明。巴利
Pakatiyāpi siddhāya ratanattayasaddhāya kammaphalasaddhāya ca saddhā. Pivanti maññe yathā taṃ dravabhūtaṃ amataṃ laddhā. Ghasanti maññe yathā taṃ bahalapiṇḍikasudhābhojanaṃ laddhā. Attamanavācaṃ nicchārentā ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti. Tameva pana sādhukāraṃ hadaye ṭhapetvā abbhanumodantā. Ettha ca attamanavācānicchāraṇaṃ pivanasadisaṃ katvā vuttaṃ bahiddhābhāvato, manasā abbhanumodanaṃ pana abbhantarabhāvato ghasanasadisaṃ vuttaṃ. Saṅkhādanajjhoharaṇañhi ghasananti. Rassañca ekavacanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘rasse sati sāriputtassa upari hotī’’ti. Dīghañca bahuvacanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘dīghe sati sabrahmacārīna’’nti. ‘‘Upari hotī’’ti ānetvā sambandho. Ālasiyabyasanādīhīti ālasiyena vā ñātibyasanādīhi vā. ‘‘Mahānāgāti vuccantī’’ti vatvā tattha kāraṇaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘tatrā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘na gacchantīti nāgā, na āgacchantīti nāgā, na āguṃ karontīti nāgā’’ti yo vividho vacanattho icchito, taṃ vicāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘chandādīhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ pana ñeyyāvabodhāya vacanato appamattakāraṇaṃ.
他自己根本不再造作恶行,因为一切恶已经通过圣道被彻底断除了。他放下了欲缚等一切结缚、十种结的种种分类以及所有束缚,因此在一切处、在一切夜叉等众生中,或在一切生存界里,不再被任何执着所系缚;他依三种解脱而解脱。正因如此,面对可意、不可意等境界时,他达到了如如不动的状态,所以称为“如如不动者”。应当理解,他因为具备上面所说的这些特征,成为那样,拥有那样的自性,所以称为“象”。因此论中说:“在这里,应当这样理解其含义。”与其他漏尽的象相比,他因为是上首弟子,具足殊胜功德,所以更值得尊敬,也更值得赞叹。他们平等地随喜:也就是彼此接受对方的善说,以完全生起的欢喜,作平等、相同的随喜赞叹。而这种随喜赞叹,正是通过经文中“在那里……”等语句本身来显示的。巴利
Sayameva āguṃ na karoti sabbathā maggena pahīnaāguttā. So kāmayogādike sabbasaṃyoge dasavidhasaṃyojanappabhedāni ca sabbabandhanāni visajja jahitvā sabbattha yakkhādīsu, sabbesu vā bhavesu kenaci saṅgena na sajjati tīhi ca vimuttīhi vimutto, tato eva iṭṭhādīsu tādibhāvappattiyā tādi, so vuttalakkhaṇena tathattā taṃsabhāvattā nāgo pavuccateti attho veditabbo. Tenāha ‘‘evamettha attho veditabbo’’ti. Aññehi khīṇāsavanāgehi aggasāvakattā guṇavisesayogato pujjatarā ca pāsaṃsatarā ca. Samaṃ anumodisunti aññamaññassa subhāsitato sampaṭicchanena samappavattamodatāya samaṃ sadisaṃ abbhanumodiṃsu. Taṃ pana samanumodanaṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādinā pāḷivaseneva dasseti.
第6篇《希望经》的注释巴利
6. Ākaṅkheyyasuttavaṇṇanā
64 “具足”就是圆满;因为从各方面都已到达、证得,所以叫具足。因此论中说:“这叫做‘圆满具足’。”“那”指的是被称为“蜜”的蜂群。“具足”指正确地前往、到达、接近,所以论中说“具有”。“具足”指与成就相应。而这里特指滋味的成就,因为要以总说的方式来确定差别。所以论中说:“譬如小小的、无瑕疵的蜜”,意思是“没有缺点”。由此说:“这叫做‘甘甜具足’。”通过毫无遗漏地受持戒,达到不缺、不破等状态,就是圆满戒。从受持开始就断绝恶法,所以是具戒者。要知道,从受持开始,完全相反的恶法就不再生起,因此称为具戒者;至于思等以戒为特相的法正在生起的刹那,就更不必说了。这些内容在《清净道论》中已有说明,因此应依照那里所说的方法来详细了解——这是论师的意思。巴利
64.Sampannanti paripuṇṇaṃ, samantato pannaṃ pattanti sampannaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ paripuṇṇasampannaṃ nāmā’’ti. Nanti ‘‘suvā’’ti vuttaṃ suvagaṇaṃ. Sampannoti sammadeva panno gato upagato. Tenāha ‘‘samannāgato’’ti. Sampannanti sampattiyuttaṃ. Sā panettha rasasampatti adhippetā sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato. Tenāha ‘‘seyyathāpi khuddamadhuṃ aneḷaka’’nti, niddosanti attho. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idaṃ madhurasampannaṃ nāmā’’ti. Sīlassa anavasesasamādānena akhaṇḍādibhāvāpattiyā ca paripuṇṇasīlā. Samādānato paṭṭhāya acchindanato sīlasamaṅgino. Samādānato hi accantavirodhidhammānuppattiyā sīlasamaṅgitā veditabbā, cetanādīnaṃ pana sīlanalakkhaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ pavattikkhaṇe vattabbameva natthi. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.9) vuttā, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva vitthārakathā veditabbāti adhippāyo.
田地的圆满,是依能依的圆满来说明所依的圆满;因为能依的业有失坏与成就之别,所以才如此说,正如说床发出乌库提声一样。同样,以田地为例,说明了破损、腐坏等过失。田地若有破损,就是不圆满,因为无法获得庄稼的丰收。所以论中说庄稼不会生长。即便只有一尺见方之地,因其能生出多个安摩那的果实,所以有大果;又因嫩芽、秸秆等极为丰多,所以有大利益。同样的道理:正如播下的种子因为有破损等四种过失而不圆满,因没有这些过失而圆满;戒也是如此,因有破损等四种过失而不圆满,因没有这些过失而圆满。这显示四种过失及其无有的状态,在能喻与所喻——即失坏与成就——之间是相通的。由于异熟果而成为大果。大利益,指广大的利益。而这一利益,在这部经文中正以种种方式被详细阐述。巴利
Khettapāripūrīti nissitapāripūriyā nissayapāripūrimāha nissitakammavipattisampattivisayattā yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. Tathā hi khettena khaṇḍapūtiādidoso vutto. Khettaṃ khaṇḍaṃ hotīti aparipūraṃ hoti sassapāripūriyā abhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘sassaṃ na uṭṭhetī’’ti. Pādamattassapi anekambaṇaphalanato mahapphalaṃ hoti. Kisalayapalālādibahutāya mahānisaṃsaṃ. Evamevanti yathā khittaṃ bījaṃ khaṇḍādicatudosavasena aparipuṇṇaṃ hoti, tadabhāvena ca paripuṇṇaṃ, evaṃ sīlaṃ khaṇḍādicatudosavasena aparipuṇṇaṃ hoti, tadabhāvena ca paripuṇṇanti, catudosatadabhāvasāmaññameva nidassananidassitabbavipattisampattīsu dasseti. Mahapphalaṃ hoti vipākaphalena. Mahānisaṃsanti vipulānisaṃsaṃ. Svāyaṃ ānisaṃso idha pāḷiyaṃ nānappakārena vitthārīyati.
据说至此中的据说一词,是用来暗示不认同的。论师借此表达自己对某位论师的说法并不认同。具足戒是以共相、以戒的概括方式来理解的,并没有指出具体的差别。而那位亲教师说开示了四种遍净戒,这四种就是针对这一点说的。其中是指在四种遍净戒当中。殊胜戒是指首要的戒。在两种场合是指在开示和注解当中。在这里的注解中,就像在开示中一样,世尊所说的具足戒指的就是巴帝摩卡防护,因为说了具足戒的缘故,这是其意趣。因为在巴利圣典中,取戒一词是以巴帝摩卡防护的方式而来的。因此他说就是巴帝摩卡防护等。其中,通过限定词,说明其余三种戒有一部分已含摄在巴帝摩卡之内。正如在不见而见、因活命之因而犯六学处、以及未省察而受用病缘资具的情况下,都制定了罪过。所谓三种,是指根律仪戒等。所谓戒,是说有被称为戒的处所,即以戒的同义词,在某个经中取为处所,那是什么?如同巴帝摩卡防护一样。由于亲教师在场,他并未否定,只是以婉转语、如同发问的方式而说。因此他说不许可。所谓仅以守护六门为限,是为了说明其轻便性,因为仅以心的决意就成为平常状态。在其余两种中也是同样的道理。所谓仅以缘的生起,是以果来说明因。因为诸缘的生起乃以产生为因。所谓此义,是指此目的,即受用此缘,这是其意趣。所谓无迂回地,以此说明根律仪等三种是首要戒的随从,因此被称为迂回戒。巴利
Ettāvatā kirāti (a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.37; a. ni. ṭī. 3.10.71-74) kira-saddo arucisūcanattho. Tenettha ācariyavādassa attano aruccanabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Sampannasīlāti anāmaṭṭhavisesaṃ sāmaññato sīlasaṅkhepena gahitaṃ. Tañca catubbidhanti ācariyatthero ‘‘catupārisuddhisīlaṃ uddisitvā’’ti āha. Tatthāti catupārisuddhisīle. Jeṭṭhakasīlanti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 3.5.412) padhānasīlaṃ. Ubhayatthāti uddesaniddese. Idha niddese viya uddesepi pātimokkhasaṃvaro bhagavatā vutto ‘‘sampannasīlā’’ti vuttattāti adhippāyo . Sīlaggahaṇañhi pāḷiyaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvaravasena āgataṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvaroyevā’’tiādi. Tattha avadhāraṇena itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ekadesena pātimokkhantogadhabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Tathā hi anolokiyolokane ājīvahetu chasikkhāpadavītikkame gilānapaccayassa apaccavekkhitaparibhoge ca āpatti vihitāti. Tīṇīti indriyasaṃvarasīlādīni. Sīlanti vuttaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthīti sīlapariyāyena tesaṃ katthaci sutte gahitaṭṭhānaṃ nāma kiṃ atthi yathā pātimokkhasaṃvaroti ācariyassa sammukhattā apaṭikkhipantova upacārena pucchanto viya vadati. Tenāha ‘‘ananujānanto’’ti. Chadvārarakkhāmattakamevāti tassa sallahukabhāvamāha cittādhiṭṭhānamattena paṭipākatikabhāvāpattito. Itaradvayepi eseva nayo. Paccayuppattimattakanti phalena hetuṃ dasseti. Uppādanahetukā hi paccayānaṃ uppatti. Idamatthanti idaṃ payojanaṃ imassa paccayassa paribhuñjaneti adhippāyo. Nippariyāyenāti iminā indriyasaṃvarādīni tīṇi padhānassa sīlassa parivāravasena pavattiyā pariyāyasīlāni nāmāti dasseti.
现在,为了通过对比、随顺和譬喻,说明巴帝摩卡防护本身的精进性,说了“对于他而言”等话。其中,“它”指巴帝摩卡防护。“其余的”指根律仪等。“就是那一个”:在“具足戒”这个说法里所说的戒,就是那一个。在“具足巴帝摩卡”等话里,先用“巴帝摩卡”这个词说了同义词,然后详细展开……说了开头的话。就像在其他地方,以个人为着眼点的教导“在此,有比丘具戒”,被解释为“他安住于巴帝摩卡防护中”。巴利
Idāni pātimokkhasaṃvarasseva padhānabhāvaṃ byatirekato anvayato ca upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha soti pātimokkhasaṃvaro. Sesānīti indriyasaṃvarādīni. Tassevāti ‘‘sampannasīlā’’ti ettha yaṃ sīlaṃ vuttaṃ, tasseva. Sampannapātimokkhāti ettha pātimokkhaggahaṇena vevacanaṃ vatvā taṃ vitthāretvā…pe… ādimāha. Yathā aññathāpi ‘‘idha bhikkhu sīlavā hotī’’ti (mahāni. 199) puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya uddiṭṭhaṃ sīlaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharatī’’ti (vibha. 508; mahāni. 199) niddiṭṭhaṃ.
以巴帝摩卡防护而守护:凡能守护、保护那个人,并使他从地狱等痛苦中解脱出来,因此得名“巴帝摩卡”——这就是以学处戒封闭了身门和语门。然而,因为他们具有这样的状态,所以就说他们“具有”它,因此论中说“具有巴帝摩卡防护”。巴利
Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutāti yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehīti ‘‘pātimokkha’’nti laddhanāmena sikkhāpadasīlena pihitakāyavacīdvārā. Te pana yasmā evaṃbhūtā tena samannāgatā nāma honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarena samannāgatā’’ti.
另一种解释:因为烦恼势力强大,造恶很容易,行善却很难,所以众生常常堕入恶趣,因此叫“堕者”,也就是凡夫。或者因为无常,在诸有等生存状态中被业力抛掷,像旋转的陶轮一样片刻不停,四处流转,具有这样不断奔波的习性,所以叫“堕者”;或者从死亡的角度说,在各种众生群体中不断舍弃身体的习性,所以叫“堕者”,这是指众生的相续,或者单指心。能令这个“堕者”从轮回之苦中解脱,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。因为通过心的解脱,众生才被称为解脱。正如经中所说:“因心清净而得以净化”,以及“心从诸漏中无执取地解脱”。巴利
Aparo nayo (udā. aṭṭha. 31; itivu. aṭṭha. 97) – kilesānaṃ balavabhāvato, pāpakiriyāya sukarabhāvato, puññakiriyāya ca dukkarabhāvato bahukkhattuṃ apāyesu patanasīloti pātī, puthujjano. Aniccatāya vā bhavādīsu kammavegakkhitto ghaṭīyantaṃ viya anavaṭṭhānena paribbhamanato gamanasīloti pātī, maraṇavasena vā tamhi tamhi sattanikāye attabhāvassa pātanasīloti pātī, sattasantāno, cittameva vā, taṃ pātiṃ saṃsāradukkhato mokkhetīti pātimokkhaṃ. Cittassa hi vimokkhena satto vimuttoti vuccati. Vuttañhi ‘‘cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti, ‘‘anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimutta’’nti (mahāva. 28) ca.
或者,以无明等为因,在轮回中坠落、行走、转起,所以叫“堕者”。经中确实说过:“被无明遮蔽的众生,被渴爱系缚,四处奔走,轮回不息。”(相应部2.125)这个堕落的众生,靠这个能从渴爱等三种杂染中解脱出来,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。它的复合词构成方式,应该像“黑颈者”这类词一样来理解。巴利
Atha vā avijjādinā hetunā saṃsāre patati gacchati pavattatīti pātī. ‘‘Avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ sattānaṃ taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarata’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.125) hi vuttaṃ. Tassa pātino sattassa taṇhādisaṃkilesattayato mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. ‘‘Kaṇṭhekālo’’tiādīnaṃ viya samāsasiddhi veditabbā.
或者,它使人堕落、使人毁灭、使人受苦,所以叫“堕者”,也就是心。经中确实说过:“世间被心牵引,被心拖拽。”能把这堕落的心从中解脱出来的,就是“巴帝摩卡”。或者,人通过它堕入恶趣之苦和轮回之苦,所以叫“堕者”,也就是渴爱等杂染。经中确实说过:“渴爱产生人”,“人以渴爱为伴侣”等等。能从那堕落者中解脱出来的,就是“巴帝摩卡”。巴利
Atha vā pāteti vinipāteti dukkheti pāti, cittaṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘cittena nīyati loko, cittena parikassatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.62). Tassa pātino mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. Patati vā etena apāyadukkhe saṃsāradukkhe cāti pātī, taṇhādisaṃkileso. Vuttañhi ‘‘taṇhā janeti purisaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.57), taṇhādutiyo puriso’’ti (itivu. 15, 105; a. ni. 4.9) ca ādi. Tato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho.
或者,凡是会使人堕落的地方,就叫做“堕处”,也就是六内处和六外处。经中确实说过:“世间在六处中生起,在六处中结交。”从这被称为内外处的堕落中解脱出来,就是“巴帝摩卡”。或者,具有堕落和毁坏的东西就是“堕者”,也就是轮回。从那里解脱出来,就是“巴帝摩卡”。或者,因为是一切世间的尊主、于法自在,世尊被称为“主”;通过他而解脱,就是“解脱”;因为那是“主”所施设的解脱,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。巴帝摩卡本身就是巴帝摩卡。或者,因为是一切功德的根本,以最胜之义为“主”,又以如前所说的意义为“解脱”,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。巴帝摩卡本身就是巴帝摩卡。正如广说中所说:“巴帝摩卡是开端,是面首,是首要。”巴利
Atha vā patati etthāti pātī, cha ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni. Vuttañhi ‘‘chasu loko samuppanno, chasu kubbati santhava’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.70; su. ni. 171). Tato ajjhattikabāhirāyatanasaṅkhātato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho. Atha vā pāto vinipāto assa atthīti pātī, saṃsāro. Tato mokkhoti pātimokkho. Atha vā sabbalokādhipatibhāvato dhammissaro bhagavā ‘‘patī’’ti vuccati, muccati etenāti mokkho, patino mokkho tena paññattattāti pātimokkho . Pātimokkho eva pātimokkho. Sabbaguṇānaṃ vā mūlabhāvato uttamaṭṭhena pati ca so yathāvuttatthena mokkho cāti pātimokkho. Pātimokkho eva pātimokkho. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhantiādimetaṃ mukhametaṃ pamukhameta’’nti (mahāva. 135) vitthāro.
或者,“pa-”表示方式,“ati”是表示彻底、究竟的虚词,所以,通过种种方式彻底解脱,就叫“巴帝摩卡”(别解脱)。因为这条戒本身,通过彼分断的方式,以及与定、慧相应,通过镇伏断和正断的方式,能彻底地解脱、释放,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。或者说,从各种违犯过失中各自分别地解脱,就是“巴帝摩卡”,意思是:从种种违犯过失中一一解脱出来。巴帝摩卡本身就是巴帝摩卡。或者说,解脱就是涅槃,戒是那解脱的影像,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。因为戒律仪属于抉择分,就像太阳初升时的曙光一样,是涅槃生起的因,因而算是涅槃的影像;又因为它能随宜灭除烦恼,所以叫“巴帝摩卡”。巴帝摩卡本身就是巴帝摩卡。又或者说,朝向解脱而行、面向解脱,就是巴帝摩卡。巴帝摩卡本身就是巴帝摩卡。这样,应当理解“巴帝摩卡”这个词在这里的含义。巴利
Atha vā pa-iti pakāre, atīti accantatthe nipāto, tasmā pakārehi accantaṃ mokkhetīti pātimokkho. Idañhi sīlaṃ sayaṃ tadaṅgavasena, samādhisahitaṃ paññāsahitañca vikkhambhanavasena, samucchedavasena ca accantaṃ mokkheti mocetīti pātimokkho. Pati pati mokkhoti vā pātimokkho, tamhā tamhā vītikkamadosato paccekaṃ mokkhoti attho. Pātimokkho eva pātimokkho. Mokkho vā nibbānaṃ, tassa mokkhassa patibimbabhūtoti pātimokkho . Sīlasaṃvaro hi nibbedhabhāgiyo sūriyassa aruṇuggamanaṃ viya nibbānassa udayabhūto tappaṭibhāgo viya hoti yathārahaṃ kilesanibbāpanatoti pātimokkho. Pātimokkhoyeva pātimokkho. Atha vā mokkhaṃ pati vattati mokkhābhimukhanti vā pātimokkhaṃ. Pātimokkhameva pātimokkhanti evamettha pātimokkhasaddassa attho veditabbo.
具足行仪与行境:以身体和语言不违犯这种意义上的“行仪”,以及不涉足妓院等场所这种意义上的“行境”,两者都具足,意思就是具足圆满的行仪与行境。于微细:指极其微细、还不到犯戒程度的事;另一些人说,是指仅属于恶作、恶说程度的事。于过:指应当受到呵责的过失。而这些过失必定完全属于不善的性质,所以说“于不善法”。见怖畏者:即习惯将过失视为怖畏,哪怕只有极微尘那么小的过失,也看得像须弥山一样大,习惯这样心生恐惧。正确地受持:即完全正确地、恭敬地、全面地受持。于学处:这是简别依格中的“于学处”,为了显示从整体中分析出部分,而说“于学处,受持那那学处而学”之义。因为学处正是应受持、应学习的,这是其意趣。任何学处的部分:在学的部分中,无论属于根本制、随制、一切处制、方所制等类别的任何应学、应行、应圆满的戒。而那仅依门分为两种,所以说“身与语”。在这个义解中,“于学处”是依处格,因为在学的部分中,没有单独取某一种。因此说“那一切”。巴利
Ācāragocarasampannāti kāyikavācasikaavītikkamasaṅkhātena ācārena ceva navesiyagocaratādisaṅkhātena gocarena ca sampannā, sampannaācāragocarāti attho. Appamattesūti atiparittakesu anāpattigamanīyesu, dukkaṭadubbhāsitamattesūti apare. Vajjesūti gārayhesu. Te pana ekantato akusalasabhāvā hontīti āha ‘‘akusaladhammesū’’ti. Bhayadassinoti bhayato dassanasīlā, paramāṇumattampi vajjaṃ sineruppamāṇaṃ viya katvā bhāyanasīlā. Sammā ādiyitvāti sammadeva sakkaccaṃ sabbaso ca ādiyitvā. Sikkhāpadesūti niddhāraṇe bhummanti samudāyato avayavaniddhāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘sikkhāpadesu taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhathā’’ti atthamāha. Sikkhāpadameva hi samādātabbaṃ sikkhitabbañcāti adhippāyo. Yaṃ kiñci sikkhākoṭṭhāsesūti sikkhākoṭṭhāsesu mūlapaññattianupaññatisabbatthapaññattipadesapaññattiādibhedaṃ yaṃ kiñci sikkhitabbaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ pūretabbaṃ sīlaṃ. Taṃ pana dvāravasena duvidhamevāti āha ‘‘kāyikaṃ vācasikañcā’’ti. Imasmiṃ atthavikappe sikkhāpadesūti ādhāre bhummaṃ sikkhābhāgesu kassaci visuṃ aggahaṇato. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ sabba’’nti.
65 65.“为何开始?”这是对开示原因的追问。“为了显示戒的功德”则是说明目的。有人问:什么是义?哪里有义?什么被安置了?不应这样看。因为在“为了显示戒的功德”这句话里,从反面说,正是“没有显示戒的功德”——这才是这次开示的原因;所以“为何开始?”的意思,自然就落到“由于所化众生没有见到戒的功德”上。因此说“若亦”等语。而为了阐明“为了显示戒的功德”这句话的含义,又说了“他们”等语。所谓“功德”,就是利益的生起。不过在“具戒者、戒行圆满者,身坏命终之后,生于善趣、天界”等经文中,异熟果也被称为“功德”。“什么差别?”就是什么果报上的差别。“什么增长?”就是什么殊胜的增进。因为功德即使存在,也只有被如实阐明时,才会让人心生欢喜,没被阐明就不会。因此,为了说明必定应当赞叹功德,便举出了毒刺商人的例子。巴利
65.Kasmā āraddhanti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.10.71-74) desanāya kāraṇapucchā. Sīlānisaṃsadassanatthanti payojananiddeso. Ko attho kva attho kva nipātitāti? Nayidamevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sīlānisaṃsadassanatthanti hi ettha byatirekato yaṃ sīlānisaṃsassa adassanaṃ, taṃ imissā desanāya kāraṇanti kasmā āraddhanti vineyyānaṃ sīlānisaṃsassa adassanatoti atthato āpanno eva hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘sacepī’’tiādi. Sīlānisaṃsadassanatthanti pana imassa atthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ānisaṃsoti udayo. ‘‘Sīlavā sīlasampanno kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggalokaṃ upapajjatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.150; 3.316; a. ni. 5.213; mahāva. 285) pana vipākaphalampi ‘‘ānisaṃso’’ti vuttaṃ. Ko visesoti ko phalaviseso. Kā vaḍḍhīti ko abbhudayo. Vijjamānopi guṇo yāthāvato vibhāvito eva abhiruciṃ uppādeti, na avibhāvito, tasmā ekantato ānisaṃsakittanaṃ icchitabbamevāti dassetuṃ visakaṇṭakavāṇijo udāhaṭo.
这里,“粗糖”是指把甘蔗汁熬煮后,掺入粉末等物,凝结成块的。“糖浆”则不成块,是液态的。“糖块”是容易碎裂的。“冰糖”则像水晶一样。“冰糖等”中的“等”字,涵盖了劣质的糖。当时,粗糖之类的东西在非边地地区普遍被称为“毒刺”,所以说“去了边地村”,并对孩子们喊:“不要拿毒刺!”巴利
Tattha guḷo nāma ucchurasaṃ pacitvā cuṇṇādīhi missitvā sampiṇḍane piṇḍībhūtaṃ. Phāṇitaṃ apiṇḍitaṃ dravībhūtaṃ. Khaṇḍaṃ bhijjanakkhamaṃ. Sakkharā nāma phalikasadisā. Sakkharādīniti ādi-saddena macchaṇḍikānaṃ saṅgaho. Tasmiṃ kāle guḷādīsu visakaṇṭakavohāro apaccantadese pacuroti ‘‘paccantagāmaṃ gantvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dārake ca palāpesuṃ ‘‘visakaṇṭakaṃ mā gaṇhantū’’ti.
所谓“可爱”,就是应当被喜爱。对于可爱者,一见之下必定全然欢喜,所以说“应以可爱之眼见”。由喜所生、澄净柔和之相所摄的眼,就称为“可爱眼”。“他们”,指同梵行者。“令意增长者”,因为滋养喜悦之心,能使喜心一层层增长。“应安置于尊重处者”,就是成为恭敬对象的所在。“知者而能知”,是以智慧了知应当了知的事。或者说,别人虽然无知却表现得像知道一样,这个人不是这样,他确实是知者而能知。“见者而能见”,是以称为见的慧眼见到应当见到的事;或者说,正是见者而能见。如此应受尊重,就是说,像这样以智慧、以贤善之德而应受尊重。巴利
Piyoti piyāyitabbo. Piyassa nāma dassanaṃ ekantato abhinanditabbaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘viyacakkhūhi sampassitabbo’’ti. Pītisamuṭṭhānapasannasommarūpapariggahañhi cakkhu ‘‘piyacakkhū’’ti vuccati. Tesanti sabrahmacārīnaṃ. Manavaḍḍhanakoti pītimanassa paribrūhanato uparūpari pīticittassa uppādako. Garuṭṭhāniyoti garukaraṇassa ṭhānabhūto. Jānaṃ jānātīti ñāṇena jānitabbaṃ jānāti. Yathā vā aññe ajānantāpi jānantā viya pavattanti, na evamayaṃ, ayaṃ pana jānanto eva jānāti . Passaṃ passatīti dassanabhūtena paññācakkhunā passitabbaṃ passati, passanto eva vā passati. Evaṃ sambhāvanīyoti evaṃ viññutāya paṇḍitabhāvena sambhāvetabbo.
对于“唯于戒为圆满行者”这句,应当理解为:于戒正是圆满行者;如此,后置词的限定作用应当这样看待。因为这样一来,通过这句话,上面两种学处就没有被排除,仍然包含在内。然而,为了用果来显示怎样才算是于戒圆满行者,所以说了“内”等语。因为在这里,戒的圆满是由于它能导向作为观之基础的定,而不只是没有缺损等状态而已。因此说:“那些无缺……乃至……能导向定。”这样理解之后,上面两种学处也就作为戒的资粮而被含摄了,因此在这里以戒为主要来把握,是成立的。也正因如此,后面将会说到,心一境性以及对所行境的护持等,都是戒的随护。至于后面所说的“三学之教示已生起”,那是就其余诸学在这里也被含摄这一点来说的,并不是以它们为主要来把握。如果真是这样,那为什么又说戒是微少的呢?因为说过:“然而,这确实是微少、卑浅的。”那是针对凡夫的行境而说的。也正因如此,在那里戒并没有被毫无遗漏地分别说明,所以那里的“唯戒”这一“唯”字的把握,应当看作是可以成立的。“以无减缺”:就是以无缺损等状态,或者以没有遗漏任何一项而具足的方式。“以行相”:就是以做法、以成就。“于心之止”:就是心的等持。“专注”:就是不离、专精。如果有人完全没有致力于禅那的修习,那就叫作把禅那摒除在外。如果有人开始之后中途退缩,那就叫作破坏禅那。如果有人不是这样,而是进入禅那而安住,那就是没有舍弃禅那;为了显示这一点,所以说了“禅那不摒于外”等语。巴利
Sīlesvevassa paripūrakārīti sīlesu paripūrakārī eva bhaveyyāti evaṃ uttarapadāvadhāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañhi iminā padena uparisikkhādvayaṃ anivattitameva hoti. Yathā pana sīlesu paripūrakārī nāma hoti, taṃ phalena dassetuṃ ‘‘ajjhatta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Vipassanādhiṭṭhānasamādhisaṃvattanikatāya hi idha sīlassa pāripūrī, na kevalaṃ akhaṇḍādibhāvamattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yāni kho pana tāni akhaṇḍāni…pe… samādhisaṃvattanikānī’’ti. Evañca katvā upari sikkhādvayaṃ sīlassa sambhārabhāvena gahitanti sīlassevettha padhānaggahaṇaṃ siddhaṃ hoti. Tathā hi cittekaggatāsaṅkhārapariggahānaṃ sīlassānurakkhaṇabhāvaṃ vakkhati. Yaṃ pana vakkhati ‘‘sikkhattayadesanā jātā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.65), taṃ itarāsampi sikkhānaṃ idha gahitatāmattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na padhānabhāvena gahitataṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sīlassa appamattakatāvacanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhave, oramattaka’’nti (dī. ni. 1.7). Taṃ puthujjanagocaraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tathā hi tattha na nippadesato sīlaṃ vibhattaṃ, evaṃ katvā tattha sīlamattakanti mattaggahaṇaṃ samatthitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Anūnenāti akhaṇḍādibhāvena, kassaci vā ahāpanena upapannena. Ākārenāti karaṇena sampādanena. Cittasamatheti cittasamādhāne. Yuttoti aviyutto pasuto. Yo sabbena sabbaṃ jhānabhāvanaṃ ananuyutto, so taṃ bahi nīharati nāma. Yo ārabhitvā antarā saṅkocaṃ āpajjati , so taṃ vināseti nāma. Yo pana īdiso ahutvā jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, so anirākatajjhānoti dassento ‘‘bahi anīhaṭajjhāno’’tiādimāha.
对无常的三界法,或者对“无常”进行随观,就是无常随观。苦随观和无我随观也是这样。对同一法以厌离的方式生起的随观,是厌离随观。以离贪的方式生起的随观,是离贪随观。对灭的随观,是灭随观。以弃舍的方式生起的随观,是弃舍随观。住在空寂处的比丘,在那里因为获得了身远离,以止与观的力量来增长心远离,依照教导修行,既让世间和教法增添光彩,也让作为自己证得殊胜之处的空寂处增添光彩;通过使成为殊胜功德之依处,在义理上为智者增长它,这就叫作增长空寂处者。因此说“这里”等。为了表明这才是增长空寂处、为智者所称赞的合适内容,而不是指安设住处,所以说“应看作单层等”。而且应当知道,这里提到“空寂处”,就已经包括了阿兰若、树下等一切适合精勤修习的坐卧处。巴利
Aniccassa tebhūmakadhammassa, aniccanti vā anupassanā aniccānupassanā. Tathā dukkhānupassanā anattānupassanā ca. Tasseva nibbindanākārena pavattā anupassanā nibbidānupassanā. Virajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā virāgānupassanā. Nirodhassa anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Paṭinissajjanavasena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Suññāgāragato bhikkhu tattha laddhakāyavivekatāya samathavipassanāvasena cittavivekaṃ paribrūhento yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattiyā lokaṃ sāsanañca attano visesādhigamaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ suññāgārañca upasobhayamāno guṇavisesādhiṭṭhānabhāvāpādanena viññūnaṃ atthato taṃ brūhento nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘brūhetā suññāgārāna’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Ayameva suññāgārānubrūhanaviññuppasatthānaṃ bhājanaṃ, na senāsanapatiṭṭhāpananti dassento āha ‘‘ekabhūmakādi…pe… daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Suññāgāraggahaṇena cettha araññarukkhamūlādi sabbaṃ padhānānuyogakkhamaṃ senāsanaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
所谓“渴爱行的教导”,就是指以“缘于内在的”等语句开头的《渴爱行经》。因为以渴爱为立足处,也就是以渴爱为依托,所以如果没有渴爱,慢和见就不会生起。所谓“进入慢和见”,意思是:为了要显示出来,所以深入慢和见。对应当宣说的法进行教导时,其“进入”正是为了把握理解。渴爱、慢、见这三者被称为戏论,因为它们使众生的相续在轮回中不断扩展、蔓延相续。以戒为立足处,就是以戒为依止。巴利
Taṇhāvicaritadesanāti ‘‘ajjhattikassa upādāyā’’ti (vibha. 937) ādinayappavattaṃ taṇhāvicaritasuttaṃ. Taṇhāpadaṭṭhānattāti taṇhāsannissayattā. Na hi taṇhāvirahitā mānadiṭṭhipavatti atthi. Mānadiṭṭhiyo osaritvāti dassetabbatāya mānadiṭṭhiyo ogāhetvāti attho. Gahaṇatthameva hi desetabbadhammassa desanāya osaraṇaṃ. Taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo papañcattayaṃ sattasantānassa saṃsāre papañcanato anuppabandhanavasena vitthāraṇato. Sīlapadaṭṭhānattāti sīlādhiṭṭhānattā.
说“增上心学”,是为了把前后文连接起来。依观的角度来说“增长空寂处”,这是句子的搭配方式。两种学,就是增上心学和增上慧学。所谓“含摄”,是连同增上戒学一起含摄进来说的。如果这样的话,这就成了三学的教导,那它就应该是在说明三学的利益了。针对这个疑问,所以说“这里……”等等。其中该说明的内容,前面已经讲过了。应当知道,这里取的“心一境性”和“观”,是四种遍净戒的守护者,犹如根律仪之于别解脱律仪;但这两者并不是重点,只是以戒为主要而含摄进来的。因此说“实为护戒者……”等等。巴利
Adhicittasikkhā vuttāti ānetvā sambandho. Vipassanāvasena suññāgāravaḍḍhaneti yojanā. Dvepi sikkhāti adhicittādhipaññāsikkhā. Saṅgahetvāti adhisīlasikkhāya saddhiṃ saṅgahetvā vuttā. Yadi evamayaṃ sikkhattayadesanā jātāti sikkhattayānisaṃsappakāsanī siyāti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Indriyasaṃvaro viya pātimokkhasaṃvarassa catupārisuddhisīlassa ārakkhabhūtā cittekaggatā vipassanā ca idha gahitāti tadubhayaṃ appadhānaṃ, sīlameva pana padhānabhāvena gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sīlānurakkhikā evā’’tiādi.
当所生的病苦生起时,能胜过它、比它更强的禅那之乐就会生起。如果对这种强力的乐产生陶醉,心被坚固的自我爱着所摧毁的人就会舍弃善法,在那样的情况下……他成了滋养者。或者,如果对强力的乐没有陶醉和爱着,就能通过如实看见“这只是行的积聚”,而没有我执和我所执。关于饥荒的怖畏,为了说明战胜饥饿,说“即使他的肠子向外流出”。关于疾病的怖畏,说“枯瘦、憔悴”。以“等”字所包括的盗贼怖畏,说“或为支离破碎”。“两者”,指止与观这一对。在这里,通过“内于心……空寂之处”等语句,由于使之成为抉择分的一部分,所取的心一境性和观正是能够守护戒的。因为后面宣说了戒的禅那、解脱、果、神通、决定的状态,所以应当知道,那心一境性和观作为其资助,在在处处都被摄取。巴利
Balavatarasukhanti samuppannabyādhidukkhato balavataraṃ, taṃ abhibhavituṃ samatthaṃ jhānasukhaṃ uppajjati. Balavamamattaṃ hoti, tena daḷhaattasinehena viluttahadayo kusaladhamme chaḍḍento so tathārūpesu…pe… posetā hoti. Balavamamattaṃ vā sineho na hoti ‘‘suddho saṅkhārapuñjo’’ti yāthāvadassanena ahaṃkāramamaṃkārābhāvato. Dubbhikkhabhaye khudābhibhavaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sacepissa antāni bahi nikkhamantī’’ti. Byādhibhayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ussussati visussanī’’ti. Ādi-saddena gahitaṃ corabhayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘khaṇḍākhaṇḍiko vā’’ti. Ubhayassāti samathavipassanādvayassa. Ettha ca ‘‘ajjhattaṃ ceto…pe… suññāgārāna’’nti imehi visesanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvāpādanena sīlaṃ rakkhituṃ samatthā eva cittekaggatāvipassanā gahitā. Yasmā parato jhānavimokkhaphalābhiññāṇaadhiṭṭhānabhāvo sīlassa uddhaṭo, tasmā tassa bhiyyopi sambhārabhūtā eva cittekaggatā vipassanā tattha tattha gahitāti veditabbā.
戒等中的等字,涵盖了前面所说的心一境性和观,也涵盖了作为戒的根本原因的一切业自性智,或者业道正见。因为戒以及其他福业事,正是靠它才得以清净,才能有大果报、大利益。他成为获得者,指那获得即是护戒的圆满。经中已说到这样的情形,那到底是怎样的呢?世尊认可吗?世尊并不是在自性上认可这样,而是出于大悲,随顺个人的意乐才这样说;为了说明这一点,就说了在这里并不……等话。其中,断除求食言谈者,是指不发出为求食物而说的语言,像哑巴一样断除言谈,凡是为了指示、说明、暗示、表明求食而该说的话,都不说、不讲,这就是它的意思。随顺个人的意乐,在简略说明之后,为了展开其含义,就说了对于那些……等。味:指本质性的功德利益,称为味的利益。巴利
Sīlādīti ādi-saddena yathāvuttacittekaggatāvipassanā saṅgaṇhāti, sīlassa vā mūlakāraṇabhūtaṃ sabbaṃ kammassakatañāṇañca saṅgaṇhāti kammapathasammādiṭṭhiṃ vā. Sīlañhi tadaññampi puññakiriyāvatthu teneva parisodhitaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsanti. Lābhī assanti lābhā sāya saṃvaraṇasīlaparipūraṇaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ kimīdisaṃ bhagavā anujānātīti? Na bhagavā sabhāvena īdisaṃ anujānāti, mahākāruṇikatāya pana puggalajjhāsayena evaṃ vuttanti dassento ‘‘na cetthā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ghāsesanaṃ chinnakatho na vācaṃ payuttaṃ bhaṇeti chinnakatho mūgo viya hutvā obhāsaparikathānimittaviññattipayuttaṃ ghāsesanaṃ vācaṃ na bhaṇe na katheyyāti attho. Puggalajjhāsayavasenāti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘yesañhī’’tiādimāha. Raso sabhāvabhūto ānisaṃso rasānisaṃso.
以衣等资具来布施的施主们,就是“施与资具的施主”。为了把“对于天人们”这句话说清楚,所以接着说“天人也……”等等。在“居士们啊,有这五种利益”等经文里,“利益”这个词也可以用来指“果”,所以说“这两者在意义上是一回事”。巴利
Paccayadānakārāti cīvarādipaccayavasena dānakārā. ‘‘Devānaṃ vā’’ti vuttavacanaṃ pākaṭīkātumāha ‘‘devāpī’’tiādi. ‘‘Pañcime gahapatayo ānisaṃsā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.150) anisaṃsasaddo phalapariyāyopi hotīti āha ‘‘ubhayametaṃ atthato eka’’nti.
公婆以及属于他们一方的人,就是公婆和公婆的眷属。他们通过亲属血统的联结,或者通过娶嫁婚姻的联结而成为亲戚,这就是亲族。同血统,是指通过血统的联结。同一血统相连,是指由同一个共同的血统联结在一起。已经去到死后状态,是指以投生到饿鬼趣的方式获得了新生。不过,因为他们在这里命终时,是按时限寿命断绝而死的,所以说“已命终”。有信心清净的人,就是具有清净信心的人。由所论主题可知,命终的父亲或母亲投生到了饿鬼趣,因此说“就成了大利益”,意思是说,因为他那样具足戒行。如果已经是圣者,那就更不用说了。因此说“许多百千劫”等等。多有利益,就是有广大利益。亲近,就是以问讯、礼拜等方式前去接近。恭敬侍奉,就是恭敬承事。巴利
Sassusasurā ca tappakkhikā ca sassusasurapakkhikā. Te ñātiyonisambandhena āvāhavivāhasambandhavasena sambandhā ñātī. Sālohitāti yonisambandhavasena. Ekalohitasambaddhāti ekena samānena lohitasambandhena sambaddhā. Peccabhāvaṃ gatāti petūpapattivasena nibbattiṃ upagatā. Te pana yasmā idha katakālakiriyā kālena katajīvitupacchedā honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kālakatā’’ti. Pasannacittoti pasannacittako. Kālakato pitā vā mātā vā petayoniṃ upapannoti adhikārato viññāyatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahānisaṃsameva hotī’’ti, tassa tathā sīlasampannattāti adhippāyo. Ariyabhāve pana sati vattabbameva natthi. Tenāha ‘‘anekāni kappasatasahassānī’’tiādi. Bahukāranti bahupakāraṃ. Upasaṅkamananti abhivādanādivasena upagamanaṃ. Payirupāsananti upaṭṭhānanti.
66 被压伏就是被摧破。厌倦就是舍弃、不喜乐、不持续投入。具戒的比丘因为害怕自己的戒被毁坏,所以心安定专注;同时他作为修观者,由于资具的损耗,对不喜乐和喜乐都一并克服、制胜,因此说“正因为具足戒等功德……”等等。巴利
66.Ajjhottharitāti madditā. Ukkaṇṭhāti riñcanā anabhirati ananuyogo. Sīlavā bhikkhu attano sīlakhaṇḍabhayena samāhito vipassako ca paccayaghātena aratiyā ratiyā ca sahitā abhibhavitāva hotīti āha ‘‘sīlādiguṇayuttenevā’’tiādi.
恐惧是心的恐怖被害怕,所以是恐惧。所缘使人由此生畏,所以是恐惧。因为和前一段相似,虽然已经以“即如前所述之理”作过指示/类推,但为了再次说明它,又说“具足戒等功德者……”等。因为坐在尊者的下风处,天神的幼童们无法以本来面目安住,不能轻松自在地活动,因此无能为力。巴利
Cittutrāso bhāyatīti bhayaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ. Purimavārasadisattā vuttanayamevāti atidisitvāpi puna taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlādiguṇayutto hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Therassa heṭṭhā nisinnattā devatāya dārakā sakabhāvena saṇṭhātuṃ sukhena vattituṃ asakkontā asamatthā.
“增上心”就是超胜的心,指近行定之心。它之所以超胜,是因为比起平常的欲界心更殊胜、更美好,并且从对立面中清净出来,所以说“殊胜清净之心”。“增上心”说的是定,这里应当理解为近行定。由远离而生的喜乐、由定而生的喜乐、无喜的禅那乐、由念清净而生的禅那乐——这四种禅那乐,因为是从对立面出离而得,所以称为“出离乐”,因此说“领受出离乐”。“能在所希望的任何时刻入定”,这句话说明他们在诸禅那中具有入定自在;然而由“随意获得”一语,也应知道已说及转向、决意、观察等自在。以乐镇伏敌对法,以此显示他们于诸禅那乐有快速通慧。广大的,指已被导入广大。诸禅那的广大,名为由善修习而历时更久成就,而那也应随其限定而欲求,所以说“广大的”,并说“能在随其限定中出定,这句话就是这个意思”。因为未到限定之时就出定者,不能成为无困难获得者,由于不能随欲令其持续。现在,为了以相反方式阐明上述入定等自在,说“某类人”等。其中,“只是获得者”,这是就刚获得禅那而言。“那样”,指于所期望的任何时刻。“障碍的”,指对自在的敌对法。然而对于禅那证得,敌对法早已被镇伏,否则禅那证得本身就不可能。以困难镇伏,即以困难清净。应知这里以观察欲过患等,像对欲贪等一样,对其他定障碍法的驱离,就是镇伏和清净。“水漏轮”指计时水漏轮。巴利
Adhikaṃ cetoti abhiceto, upacārajjhānacittaṃ. Tassa pana adhikatā pākatikakāmāvacaracittehi sundaratāya sapaṭipakkhato visuddhiyā cāti āha ‘‘abhikkantaṃ visuddhicitta’’nti. Adhicittanti samādhimāha, so ca upacārasamādhi daṭṭhabbo. Vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ, samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ, apītijaṃ jhānasukhaṃ, satipārisuddhijaṃ jhānasukhanti catubbidhampi jhānasukhaṃ paṭipakkhato nikkhantataṃ upādāya ‘‘nekkhammasukha’’nti vuccatīti āha ‘‘nekkhammasukhaṃ vindantī’’ti. Icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjituṃ samatthoti iminā tesu jhānesu samāpajjanavasībhāvamāha, ‘‘nikāmalābhī’’ti pana vacanato āvajjanādhiṭṭhānapaccavekkhaṇavasiyopi vuttā evāti veditabbā. Sukheneva paccanīkadhamme vikkhambhetvāti etena tesaṃ jhānasukhakhippābhiññatañca dasseti. Vipulānanti vepullaṃ pāpitānaṃ. Jhānānaṃ vipulatā nāma subhāvitabhāvena ciratarappatti, sā ca paricchedānurūpāva icchitabbbāti ‘‘vipulāna’’nti vatvā ‘‘yathāparicchedeyeva vuṭṭhātuṃ samatthoti vuttaṃhotī’’ti āha. Paricchedakālañhi appatvāva vuṭṭhahanto akasiralābhī na hoti yāvadicchakaṃ pavattetuṃ asamatthattā. Idāni teyeva yathāvutte samāpajjanādivasībhāve byatirekavasena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ekacco hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha lābhīyeva hotīti idaṃ paṭiladdhamattassa jhānassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tathāti icchiticchitakkhaṇe. Pāribandhiketi vasībhāvassa paccanīkadhamme. Jhānādhigamassa pana paccanīkadhammā pageva vikkhambhitā, aññathā jhānādhigamo eva na siyā. Kicchena vikkhambhetīti kicchena visodheti. Kāmādīnavapaccavekkhaṇādīhi kāmacchandādīnaṃ viya aññesampi samādhipāribandhikānaṃ dūrasamussāraṇaṃ idha vikkhambhanaṃ visodhanañcāti veditabbaṃ. Nāḷikāyantanti kālamānanāḷikāyantaṃ āha.
尤其是,当色界第四禅那通过完全掌握而成为神通的基础时,正是以“作为神通基础”之意才说“当说到作为神通基础的禅那时”。不过,无色界禅那也因为可以作为决意的基础而同样是基础,因为如果没有通过十四种方式调伏心,就不会有那种作为基础的状态。“这样,当作为神通基础的色界禅那被说出时,虽然因色界性,神通的世间部分已经到来”——这就是这里的意思。“那”指的是神通的部分。四……中略……诸圣道是戒的功德,因为只有具足戒的人才能获得。“遍取之后”就是把握之后。巴利
Visesena rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ sabbaso vasībhāvāpāditaṃ abhiññāpādakanti adhippāyenāha ‘‘abhiññāpādake jhāne vutte’’ti. Arūpajjhānampi pana adhiṭṭhānatāya pādakameva cuddasadhā cittaparidamanena vinā tadabhāvato. ‘‘Evamabhiññāpādake rūpāvacarajjhāne vutte rūpāvacaratāya kiñcāpi abhiññānaṃ lokiyavāro āgato’’ti ayañhettha adhippāyo. Nanti abhiññāvāraṃ. Cattāri…pe… ariyamaggā sīlānaṃ ānisaṃso sampannasīlasseva lābhato. Pariyādiyitvāti gahetvā.
“支的寂静”是指:因为盖等敌对法极其遥远,所以禅支得以平息,也就是一切躁动和热恼都灭尽了。由于这样,那些禅那才具有更殊胜等状态。“所缘的寂静”是指:因为远离了色的撞击等,达到了柔和、微细等状态,所以是寂静的。也就是说,从他们的修习与证悟所充分修习的所缘呈现柔和微细之相开始,就应当知道禅支是寂静的。因所缘寂静而有的寂静,应当通过缘取出世间法的观察来说明。“解脱”是殊胜地解脱。那些禅那法,由于先前分位修习的力量而具有那种殊胜性,所以能从敌对法解脱而转起;正因如此解脱,它们就像在父亲膝上四肢放松的幼童一样,毫无疑虑地倾向于所缘而转起,这些就称为“诸解脱”。因此说:“‘诸解脱’是因为从敌对法解脱,以及倾向于所缘。”虽然无色定不是通过超越禅支而证得的,而是通过超越所缘,但因为若对色界禅那的所缘不离欲,就不能超越禅那,而且当禅那被超越时,所缘也已被超越,所以不说“超越所缘”,只说“超越色界禅那后”。在经文中,“超越诸色”应理解为需要补上“应当修习”“应当观察”等词,但凭未曾听过的推论并没有用,所以说“与‘寂静’一词相连”。这样,通过那种离欲的状态,它们的寂静之义也就得到了阐明。无色定没有像色界禅那等那样的所缘或果报的色法,所以是“无色”;无色本身就是“无色定”。因此说:“从所缘和异熟两方面都无有色法。”“以名身”即与俱生的名聚相应。巴利
Aṅgasantatāyāti nīvaraṇādīnaṃ paccanīkadhammānaṃ sudūratarabhāvena jhānaṅgānaṃ vūpasantatāya, nibbutasabbadarathapariḷāhatāyāti attho, yato tesaṃ jhānānaṃ paṇītatarādibhāvo. Ārammaṇasantatāyāti rūpapaṭighādivigamanena saṇhasukhumādibhāvappattasantabhāvena. Yadaggena hi nesaṃ bhāvanābhisamayasabbhāvitasaṇhasukhumākārāni ārammaṇāni santāni, tadaggena jhānaṅgānaṃ santatā veditabbā. Ārammaṇasantatāya santatā lokuttaradhammārammaṇāhi paccavekkhaṇāhi dīpetabbā. Vimuttā visesena muttā. Ye hi jhānadhammā tathāpavattapubbabhāgabhāvanāhi tabbisesatāya sātisayaṃ paṭipakkhadhammehi vimuttivasena pavattanti, tato eva tathāvimuttatāya pitu aṅke vissaṭṭhaaṅgapaccaṅgo viya kumāro nirāsaṅkabhāvena ārammaṇe adhimuttā ca pavattanti, te vimokkhāti vuccanti. Tenāha ‘‘vimokkhāti paccanīkadhammehi vimuttattā ārammaṇe ca adhimuttattā’’ti . Yadipi ārammaṇasamatikkamavasena pattabbāni āruppāni, na aṅgātikkamavasena, tathāpi yasmā ārammaṇe avirattassa jhānasamatikkamo na hoti, samatikkantesu ca jhānesu ārammaṇaṃ samatikkantameva hoti, tasmā ārammaṇasamatikkamaṃ avatvā ‘‘rūpāvacarajjhāne atikkamitvā’’ti icceva vuttaṃ. Atikkamma rūpeti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sampādetabbā, passitabbā’’ti vā kiñci padaṃ icchitabbaṃ, asutaparikappanena pana payojanaṃ natthīti ‘‘santāti padasambandho’’ti vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā tena virāgabhāvena tesaṃ santatāti ayampi attho vibhāvito hoti. Rūpajjhānādīnaṃ viya natthi etesaṃ ārammaṇabhūtaṃ vā phalabhūtaṃ vā rūpanti arūpā. Arūpā eva āruppā. Tenāha ‘‘ārammaṇato ca vipākato ca rūpavirahitā’’ti. Nāmakāyenāti sahajātanāmasamūhena.
67 “结缚”就是束缚。被什么束缚呢?回答说“诸蕴之趣”等等。因为对于贪等烦恼尚未断尽的人,未来的诸蕴等与诸蕴等之间仍有连结;而对于贪等烦恼已经断尽的人,这种连结就不存在了,因为即使曾造过业,那些业也已失去效力。又因为随顺贪等而有结缚之义,所以说“诸蕴之趣……中略……被称为结”。“以遍尽”就是通过断除,使它在未来完全不再生起。由于能彻底弃绝、流注并压迫敌对法,所以称为“流”,也就是圣道,因此说“‘流’是道的别名”。最初证入此流、到达此流的人就是“入流者”,即第八位圣者。因此说“彼具足者”,意思是指处于初道刹那的人。不过这里的“已入”一词,如同在“为作证果而修行者”等语境中一样,是现在时的用法,所以说“以道之名来称说果”。但如果是在非比喻的实际情形中,那就应当直接从自性获得名称。“堕处”是指将人抛入卑劣、痛苦、忧恼之处,也就是抛入恶趣之苦。“法”就是自性。因此说“自身”等。为什么这样说呢?这是在问不退堕法的原因。“趣向恶趣”就是趋向恶趣者。“正觉”就是正菩提,即圣道。然而由于初道已经证得,其余的道依其应当证得的性质而被希求,所以说“上三道”。巴利
67.Saṃyojentīti bandhanti. Kehīti āha ‘‘khandhagatī’’tiādi. Asamucchinnarāgādikassa hi khandhādīnaṃ āyatiṃ khandhādīhi sambandho, samucchinnarāgādikassa pana taṃ natthi katānampi kammānaṃ asamatthabhāvāpattitoti. Rāgādīnaṃ anvayato ca saṃyojanaṭṭho siddhoti āha ‘‘khandhagati…pe… vuccantī’’ti. Parikkhayenāti samucchedena sabbaso āyatiṃ anuppajjanena. Paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ anavasesato savanato pīḷanato soto, ariyamaggoti āha ‘‘sototi ca maggassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Taṃ sotaṃ ādito panno adhigacchīti sotāpanno, aṭṭhamako. Tenāha ‘‘taṃsamaṅgīpuggalassā’’ti, paṭhamamaggakkhaṇe puggalassāti adhippāyo. Idha pana panna-saddo ‘‘phalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.59) viya vattamānakālikoti āha ‘‘maggena phalassa nāmaṃ dinna’’nti. Abhītakālikatte pana sarasatova nāmalābho siyā. Virūpaṃ sadukkhaṃ saupāyāsaṃ nipātetīti vinipāto, apāyadukkhe khipanako. Dhammoti sabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘attāna’’ntiādi. Kasmāti avinipātadhammatāya kāraṇaṃ pucchati. Apāyaṃ gamentīti apāyagamanīyā. Sambujjhatīti sambodhi, ariyamaggo. So pana paṭhamamaggassa adhigatattā avasiṭṭho eva adhigandhabbabhāvena icchitabboti āha ‘‘uparimaggattaya’’nti.
这些说法是为了赞叹功德而说的,并不是说它们应当被断除,这是本意。第二道(一来道)以断除粗重的贪等而运作,对于剩余的那些贪等,则使其变得薄弱,因此名为生起,所以说“贪、嗔、痴薄”。“偶尔生起”是指有时、难得才生起。“缠缚微弱”是指现行变得软弱。因为与它相应的不如理作意并非经常伴随,所以不会频频生起;因为颠倒想以及以它为条件的痴、慢等变得软弱,所以它们微弱地生起;若亲近事境,它们就会浓厚地生起,这是本意。因此说“确实如此”等。巴利
Vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ vuttāni,na pahātabbānīti adhippāyo. Oḷārikānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ samucchindanavasena pavattamāno dutiyamaggo avasiṭṭhānaṃ tesaṃ tanubhāvāpattiyā uppanno nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā’’ti. Adhiccuppattiyāti kadāci karahaci uppajjanena. Pariyuṭṭhānamandatāyāti samudācāramudutāya. Abhiṇhaṃ na uppajjanti tajjassa ayonisomanasikārassa anibaddhabhāvato. Mandamandā uppajjanti vipallāsānaṃ tappaccayānañca mohamānādīnaṃ mudutarabhāvato. Bahalāva uppajjanti vatthupaṭisevanatoti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi.
“只有一次回来的法”是指:从结生的角度来说,只有一次回来的性质。“只一次……乃至……回来”:用这句话来说明,在五种一来者当中,除去四种,只取一种,所以说“即使那位”等。
其中,这里所说的第五种一来者,就是:“在这个世界修习了圣道之后,投生到天界,在那里住到寿命尽时,再投生到这里,然后入般涅槃。”那么,他和“一种子者”有什么差别呢?一种子者只有一次结生,一来者有两次结生,这就是他们之间的差别。因为对于某位入流者来说,只有一个蕴的种子,而不是只受取一次生命形态,他就被称为一种子者。巴利
Sakiṃ āgamanadhammoti paṭisandhivasena sakiṃyeva āgamanasabhāvo. Ekavāraṃyeva…pe… āgantvāti iminā pañcasu sakadāgāmīsu cattāro vajjetvā ekoyeva gahitoti dassento ‘‘yopi hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha yvāyaṃ pañcamako sakadāgāmī ‘‘idha maggaṃ bhāvetvā devaloke nibbatto, tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā puna idhūpapajjitvā parinibbāyatī’’ti vutto, tassa ekabījinā saddhiṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti? Ekabījissa ekā paṭisandhi, sakadāgāmissa dve paṭisandhiyoti idaṃ tesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ. Yassa hi sotāpannassa ekaṃyeva khandhabījaṃ, na ekaṃ attabhāvaggahaṇaṃ, so ekabījīti.
“下面”是指“非广大地”,通过“下面”这个关联来说的。对下面这部分有利益的,就是属于下分的,也就是那些结。那些就是五下分结。因为内在结缚的缘故,必定会生在欲界。为了说明他即使从远处也还是会回转,就用吞钩的鱼等比喻来说明。“化生者”:用这个说明没有胎中之苦。“在那里般涅槃者”:用这个说明其余诸苦的止息。而他在那里般涅槃,正是因为欲界的蕴种子不再回转生起,所以说“无返回性”。巴利
Heṭṭhāti ‘‘amahaggatabhūmiya’’nti heṭṭhā sambandhanena. Heṭṭhābhāgassa hitāti heṭṭhābhāgiyā, tesaṃ. Tānīti orabbhāgiyasaṃyojanāni. Kāmāvacare nibbattatiyeva ajjhattaṃ saṃyojanattā. Tathā hesa dūratopi āvattidhammo evāti dassetuṃ gilabaḷisamacchādayo upamābhāvena vuttā. Opapātikoti iminā gabbhavāsadukkhābhāvamāha. Tattha parinibbāyīti iminā sesadukkhābhāvaṃ. Tattha parinibbānatā cassa kāmaloke khandhabījassa apunārohavasenevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘anāvattidhammo’’ti vuttaṃ.
68 “纯全”是指不与世间神通混杂。世间五神通也是戒的功德,因为它们离不开戒。为了显示这些神通,就接上了“若希望……中略……如是”等话,这是文句的关联。因为彻底断尽了一切漏,只有阿拉汉道在殊胜意义上才配称为“漏尽”,所以说“在说到漏尽时”;否则,一切六神通就都成了漏尽。“这些功德”指世间神通。就像一个人剃了头,因为没有发髻而不庄严,同样,作为开示顶端的无上道之说,如果缺少世间神通,也不庄严,所以说“这个说法几乎可以叫‘无髻神通之说’”。“神变”指神通和变化。这里用“变化”一词指变化神通,用“神通”一词指其余一切神通的作用。“只在恰当的场合”:正如世间神通的生起有其恰当场合,开示也是如此。以此表明,这不只是按说法次第的开示,也是按修行次第的开示。这在《清净道论》中已经说过,因此应依照那里所说的方法来理解,这是本意。巴利
68.Kevalāti lokiyābhiññāhi asammissā. Lokiyapañcābhiññāyopi sīlānaṃ ānisaṃso tadavinābhāvato. Tāpi dassetuṃ ākaṅkheyya ce…pe… evamādimāhāti yojanā. Āsavānaṃ anavasesappahānato arahattamaggoyeva visesato ‘‘āsavakkhayo’’ti vattabbataṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘āsavakkhaye kathite’’ti, aññathā sabbāpi chaḷabhiññā āsavakkhayo evāti. Imesaṃ guṇānanti lokiyābhiññānaṃ . Yathā purisassa muṇḍitaṃ sīsaṃ sikhāvirahitattā na sobhati, evaṃ desanāya sīsabhūtāpi aggamaggakathā lokiyābhiññārahitā na sobhatīti āha ‘‘ayaṃ kathā muṇḍābhiññākathā nāma bhaveyyā’’ti. Iddhivikubbanāti iddhi ca vikubbanā ca. Vikubbanaggahaṇena cettha vikubbaniddhimāha, iddhiggahaṇena tadaññaṃ sabbañca abhiññākiccaṃ. Yuttaṭṭhāneyevāti lokiyābhiññānaṃ nibbattanassa viya desanāya yuttaṭṭhāneyeva. Etena na kevalaṃ desanakkamenevāyaṃ desanā, atha kho paṭipattikkamenapīti dasseti. Visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.369) vuttā, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbāti adhippāyo.
69 以漏尽故:下分道所灭尽之后残余的诸漏,被阿拉汉道彻底断除。因为阿拉汉道不只灭尽诸漏,还灭尽其余一切烦恼,所以说“以一切烦恼的灭尽故”。这里举出“漏”只是作为代表,因为阿拉汉道不以漏为所缘,所以称为“无漏”。然而,因为在那里连一丝漏都不存在,所以说“远离诸漏”。“定”是以心为首要而说的,正如“修习心与慧”这句话的意旨。“从贪解脱,从无明解脱”:这应当理解为直接对立面的止息,而不是说其他不善法没有止息。现在,为了用经教证明这定与慧是贪和无明的对治法,说了“这已说”等话。“止的果”是止的成果:因为以世间止的修习引生观,而出世间的止有与之相应的果——心解脱。“观的果”,观的成就就是慧解脱。这里也是同样的道理。应理解为:不再像从他人听闻所得的智那样依赖他人、执取推论,而是以亲证的方式,由自己本身的慧直接现见,成为自证之智。因此说“不依赖他人而了知”。巴利
69.Āsavānaṃ khayāti heṭṭhimamaggena khepitāvasiṭṭhānaṃ āsavānaṃ arahattamaggena samucchindanato. Yasmā arahattamaggo na kevalaṃ āsaveyeva khepeti, atha kho avasiṭṭhe sabbakilesepi, tasmā āha ‘‘sabbakilesānaṃ khayā’’ti. Lakkhaṇamattañhettha āsavaggahaṇaṃ, āsavānaṃ ārammaṇabhāvassapi anupagamanato anāsavaṃ. Yasmā pana tattha āsavānaṃ lesopi natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘āsavavirahita’’nti. Samādhi vutto cetosīsena yathā ‘‘cittaṃ paññañca bhāvaya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 2.1.9) adhippāyo. Rāgato vimuttattā avijjāya vimuttattāti idaṃ ujuvipaccanīkapaṭippassaddhidassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, na tadaññesaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ appaṭippassaddhattā. Idāni tameva samādhipaññānaṃ rāgāvijjāpaṭipakkhataṃ āgamena dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttaṃ ceta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Samathaphalanti samathassa phalaṃ lokiyasamathabhāvanāya hi vipassanāgatāya āhitaphalassa lokuttarasamathassa sarikkhakaphalo cetovimutti. Vipassanāphalanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Attanoyevāti sutamayañāṇādinā viya parapaccayataṃ nayaggāhañca muñcitvā paratoghosānugatabhāvanādhigamabhūtatāya attanoyeva paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā sayambhuñāṇabhūtāyāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘aparappaccayena ñatvā’’ti.
把这一切总集起来显示:所谓“这一切”,就是指前面所说的全部十七种戒的功德,也就是“具戒者”等所有这些语句。就像对那些具有功德、又被正确圆满修成的事物来说,它们的功德自然会显现出来,因为那些功德本来就依赖于它们;同样,当以功德为主、适合修行这一点被显示出来时,那些功德也就显示出来了。因此说“把它们总集起来显示”。把已经说过的义理再说一遍,就是总结,所以说“作了总结”。“前”,是指在说法开始时。“这样说”,是指以“具足戒”等这样的方式所说的。“这一切”,是指“具足戒”等所有这些语句。“缘于此”,是指缘于具足戒比丘如前所说的十七种功德之分而说。这里正是就“如是所说者,即缘此而说”这句话,而说“把这一切戒的功德总集起来显示”。在此,起初以六种功德摄属欲界地之成就,其间隔以五种世间神通及色无色界地之成就,其余则以出世间地之成就;如是,此名为四地成就功德之戒,广大而有大威力,因此于圆满彼时,应以恭敬而行,不应放逸。巴利
Sabbampi tanti sabbampi sattarasavidhaṃ taṃ yathāvuttaṃ sīlānisaṃsaṃ. Yathā ānisaṃsavante sammadeva sampādite tadānisaṃsā dassitā eva honti tadāyattabhāvato, evaṃ ānisaṃsapadhānayogyabhāvena dassite tadānisaṃsā dassitā eva hontīti āha ‘‘sampiṇḍetvā dassento’’ti. Vuttasseva atthassa punavacanaṃ nigamananti vuttaṃ ‘‘nigamanaṃ āhā’’ti. Pubbeti desanārambhe. Evaṃ vuttanti ‘‘sampannasīlā’’ti evamādinā ākārena vuttaṃ. Idaṃ sabbampīti idaṃ ‘‘sampannasīlā’’tiādikaṃ sabbampi vacanaṃ. Etaṃ paṭiccāti etaṃ sampannasīlassa bhikkhuno yathāvuttasattarasavidhānisaṃsabhāgitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Idameva hi ‘‘iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti vacanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sabbampi taṃ sīlānisaṃsaṃ sampiṇḍetvā dassento’’ti vuttaṃ. Etthaādito chahi ānisaṃsehi parittabhūmikā sampatti gahitā, tadantaraṃ pañcahi lokiyābhiññāhi ca mahaggatabhūmikā, itarehi lokuttarabhūmikāti evaṃ catubhūmikasampadānisaṃsasīlaṃ nāmetaṃ mahantaṃ mahānubhāvaṃ, tasmā taṃsampādane sakkaccakāritā appamattena bhavitabbaṃ.
7. 《衣经》的注释巴利
7. Vatthasuttavaṇṇanā
70 70. 能遮蔽、能居住、能隐藏的地方,就是衣服。它虽然和度量相似,但并不完全等同,而是接近于衡量,这就是所比。通过它让人产生比知,就是比喻;用比喻来让人理解的言辞,就是比喻语。在某部经中。义,就是被比喻的义理。先说比喻,紧接着说义理,然后再一次说比喻,这被称为以比喻围绕义理来显示;在以义理围绕比喻的地方,道理也是一样。现在为了说明这四种方式都按照经中传承的方式来呈现,就说诸比丘,譬如等语。其中,两座房屋是指两座相邻的房屋。有正门是指正对之门。巴利
70. Chādetabbaṃ ṭhānaṃ vasati paṭicchādetīti vatthaṃ. Yaṃ samānaṃ viya na sabbaso minoti, mānassa pana samīpe, taṃ upamānaṃ. Upamīyati etāyāti upamā, upamāya bodhakavacanaṃ upamāvacanaṃ. Katthaci sutte. Atthanti upamiyatthaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ upamaṃ vatvā tadanantaraṃ atthaṃ vatvā puna upamaṃ vadanto ‘‘upamāya atthaṃ parivāretvā dassetī’’ti vutto. Atthena upamaṃ parivāretvāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Idāni te cattāropi pakāre sutte āgatanayeneva dassento ‘‘seyyathāpissu, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha dve agārāti dve paṭivissakagharā. Sadvārāti sammukhadvārā.
“彼如此”的意思是:这位世尊正是这样一位说法者,他既通过展示比喻,也通过种种不同的方式来说法。为了说明这个道理——对某些应受调教的人来说,义理之所以容易通达,首先是因为先示比喻,同样,首先是因为先显义理,有时是以比喻围绕义理,有时是以义理围绕比喻——所以用“此法适用于一切处”这句话来显示这个含义。“法界”指一切知智。因为一切知智含摄在法界之中,它能对前面所说的法以及一切所应了知的法,如实地精勤、如实觉悟、令他人觉悟,所以称为“界”;或者说,一切法都依此法界而安住、被持,又在一切方面被了知、被传达,所以叫“法界”。又因为此智是通过善巧通达真理而获得的,所以是“极善通达”;或者说,就以此智极善通达所应了知之境的程度而言,此智本身也就同样极善通达了,因此说“极善通达”。巴利
Svāyanti so ayaṃ evaṃ upamādassanavasenapi nānānayenapi dhammadesako bhagavā. Ekaccānaṃ veneyyānaṃ atthassa sukhāvabodho paṭhamaṃ upamādassane hetu, evaṃ paṭhamaṃ atthadassane, upamāya atthaparivāraṇe, atthena upamāparivāraṇe cā’’ti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘esa nayo sabbatthā’’ti iminā. Dhammadhātuyāti sabbaññutaññāṇassa. Tañhi dhammadhātupariyāpannattā yathāvuttadhamme ca sabbepi ñeyyadhamme ca padahati yathāsabhāvato bujjhati bodheti cāti dhātu, dhīyanti vā dhammā etāya sabbākārato ñāyanti ñāpiyanti cāti dhammadhātu. Tassā pana suṭṭhu saccasampaṭivedhavasena laddhattā suppaṭividdhattāti, yadaggena vā ñeyyaṃ tāya suppaṭividdhaṃ, tadaggena sāpissa suppaṭividdhā evāti āha ‘‘suppaṭividdhattā’’ti.
为了说明本性清净的心会被外来的烦恼染污,就用被弄脏的布作比喻,因此说“本性清净的布”。“由尘等”这里,“尘”指的是微尘。“等”这个字,包括了细尘、灯烟之类让布变得不干净的东西。凡是因此彻底被染污、毁坏、失去清净的,就叫作“染污”;就是被那种染污——也就是尘土之类——弄脏,因为颜色被破坏而变得污浊。污垢就是墨渍。所谓“肤垢”,是指盐霜之类附着在皮肤表面的身体污垢。“等”这个字,还包括了泪、唾液、鼻涕等身体上的其他污垢。“因已执取”:是因为覆盖而执持。“能令有情染着,所以叫染料”:染料就是能染的东西,就像愤怒本身就是愤怒的状态。“作意令染入”:就是投入其中。“为了染成青色”:为了变成青色。“以菩提叶青等”:“等”字包括了黑色、褐色等。姜黄、岩黄等是黄色染料。紫胶、苏木汁等是红色染料。粗制红花、紫矿树胶等是浅红色染料。染出来的颜色黯淡无光。所以说“只是色泽不清净”。“如是”就是指这种染坏的颜色。在那件布上,染料本身极为清净,为什么染出来的颜色却不干净呢?这是为了说明染料并没有过失。因此说“然而是因为”等等。巴利
Pakatipariyodātassa cittassa āgantukehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭhabhāvadassanatthaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhavatthadassananti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘pakatiparisuddhaṃ vattha’’nti. Rajādināti ettharajo nāma reṇu. Ādi-saddena aṇutajjāridhūmādikaṃ vatthassa aparisuddhikāraṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sabbaso kilissati vinassati visuddhi etenāti saṃkileso, tena saṃkilesena paṃsurajādinā saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ vaṇṇavināsanena vidūsitaṃ. Malaṃ masi. Jallikā vuccati loṇapaṭalādi chaviyā upari ṭhitaṃ sarīramalaṃ. Ādisaddena sarīrajallameva assukheḷasiṅghāṇikādikaṃ tadaññamalaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Gahitattāti pariyonandhanavasena gahitattā. Rajanti sattā tenāti raṅgaṃ, raṅgameva raṅgajātaṃ yathā kopameva kopajātaṃ. Upanāmeyyāti pakkhipeyya. Nīlakatthāyāti nīlavaṇṇatthāya. Palāsanīlādiketi ādi-saddena kāḷasāmādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Haliddikakudhaselādike pītakaraṅge. Lākhāpattaṅgarasādike lohitakaraṅge. Mahārajanaloddakandulādike mandarattaraṅge. Duṭṭhu rajitavaṇṇaṃ apabhassaraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aparisuddhavaṇṇamevassā’’ti. Īdisanti durattavaṇṇaṃ. Tasmiṃ vatthe raṅgajātaṃ sayaṃ suparisuddhaṃ samānaṃ kissa hetu kena rattavaṇṇaṃ aparisuddhaṃ hotīti raṅgajātassa niddosataṃ vadati. Tenāha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi.
在说明杂染这一面时,本来应该只用没有被染污的衣服来作比喻,这个道理其实已经很明显了。可是这里却举出被染污的衣服作例子,用意是想问:“是不是还有别的什么差别呢?”所以才接着问“那又是为什么”等等。对方为了显示还有别的义理上的差别,就说了“为了显示精进有大果报”等等。在这里,“在说明净化染污心的方法时,应当以被染污的衣服作比喻”,这是一个立论;“为了显示精进有大果报”,是提出这个立论的理由。“正如”等语是显示随顺相应的义理。“在那里不像生来黑色的(衣服)那样”等语是显示相反相对的义理。而“像被污垢沾取的铜钵”等语,则应当看作相似的比喻。“这样,心也”等语,是把能喻用来比配所喻,以说明比喻的义理。其中,“本来”是指非造作的、自然的状态。“那”是指心。这是就心的存在状态没有差别而笼统地举出心来。因此说“在一切(心)中”。只是明净的,不是杂染的,因为不与杂染法相应的缘故。难道不是在作用心和异熟相续中,能获得特殊的成立吗?否则,已作之法的毁灭和应作之法的获得就会成为不可能了。虽然能获得,但它的杂染是轮回的远因,并不是不清净;它的不杂染是还灭的远因,也并不是清净。然而,“被随烦恼所染污”这一说法,是就堪受随烦恼的心而说的,不是就异熟相续而说的。因此说“诸比丘,此心是极光净的”,以及“只是明净的”。而“那又”等语,是就它们属于自己的相续而言,仅仅从同一类的方式来说的,并不是说异熟法具有烦恼。或者,“被随烦恼所染污”这一说法,是以随烦恼为因而说明存在于其中的特殊成立,不应像“杂染法”等(《法集论》77双论母)那样,看作具有那(杂染)法。所谓“被净化”,是指以观慧次第从一切随烦恼中解脱出来。能够在最高道的一刹那使其更加明净,从此不再被随烦恼所染污。“这样”等语,是对所说义理的总结。巴利
Saṃkilesapakkhaṃ dassentena asaṃkiliṭṭhameva vatthaṃ udāharitabbanti pākaṭoyamattho, saṃkiliṭṭhavatthanidassanena pana ‘‘siyā nu kho aññopi koci viseso’’ti adhippāyena pucchati ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādinā. Itaro atthavisesoti dassento ‘‘vāyāmamahapphaladassanattha’’ntiādimāha. Ettha ca saṃkiliṭṭhacittavisodhanavidhāne saṃkiliṭṭhavatthaṃ nidassatabbanti paṭiññā, vāyāmamahapphaladassanatthanti hetuattho. Yathā hītiādi anvayattho. Na tattha jātikāḷake viyātiādi byatirekattho. Sadisūdāharaṇaṃ pana malaggahitakaṃsapātiādi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ cittampītiādi opammatthassa upameyyaupanayanaṃ. Tattha pakatiyāti akittimena sabhāvena. Tanti cittaṃ. Sāmaññaggahaṇañcetaṃ cittabhāvāvisesato. Tenāha ‘‘sakalepī’’ti. Paṇḍarameva na saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ saṃkilesehi asamannāgatabhāvato. Nanu kiriyāmayacittehi vipākasantāne visesādhānaṃ labbhati, aññathā katavināsā katabbhāgamā āpajjeyyuṃ? Kiñcāpi labbhati, tassa saṃkileso vaṭṭupanissayo, asuddhi vā na hoti, asaṃkileso vivaṭṭupanissayo, visuddhi vā na hoti eva. Upakkiliṭṭhanti panetaṃ upakkilesanārahassa cittassa vasena vuttaṃ, na vipākapabandhassa. Tenāha ‘‘pabhassaramidaṃ bhikkhave citta’’nti, ‘‘paṇḍaramevā’’ti ca. Tañca khoti pana sakasantatipariyāpannatāya nesaṃ kevalaṃ ekattanayavasena vuttaṃ, na vipākadhammānaṃ kilesāsamaṅgibhāvato. Atha vā upakkiliṭṭhanti iminā upakkilesahetu tattha vijjamānaṃ visesādhānamāha, na ‘‘saṃkiliṭṭhā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 77.dukamātikā) viya taṃsamaṅgitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Visodhiyamānanti vipassanāpaññāya anukkamena sabbupakkilesehi vimociyamānaṃ. Sakkā aggamaggakkhaṇe pabhassarataraṃ kātuṃ, yato na puna upakkilissati. Evantiādi vuttassevatthassa nigamanaṃ.
以令恶趣圆满的方式去行,就是“行道”。这行道本身,因为烦恼的逼迫、烧恼等,就是忧恼之苦;或者说,因为趣向是卑劣的、是流转,所以叫“恶趣”;又因为它是恶趣的因,所以叫“恶趣”。再者,这行道本身就是恶趣,因为它像乾闼婆一样,或者因为它是那恶趣所成就的,所以是卑劣的,而且是苦的趣向,所以叫“恶趣”。“染污心”:这是为了显示那行道就是恶趣的性质,不是为了说明别的差别。因为心没有被染污的人,不会去杀生等。“染污心”:因贪求而完全染污的心。“奉使”:信使之工作,即持在家人的书信或消息前往各处。“送信行”:被差遣至各家各户的小步行。“营医业”:在戒律不允许之处,因贪求而为在家众制作医药。“以赠竹、施钵等”:通过赠竹、施钵、赠花等邪命方式而活命者。“一切”:依《分别论》中所说“有非行,有非境”等,以所行圆满了一切非行与非境。巴利
Duṭṭhagatiparipūraṇavasena paṭipajjanaṃ paṭipatti. Sā eva kilesadarathapariḷāhādivasena upāyāsadukkhā, kucchitā vā gati pavatti, duggatihetūti vā duggati, duggatiyā pana paṭipattiyā gandhabbato, tassā vā nipphannabhāvato kucchito, dukkhā ca gatīti duggati. Saṃkiliṭṭhacittoti idaṃ tassā paṭipattiyā duggatibhāvadassanatthaṃ, na visesanatthaṃ. Na hi asaṃkiliṭṭhacittassa pāṇaghātādivasena pavatti. Saṃkiliṭṭhacittoti lābhāsāya sabbaso kiliṭṭhacitto . Dūteyyapahiṇagamananti dūteyyaṃ vuccati dutakammaṃ, gihīnaṃ paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā gahetvā tattha tattha gamanaṃ, pahiṇagamanaṃ gharāgharaṃ pesitassa khuddakagamanaṃ, dūteyyagamanaṃ pahiṇagamanañca gacchati. Vejjakammanti ananuññāte ṭhāne lābhāsāya gahaṭṭhānaṃ bhesajjaṃ karoti. Saṅghabhedakathā parato āgamissati. Veḷudānādīhīti veḷudānapattadānapupphadānādīhi micchājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti. Sakalampīti ‘‘atthi anācāro, atthi agocaro’’tiādinā vibhaṅge (vibha. 513, 514) āgataṃ sabbampi anācāraṃ agocarañca caraṇavasena paripūreti.
说完“也会去地狱……乃至饿鬼界”之后,为了说明他去饿鬼界的情形,就接着说“成为名叫沙门夜叉的”等等。巴利
‘‘Nirayampi…pe… pettivisayampi gacchatī’’ti vatvā tattha pettivisayagamanaṃ dassento ‘‘samaṇayakkho nāma hotī’’tiādimāha.
在白分这边,所谓清净,就是一切方面都清净,没有染污。正因为清净,所以才是极洁白,也就是光耀的意思。唯成善染之色,就是说它唯是极善所染的颜色。唯成清净之色,则是说比如它的青色也应当是清净的等等;正是针对这类意思才说应知与黑分中所说的完全相反。至于染色料等语句,也应当按那里所说的方式来理解。在行道善趣等当中应当说明的内容,则应知是与行道恶趣等中所说的相反。清净心,就是意乐清净。圆满十善业道,这句话是为了显示与黑分中圆满十不善业道之说相对而说的。正如在那里,通过执取贪欲、嗔恨、邪见,按业道相应的方式,也意在含摄在家者那种尚未达到业道的邪行道;同样地,在这里也应理解为:通过执取无贪欲、无嗔、正见,显示了依无贪、无嗔、无痴而转起的在家者正行道已被含摄,而不是说只有已达到业道的才算被含摄。人之伟大性,是指以种姓、容貌、财富、权贵等为主,在人类当中所具有的伟大状态。以十种处而超越其他诸天神,就是天伟大性。因为行道是在与善趣结缘的语境中说的,所以在陈述他修习不来道时,是把不来道的修习拉到此位而说的。由于以所取之执取而意指乐受体验之处,因其缺无故不取无想有,而说于十梵天界等。巴利
Sukkapakkhe parisuddhanti sabbaso visuddhaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ. Parisuddhattā eva pariyodātaṃ, pabhassaranti attho. Surattavaṇṇamevassāti suṭṭhu rattavaṇṇameva assa. Parisuddhavaṇṇamevassāti nīlavaṇṇopissa parisuddho ca bhaveyyāti evamādiṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kaṇhapakkhe vuttapaccanīkeneva veditabbā’’ti. Raṅgajātantiādi pana tattha vuttavaseneva veditabbaṃ. Paṭipattisugatiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paṭipattiduggatiādīsu vuttavipariyāyena veditabbaṃ. Parisuddhacittoti suddhāsayo. Dasa kusalakammapathe paripūretīti idaṃ kaṇhapakkhe ‘‘dasa akusalakammapathe paripūretī’’ti vuttassa paṭipakkhadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Yathā hi tattha abhijjhābyāpādamicchādiṭṭhiggahaṇena kammapathasaṃsandananayena kammapathaṃ appattāya ca agāriyassa tathārūpāya micchāpaṭipattiyā saṅgaho icchito, evaṃ idhāpi anabhijjhāabyāpādasammādiṭṭhiggahaṇena alobhādosāmohavasena pavattā agāriyassa sammāpaṭipatti saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, na kammapathappattāvāti. Manussamahantatanti jātirūpabhogādhipateyyādivasena manussesu mahantabhāvaṃ. Dasahi ṭhānehi aññesaṃ devānaṃ abhibhavo devamahantatā. Paṭipatti sugatiyā bhājiyamānattā ‘‘anāgāmimaggaṃ bhāvetī’’ti tathā anāgāmibhāvanaṃ pāpetvā ṭhapitā. Gahitaggahaṇena sukhānubhavaṭṭhānassa adhippetattā tadabhāvato asaññibhavaṃ anādiyanto ‘‘dasasu vā brahmabhavanesū’’tiādimāha.
71 71. 对自己财物的欲贪,以“贪求”为义,就是贪欲;贪求就是它的意思。对他人财物的欲贪,因为是不正当地贪著,所以叫不平等贪。为了说明贪欲和不平等贪也有差别,才说“或者”等话。其中,自己的所有物以及与之类似、适合的地方,是适当处。凡是有人请求,或者不费力就能得到的,是已得处。他人的妻子、应受尊重的妇女,是不适当处。凡是不该希求的,或者对它希求就会招来灾祸的,是未得处。长老,指玛哈桑卡拉奇达长老,是他把义注书写到贝叶上的。他在弟子们讨论时这样说过。在这部经里,因为意在说明心的染污,所以看不出把这两者分开解释。因此才说“于适当”等话。由于以不正作意而生起,并且现在和未来都只会产生苦,所以没有任何贪不能叫不平等。说“以贪求为义”,是指对任何所缘,无论适当、不适当还是未得,以贪求、以希求的方式生起的渴爱,就是贪欲,以此显示它和贪没有差别。因此才说“这二者意义相同,只是音节不同”。令坏失,就是破坏它本性上的无染,使它变得不清净。因此才说“不让它光辉”。“愿这些众生被灭绝、被毁灭”——以这种对众生起伤害相而转起的心,就是嗔恨,这里说它有九种嗔恨事。而忿怒因为还会对诸行转起,所以说有十种嗔恨事。两者本质上都是恚,只是因为转起的方式不同才分开说。它只是以愤怒的方式缠缚住心,就像“他曾骂我、曾打我”等等。巴利
71.Sakabhaṇḍe chandarāgo abhijjhāyanaṭṭhena abhijjhā, abhijjhāyanāti attho. Parabhaṇḍe chandarāgo visamaṃ lubbhatīti visamalobho. Evampi abhijjhāvisamalobhānaṃ viseso hotīti dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha attano santakaṃ taṃsadisañca yuttaṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ yācitaṃ, appakasirena vā sakkā laddhuṃ, taṃ pattaṭṭhānaṃ. Paradāragarudārāti ayuttaṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ apatthaniyaṃ, yassa vā patthanāya byasanaṃ āpajjati, taṃ appattaṭṭhānaṃ. Theroti mahāsaṅgharakkhitatthero, yena aṭṭhakathā potthakaṃ āropitā. So hi antevāsikesu sākacchantesu evamāha. Sopi imasmiṃyeva sutte vinibbhogo na labbhati cittasaṃkilesassa adhippetattā. Tenāha ‘‘yutte vā’’tiādi. Ayonisomanasikāravasena uppajjanato sampatti āyatiñca dukkhasseva uppādanato na koci lobho avisamo nāma. Abhijjhāyanaṭṭhenāti yassa kassaci ārammaṇassa yuttassa ayuttassa appattassa ca abhijjāyanavasena abhipatthanāvasena ca pavattā taṇhā abhijjhāti lobhato nibbisesanti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘ekatthametaṃ byañjanameva nāna’’nti. Dūsetīti sabhāvasantaṃ asaṃkilesaṃ vināseti avisuddhaṃ karoti. Tenāha ‘‘obhāsituṃ na detī’’ti. ‘‘Ime sattā ucchijjantu vinassantū’’ti sattesu byāpajjanākārappavattiyā byāpādo navavidhaāghātavatthusambhavo vutto. Kodho pana saṅkhāresupi pavattanato dasavidhaāghātavatthusambhavo vutto. Ubhayampi paṭighameva, pavattanānattato bhinditvā vutto. Kujjhanavaseneva cittapariyonandhano ‘‘akkocchi maṃ avadhi ma’’ntiādinā.
善巧完成的行为叫作善作;而“抹恩”这种心态,专门破坏那种以“先前曾做过”为特征的功德,就像用布擦掉沾在身上的水一样。“抹恩”之所以叫“抹恩”,正是因为它有抹掉别人功德的作用。现在,为了把前面“对于出家者……”等简略说过的内容详细展开,所以接着说了“出家者也有……”等等。以坐着谈论、反复谈论等方式来说法,这叫“说法理趣”;或者也可以理解为“一味”等法理。“七部论”中的善巧,就是对“说法理趣及论书”的善巧。“等”这个字,还包含了在律藏次第和四大部经典中的善巧。“不恭敬”就是没有恭敬心。用“正如这样”这句话来说明:就像“抹恩”这样染污心一样,“嫉妒”也这样染污心,所以显示它们都是随烦恼。“趣处不定”,是因为没有固定的趣向和决定性。“等”这个字,还包含了这种情况:看到久出家、出家很久的人,就压制他说“你在这个教法里出家,我也出家了;你只是持戒而已,我也一样”等等。“争胜执担”就是把“你和我有什么差别”这种不平等的事看成平等,然后执取为平起平坐。“讥嫌”就是嫉妒。隐藏自己的成就,是因为不能忍受别人也共享这份成就,所以说“不能忍受与他人共享”。因为抓住了原因,结果也就自然被抓住了。如果不是这样,那些用别的方式表露自己的人就是伪诈者,也有人叫他们“奸商”。蛇头鱼尾是一种鱼,名叫“广长鱼”,所以说“名为广长鱼”等等。“住学徒”就是近住的弟子。巴利
Suṭṭhu kataṃ karaṇaṃ sukataṃ, tassa pubbakāritālakkhaṇassa guṇassa vināsano udakapuñchaniyā viya sarīrānugataṃ udakaṃ puñchanto makkho. Tathā hi so paresaṃ guṇānaṃ makkhanaṭṭhena ‘‘makkho’’ti vuccati. Idāni anagāriyassa vātiādinā saṅkhepena vuttatthaṃ vitthārena dassetuṃ ‘‘anagāriyopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nisinnakathāparikathādivasena dhammassa kathā dhammakathānayo, ekattādidhammanīti eva vā. Pakaraṇaṃ satta pakaraṇāni, tattha kosallaṃ dhammakathānayapakaraṇakosallaṃ. Ādi-saddena vinayakkame catūsu mahānikāyesu ca kosallaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Acittīkatoti cittīkārarahito. Yathā cāyanti iminā yathāyaṃ makkho cittaṃ dūseti, evaṃ paḷāsopi cittaṃ dūseti, tasmā upakkilesoti dasseti. Aniyatā gati niyāmokkamanābhāvato. Ādi-saddena ‘‘rattaññū cirapabbajite puggale ajjhottharitvā ‘tvampi imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajito, ahampi pabbajito, tvampi sīlamatte ṭhito ahampī’ti’’ evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Yugaggāhagāhīti ‘‘tava vā mama vā ko viseso’’ti asamampi samaṃ katvā samadhuraggāhagaṇhanako. Khīyanā usūyanā. Attano sampattiyā nigūhanaṃ tassa parehi sādhāraṇabhāvāsahanena hotīti ‘‘parehi sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ asahamānaṃ’’icceva vuttaṃ. Kāraṇe hi gahite phalampi gahitameva hotīti. Aññathā attano pavedanakapuggalo kerāṭiko, ‘‘nekatikavāṇijo’’tipi vadanti. Sappamukhā macchavālā ekā macchajāti āyatanamaccho. Tenāha ‘‘āyatanamaccho nāmā’’tiādi. Baddhacaroti antevāsī.
或者,因为他的本性完全不受折伏,就像背着重物一样僵硬,又像不肯弯曲的拐杖,是个不肯低头的人,所以叫“如负重者”。“更增上作者”,是指无论别人做了恶行还是善行,他都要在那之上再加倍去造作。为了自己装饰等目的,而享用别人所做的饰品等物,或者随自己的能力学习、讲说。虽然确实有因摄受二部等而生起的、可以亲近的慢,但因为它属于杂染那一方,所以这里说“不依附慢”。巴利
Sabbaso amadditasabhāvena vā tabharitabhattasadisassa thaddhabhāvassa anonamitadaṇḍasadisatāya paggahitasiraanivātavuttikārassa ca karaṇato vā tabharita…pe… karaṇo. Taduttarikaraṇoti yaṃ yena kataṃ duccaritaṃ vā sucaritaṃ vā, taduttari, tassa dviguṇaṃ vā karaṇo. Attano maṇḍanādiatthaṃ parena kataṃ alaṅkārādiṃ. Pariyāpuṇāti vā katheti vā attano balānurūpaṃ. Kāmaṃ nikāyadvayaggahaṇādivasena pavatto sevitabbamāno eva, tathāpissa saṃkilesapakkhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘mānaṃ anissāyā’’ti.
以“我是更优胜的”这类想法来把心抬起来,这就是“凭抬高自己”。先是把自己摆到和某人同等的位置,随后又觉得自己比对方更高、更超胜,这样生起的慢就是“过慢”。“执取为傲醉”的方式,是依出身等而自我陶醉的方式,从义理上说,那也还是慢。放逸,就是同样状态生起的心念。巴利
Uṇṇativasenāti ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā cittassa paggahaṇavasena. Pubbe kenaci attānaṃ sadisaṃ katvā pacchā tato adhikato dahanato uppajjanako atimāno. Madaggahaṇākāro jātiādiṃ paṭicca majjanākāro, sopi atthato māno eva. Pamādo tathāpavatto cittuppādo.
因此,为了说明把贪等放在开头的原因,才提出这个问题。所谓“由最初生起”,是指在各个生存处中,它都是最先产生的。就像众生对自己所证得的禅那等殊胜境界加以省察一样,对自己所获得的投生处所生起的贪爱,也总是最先出现的。所以说“一切众生”等等。所谓“其余随缘生起”,是说嗔等其他烦恼随各自的因缘而生起,不像贪那样可以断定某者之后必定是某者,它们没有固定的生起顺序,这就是这句话的意思。那么,心的随烦恼就只有这十六种吗,还是另有其他?针对这个追问,为了显示还有其他随烦恼,才说了“na ca ete”等话。既然如此,为什么这里只说了这几种呢?为了显示(这是举要的)方法,才说“etena pana…pe… veditabbā”。应当知道,由此已经含摄了昏沉睡眠、掉举悔恨、疑、自赞毁他、惊悚、胆怯、无惭无愧、极欲、恶欲、多欲等。巴利
Tasmā lobhamādiṃ katvā dassetīti lobhassa ādito gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ vibhāvetukāmo pucchati. Paṭhamuppattitoti tattha tattha bhave sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppajjanato. Sattānañhi yathādhigataṃ jhānādivisesaṃ ārabbha paccavekkhaṇā viya yathāladdhaṃ upapatibhavaṃ ārabbha nikanti eva. Tenāha ‘‘sabbasattāna’’ntiādi. Yathāsambhavaṃ itareti itare byāpādādayo yathāpaccayaṃ uppajjanti, lobhassa viya ādito asukassa anantaraṃ asukoti vā na nesaṃ niyamo atthīti attho. Kiṃ pana ete soḷaseva cittassa upakkilesā, udāhu aññepi santīti anuyogaṃ sandhāya aññepi santīti dassento ‘‘na ca ete’’tiādimāha. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ettakā eva idha vuttāti. Nayadassanavasenāti dassento āha ‘‘etena pana…pe… veditabbā’’ti. Tena thinamiddhauddhaccakukkucca-vicikicchā-attukkaṃsana-paravabbhanachambhitattā- bhīrukatā-ahirikānottappa-atticchatā-pāpicchatā-mahicchatādayo saṅgahitāti veditabbaṃ.
72 先通过显示杂染的状态,把前面概括说到的杂染分开来详细说明,这就是“揭示了杂染之后”。说到“显示清净”时,这里也是同样的道理。“如此了知后”,是指以加行慧和下面两个道(初果道、二果道)的智慧,从自性、集、灭、以及灭的方法这四个方面,如实了知“贪欲和不正当的贪,必定是心的随烦恼”。“舍断”在这里特指彻底断除,所以注释者说“以正断的方式,由圣道舍断”。“由圣道”是指由不来道(三果道)。因为在这里的所有场合中,所意指的断除就是由不来道来断除的。“烦恼次第”在这里是指宣说诸烦恼的顺序。“道次第”则既是四种圣道的宣说顺序,也是依照那种宣说而修行的次第,又是依那种修行而生起圣道的次第。其中,不观待道次第而显示那些烦恼由那条道断除,这就是烦恼次第,而不是烦恼生起的次第,在这里是宣说的顺序——为了说明这一点,所以说了“贪欲和不正当的贪”等。而依照道的先后顺序,哪些烦恼由哪条道断除,为了说明“由那条道断除那些烦恼,就是按道次第来显示断除”,所以说了“由入流道”等。巴利
72.Saṃkilesaṃdassetvāti saṃkiliṭṭhavattanidassanena saṅkhepena vuttaṃ saṃkilesaṃ vibhāgena dassetvā. Vodānaṃ dassentoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Evaṃ jānitvāti ‘‘abhijjhā visamalobho ekanteneva cittassa uppakkileso’’ti sabhāvato samudayato nirodhato nirodhūpāyato ca pubbabhāgapaññāya ceva heṭṭhimamaggadvayapaññāya ca jānitvā. Pajahatīti ettha accantappahānameva adhippetanti dassento ‘‘samucchedappahānavasena ariyamaggena pajahatī’’ti āha. Ariyamaggenāti anāgāmimaggena. Tena hi pahānaṃ idha sabbavāresu adhippetaṃ. Kilesapaṭipāṭi idha kilesānaṃ desanākkamo. Maggapaṭipāṭipana catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ desanākkamopi tāya desanāya paṭipajjanakkamopi tāya paṭipattiyā uppattikkamopi. Tattha ye ye kilesā yena yena maggena pahīyanti, maggapaṭipāṭiṃ anoloketvā tesaṃ tesaṃ kilesānaṃ tena tena maggena pahānadassanaṃ kilesapaṭipāṭi na kilesānaṃ uppattikkamo idha desanākkamo cāti dassento ‘‘abhijjhā visamalobho’’tiādimāha. Yena yena pana maggena ye ye kilesā pahīyanti maggānupubbiyā, tena tena maggena tesaṃ tesaṃ kilesānaṃ pahānadassanaṃ maggapaṭipāṭiyā pahānadassananti dassento ‘‘sotāpattimaggenā’’tiādimāha.
这里说“在这个地方”,是指在“诸比丘,那位比丘”等语所引出的这个断除段落中。“这些烦恼”,就是前面所说的那些烦恼。它们或者是入流道所断的,或者是其余诸道所断的——这是依前面所示诸道的次第而说。其中,那些第三道所断的烦恼,由不来道断除即可,无须另说。然而在此处,对于那些被纳入下道所断的烦恼,若要稍后才说明其纳入此处的理由,本不该取最上道所断的烦恼,那为何偏偏只取第三道所断的呢?为了这一点,[论师]才说“这是此处从传承之道而来的意趣”。意思是:这就是这部经在这个地方,依师承解说的方式而来的义理,即真实之义。为了在后面说明下道所断的烦恼在此处被纳入的理由,并显示不取最上道所断烦恼的合理性,所以又说“而它”等。“以它”是指以第四道。“其余的”是指嗔恚等。“那些也”是就覆等烦恼而说的。“那些令它们生起的心”,是指能令覆等烦恼生起的心。其中,能令覆、恼、嫉、悭生起的是两种嗔恚心;尤其,一个人是凭五种欲贪而成谄、成诳的,而这五种欲贪正是被不来道彻底无余断除的,所以经文说“那些令它们生起的心未断除”。它们也被善断除了,这就是此句相互关联的意思。“那”是指以第一道断除,前后并不相连,因为这里“如其所限”这个限定词是表示三道的意思。对三宝的证净,就像圣者所喜爱的戒一样,是入流者的支分;而那些证净因为是断除之后才在后面说到的,所以有人认为这里所说的断除只是镇伏断。这只是他们的一厢情愿而已,因为按照前面所说的断除,证净的有限断除已经得到了说明,而这个道理在前面也已经从道理上阐明过了。巴利
Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāneti ‘‘sa kho so, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’tiādinā āgato imasmiṃ pahānavāre. Ime kilesāti ime yathāvuttā kilesā. Sotāpattimaggavajjhā vā hontu sesamaggavajjhā vāheṭṭhā dassitamaggapaṭipāṭivasena. Tattha pana ye tatiyamaggavajjhā, tesaṃ anāgāmimaggeneva pahāne vattabbaṃ natthi, yesaṃ panettha heṭṭhimamaggavajjhānaṃ idha saṅgahe kāraṇaṃ pacchā vattukāmena aggamaggavajjhānaṃ anādiyitvā kasmā tatiyamaggavajjhānameva gahaṇaṃ katanti āha ‘‘ayamettha paveṇimaggāgato sambhavo’’ti, ayaṃ imassa suttassa etasmiṃ ṭhāne ācariyapaveṇiyā kathāmaggo tato āgato atthasambhavo atthatatvanti attho. Tattha heṭṭhimamaggavajjhānaṃ idha saṅgahe kāraṇaṃ pacchā vattukāmo aggamaggavajjhānaṃ aggahaṇe yuttiṃ dassento ‘‘so cā’’tiādimāha. Tenāti catutthamaggena. Sesānanti byāpādādīnaṃ . Yepīti makkhādike sandhāyāha. Taṃsamuṭṭhāpakacittānanti tesaṃ makkhādīnaṃ samuṭṭhāpakacittuppādānaṃ. Tattha makkha-paḷāsa-issā-macchariya-samuṭṭhāpakaṃ paṭighadvayacittaṃ, visesato pañcakāmaguṇalobhena saṭho māyāvī ca hoti, pañcakāmaguṇikarāgo ca anāgāmimaggeneva niravasesato pahīyati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃsamuṭṭhāpakacittānaṃ appahīnattā’’ti. Tepi suppahīnā hontīti sambandho. Tanti paṭhamamaggeneva pahānaṃ pubbāparena na sandhiyati ‘‘yathodhi kho’’ti ettha odhivacanassa maggattayavācakattā. Ratanattaye aveccappasādo nāma ariyakantasīlaṃ viya sotāpannassa aṅgāni, te ca pahānato pacchā niddiṭṭhā, tasmā idha vuttappahānaṃ vikkhambhanapahānamevāti keci vadanti. Tesaṃ icchāmattameva yathāvuttapahānasseva vasena aveccappasādānaṃ odhiso pahānassa vibhāvitattā, svāyamattho heṭṭhā yuttitopi pakāsitoyeva.
74 应当逐句配合理解。因为即使对每一种随烦恼,从它的自性等方面去观察,也能成为出离之门,这一点前面也已经解释过了。说了以不来道断除之后,因为净信已被提起,所以接着说“以不来道获得了出世间的净信”。如果是这样,那为什么又说“世间净信生起”呢?因为通过“彼世尊是如此这般……”等方式生起的净信是世间的,只有以涅槃为所缘的才是出世间的净信。借由“彼世尊是如此这般……”等语句来显示世间净信,再借由“证净”一词来显示出世间净信,这样就是显示世间与出世间相杂的净信。如实了知三宝功德之后生起的净信,就是证净。然而,由于它是依道而生,所以不为任何事物所动摇、所破坏,因此说“以不动、不坏”。其中,出世间的证净能彻底摧破对佛功德等的愚痴,在那里是以作用的方式生起;世间的证净则是以所缘的方式,缘取那些功德而生起。那种方式,就是它生起的方式。随念处,就是随念的业处。巴利
74.Ekamekena padena yojetabbaṃ, yato ekamekassapi upakkilesassa sabhāvādito dassanaṃ niyyānamukhaṃ hoti, tathā ceva heṭṭhā saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Anāgāmimaggavasena pahānaṃ vatvā pasādassa uddhaṭattā vuttaṃ ‘‘anāgāmimaggena lokuttarappasādo āgato’’ti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘lokiyo uppajjatī’’ti vuttanti? ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinayappavattassa lokiyattā. Nibbānārammaṇo eva hi lokuttaro pasādo. ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā’’tiādivacanena lokiyaṃ, aveccappasādavacanena lokuttaranti lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ pasādaṃ dassento. Avecca ratanattayaguṇe yāthāvato ñatvā pasādo aveccappasādo. So pana yasmā maggenāgatattā kenaci akampaniyo appadhaṃsiyo ca hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘acalena accutenā’’ti. Tattha lokuttaro sabbaso buddhaguṇādīsu sammohaṃ viddhaṃsento tattha kiccato pavattati, itaro ārammaṇavasena te ārabbha. Taṃ vidhinti taṃ tassa uppannappakāraṃ. Anussatiṭṭhānānīti anussatikammaṭṭhānāni.
75 “喜等”中的“等”字,把智等也包括进来了。因为盗贼经常出没的地方是边境,所以就拿边境来指代。就像国王在审察:“在某个地方,这些盗贼和那些盗贼是这样这样被消灭的。”这里也是在这样审察。巴利
75.Somanassādīti ādi-saddena ñāṇādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Corānaṃ abhiṇhaṃ sañcaraṇaṭṭhānatāya paccantaggahaṇaṃ. Paccavekkhatoti ‘‘asukasmiñca ṭhāne ime cime corā evañca evañca vināsitā’’ti paccavekkhato rañño viya.
凡是“限定”(odhi),“如其所限”(yathodhi)。“yathā”这个词表示遍取,“kho”这个词表示决定;为了说明这一点,就说“依各自的限定,确实已舍弃”等等。由此也表明,在“已吐弃”(vanta)等词中也应当作决定。为了展开略说的“依各自的限定”这一含义,接着开始说“两种限定”等。其中,“该道所应断的”是指由该道无余断除的烦恼。因为依无余断除,各道所应断的烦恼就不会与其他道所应断的混杂;否则,那些依各自限定属于上道所应断的烦恼,若由下道断除,它们就成了由下道所断的、具有堕恶趣性等性质的法,这样在断除上就会混杂。因此,“那些即已断”在这里也是同样的道理。“更进一步”是指从那种作为断除之因的喜悦生起之后,更向上。由于下三道对治敌对法只是分限地起作用,所以它们被称为“限定”。从“它们确实”等以下,是对所说含义的解释。“这位比丘”是指不来,因此说“由下三道所断除的”。巴利
Yo yo odhi yathodhi. Yathā-saddo byāpanicchāyaṃ, kho saddo avadhāraṇeti dassento ‘‘sakasakaodhivasena cattameva hotī’’tiādimāha. Tena ‘‘vanta’’ntiādīsupi avadhāretabbanti dasseti. Sakasakaodhivasenāti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘dve odhī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yaṃmaggavajjhāti yena maggena anavasesato pahātabbā. Anavasesappahānavasena hi taṃtaṃmaggavajjhānaṃ kilesānaṃ tadaññamaggavajjhehi asammissatā, aññathā ye sakasakaodhivasena uparimaggavajjhā, te heṭṭhimamaggehi pahīnāpāyagamanīyādisabhāvā eva tehi pahīyantīti pahānavasena sammissā siyuṃ. Tena teyeva pahīnā hontīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tatuttaripīti tato pahānanimittasomanassuppattito uddhampi. Paṭipakkhesu odhiso pavattikiccattā odhīti heṭṭhā tayo maggā vuccanti. Te hītiādi vuttassevatthassa vivaraṇaṃ. Imassa bhikkhunoti anāgāmiṃ sandhāyāha. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘heṭṭhāmaggattayena catta’’nti.
有些人会执取全部四种,为了说明并不是这样,所以说了“vanta”。因为凡是某人已经吐弃的东西,他就不会再取回来。因此说“依不取回的样貌来显示”。即使已经吐弃,也可能还有一点点残留在自己的相续里,为了说明并不是这样,所以说了“mutta”。因此说“依从相续中解脱来显示”。即使已经解脱,也可能像某些脱离束缚的果报那样还停留在某处,为了说明并不是这样,所以说了“pahīna”。因此说“依在任何地方都不停留来显示”。就像有些东西没有好好舍掉,又会被取回来,而真正好好舍掉的才叫“paṭinissaṭṭha”;同样地,为了说明由观照所舍掉的东西看起来像是又被取回来一样,而由道所断除的才叫“paṭinissaṭṭha”。因此说“依已取之物的弃舍来显示”。并不是像懦夫那样背过脸去舍掉,而是正面地舍掉,为了说明这一点,所以说了“paṭinissaṭṭha”。因此说“或者面向”等。应当亲近,因为希望自己得到利益的人必定要证得它。由于能持护,因为能持护具足它的人不堕恶趣。典籍称为“veda”,因为人们靠它来了知;依诸明、诸智而行的人,就是“vedagū”。“Abhijaññā”就是了知。“Vedajātā”就是已经生起喜悦。智称为“veda”,因为它能了知所应了知的。喜称为“veda”,因为它能获得、体验所缘的滋味。巴利
Keci cattampi gaṇhanti, nayidamevanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vanta’’nti vuttaṃ. Na hi yaṃ yena vantaṃ, so puna taṃ ādiyati. Tenāha ‘‘anādiyanabhāvadassanavasenā’’ti. Vantampi kiñci sasantatilaggaṃ siyā, nayidamevanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘mutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘santatito vinimocanavasenā’’ti. Muttampi kiñci muttabandhanā viya phalaṃ kuhiñci tiṭṭhati, na evamidanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘pahīna’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kvaci anavaṭṭhānadassanavasenā’’ti. Yathā kiñci dunnissaṭṭhaṃ puna ādāya sammadeva nissaṭṭhaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhanti vuccati, evaṃ vipassanāya nissaṭṭhaṃ ādinnasadisaṃ maggena pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ nāma hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭinissaṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ādinnapubbassa paṭinissaggadassanavasenā’’ti. Na kāpurisena viya parammukhena nissaṭṭhaṃ , atha kho abhimukheneva nissaṭṭhanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭinissaṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paṭimukhaṃ vā’’tiādi. Upagantabbatoti attano hitasukhaṃ paccāsīsantena ekantena adhigantabbato. Dhāraṇatoti taṃsamaṅgīnaṃ apāyapātato sandhāraṇena. Gantho‘‘vedo’’ti vuccati ‘‘vidanti etenā’’ti, vedehi ñāṇehi gato paṭipannoti vedagū. Abhijaññāti jāneyya. Vedajātāti uppannasomanassā. Ñāṇaṃ ‘‘vedo’’ti vuccati ‘‘veditabbaṃ vedetī’’ti. Somanassaṃ ‘‘vedo’’ti vuccati ārammaṇarasaṃ vindati anubhavatīti.
已生起的,是依止不坏净信而生起的。所说的“受”,正是前面说的那种,也就是“喜与喜俱的智”那样的。“义受”,是在义上、在因和果上的受。“法受”,是在法上、在因上的受。所以说“不坏净信的因”等等。在这里,“义”和“法”这两个词是因和果的另一种说法,为了直接用巴利经文说明这个意思,才说了“因为已说”等等。“那义与那法”,意思就是所说的不坏净信的因,以及前面说的烦恼断除。所谓“作为义与法之利益的受”,是指前面所说的受,也就是作为义与法之利益的喜俱智。“欢喜”,说的是比较微弱的喜。以观察的方式生起,由此应当知道,这里的观察本身因为无过失的性质而被称为法。“喜生起”,说的是依靠他缘的强烈喜。心满意足,是因为带来轻安的广大喜的涌动而心满足。“身”,是指名身。止息了不安,是因为烦恼的热恼远离而很好地止息了不安。这里指的是以观察为因的心一境性,所以说“像安止一样不动而住”。巴利
Uppannanti aveccappasādaṃ nissāya uppannaṃ. Vuttappakārameva vedanti ‘‘somanassaṃ somanassamayañāṇañcā’’ti evaṃ vuttappakārameva. Atthavedanti atthe hetuphale vedaṃ. Dhammavedanti dhamme hetumhi vedaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aveccappasādassa hetu’’ntiādi. Idha dhammatthasaddā hetuphalapariyāyāti imamatthaṃ pāḷiyā eva dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tameva atthañca dhammañcāti attho dhammoti ca vuttaṃ aveccappasādanimittaṃ yathāvuttaṃ kilesappahānañca. Atthadhammānisaṃsabhūtaṃ vedanti yathāvuttaatthadhammānisaṃsabhūtaṃ somanassamayañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ vedañca. Pāmojjanti taruṇapītiṃ āha. Paccavekkhaṇākārappavattenāti etena paccavekkhaṇā evettha anavajjasabhāvatāya dhammoti vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pīti jāyatīti parappaccayaṃ balavapītimāha. Pīṇitamanassāti passaddhiāvahehi uḷārehi pītivegehi tittacittassa. Kāyoti nāmakāyo. Vūpasantadarathoti kilesapariḷāhānaṃ dūrībhāvena suṭṭhu upasantadaratho. Paccavekkhaṇahetukaṃ cittassa samādhānaṃ idha adhippetanti āha ‘‘appitaṃ viya acalaṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
76 76. 当然,“我具足对佛的不动净信,我具足对法、对僧的不动净信”,这也只是显示那种审察方式运作的情形而已;而这一句则是特别用来显示对三宝生起的喜悦等。至于“正如有限的”等语,也是特别显示审察方式的语句,出于这个用意,才说“现在,把正如有限的……展示之后”。再者,四种分都可以理解为既是在显示审察方式,也是在显示喜悦等功德,因为两处都论述了这两方面。虽然圣道只是一个心识刹那,不会再次生起,但由于它彻底断除了对立面,具足此道者就成为不退转法,也就以该道所具的戒等体性来称呼他,所以说“显示与他不来道相应的戒蕴”等。像“那些世尊是如是法者”等句中,这里的“法”字是定的同义词,所以说“显示定蕴与慧蕴”。因为它让相应的诸法在同一所缘上不散动、不纷乱、不扩散,平等而正确地安立、持守它们,所以值得被称为“法”,即“能持守者”。种种不同,就是多种类别。所谓障碍,要么是未得者不能获得,要么是已得者会退失,为了说明这两种情况在这里都不存在,而说“或对于道……”等。那对于他绝不成为障碍,因为这位不来者以殊胜的审察审察之后受用团食,所以对他不成为障碍。为了说明那殊胜的审察是因为对立面已被断除,而说“以道净化了心”。巴利
76. Kāmaṃ ‘‘buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgatomhi, dhamme saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgatomhī’’ti idampi tassā paccavekkhaṇāya pavattiākārapakāsanameva, idaṃ pana visesato ratanattaye uppannasomanassādippakāsanapadaṃ. ‘‘Yathodhi kho panā’’ti idampi savisesaṃ paccavekkhaṇākārappakāsanapadanti adhippāyena ‘‘idāni yathodhi…pe… pakāsetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Cattāropi pana vārā paccavekkhaṇākārappakāsanavasena ceva somanassādiānisaṃsadassanavasena ca vuttāti sakkā viññātuṃ ubhayatthāpi ubhayassa vuttattā. Yadipi ariyamaggo ekacittakkhaṇiko na puna uppajjati, paṭipakkhassa pana tena suppahīnattā taṃsamaṅgī aparihānadhammo taṃsīlādibhāveneva vuccatīti āha ‘‘tassa anāgāmimaggasampayuttaṃ sīlakkhandhaṃ dassetī’’tiādi. ‘‘Evaṃdhammā te bhagavanto ahesu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.13; ma. ni. 3.197-198; saṃ. ni. 5.378) viya idha dhamma-saddo samādhipariyāyoti āha ‘‘samādhikkhandhaṃ paññākkhandhañca dassetī’’ti. Tathā hi so sampayuttadhamme ekārammaṇe avikkhipamāne avippakiṇṇe avisaṭe katvā samaṃ, sammā ca ādahanto tathā te dhāretīti ca vattabbataṃ arahatīti dhammoti ca vuccati. Anekarūpānanti anekappakārānaṃ. Antarāyo nāma appaṭiladdhassa vā alabbhanavasena, paṭiladdhassa vā parihānavasena, tadubhayampi idha natthīti dassento ‘‘maggassa vā’’tiādimāha. Nevassa taṃ hoti antarāyāyāti tassa anāgāmino piṇḍapātabhojanaṃ neva hoti antarāyāya ukkaṃsagatāya paccavekkhaṇāya paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanato. Tañcassā ukkaṃsagamanaṃ hatapaṭipakkhattāti dassento ‘‘maggena visuddhacittattā’’ti āha.
这里说的“此处”,就是指没有障碍的这个情形。心清净本身就是原因。而且,用“那对他不成为障碍”这句话,就证明了前面所说的断除确实只是由不来道完成的。因为不来者已经完全断除了欲贪,由于没有对味道的渴爱,即使受用那样的团食,也绝不会成为证得最高道的障碍。世尊说“比丘们,譬如布”时,是在把自己开头所举的布喻连接起来。水清澈,是因为没有泥、苔、藻等污垢,所以清净;反过来就是浑浊,因此说“清澈、清净”。布由于色泽光辉而离开了杂染,因此显现明净;由于明净,布便获得可称为“清净”之说,因此说“清净、明净”。所谓“应把火炭捆起来”,是说要用细泥等涂抹,使炭火盆不因木块、炭等而破裂。犹如从云层中,由于与毗岚婆风的急流相触而出现的闪电,仅仅是由风流的相触所产生的光明,就是火炭的光明;然而那火炭光明因为是两股风流的势力所生起的相触之因,所以从原因方面说“风势如火炭”。巴利
Etthāti etasmiṃ antarāyābhāve. Etadeva visuddhacittattameva kāraṇaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘nevassa taṃ hoti antarāyāyā’’ti iminā heṭṭhā vuttappahānaṃ anāgāmimaggenevāti siddhaṃ hoti. Anāgāmino hi sabbaso kāmarāgo pahīno hoti, rasataṇhāya abhāvato tādisapiṇḍapātaparibhogo aggamaggādhigame kathañcipi antarāyāya na hotīti. ‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, vattha’’nti vadanto bhagavāādimhi attanā upanītavatthūpamaṃ anusandheti. Udakassa acchabhāvo paṅkasevālapaṇakādimalābhāvena pasannatāya, tabbipariyāyato bahalatāti āha ‘‘acchanti vippasanna’’nti. Vaṇṇanibhāya vigatasaṃkilesatāya samujjalanaṃ pabhassaratāya vatthassa, taṃ pariyodātanti vattabbataṃ labhatīti āha ‘‘pariyodātaṃ pabhassaratāyā’’ti. Ukkaṃ bandheyyāti aṅgārakapallaṃ yathā dārughaṭikaṅgārādikena na bhijjati, evaṃ tanumattikālepādinā bandheyya. Meghapaṭalato verambhavātadhārāsaṅghaṭṭanato vijjutā viya kevalaṃ vātadhārāsaṅghaṭṭanajanitā pabhā ukkāpabhā, sā pana yasmā dvinnaṃ vātadhārānaṃ vegasambhūtasaṅghaṭṭanahetukā, tasmā kāraṇavasena ‘‘vātavego ukkā’’ti vuttaṃ.
77 “依随顺连结的方式”等句中,与所发起的开示相应的连结,就是随顺连结,这里依它为准。好比为了证明某个道理,先在开头显示它的反面;所发起开示的对立面之所以也是相应的开示,同样是因为它能正确地安立该道理。这一点,正如在回转连结的应用中,应当理解为异类之法在那里回转。前面简略说过“开示是依随顺连结而来的”,现在为了详细展开这个意思,并借这个机会说明其余几种连结,所以说了“因为有三”等语。“向外”,是指在外部的事物上。“没有恐惧”,是指没有由渴爱和邪见所引起的恐惧。“依所阐明的经”,是指依“在此,比丘对某一类……”等所阐明的经。“以任何一种法”,是指在戒等清净法以及不忍等杂染法中,以任何一种法。“六种神通被提及”,由此显示了前面所说的“或以相应法”这一种情况;其余的则显示了“或以对立面”这一种情况。因为对于不忍来说,锯喻经就是它的对立面;同样,对于邪见,则以“这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我”这样的空性行相来对治。其余两种也是同样的道理。前面已经说过“心被染污时,恶趣可期”,那是关于杂染的开示。“一切”,就是没有剩余。“以一切方式”,是指以观察过患与利益、了知人的过失等一切方式。巴利
77.Yathānusandhivasenātiādimhi uṭṭhitadesanāya anurūpā anusandhi yathānusandhi, tassā vasena. Byatirekadassanaṃ viya hi sādhetabbassa ādimhi uṭṭhitadesanāya paṭipakkhadassanampi anurūpadesanāva sammadeva patiṭṭhāpanabhāvato, yathā taṃ āvattahārayojanāyaṃ visabhāgadhammāvattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Yathānusandhivasena desanā āgatā’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārento tappasaṅgena itarepi anusandhī dassetuṃ ‘‘tayo hī’’tiādimāha. Bahiddhāti bāhiresu vatthūsu. Asati paritassanāti taṇhādiṭṭhiparitassanābhāvo. Vissajjitasuttavasenāti ‘‘idha bhikkhu ekaccassā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.242) vissajjitasuttavasena. Yena dhammenāti sīlādivodānadhammesu akkhantiyādisaṃkilesadhammesu ca yena yena dhammena. Cha abhiññā āgatāti iminā ‘‘anurūpadhammavasena vā’’ti vuttavikappaṃ dasseti, sesehi ‘‘paṭipakkhavasena vā’’ti vuttavikappaṃ. Akkhantiyā hi kakacūpamovādo (ma. ni. 1.222) paṭipakkho, tathā diṭṭhiyā ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti evaṃ paṭibhāgā suññatākārena. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Citte saṃkiliṭṭhe duggati pāṭikaṅkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.70) heṭṭhā kilesadesanā āgatā. Sabboti anavaseso. Sabbākārenāti ādīnavānisaṃsapaccavekkhaṇapuggaladosajānanādinā sabbappakārena.
78 从“为了断除嗔恨,应当修习慈”等这句话来看,慈等法门是嗔恨、伤害和贪染的对治法。因为世尊通过“它存在”等说法,把四谛禅修引导到了顶点之后,宣说了不来证得最高圣道,所以为了说明这一点,就说了“现在为他……”等话。巴利
78. ‘‘Mettā bhāvetabbā byāpādassa pahānāyā’’tiādivacanato (a. ni. 9.1) mettādayo byāpādavihesāratirāgānaṃ paṭipakkhā. Yasmā ‘‘so atthī’’tiādinā bhagavatā anāgāmino aggamaggādhigamanaṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā kathitaṃ, tasmā taṃ dassento ‘‘idānissā’’tiādimāha.
“梵住法”是指梵住本身,以及与梵住相应的诸法。因此说“以名称的方式”。所谓“安立之后”,意思是先引出来,再加以关联。因为在这类场合中,“名称”指的就是四种无色蕴。通过这一方法,就标示出了一种掌握方式:对依靠大种而生起的其余诸法,以及对三界中一切除应以渴爱断除的渴爱以外、属于应断范围的诸法,都一并涵盖。以自性而真实存在,将它变为自己亲证的对象,再以智慧如实通达,基于这一点,便说名色被如理安立为“这个存在”。正因如此,文中说“至此,就已完成了对苦谛的安立”。这句话带有确定之意,就像世间共许的众生、女人、男人等一样,是说它在究竟意义上并非不存在,而是确实存在;但不像外道所臆想的神我、自性、实体、命者、身体等那样,在究竟意义上并不存在。所谓“了知”:在修行前期,是先依相状、作用等,以及依摄取与区分的角度来了知;在修行后期,则是以遍知和证悟的方式通达而了知。所谓“绝对低劣的”,就是指不善法,因为它们在现在和未来都是苦的根源,其中尤其以渴爱为最,所以说“在通达苦的集起时,他了知‘有低劣的’”。由于依自身的诸缘而被推到首要地位,所以是“殊胜”;在这个意义上,只有圣道才被称为“殊胜”,因此说“在寻求断除的方法时,他了知‘有殊胜的’”。如果只说“以最上之义为殊胜”,那也可能把灭谛包括进去;但由于灭谛已由另一句涵盖,所以这里应依前面所说的方式来理解。因为这里是透过无量心的入口而专注于观,所以才说“到达梵住想的人”。其实应当说“到达一切三界想的人”。这里也并非没有涵盖,因为那种想也已包括在内。超越、越过、出离世间,离系而住,因此说“更上的出离,就是涅槃”。巴利
Brahmavihāradhammeti brahmavihāre ceva brahmavihārasahagatadhamme ca. Tenāha ‘‘nāmavasenā’’ti. Vavatthapetvāti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Nāmantipi hi īdisesu ṭhānesu cattāro arūpino khandhā vuccanti. Iminā nayenāti etena bhūtanissitānaṃ sesupādāyadhammānaṃ sabbesampi pahātabbataṇhāvajjānaṃ tebhūmakadhammānaṃ pariggahavidhiṃ ulliṅgeti. Sabhāvato vijjamānaṃ taṃ attapaccakkhaṃ katvā ñāṇena yāthāvato paṭivijjhiyamānataṃ upādāya ‘‘atthi ida’’nti yathāvavatthāpitaṃ nāmarūpaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘ettāvatānena dukkhasaccavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hotī’’ti. Sāvadhāraṇañcetaṃ vacanaṃ, lokasamaññāsiddhaṃ sattaitthipurisādi viya, ito bāhirakaparikappitaṃ pakatiādi drabyādi jīvādi kāyādi viya ca na paramatthato natthi, atthevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pajānātīti pubbabhāge tāva lakkhaṇarasādivasena ceva paṭiggahavibhāgavasena ca pakārato jānāti, aparabhāge pana pariññābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhanto jānāti. Ekantahīnā nāma akusaladhammā sampati āyatiñca dukkhamūlattā, tatthāpi visesato taṇhāti āha ‘‘dukkhassa samudayaṃ paṭivijjhanto atthi hīnantipajānātī’’ti. Attano paccayehi padhānabhāvaṃ nītattā paṇītanti iminā atthena ariyamaggova ‘‘paṇīta’’nti vuccatīti āha ‘‘pahānupāyaṃ vicinanto atthi paṇītanti pajānātī’’ti. ‘‘Uttamaṭṭhena ca paṇīta’’nti vuccamāne nirodhasaccassapi saṅgaho siyā, tassa pana padantarena saṅgahitattā vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo. Appamaññāmukhena vipassanābhinivesasseva katattā ‘‘brahmavihārasaññāgatassā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sabbassapi tebhūmakassa saññāgatassā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Na cettha asaṅgaho tassāpi saññāya āgatabhāvato. Lokaṃ uttaritvā samatikkamitvā nissaritvā visaṃyuttaṃ hutvā ṭhitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘uttari nissaraṇaṃ nibbāna’’nti.
“以四种方式”是指“有低劣的”等四种分类。由于观慧是依随顺智而生起的随觉,其作用是了知;由于道慧是依法的智而生起的证悟,其作用是照见,这是自性所成就的。为了阐明这一点,所以说“因为观慧了知四圣谛,因为道慧照见四圣谛”。所谓“依《怖畏恐惧经》中已说的方式”,是因为该经注释书中自己解释过的义理与这里的经文有相似之处,所以引述过来说“心从欲漏……中略……他彻底了知”。在这里,当世尊说“心从欲漏解脱……中略……心从无明漏解脱”“生已尽”等语时,实际所指正是第四道;所以注释书前文所说的“这在上文其实是针对第四道而指出的,因此很合理”,应当看作说得非常好。巴利
Catūhiākārehīti ‘‘atthi hīna’’ntiādīhi catūhi pakārehi. Anvayañāṇatāya anubodhabhūtāya vipassanāpaññāya jānanattho dhammañāṇatāya paṭivedhabhūtāya maggapaññāya dassanattho sabhāvasiddhoti dassento ‘‘vipassanāpaññāya cattāri saccāni jānanato maggapaññāya passato’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhayabherave vuttanayenevāti bhayabheravasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ attanā vuttaatthavacanatthapāṭhena idha pāṭhassa sadisattā atidisanto ‘‘kāmāsavāpi…pe… pajānātī’’ti āha. Ettha ca yasmā ‘‘kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccati…pe… avijjāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccatī’’ti ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādīni vadatā bhagavatā catutthamaggo niddiṭṭho, tasmā yaṃ heṭṭhā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘so ca upari catutthamaggasseva niddiṭṭhattā yujjatī’’ti, taṃ suvuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
世尊为了呵责那位婆罗门,便说“婆罗门,你心里想要问什么,就问我吧”,这是为了给他一个开口发问的机会,用意在于呵责他。由于这位婆罗门并不具备堪为说法所依的那种意乐,此处超出了前面所说的三种连结,所以注释书说“单独建立了一个连结”。因为存在于心中,所以说是内在的。所谓以烦恼出离之水沐浴,就是用八支圣道的法水来沐浴,洗掉烦恼的污垢,平息贪欲等热恼。巴利
Tassa codanatthāyāti tassa brāhmaṇassa bhagavā attano codanatthāya ‘‘puccha maṃ tvaṃ brāhmaṇa yadettha tayā manasābhisamīhita’’nti codanāya, okāsadānatthāyāti adhippāyo. Desanāsannissayo brāhmaṇassa tathārūpo ettha ajjhāsayopi natthīti yathāvuttaanusandhittayavinimuttattā ‘‘pāṭiyekkaṃ anusandhiṃ āhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Cittagatattā abbhantarena. Kilesavuṭṭhānasinānenāti kilesamalapavāhanena rāgapariḷāhādivūpasamakarena ca aṭṭhaṅgikaariyamaggasalilasinānena.
79 他刚抵达法堂,就以为那条河像是从巴户咖河流来的一样。就圣果碾碎成粉、油润的滑腻被除去而言,粗涩即是世间;因为那条河具有这种性质,所以它被公认为世间。而执取“世俗公认的粗涩”这一说法,恰恰显示出他自己心中的错误执著:那条河在世间就是这样出名的。因此说:它能赋予清净状态,所以被如此公认。因为它能冲走罪恶、带来来世等成就,对世间有利益,所以是益世的;被公认为益世的部分,全部解释与前面相同。因此说:它能引导到达最殊胜的世间,所以被如此公认。被公认为福德:因为它能产生应受供养的善果报,能净化众生,所以被公认为福。这完全是为了阐明前面已说过的义理。为什么已经说过的义理还要再说一遍呢?回答说:为了喜爱偈颂的人。有些人不能接受长行文,这样说了也不能理解其义;有些人能接受韵文,这样说了就能了悟;这些人就是喜爱偈颂的人。为了阐明殊胜的义理:意思是,为了显示一种不同于先前教导的、更殊胜的阐释。巴利
79. Dhammasabhāmaṇḍapaṃ tāvadeva upagatattā bāhukā nadito āgataṃ viya maññamāno. Ariyaphalamaddanacuṇṇādayo telasinehassa vivecanena . Lūkhabhāvo lokaṃ, taṃ etissā atthīti lokāti sammatā. Lokkhasammataggahaṇena ‘‘tathā sā nadī loke pākaṭā’’ti evaṃ pavattaṃ attano micchāgāhaṃ dīpeti. Tenāha ‘‘visuddhabhāvaṃ detīti evaṃ sammatā’’ti. Pāpapavāhanena samparāyikādisampattiāvahato lokassa hitā lokyā. Lokyāti sammatāti sabbaṃ purimasadisaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘seṭṭhaṃ lokaṃ gamayatīti evaṃ sammatā’’ti. Puññasammatāti pujjabhavaphalanibbattanena sattānaṃ punanena visodhanena puññāti sammatā. Tadatthadīpanatthamevāti tassā pubbe āgatadesanāya atthadīpanatthameva. Vuttassevatthassa puna dīpanaṃ kimatthiyanti āha ‘‘gāthārucikāna’’nti. Cuṇṇikavacanaṃ asambhāventā tathā ca vutte atthamabujjhanakā pajjavacanaṃ sambhāventā tathā ca vutte bujjhanakā gāthārucikā. Visesatthadīpanatthanti visiṭṭhadīpanatthaṃ, purimadesanāya aññadīpanatthanti attho.
“乔达摩尊者是不是去巴户咖河沐浴了?”(《中部》1.78)因为前面已经说过,所以这里“巴户咖”这个词只是用来表明那个意思。其余像“阿谛咖咖”等词语,则因为能让人了解更殊胜的含义,所以是用来阐明殊胜义的。那么,为什么这里世尊要提到婆罗门并没有说过的阿谛咖咖等河呢?回答说:“正如……”。其中“咖咖”指的是沐浴用的香粉;沐浴之后,在这里又额外取用香粉,所以叫“阿谛咖咖”。因此说:“依沐浴资具而……”。“圆池形状”指圆形池塘的形状。“各别河川”指各自独立的河流,不像阿谛咖咖等那样只是一个渡口。巴利
‘‘Gacchati pana bhavaṃ gotamo bāhukaṃ nadiṃ sināyitu’’nti (ma. ni. 1.78) heṭṭhā vuttattā bāhukanti idameva ettha tadatthadīpakaṃ. Sesāni adhikakkādivacanāni tato visiṭṭhassa atthassa bodhanato visesatthadīpakāni. Kasmā panettha bhagavatā brāhmaṇena avuttāni adhikakkādīni gahitānīti āha ‘‘yatheva hī’’tiādi. Kakkanti nhānapiṇḍaṃ adhippetaṃ, nhāyitvā adhikaṃ kakkaṃ ettha gaṇhantīti adhikakkaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nhānasambhāravasenā’’tiādi. Maṇḍalavāpisaṇṭhānanti vaṭṭapokkharaṇīsaṇṭhānaṃ. Nadiyoti visuṃ nadiyo, na adhikakkādīni viya titthamattaṃ.
“以三处”是指孙达利咖、婆雅戈、巴户咖这三处。“四”是指阿谛咖咖等四种。这些其实都已经说过了:因为在婆罗门看来,按世间共许的特征,它们和前面三者是同一种性质;但从究竟真实来说,则是因为它们同样具有恶流法的特征。因此说“所以……”等。它们根本不能带来任何罪业的清净。它不能净化他,就是说它不能让那个人清净。所谓“未达到仇恨罪性”,是指还没有达到业道的程度。因此说“因为是微小的过失”。巴利
Tīhi padehīti sundarikāpayāgabāhukāpadehi. Cattārīti adhikakkādīni cattāri. Vuttāneva hontīti lokasammatālakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇatā brāhmaṇassa adhippāyena, paramatthato pana pāpapavāhalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Kiñci pāpasuddhiṃ na karontiyeva. Na hi naṃ sodhayeti naṃ puggalaṃ na sodhaye. Verakibbisabhāvaṃ appattā nāma kammapathabhāvaṃ appattā. Tenāha ‘‘khuddakehī’’ti.
“驳斥者”是指:通过指出那种见解不合理,来驳斥它。这里的驳斥方法是:就像任何一种入水沐浴都不能除罪一样,任何一种星宿配合也不能除罪,因为它们并不是罪恶之因的对立面。能摧毁某物的,才是它的对立面。比如光明是黑暗的对立面,明是無明的对立面;但入水沐浴或星宿配合并不是贪等罪恶之因的对立面。所以在这里应当得出结论:“入水沐浴等并不能除罪。”“常有的弗伽尼星宿日”,意思是:对于戒行等清净的人来说,任何时候都是吉日。“其他者”,是指戒行等方面不清净的人。“常有的伍波萨他”,是因为以圣伍波萨他而受持。“清净者”,是指心意行为清净的人。“净业者”,是指身语行为清净的人。因此说“以无烦恼故”等。“与善相应”,是指达到了无过失的状态。“誓愿受持”,是指圆满地受持头陀支等誓愿,他并无退失,这是其含义。“在我的教法中沐浴吧,如果你想要究竟清净的话”,这是其含义。因此说“如果”等。“安稳”,是指安稳的状态。就像一切众生通过苦行而达到安稳、达到无畏一样,你也应当这样做;这样,对那位以简要方式教导前面所示慈心等修习的婆罗门,某些定成就以及与之不相离的慧成就便被显示了,应当如此理解。因此说“显示了意门清净”。巴利
Paṭihanantoti ayuttabhāvadassanena taṃ diṭṭhiṃ paṭibāhanto. Tatthāyaṃ paṭibāhanavidhi yathā yaṃ kiñci udakorohanaṃ na pāpapavāhanaṃ, evaṃ yo koci nakkhattayogo pāpahetūnaṃ paṭipakkhābhāvato. Yañhi vināseti, so tassa paṭipakkho. Yathā āloko andhakārassa vijjā ca avijjāya, na evaṃ udakorohanaṃ nakkhattayogo vā pāpahetūnaṃ lobhādīnaṃ paṭipakkho, tasmā niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ ‘‘na udakorohanādi pāpapavāhana’’nti. Niccaṃ phaggunīnakkhattanti suddhasīlādikassa sabbakālaṃ maṅgaladivaso evāti adhippāyo. Itaroti sīlādivasena asuddho. Niccameva uposatho ariyuposathena upavutthabhāvato. Suddhassāti parisuddhamanosamācārassa. Sucikammassāti parisuddhakāyavacīsamācārassa. Tenāha ‘‘nikkilesatāyā’’tiādi. Kusalūpasañhitanti anavajjabhāvūpagataṃ. Vatasamādānanti dhutadhammasamādānādi sampannameva hoti, nāssa vipatti atthīti attho. Mama sāsaneyeva sināhi, yadi accantameva suddhiṃ icchasīti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘sace’’tiādi. Khematanti khemabhāvaṃ. Yathā sabbabhūtāni tapavasena khemappattāni abhayappattāni honti, evaṃ karohīti taṃ heṭṭhā dassitaṃ mettādibhāvanaṃ brāhmaṇassa saṅkhepena upadisantenassa ekaccasamādhisampadā tadavinābhāvinī paññāsampadā ca dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘manodvārasuddhi dassitā’’ti.
为了说明那两种成就所依靠的基础——戒的成就,才说了“如果你不说妄语”等话。在这里,就像通过“如果你不说妄语”等话,以远离妄语、杀生、不与取的表述,依照特相理趣,同时也已经说明了对其余身恶行和语恶行的远离;同样,通过“有信、不悭吝”等话对信等财富具足的引导,也就自然成就了对其他圣财具足的引导。因此应当知道,信等能令解脱成熟之法,已经为那位婆罗门阐明了。正因如此,才说“依此行道而有烦恼的清净”。意思是:伽耶河比巴户咖河等更为人们所公认。巴利
Tassa pana sampadādvayassa nissayabhūtaṃ sīlasampadaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sace musā na bhaṇasī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca yathā ‘‘sace musā na bhaṇasī’’tiādinā musāvāda-pāṇātipāta-adinnādāna-paṭivirativacanena avasesakāyavacīduccaritaviratīpi vuttā eva hoti lakkhaṇahāranayena, evaṃ ‘‘saddahāno amaccharī’’ti saddhādidhanasampadāniyojaneneva avasesaariyadhanasampadāniyojanampi siddhameva hotīti saddhādayo vimuttiparipācanīyadhammā brāhmaṇassa pakāsitā evāti veditabbā. Tenevāha ‘‘imāya eva paṭipattiyā kilesasuddhī’’ti. Gayā sammatatarā bāhukādīhipīti adhippāyo.
80 “独一”就是没有同伴。不过,他这里的没有同伴,指的是独居的状态,因为他以渴爱为伴侣的情况还没有消失。所以经文才说“不久……”等等。仅仅以单一的把握,就已经表达了身体的远离,因此注释说“以心远离而远离”。这是用“白天经行、坐禅”等说法,来说明经中讲到的警醒精进。对于这样修行的人,当他看到被十一种火燃烧的三界时,连一丝一毫的放逸都没有;他这样修习业处,就是真正地在精勤努力。为了说明他对一切因缘所生的事物心无期待,只以涅槃为志向而安住,才说了“不放逸”等话。“生已尽”等句中该解释的内容,前面已经讲过了。其余部分都很容易理解。巴利
80.Ekoti asahāyo, esā panassa asahāyatā ekībhāvenāti. Na hissa tāva taṇhādutiyatā vigatā. Tenevāha ‘‘na cirassevā’’tiādi. Ekaggahaṇeneva kāyena vūpakaṭṭhatā vuttāti āha ‘‘vupakaṭṭho cittavivekenā’’ti. Tena ‘‘divā caṅkamena nisajjāyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.423; 3.75; vibha. 519; mahāni. 161) āgataṃ jāgariyānuyogamāha. Tathābhūtassa cassa ekādasahi aggīhi āditte tayo bhave passato yathā pamādassa lesopi nāhosi, evaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ brūhento sammadeva padahati. Katthaci saṅkhāragate anapekkhacitto nibbānādhimutto eva vihāsīti dassetuṃ ‘‘appamatto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Khīṇā jātītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第8章 削减经的注释巴利
8. Sallekhasuttavaṇṇanā
81 “准陀”是那位大长老的名字,出于尊敬而称为“玛哈春达”,就像称呼“大目犍连”一样。另一种说法是,他依自己的外甥准陀长老而得名,这位大长老是舍利弗长老的兄弟,因此被称为“玛哈春达”,正如被称为“玛哈潘塔咖”一样。“傍晚时分”:这里的“时分”原本是业格,句中用作处格义,所以说“在傍晚时”,因为这里并不存在绝对的关联。“与七种行”:指同住比丘、弟子、在家信众等有情,以及色境等诸行。“退转”就是退避。“独处”就是远离,指身与心从那些行中脱离。因此“独一状态”说的是身远离,“远离”说的是心远离。“从中起”:从这两种远离中出来,因为有分心生起,又与同梵行者会合,便脱离了独处。“令问讯”:令人作礼。“如是”:按照前面所说的问安方式。“举起”:即抬起。对于尚未断除生死根本的人,姑且这样问讯;对于已断生死根本的人,问讯又有什么意义呢?于是说“这是如来的惯例”。因此应当知道,如来不只是祝愿众生来世安乐,也祝愿现世安乐。为什么如来要这样问讯呢?对此说明原因:“因为希望安乐”等等。“众多身”:即许多众生的身体。“夜叉”:即天神。他们因为值得供养,所以称为“夜叉”。“问讯”:就是以智与悲将所祝愿之事置于面前而说。巴利
81. ‘‘Cundo’’ti tassa mahātherassa nāmaṃ, pūjāvasena pana mahācundoti vuccati yathā ‘‘mahāmoggallāno’’ti. Attano vā cundaṃ nāma bhāgineyyattheraṃ upādāya āyasmato sāriputtattherassa bhātā ayaṃ mahāthero ‘‘mahācundo’’ti paññāyittha yathā ‘‘mahāpanthako’’ti. Sāyanhasamayanti bhummatthe ekaṃ upayogavacananti āha ‘‘sāyanhakāle’’ti. Na hettha accanta saṃyogo sambhavatīti. Sattasaṅkhārehīti saddhivihārikaantevāsikaupāsakādisattehi ceva rūpārammaṇādisaṅkhārehi ca. Paṭinivattitvāti apasakkitvā. Nilīyananti vivecanaṃ kāyacittehi tato vivittatā. Ekībhāvoti hi kāyavivekamāha, pavivekoti cittavivekaṃ. Tato vuṭṭhitoti tato duvidhavivekato bhavaṅguppattiyā, sabrahmacārīhi samāgamena ca apeto. Abhivādāpetvāti abhivādaṃ kāretvā. Evanti yathāvuttaabhivādavasena. Paggayhāti unnāmetvā. Anupacchinnabhavamūlānaṃ tāva evaṃ abhivādo hotu, ucchinnabhavamūlānaṃ kimatthiyoti āha ‘‘etaṃ āciṇṇaṃ tathāgatāna’’nti. Tena na tathāgatā samparāyikaṃyeva sattānaṃ sukhaṃ āsīsanti, atha kho diṭṭhadhammikampīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā evaṃ tathāgatā abhivadantīti tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘sukhakāmā hī’’tiādi. Puthukāyāti bahū sattakāyā. Yakkhāti devā. Te hi pūjanīyatāya ‘‘yakkhā’’ti vuccanti. Abhivadantīti āsīsitamevatthaṃ ñāṇakaruṇāhi abhimukhaṃ katvā vadanti.
“这些”是为了把不确定地执取的东西确定地指出来才说的。“这些”又是表示近在眼前、当面可证的词,所以说“好像使之呈现在面前”,意思就是把那些种种执持邪见的心念如同摆在眼前一样。“见”是为了说明巴利文里省略了前面的“邪”字才只说“见”,所以说“邪见”。这些邪见在众生中生起,或者以众生为所缘而生起,所以说“在众生中显现”。“我论相应”是与围绕“我”而生起的言论相应。“相应”是以“有我”这种执取为所缘而相应。那些执持邪见的人执取这些见,在执取和令他人执取之中,见是见论的所缘,因此就称为相应。像“有我”这样生起的见,在这里是与我论相应的,而不是作为其对象的“我”本身。它也是通过这种方式,与以此为境而生起的言论相应。“与世论相应”也是同样的道理。这些见共有二十种,此后不再有我论的依据。因为即使对五取蕴逐一执取为“我”,并以它们为依止而生起执取,从而产生这些见,但除了这五取蕴之外,并没有一个能作为其所缘、以及作为执取“我”的方式的东西。“常恒的我与世间”:在色等五蕴中执取某一蕴为“我”或“世间”,并认为它是常恒、永远存在、稳固不变的。正如经中所说:“执取色是我、也是世间、是常恒的,如此安立我和世间”等等。在关于“常”等的执取中,第一种是依常住论而生起的我执,第二种是依断灭论,第三种是依一分常住论,第四种是依寻思者论,或是依不死矫乱论而生起的我执。“有边”是执取自我有分际。“无边”是执取自我没有分际。“有边且无边”是把两者结合起来。另一种是依寻思者论而生起的我执。这样生起共有八种——这是文句的连结。巴利
Yāti aniyamato gahitā niyamato dassento ‘‘imā’’ti āha. Imāti ca āsannapaccakkhavacananti āha ‘‘abhimukhaṃ karontoviyā’’ti , taṃ taṃ diṭṭhigatikaṃ cittagataṃ sammukhā viya karontoti attho. Diṭṭhiyoti purimapadalopena pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti dassento ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiyo’’ti āha. Sattesu diṭṭhigatacittuppādesu uppajjamānā, sattesu vā visayabhūtesu ārabbha uppajjamānā ‘‘sattesu pātubhavantī’’ti vuttā. Attavādenāti attānaṃ ārabbha pavattena vacanena. Paṭisaṃyuttāti ‘‘atthi attā’’ti gāhe gāhaṇe ca visayabhāvena paṭisaṃyuttā. Diṭṭhigatikena diṭṭhiṃ gāhantehi gahaṇe gāhāpaṇe ca diṭṭhi diṭṭhivādassa visayoti tena paṭisaṃyuttā nāma hoti. ‘‘Atthi attā’’ti evaṃ pavattā diṭṭhi idha attavādapaṭisaṃyuttā, na tassā visayabhūto attā. Sā ca visayabhāvato tathāpavattena vādena paṭisaṃyuttā. Lokavādappaṭisaṃyuttāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Vīsati bhavanti tato paraṃ attavādavatthuno abhāvā . Pañcapi hi upādānakkhandhe paccekaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti te ca attano nissayabhāvena gaṇhato etāsaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ sambhavo, tabbinimutto panāyaṃ visayo attaggahaṇākāro ca natthīti. Sassato attā ca loko cāti rūpādīsu aññataraṃ ‘‘attā’’ti, ‘‘loko’’ti vā gahetvā taṃ sassato sabbakālabhāvī nicco dhuvoti. Yathāha ‘‘rūpī attā ceva loko ca sassato cāti attānañca lokañca paññapetī’’tiādi. Sassatotiādīsu paṭhamo sassatavādavasena attaggāho, dutiyo ucchedavādavasena, tatiyo ekaccasassatavādavasena, catuttho takkīvādavasena pavatto, amarāvikkhepavasena vā pavatto attaggāho. Antavāti attano paricchedatāvasena. Anantavāti aparicchedatāvasena. Antavā ca anantavā cāti tadubhayavasena, itaro takkīvādavasena pavatto attaggāho. Evaṃ pavattattā aṭṭha hontīti yojanā.
“只是最初”就是指最初的作意。为了说明它的具体样子,说“就是夹杂着观的最初作意”。“即使还没有达到入流道”,这句话用限定来表明排除掉的情况。从辨别名色开始,一直到观察生灭,这一段就是这里所说的“最初作意”,因为它是智慧修习的起点。又因为它伴随着生灭随观,所以说它“夹杂着观”。“这样”是对这句话的解释,意思是“仅以这样的方式”,也就是依所说的最初作意。“这些”是指前面所说的与我论、世论相应的诸见。虽然以那种最初作意,这些见也能在部分压抑的意义上被舍断,但那并不是这里所要说的。所以问:是不是以彻底断除的方式成为弃舍呢?由于完全断除了结缚,即使成了不增上慢的人,但认为“我已证得圣法”的慢就是增上慢,有这种慢的人就是增上慢者。对他们来说,通过证得生灭智,并以它为最终归宿的作意,才是这里所说的。由于那种作意还不能断除诸见,为了展开讨论才提出这个问题,所以说“为了断除增上慢而问”。“只是最初……有弃舍吗?”他这样问的时候,就像没有完全证悟的人一样说话,仿佛安住在增上慢中,所以说“犹如增上慢者”。他就是那位长老。“为了他们的利益”,就是为了他自己那些弟子的利益,为了让世尊辨明并破除这种错误的执取。据说,那位长老就像法将军一样,带着自己的弟子们去拜见世尊。巴利
Ādimevāti ādimanasikārameva. Taṃ pana sarūpato dassento ‘‘vipassanāmissakapaṭhamamanasikāramevā’’ti āha. Appatvāpi sotāpattimagganti iminā avadhāraṇena nivattitaṃ dasseti. Nāmarūpaparicchedato pabhuti yāva udayabbayadassanaṃ, ayaṃ idha ādimanasikāroti adhippeto paññābhāvanāya ārambhabhāvato. Udayabbayānupassanāsahitatāya cassa vipassanāmissakatā vacanaṃ. Evanti imassa atthavacanaṃ ‘‘ettakenevaupāyenā’’ti , yathāvuttaādimanasikārenāti attho. Etāsanti yathāvuttānaṃ attavādalokavādapaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ. Kāmañca tāsaṃ tena tadaṅgavasena pahānaṃ hotiyeva, taṃ pana nādhippetaṃ, tasmā samucchedavasena pahānaṃ paṭinissaggo ca hotīti pucchati. Sabbaso samucchinnasaṃyojanatāya anadhimānikopi samāno. ‘‘Ariyadhammo adhigato’’ti māno adhimāno, so yesaṃ atthi te adhimānikā, tesaṃ udayabbayañāṇādhigamena adhimānuppatti tadavasāno ca manasikāroti adhippeto. Tena diṭṭhīnaṃ pahānaṃ na hotīti kathāpanatthaṃ ayaṃ pucchāti āha ‘‘adhimānappahānatthaṃ pucchatī’’ti. ‘‘Ādimeva nu kho…pe… paṭinissaggo hotī’’ti anabhisametāvī viya vadanto adhimāne ṭhito viya hotīti āha ‘‘adhimāniko viya hutvā’’ti. Soti thero. Tesaṃ atthāyāti tesaṃ attano antevāsikānaṃ bhagavatā etassa micchāgāhassa vivecanatthāya. Thero kira dhammasenāpati viya saddhiṃ attano antevāsikehi bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkami.
82 “于其中”是指处所,用的是处格,表示诸见的所缘。因为诸见的随眠地和现行处都就是诸蕴,所以说“于其中这些见生起”等话,是就五蕴而说的。“执取色”,就是以“这色是我的自我”这种见的执取方式去执取、去缘取。诸见正是在执取的时候,才以那个对象为所缘而生起。在“它是自我”等说法中,这里涵盖了眼等所摄的色;因为与慧相连,它就成了我的自我;又因为世间众生在此处活动,所以称为世间。“那个我死后将在他世存在”:以这样的存在方式而成为常有,以坚固而成为稳固,以一切时都存在而成为常住,以不变异而成为不变易之法——这就是它的意思。如果说是就五蕴而说,那为什么用单数呢?回答说“以所缘的方式”等。由此而作区分,就是差别。“以生起方式”,就是以发生的方式。那些先前未曾生起的法,由于具备了名为“生起”的变化,所以称为“生起”。因此说“以生起方式”等。“数数修习”,是指在无始轮回中一再发生而获得的反复修习。这是从烦恼修习的角度,说明随眠的意义有所不同。“有力量”,是指达到了强有力的状态。这是从自性上显示随眠。所谓“达到强力”,就是贪等法不共的自性。正如《无碍解道》所说:“已达强力者舍断随眠。”“未除断”,是指没有以断尽的方式除断。未舍断而又有力量的烦恼,就叫做随眠。由此显示:它们一旦得到因缘,就能生起。“现行”,是指能胜伏。由此显示:它们已达到了违犯的阶段。“生起”,则正是用这个词来显示缠的状态。巴利
82.Yatthāti visaye bhummaṃ. Diṭṭhīnañhi ārammaṇanidassanametanti. Yasmā diṭṭhīnaṃ anusayanabhūmipi samudācaraṇaṭṭhānampi khandhā eva, tasmā āha ‘‘yattha cetā diṭṭhiyo uppajjantī tiādi pañcakkhandhe sandhāya vutta’’nti. Rūpaṃ abhinivissāti ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ mama attā’’ti diṭṭhābhinivesavasena abhinivisitvā ārabbha. Abhinivisamānā eva hi diṭṭhi naṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjati. ‘‘So attā’’tiādīsu yadidaṃ cakkhādisaṅgahaṃ rūpaṃ, sahabuddhinibandhanatāya so me attā, sukhāsukhaṃ ettha lokiyatīti so loko. ‘‘Soevāhaṃ pecca paraloke bhavissāmīti tathābhāvena nicco, thirabhāvena dhuvo, sabbadābhāvitāya sassato, nibbikāratāya avipariṇāmadhammoti attho. Yadi pañcakkhandhe sandhāya vuttaṃ, kathamekavacananti āha ‘‘ārammaṇavasenā’’tiādi. Nānā karīyati etenāti nānākaraṇaṃ, viseso. Jātivasenāti uppattivasena. Ye hi anibbattapubbā samānāvatthā, te uppādasaṅkhātavikārasamaṅgitāya uppajjantīti samaññaṃ labhanti. Tenāha ‘‘jātivasenā’’tiādi. Punappunaṃ āsevitāti anādimati saṃsāre aparāparuppattiyā laddhāsevanā. Etena kilesānaṃ bhāvanaṭṭhena anusayatthaṃ viseseti . Thāmagatāti thāmabhāvaṃ upagatā. Etena anusaye sabhāvato dasseti. Thāmagamananti ca kāmarāgādīnaṃ anaññasādhāraṇo sabhāvo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘thāmagato anusaye pajahatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.21). Appaṭivinītāti samucchedavinayavasena na paṭivinītā. Appahīnā hi thāmagatā kilesā anusentīti vuccanti. Etena tesaṃ kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjanārahataṃ dasseti. Samudācarantīti abhibhavanti. Etena tesaṃ vītikkamappattataṃ dasseti. Uppajjantīti pana imināva pariyuṭṭhānāvatthā dassitā.
这个五蕴的差别就是诸见的所缘,也就是前面“于其中这些见生起”等语所说的色取蕴等五蕴的差别,它是诸见的所缘。这不是我所有的:这五蕴不是我所有的,因为不能以我所的系缚去执取它,这种可执取性并不存在。因此,从究竟意义上否定了它是渴爱的所依,因为它是暂时性的等等。我也不是这个:这五蕴的差别,我也不是它,不应该执取为“我”。因此,否定了它是慢的所依,因为它是无常、苦、可厌等的。这个也不是我的自我:在那五蕴中并没有自我的实体,也不能以我所的系缚去执取它,这种可执取性并不存在。巴利
Taṃ pañcakkhandhappabhedaṃ ārammaṇanti yaṃ taṃ ‘‘yattha cetā diṭṭhiyo uppajjantī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ rūpupādānakkhandhādipañcakkhandhapabhedaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ ārammaṇaṃ. Etaṃ mayhaṃ na hotīti etaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ mayhaṃ santakaṃ na hoti mama kiñcanapalibodhabhāvena gahetabbatāya abhāvato. Tenassa paramatthato taṇhāvatthubhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati tāvakālikādibhāvato. Ahampi eso na asmīti eso pañcakkhandhapabhedo ahampi na asmi, ahanti so gahetabbo na hotīti attho. Etenassa mānavatthubhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati aniccadukkhajegucchādibhāvato. Eso me attāpi na hoti attasabhāvassa tattha abhāvato mamañcassa kiñcanapalibodhabhāvena gahetabbatāya abhāvato.
渴爱以“我的”执取,因为凭它执取,所以叫渴爱执取。执取那个,就是使那个生起。因此说“执取渴爱戏论”。所谓戏论,就是让相续不断扩展,使众生在轮回中长久滞留,所以叫戏论。按前面所说的分类,就是指一百零八种渴爱活动方式。其意图是:通过说明五蕴并不是渴爱所依之处,来否定渴爱戏论。后面两个词也应照同样道理理解。与见同处,就是与见在同一个被断除的地方。由此显示它们是初道所断的。但与见俱生同处的,其实只有渴爱,而不是慢;那渴爱也是能引生恶趣的。所谓“如实地存在”,就是以无常、苦、无我之相而存在;这样观见的人,才叫作如实见。因此说“五蕴”等。就是以这种方式,即以变坏等无常等方式。即使被执取,也仍未被邪见所断。以那种方式,即“这是我的”等方式。如实见与颠倒见不可能同时存在,因为二者不可能并存。对于善见者,就是如此善巧、殊胜地观见,以致不再像先前那样观见。巴利
Taṇhāva mamanti gaṇhāti etenāti taṇhāgāho. Taṃ gaṇhantoti taṃ uppādento. Tenāha ‘‘taṇhāpapañcaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti. Papañceti santānaṃ vitthārento satte saṃsāre cirāyatīti papañco. Yathā vuttapabhedanti aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritapabhedaṃ. Taṇhāpapañcaṃ paṭikkhipati khandhapañcakassa taṇhāvatthukābhāvavibhāvanenāti adhippāyo. Parato padadvayepi eseva nayo. Diṭṭhekaṭṭhāti diṭṭhiyā pahānekaṭṭhā. Tena tesaṃ paṭhamamaggavajjhataṃ dasseti. Sahajekaṭṭhā pana diṭṭhiyā taṇhā eva, na māno, sā ca kho apāyagamanīyā. Yathā atthīti yena aniccadukkhāsubhānattākārena atthi, tathā passanto yathābhūtaṃ passati nāma. Tenāha ‘‘khandhapañcakañhī’’tiādi. Eteneva ākārenāti ruppanādianiccādiākāreneva. Gayhamānampi appahīnavipallāsehi. Tenākārenāti ‘‘etaṃ mama’’ntiādiākārena. Nevatthi yathābhūtadassanavipallāsānaṃ tadabhāvato. Suṭṭhu passantassāti yathā puna tathā na passitabbaṃ, evaṃ suṭṭhu sātisayaṃ passantassa.
并不是仅仅靠最初作意就能断除邪见;那种见解只是增上慢者的一种增上慢而已。只有圣道才能真正断除它。为了阐明这个道理,他说“通过入流道显示了邪见的断除”。所谓“分别解说”,就是为增上慢者不加删减地分别解说诸禅那。对于愚痴凡夫,它不会生起,因为他们没有造作的能力;对于圣弟子,它也不会生起,因为增上慢的因缘已经被断除了。他不会把人引向错误的方向,因为他只在合适、有益的业处上加以引导。巴利
Na ādimanasikāreneva diṭṭhippahānaṃ hoti, adhimānikānaṃ pana adhimānamattametaṃ dassanaṃ. Maggeneva taṃ hotīti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhippahānaṃ dassetvā’’ti āha. Vibhajantoti adhimānikānaṃ jhānāni asallekhabhāvena vibhajanto. Bālaputhujjanānaṃ neva uppajjati akārakabhāvato. Na ariyasāvakānaṃ pahīnādhimānapaccayattā. Na aṭṭhānaniyojako sappāyakammaṭṭhāneyeva niyojanato.
长老心想:“僧团是为了什么事来召请?那件事,住在那里的人无论来与不来,在这里就能办成。”他这样观望着,所以僧团再三派人来请,他也没有去,但并不是出于不敬。因此他说了“这是为什么”等话。因为智者在那里只是做自己该做的事,所以就另派了一位年长的出家人前去。“这是为什么”,是用反问的方式指出:对僧团的命令不予执行,这算怎么回事,从而显示对应当去做的事的重视。“年过六十”,是指还没有证得却自以为证得的人。因为善良的人与善良的人会因志趣相同而聚在一起,所以长老说了“萨度,贤友”之后,就把铺设象道等一切事务都做了。巴利
Thero ‘‘yadatthaṃ saṅgho pakkosati, so attho tattha vāsīnaṃ āgatāgatānaṃ idha ijjhatī’’ti taṃ udikkhanto saṅghena yāvatatiyaṃ pahitopi na gato na agāravena. Tenāha ‘‘kimeta’’ntiādi. Paṇḍito hi tattha attano kiccameva karotīti aññataraṃ vuḍḍhapabbajitaṃ pāhesi. Kimetanti saṅghassa āṇāya akaraṇaṃ nāma kimetanti karaṇe ādaraṃ dīpento evamāha. Saṭṭhivassātītoti appatte pattasaññī eva saṭṭhivassātīto. Yasmā pesalā pesalehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanti samānādhimuttitāya, tasmā thero ‘‘sādhāvuso’’ti vatvā hatthimāpanādiṃ sabbaṃ akāsi.
就像那样的人:意思是,和紧接着前面所说的那位长老一样,也是没有证得却自以为证得了、年过六十的人。莲丛:就是莲花丛。他走进殿堂:他走进去时,借着观看,他自己凡夫的本性就会显露出来。据说,当时帝萨大寺的长老比丘们为了尊重“让自己的心清净”这句话,一大早就把塔庙的庭院打扫干净,只以这一点为所缘,生起以佛陀为所缘的欢喜,天天都这样做。因此说“在那时……”等等。即使有人以招呼应酬的方式对他〔丹玛丁那〕说“丹玛丁那,把钵和衣放在这里”,或者问他〔丹玛丁那〕什么,他都没有回应。知道功德:就像在水下等处留出空间那样,知道功德;可是你们〔指帝萨大寺的比丘们〕却不知道,因为连客比丘应尽的义务都没有做到。违背导师教令的僧团规约,算是什么样的规约呢?所谓规约,必须在不与学处相违的前提下遵守。连这一点都不知道的人,我〔丹玛丁那〕跟他们没有任何共住可言。说完,他〔丹玛丁那〕就腾空而起。巴利
Tādisovāti anantaraṃ vuttattherasadisova appatte pattasaññī eva saṭṭhivassātītoti attho. Padumagumbanti kamalasaṇḍaṃ. Pāsādaṃ pāvisi vissaṭṭhaṃ olokanenassa puthujjanabhāvo attanāva paññāyissatīti. Tissamahāvihāre kira therā bhikkhū tadā ‘‘sakacittaṃ pasīdatī’’ti vacanaṃ pūjentā kālasseva cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjitvā ettakārammaṇameva buddhārammaṇapītiṃ uppādetvā divase divase tathā karonti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmiñca samaye’’tiādi. ‘‘Dhammadinna, idha pattacīvaraṃ ṭhapetī’’ti vattāpi paṭisanthāravasena kiñci pucchitāpi nāhosi. Guṇaṃ jānātīti nimujjanādīsu vivaradānādinā guṇaṃ jānāti viya. Tumhe pana na jānittha āgantukavattassapi akaraṇato. Satthuāṇāvilaṅghinī kīdisī sā saṅghassa katikā? Katikā ca nāma sikkhāpadāvirodhena anuvattetabbā, ettakampi ajānantehi me saṃvāso natthīti ākāse abbhukkami.
如果那位比丘这样想:“我以削减的方式而住。”那么,对于被说成“成就初禅而住”的那位比丘来说,若他以增上慢这样想:“被称为初禅的修行方法能削减烦恼,我就以那种削减而住。”这种情况是可能发生的。这里的文句关系应当这样理解。然而这是不成立的:那位增上慢者所设想的“按照分别,初禅即是削减”,并不成立,也不合理。因此他说“因为确实不是……”等。其中,能正确、彻底地削减诸烦恼的,就是削减,也就是圣道。作为达到削减之方法的观,就是削减之道。不过,作为观之基础的禅那,也间接地就是道的基础。因此他说“因为不是作为观之基础……”等。巴利
Yaṃtassa evamassa sallekhena viharāmīti yo ‘‘paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyyā’’ti vutto, tassa bhikkhuno yaṃ ‘‘paṭhamajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ paṭipattividhānaṃ kilese sallekhati, tena sallekhena ahaṃ viharāmī’’ti adhimānavasena evamassa evaṃ bhaveyya ṭhānametaṃ vijjatīti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Taṃ na yujjatīti taṃ adhimānikassa ‘‘yathāvibhaṅgaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ sallekho’’ti parivitakkitaṃ na yujjati yuttaṃ na hoti. Tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Tattha sammā sabbaso ca kilese likhatīti sallekho, ariyamaggo. Tadupāyavipassanā sallekhapaṭipadā. Yaṃ pana jhānaṃ vipassanāpādakaṃ, tampi jhānaṃ pariyāyena maggapādakaṃ hotiyeva. Tenāha ‘‘avipassanāpādakattā’’tiādi.
依禅支法来说,就是依寻等五种禅支法。依心路生起来说,虽然禅那会随着心识生起而多次出现,但因为只靠一次转向就归在同一条心路里,所以它仍是同一个等至,因此说依反复等至。四种无色禅各自只在单一的所缘上生起,所以说因为所缘没有差别。依前面两种原因来说,就是依前面已说过的禅支法和反复等至这两种原因。巴利
Jhānadhammavasenāti vitakkādipañcakajjhānadhammavasena. Cittuppādavasena anekavāraṃ pavattamānampi jhānaṃ ekāvajjanatāya ekavīthipariyāpannattā ekā samāpatti evāti ‘‘punappunaṃ samāpattivasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Cattāri arūpajjhānāni yathāsakaṃ ekekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe pavattantīti āha ‘‘ārammaṇabhedābhāvato’’ti. Purimakāraṇadvayavasenevāti ‘‘jhānadhammavasena, punappunaṃ samāpattivasenā’’ti pubbe vuttappakārakāraṇadvayavaseneva.
这些无色禅的支分因为没有烦恼的灼热而寂止,所缘则因为修习的殊胜而变得微细。因此,由于这些所缘,那些禅那是寂静的,所以说“这些是寂静的住处”。那四种,就是指这全部四种无色禅。巴利
Tesaṃ arūpajjhānānaṃ kilesapariḷāhābhāvena nibbutāni aṅgāni, bhāvanāvisesavasena sukhumāni ārammaṇāni. Tasmā tānīti tesaṃ vasena tāni jhānāni santāni, tasmā ‘‘santā ete vihārā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ catunnampīti catunnampi tesaṃ arūpajjhānānaṃ.
83 “他”是指增上慢的比丘,或者是除此之外的教外苦行者和游方者等人,他们不审度。其中,增上慢的人因为把没有证得的当成已经证得,所以不审度;另一种人则因为那不是他的领域,所以不审度。“于何处”,是指在哪些削减的修行事相上,以无害等四十四种行相来审度。巴利
83.Soti adhimāniko bhikkhu, añño vā ito bāhirako tāpasaparibbājakādiko na hi sammasati. Tattha adhimāniko appatte pattasaññitāya na sammasati, itaro avisayatāya. Yatthāti yasmiṃ sallekhavatthusmiṃ, avihiṃsakatādīhi catucattālīsāya ākārehi.
所谓八等至,是指通过镇伏烦恼而生起的法,它们一层比一层更寂静、更殊胜;而世间的无害等法并不是这样。在这里,有人提出质疑:“为什么只把无害等法说成是削减之道,而不把那些等至也说成是削减之道呢?”为了阐明这个道理,质疑者就说了“为什么……”等话。另一方则为了阐明这样的道理——“等至虽然本性寂静殊胜,但因为它们是轮回的基础,所以不能成为烦恼的削减之道;而无害等法因为是出离轮回的基础,所以才是削减之道”——而说了“因为是出世间的基础……”等话。正是通过这段能够说明八等至与无害等法之间差别的经文,才能了解它是如何产生更大果报的。这其实是就布施而言,因为受施者更殊胜,所以布施的果报更大,这就是前后文的关联。难道在那部经里,说的是“为亲证入流果而修行的人”,而不是只说“皈依的人”吗?为了回应这个质疑,他说了“从皈依开始……”等话。注疏中确实这样记载:“从最低限度来说,即使只是皈依三宝的近事男,也可以称为‘为亲证入流果而修行的人’。”因为,如果有人想要超越轮回的痛苦,以清净的信心皈依三宝,那么这种皈依就会成为他增上戒等修行的有力助缘,并逐渐导向见道之道的证得。巴利
Aṭṭha samāpattiyo nāma kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanavasena pavattā uttaruttari santapaṇītā dhammā, na tathā lokiyā avihiṃsādayo. Tattha kathaṃ avihiṃsādayo eva sallekhabhāvena vuttā, na itarāti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento codako ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādimāha. Itaro kāmaṃ samāpattiyo santapaṇītasabhāvā, vaṭṭapādakatāya pana kilesānaṃ sallekhapaṭipadā na honti, avihiṃsādayo pana vivaṭṭapādakā sallekhapaṭipadāti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘lokuttarapādakattā’’tiādimāha. Imināyeva aṭṭhasamāpattīhi avihiṃsādīnaṃ visesadīpakena suttena yathā mahapphalataraṃ hoti, taṃ pakārajātaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idañhi dakkhiṇeyyataratāya dakkhiṇāya mahapphalatarataṃ sandhāya vuttanti sambandho. Nanu tattha ‘‘sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno’’ti āgataṃ, na ‘‘saraṇagato’’ti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘saraṇagamanato paṭṭhāyā’’tiādi. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.379) ‘‘heṭṭhimakoṭiyā tisaraṇaṃ gato upāsakopi sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno nāmā’’ti. Yo hi vaṭṭadukkhaṃ samatikkamitukāmo pasannacitto ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchati, tassa taṃ adhisīlādīnaṃ upanissayo hutvā anukkamena dassanamaggādhigamāya saṃvatteyyāti.
“损害等事”:我们所说的损害等事,就是指在这个损害等事之中。“末尾的邪见和诸邪性最初的邪见”:这是按照开示的次第来说的。“混合在一起”:是依据邪见这一性质的共通性,把它们合并在一起。“如是”:用这个词,把这样的意思归纳起来——就像把业道中诸邪性在末尾和开头所说的邪见混合在一起、合并宣说一样,那些邪性末尾所说的正见,也同样被归纳在一起。巴利
Vihiṃsādivatthunti yadetaṃ vihiṃsādīnaṃ vatthuṃ vadāma, imasmiṃ vihiṃsādivatthusmiṃ. Antamicchādiṭṭhiñca micchattānaṃ ādimicchādiṭṭhiñcāti idaṃ desanākkamaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Missetvāti micchādiṭṭhibhāvasāmaññena ekajjhaṃ katvā. Tathāti iminā yathā kammapathamicchattānaṃ ante ādimhi ca vuttamicchādiṭṭhiṃ missetvā ekajjhaṃ vuttaṃ, tathā tesaṃ ante vuttasammādiṭṭhīti imamatthaṃ upasaṃharati.
所谓“命”,从世俗说法来看是指众生,从究竟意义来看是指命根。断命就是让众生越过自然死亡的本性,在中途就令其死去;或者越过刀杖等手段强行压制后令其死去。不与取就是属于他人所有的东西。取就是拿取。削除就是彻底削平,意思是完全舍弃。这是关于业道的论述,所以说“破坏真实义利”。离间语是因为它使彼此之间的爱念化为乌有,或者因为割裂、伤害其他众生而称为离间语。粗恶语就是粗糙、残酷的意思。无义利就是没有意义,完全背离自己和他人的利益。邪就是颠倒,以执取恒常等错误方式运作。恶的就是卑劣的。因为纯属不善,所以被佛陀等智者所呵责。以“没有布施”等为根据,这里说的是以十种事为所依的邪见。因为固执地认定事物根本不存在的这种邪执已经达到业道的程度,所以说它属于业道的范畴。以“色是我”等方式生起的有身见,因为能障碍圣道,所以是不导向解脱的邪见。正因为它不导向解脱,才被归入邪性之中。正就是不颠倒,因此是善的、美妙的;因为被佛陀等所赞许,所以是智者所称赞的。其余此处应依照邪见中所说的方式来了知。巴利
Pāṇanti vohārato sattaṃ, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Atipātenti saraseneva patanasabhāvaṃ aticca antarā eva pātenti, atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātenti. Adinnanti parasantakaṃ. Ādiyantīti gaṇhanti. Sallekhatīti samaṃ lekhati, pajahatīti attho. Kammapathakathā esāti ‘‘atthabhañjanaka’’nti vuttaṃ. Piyasuññakaraṇato pisuṇā, pisati pare satte hiṃsatīti vā pisuṇā. Pharusāti lūkhā, niṭṭhurāti attho. Niratthakanti attharahitaṃ attano paresañca hitavinimuttaṃ. Micchāti viparītā niccādivasena pavattiyā. Pāpikāti lāmikā. Ekantākusalatāya viññūhi buddhādīhi garahitā. Natthi dinnanti ādivatthukāyāti dasavatthukamicchādiṭṭhimāha. Natthikabhāvābhinivesanavasena kammapathappattiyevassā kammapathapariyāpannatā. ‘‘Rūpaṃ attā’’’tiādinayappavattā attadiṭṭhi maggantarāyakarattā aniyyānikadiṭṭhi. Aniyyānikattā eva hissā micchattapariyāpannatā. Sammāti aviparītā, tato eva sobhanā sundarā, buddhādīhi pasatthattā viññuppasatthā. Sesamettha micchādiṭṭhiyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
对不净等对象,因为执取净等相状,所以这些思惟是不真实的、不能导向解脱的,它们从不恰当的作意生起。说到“不善”,就是指这些不真实、不能导向解脱的不善思惟。所谓“以此类推”,就是用“不真实的、不能导向解脱的不善语”这样的说法,把“不真实”等含义类推到各处。这里的“语”指的是思心所,身业和活命也一样。这类思惟大多数是依随念过去而转起的,所以说“心念过去时”。就像世间人这样说:“我以前有很多财富,后来因为放逸,大部分都耗尽了。”所谓“带有类似忆念之相”,是说它生起时,带有一个类似“能忆念很久以前所做、很久以前所说”的念的生起相。“生起”指心的生起。像那样转起的心,就是邪念。这种邪念,或者因瞋恨而转起——比如想着“他曾骂我、打我”而对人怀恨在心;或者因贪欲而转起——比如按照“忆念过去与女人一起嬉笑、交谈、玩乐”等所说的方式,以净相随念;或者因邪见而转起——比如顽固地执着“我的这个我确实是恒常、稳固的”。应当知道,邪念就是按这些方式转起的。巴利
Asubhādīsu subhādiākāraggahaṇato ayāthāvaaniyyānikā ayoniso uppattiyā. Akusalāti ayāthāvāaniyyānikā akusalā saṅkappā. Esa nayoti iminā ‘‘ayāthāvā aniyyānikā akusalā vācā’’tiādinā tattha tattha ayāthāvādiatthaṃ atidisati. Vācāti cetanā adhippetā, tathā kammantājīvāsati ca. Yebhuyyena atītānussaraṇavasena pavattito ‘‘atītaṃ cintayato’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi loke evaṃ vadanti ‘‘yaṃ me pahūtaṃ dhanaṃ ahosi, taṃ pamādavasena pana bahuṃ khīṇa’’nti. Satipatirūpakenāti ‘‘cirakatampi cirabhāsitampi saritā’’ti evaṃ vuttasatuppattipatirūpakena. Uppattinti cittuppattiṃ. Tathāpavattacittuppādo hi micchāsati. Sā pana kodhavasena vā ‘‘akkocchi maṃ avadhi ma’’ntiādinā (dha. pa. 3) upanayhantassa, rāgavasena vā ‘‘yānissa tāni pubbe mātugāmena saddhiṃ hasitalapitakīḷitāni anussaratī’’ti (a. ni. 7.50) vuttanayena subhato anussarantassa, diṭṭhivasena vā ‘‘so kho pana me atto nicco dhuvo’’tiādinā micchāabhinivisantassāti evamādinā nayena pavattatīti veditabbā.
以思惟方法为出发点:在快速准备网、钩、饵等捕猎工具之类的事情上,通过谋划思量等方式造了恶业之后,生起追悔的相状;或者造了善业之后,以“这是我做的好事”为欢喜的相状,用这种反复观察的方式生起的愚痴,就是无智。在这里,就像把“刀”说成“吉祥”那样的说法一样,只是借用“智”这个名称来称呼它。但因为它的本质是邪的,所以只叫作邪智。十九种观察智,因为是正确地观察,所以叫正智;而其他那些对禅那等的观察智,则只归入正见之中。仅仅因为证得了色界和无色界的等至,就以为自己已经解脱了,其实根本没有从轮回中解脱出来,却生起“我们已经解脱了”这样的想。或者是在被称为凡夫慧的层面上,或者是在“远离功德却执着自己的个体”的层面上,或者是在“与大梵天王同住、亲近、结合”的层面上,在这些并非解脱的状态中,他们生起了解脱的想。因为纯粹是不善的、卑劣的,所以是邪恶的。因为不真实,所以是颠倒的。所谓“依照所说的”,就是指按照“他们实际上并没有解脱”所说的那样。像“我们在这里将成为正见者”等说法中,果正见等也是属于道正见一类的,所以注释说“与果相应……应当知道”。不过,一切果法从解脱蕴的含摄来说,称为“解脱”也没有任何矛盾。在这里,就是关于被称为正解脱的削减烦恼的立足处。巴利
Upāyacintāvasenāti khippajālakumināduhalādiupakaraṇasaṃvidhānādīsu yutticintanādivasena pāpaṃ katvā vippaṭisāranimittaṃ, ‘‘sukataṃ mayā’’ti pāmojjanimittaṃ katvā paccavekkhaṇākārena moho aññāṇaṃ. Tattha pana ‘‘asive sivā’’ti vohāro viya ñāṇavohāro. Micchāsabhāvattā pana micchāñāṇaṃtveva vuccati. Ekūnavīsatibhedaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ sammā pekkhitattā sammāñāṇaṃ vuccati, itaraṃ pana jhānādipaccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ sammādiṭṭhiyāva saṅgayhati. Rūpārūpasamāpattilābhitāmattena vaṭṭato avimuttāyeva samānā ‘‘vimuttā maya’’nti evaṃsaññino. Pakatipurisantarañāṇasaṅkhātāyaṃ, guṇaviyuttassa attano sakattani avaṭṭhānasaṅkhātāyaṃ, attano mahābrahmunā salokatā tassa samīpatāsaṃyujjanasaṅkhātāyaṃ vā avimuttiyaṃ vimuttisaññino. Ekantākusalatāya hīnattā pāpikā. Ayāthāvatāya viparītā. Yathāvuttenāti ‘‘avimuttāyeva samānā’’ti vuttappakārena. ‘‘Mayamettha sammādiṭṭhi bhavissāmā’’tiādīsu phalasammādiṭṭhiādīnipi maggasammādiṭṭhiādipakkhikānevāti adhippāyena ‘‘phalasampayuttāni…pe… veditabbā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbepi pana phaladhamme vimuttikkhandhasaṅgahato ‘‘vimuttī’’ti vuccamāne na koci virodho. Ettha sammāvimuttisaṅkhāte sallekhavatthumhi.
如果它们是按盖的角度来说的,那就只说了三种,因此说“有贪欲”等。“已至缠缚”:被昏沉睡眠所缠缚。由于某法的存在而被称为掉举,那个法就是掉举,所以说“具足掉举,称为掉举”。“审察”:以“这是法”或“这不是法”等方式,判定任何一种性质。“怀恨习性”:习惯于在心中追随他人不放。“嫉妒”:就是妒忌、不满。“诡诈”:就是内心一套、外表另一套,隐藏真实自我的人。然而,因为他们不说如实的话,所以说“即非正确地言说”。“依与已说相反的方式”:就是依据与已说之义相反的方式,比如“不忿怒者、不忿怒”等。巴利
Yadi nīvaraṇavasena vuttāni, tasmā tīṇeva vuttānīti āha ‘‘abhijjhālū’’tiādi. Pariyuṭṭhānappattā thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitā. Yassa dhammassa atthitāya uddhatā nāma honti, so dhammo uddhaccanti āha ‘‘uddaccena samannāgatāti uddhatā’’ti. Vicinantāti dhammoti vā adhammoti vā ādinā yaṃ kiñci sabhāvaṃ vinicchinantā. Upanāhanasīlāti parassa attano citte anubandhanasīlā. Issantīti usūyanti. Saṭhayantīti saṭhā aññathā attānaṃ aññathā pavedanakā. Te pana yasmā na yathābhūtavādino, tasmā āha ‘‘na sammā bhāsantīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Vuttapaccanīkanayenāti ‘‘na kodhanā akkodhanā’’tiādinā vuttaatthapaṭipakkhanayena.
“难言者”:在这些人当中,因为对言语有反感执取、有对立执取,所以难言。又说他们不能容忍言语,所以说“难以劝说”等。由于行为低劣,或者因为会招致苦果,所以是“恶的”。依于非正法,就是依于非善士之法。就像因为需要由自身来区分,才有身表等以及业门、身业门等;同样,因为具足不信等非善士之法,那些不信等本身就叫作非正法,也就是非善人的法。依于这些,所以说“他们没有信”,正如说“恶慧”那样。对契经、应颂等听闻得少,就是“少闻”;不具足听闻。“没有可执取的”——用这个来说明这里的“少”字是“没有”的意思,就像“少蚊、虻、风、热、爬虫之触”等中的“少”一样。由于不发起正道,卑鄙、应受呵责,他们在杂染那边沉没、陷落,所以是“懈怠者”——这是把 da 变成 ta 而构成的。为了断除不善法、具足善法,他们已发起、已提起精进,所以是“已发精进者”。由于不能使念生起,念忘失、灭去,所以是“失念者”。被染污,就是被破坏。名为恶慧,就是被破坏的状态,被对立面毁坏的状态,所以说“就是‘慧已灭失’的意思”。前面由于提到正见,已经包含了业自性智和道正见;在这里,由于以信等为首、由善友相伴的观资粮已被提出,所以说“这里应知观慧”。因此说“观资粮即是”等。为了说明这个道理即使不观察理由也应当接受,所以说“这是古师们的教诫”。巴利
Dukkhaṃ vaco etesu vippaṭikūlaggāhitāya vipaccanīkagāhesūti dubbacā. Te pana vacanakkhamā na hontīti āha ‘‘vattuṃ dukkhā’’tiādi. Hīnācāratāya dukkhassa vā sampāpakatāya pāpakā. Asaddhammavasenāti asappurisadhammavasena. Attanā visesitabbavasena kāyaviññattiādīnaṃ kāyakammadvārādibhāvo viya assaddhiyādiasaddhammasamannāgamenaasataṃ asappurisānaṃ dhammānanti tāniyeva assaddhiyādīni asaddhammā nāma, tesaṃ vasenāha ‘‘saddhā etesaṃ natthī’’ti yathā taṃ ‘‘duppaññā’’ti. Suttageyyādi appaṃ sutaṃ etesanti appassutā, sutena anupapannā. Natthīti gahetabbanti iminā abhāvattho ayaṃ appa-saddo ‘‘appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassāna’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 10.11) viyāti dasseti. Sammāpaṭipattiyā anārambhanato kucchitā gārayhā sīdanti osīdanti saṃkilesapakkheti kusītā da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā. Akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānāya kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ upasampadāya āraddhaṃ paggahitaṃ vīriyaṃ etesanti āraddhavīriyā. Anuppādanena muṭṭhā naṭṭhā sati etesanti muṭṭhassatī. Duṭṭhāti dūsitā. Duppaññā nāma dūsitabhāvo paṭipakkhena vināsitabhāvoti āha ‘‘naṭṭhapaññāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Heṭṭhā sammādiṭṭhiggahaṇena kammassakatāpaññāya maggasammādiṭṭhiyā ca gahitattā subbacakalyāṇamittatāparivārāhi idha saddhādīhi vipassanāsambhārassa uddhaṭattā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘idha vipassanāpaññā veditabbā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanāsambhāro hī’’tiādi. Yuttiṃ anapekkhitvāpi ayamattho gahetabboti dassento āha ‘‘porāṇānaṃ āṇā’’ti.
能障碍出世间功德的,就是障碍证得出世间功德。执取自见,是指自己的见解,或者自己无论执取了什么见解,这就是它的意思。因为越过事物的真实本性,从别的方面去抓取,所以叫执取。坚固执持,就是牢牢抓住“只有这个才是真的”。能令弃舍,就是具有舍弃的能力。如同龟一样,就像乌龟的脚等肢体被什么东西碰到时,会把所有肢体都缩回自己的壳里,不伸到外面去;同样,即使有人对他说“你这种执取不好,丢掉吧”,他也不肯放下,只把它藏在心里,在心里这样坚持。鳄鱼般的执取,就是鳄鱼的抓取。这样执取,意思是像鳄鱼抓到东西就不放开那样,如此抓取不放。巴利
Lokuttaraguṇānaṃ antarāyakaranti lokuttaraguṇānaṃ adhigamassa antarāyakaraṃ. Sandiṭṭhinti saṃ attano diṭṭhiṃ, yaṃ vā taṃ vā attanā yathāgahitadiṭṭhinti attho. Sabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanato parāmāsī. Daḷhaggāhīti ‘‘idameva sacca’’nti thiraggāhaggāhī. Paṭinissaggīti paṭinissajjanako. Kummovāti yathā kacchapo attano pādādike aṅge kenaci ghaṭṭito sabbāni aṅgāni attano kapāleyeva samodahati, na bahi nīharati, evamayampi ‘‘na sundaro tava gāho, chaḍḍehi na’’nti vutto taṃ na vissajjeti. Antoyeva attano hadaye eva ṭhapetvā taṃ vadati. Kumbhīlaggāhanti saṃsumāraggāhaṃ. Gaṇhantīti yathā saṃsumārā gahitaṃ na vissajjenti, evaṃ gaṇhanti.
84 “以四十四种方式”是指以不害等四十四种方式。那么,为什么在这里把不害放在最前面说呢?因为不害是一切功德的根本。所谓“不害”,就是悲的同义词,而悲尤其是戒的根本原因,因为它以不伤害他人为特征,能使人远离以伤害为特征的恶戒。就像杀生以伤害他人为特征一样,偷盗他人财物也是如此,因为夺人财物比刀刺还要严重。邪淫也是如此,因为它带来怀胎等痛苦,更何况侵犯他人妻女,那就不必说了。妄语欺骗他人、离间语分裂他人、粗恶语刺痛人心,它们伤害他人的性质非常明显。杂秽语则因为使人抓不住真正的义利、产生无义利之事,也是伤害他人。贪欲是不与取等的因,嗔恚是杀生等的因,邪见是一切无义利的因,它们都以伤害他人为特征。邪见者即使自称依法,仍然会做杀生等事,还会教唆别人去做,更不用说其他人了。以伤害为特征的恶戒能由此远离,以不害为特征的法尤其是戒的有力原因。以戒为基础,定才能建立;以定为基础,慧才能建立。所以,不害是一切功德的根本。再者,对于志向高远、做事审慎的贤善上士来说,就像他们的戒一样,他们的定和慧也都能带来他人的利益与安乐。因此,悲也是一切功德的根本,所以把它放在最前面说。巴利
84.Evaṃcatucattālīsāya ākārehīti avihiṃsanādīhi catuadhikacattālīsappakārehi. Kasmā panettha avihiṃsā ādito vuttā? Sabbaguṇānaṃ mūlabhāvato. Avihiṃsāti hi karuṇāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, sā ca visesato sīlassa mūlakāraṇaṃ parūpaghātalakkhaṇā dussīlyā oramāpanato. Yathā hi pāṇātipāto parūpaghātalakkhaṇo, tathā paresaṃ sāpateyyāvaharaṇaṃ, sattippahāratopi dhanassāvahāro garutaroti. Tathā abrahmacariyaṃ gabbhadhāraṇādidukkhāvahanato, paradārātikkame pana vattabbameva natthi. Paresaṃ visaṃvādanabhedanamammaghaṭṭanānaṃ parūpaghātabhāvo pākaṭo eva, samphappalāpo atthaggāhāpanato anatthuppādanato, abhijjhā adinnādānādihetuto, byāpādo pāṇātipātādihetuto, micchādiṭṭhi sabbānatthahetuto parūpaghātalakkhaṇā, micchādiṭṭhi dhammikapaṭiññopi pāṇātipātādīni karoti, pare ca tattha niyojeti, kimaṅgaṃ pana itare. Vihiṃsalakkhaṇā dussīlyā oramā avihiṃsalakkhaṇā visesato sīlassa balavakāraṇaṃ. Sīlapadaṭṭhāno ca samādhi, samādhipadaṭṭhānā ca paññāti sabbaguṇānaṃ mūlabhūtā avihiṃsā. Apica uḷārajjhāsayānaṃ nisammakārīnaṃ dhīrānaṃ uttamapurisānaṃ sīlaṃ viya samādhipaññāpi paresaṃ hitasukhāvahāva sampajjantīti evampi karuṇā sabbaguṇānaṃ mūlanti sā ādito vuttā.
此后,为了特别说明“这些法是以不害为根源的”,就选取了善业道法。接着,为了说明“戒是这些功德的根本,安住于此戒的人应当让这些法生起”,就选取了八种正性。为了说明“这样修行的人从一开始就是这样”,就选取了远离盖;至于最初不取两种盖时,取与不取之理,义注中已经说过。而忿与瞋的差别,应依照《中部义注》中所述的方式来理解。在这里,为了说明断除忿等即成就渐损,就接着选取了随烦恼的清净。为了说明这种清净是通过随顺、善知识、不放逸而成就的,就选取了杂项。为了说明对于具足随顺等功德的人,这些法能够圆满,修习观之后能导向圣道的证得,就选取了正法。为了说明对这样的人来说,这种错误执取会成为证得出世间功德的障碍,因此应当远远舍弃;也为了说明依照前面所说的正道修行而证得圣道、将渐损推向顶点,才说了“执取自见”等话。如此,应当理解这四十四种渐损方式的选取意图和次第。对于那些不能在实际上修习渐损之道的人,内心的意向也有很大利益,所以说“为了显示内心的意向也有很大利益”。巴利
Tato paraṃ visesato ‘‘avihiṃsāsamuṭṭhānā ime dhammā’’ti dassanatthaṃ kusalakammapathadhammā gahitā. Tato idaṃ guṇānaṃ mūlabhūtaṃ sīlaṃ, ettha patiṭṭhitena ime dhammā uppādetabbāti dassanatthaṃ aṭṭha sammattā gahitā. Tesaṃ visodhanāya paṭipannassa ādito evaṃ hotīti dassanatthaṃ nīvaraṇaviveko gahito, ādito nīvaraṇadvayassa aggahaṇe gahitāgahitakāraṇaṃ aṭṭhakathāya vuttameva. Kodhassa pana byāpādato bhedo vatthasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.71) vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Kodhādippahānena cettha sallekhasiddhīti dassanatthaṃ tato upakkilesavisuddhi gahitā. Sā ca subbacakalyāṇamittaappamattatāhi sijjhatīti dassanatthaṃ pakiṇṇakā gahitā. Sampannasovacassatādiguṇassa ime dhammā pāripūriṃ gacchanti, vipassanaṃ paribrūhetvā ariyamaggādhigamāya saṃvattantīti dassanatthaṃ saddhammā gahitā. Evaṃbhūtassa ayaṃ micchāgāho lokuttaraguṇādhigamassa antarāyakaro, tasmā so dūrato vajjetabbo, evaṃ yathāvuttāya sammāpaṭipattiyā ariyamaggaṃ adhigacchanto sallekhaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī’’tiādi vuttanti evametesaṃ catucattālīsāya sallekhākārānaṃ gahaṇapayojanaṃ anupubbī ca veditabbā. Payogato sallekhapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjituṃ asakkontānaṃ cittuppādopi bahūpakāroti āha ‘‘cittuppādassapi bahūpakārataṃ dassetu’’nti.
在善法当中,指的是不害等前面说过的没有过失的法。随顺,是指内心的生起通过身业和语业来随顺。那些法,指的是不害等法,或者指那些依内心生起而运转的法。现在,为了详细展示前面所说的法,开始说“为什么呢”等话。皈依,是针对不能用言语表达皈依的人而说的,所以说“以身”等。在“以身受持戒”这一句里,道理也是一样的。在这里应当知道:是就着这样那样生起的、比较轻快的欲界善心生起,来说这样的善身业和善语业有大利益,而不是从自性上来说内心生起有大利益。巴利
Kusalesudhammesūti avihiṃsādīsu yathāvuttaanavajjadhammesu. Anuvidhiyanāti cittuppādassa kāyavācāhi anuvidhānā. Tesaṃ dhammānanti avihiṃsādidhammānaṃ, tesaṃ vā cittuppādavasena pavattadhammānaṃ. Idāni yathāvuttadhammaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Saraṇagamanaṃ vācāya viññāpetuṃ asakkontassa vasena vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyena vā’’ti. ‘‘Sīlaṃ kāyena samādiyatī’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Ettha ca tathā tathā pavattasallahukakāmāvacarakusalacittuppattiṃ upādāya tathārūpakusalakāyavacīkammānaṃ bahūpakāratā vuttāti na sabhāvato cittuppādassa bahūpakārataṃ ñāyatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
85 “为了获得利益”,是指为了获得现世的利益等成就,或者只是为了证得圣道。因为圣道完全是利益,所以被称为利益。以回避的方式行走、活动,就是“遍行”,所以说“为了遍行,为了回避”。“无害”是正自觉者以正见的善巧安排所准备好的。“以安乐”:就是以不费力。“以这同一个方法”:就是以这不害一句中所说的方式。“一切句”:指其余的四十三句。巴利
85.Hitādhigamāyāti diṭṭhadhammikādihitasampattiyā, ariyamaggādhigamāya eva vā. Ariyamaggo hi ekantahitattā hito nāma. Parivajjanavasena kamanaṃ pavatti parikkamananti āha ‘‘parikkamanāya parivajjanatthāyā’’ti. Sammādassanupāyasaṃvidhānena avihiṃsā paṭiyattā sammāsambuddhena. Sukhenevāti akiccheneva. Eteneva upāyenāti eteneva avihiṃsāpade vuttena vidhinā. Sabbapadānīti sesāni tecattālīsa padāni.
86 不善的不令生结生者,是指与掉举俱行的心生起等法,也包括其他只给予转起果报的法;对于已经发生的结生,它们是果报的令生者;如果因为缺少条件而没能得到成熟的机会,或者像无记业等那样,就是不令生者。“以种类而言”,是指以不善的种类而言。“向下分行进”,是指趣向恶趣。“如是名者”,是用名称来标示它的体性,因为当条件具足时,它不会超出那种体性。因此说“在果报时是不可爱、不可乐的果报”。善的那一方面,也应当按同样的方式理解。但这里的差别是:此处结生令生者是与神通等相应的法,其余和前面所说相同。“于一切不善中”,在这里,除了“害”以外,其余一切不善都是能喻,“害”是所喻。“于一切善中”,这里也同样。以这个方便,就是说:正如“害”是所喻,其余善与不善是能喻;依照这个道理,应当用杀生等其他不善来比喻不善,也应当用远离杀生等其他善来比喻善。巴利
86.Akusalā paṭisandhiajanakā nāma uddhaccasahagatacittuppādadhammā aññepi pavattivipākamattadāyino, dinnāya paṭisandhiyā vipākajanakā, paccayavekallena vipaccituṃ aladdhokāsā ahosikammādayo vā ajanakā. Jātivasenāti akusalajātivasena. Adhobhāgaṅgamanīyāti apāyagamanīyā. Evaṃnāmāti nāmaggahaṇena sabhāvaṃ upalakkheti sati paccayasamavāye taṃsabhāvānativattanato. Tenāha ‘‘vipākakāle aniṭṭhākantavipākattā’’ti. Vuttanayeneva kusalapakkho veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso, idha paṭisandhiajanakā abhiññāsahagatadhammā, sesaṃ vuttasadisameva. Sabbe akusalāti ettha vihiṃsamekaṃ ṭhapetvā itare sabbe akusalā upamābhūtā. Vihiṃsā hi upameyyaṃ. Sabbe kusalāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Eteneva upāyenāti yathā vihiṃsānaṃ upameyyatā, tadavasesānaṃ kusalākusalānaṃ upamābhāvo vutto, iminā nayena akusalaṃ pāṇātipātādiakusalena itarena, kusalañca pāṇātipātāpaṭiviratiādikusalena itarena upametabbaṃ.
87 “般涅槃”的意思是:让烦恼的热恼止息下来。因为从四周涂抹、黏着的意义来说,大泥潭被称为泥沼,而且它必定也是极深的,所以说“沉入甚深泥沼”。就像泥沼一样,五种欲乐被称为泥沼,因此应当依照现在所说的比喻与所喻相配合的方式,来理解这里的含义。“没有那个因”中,“因”指的是手或脚没有陷入的状态,但这种状态并不存在。这个道理也同样适用于所喻。巴利
87.Parinibbāpaneti kilesapariḷāhavūpasamane. Parito limpanaṭṭhena palipaṃ vuccati mahākaddamaṃ, taṃ pana ekantato gambhīrampi hotīti ‘‘gambhīrakaddamenimuggo’’ti vuttaṃ. Palipaṃ viya palipanti pañca kāmaguṇā vuccanti, tasmā evaṃ idāni vuccamānena upamopameyyasaṃsandananayena ettha imasmiṃ ṭhāne atthayojanā veditabbā. Na hi taṃ kāraṇanti ettha kāraṇaṃ nāma hatthassa vā pādassa vā apalipannabhāvo, so pana natthi. Esa nayo upameyyepi.
在这里,可能有人会这样想:比丘等人是靠着世尊说法的威力才在讲说。于是先说“其实是世尊本人在那里拔除”,接着用比喻来说明这个意思,所以说了“国王的……”等话。先不说凡夫,就连那些已经达到声闻最高阶位的圣者们,他们的开示也仍然是导师本人的开示——为了显示这一点,所以说了“虽然……”等话。因为这样一来,由他们所说的经典就是佛语,而他们虽然因为说法而获得了殊胜成就,那些圣者也仍然是佛子。巴利
Tattha siyā kassaci parivitakko ‘‘bhagavato desanānubhāvena bhikkhuādayo kathentī’’ti. ‘‘Bhagavāyeva hi tattha uddharatī’’ti vatvā upamāya tadatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘rañño’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Puthujjanā tāvatiṭṭhantu, sāvakasikhāppattavisesānampi ariyānaṃ desanā satthuyeva desanāti dassetuṃ ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādimāha. Tathā hi tehi desitasuttāni buddhavacanameva, tesaṃ desanāya laddhavisesāpi ariyā buddhaputtāyevāti.
“未受用”是指没有去体验、没有去接触。“未学律”是指没有恭敬地学习五种律。不过,那些律是通过三学的修学来完成的,所以说“将修学三学”。那又是什么呢?在“此事理存在”这句话里,问“是什么事理”,回答说“未陷泥沼与陷入泥沼”等等。因为在圣典中,以“春达啊,他……”等话,把一般含义当作比喻来把握,把特殊含义当作被比喻的对象来说,所以先用“应当这样理解其含义”等话从共通层面说明,然后再从不共的层面详细开示,说“说了什么”等等。“将止息他人的害意”:这是说,有人见到名为无害的正行道,就跟随这种见解去做,通过说法使他人也成为无害者,这是针对这样的人说的。因为他的话语能起到指示的作用。因此说“这就是那个害者的……”。过去是害者、行邪道的人。通过修习断除害意的道等,说明自己本身就趋向无害、害意完全止息。因此说“如同已寂灭”等等。“于一切句中”,是指在“杀生者”等文中出现的四十三句。巴利
Anibbisatāyāti anibbisevanatāya. Asikkhitavinayatāyāti pañcannaṃ vinayānaṃ sādaraṃ asikkhitabhāvena. Te pana vinayā tissannaṃ sikkhānaṃ sikkhāpanena hotīti āha ‘‘tisso sikkhā sikkhāpessatī’’ti. Kiṃ pana tanti? ‘‘Ṭhānametaṃ vijjatī’’ti ettha vuttaṃ kiṃ pana ṭhānanti āha ‘‘apalipapalipannatta’’ntiādi. Yasmā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘so vata cundā’’tiādinā sāmaññatthaṃ upamābhāvena gahetvā visesattho upameyyabhāvena vutto, tasmā tamatthaṃ ‘‘evamattho veditabbo’’tiādinā sādhāraṇato vatvā puna asādhāraṇato vivaranto ‘‘kiṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādimāha. Parassa vihiṃsācetanaṃ nibbāpessatīti idaṃ yo avihiṃsāsaṅkhātaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ disvā diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjanto dhammadesanāya paro avihiṃsako hoti, tādisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ādesanañhi tassa vacananti. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ yā esā vihiṃsakassā’’ti. Pubbe vihiṃsakassa micchāpaṭipajjantassa. Vihiṃsāpahānāya maggaṃ bhāvayatotiādinā attano eva avihiṃsāya vihiṃsāparinibbānāya saṃvattanamāha. Tenāha ‘‘parinibbuto viyā’’tiādi. Sabbapadesūti ‘‘pāṇātipātissā’’tiādinā āgatesu tecattālīsāya padesu.
88 “如是”是指对所说方式的把握。“它的”是指减损的。就像在“婆罗门,确实有这个道理”等句子中那样,道理这个词是原因的意思,所以说“减损的原因”。“以它们为依据”就是依据各种减损。以慈心的方式去和合,就是寻求利益。以悲心的方式去怜悯。“已遍取”就是周遍地取,意思是遍满。“已遍行”就是周遍地行,意思是完全遍满。“莫放逸”:对于所说的止和观,不要因为无知或者其他放逸的原因而陷入放逸。因为在能导出的教法中,即使做了不该做的事,也是放逸。“于失坏时”指七种不适等失坏的时候。如上所说的五种道理,以及其他一切教法功德都包含在这里,所以说“你们要修习禅那,不要放逸,这是对你们的教诫”。巴利
88.Evanti desitākāraparāmasanaṃ. Tassāti sallekhassa. ‘‘Atthi khvesa brāhmaṇa, pariyāyo’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 3-10) viya pariyāya-saddo kāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘sallekhakāraṇa’’nti. Tesaṃ vasenāti sallekhānaṃ vasena. Mettāya upasaṃharaṇavasena hitaṃ esantena. Karuṇāya vasena anukampamānena. Pariggahetvāti parito gahetvā, paritvāti attho. Pariccāti parito itvā, samantato pharitvā icceva attho. Mā pamajjitthāti ‘‘jhāyathā’’ti vuttasamathavipassanānaṃ aññāṇena, aññena vā kenaci pamādakāraṇena mā pamādaṃ āpajjittha. Niyyānikasāsane hi akattabbakaraṇampi pamādoti. Vipattikāleti sattaasappāyādivipattiyuttakāle. Yathāvuttā pañca pariyāyā aññepi sabbe sāsanaguṇā idheva saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti āha ‘‘jhāyatha, mā pamādatthāti tumhākaṃ anusāsanī’’ti.
第9章《正见经》的注释巴利
9. Sammādiṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā
89 只取“想问”这一点,是通过限定来排除其余四种问,因为那四种问不可能成立,而且所问的意义要在这里回答,所以这样说。“这是正见”:凡夫虽然不能如实知道,也会把外道苦行者等持守与自己相似戒行的人说成是正见者。依“传闻”等,就是依传闻、推寻、见解、审虑、忍可等方式。由于按照所具足的相状,其义如此得到审虑忍可,所以决定会如实执取,因此说“以自己亲证”,意思是说,因为如实之相已被通达,所以是自己亲证。“由多数人的说法”:由于这在教法和世间中已经成为惯用,所以这种重复说法应当理解为既依教法中的惯用,也依净信。义,就是词义。相,就是自性。依,就是取。美好,就是善妙。殊胜,就是值得称赞。其中,前一句显示诸法如实了知,也就是正见的自性;因此,正见能胜过一切法而显耀。后一句显示正见在相应法中成为引导者;因此,正见使相应法如同由智所成,也使具有这种正见的人如同一个智的聚集体,于是“智者、聪敏、善巧、有智、明察”等称赞之语便传遍各方。巴利
89.Kathetukamyatāpucchāevāti avadhāraṇena itarā catasso pucchā nivatteti itarāsaṃ asambhavato, tattha yathāpucchitassa atthassa vissajjanato ca ‘‘ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhī’’ti yāthāvato ajānantāpi puthujjanā bāhirakatāpasādayo attano samānasīle ṭhitaṃ sammādiṭṭhīti vadanti. Anussavādivasenāpīti anussavākāraparivitakkadiṭṭhinijjhānakkhantivasenapi. Yathāsamaṅgitākārassa atthassa evametanti nijjhānakkhamāpanato ekantato yāthāvaggāho hotīti āha ‘‘attapaccakkhenapī’’ti, yāthāvato lakkhaṇassa paṭividdhattā attano paccakkhabhāvenāti attho. Bahunnaṃ vacanaṃ upādāyāti iminā sāsane loke ca niruḷhatāya ayaṃ āmeḍitapayogoti sāsanassa niruḷhatāya ca sampasādaṃ upādāyapi tadubhayiko āmeḍitapayogo daṭṭhabbo. Atthanti vacanatthaṃ. Lakkhaṇanti sabhāvaṃ. Upādāyāti gahetvā. Sobhanāyāti sundarāya. Pasatthāyāti pasaṃsāya. Tesu purimena dhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvāvabodhasaṅkhātaṃ sammādiṭṭhisabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tena hi sā sabbadhamme abhibhavitvā sobhati. Dutiyena sampayuttadhammesu pariṇāyikabhāvaṃ. Tena hi sā sampayuttadhamme ñāṇamaye viya taṃsamaṅginañca puggalaṃ ñāṇapiṇḍaṃ viya karoti, tassa ‘‘paṇḍito nipuṇo cheko viññū vibhāvī’’tiādinā disāsu pasaṃsā pattharati.
业属己智:业是自己的,所以叫“业属己”;这种状态就是“业属己性”;在这个意义上,能这样了知的智——“这些业是众生自己的,这些不是自己的”——就是业属己智。随顺谛智:随顺于对四圣谛的通达,所以叫随顺谛智,也就是观智。外道没有随顺谛的正见,因为他完全不具有这种正见。这里说明了原因:“因为我见执取故”。不过,外道的业属己见是随顺我见而生起的,因为它是依“有布施”等说法而现起的。教内的人具有两种:教内的凡夫以业属己智等两种而具有正见。因为已经进入正决定,所以说“有学是决定的”。应当这样连接理解:由无学正见而成为正见者。为了显示在这三种人中,这里指的是有学为正见者,所以说“以决定的、能导出的”等。巴利
Kammassakatāñāṇanti kammaṃ sako etassāti kammassako, tassa bhāvo kammassakatā, tattha ñāṇaṃ ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ sattānaṃ sakaṃ, idaṃ no saka’’nti evaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ. Saccānulomikañāṇanti ariyasaccānaṃ paṭivedhassa anulomato saccānulomikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, vipassanāñāṇaṃ. No saccānulomikāyāti bāhirako saccānulomikāya sammādiṭṭhiyā no sammādiṭṭhi sabbena sabbaṃ tassa abhāvato. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘attadiṭṭhiparāmāsakattā’’ti. Kammassa katādiṭṭhi pana bāhirakassa attadiṭṭhiṃ anurujjhantī pavattati ‘‘atthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattito. Sāsaniko dvīhipīti sāsaniko puthujjano kammassakatāñāṇādīhi dvīhipi sammādiṭṭhi. Okkantasammattaniyāmattā ‘‘sekkho niyatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Asekkhāya sammādiṭṭhiyā sammādiṭṭhīti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tīsupi puggalesu sekkho idha sammādiṭṭhīti adhippetoti dassento ‘‘niyatāya niyyānikāyā’’tiādimāha.
现在,为了用圣典把前面所说的义理讲清楚,所以说了“因此他这样说”等话。“二边”,就是指“常见、断见、欲乐、自苦”这二边。不接近沉滞与掉举、住着与策励这二边,其义自然成立。“以正直性”,就是以正直的方式,也就是以中道、以中道的修行,这是它的意思。由于对法生起了净信,对师与僧的净信也就随之生起了,所以只说“于法”,因为这两者不相离。由于这位具足决定正见的人被称为正见者,而这种正见是通过出离轮回、证得离系而成就的,所以说“来到这正法”。涅槃是寂静、恒常存在的法,因此称为“正法”,由于果的殊胜,它得以被这样宣说。它的到来就是作证现观,而这种现观与断现观等是同时成就的,为了显示这一点,所以说了“解开一切见的稠林”等话。其中,以“解开一切见的稠林”和“断一切烦恼”这两句说断现观;以“出离生与轮回”说遍知现观,“超越”就是遍知的意思;以“完成行道”说修习现观,应当这样理解。巴利
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ pāḷiyā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tenevāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Antadvayanti ‘‘sassataṃ, ucchedaṃ, kāmasukhaṃ, attakilamatha’’nti etaṃ antadvayaṃ. Līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanantadvayassa anupagamanaṃ atthasiddhameva. Ujubhāvenāti ujusabhāvena maggena, majjhimāya paṭipattiyāti attho. Dhamme pasādaggahaṇena satthari saṅghe ca pasādopi gahitoyeva hotīti ‘‘dhamme’’icceva vutto tadavinābhāvato. Yasmā esa niyatāya sammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato sammādiṭṭhīti adhippeto, tañca vaṭṭato niyyānaṃ vivaṭṭādhigamena hotīti āha ‘‘āgato imaṃ saddhamma’’nti. Nibbānañhi santo sadā vijjamāno dhammoti katvā saddhammoti imaṃ phalehi asādhāraṇena pariyāyena vattabbataṃ labhati. Tayidamassa āgamaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayo, so ca pahānābhisamayādīhi saheva idha ijjhatīti dassento ‘‘sabbadiṭṭhigahanānī’’tiādimāha. Tattha sabbadiṭṭhigahanāni vinibbeṭhento sabbakilese pajahantoti padadvayena pana pahānābhisamayamāha, jātisaṃsārā nikkhamantoti iminā pariññābhisamayaṃ. Samatikkamattho hi pariññattho. Paṭipattiṃ pariniṭṭhapentoti iminā bhāvanābhisamayanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“时间限定之说”:“限定”就是划定范围;时间本身就是限定,所以叫“时间限定”。也就是说,对由了知不善等所划定的、从道生起的那一刻——即道刹那——所作的说明,就是这个意思。因此说“于其时”。“及不善”中的“及”是集合的意思,用它把下面要讲的不善根等一并收摄进来。“十不善业道”:这里有什么特别,为什么要把还没确定差别的不善都收进来呢?因为以共相来说明时,并不固定在别相上。又何必做这番推理思考呢?因为第二转是对第一转中略说的内容作详细开示,所以说“然而,尊者,什么……”等。由于这里指的是出世间正见,所以是就“以作用的方式,依靠以涅槃为所缘的了知——即道慧——从迷惑中穿透‘这是苦’,通达十不善业道”而说的,因此说“了知不善”,这就是它的意思。这里的“其”,指称为不善业道的苦。“以那种方式”,就是指前面所说“以涅槃为所缘的了知的作用方式”。巴利
Kālaparicchedavacananti paricchijjatīti paricchedo, kālo eva paricchedo kālaparicchedo, yo so akusalapajānanādinā paricchinno maggavuṭṭhānakālo maggakkhaṇo, tassa vacananti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yasmiṃ kāle’’ti. Akusalañcāti ca-saddo samuccayattho. Tena vakkhamānaṃ akusalamūlādiṃ samuccinoti. Dasākusalakammapathanti kutoyaṃ viseso, yāvatā aniddhāritavisesaṃ akusalaṃ gahitanti? Na sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato. Kiṃ vā imāya yutticintāya, yasmā paṭhamavārena uddesavasena desitassa atthassa vitthāradesanā dutiyavāro. Tenevāha ‘‘katamaṃ panāvuso’’tiādi. Yasmā lokuttarā sammādiṭṭhi idha adhippetā, tasmā nirodhārammaṇāya pajānanāya maggapaññāya kiccavasena sammohato ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti dasaakusalakammapathaṃ paṭivijjhanto ‘‘akusalaṃ pajānātī’’ti vuccatīti attho. Tassāti akusalakammapathasaṅkhātassa dukkhassa. Teneva pakārenāti ‘‘nirodhārammaṇāya pajānanāya kiccavasenā’’ti vuttappakārena.
“善”这个词在这里的词义是这样:它能动摇、搅动、震动那些应当呵责的恶法,所以叫“善”;或者说,以应当呵责的方式而存在的东西,叫“茅草”,也就是种种恶法。能割断、斩断这些茅草的,就叫“善”。或者说,智慧能磨砺、细碎那些应当呵责者,所以智慧名为“茅草”;凡是依着它而应获得、应当执取、应当生起的,就叫“善”。又像茅草能割伤双手一样,这个法能割断、斩断已生和未生两方面的杂染分;正因为它像茅草一样割断,所以叫“善”。或者说,因为它能制止、防护那些应当呵责的有罪之法,所以叫“善”。因为依靠善法,不善法在第六意门等诸门中便不生起,行者由此得到防护。或者说,它能动摇、驱除、去除那些应当呵责的恶法,所以叫“善”。或者说,贪瞋等法能磨砺、锐利那些应当呵责的杀生等法,所以贪瞋等名为“茅草”;由于思以有过失的方式达到锐利状态,杀生等法便有大罪。能割断、斩断这些茅草的,就叫“善”。或者说,信等诸根能终结、毁灭那些应当呵责之法,它们依福业事而转起,所以名为“茅草”;凡是依着它们而应获得、应当生起的,就叫“善”。或者说,“ku”称为地;以依止性而与地相似、成为自身所依的色无色相续,现在与未来皆不残留地毁灭,所以称为“茅草”,即贪等。它们能截断、斩断自身所依,因此叫“善”。因为由加行所成的善法,能令色无色法完全不再生起而彻底断除。善的根叫“善根”,它以成就坚固安住状态,是善的依止、因由,这是它的意思。不善的根也是这样,此处也是同样的道理。巴利
Kusalanti etthāyaṃ vacanattho – kucchite pāpadhamme salayati calayati kampetīti kusalaṃ, kucchitena vā ākārena sayantīti kusā, pāpakā dhammā. Te kuse lunāti chindatīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā sānato tanukaraṇato ñāṇaṃ kusaṃ nāma, tena lātabbaṃ gahetabbaṃ pavattetabbanti kusalaṃ. Yathā vā kuso ubhayabhāgagataṃ hatthapadesaṃ lunāti, evamidaṃ uppannānuppannavasena ubhayabhāgagataṃ saṃkilesapakkhaṃ lunāti chindati, tasmā kuso viya lunātīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā sāvajjadhammānaṃ salanato saṃvaraṇato kusalaṃ. Kusaladhammavasena hi akusalā manacchaṭṭhesu dvāresu appavattiyā saṃvutā honti. Kucchite vā pāpadhamme salayati gameti apanetīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā pāṇātipātādīnaṃ sānato nisānato tejanato kusā, dosalobhādayo. Sādīnavavasena cetanāya tikkhabhāvappattiyā pāṇātipātādīnaṃ mahāsāvajjatā. Te kuse lunāti chindatīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā sānato antakaraṇato vināsanato kusāni, puññakiriyavasena pavattāni saddhādīni indriyāni. Tehi lātabbaṃ pavattetabbanti kusalaṃ. ‘‘Ku’’iti vā bhūmi vuccati, adhiṭṭhānabhāvena taṃsadisassa attano nissayabhūtassa rūpārūpapabandhassa sampati āyatiñca anudahena vināsanato kuṃ sasantīti kusā, rāgādayo. Te viya attano nissayassa lavanato chindanato kusalaṃ. Payogasampāditā hi kusaladhammā accantameva rūpārūpadhamme appavattikaraṇena samucchindanti. Kusalassa mūlanti kusalamūlaṃ, suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanena kusalassa patiṭṭhā nidānanti attho. Akusalamūlanti etthāpi eseva nayo.
“不善”则是“非善”。应当知道,这个词的意思是从与善法相对立的角度来说的。因为,被称为“善”是从无病、无过失、乐异熟、由善巧所生这些意义上说的。凡是这类法,不是无病的、不是无过失的、不是乐异熟的、也不是由善巧所生的,那就是“不善”——这里显示的就是这个意思。同样地,凡是不具有不应受呵责者的本性,既不是以茅草的方式,也不是由诸茅草所推动,也不像茅草那样能割截,那就名为不善——应当知道,这个意思也被显示出来了。“了知事”,就是对苦等事的了知,也就是通达。同样地,开示是随顺那些能觉悟者的心向而进行的,所以说“也以了知不善等”。也正是因此,开示是以简略的方式进行的。而“修习作意”,则依据“比丘们,一切应被遍知”这一说法,毫无遗漏地纯粹以总摄色法与无色法的方式而进行,因此说“唯是开示……”等。其中的“作意通达”,是指在加行阶段进行的观作意,以及圣道通达。对于某些人,因为不堪烦乱,所以只以广说的方式来说:那些致力于修观的人,在证悟道时也是以广说的方式通达的——这个意思是说,因为不存在清净次第的缘故。巴利
Akusalanti pana na kusalaṃ akusalaṃ, kusaladhammānaṃ paṭipakkhavasena akusalanti padassa attho veditabbo. Evañhi ārogyānavajjasukhavipākakosallasambhūtaṭṭhena kusalaṃ vuccatīti. Yathā yaṃ dhammajātaṃ na arogaṃ na avajjaṃ na sukhavipākaṃ na ca kosallasambhūtaṃ, taṃ akusalanti ayamattho dassito hoti. Evaṃ yaṃ na kucchitānaṃ salanasabhāvaṃ, na kusena, kusehi vā pavattetabbaṃ, na ca kuso viya lavanakaṃ, taṃ akusalaṃ nāmāti ayampi attho dassitoti veditabbo. Vatthupajānanāti dukkhādivatthuno pajānanā paṭivedho. Tathā bujjhanakapuggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena desanā pavattāti āha ‘‘akusalādipajānanenāpī’’ti. Teneva ca saṃkhittena desanā pavattā. Bhāvanāmanasikāro pana ‘‘sabbaṃ bhikkhave abhiññeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.46; paṭi. ma. 1.3) vacanato anavasesato rūpārūpadhammānaṃ pariggahavaseneva pavattati. Tenāha ‘‘desanāyevā’’tiādi. Tattha manasikārapaṭivedhoti pubbabhāge pavattavipassanāmanasikāro ariyamaggapaṭivedho ca. Kassaci akopanato vitthāravaseneva vuttaṃ vipassanaṃ anuyuñjantā maggaṃ paṭivijjhantāpi vitthāranayeneva paṭivijjhantīti attho visuddhikkamassa abhāvato.
所谓“比丘”,指的是在大寺里为了结集法义而坐在五部经群会场中的那些比丘。所谓“长老”,那里的人说是指僧团中的长老。不过,按照《衣经注》里所说的方式,则是针对玛哈桑卡拉奇达长老的弟子比丘们,才说了“他们曾说”。而“长老”就是指玛哈桑卡拉奇达长老,因为他在这部《中部》里对种种判定作了讲述。“积聚”就是从聚合成团来说的,意思是合为一处。巴利
Bhikkhūti mahāvihāre dhammasaṅgītivasena pañcanikāyamaṇḍale nisinnabhikkhū. Theroti tattha saṅghattheroti vadanti. Vatthasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena pana mahāsaṅgharakkhitattherassa antevāsikabhikkhū sandhāya ‘‘āhaṃsū’’ti vuttaṃ. Theroti pana mahāsaṅgharakkhitatthero. So hi imasmiṃ majjhimanikāye taṃ taṃ vinicchayaṃ kathesi. Rāsitoti piṇḍato, ekajjhanti attho.
不善业道的注释巴利
Akusalakammapathavaṇṇanā
从不善巧的运作来说:与善巧相对立的就是不善巧,也就是无智;因为是从它运作起来的,所以说是从不善巧所生,这就是它的意思。与智慧相对立的是无智,就像与朋友相对立的是敌人;与善相对立的是不善,因为不善应当被善舍断,而不是善被不善舍断。实际上,只有通过修行实践所成就的善,才能舍断不善。与有罪过的贪等一起运作,所以称为有罪。其异熟是苦的、不可意的、由四蕴所构成的,所以是苦果。在这里,有罪这个词显示的是不善在运作时的苦;苦果这个词显示的是果报的苦。前一句是依运作生起的方式来说明不善的特征,后一句是依在间隔中能产生异熟的能力来说的。同样,前一句显示不善自性不清净,后一句显示它的异熟不清净。前一句把不善从善的自性中排除出去,后一句因为显示有异熟,所以把不善从无记的自性中排除出去。或者,前一句因为显示有罪过,所以从作用的角度显示它产生无益的作用;后一句从成就的角度显示它产生不可意异熟的作用。前一句从现起的行相角度,显示它是杂染的现起;后一句从果的角度,显示它是苦果的现起。前一句还说明不如理作意是不善的近因,因为不善就是从那产生的;后一句说明不善也是其他法的近因,因为它就是苦果的原因。杂染的意思是具有种种烦恼,被十种烦恼事所逼迫、所烧恼,或者被它们所染污、所弄脏。这里说的有罪和苦果,是为了让那些因为看不到苦果而不相信的人,通过亲眼看到过患而生起警醒。这是通于一切不善的。巴利
Akosallappavattiyāti kosallapaṭipakkhato akosallaṃ vuccati aññāṇaṃ, tato pavattanato, akosallasambhūtattāti attho. Ñāṇapaṭipakkho aññāṇaṃ mittapaṭipakkho amitto viya kusalapaṭipakkho akusalaṃ kusalena pahātabbattā, na pana kusalānaṃ pahāyatattā. Kusalameva hi payogasampāditaṃ akusalaṃ pajahati. Saha avajjehi lobhādīhi vattatīti sāvajjaṃ. Dukkho aniṭṭho catukkhandha-saṅkhāto vipāko etassāti dukkhavipākaṃ. Tattha sāvajjavacanena akusalānaṃ pavattidukkhataṃ dasseti, dukkhavipākavacanena vipākadukkhataṃ. Purimañhi pavattisambhavavasena akusalassa lakkhaṇavacanaṃ, pacchimaṃ tālantare vipākuppādanasamatthatāvasena. Tathā purimena akusalassa avisuddhasabhāvataṃ dasseti, pacchimena avisuddhavipākataṃ. Purimena akusalaṃ kusalasabhāvato nivatteti, pacchimena abyākatasabhāvato savipākattadīpakattā pacchimassa. Purimena vā avajjavantatādassanato kiccaṭṭhena rasena anatthajananarasataṃ dasseti, pacchimena sampattiatthena aniṭṭhavipākarasataṃ. Purimena ca upaṭṭhānākāraṭṭhena paccupaṭṭhānena saṃkilesapaccupaṭṭhānataṃ, pacchimena phalaṭṭhena dukkhavipākapaccupaṭṭhānataṃ. Purimena ca ayonisomanasikāraṃ akusalassa padaṭṭhānaṃ pakāseti. Tato hi taṃ sāvajjaṃ jātaṃ, pacchimena akusalassa aññesaṃ padaṭṭhānabhāvaṃ vibhāveti. Tañhi dukkhavipākassa kāraṇanti. Saṃkiliṭṭhanti saṃkilesehi samannāgataṃ, dasahi kilesavatthūhi vibādhitaṃ, upatāpitaṃ vā tehi vidūsitaṃ malīnakatañcāti attho. Idañcassa dukkhavipākatañcāti atthe idañca dukkhavipākataṃ apaccakkhatāya asaddahantānaṃ paccakkhato ādīnavadassanena saṃvejanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Sādhāraṇā sabbassapi akusalassa.
对于本身就有坠落性质的(众生),在中间就让他极速坠落,这叫“杀”,意思是不让他慢慢掉下去,而是让他快速坠落。越过(界限)之后,用刀杖等制伏而令其坠落,也是“杀”。由于加行、事(对象)重大等缘故而有重罪,其原因就在于:以那些缘而生起的思具有强力。确实,一种加行之所以成为重大,是由于决定思之力——这决定思既以迅速完成的方式成办自身作用,又由多次生起的速行而获得反复串习。即使有时加行在杀害小生命和大生命上是同等的,杀害大生命者的思也会以猛烈的行相生起,这就是事的重大。这样,这两者都是由于思的强力而成为(重罪)。即使在如前所说的缘的不同类别中,也应知正是由于依那些缘而思具有强力,才有重罪。因为即使加行、事等不重大,由于所杀对象具有德行,也会有重罪;反过来则有轻罪,这应与事的重大、不重大同样看待。烦恼与加行二者的柔和与猛烈,也应相应地配合为轻罪与重罪。有生命、有生命想、杀心这三者,也属于加行之前的部分;而加行则是由杀思所引发的。因为五支就是杀生的思,所以那(杀生思)应被看作具备五支。这个分析在偷盗等(业道)上也应随宜说明。以刺、击等方式亲手完成,是自手作;以命令的方式进行,是令作;以射箭、投枪、投石等舍弃(武器)的方式进行,是放下作;以持续固定的方式等进行,是固定作;像阿闼婆吠陀行者等那样以咒术念诵的方式进行,是咒术所作;由业异熟所生的神通所作,是神通所作,如以牙咬、以拳打等。巴利
Saraseneva (dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 1) patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atīva pātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho. Atikkammavā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto. Payogavatthumahantatādīhi mahāsāvajjatā tehi paccayehi uppajjamānāya cetanāya balavabhāvato. Ekassa hi payogassa sahasā nipphādanavasena sakiccasādhikāya bahukkhattuṃ pavattajavanehi laddhāsevanāya ca sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya vasena payogassa mahantabhāvo. Satipi kadāci khuddake ceva mahante ca pāṇe payogassa samabhāve mahantaṃ hanantassa cetanā tibbākārā uppajjatīti vatthussa mahantabhāvo. Iti ubhayampetaṃ cetanāya balavabhāveneva hotīti. Yathāvuttapaccayapariyāyepi taṃtaṃpaccayehi cetanāya balavatāya eva mahāsāvajjabhāvo veditabbo. Payogavatthuādipaccayānañhi amahattepi hantabbassa guṇavantatāya mahāsāvajjatā, tabbipariyāyena appasāvajjatā ca vatthussa mahattāmahattesu viya daṭṭhabbā. Kilesānaṃ upakkamānaṃ dvinnañca mudutāya tibbatāya ca appasāvajjatā mahāsāvajjatāpi yojetabbā. Pāṇo pāṇasaññitā vadhakacittañca pubbabhāgiyāpi honti, upakkamo vadhakacetanāsamuṭṭhāpito. Pañca sambhārā hi pāṇātipātacetanāti sā pañcasambhāravinimuttā daṭṭhabbā. Ayañca vicāro adinnādānādīsupi yathārahaṃ vattabbo. Vijjhanapaharaṇādivasena sahatthenanibbatto sāhatthiko, āṇāpanavasena pavatto āṇattiko, ususattiyantapāsāṇādinissajjanavasena pavatto nissaggiyo, aduhalasajjanādivasena pavatto thāvaro, āthabbaṇikādīnaṃ viya mantaparijappanavasena pavatto vijjāmayo, kammavipākajiddhimayo iddhimayo dāṭhākoṭanādīni viya.
如果有人说:对于别人执为己有的东西,比如“这是我的”,在未经给予的情况下取走,那就成了不与取。那么,对于仰卧的婴儿所拥有的东西,既然他根本没有执取的想,这又怎么说呢?于是论主说“凡有他……”等。所谓“他”,就是那件物品的主人,不管他是有辨识能力的还是无辨识能力的。因为即使是无辨识能力的人,在他有辨识能力的时候,随自己的意愿处置财物,也是没有罪过的。通过咒术念诵来取走他人的东西,属于咒术所成;不用咒术,而以身体和语言的行为去拉取他人的东西,或者以同类神通力来施行,则属于神通所成的加行。关于不与取,论中说有六种加行:自手作等。所谓“随宜”,在这里,自手作可以依五种偷盗方式而发生,令作和放下作也是这样。固定作则依偷盗、强夺盗、隐匿盗而发生。其余的也应如此观察。巴利
Yadi ‘‘mama ida’’nti parena pariggahitaṃ adinnaṃ, uttānaseyyakadārakasantake kathaṃ tassa pariggahasaññāya eva abhāvatoti āha ‘‘yattha paro’’tiādi. Paro nāma viññū vā aviññū vā atthi tassa vatthussa sāmiko. Aviññūpi hi viññukāle yathākāmaṃ karonto adaṇḍārahoti. Mantaparijappanena parasantakaharaṇaṃ vijjāmayo, vinā mantena parasantakassa kāyavacīpayogehi parikaḍḍhanaṃ tādiseniddhivasena iddhimayo payogoti adinnādāne cha payogāsāhatthikādayo vuttā. Yathānurūpanti ettha sāhatthiko tāva pañcannampi avahārānaṃ vasena pavattati, tathā āṇattiyo nissaggiyo ca. Thāvaro theyyāvahārapasayhāvahārapaṭicchannāvahāravasena. Tathā sesāpīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“淫欲行为”是指两种淫欲行为:满足于自己的妻子,以及与他人的妻子行淫。这里要说明的正是这种区分。“族护”:被同族姓的人守护。“法护”:被同修法的人守护。“有主护”:有丈夫的女人。如果与她交合,国王已经立了刑罚,她就叫“罚护”。为了当妻子而用钱财买来的,叫“财买”。按自己的意愿生活的,叫“欲住”。为了财富而生活的,叫“财住”。为了布匹而生活的,叫“布住”。碰了水盆之后娶来的,叫“触水盆妇”。取下头垫之后娶来的,叫“取去垫妇”。被抢来的,叫“夺帜妇”。还有“刹那临时妇”。以强力制服而违犯的,是邪行,罪很重;双方自愿则不是这样。有人说:即使被制服而违犯,虽然在道或非道上有忍受,但因为先前没有生起惯习的染着心和加行,被制伏的人不构成邪行。如果有行欲的心,但缺少加行,也不构成,因为大多数情况下女方并没有行欲的加行。这样一来,即使她心里先起了行欲的心,她也不构成邪行;同样,男方没有行欲的加行时也是如此。因此,按自己意愿进行的,有三项;被强迫进行的,有三项;全部合起来,以不取已取的方式说,有四种要素。巴利
Methunasamācāresūti sadārāsantosa-paradāragamanavasena duvidhesu methunasamācāresu. Ayamevahi bhedo idhādhippeto. Gottarakkhitā sagottehi rakkhitā. Dhammarakkhitā sahadhammikehi rakkhitā. Sārakkhā sasāmikā. Yassā gamane raññā daṇḍo ṭhapito, sā saparidaṇḍā. Bhariyabhāvatthaṃ dhanena kītā dhanakkītā. Chandena vasantī chandavāsinī. Bhogatthaṃ vasantī bhogavāsinī. Paṭatthaṃ vasantī paṭavāsinī. Udakapattaṃ āmasitvā gahitā odapattakinī. Cumbaṭakaṃ apanetvā gahitā obhaṭacumbaṭā. Karamarānītā dhajāhatā. Taṅkhaṇikā muhuttikā. Abhibhavitvā vītikkame micchācāro mahāsāvajjo, na tathā dvinnaṃ samānachandatāya. Abhibhavitvā vītikkamane satipi maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsane purimuppannasevanābhisandhipayogābhāvato micchācāro na hoti abhibhuyyamānassāti vadanti. Sevanācitte sati payogābhāvo appamāṇaṃ yebhuyyena itthiyā sevanāpayogassa abhāvato. Tathā sati puretaraṃ sevanācittassa upaṭṭhānepi tassā micchācāro na siyā, tathā purisassapi sevanāpayogābhāveti, tasmā attano ruciyā pavattitassa vasena tayo, balakkārena pavattitassa vasena tayoti sabbepi aggahitaggahaṇena cattāro sambhārāti vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“破坏义利”是就业道来说的,因为这里讲的就是业道。“它的”指欺骗者的。以“以此说虚妄”来说,思就是妄语;在这种解释里,“妄”指以不真实的方式让对象知道的表业加行,“妄语”则指能等起它的思。由于已经这样说过了,所以另外还说“另一种理趣”等。“不愿给予自己的所有物”等,是就妄语共通的特征来说的。即使以嬉笑为动机,只要以欺骗为首要,就是妄语。“对他人”:指应被以欺骗方式告知的对象。“彼”:指妄语的加行。巴利
Atthabhañjakoti kammapathavasena vuttaṃ. Kammapathakathā hesāti. Assāti visaṃvādakassa. Musā vadati etenāti cetanā musāvādo, imasmiṃ pakkhe atathākārena vatthuno viññāpanapayogo musā, taṃsamuṭṭhāpikā cetanāmusāvādoti vuttattā tato aññathā vattuṃ ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāyātiādi musāvādasāmaññena vuttaṃ. Hasādhippāyenapi visaṃvādanapurakkhārassa musāvādo. Parassāti visaṃvādanavasena viññāpetabbassa. Soti musāvādapayogo.
“空无的状态”是指因为没有喜乐而呈现空虚。声音粗恶,所以不悦耳;意义被破坏,所以不悦心。所谓“心被染污者”,是指被嗔或贪所染污的心。巴利
Suññabhāvanti pītivirahitatāya rittabhāvaṃ. Pharusasaddatāya neva kaṇṇasukhā. Atthavipannatāya na hadayasukhā. Saṃkiliṭṭhacittassāti dosena, lobhena vā dūsitacittassa.
“纯粹粗恶的思”:这句话正是在显示嗔心本身;而这种嗔心应当理解为并没有要对方死去的意图。因为如果真有令对方死去的意图,事情就已经构成杀生;如果没有这种意图,才可能只是杀生一类的嗔害。对于粗恶语所针对的对象,当面说就成立;也有人认为,背后说也同样成立。这里合理的意趣应当是:当面说的时候,因为对不恭敬等情形力量更强,所以思也可能更有力,而且能让对方明白自己的意思;背后说则不是这样。就像被辱骂的人死后,在火葬场向他忏谢,能消除进一步毁谤的障碍一样,背后所说的粗恶语也照样成立,这是可以理解的。
“那”:指那纯粹粗恶的思,是为了说明粗恶语正是由这种思而成。
“刺穿心髓、令听闻粗恶”:意思是伤到心髓,听来粗恶。
心柔软时,粗恶语不成为业道,因为它还没达到业道的程度;但它的业性却无法否认。这样以随顺的方式,通过思的粗恶性成立粗恶语之后,现在为了以相反的方式成立它,说了“以言语柔软”等语。这(前者)是粗恶语,未达到业道程度,过失小;另一种则过失大。同样,由于烦恼有柔软、中等、强烈之别,一切都如前所说。巴利
Ekantapharusā cetanāti etena duṭṭhacittataṃyeva vibhāveti, duṭṭhacittatā cassa amaraṇādhippāyavasena daṭṭhabbā. Sati hi maraṇādhippāye atthasiddhi, tadabhāve pāṇātipātabyāpādā siyunti. Yaṃ paṭicca pharusavācā payujjati, tassa sammukhāva sīsaṃ eti. Parammukhāpi sīsaṃ eti evāti apare. Tatthāyaṃ adhippāyo yutto siyā – sammukhā payoge agāravādīnaṃ balavabhāvato siyā cetanā balavatī, parassa ca tadatthaviññāpanaṃ, na tathā asammukhāti. Yathā ca akkosite mate āḷahane katā khamāpanā upavādantarāyaṃ nivatteti, evaṃ parammukhā payuttā pharusavācā hotiyevāti sakkā viññātuṃ. Tassāti ekantapharusacetanāya eva pharusavācābhāvassa āvibhāvatthaṃ. Mammacchedako savanapharusatāyāti adhippāyo. Cittasaṇhātāya pharusavācā na hoti kammapathā’ppattattā, kammabhāvaṃ pana na sakkā vāretuṃ. Evaṃ anvayavasena cetanāpharusatāya pharusavācaṃ sādhetvā idāni tameva byatirekavasena sādhetuṃ ‘‘vacanasaṇhatāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Esāti pharusavācā. Kammapathabhāvaṃ appattā appasāvajjā, itarā mahāsāvajjā. Tathā kilesānaṃ mudutibbatābhedehi sabbaṃ purimasadisaṃ.
反复练习、不断重复。如果是针对某个对象而说的,对方没有接受,过失就小;对方接受了,就达到业道的程度,过失就大。而任何杂秽语都由两种条件构成。还应当知道,根据烦恼的软弱或强烈程度,也有小过失和大过失的区别。巴利
Āsevanaṃ bahulīkaraṇaṃ. Yaṃ uddissa pavattito, tena aggahite appasāvajjo, gahite mahāsāvajjo kammapathappattito. Yo koci pana samphappalāpo dvīhi sambhārehi sijjhati. Kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvasenapi appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā veditabbā.
应当知道,这是单凭心把自己的财物转归自己。生起它的人,就破坏了它的利益和安乐。说“唉,真是可惜”,这句话显示的是彻底毁灭的想法。像这样,由于粗暴地现行,就构成了业道。因为不能如实执取,也就是不能如实地把握,所以把无常等真实本性执取为常等。邪见,就是颠倒地看。就像杂秽语一样,这里显示:由于反复串习轻,所以过失小;由于程度重,所以过失大。所执取方式的颠倒,是指邪见所执取的方式是颠倒的。关于对象,是说那对象具有不符合实际的本性。以那样的方式,是指对于该见行者,或者对于那个对象的显现,就是以所执取的方式呈现为这样,而不是别的样子。巴利
Attano pariṇāmanaṃ cittenevāti veditabbaṃ. Hitasukhaṃ byāpādayatīti yo taṃ uppādeti, tassa hitasukhaṃ vināseti. Aho vatāti iminā accantavināsacintanaṃ dīpeti. Evaṃ hissa dāruṇapavattiyā kammapathappatti. Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvenāti yāthāvaggāhassa abhāvena aniccādisabhāvassa niccādito gahaṇena. Micchā passatīti vitathaṃ passati. Samphappalāpo viyāti iminā āsevanassa mandatāya appasāvajjataṃ, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjataṃ dasseti. Gahitākāraviparītatāti micchādiṭṭhiyā gahitākārassa viparītabhāvo. Vatthunoti tassā ayathābhūtasabhāvamāha. Tathābhāvenāti gahitākāreneva tassa diṭṭhigatikassa, tassa vā vatthuno upaṭṭhānaṃ evametaṃ, na ito aññathāti.
从自性来说。从部分来说:在触为第五支等心支的诸心支部分中,凡有那些部分,便是依那个部分而说——这就是此语之义。以思为自性的法。巴利
Dhammatoti sabhāvato. Koṭṭhāsatoti phassapañcamakādīsu cittaṅgakoṭṭhāsesu yaṃ koṭṭhāsā honti, tatoti attho. Cetanādhammāti cetanāsabhāvā.
在“按顺序的七种(业道)”这句话里,有人会问:思在阿毗达摩的业道中并没有被提到,那么说“按顺序的七种业道”就不合理了吗?不是这样,因为没提到它另有原因。并不是因为思在业道聚中不被提到,就说明它不具有业道性;而是因为思有时是业道、并非永远都是,业道性不确定,所以才没提到它。可是当思成为业道时,把它归入业道聚中并没有被排除。
这里有人提出:如果因为思并非永远是业道、业道性不确定,所以在业道聚中没被提到,那么贪欲等也存在尚未达到业道性的状态,它们的业道性也不确定,这样一来,岂不是它们也应该在业道聚中不被提到吗?不会。因为贪欲等在那里已经被说为业道,或者说已经被说为与业道同类。如果这样,那思也应该在那里被提到才对?确实如此,不过思作为杀生等(业道)是很明显的,所以大概正因为它的业道性太明显,才没有(特别)说它。实际上,关于思,因为有“比丘们,我说思就是业”“比丘们,有三种身思是不善的身业”这样的经文,思的业性是很明显的;而且,业本身就是以趣向善趣、恶趣以及在那里生起的苦乐之道的状态而运作,所以被称为业道,因此思的业道性是很明显的。而贪欲等则是以思的策动而成为善行或恶行,以思所生的后后流转而成为趣向善趣、恶趣以及在那里生起的苦乐之道,所以它们的业道性并不那么明显。因此,为了用那种自性来显示它们,在阿毗达摩中并没有把思说为业道聚;或者应该说,思因为不具备那种同类性,所以没有和它们一起被提到。
“到达根本”是指到达根本的开示,意思是在说以根本为自性的诸法时。巴利
Paṭipāṭiyā sattāti ettha nanu cetanā abhidhamme kammapathesu na vuttāti paṭipāṭiyā sattannaṃ kammapathabhāvo na yuttoti? Na, avacanassa aññahetukattā. Na hi tattha cetanāya akammapathattā kammapatharāsimhi avacanaṃ, kadāci pana kammapatho hoti, na sabbadāti kammapathabhāvassa aniyatattā avacanaṃ. Yadā pana kammapatho hoti, tadā kammapatharāsisaṅgaho na nivārito. Etthāha – yadi cetanāya sabbadā kammapathabhāvābhāvato aniyato kammapathabhāvoti kammapatharāsimhi avacanaṃ, nanu abhijjhādīnaṃ kammapathabhāvaṃ appattānaṃ atthitāya aniyato kammapathabhāvoti tesampi kammapatharāsimhi avacanaṃ āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati kammapathatātaṃsabhāgatāhi tesaṃ tattha vuttattā. Yadi evaṃ cetanāpi tattha vattabbā siyā? Saccametaṃ, sā pana pāṇātipātādikāti pākaṭo, tassā kammapathabhāvoti na vuttā siyā. Cetanāya hi – ‘‘cetanāhaṃ, bhikkhave, kammaṃ vadāmi (a. ni. 6.63; kathā. 539), tividhā, bhikkhave, kāyasañcetanā akusalaṃ kāyakamma’’ntiādivacanato (kathā. 539) kammabhāvo pākaṭo, kammaṃyeva ca sugatiduggatīnaṃ tattha uppajjanakasukhadukkhānañca pathabhāvena pavattaṃ kammapathoti vuccatīti pākaṭo tassā kammapathabhāvo, abhijjhādīnaṃ pana cetanāsamīhanabhāvena sucaritaduccaritabhāvo cetanājanitapiṭṭhivaṭṭakabhāvena sugatiduggatitaduppajjanakasukhadukkhānaṃ pathabhāvo cāti na tathā pākaṭo kammapathabhāvoti teyeva tena sabhāvena dassetuṃ abhidhamme cetanā kammapatharāsibhāvena na vuttā , atathājātiyakattā vā cetanā tehi saddhiṃ na vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mūlaṃ patvāti mūladesanaṃ patvā, mūlasabhāvesu dhammesu vuccamānesūti attho.
“不与取以有情为所缘”这个说法,和“五学处只以有限所缘为所缘”这一问答文句相矛盾。可是,杀生等恶戒的所缘,正是离恶的所缘;因为离就是从应当违犯的对象上远离。或者说“以有情为所缘”,是就取名为“有情”的诸行作为所缘来说的,所以并不矛盾。正如《迷惑冰消》(《分别论注》)中说:“其中那些被称为以有情为所缘的学处,因为它们是以被称为‘有情’的诸行为所缘。”另有一种说法:由于要从不同类的对象,即“女人、男人”来把握,所以说以有情为所缘。在杂秽语中,如“一见、二闻”等,是依所见、所闻、所觉、所知的方式。同样地,在贪欲这里,“同样地”这个词也把“依所见、所闻、所觉、所知的方式”这一句带了过来,并不是仅仅以见等方式贪求,就只显示以有情诸行为所缘。至于“没有化生有情”这种邪见生起时,也是以三界一切法为境,因此依这个意图说它以诸行为所缘。那么,邪见怎么能以三界一切法为所缘呢?因为它们是共通的。当“善行恶行之业没有果报”这种说法生起时,实质上连色界、无色界的法也被包含在内了。巴利
Adinnādānaṃ sattārammaṇanti idaṃ ‘‘pañca sikkhāpadā parittārammaṇā eva vā’’ti imāya pañhapucchakapāḷiyā virujjhati. Yañhi pāṇātipātādidussīlyassa ārammaṇaṃ, tadeva taṃ veramaṇiyā ārammaṇaṃ. Vītikkamitabbavatthuto eva hi viratīti. Sattārammaṇanti vā sattasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhārārammaṇameva upādāya vuttanti nāyaṃ virodho. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 714) ‘‘yāni sikkhāpadāni ettha sattārammaṇānīti vuttāni, tāni yasmā sattoti saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ saṅkhārameva ārammaṇaṃ karontī’’ti. Visabhāgavatthuno ‘‘itthī, puriso’’ti gahetabbato sattārammaṇoti eke. ‘‘Eko diṭṭho, dve sutā’’tiādinā samphappalapane diṭṭhasutamutaviññātavasena. Tathā abhijjhāti ettha tathā-saddo ‘‘diṭṭhasutamutaviññātavasenā’’ti idampi upasaṃharati, na sattasaṅkhārārammaṇataṃ eva dassanādivasena abhijjhāyanato. ‘‘Natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti pavattamānāpi micchādiṭṭhi tebhūmakadhammavisayāvāti adhippāyenassā saṅkhārārammaṇatā vuttā. Kathaṃ pana micchādiṭṭhiyā sabbe tebhūmakadhammā ārammaṇaṃ hontīti? Sādhāraṇato. ‘‘Natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko’’ti hi pavattamānāya atthato rūpārupāvacaradhammāpi gahitā eva hontīti.
国王们因为快乐繁多,即使笑着说“把那个贼处死!”,他们的笑其实是针对别的事情。所以论主说“能作出决定……才是思”。巴利
Sukhabahulatāya rājāno hasamānāpi ‘‘coraṃ ghātethā’’ti vadanti, hāso pana tesaṃ aññavisayoti āha ‘‘sanniṭṭhāpaka…pe… hotī’’ti.
“某些的”是指俱生的那些,也就是不与取等。“以相应而生的意义”是指以相应而生起的意义。“某些的”又指非俱生的。这是依亲近缘的意义,由此否定了贪以“根”的意义给予助成的说法。因为,令稳固成就的意义就是根的意义,而这与因缘性是不分离的;所以在这里,应当像树根一样,把它理解为“根”。而从直接的意义上说,先前所说的“某些的”——也就是俱生的——才应知为根。借由“贪染者……”等经文,也表明了杀生等不善是以贪为根本因,而不是以根的意义不加分别地去助成,因为它们并非具有因缘性。巴利
Kesañcīti sahajātānaṃ adinnādānādīnaṃ. Sampayuttapabhāvakaṭṭhenāti sampayutto hutvā uppādakaṭṭhena. Kesañcīti asahajātānaṃ. Upanissayapaccayaṭṭhenāti etena mūlaṭṭhena lobhassa upakārataṃ nivatteti. Suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanaṭṭho hi mūlaṭṭho, so ca hetupaccayatāavinābhāvī, tena cettha mūlamiva mūlanti gahetabbaṃ, nippariyāyato pana pubbe ‘‘kesañcī’’ti vuttānaṃ sahajātānaṃ mūlabhāvo veditabbo. Ratto khotiādinā suttapadenapi pāṇātipātādīnaṃ akusalānaṃ lobhassa mūlakāraṇataṃ vibhāveti, na mūlaṭṭhenupakāratthaṃ avisesato tesaṃ hetupaccayattābhāvato.
善业道的注释巴利
Kusalakammapathavaṇṇanā
怨敌(vera)指的是杀生等恶法。因为它就是怨敌的根源,所以被称为“怨敌”。它像是在呵斥、阻拦:“我就站在这里,你怎么还敢过来?”——这种远离就叫“离怨敌”(veramaṇī)。因此经文说“舍断”。本来应该说“viramaṇī”(远离),但按照词源规则把e-加进去,就说成了veramaṇī。在《分别论》(Vibhaṅga 703, 704)中,正是按照这种指明方式来说的。对于没有受戒的人,在具体情境中面对当下可能违犯的对象而自然产生的远离,叫“自然离”(sampattavirati);因为受戒而产生的远离,叫“受戒离”(samādānavirati);因断除烦恼而发生的远离,叫“正断离”(samucchedavirati)。巴利
Veranti pāṇātipātādipāpadhammaṃ. So hi verahetutāya ‘‘vera’’nti vuccati, taṃ maṇati ‘‘mayi idha ṭhitāya kathamāgacchasī’’ti tajjentī viya nivāretīti veramaṇī. Tenāha ‘‘pajahatī’’ti. ‘‘Viramaṇī’’ti vattabbe niruttinayena eva-kāraṃ katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Vibhaṅge (vibha. 703, 704) eva niddisanavasena evaṃ vuttā. Asamādinnasīlassa sampattato yathāupaṭṭhitavītikkamitabbavatthuto virati sampattavirati, samādānavasena uppannā virati samādānavirati, samādānavasena uppannā virati samādānavirati, kilesānaṃ samucchindanavasena pavattāvirati samucchedavirati.
活物的肉混着血,就是带血的肉。因为他对一切众生都怀着平等的悲悯,就把它放了。然后他说了真实语,并立下决心:“凭这句真实语的力量,愿我母亲的病平息!”巴利
Jīvamānasasassa maṃsarudhirasammissatāya allasasamaṃsaṃ. Muñci sabbattha samakaruṇatāya. Saccaṃ vatvā ‘‘etena saccavajjena mayhaṃ mātu rogo sammatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi.
大蛇就是蟒蛇。它凭着(那被缠者的)戒的威德放开了他,然后离开了。巴利
Mahāsappoti ajagaro. Muñcitvā agamāsi sīlatejena.
“善巧”指的就是智。因为它是通过善巧的状态、或者依据善巧、或者以趋向生起的方式而发生的。所谓“躺卧于卑劣”,就是以卑劣的方式躺卧、随眠、或者生起。本来应该说是“离之善”,但为了配合提问,回答时就没有说成“善”,而只说成“善”。巴利
Kosallaṃ vuccati ñāṇaṃ, kosallena, kosallato vā pavattiyā upagamanato. Kucchitasayanatoti kucchitenākārena sayanato anusayanato, pavattanato vā. ‘‘Veramaṇikusalā’’ti vattabbāpi pucchānurūpaṃ vissajjananti ‘‘kusalā’’ti na vuttā, ‘‘kusala’’ntveva vuttā.
在这里,虽然巴利经文本身只提到了“远离”,但在《学处分别》(《分别》704)中,也把“思”引出来并加以说明。所以,兼顾这两者就说:“思也起作用,远离也起作用。”巴利
Kāmañcettha pāḷiyaṃ viratiyova āgatā, sikkhāpadavibhaṅge (vibha. 704) pana cetanāpi āharitvā dīpitāti tadubhayampi gaṇhanto ‘‘cetanāpi vaṭṭanti viratiyopī’’ti āha.
无贪确实作为根本,又作为业道的一部分时,所说的“无贪”这一法,从根本上说就是无贪善根——应当这样理解它的意思。剩下两个词,也同样是这个道理。巴利
Anabhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā kammapathakoṭṭhāsaṃ patvā anabhijjhāti vuttadhammo mūlato alobho kusalamūlaṃ hotīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
以恶戒为所缘、以彼为所缘、以命根等为所缘,如何断除种种恶戒?为了说明这一点,便说了“然而正如……”等话。巴利
Dussīlyārammaṇā tadārammaṇā jīvitindriyādiārammaṇā kathaṃ dussīlyāni pajahantīti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
无贪欲……远离者,意思是舍弃贪欲的人。因为并不存在对意恶行的远离,而是由于无贪欲等本身就能成就舍弃它。在无贪等项目中应当说明的内容,应依照不善根部分所讲的方式来了知。巴利
Anabhijjhā…pe… viramantassāti abhijjhaṃ pajahantassāti attho. Na hi manoduccaritato virati atthi anabhijjhādīheva tappahānasiddhito. Tesu alobhotiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ akusalamūlesu vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
“入定段”是指结语段。所谓“以一种方法”,是指以受等为分类,单从无色这一门径,在种种观业处中的一种业处方法。应当说“除了贪欲,还有九种不善业道”。或者,“十”这个数字应当与“善业道”连接起来,也就是“十种不善业道和十种善业道”。因为通过“除了贪欲”这句话,就已经说明了不善业道只有九种。另一种说法是,“十”这个数字应当从两方面同时连接。因为贪欲虽然应当断除,但它仍然没有超出应当遍知的范围。正如经中所说“色渴爱、可爱之色、可意之色”等等。因此,它由于具有应当遍知的性质,确实也被包含在苦圣谛中;但从事应断除的角度来说,才说“除了贪欲”。所以论主说“然而从方便的角度来说,一切业道都是苦圣谛”。根据贪欲和贪的生起方式所确立的差别,才说“这两种法”。在经的教法方式中,渴爱被称为“集圣谛”,因此说“从究竟意义上说是集圣谛”。“不转起”是指不转起的相,就像“贪尽、嗔尽”那样。当以有因有缘的方式把握了以有为法为自性的苦圣谛时,无因无缘的无为灭圣谛就从反面呈现出来;当把握了纯粹有过失、具有积聚相的集圣谛时,远离过失、具有消散相的道圣谛就从反面呈现出来。应当知道这是从两种回转方式来说的。因此,在《导论》中说:巴利
Appanāvāranti nigamanavāraṃ. Ekena nayenāti vedanādivasena arūpamukheneva anekavidhesu vipassanākammaṭṭhānesu ekena kammaṭṭhānanayena. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā abhijjhaṃ nava akusalakammapathā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Dasāti vā idaṃ ‘‘kusalakammapathā’’ti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ ‘‘akusalakammapathā ca dasa kusalakammapathā cā’’ti. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā abhijjha’’nti hi imināva akusalakammapathānaṃ navabhāvo vutto hoti. Atha vā dasāti idaṃ ubhayathāpi sambandhitabbaṃ. Abhijjhā hi pahātabbāpi sati pariññeyyataṃ nātivattatīti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpataṇhā piyarūpaṃ sātarūpa’’ntiādi, tasmā sā tāya pariññeyyatāya dukkhasaccepi saṅgahaṃ labhateva, pahātabbaṃ pana upādāya ‘‘ṭhapetvā abhijjha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘pariyāyena pana sabbepi kammapathā dukkhasacca’’nti. Abhijjhālobhānaṃ pavattiākārasiddhabhedaṃ upādāya ‘‘ime dve dhammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Suttantanayena taṇhā ‘‘samudayasacca’’nti vuttāti āha ‘‘nippariyāyena samudayasacca’’nti. Appavattīti appavattinimittamāha yathā ‘‘rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.314). Sappaccayatāya saṅkhatasabhāve dukkhasacce gahite appaccayatāya asaṅkhataṃ nirodhasaccaṃ paṭipakkhato āvattati, ekantasāvajje ācayagāmilakkhaṇe samudayasacce gahite sāvajjā vigamanaṃ apacayagāmilakkhaṇaṃ maggasaccaṃpaṭipakkhato āvattatīti dve āvattahāravasena veditabbānīti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha nettiyaṃ (netti. 4.niddesavāra) –
“ 一处立足处,却寻其余立足处;
转向对反,此即名为转向法。”巴利
‘‘Ekamhi padaṭṭhāne, pariyesati sesakaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ; Āvattati paṭipakkhe, āvatto nāma so hāro’’ti.
“以一切方式”是指:以欲贪、色贪等一切种类,或者从一切会导致堕入恶趣的方面,又或者毫无保留地对待它们。“唯以一切方式”就是从一切方面。“引导出离”就是除去、断除。“于任何一法皆不令为分别”是指:在色、受等诸法中,不对任何一法加以分析,不一一别别执取,而是以整体总聚的方式执取。“我是”是以“我存在”的我慢执取方式。然而,因为它毫无剩余地执取五蕴,所以说“以总聚执取的方式”。这里说的是最上道心,所以说“与见相似的随眠”。正如邪见依“彼色是我”等而执取色等,生起“我存在”;同样地,慢也以“我是最优胜的”等方式生起,因此说“由‘我是’生起的缘故,随眠与见相似”。“作为边际者”就是作为最终边际,因为自此之后苦不再产生。“以业道开示”就是通过业道这一门径而开示四圣谛。“以作意通达”就是依观的作意与道的通达。巴利
Sabbākārenāti kāmarāgarūparāgādisabbappakārehi, sabbato vā apāyagamanīyādiākārato, tattha kiñcipi anavasesetvā vā. Sabbākārenevāti sabbākārato. Nīharitvāti apanetvā, samucchinditvāicceva attho. Kañci dhammaṃ anavakārīkaritvāti rūpavedanādīsu kañci ekadhammampi avinibbhogaṃ katvā, ekekato aggahetvā samūhatova gahetvāti attho. Asmīti ahamasmīti mānaggāhavasena. So pana yasmā pañcakkhandhe niravasesato gaṇhāti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘samūhaggahaṇākārenā’’ti. Yasmā cettha aggamaggacittaṃ vuccati, tasmā āha ‘‘diṭṭhisadisaṃ mānānusaya’’nti. ‘‘Yaṃ rūpaṃ taṃ aha’’ntiādinā yathā diṭṭhi rūpādiṃ ‘‘ahamasmī’’ti gaṇhantī pavattati, evaṃ mānopi ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādināti āha ‘‘mānānusayo asmīti pavattattā diṭṭhisadiso’’ti. Paricchedakaroti osānaparicchedakaro ito paraṃ dukkhassābhāvakaraṇato. Kammapathadesanāyāti kammapathamukhena pavattacatusaccadesanāya. Manasikārappaṭivedhavasenāti vipassanāmanasikāramaggappaṭivedhavasena.
关于食的品类的注释巴利
Āhāravāravaṇṇanā
90 “取来”就是带来、令生起和支撑的意思。“已生”指已经出生。因为从那时起,世间才有了“已生”这个说法。但从结生识执取开始,一直到从母胎出来为止,这段时间叫“求有者”。这是就胎生者区分“已生”和“求有”的方式;对其他化生类众生,则是按最初心生起等来区分。这里“生起”这个词,对胎生者来说是“出生”的同义词,对其他众生来说是“生起”的同义词。因为在最初的心和最初的威仪动作那一刹那,他们被称为寻求、趋近于生起,还不算“已生”,因为他们的生起还不稳固。只有“已生者”才是彻底断尽对存在的寻求。“不会再出现”是用决定性的说法表示遮止的意思,就像“彼已尽寿”等经文里那样,“已生”这个词应理解为指漏尽者。这里的“或”字是总括的意思,就像“由火或由水”等说法一样。巴利
90.Āharatīti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.11) āneti, uppādeti upatthambheti cāti attho. Nibbattāti pasutā. Tato paṭṭhāya hi loke jātavohāro. Paṭisandhiggahaṇato pana paṭṭhāya yāva mātukucchito nikkhamanaṃ, tāva sambhavesino. Esa tāva gabbhaseyyakesu bhūtasambhavesivibhāgo, itaresu pana paṭhamacittādivasena vutto. Sambhava-saddo cettha gabbhaseyyakānaṃ vasena pasūtipariyāyo, itaresaṃ vasena uppattipariyāyo. Paṭhamacittapaṭhamairiyāpathakkhaṇesu hi te sambhavaṃ uppattiṃ esanti upagacchanti nāma, na tāva bhūtā uppattiyā na suppatiṭṭhitattā. Bhūtāyeva sabbaso bhavesanāya samucchinnattā. Na puna bhavissantīti avadhāraṇena nivattitamatthaṃ dasseti, ‘‘yo ca kālaghaso bhūto’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.2.190) bhūta-saddassa khīṇāsavavācitā daṭṭhabbā. Vā-saddo cettha sampiṇḍanattho ‘‘agginā vā udakena vā’’tiādīsu (udā. 76) viya.
这里应当理解为:依各自作为缘的方式,来安立有情的生命相续,这正是诸食应当做的摄益,出于这个用意,才说“言辞差别……其实是一回事”。所谓“有情已生的诸法”,是指有情相续中已生的诸法。就像说“能住世百年”时,意思是它以不断相续的方式持续下去;同样,“为住立”的意思就是以不断相续的方式持续,而那种相续就是不间断,所以说“为无间断故”。有情的相续之所以被称为受到摄益,正是因为相续之法得以生起,所以说“为令未生者生起故”。这些“摄益”“住立”之类的话,应当从两方面来理解,并不是按顺序一一对应。巴利
Yathāsakaṃ paccayabhāvena attabhāvassa paṭṭhapanamevetthaāhārehi kātabbaanuggahoti adhippāyenāha ‘‘vacanabhedo…pe… ekoyevā’’ti. Sattassa uppannadhammānanti sattassasantāne uppannadhammānaṃ. Yathā ‘‘vassasataṃ tiṭṭhatī’’ti vutte anuppabandhavasena pavattatīti vuttaṃ hoti, evaṃ ṭhitiyāti anuppabandhavasena pavattiyāti attho, sā pana avicchedoti āha ‘‘avicchedāyā’’ti. Anuppabandhadhammuppattiyā sattasantāno anuggahito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘anuppannānaṃ uppādāyā’’ti. Etānīti ṭhitianuggahapadāni. Ubhayattha daṭṭhabbāni, na yathāsaṅkhyaṃ.
依所依而住的食素,就像所依本身一样,具有应当被摄取的性质,所以说“从可吞食的角度来说,是食”。至于针对已生起的食素,后面将会说“段食带来以食素为第八元素的诸色法”。粗显是因为食素少,而不是因为所依粗大或坚硬。因此,在哪种所依中食素少,那种所依就是粗显的。蛇等众生的食物,因为能产生痛苦,应当理解为粗显。角等物被丢弃三年后腐烂了,有人说那是柔软的;但那些角等物变成那样,是因为被豺狼唾液所湿润,它们的柔软由此而来。这本来就是诸法的自性。兔子的食物是细的,因为它们吃嫩草和嫩苗。鸟类的食物是细的,因为它们吃草籽等。边地人的食物是细的,因为他们也以蔬菜、叶子、干谷物、莲叶为食。他化自在天众生的食物也是细的。所谓“只是细的”,并不是相对于其他什么而言,而是说它已经达到了细的极致,因为再没有比这更细的了。巴利
Vatthugatā ojā vatthu viya tena saddhiṃ āharitabbataṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ajjhoharitabbato āhāro’’ti. Nibbattitaojaṃ pana sandhāya ‘‘kabaḷīkārāhāro ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharatī’’ti vakkhati. Oḷārikatā appojatāya, na vatthuno thūlatāya, kathinatāya vā, tasmā yasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ parittā ojā hoti, taṃ oḷārikaṃ. Sappādayo dukkhuppādakatāya oḷārikāveditabbā. Visāṇādīnaṃ tivassachaḍḍitānaṃ pūtibhūttatā mudukatāti vadanti, taracchakheḷatemikatāya pana tathābhūtānaṃ tesaṃ mudukatā. Dhammasabhāvo hesa. Sasānaṃāhāro sukhumo taruṇatiṇasassakhādanato. Sakuṇānaṃ āhāro sukhumo tiṇabījādikhādanato. Paccantavāsīnaṃ sukhumo, tesañhi sākapaṇṇasukkhakurapadumapattampi āhāroti. Tesaṃ paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ. Sukhumotvevāti na kiñci upādāya, atha kho sukhumo icceva niṭṭhaṃ patto tato paraṃ sukhumassa abhāvato.
不过,这里是根据所依来区分食物的粗与细,而这种粗细应当通过食素的少与多来理解。为了说明这一点,才说了“在此”等话。“疲劳”是指因饥饿而生起的身体困乏。“除去”是说所依仅仅消除那种疲劳。然而它并不能维持身体,因为它没有坚实性,无法让身体持续下去;也无法消除疲劳,因为胃没有被填满。巴利
Vatthuvasena panettha āhārassa oḷārikasukhumatā vuttā, sā cassa appojamahojatāhi veditabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Parissamanti khudāvasena uppannaṃ sarīrakhedaṃ. Vinodetīti vatthu tassa vinodanamattaṃ karoti. Na pana sakkoti pāletunti sarīraṃ yāpetuṃ nappahoti nissārattā. Na sakkoti parissamaṃ vinodetuṃ āmāsayassa apūraṇato.
“六种”这句话,是用来说明没有任何一种触被排除在外。在这里,触等之所以被列为第二等,只是依照开示“食”的顺序,并没有别的理由,所以说“这只是开示的次第”等等。为了表明“意思”是心的思,而不是有情的思,所以用了“心”这个词,就像“心的住立、心解脱”等说法一样,因此说“就是思”。“心”指任何一种心,并不只是指果报识。巴利
Chabbidhopīti iminā kassacipi phassassa anavasesitabbatamāha. Āhārassadesanākkamenevettha phassādīnaṃ dutiyāditā, na aññena kāraṇenāti āha ‘‘desanānayo evā’’tiādi. Manaso sañcetanā, na sattassāti dassanatthaṃ manogahaṇaṃ yathā ‘‘cittassa ṭhiti (dha. sa. 11), cetovimutti cā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.69) āha ‘‘manosañcetanāti cetanā evā’’ti. Cittanti yaṃ kiñci cittaṃ, na vipākaviññāṇameva.
前面已经说过“食就是缘”,所以这里用“如果缘的意义就是食的意义”等话来提出质问。那么,为什么只说了这四种呢?接下来“为什么只说四种,而且只说这四种”就是连接说明。所谓“因为是特别的缘”,通过这句话表明:其他缘法对自己所缘生的法,只是作为缘而已;但这四种食却既是这样,又有别的作用。虽然同样是缘,它们却是额外的、增上的缘,因此才被称为“食”。这是为了显示这个意思。现在为了说明那种增上的缘性,就开始说“特别的缘”等文。段食是色身的特别缘,因为它有支持的作用。因此注释书《清净道论》的注疏中说:“由于支持色法和非色法,四种食是食缘。”因为支持性即使在有生起性的情况下,对于非色诸食以及产生食生色的色食也存在;若无支持性则诸食的生起性不存在,故支持性是主要的。即使是正在生起的食,也是以不间断的方式在支持着而生起,所以支持的状态本身就是食的状态。触是受的特别缘,因为经中说“缘于触而有受”。由于经中说“缘于行而有识”,所以思是识的特别缘,因为说“思产生三种有”。又由于经中说“缘于识而有名色”,所以识是名色的特别缘。因为如果没有结生识,名色就不能自己生起。正如经中所说:“阿难,如果识不进入母胎,名色能在母胎中结成吗?”等等。为了用经来证明已经说过的道理,就说了“如所说”等文。巴利
Pubbe ‘‘āhāranti paccaya’’nti vuttattā ‘‘yadi paccayaṭṭho āhāraṭṭho’’tiādinā codeti. Atha kasmā imeyeva cattāro vuttāti atha kasmā cattārova vuttā, ime eva ca vuttāti yojanā. Visesapaccayattāti etena yathā aññe paccayadhammā attano paccayuppannassa paccayāva honti, ime pana tathā ca honti aññathā cāti samānepi paccayatte atirekapaccayā honti, tasmā āhārāti vuttāti imamatthaṃ dasseti. Idāni taṃ atirekapaccayataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘visesapaccayo hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Visesapaccayo rūpakāyassa kabaḷīkāro āhāro upatthambhakabhāvato. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (visuddhi. 2.708; paṭṭhā. aṭṭha. paccayuddesavaṇṇanā) ‘‘rūpārūpānaṃ upatthambhakattena upakārakā cattāro āhārā āhārapaccayo’’ti. Upatthambhakattañhi satipi janakatte arūpīnaṃ āhārānaṃ āhārajarūpasamuṭṭhāpakarūpāhārassa ca hoti, asati pana upatthambhakatte āhārānaṃ janakattaṃ natthīti upatthambhakattaṃ padhānaṃ. Janayamānopi hi āhāro avicchedavasena upatthambhayamāno eva janetīti upattambhakabhāvo eva āhārabhāvo. Vedanāya phasso visesapaccayo. ‘‘Phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti (udā. 1; ma. ni. 3.126) vacanato viññāṇassamanosañcetanā. ‘‘Cetanā tividhaṃ bhavaṃ janetī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti pana vacanato nāmarūpassa viññāṇaṃ visesapaccayā. Na hi okkantiviññāṇābhāve nāmarūpassa attasambhavo. Yathāha ‘‘viññāṇañca hi, ānanda, mātukucchismiṃ na okkamissatha, api nu kho nāmarūpaṃ mātukucchismiṃ samuccissathā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.115). Vuttamevatthaṃ suttena sādhetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
即使缘的意思就是食的意思,但由于它们有特殊的缘的作用,所以还是只说这四种才是“食”。前面已经笼统地说明了它们特殊的缘的作用,现在为了分别说明,就开始了“那么这里什么是……”等文。即使只是把食物放在嘴里还没咀嚼,仅凭这一点,它就已经是体内食物的缘了。所以说“能令八种色生起”。对乐受有利益的,就是乐受的所缘。所谓“以一切方式”,是指依眼触等一切方式。触有多少种类差别,按这些种类,一切种类的触也都是触食。它们各自如其所应地带来三种受,没有任何受不是由食带来的。巴利
Evaṃ yadipi paccayaṭṭho āhāraṭṭho, visesapaccayatāya pana ime eva āhārāti vuttāti taṃ nesaṃ visesapaccayataṃ avibhāgato dassetvā idāni vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘ko panetthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Mukhe ṭhapitamattoyeva asaṅkhādito, tattakenapi abbhantarassa āhārassa paccayo hoti eva. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭha rūpāni samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Sukhavedanāya hito sukhavedaniyo. Sabbathāpīti cakkhusamphassādivasena. Yattakā phassassa pakārabhedā, tesaṃ vasena sabbappakāropi phassāhāro. Yathārahaṃ tisso vedanā āharati, anāhārako natthi.
在这里,“由一切种”的意思,也应该按照触食那里所说的方法来理解。“通过三种相续”,是指身十法、有十法、心所依十法这三种相续。“通过俱生等缘的方法”,是指依照俱生等缘的规则。因为结生识对于与自己俱生的名法,是以俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、异熟根缘、相应缘、有缘、不离缘等作为缘;正是以食缘的身份,才说它“食”。而对于俱生的色法,除了心所依的相应缘之外,是以不相应缘;对于其余的色法,除了相互缘之外,应按照上面所说的方法来连接。“那些”用中性词来表述,是因为中性词可以和中性词一起说,即使所指的并不是中性词。巴利
Sabbathāpīti idhāpi phassāhāre vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Tisantativasenāti kāyadasakaṃ bhāvadasakaṃ vatthudasakanti tividhasantativasena. Sahajātādipaccayanayenāti sahajātādipaccayavidhinā. Paṭisandhiviññāṇañhi attanā sahajātanāmassa sahajātaaññamaññanissayavipākindriyasampayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayo hontoyeva āhārapaccayatāya taṃ āhāretī vuttaṃ, sahajātarūpesu pana vatthuno sampayuttapaccayaṃ ṭhapetvā vippayuttapaccayena, sesarūpassa aññamaññapaccayañca ṭhapetvā vuttanayenevayojanā kātabbā. Tānīti napuṃsakaniddeso anapuṃsakānampi napuṃsakehi saha vacanato.
这里只说到有漏的善思和不善思。为了显示它们作为特殊缘的状态,才说“hetanti(为因)”。因此说“然而从普遍的角度……”等等。这里说“只说结生识”,也是同样的道理。正如这些食由于对各自的果有特殊的缘的作用,所以具有食的意义,同样,从普遍的角度来看也是如此;为了说明这一点,才说“然而从普遍的角度……”等等。其中,“与那些相应、由那些所生的诸法”,是指与那些触等相应的诸法,以及由它们所生的色法。在这里,对“相应”的把握应视各自情况而定,而对“所生”的把握则是从普遍角度来说的。巴利
Sāsavākusalākusalacetanāva vuttā. Visesapaccayabhāvadassanaṃ hetanti. Tenāha ‘‘avisesena panā’’tiādi. Paṭisandhiviññāṇameva vuttanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yathā tassa tassa phalassa visesato paccayatāya etesaṃ āhāraṭṭho, evaṃ avisesatopīti dassantena ‘‘avisesena panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha taṃsampayuttataṃsamuṭṭhānadhammānanti tehi phassādīhi sampayuttadhammānañceva taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpadhammānañca. Tattha sampayuttaggahaṇaṃ yathārahato daṭṭhabbaṃ, samuṭṭhānaggahaṇaṃ pana avisesato.
正在支持时,就完成了食物的作用——也就是说,正是在支持的时候,它让色法生起;而它之所以能完成支持的作用,正是通过让以食为第八法的色法生起。正在触的时候,就是在做触的作用。正在造作的时候,就是在思惟、在连结。正在了别的时候,就是以再生计度的方式,在了别的当下完成食物的作用——这是句子的衔接方式。剩下两个词也是同样的道理。而它们能完成食物的作用,是因为它们是受等法生起的原因,也就是让有身得以运转。巴利
Upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādhetīti upatthambhentoyeva rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, ojaṭṭhamakarūpasamuṭṭhāpaneneva panassa upatthambhanakiccasiddhi. Phusantoyevāti phusanakiccaṃ karonto eva. Āyūhamānāvāti cetayamānā eva abhisandahantī eva. Vijānantamevāti upapattiparikappanavasena vijānantameva āhārakiccaṃ sādhetīti yojanā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Āhārakiccasādhanañca tesaṃ vedanādiuppattihetutāya attabhāvassa pavattanameva.
为什么说“以令身住立”呢?这是针对这样一个质疑而说的:难道业生色等不是只靠业等就运转了吗?于是回答说“即使是业所生的……”等等。因为只要支持了已执取色的相续,也就成立了对时节生色和心生色相续的支持,所以说“两种色相续”。也正是着眼于这种支持,才说“成为随守护者”。因为让色身存续的原因,就是维持和守护。巴利
Kāyaṭṭhapanenāti kasmā vuttaṃ? Nanu kammajādirūpaṃ kammādināva pavattatīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kammajanitopī’’tiādi. Upādinnarūpasantatiyā upatthambhaneneva utucittajarūpasantatīnampi upatthambhanasiddhi hotīti ‘‘dvinnaṃ rūpasantatīna’’nti vuttaṃ. Upatthambhanameva sandhāya ‘‘anupālako hutvā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Rūpakāyassa ṭhitihetutā hi yāpanā anupālanā.
“作为乐等的依处”:就是成为乐等生起的地方。因为即使是所缘,也在这里停留——以作为所缘的方式,那些以它为所缘的法,就称为“处”。说“正是触着的时候”,这是就触具有触的自性而说的,因为诸法离开了自性就无法生起。没有受的生起,众生就不可能流转,所以说“成为乐等……的有”;而在这里,讨论有想生存时,不应该显示无想生存;或者说,作为原因的受的生起,本身并不遍及(无想有的)那种存续之因。正如说“意思……由于令有的根本得以完成,所以成为众生存续的原因”。正因为如此,才说“识正是了别着:通过再生计度的方式,在了别着的时候”,这也正是这个意思。巴利
Sukhādivatthubhūtanti sukhādīnaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Ārammaṇampi hi vasati ettha ārammaṇakaraṇavasena tadārammaṇā dhammāti vatthūti vuccati. Phusantoyevāti idaṃ phassassa phusanasabhāvattā vuttaṃ. Na hi dhammānaṃ sabhāvena vinā pavatti atthi. Vedanāpavattiyā vinā sattānaṃ sandhāvanatā natthīti āha ‘‘sukhādi…pe… hotī’’ti, na cettha saññībhavakathāyaṃ asaññībhavo dassetabbo, tassāpi vā kāraṇabhūtavedanāpavattivaseneva ṭhitiyā hetuno abyāpitā. Tathā hi ‘‘manosañcetanā…pe… bhavamūlanipphādanato sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hotī’’ti vuttā, tato eva ‘‘viññāṇaṃ vijānantamevāti upapattiparikappanavasena vijānantamevā’’ti vuttovāyamatthoti.
应当看到四种怖畏,这是从显示过患的角度来说的。贪求就是渴望。这是针对味渴爱而说的,因为味渴爱在段食中特别强烈,所以就在这里特别指出。由此而恐惧,所以叫怖畏;贪求本身就是怖畏,因为它是巨大灾祸的原因。接近就是在境、根、识中——特别是在境和识中——以结合的方式生起;由于它是受等生起的原因,所以说为怖畏。特别指出的用意如前所说。其余两项也是同样的道理。造作就是连结,也有人说是安排;由于它是再生的原因,所以说为怖畏。投生就是在各个存在中,通过结生执取的方式而出生。它是一切以再生为因的过患的根本原因,所以说为怖畏。现在,为了详细显示贪求等的可怖性,便开始了什么原因等文。其中,作了贪求就是产生了爱著、生起了渴爱,这是它的意思。巴利
Cattāribhayāni daṭṭhabbāni ādīnavavibhāvanato. Nikantīti nikāmanā. Rasataṇhaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sā hi kabaḷīkāre āhāre balavatī. Teneva tattha avadhāraṇaṃ kataṃ. Bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ, nikantiyevabhayaṃ mahānatthahetuto. Upagamanaṃ visayindriyaviññāṇesu visayaviññāṇesu eva ca saṅgativasena pavatti, taṃ vedanādiuppattihetutāya ‘‘bhaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Avadhāraṇe payojanaṃ vuttanayameva. Sesadvayepi esevanayo. Āyūhanaṃ abhisandahanaṃ, saṃvidhānantipi vadanti. Taṃ bhavūpapattihetutāya ‘‘bhaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Abhinipāto tattha tattha bhave paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena nibbatti. So bhavūpapattihetukānaṃ sabbesaṃ anatthānaṃ mūlakāraṇattā ‘‘bhaya’’nti vutto. Idāni nikantiādīnaṃ sappaṭibhayataṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃkāraṇā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha nikantiṃ katvāti ālayaṃ janetvā, taṇhaṃ uppādetvāti attho.
接近触,是指让眼触等各种触生起。贪著触的滋味的人,是指通过身触而贪著被称为触所的触的人。为了说明众生通过身触而对触所生起渴爱,在讲解触食的过患时,以“对他人所守护、保密的……”等文句,把触所作为所缘提了出来。或者,“贪著触的滋味的人”就是贪著触食滋味的人。因为众生有触食时,才会对触的所缘生起贪著,没有触食就不会有贪著。因此说“以触的滋味为根本”等。巴利
Phassa upagacchantāti cakkhusamphassādibhedaṃ phassaṃ pavattentā. Phassassādinoti kāyasamphassavasena phoṭṭabbasaṅkhātassa phassassa assādanasīlā. Kāyasamphassavasena hi sattānaṃ phoṭṭhabbataṇhā pavattatīti dassetuṃ phassāhārādīnavadassane phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ uddhaṭaṃ ‘‘paresaṃ rakkhitagopitesū’’tiādinā. Phassassādinoti vā phassāhārassādinoti attho. Sati hi phassāhāre sattānaṃ phassārammaṇe assādo, nāsatīti. Tenāha ‘‘phassassādamūlaka’’ntiādi.
因为生相怖畏是以投落的本质被执取的,所以说“以彼为根本”,意思就是业所造作的相。巴利
Jātinimittassa bhayassa abhinipātasabhāvena gahitattā ‘‘tammūlaka’’nti vuttaṃ, kammāyūhananimittanti attho.
“坠落”就是再生。因为众生最初再生到各种各样的“有”里,就像掉进火炭坑一样,和“坠落”很相似。以它为根:因为它是名色再生的根本。巴利
Abhinipatatīti abhinibbattati. Paṭhamābhinibbatti hi sattānaṃ tattha tattha aṅgārakāsusadise bhave abhinipātasadisīti. Tammūlakattāti nāmarūpanibbattimūlakattā.
“在那里”指的是那些譬喻当中。“以真实之义来说明”,这里说的不是虚构出来的意义,而是真实发生过、过去曾有的意义。赶路的人手里带着路粮时,路粮就像也跟着一起走,所以说“走着走着,路粮就耗尽了”。或者,“走了”的意思是“因为行走的缘故”。他们被饥渴折磨得虚弱不堪,走不到枝叶浓密的树荫下,就坐在树荫稀疏的地方。“如今我实在太虚弱,那件事已经做不了了。”那幼童走路摇摇晃晃,又被饥渴压垮,就在行走途中死去了。巴利
Tatrāti tāsu upamāsu. Bhūtamatthaṃ katvāti na parikappitamatthaṃ, atha kho bhūtaṃ bhūtapubbaṃ atthaṃ katvā. Pātheyyahatthesu gacchantesu pātheyyaṃ, gacchantaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘gantvā pātheyyaṃ niṭṭhāsī’’ti. Gantvāti vāgamanahetūti attho. Khuppipāsāturatāya ghanacchāyaṃ rukkhaṃ upagantuṃ asamatthā viraḷhacchāyāyaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Na dāni sakkā taṃ mayā kātuṃ atidubbalabhāvato. Parikkhalitagatitaruṇadārako khuppipāsābhibhūto ca, tasmā gacchantoyeva mato.
“同种类肉”是指同一类众生的肉,也就是人肉。人肉在世间因为令人厌恶,所以是不净的。因此,智者会呵责它。在人肉当中,亲族的肉因为不适合食用而令人厌恶;在亲族的肉当中,自己孩子的肉更令人厌恶;在孩子的肉当中,所爱之子的肉更令人厌恶;在爱子的肉当中,幼嫩之肉更令人厌恶;在幼嫩之肉当中,生的肉更令人厌恶;在生肉当中,未经盐等调制的肉更令人厌恶;在其中,无盐的肉更令人厌恶;在其中,未经熏烤的肉更令人厌恶。应当这样理解:从下到上,后后之肉成为前前之肉更加令人厌恶的原因。“如同孩子的肉”:通过令不净相现起,观想为如同孩子的肉。“在那里耗尽欲贪”:以圣道断除对食物的贪求。巴利
Sajātimaṃsatāyāti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.63) samānajātimaṃsatāya, manussamaṃsatāyāti attho. Yaṃ manussamaṃsaṃ, tañhi loke jigucchanīyattā paṭikulaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ viññūhi vajjitaṃ, manussamaṃsesupi ñātimaṃsaṃ ayuttaparibhogatāya paṭikūlaṃ, tatthāpi puttamaṃsaṃ, tatthāpi piyaputtamaṃsaṃ, tatthāpi taruṇamaṃsaṃ, tatthāpi āmakamaṃsaṃ, tatthāpi agorasābhisaṅkhataṃ, tatthāpi aloṇaṃ, tatthāpi adhūpitanti evaṃ heṭṭhimato uttaruttarassa paṭikūlatarabhāvakāraṇatā daṭṭhabbā. Puttamaṃsasadisanti paṭikūlatāupaṭṭhāpanena puttamaṃsasadisaṃ katvā passati. Tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyatīti ariyamaggena āhāre sāpekkhaṃ khepeti.
那头母牛,就是经里(《相应部》2.63)说的“比丘们,譬如一头母牛……”里的那头母牛。撕裂后,就是拔开之后。依止而住,就是以它为缘而现起。由于苦苦等,三种感受都是苦,所以说“感受之苦者”。巴利
Sā gāvīti ‘‘seyyathāpi bhikkhave gāvī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.63) evaṃ sutte vuttagāvī. Uddāletvāti uppāṭetvā. Nissāya tiṭṭhatīti paṭiccapaccayaṃ katvā pavattati. Dukkhadukkhatādivasena tiṇṇampi vedayitānaṃ dukkhabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vedayitadukkhassā’’ti.
即使是大众公认的善趣,从变易行苦和烦恼苦的角度来看,也仍然是大热恼,所以说“以大热恼之义,有三种有”。就像两个拖拽人的男子那样,依善与不善而有两种意思。应当知道,若依照使意思不再生起的方式去修行,就能在那里耗尽欲贪。巴利
Sādhusammatāpi gati vipariṇāmasaṅkhāradukkhatāvasena kilesadukkhavasena ca mahāpariḷāhāyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahāpariḷāhaṭṭhena tayo bhavā’’ti. Yathā upakaḍḍhakā dve purisā, evaṃ kusalākusalavasena dve manosañcetanā. Yathā manosañcetanā na pavattati, tathā paṭipajjanto tattha nikantiṃ pariyādiyatīti veditabbo.
被百矛刺中本身就是譬喻,也就是“百矛刺中喻”,在这个百矛刺中喻当中,那百矛是这位男子所受的。“落在何处”:指先前那些矛刺落的部位。因为种种苦接连不断地生起,所以苦没有限量。“蕴的生起”:指诸蕴的接连生起;而最初生起就是结生。就像罪犯一样,结生识是种种苦生起的依靠处,也是那些苦所趋向的地方。与它相应的诸法以它为主导而运转,所以说“识的苦之生起”。正如所说:“诸法以意为前导。”(《法句》1,2)应当知道,为了让识将来不再以结生的方式运转而这样修行,就是在那里耗尽渴爱。巴利
Sattisatena hatā eva upamā sattisatahatūpamā, tassaṃ sattisatahatūpamāyaṃ. Taṃ sattisataṃ. Assa purisassa. Patitokāseti purimasattīhi patitappadese. Dukkhassa pamāṇaṃ natthi anekassa aparāparaṃ uppajjanato. Khandhajanananti khandhānaṃ aparāparuppādo, paṭhamābhinibbatti pana paṭisandhi eva. Āgucārī puriso viya paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ nānappakāradukkhuppādasannissayato, tehi ca dukkhehi upagantabbato. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ pamukhabhāvena pavattiyā ‘‘viññāṇassa dukkhuppādoti vuttā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti (dha. pa. 1, 2) yathā viññāṇaṃ āyatiṃ paṭisandhivasena na pavattati, evaṃ karaṇaṃ tattha nikantipariyādānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“了知事物”说的是苦谛。“五欲贪”是指以五种欲为对象的贪。“已被遍知”是说,通过明确地了解而超越了它。因为当味渴爱真正消失时,色渴爱等也一定消失。这样一来,欲贪结就被彻底断除了;应当知道,这样修行就是在那里把爱著耗尽。因为遍知现观成就时,断除现观也就成就了。为了说明欲贪结断除后,连下分结的一丝痕迹都不会剩下,所以他说“没有那种结”等。这是为了表明:通过对抟食的遍知,能证得不来果。为了表明对其他食的遍知是以阿拉汉为究竟,故说“比丘们,在触……”等。其中,“三种渴爱”指的是欲渴爱、色渴爱和无色渴爱,这就是三种渴爱。巴利
Pariññātaṃvatthūti dukkhasaccamāha. Pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgoti pañcakāmaguṇārammaṇo rāgo. Pariññāto hotīti paricchijja jānanena samatikkanto hoti. Rasataṇhāya hi sammadeva vigatāya rūpataṇhādayopi vigatāyeva honti. Tathā ca sati kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ samucchinnameva hoti, evaṃ karaṇaṃ tattha nikantipariyādānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pariññābhisamaye hi siddhe pahānābhisamayo siddho evāti. Pahīne ca kāmarāgasaṃyojane orambhāgiyasaṃyojanānaṃ lesopi nāvasissatīti dassento āha ‘‘natthi taṃ saṃyojana’’ntiādi. Tena kabaḷīkārāhārapariññā anāgāmitaṃ pāpetīti dasseti. Sesāhārapariññā pana arahattaniṭṭhā evāti dassento ‘‘phasse bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha tisso taṇhāti kāmataṇhā rūpataṇhā arūpataṇhāti imā tisso taṇhā.
为了把“由过去渴爱的集起”这个略说的含义详细展示出来,就开始说“如何”等。其中,“以渴爱为缘而生”就是:以渴爱为缘而生起。在结生的刹那,通过显示诸食由过去渴爱的集起而生起,其实也就显示了在生命流转的刹那,执取食也生起了;为了不涉及那个,转而单独显示非执取食的渴爱集起,所以说了“然而,因为”等。“在这里”是指在这部经中,它们被混合讲述,没有加以区分。“由俱生渴爱为缘而生”:这里特别用“俱生”一词,是为了显示也有由非俱生渴爱为缘而生起的非执取食。然而,那种非执取食,因为生起的共性也是“由非俱生渴爱为缘而生”,恐怕会让人把它和前面所说的执取食混淆,所以没有单独举出来;但这并不能成为理由,因为有“依贪,忧生起”这样的说法,以及可以由渴爱作为亲依止缘、依嗔心所生的食素而得到非执取食。那么,渴爱如何成为食素的亲依止缘呢?虽然在《发趣论》中,任何一处都没有说色法有亲依止缘,但这并不矛盾,因为这里指的是经典的方法:“当有了这个,就有那个;这个就是那个的亲依止缘”,应以这样的意趣来理解,正如所说的那样。因此他说“这……渴爱的灭尽”。巴利
‘‘Purimataṇhāsamudayā’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha taṇhāpaccayanibbattāti taṇhāpaccayā nibbattā. Paṭisandhikkhaṇe purimataṇhāsamudayā āhārānaṃ samudayadassaneneva pavattikkhaṇepi upādinnakaāhārasamudayo dassito hotīti taṃ anāmasitvā anupādinnakānaṃ taṇhāsamudayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ sutte missitvā kathitā avisesitattā. Sahajātataṇhāpaccayanibbattoti ettha sahajātaggahaṇaṃ asahajātataṇhāpaccayanibbattopi anupādinnakaāhāro labbhatīti dassanatthaṃ. So pana asahajātataṇhāpaccayanibbattatāsāmaññenapi yathāvuttaupādinnakāhārena saṃsayaṃ janeyyāti na uddhaṭo, na ca etaṃ kāraṇaṃ ‘‘rāgaṃ upanissāya domanassaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vacanato, taṇhopanissayapaṭighacittasamuṭṭhānāya ca ojāya vasena anupādinnakaāhārassa labbhanato. Kathaṃ pana taṇhā ojāya upanissayapaccayo; na hi paṭṭhāne katthaci rūpassa upanissayapaccayo vutto atthīti. Nāyaṃ virodho ‘‘yasmiṃ sati yaṃ hoti, so tassa upanissayo’’ti suttantanayassa adhippetattā yathāvuttatthasambhavato. Tenevāha ‘‘imissā…pe… taṇhāya nirodhenā’’ti.
当因彻底灭尽时,果也彻底灭尽,所以他说“食的灭尽被了知”。因为诸食属于苦谛的一部分,所以把握诸食就等于把握苦谛,因此他说“在这里,四谛都以它们自身的面貌被宣说了”。开示诸谛,只是为了显示苦等应当被遍知、应当被断除等状态,因此,为了指出对老死等应当不迷惑地观察其“应被遍知”等状态,他说“在一切处,都应当不迷惑地抉择诸谛”。巴利
Kāraṇe sabbaso niruddhe phalampi sabbaso nirujjhatīti āha ‘‘āhāranirodho paññāyatī’’ti. Āhārānaṃ dukkhasaccekadesattā āhāraggahaṇaṃ dukkhasaccaggahaṇameva hotīti āha ‘‘idha cattāripi saccāni sarūpeneva vuttānī’’ti. Saccadesanā dukkhādīnaṃ yāvadeva pariññeyyādibhāvasandassanatthā, tasmā jarāmaraṇādīsu pariññeyyādibhāvo asammohato sallakkhetabboti dassento ‘‘sabbattha asammuyhantena saccāni uddharitabbānī’’ti āha.
91 “以种种方式解说”:就是通过苦、老死等种种方式,把诸圣谛或简略或详细地讲说。“苦”:指苦圣谛就是苦,并不只是苦受而已。巴利
91.Yena yena pariyāyena byākarotīti yena yena dukkhādijarāmaraṇādipariyāyena ariyasaccāni saṅkhepato ca vitthārato ca katheti. Dukkhanti dukkhasaccaṃ dukkhaṃ, na dukkhamattaṃ.
老死品类的注释巴利
Jarāmaraṇavāravaṇṇanā
92 对“他们各自的”这一说法,是依照想要说明的意图来作的解说。所以,就像说“每个村庄都可爱”时,所有那样的村庄都因为可爱这一点而被包含进来;同样,说“那些那些众生的生”时,所有众生都因为以生为名的变化而被包含进来。因此他说:“这是简要地对众多众生的共通解说。”巴利
92.Tesaṃtesanti byāpanicchāvasenāyaṃ niddeso kato, tasmā yathā ‘‘gāmo gāmo ramaṇīyo’’ti vutte ramaṇīyatāya tādisā sabbepi gāmā saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, evaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ jātī’’ti vutte jātisaṅkhātavikāravasena sabbepi sattā saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso’’ti.
依趣与生的区别来说:依五趣而说,而在每一趣中,又依刹帝利等、地居天等、象等各自的生类来说。众生被归入其中,或者依此而被归类,所以叫部类,也就是种姓、行为等的区分。老的自性,叫做青春减损,因此“老”是对名为青春减损之自性的说明;而依明显的老来说明,是因为通过齿落等现象才能把握它。老化本身就是老化性,或者用“性”这个词来表示老化者的状态。所以他说“这是状态的说明”。因为牙齿等而出现破损,这个人就是“破损者”,即补特伽罗。他的状态就是“齿落”。这个人有白发,所以是“白发者”,他的状态就是“白发苍苍”。这个人有皱纹的皮肤,所以是“皮皱者”,他的状态就是“皮皱”。这些齿落等就是老。这是依展示变异,即依显示衰败而说。“风”指大风团。依齿落等所行之道是明显的,所以说取齿落等现象是对老的作用的说明,以此表明这个意思。并非齿落等本身就是老;从羯罗蓝时开始,先前诸色在到达老之刹那,生起后后诸色,后后诸色随顺成熟之色,渐次极熟、极熟而生起。当极熟之色成熟时,便生起具有齿落等自性之法。它们犹如水、道路等处草木的毁坏等,在名为已行于成熟之道的极熟色中生起,只是被称为“老所行之道”,而不是老本身。巴利
Gatijātivasenāti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.1.2) pañcagativasena, tatthāpi ekekāya gatiyā khattiyādibhummadevādihatthiādijātivasena ca. Nikiyyanti sattā ettha, etena vāti nikāyo, gottacaraṇādivibhāgo. Jarāya sabhāvo nāma vayohāni, tasmā jarāti vayohānisaṅkhātassa sabhāvassa niddeso, pākaṭajarāvasena niddeso khaṇḍiccādivasena gahaṇato. Jīraṇameva jīraṇatā, jīrantassa vā ākāro tā-saddena vutto. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ ākāraniddeso’’ti. Dantādīnaṃ vasena khaṇḍaṃ jātaṃ etassāti khaṇḍito, puggalo. Tassa bhāvo khaṇḍiccaṃ. Palitaṃ etassa atthīti palito, tassa bhāvo pāliccaṃ. Vali taco etassāti valittaco, tassa bhāvo valittacatā. Ime khaṇḍiccādayo jarā. Vikārānaṃ dassanavasenāti vipattidassanavasena. Vātassāti mahato vātakkhandhassa. Khaṇḍiccādivasena gatamaggo pākaṭo, tasmā khaṇḍiccādiggahaṇaṃ jarāya kiccaniddesoti vuttanti dasseti. Na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarāti kalalakālato pabhuti purimarūpānaṃ jarāpattakkhaṇe uppajjamānāni pacchimarūpāni paripakkarūpānurūpāni pariṇatapariṇatāni uppajjantīti anukkamena supariṇatarūpānaṃ paripākakāle uppajjamānāni khaṇḍiccādisabhāvāni uppajjanti, tāni udakādimaggesu tiṇarukkhasaṃbhaggatādayo viya paripākagatamaggasaṅkhātesu paripakkarūpesu uppannāni ‘‘jarāya gato maggo’’icceva vuttāni, na jarāti.
“依本性”是指依果报成熟的本性;或者说,因老而应达到的果本身就是本性,通过这个显示了老。“极清净”就是非常清净。为了从作用上说明那极清净的状态,才说了“即使是微细的……”等话。因为那些根的锐利明了,就是它们的极清净。“浑浊”就是混乱。“不明了”就是不清晰。巴利
Pakatiyāti phalavipaccanapakatiyā, jarāya vā pāpuṇitabbaṃ phalamevapakati, tāya jarā dīpitā. Suppasannānīti suṭṭhu pasannāni. Tameva suppasannataṃ kiccato dassetuṃ ‘‘sukhumampī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tikkhavisadatā hi tesaṃ indriyānaṃ suppasannatā. Āluḷitānīti ākulāni. Avisadānīti abyattāni.
确实,即使在色法里,刹那性的老也很难觉察、隐而不显;但它在相续流转中会变得明显,所以就说它是“明显的老”。无间、没有间隔的老叫“无间老”,因为在有情的相续中,它持续不断地跟随着生起。“于其他者”:指在弱十年等当中,按前十年等来划分时,不同于前面所说的那些情况。“各个之间”:就是在他们所说的那些种类中,前十年等与后十年等之间的间隔。“颜色的差异等”:指颜色的差异、形状的差异、触感的差异等。巴利
Kāmaṃ rūpadhammesupi khaṇikajarā durupalakkhitā paṭicchannāva, sā pana yasmā santānavasena pavattiyā paribyattāva hotīti ‘‘pākaṭajarā’’icceva vuttā. Avīci nirantarā jarā avīcijarā sati santāne sattānaṃ anuppabandhato. Tato aññesūti mandadasakādīsu pubbadasakādiparicchedato aññesu yathāvuttesu. Antarantarāti tesu eva vuttappakāresu purimadasakādito pacchimadasakādīnaṃ antarantarā. Vaṇṇavisesādīnanti vaṇṇavisesasaṇṭhānavisesasamphassavisesādīnaṃ.
从言词的角度来说,这是把词加上ka这个字来扩展后说的,因此“cavana”就是“cuti”(死灭)的意思。不过,它是对一蕴有、四蕴有、五蕴有中的死不加区分地统称,所以说“是对一蕴、四蕴、五蕴的共同说法”。或者,“从死者的角度来说”,意思是依照正在死去的个人的角度。“死灭本身就是死灭性”,所以说“以状态词来表达”。显示特征,就是显示被称为衰亡的那个特征。或者,正在死去者的状态,用“tā”这个字说为“死灭性”。坏灭就是破坏,所以说“表明死灭诸蕴的崩解生起”。就像破了的瓶子,无论如何都不可能再以完整瓶子的状态存在,诸蕴坏了也是这样,所以死灭就叫作消失,因此说“表明……消失”。被称为“死神”的破坏,以及被称为“死亡”的舍命,把这两者合在一起说为“死神、死亡”,这里的含义应当这样理解。世间所说的“时间终结者的作用”,那就是死灭、死亡的意思。或者,死的时间因为无法超越而特别称为“时”,它的作用,从实义上说就是死灭诸蕴的崩解现起。前面用“死灭、死灭性”等说法,是结合世俗言说而作的解说。巴利
Vacanakavasenāti ka-kārena hi padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vuttaṃ, tasmā cavanaṃ cutīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ pana ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu cutiyā avisesato gahaṇanti āha ‘‘ekacatupañcakkhandhānaṃ sāmaññavacana’’nti. Cavanakavasenāti vā cavanakassa puggalassa vasenāti attho. Cavanameva cavanatāti āha ‘‘bhāvavacanenā’’ti. Lakkhaṇanidassananti vayasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa nidassanaṃ. Cavantassa vā ākāro tā-saddena vutto ‘‘cavanatā’’ti. Bhijjanaṃ bhedoti vuttaṃ ‘‘cutikkhandhānaṃ bhaṅguppattiparidīpana’’nti. Yathā bhinnassa ghaṭassa kenaci pariyāyena ghanaghaṭabhāvena ṭhānaṃ natthi, evaṃ bhinnānaṃ khandhānanti cavanaṃ antarahitaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘antaradhānanti…pe… paridīpana’’nti. Yo maccūti vuccati bhedo, yañca maraṇaṃ pāṇacāgo, tadubhayaṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘maccu maraṇa’’nti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kālassa antakassa kiriyāti yā loke vuccati, sā cuti, maraṇanti attho. Cavanakālo eva vā anatikkamanīyattā visesena kāloti vuttoti tassa kiriyā atthato cutikkhandhānaṃ bhedappattiyeva. ‘‘Cuti cavanatā’’tiādinā pubbe vohāramissakena niddiṭṭhaṃ.
现在,为了说明“这里正是按照已生起的究竟义的方式来解说”,所以说了“以究竟义来说明”。因为前面用“依死者”等说法,是依着补特伽罗、以世俗言说为立足点来作的注释。化生者不留下任何身体,只是死没诸蕴的消失而已;从那以后,时节所生的色相续就不再继续生起。在“生之集”等当中应当说明的内容,按照“渴爱之集”等当中已说的方式就能理解,所以没有再另外说。巴利
Idāni nibbattitaparamatthanayeneva niddesoti dassetuṃ ‘‘paramatthena dīpetu’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cavanakavasenā’’tiādinā hi puggalavasena ca vohārādhiṭṭhānā saṃvaṇṇanā katā. Na kiñci kaḷevaraṃ nikkhipaki opapātikānaṃ cutikkhandhānaṃ antaradhānamevahoti, tato paraṃ utusamuṭṭhānarūpasantati na pavattati. ‘‘Jātisamudayā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ ‘‘taṇhāsamudayā’’tiādīsu vuttanayaneva sakkā viññātunti na vuttaṃ.
93 “以生的状态”等语,是为依“处”和“生类”,以每两个词为一组的方式涵盖一切众生,藉此显示生而说的。但在《破迷论》中,因为说“依正在出生的状态为生,依完全出生的状态为遍生”,所以应当知道:那里是以每一个词单独涵盖一切众生,来显示生的。由于理解为“诸处完全圆满的生就是遍生”,所以说“它依诸处圆满的方式而相应”。由此应当知道:仅仅用“生”这个词所说的生,指的是诸处不圆满的状态。明显的出生就是发生,意思是明显地出生。由于是依“这些那些众生的……发生”这样依众生而说的,所以这是通俗的教导。巴利
93.Jāyanaṭṭhenātiādi āyatanavasena yonivasena ca dvīhi dvīhi padehi sabbasatte pariyādiyitvā jātiṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 191) pana ‘‘jāyamānakavasena jāti, sañjāyanavasena sañjātī’’ti vuttattā tattha ekekeneva padena sabbasatte pariyādiyitvā jātiṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sampuṇṇā jāti sañjātīti katvā ‘‘sā paripuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā’’ti vuttaṃ. Eteneva kevalaṃ jātisaddena vuttāya jātiyā aparipuṇṇāyatanatā daṭṭhabbā. Abhibyattā nibbatti abhinibbatti, pākaṭā nibbattīti attho. ‘‘Tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ…pe… abhinibbattī’’ti sattavasena pavattattā vohāradesanā.
在这里,“处处”应当理解为按处来归纳:在四蕴有的地方,结生刹那时生起两处;在一蕴有的地方,结生刹那时也生起两处;在其余色界中,结生刹那时生起五处;在欲界中,按根是否具足,分别归纳为七处、九处、十处,又是十处,以及十一处。虽然死时诸蕴以无间缘等作为缘,成为紧接着结生法的缘,但这里所说的“再生有”,指的是那些不产生果报的集起。为了说明只有能产生果报的才是这里所说的“有”,论师说:“应当知道,作为出生之条件的业有。”巴利
Tatratatrāti ettha catuvokārabhave dvinnaṃ, ekavokārabhave dvinnaṃ, sesarūpadhātuyaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe uppajjamānānaṃ pañcannaṃ, kāmadhātuyaṃ vikalāvikalindriyavasena sattannaṃ navannaṃ dasannaṃ, puna dasannaṃ, ekādasannañca āyatanānaṃ vasena saṅgaho veditabbo. Yadipi cutikkhandhā anantarānaṃ paṭisandhikadhammānaṃ anantarādinā paccayā honti, ye pana samudayā ajanakā, te ettha upapattibhavoti adhippetā. Janako eva bhavoti adhippetoti dassento ‘‘jātiyā paccayabhūto kammabhavo veditabbo’’ti āha.
94 “有”依“令存在”和“存在”两种意义分为两类。其中,业有是依“再生有由此而生起”这种令存在的意义而称为“有”。不过,注释书里先说了再生有是“它存在,所以叫有”,然后又因为它是再生有的原因,就以果的名称来称呼因,把业也说成“有”——这里表达的意思就是:在两种情况下,业都是再生有得以存在的原因,因此业和业有是同一个意思的不同说法。“以一切方式”则是说,依照令存在、存在、善、不善、再生、成就、有、低劣、殊胜等一切种类的方式。“欲有”这个说法,是依据它以欲渴爱为因,以及它作为欲渴爱的所缘这两层关系而说的。能令投生到色界的业,就是色有;同样,能令投生到无色界的业,就是无色有;而它们各自所产生出来的诸蕴,就是色界和无色界的再生有。至于色有、无色有这两种“有”本身的情形,也应当像这里说“欲有”那样去理解。巴利
94. Bhāvanabhavanaṭṭhena bhavo duvidho. Tattha kammabhavo ‘‘bhavati etasmā upapattibhavo’’ti bhāvanaṭṭhena bhavo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana upapattibhavaṃ ‘‘bhavatīti bhavo’’ti vatvā tassa kāraṇattā kammaṃ phalūpacārena bhavoti ayamattho vutto, ubhayatthāpi upapattibhavahetubhāvanettha kammassa kammabhavapariyāyoti dassitaṃ hoti. Sabbathāpīti bhāvanabhavanakusalākusalaupapattisampattibhavahīnapaṇītādinā sabbappakārenapi. Kāmabhavoti vuttaṃ kāmataṇhāhetukato kāmataṇhāya ārammaṇabhāvato ca. Rūpabhavūpagakammaṃ rūpabhavo, tathā arūpabhavūpagakammaṃ arūpabhavo, taṃtaṃnibbattakkhandhā rūpārūpupattibhavā, rūpārūpabhavabhāvo pana tesaṃ ‘‘kāmabhavo’’ti ettha vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
取章的注释巴利
Upādānavāravaṇṇanā
95 “取”是指四种取。比如,有人因为贪著欲乐,或者因为贪著生存,而造作能投生到各种善趣的业,这时欲取就起作用;同样,当人执著“断灭”等邪见来造作善业时,这四种取也随各自情况,仅以亲依止缘的方式,成为各种善业有的缘。对于不善的业有,这些取以不俱生、无间、亲依止、所缘缘的方式为缘。在俱生的不善业有中,欲取以俱生、相互、依止、相应、有、不离去、因这七种方式为缘;其余诸取在这种情况下,去掉因缘的作用,加入道缘,也同样以七种方式为缘。而对于无间的不善业有,这些取则以无间缘、等无间缘、无间亲依止缘、有缘、离去缘、习行缘为缘。应当知道,这里说的“俱生等”,其中的“等”字已经涵盖了这些。心执取事欲,或者说是人以此(事欲)而执取。所谓“彼”,就是指事欲。所谓“欲”,就是渴爱;而“取”,就是执取,这样组合起来就是词义。所谓“依前述方法”,就是依照阿毗达摩中所说的方式。巴利
95.Upādānanti catubbidhampi upādānaṃ. Yathā hi kāmassādavasena, bhavassādavasena vā taṃtaṃsugatibhavūpagaṃ kammaṃ karontassa kāmupādānaṃ, evaṃ ucchedādimicchābhinivesavasenāti cattāripi upādānāni yathārahaṃ tassa tassa kusalakammabhavassa upanissayavaseneva paccayā honti, akusalakammabhavassa asahajātassa anantarassa upanissayavasenapi ārammaṇavasenapi . Sahajātassa kāmupādānaṃ sahajāta-aññamañña-nissaya-sampayutta-atthi-avigata-hetu-vasena sattadhā, sesaupādānāni tattha hetupaccayabhāvaṃ pahāya maggapaccayaṃ pakkhipitvā sattadhāva paccayā honti. Anantarassa pana anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanavasena paccayā honti. Tassidampi sahajātādīti ādi-saddena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vatthukāmaṃ upādiyati cittaṃ, puggalo vā etenāti attho. Tanti vatthukāmaṃ. Kāmetīti kāmo ca so upādiyatīti upādānañcāti yojanā. Vuttanayenāti abhidhamme vuttanayena.
“我是常住的”这一说法,是为了在执取前一种见时,指出后一种见才说的。就像这种见为了让自己变得坚固,会以前一种见为基础,一次又一次地执取后一种见;同样,“没有布施”等说法也是如此。不过,这里说的“执取我”,其实就是“我语取”,应当知道这并不是在说明“见取”。至于“以及世间”这一说法,则是脱离了“执取我”的执取,属于“见取”,在这里应当通过前一种见和后一种见的说法来理解。因为经中说“一切见都叫见取”,所以一切见都是见取。巴利
Sassato attāti idaṃ purimadiṭṭhiṃ upādiyamānaṃ uttaradiṭṭhiṃ nidassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā esā diṭṭhi daḷhīkaraṇavasena purimaṃ purimaṃ uttarā uttarā upādiyati, evaṃ ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādikāpīti. Attaggahaṇaṃ pana attavādupādānanti nayidaṃ diṭṭhupādānadassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Loko cāti attaggahaṇavinimuttagahaṇaṃ diṭṭhupādānabhūtaṃ idha purimadiṭṭhiuttaradiṭṭhivacanehi vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Sabbadiṭṭhigatassa ‘‘diṭṭhupādāna’’nti etaṃ adhivacanaṃ ‘‘sabbāpi diṭṭhi diṭṭhupādāna’’nti vacanato.
把戒禁执取为“清净之道”,这就是执取戒禁,凭的是错误的执著;或者,它本身就与错误执著相伴。由于与戒禁同行,所以名为“戒禁”;由于是顽固执取的状态,所以名为“取”;二者合称“戒禁取”。所谓“这样就能清净”的执著,是说依牛戒、牛行等行为,认定能以此从轮回中得到清净,因而成为执著。以上说明:正因执著与那戒禁相伴,它才配得上那个名称。巴利
Sīlabbataṃ upādiyantīti sīlabbataṃ ‘‘suddhimaggo’’ti upādiyanti. Etena micchābhinivesena. Sayaṃ vā taṃ micchābhinivesasahagataṃ. Sīlabbatasahacaraṇato sīlabbatañca taṃ daḷhaggāhabhāvato upādānañcāti sīlabbatupādānaṃ. Evaṃ suddhīti abhinivesatoti evaṃ gosīlagovatādicaraṇena saṃsārasuddhīti abhinivesabhāvato. Etena taṃ sahacaraṇato abhinivesassa taṃsaddārahataṃ dasseti.
他们说,是指用“有我”这类说法来谈论。这是通过那种邪见来说的。仅仅是在说“我”,意思是“我”只是一个言词而已。由此表明,这只是一个言词所依的基础,也就是外道所构想出来的“我”。巴利
Vadantīti ‘‘atthi me attā’’tiādinā voharanti. Etena diṭṭhigatena. Attavādamattamevāti attāti vācāmattameva. Etena vācāvatthumattametaṃ, yadidaṃ bāhirakaparikappito attāti dasseti.
在“渴爱与欲取”这一表述里,按照经文所说:“那里,什么是欲取?就是对诸欲的欲求、欲贪、欲喜、欲渴爱、欲爱著、欲热恼、欲昏迷、欲耽著,这称为欲取。”因此,欲取就是渴爱的坚固状态。而所谓“渴爱的坚固状态”,就是指以前面的渴爱作为亲依止缘而变得坚固的后起渴爱本身。不过,有些论师说:巴利
Taṇhākāmupādānassāti ettha ‘‘tattha katamaṃ kāmupādānaṃ? Yo kāmesu kāmacchando kāmarāgo kāmanandī kāmataṇhā kāmasneho kāmapariḷāho kāmamucchā kāmajjhosānaṃ. Idaṃ vuccati kāmupādāna’’nti vacanato taṇhādaḷhattaṃ kāmupādānaṃ. Taṇhādaḷhattanti ca purimataṇhāupanissayapaccayato daḷhabhūtā uttarataṇhā eva. Keci panāhu –
对还没得到的所缘生起渴求,这就是渴爱,就像黑暗中盗贼伸手摸索;对已经得到的所缘牢牢抓住,这就是取,就像那盗贼抓住财物。这些法是少欲和知足的对立面,是遍求与守护之苦的根源。所以,具有上述特征的渴爱,对具有上述特征且并非无间的取,以亲依止缘的方式成为取的缘,也以所缘缘等方式成为缘;而对无间缘等,则以无间缘等方式成为缘。因为一切贪,既可以用渴爱这个同义词来表达,也可以用欲取这个同义词来表达。至于其余诸取,也就是见取等,则以俱生缘等方式为缘:对俱生之法,以俱生缘等方式为缘;对非俱生之法,以无间缘、亲依止缘等方式为缘。这一切都应按照前面已经说过的道理来理解。巴利
‘‘Appattavisayapatthanā taṇhā andhakāre corassahatthappasāraṇaṃ viya, sampattavisayaggahaṇaṃ upādānaṃ tasseva bhaṇḍaggahaṇaṃ viyā’’ti. Appicchasantuṭṭhipaṭipakkhā ete dhammā pariyesanārakkhadukkhamūlāni, tasmā vuttalakkhaṇā taṇhā vuttalakkhaṇasseva upādānassa anānantarassa upanissayavasena paccayo, ārammaṇādivasenapi paccayo hotiyeva, anantarādīnaṃ pana anantarādivasena paccayo. Sabbassapi hi lobhassa taṇhāpariyāyopi kāmupādānapariyāyopi labbhatevāti. Avasesānanti diṭṭhupādānādīnaṃ. Sahajātādivasenāti sahajātānaṃ sahajātādivasena, asahajātānaṃ anantaraupanissayādivasenāti sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
96 “眼触”等说法,就像从母亲那边给儿子取名一样,是依据所依处来称呼触,因为所依处是它生起的原因;而所缘只是单纯作为生起的原因,所以说“长者……名”等。“以欲贪的状态”,是指对事欲的染著。“于色爱乐”,是指以渴爱和欢喜,在色所缘中耽乐、爱乐。以“此是常”等邪见而欢喜的方式,在色中享乐。“死后将不存在”,意思是坏灭之后就不再有了,因为不会再重新生起。同样,声、香等也是如此:正如对色的渴爱,以欲贪的状态,依常见之贪和断见之贪而转起,有三种渴爱;对声、香、味、触、法的渴爱也是这样。“渴爱行”,就是渴爱的现行,意思是依现行方式而转起的渴爱。巴利
96. ‘‘Cakkhusamphasso’’tiādi phassassa mātito nāmaṃ viya puttassa vatthuto tassa nissayabhāvena uppattihetuttā, ārammaṇaṃ pana kevalaṃ uppattihetūti vuttaṃ ‘‘seṭṭhi…pe… nāma’’nti. Kāmarāgabhāvenāti vatthukāmassa rajjanavasena. Rūpaṃ assādentīti rupārammaṇaṃ taṇhābhinandanāvasena abhiramamānā eva assādentī. Niccantiādinā diṭṭhābhinandanāmukhena rūpaṃ abhiramantī. Pecca na bhavissatīti bhijjitvā na hoti puna anuppajjanato. Tathā saddakaṇhādayopīti yathā rūpataṇhā kāmarāgabhāvena sassatarāgavasena ucchedarāgavasenāti ca pavattiyā tisso taṇhā, tathā saddataṇhā gandharasaphoṭṭhabbadhammataṇhāpi. Taṇhāvicaritānīti taṇhāsamudācārā, samudācāravasena pavattataṇhāti attho.
依于内在的,意思是依于内在的五蕴。这里虽然是属格的形式,但表达的是受格的意义。“‘我是’而有”的意思是:凡是依于内在的五蕴,通过渴爱、慢心和邪见,把它们执取为一个整体,从而生起“我是”这样的想法——当这种执取存在时,就会这样生起。这就是这句话的意思。“‘我是这样’而有”的意思是:在刹帝利等身份中,通过渴爱、慢心和邪见,生起“我就是这个样子的”这样的想法。这里没有和别人比较的执取。“如这些”等——这个“等”字,涵盖了这些渴爱行:“‘我是如此’、‘我是别样’、‘我将有’、‘我将如是’、‘我将如此’、‘我将别样’、‘我不存在’、‘我存在’、‘愿我存在’、‘愿我如是存在’、‘愿我如此存在’、‘愿我别样存在’、‘或许我存在’、‘或许我如是存在’、‘或许我如此存在’、‘或许我别样存在’”。其中,“我是如此”是在和同等身份的人比较后产生的执取,意思是:“就像这位刹帝利,就像这位婆罗门,我也是这样的”。“我是别样”是在和不同等身份的人比较后产生的执取,意思是:“就像这位刹帝利,就像这位婆罗门,我跟他们不一样,要么比他们低,要么比他们高”。这样,前面所说的这四项,是根据现在时而说的四种渴爱行。至于“我将有”等四项,则是根据未来时而说的。它们的含义应该按照前面四组中所讲的方法来理解。“我存在”——“存在”这个词,是指常住的意思,是常的同义词。因此,它的意思是:“我是常住的”。“我坏灭”——“坏灭”这个词,是指会灭去的意思,是无常的同义词。因此,它的意思是:“我是非常住的”。这样一来,这两项是依据常见和断见来说的。在这之后,“或许我存在”等四项,是依据疑惑和遍寻的心态来说的,它们的含义也应当依照前面四组中所讲的方法来理解。而“愿我存在”等四项,是依据“啊,但愿我能存在!”这样的希求与计度来说的,同样也应当依照前面四组中所讲的方法来理解。巴利
Ajjhattikassupādāyāti (vibha. aṭṭha. 973; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.2.2) ajjhattikaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya. Upayogatthe hi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Asmīti hotīti yadetaṃ ajjhattaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena samūhagāhato asmīti evaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ satīti attho. Itthasmīti hotīti khattiyādīsu ‘‘idaṃpakāro aha’’nti evaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena hotīti idamettha anupanidhāya gahaṇaṃ. Evamādināti ādi-saddena ‘‘evaṃsmīti, aññathāsmīti, bhavissanti, itthaṃ bhavissanti, evaṃ bhavissanti, aññathā bhavissanti, asasmīti, satasmīti, siyanti, itthaṃ siyanti, evaṃ siyanti, aññathā siyanti, apāhaṃ siyanti, apāhaṃ itthaṃ siyanti, apāhaṃ evaṃ siyanti, apāhaṃ aññathā siya’’nti (vibha. 973) imesaṃ taṇhāvicaritānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tattha evaṃsmīti idaṃ samato upanidhāya gahaṇaṃ, yathā ayaṃ khattiyo, yathā ayaṃ brāhmaṇo, evaṃ ahampīti attho. Aññathāsmīti idaṃ asamaṇo upanidhāya gahaṇaṃ, yathā ayaṃ khattiyo, yathā ayaṃ brāhmaṇo, tato aññathā ahaṃ hīno vā adhiko vāti attho. Iti imāni pubbe vuttāni dveti etāni paccuppannavasena cattāri taṇhāvicaritāni. Bhavissantiādīni pana cattāri anāgatavasena vuttāni. Tesaṃ purimacatukke vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Asasmīti asatīti asaṃ. Niccassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā sassato asmīti attho. Satasmīti sīdatīti sataṃ. Aniccassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā asassato asmīti attho. Iti imāni dve sassatucchedavasena vuttāni. Ito parāni siyantiādīni cattāri saṃsayaparivitakkavasena vuttāni, tāni purimacatukke vuttanayena atthato veditabbāni. Apāhaṃ siyantiādīni cattāri ‘‘api nāmāhaṃ bhaveyya’’nti evaṃ patthanākappanavasena vuttāni, tāni purimacatukke vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.
在这里,依常见和断见而说的两种,叫作“见首”;而“我是”“我将有”“愿我存在”“或许我存在”这四种,则只是“单纯首”;“我是这样”等三种,每一种又各有三种,共十二种,叫作“以首为根源的”。这样应当知道,依于内在而说的渴爱行共有十八种:二见首、四单纯首、十二以首为根源的。巴利
Ettha ca sassatucchedavasena vuttā dve diṭṭhisīsā nāma, asmi, bhavissaṃ, siyaṃ, apāhaṃ siyanti ete pana cattāro suddhasīsā eva, ‘‘itthasmī’’tiādayo tayo tayoti dvādasa sīsamūlakā nāma. Evametāni dve diṭṭhisīsā, cattāro suddhasīsā, dvādasa sīsamūlakāti ajjhattikassupādāya aṭṭhārassa taṇhāvicaritāni veditabbāni.
依于外:就是依止外在的五蕴。这里的属格也是表示受格的意思。以此:就是以此色……乃至……以此识——像这样,在色等诸法中,把其中一个执取为“我”,把另一个执取为“我所”和障碍,然后以渴爱等方式强烈地执著“我是”;在这里,“以此”是这里的特别之处。我是:就是凭这把剑、或凭这把伞、或凭这个灌顶仪式,强烈地执著“我是刹帝利”。依止于外色等:就是依止于外在的、属于他人相续的色、受等诸法。十八种:就是通过“我是”等方式生起的十八种,这些应当按前面所说的方式来理解。因为这里唯一的特别之处就是“以此”这个词,所以应当依照前面“二见为首”等所说的方式来简别理解。而把这两方面合在一起,就说为“三十六种”。巴利
Bāhirassupādāyāti bāhiraṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya. Idampi hi upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Imināti iminā rupena vā…pe… viññāṇena vāti evaṃ rūpādīsu ekameva ‘‘aha’’nti, itaraṃ kiñcanapalibodhabhāvena gahetvā taṇhādivasena ‘‘asmī’’ti abhinivisati, ‘‘iminā’’ti ayamettha viseso. Asmīti iminā khaggena vā chattena vā abhisekena vā ‘‘khattiyohamasmī’’ti abhinivisati. Bāhirarūpādinissitānīti bāhirāni parasantatipariyāpannāni rūpavedanādīni nissitāni. Aṭṭhārasāti iminā ‘‘asmī’’tiādinayappavattāni aṭṭhārasa, tāni pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. ‘‘Iminā’’ti hi ayamevettha viseso, tasmā ‘‘dve diṭṭhisīsā’’tiādinā vuttanayeneva niddhāretvā veditabbā. Ubhayaṃ pana ekajjhaṃ katvā āha ‘‘chattiṃsā’’ti.
以解释之义来说,就是依据“贤友,有这六种渴爱身”等解释性经文的语句来阐明其含义。以解释的广说来说,就是针对那解释,按十八种渴爱行的方式展开详说。又再收摄广说,就是把从两个方面广说的十八种渴爱行分类,再归结为六种、三种。巴利
Niddesatthenāti ‘‘chayime āvuso taṇhākāyā’’tiādiniddesapāḷiyā atthavacanena. Niddesavitthārāti tassa ca niddesassa aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritavasena vitthārena. Vitthārassa ca puna saṅgahatoti dvīhi ākārehi vitthāritassa aṭṭhārasataṇhāvicaritapabhedassa chaḷeva tissoyevāti ca puna saṅgahaṇato ca.
这里特别指的是果报受,因为它特别能被当作自我来享受。为了说明这种可以被享受的性质,才说了“如何”等下文。“以享受”:就是以欢喜。“执为我所”:就是当作财富。“彩画师等”:这个“等”字涵盖了提供可爱色等所缘的人。“技艺展示者等”:这个“等”字涵盖了医生等人。因为医生通过味觉处的营养力,以及通过由此产生的支持力,成为法所缘的提供者。这个“等”字也应像“琴师等”那样,逐一分别配合理解。“执儿子为我所”:就是像疼爱儿子一样珍爱。在这里,应把受看作像儿子;把作为受之缘的适意乳等,看作像可爱的色等所缘;把提供色等六种所缘的彩画师等人,看作像保姆。巴利
Vipākavedanā adhippetā visesato attānaṃ assādetabbato. Tameva hissā assādetabbataṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Assādanenāti abhiratiyā. Mamāyantāti dhanāyantā. Cittakārādīnanti ādi-saddena iṭṭhavaṇṇārammaṇadāyakānaṃ saṅgaho. Sippasandassanakādīnanti ādi-saddena vejjādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Vejjā hi rasāyatanojāvasena tadupatthambhitavasena ca dhammārammaṇassa dāyakā. Svāyaṃ ādi-saddo ‘‘vīṇāvādakādī’’tiādinā paccekañca yojetabbo, puttaṃ mamāyantāti puttaṃ sampiyāyantā. Putto viya cettha vedanā daṭṭhabbā, sappāyasappikhīrādīni viya vedanāya paccayabhūtāni iṭṭharūpādiārammaṇāni, dhāti viya rūpādichaḷārammaṇadāyakā cittakārādayo daṭṭhabbā.
97 眼触所生的受,按过去、未来等时间差别区分开来,再按整体聚合成一类,就成为一种受身,就像受蕴一样;耳触所生等的受也是这样。因此经中说:“贤友,有这六种受身。”所以这里说“受身”,就是受的集合。从眼触生起的,就是眼触所生受。不过这个受既包括已执取的,也包括未执取的。因为释义时把这两种都涵盖进来,所以说“在这里,先作总括一切的说明”。现在,当说“这是果报的法则”时,只取已执取的受,因此接着说了“依果报……”等。在意门中,与意识界相应的受,就是指与彼所缘意识界相应的受。巴利
97. Cakkhusamphassajā eva vedanā atītādibhedabhinnā rāsivasena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā eko vedanākāyo yathā vedanākkhandho, evaṃ sotasamphassajādikāti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘chayime āvuso vedanākāyā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘vedanākāyāti vedanāsamūhā’’ti. Cakkhusamphassato jātā cakkhusamphassajā vedanā. Sā pana upādinnāpi anupādinnāpi, tadubhayassapi saṅgaṇhantena atthavaṇṇanāya katattā āha ‘‘ayaṃ tāvettha sabbasaṅgāhikakathā’’ti. Idāni ‘‘vipākavidhi aya’’nti upādinnayeva gaṇhanto ‘‘vipākavasenā’’tiādimāha. Manodvāre manoviññāṇadhātusampayuttāti tadārammaṇamanoviññāṇadhātusampayuttā.
“其余诸受”是指领受等受。“亲依止等”中的“等”字,应当理解为也把无间缘等包括在内。因为对于无间等受来说,触以无间缘等方式作为它的缘;对于其他受来说,触则以亲依止缘作为缘。而在意门中,对于彼所缘受来说,意触以亲依止缘作为缘。“无门者”是指没有门的受,因为结生等受根本没有任何门。“俱生意触之集”这句话,是用来说明:对于这些受,触是以俱生这一层次作为它们的缘。巴利
Avasesānanti sampaṭicchanādivedanānaṃ. Upanissayādīti ādi-saddena anantarādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Anantarānañhi anantarādivasena, itaresaṃ upanissayavasena phasso paccayo hoti, manodvāre pana tadārammaṇavedanānaṃ manosamphasso upanissayavasena paccayo. Advārikānanti dvārarahitānaṃ. Na hi paṭisandhiādivedanānaṃ kiñci dvāraṃ atthi. Sahajātamanosamphassasamudayāti etenassa tāsaṃ sahajātakoṭiyā paccayabhāvamāha.
98 依靠眼而生起的触,就是眼触。所谓“以五事为所依”,就是以眼等五事为所依,依止于眼等五事。“这是已执取之说”,这是指二十二种执取,因为没有转起之说,所以是世俗层面的执取。“与异熟意相应的触”,就是与异熟意识相应的触。就像由缘所生起的(果)是已执取的,缘本身也必须是已执取的,因此说“六种眼等诸处”。巴利
98. Cakkhuṃ nissāya uppanno samphasso cakkhusamphasso. Pañcavatthukāti cakkhādipañcavatthukā cakkhādipañcavatthusannissayā. ‘‘Upādinnakakathā esā’’ti bāvīsatiggahaṇaṃ, pavattikathābhāvato lokiyaggahaṇaṃ. Vipākamanasampayuttaphassāti vipākamanoviññāṇasampayuttā phassā. Paccayuppannena viya paccayenapi upādinnakeneva bhavitabbanti ‘‘channaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ āyatanāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
六处门的注释巴利
Saḷāyatanavāravaṇṇanā
99 这只是一个举例说明。所以,就像在这里,就无色界而言,要把“第六处和六处”省略成“六处”,同样地,对于那些认为所生起的果是“已执取的”、而缘是“未执取的”的人,按照他们的观点,也应该依外处来省略,即对“第六处和六处、六处、六处”应用省略成“六处”。《清净道论》就是对这部圣典的义解,因此他说“在《清净道论》……所阐述的方法就是如此”。这个道理在其他引用《清净道论》的地方也同样适用。巴利
99. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ, tasmā yathā ettha arūpalokāpekkhāya chaṭṭhāyatanañca saḷāyatanañca saḷāyatananti ekaseso icchitabbo, evaṃ yesaṃ paccayuppanno upādinno, paccayo pana anupādinnotipi icchitabbo. Tesaṃ matena bāhirāyatanavasenapi ekaseso veditabbo ‘‘chaṭṭhāyatanañca saḷāyatanañca saḷāyatanañca saḷāyatana’’nti. Visuddhimaggopi imassa āgamassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanāti āha ‘‘visuddhimagge…pe… vuttanayamevā’’ti. Esa nayo aññatthāpi visuddhimaggaggahaṇe.
名色节的注释巴利
Nāmarūpavāravaṇṇanā
100 名的特征,就是朝向所缘而倾向的自性,因为离开它,名就无法存在。色的特征,则是在冷热等对立条件聚集时,产生种种不同的状态。这里用“这三种”等说法,是就一切心生起都共通的角度来把握行蕴,因此说明:那些在各自场合中不共的(行蕴),从意义上也已经被把握了。巴利
100.Namanalakkhaṇanti ārammaṇābhimukhaṃ namanasabhāvaṃ tena vinā apavattanato. Ruppanaṃ sītādivirodhipaccayasannipāte visadisuppatti. Ime pana tayotiādinā sabbacittuppādasādhāraṇavaseneva taṃsaṅkhārakkhandhaggahaṇaṃ, tasmā ye yattha asādhāraṇā, tepi atthato gahitāyevāti dasseti.
“取”是指作为缘。因为,对缘所生法来说,执取那些作为缘的法,本身就是作缘。这里用的是集合关系中的属格表达,也就是说“在集合的意义上,这是属格”,因为离开它,关系就无法成立。“因此”就是由于这个缘故。“那一切”是指大种和所造色这两类,总共二十七种。“其名”是指在四蕴有中的名,识也应该知道包含在其中。“其色”是指在一蕴有中的色。而在五蕴有中,识就是行与识中的识。“其名色”是指在五蕴有中的名色。依其力:对俱生者,按俱生缘等方式;对无间者,按无间缘等方式;对其他者,按亲依止缘等方式,应当知道,那样的名对于那样的识,随其相应而成为缘。巴利
Upādiyitvāti paccaye katvā. Paccayakaraṇameva hi paccayuppannassa paccayabhūtadhammānaṃ upādiyanaṃ. Samūhasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ etanti ‘‘samūhatthe etaṃ sāmivacana’’nti vuttaṃ tena vinā sambandhassa abhāvato. Tenāti tasmā. Taṃ sabbampīti taṃ bhūtupādāyapabhedaṃ sabbampi sattavīsatividhaṃ. Yassa nāmassāti catuvokārabhave nāmassa. Viññāṇampi tappariyāpannameva veditabbaṃ. Rūpassāti ekavokārabhave rūpassa. Viññāṇaṃ pana pañcavokārabhave saṅkhāraviññāṇameva. Yassa pañcavokārabhave nāmarūpassa. Tassa vasenāti sahajātassa sahajātādivasena, anantarassa anantarādivasena, itarassa upanissayādivasena tassa nāmassa yathārahaṃ tassa tassa viññāṇassa paccayabhāvo veditabbo.
意识节的注释巴利
Viññāṇavāravaṇṇanā
101 关于三界果报的执取,其理由前面已经说过。在这里,“行对于哪种识”:八种欲界福行,对于十六种欲界果报识;五种色界福行,对于五种色界果报识;十二种非福行,对于七种不善果报识;四种不动行,对于四种无色界果报识。它们在结生和转起时,相应地以业缘和亲依止缘作为缘。这是简要说明,详细说明则应按照《清净道论》中所说的方式来了知。巴利
101.Tebhūmakavipākaggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Saṅkhāro yassa viññāṇassāti ettha aṭṭhavidhopi kāmāvacarapuññābhisaṅkhāro soḷasavidhassa kāmāvacaravipākaviññāṇassa, pañcavidhopi rūpāvacarapuññābhisaṅkhāro pañcavidhassa rūpāvacaravipākaviññāṇassa, dvādasavidhopi apuññābhisaṅkhāro sattavidhassa akusalavipākaviññāṇassa, catubbidhopi āneñjābhisaṅkāro catubbidhassa arūpāvacaravipākaviññāṇassa yathārahaṃ paṭisandhipavattīsu kammapaccayena ceva upanissayapaccayena ca paccayo hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.620) vuttanayena veditabbo.
行分注释巴利
Saṅkhāravāravaṇṇanā
102 “有造作的特相”是指它具有思所造作的本性,也就是策励的含义。“通过动转之力”是指通过被称为身表的动转之力。这样就排除了五门思。“通过言语差别之力”是指通过发出言语之力,意思是令语表生起之力。如前所说的二十种,加上九种大善速行思,一共是二十九种意思。“对于诸善法,以亲依止力为缘”是这样说的,但也应当说,对某些情况是以所缘力为缘。“以俱生等之力”是指以俱生、相互、依止、相应、有、不离去、因这些力为缘;对于无间心等,则以无间、等无间、无间亲依止、有、离去、习行这些力为缘。“亦”这个字则包含了亲依止力。巴利
102.Abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇoti abhisañcetayitasabhāvo, āyūhanalakkhaṇoti attho. Copanavasenāti kāyaviññattisaṅkhātacopanavasena. Tena pañcadvārikacetanā paṭikkhipati. Vacanabhedavasenāti vācānicchāraṇavasena. Vacīviññattisamuṭṭhāpanavasenāti attho. Yathāvuttā vīsati, nava mahaggatakusalacetanā cāti ekūnatiṃsa manosañcetanā. ‘‘Kusalānaṃ upanissayavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ, ekaccānaṃ ārammaṇavasenapīti vattabbaṃ. Sahajātādivasenāti sahajāta-aññamañña-nissaya-sampayutta-atthi-avigatahetuvasena, anantarānaṃ anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanasena paccayo. Api-saddena upanissayaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
无明篇章的注释巴利
Avijjāvāravaṇṇanā
103 103.“在苦谛上的无明”这句话是略说,为了展开其中的含义,所以接着开始说“在那里”等话。那里的“那”指无明。无明虽然属于应当断除的,但就应当遍知这一点来说,也被包含在内。“他的苦谛”:作为依止处的苦谛,以及与无明相应诸蕴的苦谛,这苦谛属于无明。因为它是无明的依止缘。“对于它”:对于苦谛。“由于障碍通达如实相”:由于障碍对有为法不颠倒自性的证悟。由此说明,它对被称为遍知现观的圣道通达构成障碍。“对智慧的生起”:是对“这是苦,苦有这许多”这种觉知方式之前分智的生起。“在此”:于苦谛之上。“由不施予”:由于不肯释放。由此说明它对随觉智也构成障碍。巴利
103.‘‘Dukkhasacceaññāṇa’’nti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tanti aññāṇaṃ. Satipi pahātabbatte pariññeyyattavasena antogadhaṃ. Dukkhasaccañcassāti vatthusaṅkhātaṃ sampayuttakhandhasaṅkhātañca dukkhasaccaṃ assa aññāṇassa. Taṃ hissa nissayapaccayo hoti. Tassāti dukkhasaccassa. Yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhanivāraṇenāti saṅkhataaviparītasabhāvapaṭivijjhanassa nivāraṇena. Etenassa pariññābhisamayasaṅkhātassa ariyamaggapaṭivedhassa vibandhakabhāvamāha. Ñāṇappavattiyāti ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ dukkha’’nti anubujjhanākārāya pubbabhāgañāṇappavattiyā. Etthāti dukkhasacce. Appadānenāti avissajjanena. Etenassā anubodhañāṇassapi vibandhakatamāha.
应当以三种理由来理解它不被包含在内。这里,只按相应蕴作为事相来看,在集谛中的无明也应这样理解。“仅以唯一”这句话否定了其余三种理由。即使无明不以灭谛和道谛为所缘,又怎么能说它是被包含在灭谛和道谛中的事呢?然而,对于想要了知灭谛和道谛的人来说,无明以遮蔽它们的方式,使人在并非灭谛、并非道谛的地方执取为灭谛、为道谛,由此而活动,所以说为“于灭与道中的无明”。因此才说“由于遮蔽”等语,其含义已经说过。所谓“深奥性”,是指以自性本身而言的深奥性。由于无底、无立足处,使得以它为所缘的智无法生起,所以难见。然而前二谛,则以欺骗之义而言。所谓“以欺骗之义”,是指以欺骗性、不真实性而呈现,因此难以见到,所以是深奥的,并非以自性而言;因此,以它们为所缘的无明才生起。所谓“于彼”,是指在前二谛中,由于无常等自性相难以见到,所以无明正是以常等颠倒的方式而转起——应当这样连接起来理解。巴利
Tīhi kāraṇehi veditabbaṃ antogadhābhāvato. Idha sampayuttakhandhavaseneva vatthuto samudaye aññāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekenevāti itaraṃ kāraṇattayaṃ paṭikkhipati. Yadipi aññāṇaṃ nirodhamagge ārammaṇaṃ na karoti, kuto tadantogadhatabbatthutā, te pana jānitukāmassa tappaṭicchādanavasena anirodhamaggesu nirodhamaggaggāhahetutāvasena ca pavattamānaṃ ‘‘nirodhe paṭipadāyañca aññāṇa’’nti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘paṭicchādanato’’tiādi. Tassattho vuttoyeva. Gambhīrattāti sabhāveneva gambhīrattā. Agādhaapatiṭṭhābhāvena taṃvisayassa ñāṇassa uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā duddasaṃ. Purimaṃpana saccadvayaṃ. Vañcanīyaṭṭhenāti vañcakabhāvena ayāthāvabhāvena upaṭṭhānato duddasattā gambhīraṃ, na sabhāvato, tasmā taṃvisayaṃ aññāṇaṃ uppajjati. Tatthāti tasmiṃ purimasaccadvaye aniccādisabhāvalakkhaṇassa duddasattā eva niccādivipallāsavasena pavattati aññāṇanti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
现在,为了通过解说的分类方式,进一步说明无明在四谛中活动的情况,所以说了“再者”等话。其中,“在苦中”是用处格来表示处所。“由摄集”是说,因为苦具有应当被遍知的性质,所以无明应当被归摄在苦中。这就显示了简别的意义,因为无明确实是在苦中被简别出来,而不是在其他谛中。“由事”是指所依处,也就是依止的意思,因为无明以苦为依止。“由所缘”是指境界的意思,因为它缘取那个对象而活动。“由作用”是指遍及的意思,因为它以覆盖的方式遍及那里而活动。其余诸谛也应依照同样的方法理解其意义。“由无差别”是指没有差别,意思是说,不取如上所说在苦等中活动时的行相差别。“由自性”是指自性的相,因为无明的自性就是对四谛都不了知。欲贪和有贪就是欲漏和有漏,所以说“以俱生等”。难道无明不就是无明漏吗?那它怎么成为无明的缘呢?回答说“先前已生”等。巴利
Idāni niddesavibhāgenapi avijjāya saccesu pavattivibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dukkheti ettakena bhummaniddesena. Saṅgahatoti pariññeyyatāya dukkhena saṅgahetabbato. Tena niddhāraṇatthaṃ dasseti. Dukkhasmiñhi avijjā niddhārīyati, na aññasmiṃ. Vatthutoti ādhāratthaṃ. Dukkhasannissayā hi avijjā. Ārammaṇatoti visayatthaṃ taṃ ārabbha pavattanato. Kiccatoti byāpanatthaṃ chādanavasena taṃ byāpetvā pavattanato. Iminā nayena sesesupi attho veditabbo. Avisesatoti visesābhāvato, vuttanayena dukkhādīsu pavattiākāravisesaṃ aggahetvāti attho. Sabhāvatoti sarasalakkhaṇato. Catunnampi saccānaṃ ajānanasabhāvā hi avijjā. Kāmarāgabhavarāgā kāmāsavabhavāsavāti āha ‘‘sahajātādivasenā’’ti. Nanu avijjā eva avijjāsavo, so kathaṃ avijjāya paccayoti āha ‘‘pubbuppannā’’tiādi.
104 104. 在“漏”这一部分里,“漏”这个词的含义以及对漏的考察,前面已经讲过了。那为什么还要说这一部分呢?难道缘起的开示不就是以无明等开头的吗?针对这个质疑,才开始了“这一部分”等说明。在缘起的诸部分中:就是指缘起的十二支分。这些确实是导师对缘起的开示。对它也是通过显示其缘来成立的。也就是说,这并不像迦毗罗派的根本自性那样是没有条件的,而是有因有缘的;这是通过显示无明也有它的缘来成立的。以漏的集起:由于过去生中漏的集起,才有现在无明的集起;由于现在无明的集起,才有未来漏的集起。如此,漏与无明以缘和缘所生法的关系前后相续地运转。因为找不到最初的起点,以它为因的轮回其性质就是找不到最初的开端,由此便成立了“无始”的道理。应当这样理解。巴利
104.Āsavavāre āsava-saddattho āsavavicāro ca heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Kasmā panāyaṃ vāro vutto, nanu avijjādikāva paṭiccasamuppādadesanāti codanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ayaṃ vāro’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Paṭiccasamuppādapadesūti paṭiccasamuppādakoṭṭhāsesu. Dvādasakoṭṭhāsā hi satthu paṭiccasamuppādadesanā. Tassāpi paccayadassanavasenāti nāyaṃ kāpilānaṃ mūlapakati viya appaccayā, atha kho sappaccayāti avijjāyapi paccayadassanavasena. Āsavasamudayenāti atītabhave āsavānaṃ samudayena etarahi avijjāya samudayo, etarahi avijjāya samudayena anāgate āsavasamudayoti evaṃ āsavāvijjānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannakabhāvena aparāparaṃ pavattamānaṃ ādikoṭiabhāveneva tannimittassa saṃsārassa ādikoṭiabhāvato anamataggatāsiddhi veditabbā.
三十二处:就是三十二种通达圣谛的因缘,或者说三十二种以四圣谛为所缘的业处。从这里所说的《正见经》来看:圣弟子依哪种法而被称为有正见,那种圣者的正见就在这部经里被宣说了,所以它叫《正见经》;这段话就是从这部《正见经》来的。巴利
Dvattiṃsaṭhānānīti dvattiṃsa saccappaṭivedhakāraṇāni, dvattiṃsa vā catusaccakammaṭṭhānāni. Imamhā sammādiṭṭhisuttāti yāya ariyasāvako sammādiṭṭhi nāma hoti, sā ariyā sammādiṭṭhi ettha vuttāti sammādiṭṭhisuttaṃ, ito sammādiṭṭhisuttato.
“以四圣谛的方式”,是指证得四圣谛的各种原因。“以阿拉汉果的方式”,是指像“他彻底断除了贪随眠”这样证得阿拉汉果的各种原因。因此说“以六十四种原因”。巴利
Catusaccapariyāyehīti catusaccādhigamakāraṇehi. Arahattapariyāyehīti ‘‘so sabbaso rāgānusayaṃ pahāyā’’tiādinā arahattādhigamakāraṇehi. Tenāha ‘‘catusaṭṭhiyā kāraṇehī’’ti.
第10篇 《念处经》的注释巴利
10. Satipaṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
105 “地方的”是指拥有地方的人,或者地方的主宰,也就是王族子弟。按族姓来说,他们叫俱卢。如果他们的住处只是一个地方,为什么用复数?所以回答说“依惯用语”。因为文法学家在这种场合,主张像理应如此那样保持性、数一致,这里就是这种习惯用法,正如别处也说“住在盎伽人中”“住在末罗人中”。但在修饰它的“地方”一词上,如果是表族姓的词,就只用单数。注释师所用的“但”一词,是用来表示特别之义。因此,因为所指是多个区域,所以用复数,借此说明后文“但是很多……”等特别之处。“听闻”:就是顺着彰显顶生大王威力的传说,辗转流传而来的故事而听闻。“次第巡行”:指四处巡回游历。“这些地方”:指借由日月天子所表称的四大王天宫。所以说“他到了那里”等。“他”:指顶生大王。“那”:指四大王天的王权。“取了”:即接受了。然后又询问引导宝。“守门人立于守门处”:因为在善法堂的天众集会处以及天城四座城门处,他们奉命守护,特别设在那里。“以千株天树庄严”这一句,也应当与“心蔓陀罗园”等相配合。巴利
105.Jānapadinoti (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.95) janapadavanto, janapadassa vā issarā rājakumārā. Gottavasena kurū nāma. Tesaṃ nivāso yadi eko janapado, kathaṃ bahuvacananti āha ‘‘ruḷhīsaddenā’’ti. Akkharacintakā hi īdisesu ṭhānesu yutte viya saliṅgavacanāni (pāṇini 1.251) icchanti, ayamettha ruḷhī yathā aññatthāpi ‘‘aṅgesu viharati, mallesu viharatī’’ti ca. Tabbisesane pana janapada-sadde jāti-sadde ekavacanameva. Aṭṭhakathācariyā panāti pana-saddo visesatthajotano. Tena puthuatthavisayatāya evaṃ taṃ bahuvacananti ‘‘bahuke panā’’tiādinā vakkhamānaṃ visesaṃ dīpeti. Sutvāti mandhātumahārājassa ānubhāvadassanānusārena paramparāgataṃ kathaṃ sutvā. Anusaṃyāyantenāti anuvicarantena. Etesaṃ ṭhānanti candimasūriyamukhena cātumahārājikabhavanamāha. Tenāha ‘‘tattha agamāsī’’tiādi. Soti mandhātumahārājā. Tanti cātumahārājikarajjaṃ. Gahetvāti sampaṭicchitvā. Puna pucchi pariṇāyakaratanaṃ. Dovārikabhūmiyaṃ tiṭṭhanti sudhammāya devasabhāya devapurassa ca catūsu dvāresu ārakkhāya adhikatattā. Dibbarukkhasahassapaṭimaṇḍitanti idaṃ ‘‘cittalatāvana’’ntiādīsupi yojetabbaṃ.
他降下之后:降下之后,他就站在靠近地面的地方;站了不久就消失了,因为他凭那个身体,已不再有国王转轮王的地位。另一些注释师说:他站了更长的时间。天子之身显现出来,因为那能感得在天界中生起异熟的、须后后受的业已经获得了机会。在部分上成立的殊胜,可以算作整体的殊胜,所以即使只是一个地方,也用复数来称呼。巴利
Pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāsīti bhassitvā pathaviyā āsanne ṭhāne aṭṭhāsi, ṭhatvā ca nacirasseva antaradhāyi tenattabhāvena rañño cakkavattissariyassa abhāvato. ‘‘Cirataraṃ kālaṃ ṭhatvā’’ti apare. Devabhāvo pāturahosi devaloke pavattivipākadāyino aparāpariyāyavedanīyassa kammassa katokāsattā. Avayave siddho viseso samudāyassa visesako hotīti ekampi raṭṭhaṃ bahuvacanena voharīyati.
他们用词源分析的方式,以“Da”这个字母来解释它的含义。所谓“杂色”,其实是指“杂色足”,这是省略了后半部分,就像把“色有”简称为“色”一样。那为什么叫他“杂色足”呢?于是说“据说……”等等。关于“已被调伏”:这里指的是哪种调伏?所以说“从食人者的状态中被制止”。这里说的“这些长老”是指中部诵者,他们这样说是指较小的杂色足调伏故事。因为杂色足本是女夜叉的儿子,在他还是不怕的王子时,菩萨就在那里调伏了他;到了苏德索玛王时期,他成了波罗奈的国王,通过制止他食人的状态而被调伏,那叫大杂色足调伏。说了“儿子”之后又说“自身所生子”,是为了表明他是亲生儿子。巴利
Da-kārena atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti niruttinayena. Kammāsoti kammāsapādo vuccati uttarapadalopena yathā ‘‘rūpabhavo rūpa’’nti. Kathaṃ pana so kammāsapādoti āha ‘‘tassa kirā’’tiādi. Damitoti ettha kīdisaṃ damanaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘porisādabhāvato paṭisedhito’’ti. Ime pana therāti majjhimabhāṇake vadati, te pana cūḷakammāsadammaṃ sandhāya tathā vadanti. Yakkhiniputto hi kammāsapādo alīnasattukumārakāle bodhisattena tattha damito, sutasomakāle pana bārāṇasirājā porisādabhāvapaṭisedhanena yattha damito, taṃ mahākammāsadammaṃ nāma. Puttoti vatvā atrajoti vacanaṃ orasaputtabhāvadassanatthaṃ.
那些从北俱卢洲来到这里定居的人,使这个地方得名“俱卢国”。他们按照在北俱卢洲所守护的规矩,同样守护五戒。后来的人效法他们,于是这种随顺地方的传统从未间断地流传下来,因此被称为“俱卢人的常法”。这个含义应当通过《俱卢法本生》(Jā.1.3.76-78)来说明。为了指出后来最初出现染污的地方,才说了“俱卢国居民”等话。在世尊没有固定住所、没有任何精舍的地方,缘起故事通常只提到行乞的村落,就像说“在释迦族人中住,有个叫天臂的释迦族城镇”一样。为了说明这个意思,才说了“因为没有住所”等话。巴利
Yehi āvasitapadeso kururaṭṭhanti nāmaṃ labhi, te uttarakuruto āgatā manussā tattha rakkhitaniyāmeneva pañca sīlāni rakkhiṃsu, tesaṃ diṭṭhānugatiyā pacchimā janatāti, so desadhammavasena avicchedato vattamāno kuruvattadhammoti paññāyittha, ayañca attho kurudhammajātakena (jā. 1.3.76-78) dīpetabbo. So aparabhāge yattha paṭhamaṃ saṃkiliṭṭho jāto, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kururaṭṭhavāsīna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Yattha bhagavato vasanokāso koci vihāro na hoti, tattha kevalaṃ gocaragāmakittanaṃ nidānakathāya pakati, yathā taṃsakkesu viharati devadahaṃ nāma sakkānaṃ nigamoti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘avasanokāsato’’tiādimāha.
《总说分》的注释巴利
Uddesavārakathāvaṇṇanā
106 为什么世尊说这部经?这是在问不共的缘起;而共的缘起因为众所周知,所以没有提到。因此,当以“这部经的安立”来发问时,另一位就用“俱卢国住者”等来说明:这部经的安立是顺应后来众生的根机的。应当知道,这是在外缘起方面所作的说明。至于内缘起和不共的缘起,则应按照《根本法门经》等注释中所说的方法来理解。据说,那时俱卢国因为当地众生大多数都具备如理作意,又因为过去所造福德的力量,所以自然就拥有气候等条件的圆满。因此说“具备了气候等条件的圆满”。“等”字包含了食物等方面的圆满。也有一些老师说:“由于过去奉行俱卢正法的习惯力量,就像北俱卢洲一样,这个国家大多数时候本来就气候等条件圆满,而在世尊的时代,那个国家更是气候适宜等格外殊胜。”所谓“身心健全”,就是心和身体的健康。“被助益的慧力”,是指得到助益的智慧威力,或者是一再累积的智慧光辉。关于“在二十一处”:以身随观有十四处,以受随观有一处,以心随观有一处,以法随观有五处,合起来就是二十一处。“将业处投入阿拉汉果”,就是把四谛的业处以说法的方式归入阿拉汉果,使修行者能证得阿拉汉果。就像把素馨花、瞻波花等各种花,以及宝珠等七宝放入金盒、金箱中,它们因为容器的殊胜而格外美丽,又因为令人愉悦而能起作用;同样,以具足戒与正见等殊胜、成为殊胜容器的俱卢国住者之众,世尊为这些人所说的这个教法也格外光辉,并且能起作用——以“正如一个人”等来显示这个意思。“此处”就是俱卢国。巴利
106.Kasmā bhagavā imaṃ suttamabhāsīti asādhāraṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ pucchati, sādhāraṇaṃ pana pākaṭanti anāmaṭṭhaṃ, tena suttanikkhepo pucchitoti katvā itaro ‘‘kururaṭṭhavāsīna’’ntiādinā aparajjhāsayoyaṃ suttanikkhepoti dasseti. Etena bāhirasamuṭṭhānaṃ vibhāvitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ajjhattikaṃ pana asādhāraṇañca mūlapariyāyasuttādiṭīkāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Kururaṭṭhaṃ kira (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.373) tadā tannivāsīnaṃ sattānaṃ yebhuyyena yonisomanasikāravantatāya pubbe ca katapuññatābalena utuādisampannameva ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘utupaccayādisampannattā’’ti. Ādi-saddena bhojanādisampattiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Keci pana ‘‘pubbe kuruvattadhammānuṭṭhānavāsanāya uttarakuru viya yebhuyyena utuādisampannameva hontaṃ bhagavato kāle sātisayaṃ utusappāyādiyuttaṃ taṃ raṭṭhaṃ ahosī’’ti vadanti. Cittasarīrakallatāyāti cittassa sarīrassa ca arogatāya. Anuggahitapaññābalāti laddhupakārañāṇānubhāvā, anu anu vā āciṇṇapaññātejā. Ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesūti kāyānupassanāvasena cuddasasuṭhānesu, vedanānupassanāvasena ekasmiṃ ṭhāne, tathā cittānupassanāvasena, dhammānupassanāvasena pañcasu ṭhānesūti evaṃ ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ arahatte pakkhipitvāti catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ yathā arahattaṃ pāpeti, evaṃ desanāvasena arahatte pakkhipitvā. Suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭakasuvaṇṇamañjūsāsu pakkhittāni sumanacampakādinānāpupphāni maṇiputtādisattaratanāni ca yathā bhājanasampattiyā savisesaṃ sobhanti, kiccakarāni ca honti manuññābhāvato, evaṃ sīladassanādisampattiyā bhājanavisesabhūtāya kururaṭṭhavāsiparisāya desitā ca bhagavato ayaṃ desanā bhiyyosomattāya sobhati, kiccakārī ca hotīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘yathā hi puriso’’tiādinā. Etthāti kururaṭṭhe.
从本性来说,是指从它自身的性质来说;这里的意思是,在宣说这部念处经之前也是如此。随顺而住,意思是随顺导师的教法而住。放任有身,意思是:未以无常等如理作意把心导向某个所缘,而以贪著色等所缘、放纵的心来安住,这是不应当的;应当舍弃放逸的生活方式,成为不放逸的人。巴利
Pakatiyāti sarasato, imissā satipaṭṭhānasuttadesanāya pubbepīti adhippāyo. Anuyuttā viharanti satthu desanānusāratoti adhippāyo. Vissaṭṭhaattabhāvanāti aniccādivasena kismiñci yonisomanasikāre cittaṃ aniyojetvā rūpādiārammaṇe abhirativasena vissaṭṭhacittena bhavituṃ na vaṭṭati, pamādavihāraṃ pahāya appamattena bhavitabbanti adhippāyo.
“一乘道”这里,“ayana”这个词是“道路”的同义词。并不只是“ayana”这一个词,还有其他很多表示道路的同义词。为了把这些词引出来,先说了“所谓道……”等话,然后有人质疑:如果“ayana”是道路的同义词,那为什么又说“道”呢?针对这个质疑,就说了“因此……”等话。其中,“一道”就是唯一的一条道,因为再没有别的道能通向涅槃。那难道不是说,这里所说的“道”指的是念处吗?而除了念处之外,不是还有很多其他的道法吗?确实有,但那些在把握念处的时候也已经被把握了,因为它们跟念处不相分离。比如智、精进等在详细解说中就已经被包含进去了。而在总说中只提“念”,应该理解为是根据所化众生的根机意乐而这样说的。通过“不是歧路”这句话,显示这条道既不是有多条道的情况,也不是不趋向涅槃的情况。“以唯一”:是指没有伴侣。没有伴侣有两种:一种是没有同伴相伴,这叫“身远离”;一种是没有渴爱相伴,这叫“心远离”。所以说“以身远离、心远离”。世间最上等的人也被称为“一”,比如“直到别人把你归到一边”等说法,因此说“唯一”就是“最上”。如果从轮回中出离的意义——“出离”这个含义对其他具足亲依止的人也是共通的,那为什么只说世尊呢?为了回答这个,说了“虽然……”等话。这里“此中”的“kho”是限定的意思,所以意思是“就在此中”。这确实只是教说方式的不同,也就是所谓“道”或“行”。因此说“义理却是一”。巴利
Ekāyanoti ettha ayana-saddo maggapariyāyo. Na kevalamayanameva, atha kho aññepi bahū maggapariyāyāti paduddhāraṃ karonto ‘‘maggassa hī’’tiādi vatvā yadi maggapariyāyo ayana-saddo, kasmā puna maggoti vuttanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Tattha ekamaggoti eko eva maggo. Na hi nibbānagāmī maggo añño atthīti. Nanu satipaṭṭhānaṃ idha ‘‘maggo’’ti adhippetaṃ, tadaññe ca bahū maggadhammā atthīti? Saccaṃ atthi, te pana satipaṭṭhānaggahaṇeneva gahitā tadavinābhāvato. Tathā hi ñāṇavīriyādayo niddese gahitā. Uddese pana satiyā eva gahaṇaṃ veneyyajjhāsayavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na dvedhāpathabhūtoti iminā imassa maggassa anekamaggatābhāvaṃ viya anibbānagāmibhāvābhāvañca dasseti. Ekenāti asahāyena. Asahāyatā ca duvidhā attadutiyatābhāvena vā, yā ‘‘vūpakaṭṭhakāyatā’’ti vuccati, taṇhādutiyatābhāvena vā, yā ‘‘pavivittacittatā’’ti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘vūpakaṭṭhena pavivittacittenā’’ti. Seṭṭhopi loke ‘‘eko’’ti vuccati ‘‘yāva pare ekato karosī’’tiādīsūti āha ‘‘ekassāti seṭṭhassā’’ti. Yadi saṃsārato nissaraṇaṭṭho ayanaṭṭho aññesampi upanissayasampannānaṃ sādhāraṇo kathaṃ bhagavatoti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Imasmiṃ khoti ettha kho-saddo avadhāraṇe, tasmā imasmiṃ yevāti attho. Desanābhedoyeva heso, yadidaṃ maggoti vā ayanoti vā. Tenāha ‘‘attho paneko’’ti.
以多种入门方式展开修习,就是通过身随观等入口,其中又通过入出息等入口,依照修习方式而展开。“一乘道”的意思是通向唯一之处,也就是通向涅槃。因为涅槃没有第二个,又是最上的,所以称为“一”。正如经文所说:“真理只有一个,没有第二个”,又说:“比丘们,在有为法和无为法当中,离欲被称为最上。”灭尽本身就是终点,所以叫灭尽终点;见到了生的灭尽终点,就是“见生灭尽者”。“利益悲悯者”是指不分彼此,以利益而悲悯一切众生。“已度”就是已经度越、超脱了。“往昔”是指过去的诸佛,或者过去的时间。巴利
Nānāmukhabhāvanānayappavattoti kāyānupassanādimukhena tatthāpi ānāpānādimukhena bhāvanānayena pavatto. Ekāyananti ekagāminaṃ, nibbānagāminanti attho. Nibbānañhi adutiyattā seṭṭhattā ca ‘‘eka’’nti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘ekañhi saccaṃ na dutīyamatthī’’ti (su. ni. 890) ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) ca. Khayo eva antoti khayanto , jātiyā khayantaṃ diṭṭhavāti jātikhayantadassī. Avibhāgena sabbepi satte hitena anukampatīti hitānukampī. Atariṃsūti tariṃsu. Pubbeti purimakā buddhā, pubbe vā atītakāle.
所谓“taṃ”中的“tanti”,如果指他们的那句话,或者把它看作表示动作的词,都不成立。因为“表示数量的表示众生的”这个词,只作数词用,并不具备动词的功能。这里应该像“偶尔也会向上走”等经文那样,用“一度行道”这样的表达来安立文句。像这样把词义和整体含义搭配好之后——不论是按前一种理解还是后一种理解,都不成立,因为这里所说的道具有多次流转的性质。所以接下来才用“为什么”等来提出质疑。说“多次也行”,是在否定前一种理解;说“有多条行道”,则是在否定后一种理解。巴利
Tanti taṃ tesaṃ vacanaṃ, taṃ vā kiriyāvuttivācakattaṃ na yujjati. Na hi saṅkheyyappadhānatāya sattavācino eka-saddassa kiriyāvuttivācakatā atthi. ‘‘Sakimpi uddhaṃ gaccheyyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.72) viya ‘‘sakiṃ ayano’’ti iminā byañjanena bhavitabbaṃ. Evaṃ atthaṃ yojetvāti evaṃ padatthaṃ yojetvā. Ubhayathāpīti purimanayena pacchimanayena ca. Na yujjati idhādhippetamaggassa anekavāraṃ pavattisabbhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi. Anekavārampi ayatīti purimanayassa, anekañcassa ayanaṃ hotīti pacchimanayassa ca paṭikkhepo.
对于“在此句中”这一说法:是指在“诸比丘,这是一条独行道”这句话里,或者是在“这到底是前行道还是出世间道”这个有疑问的地方。“杂道”是指与世间道混杂在一起的出世间道。阿阇梨长老为了把清净等法的直接因也包含进来,所以说是“杂道”;而另一位长老则认为这里指的是间接因,所以说是“前行道”。巴利
Imasmiṃ padeti ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ bhikkhave maggo’’ti imasmiṃ vākye, imasmiṃ vā ‘‘pubbabhāgamaggo lokuttaramaggo’’ti saṃsayaṭṭhāne. Missakamaggoti lokiyena missako lokuttaramaggo. Visuddhiādīnaṃ nippariyāyahetuṃ saṅgaṇhanto ācariyatthero ‘‘missakamaggo’’ti āha, itaro pariyāyahetu idhādhippetoti ‘‘pubbabhāgamaggo’’ti.
听到声音之后,是指听到“尊者,到听法的时候了”这样的报时声之后。这样举起之后,是说他们不会想“这么甜的东西要丢到哪里去呢”就把它扔掉,而是像举起一捆甘蔗那样举着它走,不会到处乱晃。扰乱了,就是被搅乱、变得混乱的意思。独行道,说的是作为前行部分的念处之道。到这里,所要表达的含义已经成立,为了进一步彰显它,便从《无碍解道》中引出“八支圣道”等偈颂,安立在这里,用来显示那前行之道究竟是什么。巴利
Saddaṃ sutvāvāti ‘‘kālo, bhante, dhammassavanāyā’’ti kālārocanasaddaṃ sutvā. Evaṃ ukkhipitvāti. Evaṃ ‘‘madhuraṃ imaṃ kuhiṃ chaḍḍemā’’ti achaḍḍentā ucchubhāraṃ viya paggahetvā na vicaranti. Āluḷetīti viluḷito ākulo hotīti attho. Ekāyanamaggo vuccati pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānamaggoti. Ettāvatā idhādhippetatthe siddhe tasseva alaṅkāratthaṃ so pana yassa pubbabhāgamaggo, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘maggānaṭṭhaṅgiko’’tiādikā gāthāpi paṭisambhidāmaggatova ānetvā ṭhapitā.
“以趣向涅槃之义”是说:依靠它而到达、证得涅槃,所以叫“趣向涅槃”;那不颠倒的自性就是“义”。因此,“以趣向涅槃之义”的意思就是:它是证得涅槃的方法。“以应行道之义”是说:应当寻求;或者有另一种读法作“应行之义”,意思是应当亲近。关于“以贪等”:这里只举贪、嗔、痴,是因为经文说“贪是垢,嗔是垢,痴是垢”(《分别论》924)。而说“以贪欲、不正贪等”,则是为了把一切随烦恼都包括进来,所以把它们另外举出来。为了说明“为诸众生的清净”这句话所说之义的绝对必然性,说了“因为这样”等话。“清净”虽然是笼统的说法,但这里实际指的是心清净;为了表明这一点,才说了“然而依色垢等”等话。为了表明这不只是注释书里的说法,而是确实有经典依据的说法,才说了“因为这样”等话。巴利
Nibbānagamanaṭṭhenāti nibbānaṃ gacchati adhigacchati etenāti nibbānagamanaṃ, so eva aviparītasabhāvatāya attho, tena nibbānagamanaṭṭhena, nibbānādhigamupāyatāyāti attho. Magganīyaṭṭhenāti gavesitabbatāya, ‘‘gamanīyaṭṭhenā’’ti vā pāṭho, upagantabbattāti attho. Rāgādīhīti. Iminā rāgadosamohānaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ ‘‘rāgo malaṃ, doso malaṃ, moho mala’’nti (vibha. 924) vacanato. ‘‘Abhijjhāvisamalobhādīhī’’ti pana iminā sabbesampi upakkilesānaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ te visuṃ uddhaṭā. Sattānaṃ visuddhiyāti vuttassa atthassa ekantikataṃ dassento ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādimāha. Kāmaṃ ‘‘visuddhiyā’’ti sāmaññajotanā, cittavisuddhi eva panettha adhippetāti dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpamalavasena panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na kevalaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanameva, atha kho idamettha āhaccabhāsitanti dassento ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādimāha.
不过,这心清净真正成就的时候,因为能导向忧愁等不再生起,所以经文里才说“为了超越忧愁和悲泣”等等。其中,忧愁是指因为亲属遭遇灾祸等缘由,内心焦灼、内在烧灼、内心陷进去的那种状态。悲泣则是因为忧愁太重,以“我的儿子在哪里啊,独子在哪里啊”这样的方式哭喊哀诉。这里把将来不再生起称为“超越”,所以又说“为了断除”。为了用实例说明这种超越确实能导向灭除,才说了“因为这个人”等等。巴利
Sā panāyaṃ cittavisuddhi sijjhamānā yasmā sokādīnaṃ anuppādāya saṃvattati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāyā’’tiādi. Tattha socanaṃ ñātibyasanādinimittaṃ cetaso santāpo antonijjhānaṃ soko. Ñātibyasanādinimittameva sokādhikatāya ‘‘kahaṃ, ekaputtaka, kahaṃ, ekaputtakā’’ti paridevavasena lapanaṃ paridevo, āyatiṃ anuppajjanaṃ idha samatikkamoti āha ‘‘pahānāyā’’ti. Taṃ panassa samatikkamāvahataṃ nidassanavasena dassento ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādimāha.
这里,“先前的,你要净化它”:说的是在过去诸蕴中净化渴爱的染污。“后来的”:指之后的。“你的”:指你的。“不要有”:就是不要存在。“执取”:指贪等执取。以此说明在未来诸蕴中净化染污。“中间的”:指那两者之间。“如果你不执取”:就是如果你不执取。以此说明在现在诸蕴相续中执取的运作。以阿拉汉果的顶点来结束这首偈颂:“你将寂静地安住”——就是说,这样在过去、未来、现在三时中都净化了染污,由于一切灼热都已寂灭,你将成为寂静者而安住。因此说“这首偈颂”等等。巴利
Tattha yaṃ pubbe taṃ visodhehīti atītesu khandhesu taṇhāsaṃkilesavisodhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Pacchāti parato. Teti tuyhaṃ. Māhūti mā ahu. Kiñcananti rāgādikiñcanaṃ. Etena anāgatesu khandhesu saṃkilesavisodhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Majjheti tadubhayavemajjhe. No ce gahessasīti na upādiyissasi ce. Etena paccuppanne khandhapabandhe upādānappavatti vuttā. Upasanto carissasīti evaṃ addhattayagatasaṃkilesavisodhane sati nibbutasabbapariḷāhatāya upasanto hutvā viharissasīti arahattanikūṭena gāthaṃ niṭṭhapesi. Tenāha ‘‘imaṃ gātha’’ntiādi.
“儿子”指亲生的儿子,也包括其他任何儿子。“父亲”指生父。“亲属”指亲族。这里的意思是:儿子也好,父亲也好,亲属也好,对于被死亡主宰、被死亡征服的人来说,都不能成为免死的庇护,所以在亲属当中并没有真正的庇护。因为靠亲属的力量并不能从死亡那里得到保护,所以对巴塔佳拉说“你的两个儿子都已死去”等等,不要毫无意义地悲泣,而应当如实见法,这就是意旨。巴利
Puttāti orasā, aññepi vā ye keci. Pitāti janako. Bandhavāti ñātakā. Ayañhettha attho – puttā vā pitā vā bandhavā vā antakena maccunā adhipannassa abhibhūtassa maraṇato tāṇāya na honti, tasmā natthi ñātīsu tāṇatāti. Na hi ñātīnaṃ vasena maraṇato ārakkhā atthi, tasmā paṭācāre ‘‘ubho puttā kālakatā’’tiādinā (apa. therī 2.2.498) mā niratthakaṃ paridevi, dhammaṃyeva pana yāthāvato passāti adhippāyo.
她安立在入流果上:意思是,在随着次第而说的、由世尊亲口宣说的最胜说法结束时,她安立在具足千种理路庄严的入流果上。那么,她又是怎样通过念处之道而安立在入流果上的呢?所以说“然而因为……”等。确实,如果没有四谛业处的教导,声闻弟子是不可能证得圣道的。至于“听了这首偈颂之后”这句话,是因为她最先听到的是为了排遣忧愁而说的偈颂,所以才这样说。对其余偈颂也是同样的道理。“因此”:因为随观色等为无常等也是念处修习,所以如此。“他们”:指大臣珊蒂与巴塔佳拉。“修习”:指慧的修习,这里说的正是这个巴利
Sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitāti yathānulomaṃ pavattitāya sāmukkaṃsikāya dhammadesanāya pariyosāne sahassanayapaṭimaṇḍite sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ satipaṭṭhānamaggavasena sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsīti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Na hi catusaccakammaṭṭhānakathāya vinā sāvakānaṃ ariyamaggādhigamo atthi. ‘‘Imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā’’ti pana idaṃ sokavinodanavasena pavattitāya gāthāya paṭhamaṃ sutattā vuttaṃ. Esa nayo itaragāthāyapi. Bhāvanāti paññābhāvanā. Sā hi idhādhippetā. Tasmāti yasmā rūpādīnaṃ aniccādito anupassanāpi satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā, tasmā. Tepīti santatimahāmattapaṭācārā.
他依次派出了五百个盗贼,也就是五个各有百名盗贼跟随的盗贼头目。他们进入森林寻找长老,逐渐来到长老附近。因此说“他们过去后,围绕长老坐下”。应当这样理解前后文的关联:长老观察自己的戒,依靠极为清净的戒而生起广大的欢喜和喜悦,从而镇伏了因大腿骨碎裂等所产生的苦受。所谓“足”,就是指脚。“我将告知”,意思是“我将示意”。“我厌恶”,意思是“我嫌恶”。“我羞愧”,意思是“我羞愧”。“观照”,意思是“正观”。巴利
Pañcasate coreti satasatacoraparivāre pañca core paṭipāṭiyā pesesi. Te araññaṃ pavisitvā theraṃ pariyesantā anukkamena therassa samīpe samāgacchiṃsu. Tenāha ‘‘te gantvā theraṃ parivāretvā nisīdiṃsū’’ti. Vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā pītipāmojjaṃ uppajjīti sambandho. Therassa hi sīlaṃ paccavekkhato suparisuddhaṃ sīlaṃ nissāya uḷāraṃ pītipāmojjaṃ uppajjamānaṃ ūruṭṭhibhedajanitaṃ dukkhavedanaṃ vikkhambhesi. Pādānīti pāde. Saññapessāmīti saññattiṃ karissāmi. Aḍḍiyāmīti jigucchāmi. Harāyāmīti lajjāmi. Vipassisanti sammasiṃ.
“打瞌睡的人”是指陷入昏沉、进入睡眠的人。“具足头陀行的人”是指圆满具足头陀行的人。“放逸”是就打瞌睡而说的。“心被遮障的人”是指增上心被障碍了。“在骨笼中”是指在身体里。因为身体是由筋腱连接、骨骸聚集而成的,所以这里称作“骨笼”。巴利
Pacalāyantānanti pacalāyanaṃ niddaṃ upagatānaṃ. Vatasampannoti dhutacaraṇasampanno. Pamādanti pacalāyanaṃ sandhāyāha. Oruddhamānasoti uparuddhaadhicitto. Pañjarasminti sarīre. Sarīrañhi nhārusambandhaaṭṭhisaṅghātatāya idha ‘‘pañjara’’nti vuttaṃ.
他因为举着黄色旗帜游行,又擅长角斗,所以叫黄角斗士。在三王统里,指的是般度、朱罗、瞿罗这三个王国。角斗士们在锡兰岛得到恭敬供养,于是来到铜掌岛。他把“不应执取色等为‘我的’”这一教义——也就是《非汝等品》(相应部3.33-34)所阐明的道理——当作钩子,用来调伏自己那如狂象般的心。他跪着经行,因为“坐着容易打瞌睡”。他宣说之后,是以表明自己精进修行没有白费的方式,激励同修梵行者,记说了究竟智。那段话是谁说的呢?回答说:“是诸佛中最胜者、一切世间最上者所说的。”
“非汝等”等话,是在显示它发生的方式。为了表明这正是使我诸行彻底寂灭的原因,他引出“诸行确实无常”这首偈颂,借此说明:如今我已不再有诸行刹那坏灭这种病,所以无病而般涅槃。巴利
Pītavaṇṇāya paṭākāya pariharaṇato mallayuddhacittakatāya ca pītamallo. Tīsu rajjesūti paṇḍucoḷagoḷarajjesu. Mallā sīhaḷadīpe sakkārasammānaṃ labhantīti tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ āgamma. Taṃyeva aṅkusaṃ katvāti ‘‘rūpādayo ‘mamā’ti na gahetabbā’’ti na tumhākavaggena (saṃ. ni. 3.33-34) pakāsitamatthaṃ attano cittamattahatthino aṅkusaṃ katvā. Jaṇṇukehi caṅkamati ‘‘nisinne niddāya avasaro hotī’’ti. Byākaritvāti attano vīriyārambhassa saphalatāpavedanamukhena sabrahmacārīnaṃ ussāhaṃ janento aññaṃ byākaritvā. Bhāsitanti vacanaṃ. Kassa pana tanti āha ‘‘buddhaseṭṭhassa,sabbalokaggavādino’’ti. Na tumhākantiādi tassa pavattiākāradassanaṃ. Tayidaṃ me saṅkhārānaṃ accantavūpasamakāraṇanti dassento ‘‘aniccā vatā’’ti gāthaṃ āhari. Tena idānāhaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇe khaṇe bhaṅgasaṅkhātassa rogassa abhāvena arogo parinibbutoti dasseti.
“他的”是指帝释天神的。“往生”是指投生到天界。他仍然保持原来的样子,因为就是以帝释天神的身份往生的。“苏梵天神”是他的名字。他看到天女们投生到地狱,从那时起内心持续不断地生起恐惧,因此说了“此心常恐怖……”等话。其中,“常恐怖”是指一直受惊吓、害怕。“常悚惧”是指一直感到惊惶不安。“恐怖”也有“悚惧”的意思。“常悚惧”还指因为恐惧,连身体也跟着颤抖。“于未生”是指未来的事。“于诸难”是指各种苦,这里用的是处格来表示原因,意思是成为未来之苦生起的因缘。“于已起”是指已经生起的苦难,应当这样连接理解:那时,是说自己的眷属已经产生了痛苦的因缘——这就是他的用意。巴利
Assāti sakkassa. Upapattīti devūpapatti. Punapākatikāva ahosi sakkabhāveneva upapannattā. Subrahmāti evaṃ nāmo. Accharānaṃ nirayūpapattiṃ disvā tato pabhuti satataṃ pavattamānaṃ attano cittutrāsaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘niccaṃ utrastamidaṃ citta’’ntiādi. Tattha utrastanti santastaṃ bhītaṃ. Ubbigganti saṃviggaṃ. Utrastanti vā saṃviggaṃ. Ubbigganti bhayavasena saha kāyena sañcalitaṃ. Anuppannesūti anāgatesu. Kicchesūti dukkhesu. Nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ, bhāvīdukkhapavattinimittanti attho. Uppatitesūti uppannesu kicchesūti yojanā, tadā attano parivārassa uppannadukkhanimittanti adhippāyo.
“觉”是从觉悟、从圣道来说的,意思就是这样。“异此”这个词是观待前词而说的从格,所以意思是“除了觉悟之外”。其余各词也是同样的道理。“依苦行”是从苦行这一行为来说的。以此显示作为证得圣道之方法的头陀支等严格修行。“依根律仪”是从防护以意为第六的诸根来说的。以此,以念防护为首,显示一切防护戒;或者按特相理趣,显示一切四遍清净戒。“依一切舍离”是从舍弃一切所依、断除一切烦恼来说的。因为烦恼被舍离时,业轮转与异熟轮转也就确实被舍离了。“安稳”:平安、无灾患。巴利
Bojjhāti bodhito, ariyamaggatoti attho. Aññatrāti ca padaṃ apekkhitvā nissakkavacanaṃ, tasmā bodhiṃ ṭhapetvāti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tapasāti tapokammato. Tena maggādhigamassa upāyabhūtaṃ dhutaṅgasevanādisallekhapaṭipadaṃ dasseti. Indriyasaṃvarāti manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ saṃvaraṇato. Etena satisaṃvarasīsena sabbampi saṃvarasīlaṃ, lakkhaṇahāranayena vā sabbampi catupārisuddhisīlaṃ dasseti. Sabbanissaggāti sabbupadhinissajjanato sabbakilesappahānato. Kilesesu hi nissaṭṭhesu kammavaṭṭaṃ vipākavaṭṭañca nissaṭṭhameva hotīti. Sotthinti khemaṃ anupaddavataṃ.
ñāyo 之所以被称为 ñāyo,是因为它以决定性的方式趋向涅槃,或者人们通过它来证知涅槃;这里说的是“ñāyo 就是八支圣道”。所谓远离渴爱之林,就是远离被称为渴爱的丛林。渴爱确实把蕴和蕴、业和果、或者众生和苦连接、缠缚在一起,所以被称为丛林。这里没有这种丛林,或者证得这个境界的人不再有丛林,因此叫涅槃,也就是无为界。不依靠他人的条件而亲自证得,就是作证,所以说“以亲自证验”。巴利
Ñāyati nicchayena kamati nibbānaṃ, taṃ vā ñāyati paṭivijjhīyati etenāti ñāyo, ariyamaggoti āha ‘‘ñāyo vuccati ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti . Taṇhāvānavirahitattāti taṇhāsaṅkhātavānavivittattā. Taṇhā hi khandhehi khandhaṃ, kammunā vā phalaṃ, sattehi vā dukkhaṃ vinati saṃsibbatīti vānanti vuccati. Tayidaṃ natthi ettha vānaṃ, na vā etasmiṃ adhigate puggalassa vānanti nibbānaṃ, asaṅkhatā dhātu. Parapaccayena vinā paccakkhakaraṇaṃ sacchikiriyāti āha ‘‘attapaccakkhatāyā’’ti.
难道说,因为“清净”指的就是心清净,所以单提“清净”这个词,就已经把超越愁叹等内容都包含进去了吗?那为什么还要再提这些呢?针对这个追问,才说了“于此,虽……”等话。“于教法义理善巧者”:指对四圣谛、缘起等法义很精通的人。“令知各各义”:对于各种应当度化的众生,根据略说、广说等方式,按照他们各自应当被度化的方式,世尊以自己说法时的善巧,使他们各自了知相应的法义。“令各各明了显示”:指不落入单纯的推理,而是使那些意义清楚明白地显示出来。因为正自觉者并不是只用推理让人知道的说法者。“成就”:指生起、存在的意思。因为还没有超越愁叹的人,根本不会有心清净,只有通过超越愁叹才能成就心清净,所以说:“由超越愁叹而成就。”而凡夫被那些引生忧的苦法所撞击时,愁等就会压倒他;如果完全遍知了那些苦法,愁等就不会生起,因此说:“超越愁叹就是由于忧苦的息灭。”这里的“ñāyassa”(圣道)指最上道(阿拉汉道)和第三道。因为通过证得这两种道,就能渐次息灭忧苦。作证现观与其他现观是同时存在的,它们不可分离,所以像是作证现观的原因那样说:“圣道的证得就是涅槃的作证。”或者指以果智亲自体证而言:“涅槃的作证”。这也应该看作是与格。巴利
Nanu ‘‘visuddhiyā’’ti cittavisuddhiyā adhippetattā visuddhiggahaṇenevettha sokasamatikkamādayopi gahitā eva honti, te puna kasmā gahitāti anuyogaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sāsanayuttikovideti saccapaṭiccasamuppādādilakkhaṇāyaṃ dhammanītiyaṃ cheke. Taṃ taṃ atthaṃ ñāpetīti ye ye bodhaneyyapuggalā saṅkhepavitthārādivasena yathā yathā bodhetabbā, attano desanāvilāsena bhagavā te te tathā tathā bodhento taṃ tamatthaṃ ñāpeti. Taṃ taṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassentoti atthāpattiṃ agaṇento taṃ taṃ atthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassento. Na hi sammāsambuddhā atthāpattiñāpakādisādhanīyavacanāti. Saṃvattatīti jāyati, hotīti attho. Yasmā anatikkantasokaparidevassa na kadāci cittavisuddhi atthi sokaparidevasamatikkamamukheneva cittavisuddhiyā ijjhanato, tasmā āha ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamena hotī’’ti. Yasmā pana domanassapaccayehi dukkhadhammehi puṭṭhaṃ puthujjanaṃ sokādayo abhibhavanti, pariññātesu ca tesu te na honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamo dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamenā’’ti. Ñāyassāti aggamaggassa tatiyamaggassa ca. Tadadhigamena hi yathākkamaṃ dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamo. Sacchikiriyābhisamayasahabhāvīpi itarābhisamayo tadavinābhāvato sacchikiriyābhisamayahetuko viya vutto ‘‘ñāyassādhigamo nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyā’’ti. Phalañāṇena vā paccakkhakaraṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyā’’ti. Sampadānavacanañcetaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“称扬言说”就是赞美的话。这并不只在这里出现,导师在其他地方也同样说过;为了说明这一点,才说了“正如……”等话。其中,“初善”是指开头就是善的,或者它的开头是善的,所以叫初善。剩下两个词也是同样的道理。因为义理圆满,所以叫“有义”;因为文句圆满,所以叫“有文句”。因为戒等五种法蕴完全具足,没有什么需要再增添的,所以叫“完全圆满”;因为没有烦恼杂染,没有什么需要去除的,所以叫“清净”。因为这是最殊胜的行持,所以我要为你们宣说教法梵行与道梵行。这里就是简要概括,详细内容则应按照《清净道论》(visuddhi. 1.147)所说的方法来了知。“圣者种姓”是指圣者、佛陀等的种姓、传承。“第一”是指应知为“第一”,因为比一切种姓都殊胜。“长夜”是指应知为“长久”。“种姓”是指应知为“佛陀等的种姓”。“旧”是指过去的,并非新近;“未混杂”是指没有散乱,未曾被剔除;“未曾混杂”是指过去从未被圣者们认为“这些有什么用”而剔除。“现在不被剔除”是指现在也不被他们剔除。“未来不被剔除”是指未来也不被他们剔除。“不被呵责……不被智者”是指世间有智慧的沙门、婆罗门,他们不反对、不谴责、不呵责,这就是意思。“以清净等句”是指以清净等说明。“句”是指句子,或者指以清净等义等分类不同的法门。巴利
Vaṇṇabhaṇananti pasaṃsāvacanaṃ. Tayidaṃ na idheva, atha kho aññatthāpi satthā akāsiyevāti dassento ‘‘yatheva hī’’tiādimāha. Tatthaādimhi kalyāṇaṃ, ādi vā kalyāṇaṃ etassāti ādikalyāṇaṃ. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhapāripūrito upanetabbassa abhāvā ca kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ. Nirupakkilesato apanetabbassa abhāvā ca parisuddhaṃ. Seṭṭhacariyabhāvato sāsana brahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca vo pakāsessāmīti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.147) vuttanayena veditabbo. Ariyavaṃsāti ariyānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ vaṃsā paveṇiyo. Aggaññāti ‘‘aggā’’ti jānitabbā sabbavaṃsehi seṭṭhabhāvato. Rattaññāti ‘‘cirarattā’’ti jānitabbā. Vaṃsaññāti ‘‘buddhādīnaṃ vaṃsā’’ti jānitabbā. Porāṇāti purātanā anadhunātanattā. Asaṃkiṇṇāti avikiṇṇā anapanītā. Asaṃkiṇṇapubbāti ‘‘kiṃ imehī’’ti ariyehi na apanītapubbā. Na saṃkīyantīti idānipi tehi na apanīyanti. Na saṃkīyissantīti anāgatepi tehi na apanīyissanti. Appaṭikuṭṭhā…pe… viññūhīti ye loke viññū samaṇabrāhmaṇā, tehi apaccakkhatā aninditā, agarahitāti attho. Visuddhiyātiādīhīti visuddhiādidīpanehi. Padehīti vākyehi, visuddhiatthatādibhedabhinnehi vā dhammakoṭṭhāsehi.
“灾祸”指无益之事。“清净”指净化,也就是断除杂染。让文句顺口易诵叫“领受”;全面学习掌握叫“熟悉”;把义理记在心里叫“持”;反复念诵叫“读诵”。“干陀罗人”指出生在干陀罗地区的人。“能”指有能力、做得到。“非导出之道”就是邪道,或者也指决定邪性和不决定邪性的道。“金钱”也可以指假金;“琉璃”也可以指玻璃珠;“珍珠”也可以指竹生珠;“珊瑚”也可以指植物嫩枝,所以才用“红金色”等词来加以区分。巴利
Upaddaveti anatthe. Visuddhinti visujjhanaṃ saṃkilesappahānaṃ. Vācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggaho. Pariyāpuṇanaṃ paricayo. Atthassa hadaye ṭhapanaṃ dhāraṇaṃ. Parivattanaṃ vācanaṃ. Gandhārakoti gandhāradese uppanno. Pahontīti sakkonti aniyyānamaggāti micchāmaggā, micchattaniyatāniyatamaggāpi vā. Suvaṇṇanti kūṭasuvaṇṇampi vuccati. Paṇīti kācamaṇipi. Muttāti veḷujāpi. Pavāḷanti pallavopi vuccatīti rattajambunadādipadehi te visesitā.
“不从那以下”这句话,是因为这里所说的身等并没有受等的自性,而且那离于身、受、心的三地法被分别执取为颠倒事的不同项目,所以在说到较下的执取时,是针对那些颠倒事并不成立而说的;至于第五种颠倒事并不存在,所以说“不向上”。在这里,是依照所缘的差别来区分念处。“三念处”是为了展示“念处”这个词的义理纲目,并不是在解释这里经文中所说的“念处”一词的含义。因为在“于……等”中,“等”字涵盖了像“触集起则受集起,名色集起则心集起,作意集起则法集起”这样一些经文语句,它们是在说明被称为念处的念的境界。同样,在《无碍解道》等中,“等”字也应理解为涵盖其余经文。“念的安立处”是指念应当安住的地方。有人在修布施等时,把色等和遍等当作念的住处,为了遮止这一点,所以说“殊胜的住处”。这里的“pa”字,就像“殊胜诸法”等例子中那样,是表示殊胜之义,这就是其意趣。巴利
Na tato heṭṭhāti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.5.367; dī. ni. ṭī. 2.373) idhādhippetakāyādīnaṃ vedanādisabhāvattābhāvā, kāyavedanācittavimuttassa tebhūmakadhammassa visuṃ vipallāsavatthantarabhāvena gahitattā ca heṭṭhāgahaṇesu vipallāsavatthūnaṃ aniṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, pañcamassa pana vipallāsavatthuno abhāvā ‘‘na uddha’’nti āha. Ārammaṇavibhāgena hettha satipaṭṭhānavibhāgoti. Tayo satipaṭṭhānāti satipaṭṭhānasaddassa atthuddhāradassanaṃ, na idha pāḷiyaṃ vuttassa satipaṭṭhānasaddassa atthadassananti. Ādīsu hi satigocaroti ettha ādi-saddena ‘‘phassasamudayā vedanānaṃ samudayo, nāmarūpasamudayā cittassa samudayo, manasikārasamudayā dhammānaṃ samudayo’’ti satipaṭṭhānāti vuttānaṃ satigocarānaṃ pakāsake suttapadese saṅgaṇhāti. Evaṃ paṭisambhidāpāḷiyampi (paṭi. ma. 3.34) avasesapāḷippadesadassanattho ādi-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Satiyā paṭṭhānanti satiyā patiṭṭhātabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Dānādīni satiyā karontassa rūpādīni kasiṇādīni ca satiyā ṭhānaṃ hontīti taṃnivāraṇatthamāha ‘‘padhānaṃ ṭhāna’’nti. Pa-saddo hi idha ‘‘paṇītā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 14 tikamātikā) viya padhānatthadīpakoti adhippāyo.
“圣者”是指一切众生中最殊胜的正自觉者。“于此”是指在《六处分别经》中。这是用经的一部分来指代整部经,因为在那部经里——巴利
Ariyoti ariyaṃ sabbasattaseṭṭhaṃ sammāsambuddhamāha. Etthāti etasmiṃ saḷāyatanavibhaṅgasutte (ma. ni. 3.311). Suttekadesena hi suttaṃ dasseti. Tattha hi –
“有三念处,是圣者……中略……值得证知。”这句话确实是说过的,但它是针对什么而说的呢?比丘们,在这里,导师怀着悲悯、希望弟子得利益,出于悲悯而为弟子说法:“这是为了你们的利益,这是为了你们的快乐。”他的弟子们却不认真听,不侧耳倾听,不把心转向法,反而背离导师的教导而行。比丘们,在这种情况下,如来既不感到不满,也不体验不满,而是安住在无染污中,保持正念和正知。比丘们,这就是第一念处,是圣者……中略……值得证知。巴利
‘‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo…pe… marahatīti iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ, kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ. Idha, bhikkhave, satthā sāvakānaṃ dhammaṃ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṃ upādāya ‘‘idaṃ vo hitāya idaṃ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṃ odahanti, na aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthusāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, yadariyo…pe… arahati.
再者,比丘们,导师……中略……“这是为了你们的快乐。”他的有些弟子不肯倾听……中略……照旧行事。有些弟子则倾听……中略……并且不背离导师的教导而行。比丘们,面对这种情况,如来既不不满,也不感受到不满;也不满意,也不感受到满意。他舍弃了不满与满意这两者,安住在舍心之中,具念、正知。比丘们,这称为第二念处……中略……值得。巴利
Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, satthā…pe… idaṃ vo sukhāyāti. Tassa ekacce sāvakā na sussūsanti…pe… vattanti. Ekacce sāvakā sussūsanti…pe… na ca vokkamma satthusāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, na ceva attamano hoti, na ca attamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Anattamanatañca attamanatañca tadubhayaṃ abhinivajjetvā upekkhato viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, dutiyaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ…pe… arahati.
再者……中略……“是为了让你们快乐”。他的弟子们听从……中略……依教奉行。比丘们,对此,如来既满意,也感受满足,并且安住在不攀缘、具念、正知之中。比丘们,这称为第三念处……中略……成为阿拉汉。巴利
Puna caparaṃ…pe… sukhāyāti. Tassa sāvakā sussūsanti…pe… vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato attamano ceva hoti, attamanatañca paṭisaṃvedeti, anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno . Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, tatiyaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ…pe… arahatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.311) –
这样,由于不被违逆与随顺所沾染,由于念恒常现前,由于超越了这两者,所以称为念处。确实,只有诸佛才恒常现前念,因为这是不共法,不是独觉佛等人所能有的。pa这个字表示开始,而开始就是转起,因此说应令转起的意思。以念为工具、应予安立的安立基础,就是念处。因为ana这个字按多义用法,也可以表示业的意思。巴利
Evaṃ paṭighānunayehi anavassutatā, niccaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitāya tadubhayavītivattatā ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttā. Buddhānaṃyeva hi niccaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitā hoti āveṇikadhammabhāvato, na paccekabuddhādīnaṃ. Pa-saddo ārambhaṃ joteti, ārambho ca pavattīti katvā āha ‘‘pavattayitabbatoti attho’’ti. Satiyā karaṇabhūtāya paṭṭhānaṃ paṭṭhapetabbaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Ana-saddo hi bahulavacanena kammatthopi hotīti.
这样,也能得到它作为施动者的意义,所以说“安住,所以是处”。在这里,pa这个字显示的是殊胜意义上的跃入,所以说“进入之后、跃入之后而运转,这就是意思”。接着,为了解释状态义中的念字和处字,说了“或者说”等话。由此可知,在前面那种解释方案里,念字和处字都是施动者的意思。以忆持义来说,就是回忆很久以前所做、很久以前所说的意义。这里所说的“念本身就是念处”,这个“此”指的就是在这段经文里所要表达的意思。巴利
Tathāssa kattuatthopi labbhatīti ‘‘patiṭṭhātīti paṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha pa-saddo bhūsatthavisiṭṭhaṃ pakkhandhanaṃ dīpetīti ‘‘okkantitvā pakkhanditvā pavattatīti attho’’ti āha. Puna bhāvatthaṃ sati-saddaṃ paṭṭhāna-saddañca vaṇṇento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tena purimavikappe sati-saddo paṭṭhāna-saddo ca katthuatthoti viññāyati. Saraṇaṭṭhenāti cirakatassa cirabhāsitassa ca anussaraṇaṭṭhena. Idanti yaṃ ‘‘satiyeva satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ, idaṃ idha imasmiṃ suttapadese adhippetaṃ.
如果这样说:如果念本身就是念处,那么念是一个法,既然如此,为什么说“念处”是复数?所以回答说“因为念众多”等等。如果这些念是多个,那为什么又说“道”是单数?应当这样连接理解。以道的意义来说,就是以导出的意义。因为道法具有导出性,正是凭借这种导出性而归于一体,最终必定趣向涅槃,并且被希求解脱的人为了这个目标而寻求,所以引用了前面已经说过的“此亦被说”。其中“这些四念”,就是按身随观等分为四种的这些念。在“后分”,即在圣道的刹那。“成就作用”,是指在前期于身体等所缘上以摧毁净想等种种方式分别生起之后,在圣道刹那以一次断除那里四种颠倒的作用而成就断除作用,以作所缘的方式趣向涅槃。这里正是因为成就四种作用,才说为复数。既然如此,因为依道的意义而归于一体,所以说“道”是单数;因为所缘不同而有四种,所以说“四种”。由于应当这样说,所以念是存在的。以语句连贯来说,“一向道”等教导是有连贯的,并非没有连贯,这是意趣。为了以譬喻说明已说的意义,引用“摧伏魔军”的经文句,以“如”等语来配合譬喻。因此等语是总结。巴利
Yadi evanti yadi sati eva satipaṭṭhānaṃ, sati nāma eko dhammo, evaṃ sante kasmā ‘‘satipaṭṭhānā’’ti bahuvacananti āha ‘‘satibahuttā’’tiādi. Yadi bahukā etā satiyo, atha kasmā ‘‘maggo’’ti ekavacananti yojanā. Maggaṭṭhenāti niyyānaṭṭhena. Niyyāniko hi maggadhammo, teneva niyyānikabhāvena ekattupagato ekantato nibbānaṃ gacchati, atthikehi ca tadatthaṃ maggīyatīti attanāva pubbe vuttaṃ paccāharati ‘‘vuttañceta’’nti. Tattha catassopi cetāti kāyānupassanādivasena catubbidhāpi ca etā satiyo. Aparabhāgeti ariyamaggakkhaṇe. Kiccaṃ sādhayamānāti pubbabhāge kāyādīsu ārammaṇesu subhasaññādividhamanena visuṃ visuṃ pavattitvā maggakkhaṇe sakiṃyeva tattha catubbidhassapi vipallāsassa samucchedavasena pahānakiccaṃ sādhayamānā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena nibbānaṃ gacchanti. Catubbidhakiccasādhaneneva hettha bahuvacananiddeso. Evañca satīti maggaṭṭhena ekattaṃ upādāya ‘‘maggo’’ti ekavacanena ārammaṇabhedena catubbidhataṃ upādāya ‘‘cattāro’’ti ca vattabbatāya sativijjamānattā. Vacanānusandhinā ‘‘ekāyano aya’’ntiādikā desanā sānusandhikāva, na ananusandhikāti adhippāyo. Vuttamevatthaṃ nidassanena paṭipādetuṃ ‘‘mārasenappamaddana’’nti suttapadaṃ (saṃ. ni. 5.224) ānetvā ‘‘yathā’’tiādinā nidassanaṃ saṃsandeti. Tasmātiādi nigamanaṃ.
尤其是,身体和受是产生乐味的直接原因,为了断除对它们的渴爱,就要在这些渴爱所依之处——也就是身体和受上——对粗显与微细的乐受观察并显示其不净和苦的性质。对于钝根和利根、被渴爱驱使的人来说,这些修法容易修成,所以这些修法被称为他们的“清净道”。同样地,心与法是“常”和“我”这两种执著所依的根本原因,为了断除对它们的邪见,就要在这些心与法上观察并显示无常和无我的性质。对于那些随着贪染、想与触、五盖等不同情况而分为粗显和细密两类的心与法,为了断除对它们的邪见,这些观法对钝根和利根、被邪见驱使的人来说也容易修成,所以这些修法被称为他们的“清净道”。在这里应当看到:正如心与法也能成为渴爱的所依,身体和受也能成为邪见的所依;虽然这四者都能作为渴爱和邪见的所依,但为了指出哪一者对哪一者是更强的直接条件,才作了这种特别的区分。论中说:一位利根、以止为乘的行者,取粗显的所缘,不滞留在那里,证入禅那,出定之后再取受来观察。又说“因为不滞留在粗显的所缘上”。而对于以观为乘的行者,心会倾向于微细的心与法,所以说心随观和法随观是钝根和利根的观乘行者的清净道。巴利
Visesato kāyo ca vedanā ca assādassakāraṇanti tappahānatthaṃ tesu taṇhāvatthūsu oḷārikasukhumesu asubhadukkhabhāvadassanāni mandatikkhapaññehi taṇhācaritehi sukarānīti tāni tesaṃ ‘‘visuddhimaggo’’ti vuttāni tathā ‘‘niccaṃ attā’’ti abhinivesavatthutāya diṭṭhiyā visesakāraṇesu cittadhammesu aniccānattatādassanāni sarāgādivasena saññāphassādivasena nīvaraṇādivasena ca nātippabhedaatippabhedagatesu tesu tappahānatthaṃ mandatikkhapaññānaṃ diṭṭhicaritānaṃ sukarānīti tesaṃ tāni ‘‘visuddhimaggo’’ti vuttāni. Ettha ca yathā cittadhammānampi taṇhāya vatthubhāvo sambhavati, tathā kāyavedanānampi diṭṭhiyāti satipi nesaṃ catunnampi taṇhādiṭṭhiyā vatthubhāve yo yassa sātisayapaccayo, taṃdassanatthaṃ visesaggahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tikkhapaññasamathayāniko oḷārikārammaṇaṃ pariggaṇhanto tattha aṭṭhatvā jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya vedanaṃ pariggaṇhātīti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Oḷārikārammaṇe asaṇṭhahanato’’ti. Vipassanāyānikassa pana sukhume citte dhammesu ca cittaṃ pakkhandatīti cittadhammānupassanānaṃ mandatikkhapaññāvipassanāyānikānaṃ visuddhimaggatā vuttā.
在“为他们于彼处”这句中,“彼处”一词是与“为了断除”连接理解的。后面“为他们于彼处”中的“彼处”,也是同样的理解方式。五种欲乐特别能在身体上找到,所以身体特别成为欲瀑流的所依;因为执取诸有中的乐相而对有生起乐味,所以受是有瀑流的所依;因为执取相续、密集之相,心中特别会生起对“我”的执著,所以心是见瀑流的所依;诸法难以析解,其纯粹法性的状态也不容易通达,因此产生痴迷,所以法是无明瀑流的所依。因此,为了断除这四种瀑流,才宣说了这四者。巴利
Tesaṃ tatthāti ettha tattha-saddassa ‘‘pahānattha’’nti etena yojanā. Parato tesaṃ tatthāti etthāpi esevanayo. Pañca kāmaguṇā savisesā kāye labbhantīti visesena kāyo kāmoghassa vatthu, bhavesu sukhaggahaṇavasena bhavassādo hoti bhavoghassa vedanā vatthu, santatighanagahaṇavasena visesato citte attābhiniveso hotīti diṭṭhoghassa cittaṃ vatthu, dhammesu vinibbhogassa dukkarattā dhammānaṃ dhammamattatāya duppaṭivijjhattā sammoho hotīti avijjoghassa dhammā vatthu, tasmā tesaṃ pahānatthaṃ cattārova vuttā.
从身体成为欲瀑流所依的那一刻起,它也就成了贪欲身系的所依;在苦受中,嗔恚随眠不断潜伏增长,因此具有苦苦、变易苦、行苦性质的受,特别成为嗔恚身系的所依;在心中,由于执取恒常,便产生“依戒得清净”之类的执著,所以心是戒禁取的所依;不能以名色来界定而如实观见真实的人,会生起被称为有见、无见的“此是真实”的执著,因此那些法是该执著的所依;由于耽著乐受,便生起不顾他世、“无布施”之类的执著,所以受是见取的所依;由于执取相续与密集之相,在贪染等心中生起痴迷,因此心是痴趣的所依;由于不能了知法的自性而生起怖畏,所以法是怖畏趣的所依。至于这里没有说到的那些,也应按照上述方式配属其所依关系。就像在瀑流中所说的道理一样,在轭与漏中也同样适用,因为它们在意义上并无差别。同样,按照第一个瀑流以及第三、第四身系的配属方式,可以配属身、心、法作为其余取所依的关系;按照欲瀑流与嗔恚身系的配属方式,也可以配属身与受作为贪趣与嗔趣的所依。巴利
Yadaggena ca kāyo kāmoghassa vatthu, tadaggena abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu, dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetīti dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhūtā vedanā visesena byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu, citte niccaggahaṇavasena sassatassa attano sīlena suddhītiādi parāmasanaṃ hotīti sīlabbataparāmāsassa cittaṃ vatthu, nāmarūpaparicchedena bhūtaṃ bhūtato apassantassa bhavavibhavadiṭṭhisaṅkhāto idaṃsaccābhiniveso hotīti tassa dhammā vatthu, sukhavedanāssādavasena paralokanirapekkho ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādikaṃ parāmāsaṃ uppādetīti diṭṭhupādānassa vedanā vatthu santatighanagahaṇavasena sarāgādicitte sammoho hotīti mohāgatiyā cittaṃ vatthu, dhammasabhāvānavabodhena bhayaṃ hotīti bhayāgatiyā dhammā vatthu. Ye panettha avuttā, tesaṃ vuttanayena vatthubhāvo yojetabbo. Tathā hi oghesu vuttanayā eva yogāsavesupi yojanā atthato abhinnattā. Tathā paṭhamoghatatiyacatutthaganthayojanāya vuttanayā eva kāyacittadhammānaṃ itarūpādānavatthutā yojanā, tathā kāmoghabyāpādakāyaganthayojanāya vuttanayā eva kāyavedanānaṃ chandadosāgati vatthutā yojanā vā.
因为经中说“由食的生起而有身的生起,由触的生起而有受的生起,以行为缘而有识,以识为缘而有名色”,所以,作为身等生起原因的段食、触食、思食、识食,通过遍知身等而被遍知。因此说“为了遍知四种食”。这是依据《指导论》的理趣,也就是经藏注释的方法。巴利
‘‘Āhārasamudayā kāyasamudayo, phassasamudayā vedanāsamudayo, (saṃ. ni. 5.408) saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti (ma. ni. 3.126; udā. 1; vibha. 225) vacanato kāyādīnaṃ samudayabhūtā kabaḷīkārāhāraphassamanosañcetanāviññāṇāhārā kāyādiparijānanena pariññātā hontīti āha ‘‘catubbidhāhārapariññattha’’nti pakaraṇanayoti nettipakaraṇavasena suttantasaṃvaṇṇanānayo.
所谓“依归向”,是指依靠对身等以及善等诸法的持续忆念。因为具有这种忆念而趣向涅槃,所以称为“念”。在这个含义下,“一性”即唯一自性的涅槃中,汇集、会合,就叫做“归向一味”。正是为了显示这一意义,才说了“正如……”等。或者,成为证入同一涅槃之因的同一性,就是念处的一体性,在其中汇集、达到同分的状态,这也叫“归向一味”。而为了显示这种作为证入同一涅槃之因的同一性,才说了“正如……”等等。应当知道,在第一种解释中,“归向”与“一味汇集”这些词是分开说的;而在第二种解释里,它们和“念”一起,都是作为念处一体性的原因来说的。或者,如果把“归向”理解为“趣向”的意思,那么“趣向”本身就是“汇集”;如果不在“汇集”中解释“念”的词义,那么“念”就只是“持”的意思,因为“念”没有别的词义。前者是“念”之体性的原因,后者是一体性的原因。这样,即便是关于涅槃的汇集,这些词也一并被说成是念处一体性的原因。十四种、九种、十六种、五种——这是根据经典下文所说的入出息等段落而说的。然而,通过它们内部的细分,以及随顺那些细分的进一步开展,在修习中确实可以获得种种不同的方式。应当知道,用“于四方安置货物”的譬喻,是表示身随观等各别念处修习功用的相似之处。巴利
Saraṇavasenāti kāyādīnaṃ kusalādidhammānañca upadhāraṇavasena. Saranti gacchanti nibbānaṃ etāyāti satīti imasmiṃ atthe ekatte ekasabhāve nibbāne samosaraṇaṃ samāgamo ekattasamosaraṇaṃ. Etadeva hi dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekanibbānapavesahetubhūtā vā samānatā eko satipaṭṭhānassa bhāvo ekattaṃ, tattha samosaraṇaṃ taṃsabhāgatā ekattasamosaraṇaṃ. Ekanibbānapavesahetubhāvaṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādimāha. Etasmiṃ atthe saraṇekattasamosaraṇāni saheva satipaṭṭhānekabhāvassa kāraṇatthena vuttānīti daṭṭhabbāni, purimasmiṃ visuṃ. Saraṇavasenāti vā ‘‘gamanavasenā’’ti atthe sati tadeva gamanaṃ samosaraṇanti, samosaraṇe vā satisaddatthavasena avuccamāne dhāraṇatāva satīti satisaddatthantarābhāvā purimaṃ satibhāvassa kāraṇaṃ, pacchimaṃ ekabhāvassāti nibbānasamosaraṇepi sahitāneva tāni satipaṭṭhānekabhāvassa kāraṇāni vuttāni honti. Cuddasavidhena,navavidhena, soḷasavidhena, pañcavidhenāti idaṃ upari pāḷiyaṃ (ma. ni. 1.107) āgatānaṃ ānāpānapabbādīnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, tesaṃ pana antarabhedavasena tadanugatabhedavasena ca bhāvanāya anekavidhatā labbhatiyeva. Catūsu disāsu uṭṭhānakabhaṇḍasadisatā kāyānupassanāditaṃtaṃsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanānubhāvassa daṭṭhabbā.
比丘们,应当行于自己的行境,也就是父祖传下的领域。根据这段经文,身随观等这些法就是比丘的行境。在这里,因为通过身随观等修行实践才成为比丘,所以经文用“于身随观身而住”等说法来指示比丘,并在那位比丘身上确定了这一点,因此论师说“通过修行实践显示比丘的身份”。由于他随顺大师的行迹,并且是全部教法的领受者,所以能够成为一切种类教诫的堪受之器。巴利
‘‘Gocare, bhikkhave, caratha sake pettike visaye’’tiādivacanato (dī. ni. 3.80; saṃ. ni. 5.372) bhikkhugocarā ete dhammā, yadidaṃ kāyānupassanādayo. Tattha yasmā kāyānupassanādipaṭipattiyā bhikkhu hoti, tasmā ‘‘kāyānupassī viharatī’’tiādinā bhikkhuṃ dasseti, bhikkhumhi taṃ niyamatoti āha ‘‘paṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanato’’ti. Satthu cariyānuvidhāyakattā sakalasāsanasampaṭiggāhakattā ca sabbappakārāya anusāsaniyā bhājanabhāvo.
“应平等而行”是指:舍弃身体等的不平等行为,在身体等方面平等而行。因为贪等烦恼已经止息,所以是“寂静者”。因为调伏了诸根,所以是“调御者”。因为由四道而决定,所以是“决定者”。因为行持最殊胜的梵行,所以是“梵行者”。因为放下了身杖等,所以是“已放下杖者”。他安住在圣者的境地,这样的人应当知道就是“婆罗门”“沙门”“比丘”,因为他已经除灭恶法、止息恶法、断除烦恼。巴利
Samaṃ careyyāti kāyādivisamacariyaṃ pahāya kāyādīhi samaṃ careyya. Rāgādivūpasamena santo. Indriyadamena danto. Catumagganiyāmena niyato. Seṭṭhacaritāya brahmacārī. Kāyadaṇḍādioropanena nidhāya daṇḍaṃ. Ariyabhāve ṭhito so evarūpo bāhitapāpasamitapāpabhinnakilesatāhi brāhmaṇo samaṇo bhikkhūti veditabbo.
在“此身以及外在的名色”这类说法里,“身”指的是五蕴;在“以身感受乐”这类说法里,名身也被叫作“身”。为了把两者区分开来,所以这里说“身”是指色身。巴利
‘‘Ayañceva kāyo bahiddho ca nāmarūpa’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.373) khandhapañcakaṃ, ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.271, 287; pārā. 11) nāmakāyo kāyoti vuccatīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘kāyeti rūpakāye’’ti āha.
“不相混杂”的意思是:即使在这里可能落入“受等诸法依止于身、系属于身”的说法,从而涉及“于身随观受等”的问题,这里仍然表示它们是不相混杂的。另外,因为“身”这个词是以集合体为对象,并且为了在执取整体时显示不净相,所以用单数说“于身”;同样,心虽然依照所缘等区别而分成许多种类,但以“心”这一状态的共通性把它们整体把握为一个,所以用单数说“于心”;而受则有乐等不同类别,应当各自分别随观,因此用复数说“于诸受”,注释也正是这样展开的;诸法则分为五十多种,又依照可随观的方式而有许多种类,所以也用复数来说。为了遮止执取整体、追逐假名以及执取核心精要的倾向,把身分解为各个支节,再把支节分解为头发等,再把头发等分解为四大和所造色,因此说“如此则于身不存在……”等。对于像宫殿等城市组成部分的集合体,即使执取整体的人也不会对它生起整体执取,但有些人仍会认为“确实存在一个叫做城市的东西”,于是可能产生对假名的追逐,因此在追逐女人、男人等假名时,举了城市的例子来说明。支节的集合、头发体毛等的集合、四大与所造色的集合,除了这些如上所说的集合之外,并没有任何别的叫做“身”的东西,更何况女人等呢?所以说“身……可见”等。以“任何法”这句话否定众生、命者等,而整体则仅由否定身就已一并否定了。如果这样,那么身等假名和称呼又是怎么来的呢?所以说“如上所说……造成”等。巴利
Asammissatoti ‘‘vedanādayopi ettha sitā ettha paṭibaddhā’’ti kāye vedanādianupassanāpasaṅgepi āpanne tato asammissatoti attho. Samūhavisayatāya cassa kāya-saddassa samudāyupādānatāya ca asubhākārassa ‘‘kāye’’ti ekavacanaṃ, tathā ārammaṇādivibhāgena anekabhedabhinnampi cittaṃ cittabhāvasāmaññena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘citte’’ti ekavacanaṃ, vedanā pana sukhādibhedabhinnā visuṃ visuṃ anupassitabbāti dassentena ‘‘vedanāsū’’ti bahuvacanena vuttā, tatheva ca niddeso pavattito, dhammā ca paropaṇṇāsabhedā anupassitabbākārena ca anekabhedā evāti tepi bahuvacanavaseneva vuttā. Avayavīgāha-samaññātidhāvana-sārādānābhinivesanisedhanatthaṃ kāyaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgehi, tāni ca kesādīhi, kesādike ca bhūtupādāyarūpehi vinibbhujjanto ‘‘tathā na kāye’’tiādimāha. Pāsādādinagarāvayavasamūhe avayavīvādinopi avayavīgāhaṃ na karonti, nagaraṃ nāma koci attho atthīti pana kesañci samaññātidhāvanaṃ siyāti itthipurisādisamaññātidhāvane nagaranidassanaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṅgapaccaṅgasamūho, kesalomādisamūho bhūtupādāyasamūho ca yathāvuttasamūhe tabbinimutto kāyopi nāma koci natthi, pageva itthiādayoti āha ‘‘kāyo vā…pe… dissatī’’ti. Koci dhammoti iminā sattajīvādiṃ paṭikkhipati, avayavī pana kāyapaṭikkhepeneva paṭikkhittoti. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ kāyādisaññābhidhānānītiāha ‘‘yathāvutta…pe… karontī’’ti.
他看见女人或男人。难道用眼识能看见女人、男人吗?确实不能。不过,是依照“我看见女人,我看见男人”这种生起的想,才说“他所看见的”。或者,他是以邪见、以颠倒执取而看见,那个所见并不是真正的所见,意思是它并不是色处,因为那是被颠倒构想出来的色。又或者,那个由头发等、四大与所造色聚合而成的东西,并不能被眼识所认知,所以它不是所见;或者说,那个所见并不是这里所说的所见。“他不见所见”的意思是:对于那个由头发等、四大与所造色聚合而成的色处,也就是所见,他不能用慧眼如实看见。“不见而系缚”的意思是:他不能用慧眼如实看见这个身体,于是执著“这是我的,这是我,这是我的我”,因此被烦恼的束缚所系缚。巴利
Yaṃ passati itthiṃ purisaṃ vā. Nanu cakkhunā itthipurisadassanaṃ natthīti? Saccametaṃ, ‘‘itthiṃ passāmi, purisaṃ passāmī’’ti pana pavattasaññāya vasena ‘‘yaṃ passatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Micchādassanena vā diṭṭhiyā yaṃ passati, na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ rūpāyatanaṃ na hotīti attho viparītaggāhavasena micchāparikappitarūpattā. Atha vā taṃ kesādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ diṭṭhaṃ na hoti acakkhuviññāṇaviññeyyattā, diṭṭhaṃ vā taṃ na hoti. Yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passatīti yaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ kesādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ paññācakkhunā bhūtato na passatīti attho. Apassaṃ bajjhateti imaṃ attabhāvaṃ yathābhūtaṃ paññācakkhunā apassanto ‘‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me atto’’ti kilesabandhanena bajjhati.
不是随观其他法,意思是:不是随观其他性质的法,不是从不净等之外的其他方面去随观。这是它的含义。通过“说了什么”等问答,把这个含义清楚地显示出来。所谓地界,是指头发等各部分中的地界,因为它是诸法的集合,所以称为“身”;或者,也可以把遍布全身、具有种种分类、以先后次序生起的特相地界本身,从集合的角度来把握,而称为“身”。在水界等当中,道理也是一样。巴利
Naaññadhammānupassīti na aññasabhāvānupassī, asubhādito aññākārānupassī na hotīti attho. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hotītiādinā tamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti. Pathavīkāyanti kesādikoṭṭhāsapathaviṃ dhammasamūhattā ‘‘kāyo’’ti vadati, lakkhaṇapathavimeva vā anekappabhedaṃ sakalasarīragataṃ pubbāpariyabhāvena ca pavattamānaṃ samūhavasena gahetvā ‘‘kāyo’’ti vadati. Āpokāyantiādīsupi eseva nayo.
“应当这样执取”,是指被无闻凡夫以“我、我所”——也就是以自我和属于自我的方式——所执取的那个。现在,为了也依七种随观的方式来说明身随观,便开始了“再者……”等经文。其中,“以无常随观”,是指对这个由四种原因所生的身,随观为“无常”。当他这样观察时,就说他也在随观这身的无常之相。对于这样安住的人,连一丝常想也不会生起,所以说“不当作常想”,他也正是如此“舍断常想”。这里,“确实只是以无常随观”中的“确实”一词,是省略了所否定内容的表达,为了显示所遮遣的含义,才说“不当作常想”。在这里不应怀疑这会否定苦随观等的进行,因为“确实”这个词的作用只是否定其对立面,而且那些随观将在后面的教说中出现。巴利
Evaṃ gahetabbassāti ‘‘ahaṃ mama’’nti evaṃ attattaniyabhāvena andhabālehi gahetabbassa. Idāni sattannaṃ anupassanākārānampi vasena kāyānupassanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha aniccato anupassatīti catusamuṭṭhānikakāyaṃ ‘‘anicca’’nti anupassati, evaṃ passanto evaṃ cassa aniccākārampi anupassatīti vuccati. Tathābhūtassa cassa niccaggāhassa lesopi na hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘no niccato’’ti tathāhesa ‘‘niccasaññaṃ pajahatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.35) vutto. Ettha ca ‘‘aniccato eva anupassatī’’ti eva-kāro luttaniddiṭṭhoti tena nivattitamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘no niccato’’ti vuttaṃ. Na cettha dukkhato anupassanādinivattanamāsaṅkitabbaṃ paṭiyogīnivattanaparattā eva-kārassa, uparidesanāruḷhattā ca tāsaṃ.
以苦随观等,道理也是这样。不过这里有个差别:因为无常是苦,所以他就对这个身体以苦来随观;因为苦是无我,所以以无我来随观。再者,凡是无常、苦、无我的,就不应该欢喜,不应该对它染着,因此说厌离而不欢喜,离染而不染着。他这样不染着,就使贪欲灭尽而不让它生起,意思是不让它集起。这样修行的人,是弃舍而不执取。因为这无常等随观,以暂时压伏的方式,连同以身作为所依的蕴和诸行,由于舍弃烦恼,所以称为弃舍之弃舍;又因为见到有为法的过患,而倾向并跃入与它相反的涅槃,所以称为既是弃舍弃舍,也是跃入弃舍。因此,具备这种随观的比丘,按上面所说的方式舍弃烦恼,并跃入涅槃;处于这种状态的人,既不会以令生起的方式执取烦恼,也不会以不见过患的方式执取有为所缘。因此说弃舍而不执取。现在,为了显示通过这些随观所断除的法,就说:当他这样以无常随观时,便断除常想。这里,常想是指生起诸行是常这种颠倒想。这是以断除见颠倒和心颠倒为门径而断除想颠倒,所以文中用了想这个词;或者,应该理解为以想为首,把见颠倒和心颠倒也一并包含在内。欢喜是指带有喜的渴爱。其余部分和上面所说的一样。巴利
Dukkhato anupassatītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – aniccassa dukkhattā tameva kāyaṃ dukkhato anupassati, dukkhassa anattattā anattato anupassati. Yasmā pana yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, taṃ anabhinanditabbaṃ, na tattha rajjitabbaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbindati no nandati,virajjati no rajjatī’’ti. So evaṃ arajjanto rāgaṃ nirodheti no samudeti, samudayaṃ na karotīti attho. Evaṃ paṭipanno ca paṭinissajjati no ādiyati. Ayañhi aniccādianupassanā tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ kāyatannissayakhandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilesānaṃ pariccajanato, saṅkhatadosadassanena tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandanato ‘‘pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo cā’’ti vuccati, tasmā tāya samannāgato bhikkhu vuttanayena kilese ca pariccajati, nibbāne ca pakkhandati , tathābhūto ca nibbattanavasena kilese na ādiyati, nāpi adosadassitāvasena saṅkhatārammaṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭinissajjati no ādiyatī’’ti. Idānissa tāhi anupassanāhi yesaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānaṃ hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so taṃ aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahatī’’ti. Tattha niccasaññanti ‘‘saṅkhārā niccā’’ti evaṃ pavattaviparītasaññaṃ. Diṭṭhicittavipallāsapahānamukheneva saññāvipallāsappahānanti saññāgahaṇaṃ, saññāsīsena vā tesampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nandinti sappītikataṇhaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayemeva.
他安住:这是说,具备身随观者的威仪举止之安住,因此说“他行动”,意思是维持威仪举止。从作为所缘而遍及的角度,说“于三有中”;但从生起的角度来说,烦恼其实只限于有限的境地。虽然断除烦恼也是“热忱”,那层含义在正见等法中也同样存在,但“热忱”一词确实专属于精进,所以说“这是精进之名”。或者,在断除对立面时,精进以激励相应诸法的方式生起,具有殊胜的烧灼作用,因此唯有精进被称为“热忱”,其他法不是这样。而“具热忱者”中的“ī”这个音,是表示称赞或殊胜,所以用“具热忱者”来显示他具备正勤。正确、全面、自己了知,就是“正知者”:因为无混杂地确认,即不以观见其他法的状态,所以是“正确”——不颠倒;因为以一切行相了知,所以是“全面”;因为以层层殊胜的方式生起,所以是“自己了知”。如果是以慧随观,那怎么成为念处呢?对此说“因为不是……”等。“一切处有益者”:在一切处都存在,因为在一切心沉滞或掉举时都应当希求;或者,在沉滞或掉举时应当修习的一切觉支都依此而有,所以叫“一切处有益”。在这里,依靠由念所资助的慧,那位修习业处的比丘于上述之身以身体随观而住。内摄、向内沉没,就是懈怠的意思。这里“执取方便”:戒清净等、计数等、学习善巧等是方便;与此相反的,应当知道是不方便。因为具念者不舍弃上述方便,也不执取非方便,所以说“失念……不能”。因此,无论执取与回避方便与非方便,还是不舍弃与不执取,这位修行者都做不到。巴利
Viharatīti iminā kāyānupassanāsamaṅgino iriyāpathavihāro vuttoti āha ‘‘iriyatī’’ti iriyāpathaṃ pavattetīti attho. Ārammaṇakaraṇavasena abhibyāpanato ‘‘tīsu bhavesū’’ti vuttaṃ, uppajjanavasena pana kilesā parittabhūmakā evāti. Yadipi kilesānaṃ pahānaṃ ātāpananti taṃ sammādiṭṭhiādīnampi attheva, ātāpa-saddo pana vīriyeyeva niruḷhoti vuttaṃ ‘‘vīriyassetaṃ nāma’’nti. Atha vā paṭipakkhapahāne sampayuttadhammānaṃ abbhussahanavasena pavattamānassa vīriyassa sātisayaṃ tadātāpananti vīriyameva tathā vuccati, na aññe dhammā. Ātāpīti cāyamīkāro pasaṃsāya, atisayassa vā dīpakoti ātāpīgahaṇena sammappadhānasamaṅgitaṃ dasseti. Sammā, samantato, sāmañca pajānanto sampajāno, asammissato vavatthāne aññadhammānupassitābhāvena sammā aviparītaṃ, sabbākārapajānanena samantato, uparūpari visesāvahabhāvena pavattiyā sayaṃ pajānantoti attho. Yadi paññāya anupassati, kathaṃ satipaṭṭhānatāti āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Sabbatthikanti sabbattha bhavaṃ sabbattha līne uddhate ca citte icchitabbattā, sabbe vā līne uddhate ca bhāvetabbā bojjhaṅgā atthikā etāyāti sabbatthikā. Satiyā laddhūpakārāya eva paññāya ettha yathāvutte kāye kammaṭṭhāniko bhikkhu kāyānupassī viharati. Antosaṅkhepo anto olīyano, kosajjanti attho. Upāyapariggaheti ettha sīlavisodhanādi gaṇanādi uggahakosallādi ca upāyo, tabbipariyāyato anupāyo veditabbo. Yasmā ca upaṭṭhitassati yathāvuttaupāyaṃ na pariccajati, anupāyañca na upādiyati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘muṭṭhassati…pe… asamatthohotī’’ti. Tenāti upāyānupāyānaṃ pariggahaparivajjanesu apariccāgāpariggahesu ca asamatthabhāvena assa yogino.
因为在这里,只有念本身被称为念处,所以与它相应的精进等法就是它的“支”,因此论师说“显示了它的相应支之后”。这里“支”这个词应当理解为“原因”的同义词。而且在这里,通过提到念,就应当理解为也包含了定,因为念被归在定蕴里面。或者说,因为这里的开示是以念为首的——单靠念并不能断除烦恼,也不能证得涅槃,念也不能单独生起——所以就像在讲禅那时说“有寻”等话一样,这里显示相应支,就是“支”这个词应被理解为“组成部分”的意思。至于“所断支”,是为了显示应当断除的部分,就像“确实远离了诸欲……”等处那样。因为这里指的是世间道,不是出世间道,所以注释在说明属于前行阶段的调伏时说“或以彼分断除,或以镇伏断除”。“那些法”是指受等诸法。因为那些法在这里并不是所要说的重点,所以说“这是以抽取含义的方式说出的”。巴利
Yasmā satiyevettha satipaṭṭhānaṃ vuttā, tasmāssa sampayuttā dhammā vīriyādayo aṅganti āha ‘‘sampayogaṅgañcassa dassetvā’’ti. Aṅga-saddo cettha kāraṇapariyāyo daṭṭhabbo, satiggahaṇeneva cettha samādhissati gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ tassā samādhikkhandhe saṅgahitattā. Yasmā vā satisīsenāyaṃ desanā. Na hi kevalāya satiyā kilesappahānaṃ hoti, nibbānādhigamo vā, na ca kevalā sati pavattati, tasmāssa jhānadesanāyaṃ savitakkādivacanassa viya sampayogaṅgadassanatāti aṅga-saddassa avayavapariyāyatā daṭṭhabbā. Pahānaṅganti ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.226; ma. ni. 1.271, 287; saṃ. ni. 2.152; a. ni. 4.123; pārā. 11) viya pahātabbaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ. Yasmā ettha lokiyamaggo adhippeto, na lokuttaramaggo, tasmā pubbabhāgiyameva vinayaṃ dassento ‘‘tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā’’ti āha. Tesaṃ dhammānanti vedanādidhammānaṃ. Tesañhi tattha anadhippetattā ‘‘atthuddhāranayenetaṃ vutta’’nti vuttaṃ.
前面已经笼统地说过断除两种盖,接下来为了说明每一种盖各自断除的差别,所以又说“特别地”。或者,为了说明为什么不说“调伏了诸盖”,而说“贪忧”这个词的用意,才说了“特别地”等话。因为这段话的目的,就是要显示断除那些与身随观修习直接对立的随顺、爱着等。以身成就为根本的,是指以色身、力气、青春、健康等身体成就为因相的。与这个说法相反,应当知道,以身的不成就为根本的对立。以身修习,就是身随观的修习。在这里,身随观的修习正是被指为“身修习”。借此,就是通过说明断除随顺等的那些话。瑜伽行者的威力等,是对所说含义的阐明。巴利
Avisesena dvīhipi nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttanti katvā puna ekekena vuttaṃ pahānavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘visesenā’’ti āha. Atha vā ‘‘vineyya nīvaraṇānī’’ti avatvā abhijjhādomanassavacanassa payojanaṃ dassento ‘‘visesenā’’tiādimāha. Kāyānupassanābhāvanāya hi ujuvipaccanīkānaṃ anurodhādīnaṃ pahānaṃ dassanaṃ etassa payojananti. Kāyasampattimūlakassāti rūpa-bala-yobbanārogyādi-sarīrasampadā-nimittassa. Vuttavipariyāyato kāyavipattimūlako virodho veditabbo. Kāyabhāvanāyāti kāyānupassanābhāvanāya. Sā hi idha ‘‘kāyabhāvanā’’ti adhippetā. Tenāti anurodhādippahānavacanena. Yogānubhāvo hītiādi vuttassevatthassa pākaṭakaraṇaṃ.
“以念与正知”这句,是通过强调取用“正知”来说的。“一切处有益的业处”是指佛随念、慈、死随念和不净修习这四种。瑜伽行者所护持的这四种法,被称为“一切处有益的业处”,因为它们要依靠强大的正知之力,毫不间断地持续护持;或者说,这里是用“念”来说明止,因为念被包含在定蕴之中。巴利
Satisampajaññenāti atisampajaññaggahaṇena. Sabbatthikakammaṭṭhānanti buddhānussati mettā maraṇassati asubhabhāvanā ca. Idañhi catukkaṃ yoginā parihariyamānaṃ ‘‘sabbatthikakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati atisampajaññabalena avicchinnassa tassa pariharitabbattā, satiyā vā samatho vutto tassā samāddhikkhandhena saṅgahitattā.
“因此”这个词,是不取字面意思,而只按照分别义理的方式展开的分别论文句来理解。所谓“注疏的理路”,就是为阐明字面含义而随宜宣说的释义方式。所谓“如何相符”,应当这样理解:在义理上和意旨上都不违背,而且完全吻合、一致。巴利
Tenāti saddatthaṃ anādiyitvā bhāvatthasseva vibhajanavasena pavattena vibhaṅgapāṭhena saha. Aṭṭhakathānayoti saddatthassapi vivaraṇavasena yathārahaṃ vutto atthasaṃvaṇṇanānayo. Yathā saṃsandatīti yathā atthato adhippāyato ca avilomento aññadatthu saṃsandati sameti, evaṃ veditabbo.
关于受等词再次提及:在这里,从依止缘的角度来看,心法依止于受;而在五蕴有中,由于无色法依色而存在,即使可能涉及将受作为身随观等来观察的情况,为了显示它们之间不混杂的确定性,以及为了显示破除密集等,所以第二次单独提出受。因此,不是在受上成为身随观者或心法随观者,而是确实成为受随观者——通过针对被称为受的对象,只显示受随观的形态,就表明了不混杂的确定性。同样,如所说:“在某个时候有乐受,那时就没有苦受或不苦不乐受;或者在某个时候有苦受或不苦不乐受,那时就没有其他受。”这样不停留于受存在的共性,将每一种受分别显示出来,就表明了破除密集和剥离稳固性。通过如此显示它们仅安住一刹那,也就阐明了无常性,并由无常性表明了苦性和无我性。“破除密集等”中的“等”字也应理解为包含这个意思。因为在受上,这个人只是受随观者,不是其他法的随观者。这是什么意思?譬如愚人对并非摩尼珠性质的水泡,却观察为摩尼珠的形态;这个人不是这样,即使在看似稳固可意的感受上,更不用说在其他感受上,不会观察为可意的形态,而是观察为无常、无我、不净的形态——因为刹那坏灭、无法自主、烦恼不净流漏;并且特别地观察为苦——因为变易苦和行苦。这样说的意思就是如此。在心法上也是如此,根据需要再次提及的用意应当说明。“仅仅然而”等语,在这里显示了“至此应当了知”的了知范围。这个理路:以这个方式,心和法应当如何随观,就那样随观它们,应当了知为“于心中随观心,于法中随观法”——这个意思被指示出来。巴利
Vedanādīnaṃpuna vacaneti ettha nissayapaccayabhāvavasena cittadhammānaṃ vedanāsannissitattā pañcavokārabhave arūpadhammānaṃ rūpapaṭibaddhavuttito ca vedanāya kāyādianupassanāpasaṅgepi āpanne tadasammissato vavatthānadassanatthaṃ ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthañca dutiyavedanāgahaṇaṃ. Tena na vedanāyaṃ kāyānupassī, cittadhammānupassī vā, atha kho vedanānupassīyevāti vedanāsaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ vedanānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye sukhā vedanā, na tasmiṃ samaye dukkhā adukkhamasukhā vā vedanā. Yasmiṃ vā pana samaye dukkhā adukkhamasukhā vā vedanā, na tasmiṃ samaye itarā vedanā’’ti vedanābhāvasāmaññe aṭṭhatvā taṃ taṃ vedanaṃ vinibbhujitvā dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dhuvabhāvaviveko dassito hoti. Tena tāsaṃ khaṇamattāvaṭṭhānadassanena aniccatāya tato eva dukkhatāya anattatāya ca dassanaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hoti. Ghanavinibbhogādīti ādi-saddena ayampi attho veditabbo. Ayañhi vedanāyaṃ vedanānupassīyeva, na aññadhammānupassī. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā nāma bālo amaṇisabhāvepi udakabubbuḷake maṇiākārānupassī hoti, na evamayaṃ ṭhitiramaṇīyepi vedayite, pageva itarasmiṃ manuññākārānupassī, atha kho khaṇabhaṅguratāya avasavattitāya kilesāsucipaggharaṇatāya ca aniccaanattaasubhākārānupassī, vipariṇāmadukkhatāya saṅkhāradukkhatāya ca visesato dukkhānupassīyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ cittadhammesupi yathārahaṃ puna vacane payojanaṃ vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Kevalaṃ panidhā’’tiādinā idha ‘ettakaṃ veditabba’’nti veditabbaparicchedaṃ dasseti. Esa nayoti iminā yathā cittaṃ dhammā ca anupassitabbā, tathā tāni anupassanto ‘‘citte cittānupassī, dhammesu dhammānupassī’’ti veditabboti imamatthaṃ atidisati.
比丘把乐看成苦,就是以智慧之眼,把乐受由于会变坏而具有的苦性,看成是苦。他看见苦是刺,是因为苦受会逼迫人,像从里面扎进去,又很难拔出来,所以看成是刺。不苦不乐,就是舍受。寂静,是因为它不像苦和乐那样粗重,又因为它的生起条件已经平息,所以本质上是寂静的。看成无常,是因为它先有后无,有生有灭,只是暂时存在,所以否定恒常,看成是无常。这位比丘就是善见者,意思是:他确实完全地、清楚地正确观察了诸受。巴利
Yosukhaṃ dukkhato addāti yo bhikkhu sukhavedanaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhatāya ‘‘dukkha’’nti paññācakkhunā addakkhi. Dukkhamaddakkhi sallatoti dukkhavedanaṃ pīḷājananato antotudanato dunnīharaṇato ca sallanti addakkhi passi. Adukkhamasukhanti upekkhāvedanaṃ. Santanti sukhadukkhāni viya anoḷārikatāya paccayavasena vūpasantasabhāvatāya ca santaṃ. Aniccatoti hutvā abhāvato udayabbayavantato tāvakālikatoniccapaṭikkhepato ca ‘‘anicca’’nti yo addakkhi. Sa ve sammaddaso bhikkhu ekaṃsena paribyattaṃ vā vedanāya sammā passanakoti attho.
“是苦的”:因为具有行苦性,所以也是苦的。“那一切都在苦中”:我说那一切所感受的,都包含在苦中、归属于苦,因为它们没有超出行苦性。“也从乐与苦等”:这是依据乐的住立与变易、对乐的无知,以及苦的变易与住立、对苦的无知而说的。因此,应当以这三受为乐来随观,也应当以这三受为苦来随观——这就是这里的含义。应当结合种种差别来理解:所缘有色等的不同;主导因素有欲等;俱生法有智等;地有欲界等;以及善、不善、它们的异熟、唯作等种种差别;“等”字还包含有行、无行、有依处、无依处等种种差别。“空法”:是依据《法集论》中“诸法存在”等语句,在空品中所说的空自性。“在此虽可”等语句,则提出这样的质疑:既然先前已经断除,就不应再说再次断除。或者说:在道心的那一刹那,在一处断除,就是在一切处都已断除,因此不必分别宣说。对此,前一种质疑以不同补特伽罗来回应,后一种质疑以不同心刹那来回应。因为在世间修习中,在身体上断除的,未必在受等处也断除;即使它不再现行,但由于没有以对治修习使那里的贪忧不生起,所以仍应说再次断除它。在一处断除,在其余各处也都断除——这是就道随观处的修习而言;或者,就世间修习而言,是着眼于在一切处都不生起而说的。因为《分别论》在四处都说到“五蕴即是世间”。巴利
Dukkhātipīti saṅkhāradukkhatāya dukkhā itipi. Sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti sabbaṃ taṃ vedayitaṃ dukkhasmiṃ antogadhaṃ pariyāpannaṃ vadāmi saṅkhāradukkhatānativattanato. Sukhadukkhatopi cāti sukhādīnaṃ ṭhitivipariṇāmaññāṇasukhatāya vipariṇāmaṭhitiaññāṇadukkhatāya ca vuttattā tissopi sukhato, tissopi ca dukkhato anupassitabbāti attho. Rūpādi-ārammaṇachandādi-adhipati-ñāṇādi-sahajāta- kāmāvacarādi-bhūminānattabhedānaṃ kusalākusala-taṃvipākakiriyā-nānattādibhedānañca, ādi-saddena saṅkhārikāsaṅkhārikasa-vatthukāvatthukādi-nānattabhedānañca vasenāti yojetabbaṃ. Suññatadhammassāti ‘‘dhammā hontī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 121) suññatavāre āgatasuññatasabhāvassa vasena. ‘‘Kāmañcetthā’’tiādinā pubbe pahīnattā puna pahānaṃ na vattabbanti codanaṃ dasseti, maggacittakkhaṇe vā ekattha pahīnaṃ sabbattha pahīnameva hotīti visuṃ visuṃ na vattabbanti. Tattha purimāya codanāya nānāpuggalaparihāro, pacchimāya nānācittakkhaṇikaparihāro. Lokiyabhāvanāya hi kāye pahīnaṃ na vedanādīsu pahīnaṃ hoti yadipi na pavatteyya, na paṭipakkhabhāvanāya tattha sā abhijjhādomanassassa appavatti hotīti puna tappahānaṃ vattabbamevāti. Ekattha pahīnaṃ sesesupi pahīnaṃ hotīti maggasatipaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ, lokiyabhāvanāya vā sabbattha appavattimattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pañcapi khandhā loko’’ti hi vibhaṅge (vibha. 362, 364, 366, 373) catūsupi ṭhānesu vuttanti.
身随观的注释巴利
Kāyānupassanāvaṇṇanā
出入息的注释巴利
Ānāpānapabbavaṇṇanā
107 107. 在外部教法中,也能出现其中一部分修法,所以为了涵盖一切种类,才说“能生起一切种类身随观者”。因此,凡是依出入息念等段落而来的十四种方式,以及包含在其中的“内”等随观方式,还有《身至念经》(中部3.154)中所说的以头发等的颜色、形状、遍为所缘的四禅那等方式,乃至世间等种类——所有这些,全都毫无遗漏地统摄在内。而这些种类只存在于这个教法中,不在这个教法之外,所以说“一切种类……是遮止者”。其中,“遮止彼状态者”是指:遮止了“其他教法是能生起一切种类身随观者所依之处”这一状态。由此显示,“在此,诸比丘”这句话里的“在此”一词,含有“只在此中”的意思。确实,有些词哪怕只有一个,也带有限定的意义,比如“食风者”(长部注疏2.374)。因此说“唯有在此是沙门”等。因为,能圆满成就沙门之法的人,就是能生起一切种类身随观者。“外道之说”是指其他外道的各种不同主张和宗派。巴利
107. Bāhirakesupi ito ekadesassa sambhavato sabbappakāraggahaṇaṃ kataṃ ‘‘sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattakassā’’ti. Tena ye ime ānāpānapabbādivasena āgatā cuddasappakārā, tadantogadhā ca ajjhattādianupassanā pakārā, tathā kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.154) vuttā kesādivaṇṇasaṇṭhānakasiṇārammaṇacatukkajjhānappakārā, lokiyādippakārā ca, te sabbepi anavasesato saṅgaṇhāti. Ime ca pakārā imasmiṃyeva sāsane, na ito bahiddhāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbappakāra…pe… paṭisedhano cā’’ti. Tattha tathābhāvapaṭisedhanoti sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattakassa puggalassa aññasāsanassa nissayabhāvapaṭisedhano. Etena ‘‘idha, bhikkhave’’ti ettha idha-saddo antogadhaevasaddatthoti dasseti . Santi hi ekapadānipi sāvadhāraṇāni yathā ‘‘vāyubhakkho’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.374). Tenāha ‘‘idheva samaṇo’’tiādi. Paripuṇṇasamaṇakaraṇadhammo hi so, yo sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattako. Parappavādāti paresaṃ aññatitthiyānaṃ nānappakārā vādā titthāyatanāni.
为了说明只有像林野这样的住处才是适合修行的坐卧处,才说了“因为对于此”等话。难调伏、还没达到调伏的牛,叫作“伪公牛”。就像挤奶时乳汁不能从乳房毫无剩余地流出来一样,那种妨碍挤奶的,就是“伪母牛”。缘着色、声等而生起的滋味,就是“以色等为所缘的滋味”。先前惯习的所缘,是指出家以前,或者在无始轮回中已经熟习的所缘。巴利
Araññādikasseva bhāvanānurūpasenāsanataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Duddamo damathaṃ anupagato goṇo kūṭagoṇo. Dohanakāle yathā thanehi anavasesato khīraṃ na paggharati, evaṃ dohapaṭibandhinī kūṭadhenu. Rūpasaddādike paṭicca uppajjanakaassādo rūpārammaṇādiraso. Pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇanti pabbajjāto pubbe, anādimati vā saṃsāre paricitārammaṇaṃ.
“应系缚”就是应当系住。“以念”是指以正确观察业处而运作的念。“在所缘上”是指在业处的所缘上。“牢固地”是指稳固,意思是:如同具念者成就近行定与安止定那样,令其达到坚固。巴利
Nibandheyyāti bandheyya. Satiyāti sammadeva kammaṭṭhānassa sallakkhaṇavasena pavattāya satiyā. Ārammaṇeti kammaṭṭhānārammaṇe. Daḷhanti thiraṃ, yathā satokārissa upacārappanābhedo samādhi ijjhati, tathā thāmagataṃ katvāti attho.
作为殊胜证得和现法乐住的落脚处:对于一切佛陀、某些独觉佛以及佛陀的弟子们来说,它是殊胜证得的落脚处;对于那些通过其他业处已经获得殊胜成就的人来说,它则是现法乐住的落脚处。就像建筑工匠一样,世尊为修行者指示适合他们居住的地方。比丘像豹子一样,在林中独自居住,通过粉碎敌对法来达成自己想要的目标。“最上果”:这是针对沙门果说的。“精进、迅捷、相应之地”:指成为激发修习、令精进迅捷相应运作之地。巴利
Visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānanti sabbesaṃ buddhānaṃ, ekaccānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ, buddhasāvakānañca visesādhigamassa, aññena kammaṭṭhānena adhigatavisesānaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārassa ca padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Vatthuvijjācariyo viya bhagavā yogīnaṃ anurūpanivāsaṭṭhānupadisanato. Bhikkhu dīpisadiso araññe ekākī viharitvā paṭipakkhanimmathanena icchitatthasādhanato. Phalamuttamanti sāmaññaphalaṃ sandhāyāha. Parakkamajavayoggabhūminti bhāvanussāhajavassa yoggakaraṇabhūmibhūtaṃ.
随出入息而修学:这是指以了知出入息的长短、觉知全身、平息粗重身行等方式,致力于修习;或者达到那样的状态后,让三种修学持续运转。于出入息相:指依止出入息而现起的似相。把握出入息:指以色法为门径深入观照,即所说的“出入息业处修行者”。把握禅支:指以非色法为门径深入观照。所谓“事”,是因为业所生的身体是心和心所生起活动的依处。没有别的众生或人:这是清净见,以超越三时的疑惑而度脱疑结,确定“这纯粹只是法,不是无因的,也不是以大自在天等不平等因为因的,而是以无明等为因”。然后,依“凡任何色”等经文,以聚思惟的方式将三相安立于诸法之上,通过生灭随观等增长观智,次第进入圣道。巴利
Assāsapassāsānaṃ vasena sikkhatoti assāsapassāsānaṃ dīgharassatāpajānana-sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedana-oḷārikoḷārikapaṭippassambhanavasena bhāvanānuyogaṃ sikkhato, tathābhūto vā hutvā tisso sikkhā pavattayato. Assāsapassāsanimitteti assāsapassāsasannissayena upaṭṭhitapaṭibhāganimitte. Assāsapassāse pariggaṇhāti rūpamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisanto, yo ‘‘assāsapassāsakammiko’’ti vutto. Jhānaṅgāni pariggaṇhāti arūpamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisanto. Vatthu nāma karajakāyo cittacetasikānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato. Añño satto vā puggalo vā natthīti visuddhadiṭṭhi ‘‘tayidaṃ dhammamattaṃ na ahetukaṃ, nāpi issarādivisamahetukaṃ, atha kho avijjādīhi eva sahetuka’’nti addhattayepi kaṅkhāvitaraṇena vitiṇṇakaṅkho ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpa’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.361; ma. ni. 2.113; ma. ni. 3.86; a. ni. 4.181; paṭi. ma. 1.48) kalāpasammasanavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā udayabbayānupassanādivasena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento anukkamena maggapaṭipāṭiyā.
“或他人的出入息身”这句话,是依观禅行境而说的;但若依止禅来说,在他人出入息身上根本不会有安止相生起。这二者都不可得,所以说“内、外”——这由两种法构成、合为一个所缘的情况,是得不到的。巴利
Parassa vā assāsapassāsakāyeti idaṃ sammasanacāravasenāyaṃ pāḷi pavattāti katvā vuttaṃ, samathavasena pana parassa assāsapassāsakāye appanānimittuppatti eva natthīti. Idaṃ ubhayaṃ na labbhatīti ‘‘ajjhattaṃ, bahiddhā’’ti ca vuttaṃ idaṃ dhammadvayaghaṭitaṃ ekato ārammaṇabhāvena na labbhati.
集就是从它生起,所以叫集。它本身又从“因”这一含义上称为法,所以叫集法,也就是出入息生起的因——业生身等。随观它的人,就是集法随观者。为了用譬喻显示这个集法,才说了犹如……等话。其中,囊指皮袋;风箱管指吹管;它们指业生身等。正如出入息身是以果的方式与业生身等相关联的,它们也以因的方式与出入息身相关联,因此说它们可以称为身中的集法。法这个词有时也指本性,就像有生法者等处那样。因此,随观身在诸缘和合之中有生起的本性,就说为集法随观者。所以又说业生身也……等。这样,于身这个依处格的意义也就成立了。灭法随观者:在这里,灭本身虽然没有因,但某些因法不存在时,那个东西就不存在;那种不存在,则被假说为那不存在的原因,所以依照假说,把业生身等的不存在说为出入息身灭的因。因此又说犹如皮袋……等。以上是依第一种解释方式说明义理。若依第二种解释方式,则不必借助假说,义理便可直接理解。就像内观和外观因为所缘事各不相同,不能在同一时间进行,集法随观和灭法随观也不能在同一刹那同时得到,因此说时而观集、时而观灭。巴利
Samudeti etasmāti samudayo, so eva kāraṇaṭṭhena dhammoti samudayadhammo, assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattihetukarajakāyādi. Tassa anupassanasīlo samudayadhammānupassī. Taṃ pana samudayadhammaṃ upamāmukhena dassento ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhastanti ruttiṃ. Gaggaranāḷinti ukkāpanāḷiṃ. Teti karajakāyādike. Yathā assāsapassāsakāyo karajakāyādisambandhī phalabhāvena, evaṃ tepi assāsapassāsakāyasambandhino hetubhāvenāti ‘‘samudayadhammā kāyasmi’’nti vattabbataṃ labhantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘samudaya…pe… vuccatī’’ti. Pakativācī vā dhamma-saddo ‘‘jātidhammāna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.131; ma. ni. 3.373; paṭi. ma. 1.33) viyāti kāyassa paccayasamavāye uppajjanapakatikānupassī ‘‘samudayadhammānupassī’’ti vutto. Tenāha – ‘‘karajakāyañcā’’tiādi. Evañca katvā kāyasminti bhummavacanañca samatthitaṃ hoti. Vayadhammānupassīti ettha ahetukattepi vināsassa yesaṃ hetudhammānaṃ abhāve yaṃ na hoti, tadabhāvo tassa abhāvassa hotu viya voharīyatīti upacārato karajakāyādiabhāvo assāsapassāsakāyassa vayakāraṇaṃ vutto. Tenāha ‘‘yathā bhastāyā’’tiādi. Ayaṃ tāvettha paṭhamavikappavasena atthavibhāvanā. Dutiyavikappavasena pana upacārena vināyeva attho veditabbo. Ajjhattabahiddhānupassanā viya bhinnavatthuvisayatāya samudayavayadhammānupassanāpi ekakāle na labbhatīti āha ‘‘kālena samudayaṃ kālena vayaṃ anupassanto’’ti.
“有身”这个说法里,“唯”字被省略了,所以先说了“唯有身”,再用限定来显示被遮遣的东西,接着说“不是众生”等等。它的意思是:在色等法上,由于对众生的贪爱、以及令他人执著的作用,或者因为具有“有”的功德,而被他人设想为“众生”;又因为能充满那众生类,并且具有死生流转的性质,所以被称为“人”;在这里凝结、结生而成胎,所以被称为“女人”;在村落、住处等地方分布而活动,所以被称为“男人”;在这里安置我慢,所以被称为“我”;以属于自己之物的状态,所以被称为“我所”;认为不是他人,所以被称为“我”;认为是我所有,所以被称为“我的”;认为与所说种类相离而是别的,所以被称为“某人”;以属于他之物的状态,所以被称为“某人的”。应当设想的某个“某人”并不存在,仅仅只有身存在,这样就阐明了身的无我、我所空性。所谓“这样”,是指以“唯有身”等所说的那种方式。所谓“为了令智臻于极致”,就是令随观身之智达到究竟;所谓“为了令念臻于极致”,就是令摄身之念的转起达到以念为究竟。因为对此人来说,按照所说的方式,“有身”依前后不断生起而现起的念,使彼处之智与念更加增长。因此说“为了令念与正知增长”。巴利
Atthi kāyoti eva-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti ‘‘kāyova atthī’’ti vatvā avadhāraṇena nivatthitaṃ dassento ‘‘na satto’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – yo rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya paresañca sajjāpanaṭṭhena, satvaguṇayogato vā ‘‘satto’’ti parehi parikappito. Tassa sattanikāyassa pūraṇato ca cavanupapajjanadhammatāya galanato ca ‘‘puggalo’’ti. Thīyati saṃhaññati ettha gabbhoti ‘‘itthī’’ti. Puri pure bhāge seti pavattatīti ‘‘puriso’’ti. Āhito ahaṃmāno etthāti ‘‘attā’’ti, attano santakabhāvena ‘‘attaniya’’nti. Paro na hotīti katvā ‘‘aha’’nti, mama santakanti katvā ‘‘mama’’nti. Vuttappakāravinimutto aññoti katvā ‘‘kocī’’ti, tassa santakabhāvena ‘‘kassacī’’ti parikappetabbo koci natthi, kevalaṃ kāyo eva atthīti attattaniyasuññatameva kāyassa vibhāveti. Evanti ‘‘kāyova atthī’’tiādinā vuttappakārena. Ñāṇapamāṇatthāyāti kāyānupassanāñāṇaparaṃ pamāṇaṃ pāpanatthāya. Satipamāṇatthāyāti kāyapariggāhikasatipavattaṃ satiparaṃ pamāṇaṃ pāpanatthāya. Imassa hi vuttanayena ‘‘atthi kāyo’’ti aparāparuppattivasena paccupaṭṭhitā sati bhiyyoso mattāya tattha ñāṇassa satiyā ca paribrūhanāya hoti. Tenāha ‘‘satisampajaññānaṃ vaḍḍhatthāyā’’ti.
因为这种修习直接对治渴爱和见取,所以经文说“远离渴爱……而住”。这样的人在世间看不到任何可以执取为“我”或“我的”东西,又怎么能执取呢?因此说“也不执取任何”等。关于“如此亦”中的“亦”字,因为前面没有说到同类的含义,所以是用来总括未说的内容,因此注释说“取上文之义”。“如是”则是对所述内容的回顾,作为总结,因此说“以此……显示”。“这里着重的是前分念处”,所以说“念是苦圣谛”。那念存在于某个身中,能令那个身生起的渴爱,也可说是能令那念生起,因为那种渴爱不存在时它也不生起,因此说“那能令它生起的先前渴爱”。“不转起”指不转起的原因,或者在这里不转起,所以叫“不转起”。“依四圣谛”即依四圣谛为业处。“努力登上”指沿着清净的次第逐步上升,也就是把修习向上提升。“出离之门”指从轮回之苦中解脱的途径。巴利
Imissā bhāvanāya taṇhādiṭṭhigāhānaṃ ujupaṭipakkhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhā…pe… viharatī’’ti. Tathābhūto ca loke kiñci ‘‘aha’’nti vā ‘‘mama’’nti vā gahetabbaṃ na passati, kuto gaṇheyya. Tenāha ‘‘na ca kiñcī’’tiādi. Evampīti ettha pi-saddo heṭṭhā niddiṭṭhassa tādisassa atthassa abhāvato avuttasamuccayatthoti dassento ‘‘upari atthaṃ upādāyā’’ti āha. ‘‘Eva’’nti pana niddiṭṭhākārassa paccāmasanaṃ nigamanavasena katanti āha ‘‘iminā pana…pe… dassetī’’ti. Pubbabhāgasatipaṭṭhānassa idhādhippetattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sati dukkhasacca’’nti. Sā pana sati yasmiṃ attabhāve, tassa samuṭṭhāpikā taṇhā tassāpi samuṭṭhāpikā eva nāma hoti tadabhāve abhāvatoti āha ‘‘tassā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā’’ti. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ, na pavattati etthāti vā appavatti. Catusaccavasenāti catusaccakammaṭṭhānavasena. Ussakkitvāti visuddhiparamparāya āruhitvā, bhāvanaṃ upari netvāti attho. Niyyānamukhanti vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇūpāyo.
威仪章的注释巴利
Iriyāpathapabbavaṇṇanā
108 108. 依威仪:活动叫“威”,就是动作,但在这里要理解为身体的行为。威所行经的路径、活动进行的道路,就是“威仪”,指行走等身体的姿态。因为众生或者用行走、或者用站立、或者用坐着、或者用躺卧,以身体去做应当做的事。依于这些来区分,就是以威仪的分类来说的意思。再者,“更复”就是又另外,意思是:除了前面所说的入出息念业处,我还要讲说其他身随观念处的业处,请仔细听。“若行”等话,是既适用于仅仅知道“行走”等,也适用于了知行走等过程中殊胜意义的通说。在这里,仅仅知道行走等并不是本意,了知行走等过程中的殊胜意义才是本意。为了把这一点分别显示出来,才说了“在那里,什么”等话。“众生可得”:就是不舍弃、不放弃“有众生存在”的众生执见,因为还执持着“我行走,我的行走”这样的执着。正因如此,也不会破除、不会去除“有能做、能受的我”这样生起的颠倒想——也就是“我相”这样生起的颠倒想,因为它不是它的对治,也没有加以增修。既然是这样,业处等修行又从何而有呢?所以说:“既不是业处,也不是念处的修习。”至于“此”等所说的清净一面,应当按上面所说的反面来理解。为了解释这个意思,才说了“此即”等话。其中,“谁在行走?”是就行走这一行为对能作者发问,这是为了否定具有能作性的实我,因为经中显示唯是诸法本身成就了行走。“为谁而行走?”是为了否定执取具有非能作性的实我。“以何因缘?”则是对已被否定能作者的行走行为,问其真实原因,因为经中否定了“行走者,是我以意与之相系,意与诸根相系,诸根与我相系”等这类对行走原因的错误说法。因此说:“其中……”等。巴利
108.Iriyāpathavasenāti iriyanaṃ iriyā, kiriyā, idha pana kāyikapayogo veditabbo. Iriyānaṃ patho pavattimaggoti iriyāpatho, gamanādisarīrāvatthā. Gacchanto vā hi satto kāyena kattabbakiriyaṃ kareyya ṭhito vā nisinno vā nipanno vāti. Tesaṃ vasena, iriyāpathavibhāgenāti attho. Puna caparanti puna ca aparaṃ, yathāvuttaānāpānakammaṭṭhānato bhiyyopi aññaṃ kāyānupassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ kathemi, suṇāthāti vā adhippāyo. Gacchanto vātiādi gamanādimattajānanassa gamanādigatavisesajānanassa ca sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Tattha gamanādimattajānanaṃ idha nādhippetaṃ, gamanādigatavisesajānanaṃ pana adhippetanti taṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha kāma’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sattūpaladdhinti satto atthīti upaladdhiṃ sattaggāhaṃ na jahati na pariccajati ‘‘ahaṃ gacchāmi, mama gamana’’nti gāhasabbhāvato. Tato eva attasaññaṃ ‘‘atthi attā kārako vedako’’ti evaṃ pavattaṃ viparītasaññaṃ na ugghāṭeti nāpaneti apaṭipakkhabhāvato, ananabrūhanato vā. Evaṃ bhūtassa cassa kuto kammaṭṭhānādibhāvoti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā vā na hotī’’ti. Imassa panātiādisukkapakkhassa vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Tameva hi atthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘idaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ko gacchatīti gamanakiriyāya kattupucchā, sā kattubhāvavisiṭṭhaattapaṭikkhepatthā dhammamattasseva gamanasiddhidassanato. Kassa gamananti akattutāvisiṭṭhaattaggāhapaṭikkhepatthā. Kiṃkāraṇāti pana paṭikkhittakattukāya gamanakiriyāya aviparītakāraṇapucchā ‘‘gamananti attā manasā saṃyujjati, mano indriyehi, indriyāni attehī’’ti evamādigamanakāraṇapaṭikkhepanato. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi.
并没有任何众生或人真正在行走,因为行走只是法本身在运作、由法本身完成;离开这个法,根本找不到一个能行走的人。现在为了说明“行走只是法本身在完成”,才说“由于心造作的风界鼓动”等等。这里,“心造作”加上“风界鼓动”,就是心造作以及风界的鼓动、颤动,依靠这个而说。在这里,用“心造作”这个词,是为了排除不依附于根的风界鼓动;用“风界鼓动”这个词,是为了排除思、语表等不同种类的心造作;两者合起来,则是为了说明身表。说了“行走”之后,为了说明当身体这样运转时,世间为什么会有“行走”这种说法,才说“因此”等等。“彼”指的是由想要行走之欲而转起的心。“生起风”是指生起以风界为增盛之色聚;这里说的增盛,是从能力上说的,不是从数量上说的。这是针对由行走心等起、作为俱生色身的支撑、维持、移动之缘,以特别方式运转着的风界,所以说“风生起表”。与意向同时存在的变化就是“表”;正是依据如上所说的增盛义,才用“风”来表达,并不是因为风界单独就能生起,否则“表”属于所造色这一点就难以成立了。向前引导而出,就是身体向前方运转,这叫作“进”。巴利
Na koci satto vā puggalo vā gacchati dhammamattasseva gamanasiddhito tabbinimuttassa ca kassaci abhāvato. Idāni dhammamattasseva gamanasiddhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphārenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha cittakiriyā ca sā vāyodhātuyā vipphāro vipphandanañcāti cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāro, tena. Ettha ca cittakiriyaggahaṇena anindriyabaddhavāyodhātuvipphāraṃ nivatteti, vāyodhātuvipphāraggahaṇena cetanāvacīviññattibhedaṃ cittakiriyaṃ nivatteti, ubhayena pana kāyaviññattiṃ vibhāveti. ‘‘Gacchatī’’ti vatvā yathā pavattamāne kāye ‘‘gacchatī’’ti vohāro hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tanti gantukāmatāvasena pavattacittaṃ. Vāyaṃ janetīti vāyodhātuadhikaṃ rūpakalāpaṃ janeti, adhikatā cettha sāmatthiyato, na pamāṇato. Gamanacittasamuṭṭhitaṃ sahajātarūpakāyassa thambhanasandhāraṇacalanānaṃ paccayabhūtena ākāravisesena pavattamānaṃ vāyodhātuṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vāyo viññattiṃ janetī’’ti. Adhippāyasahabhāvī hi vikāro viññatti, yathāvuttaadhikabhāveneva ca vāyogahaṇaṃ, na vāyodhātuyā eva janakabhāvato, aññathā viññattiyā upādāyarūpabhāvo durupapādo siyā. Purato abhinīhāro puratobhāgena kāyassa pavattanaṃ, yo ‘‘abhikkamo’’ti vuccati.
“也是同样的方法”,这是用类推的方式概括地说了之后,为了进一步展开这个意思,才说了“在这里也一样”等话。“从末端开始”,就是从最下端开始。“高耸的状态”,就是向上鼓起来的状态。巴利
‘‘Esevanayo’’ti atidesavasena saṅkhepato vatvā tamevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tatrāpi hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Koṭito paṭṭhāyāti heṭṭhimakoṭito paṭṭhāya. Ussitabhāvoti ubbiddhabhāvo.
对于这样了知的人:当他了知“行走等状态,正是由于心造作的、风界的扩散作用才发生”时,为了让这种了知成为定解,世间那些没有如实了知的人,就由于邪执,或者随顺世俗说法,把这种思量称为“是这样”。“那么,有吗”:这是以自己审察的方式提出的问话。“没有”:这是以决定的方式否定众生的说法。至于“然而,如同……”等句,则是用譬喻来说明这个道理。巴利
Evaṃpajānatoti evaṃ cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāreneva gamanādibhāvo hotīti pajānato tassa evaṃ pajānanāya nicchayagamanatthaṃ ‘‘evaṃ hotī’’ti vicāraṇā vuccati loke yathābhūtaṃ ajānantehi micchābhinivesavasena, lokavohāravasena vā. Atthi panāti attano eva vīmaṃsanavasena pucchāvacanaṃ. Natthīti nicchayavasena sattassa paṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Yathā panātiādi tassevatthassa upamāya vibhāvanaṃ.
就像无心的船被风吹着,从一处到另一处;又像无心的箭被弓弦的力量射出去,从一处到另一处;同样,无心的身体被前面所说的风所击打、被风带走,也从一处到另一处。应当这样理解譬喻的对应关系。如果有人辩解说:“就像船和箭是靠操作它们的人才能到达别处,身体也是这样。”那也可以,这正是我们想要表达的意思。因为船和箭确实是依靠具有和合特征的人才能移动,而不是依靠不具有和合特征的东西;身体也是如此,这有什么损失呢?这样反而更能成立“只是诸法而已”的立场,而不是“有人我”的主张。因此说“犹如依靠线的力量”等等。巴利
Nāvā mālutavegenāti yathā acetanā nāvā vātavegena desantaraṃ yāti, yathā ca acetano tejanaṃ kaṇḍo jiyāvegena desantaraṃ yāti, tathā acetano kāyo vātāhato yathāvuttavāyunā nīto desantaraṃ yātīti evaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sace pana koci vadeyya ‘‘yathā nāvāya tejanassa ca pellakassa purisassa vasena desantaragamanaṃ, evaṃ kāyassāpī’’ti, hotu, evaṃ icchitovāyamattho. Yathā hi nāvā tejanānaṃ saṃhatalakkhaṇasseva purisassa vasena gamanaṃ, na asaṃhatalakkhaṇassa, evaṃ kāyassāpīti kā no hāni, bhiyyopi dhammamattatāva patiṭṭhaṃ labhati, na purisavādo. Tenāha ‘‘yantaṃ suttavasenā’’tiādi.
在这里,“被运用”是指按照前面所说的方式,通过行走等动作而被运用。“住”就是站立。“在此”就是在这个世间。“没有因缘”是指没有想走的心、由这个心产生的风界等因缘。“住”就是应当住,“行”就是应当行、应当去——有谁会这样呢?这是句子的连接。这里的“岂”字表示否定,通过遮遣没有因缘时的住与行,显示一切法的生起都依赖于因缘。由此应当看到,不仅无我性得到彰显,无常性和苦性也同样得到彰显。巴利
Tattha payuttanti heṭṭhā vuttanayena gamanādikiriyāvasena payojitaṃ. Ṭhātīti tiṭṭhati. Etthāti imasmiṃ loke. Vinā hetupaccayeti gantukāmatācitta-taṃsamuṭṭhāna-vāyodhātu-ādihetupaccayehi vinā. Tiṭṭheti tiṭṭheyya. Vajeti vajeyya gaccheyya ko nāmāti sambandho. Paṭikkhepattho cettha kiṃ-saddoti hetupaccayavirahena ṭhānagamanapaṭikkhepamukhena sabbāyapi dhammappavattiyā paccayādhīnavuttitāvibhāvanena attasuññatā viya aniccadukkhatāpi vibhāvitāti daṭṭhabbā.
“被定向”是指:随着各种缘、以各种方式被放置、被安立。“总括语”是指:总摄全部四种威仪的说法;因为前面是分别解说每一种威仪,这里则是把它们合在一起说,意思就是这样。或者也可以说,前一种方式是以威仪为主来说的,在那里,身是次要的、随顺而成的;现在为了显示以身为主、以威仪为次要、随顺而成,所以说了第二种方式。应当这样理解这两种方式的差别。“住”是指:已经发动、正在进行。巴利
Paṇihitoti yathā yathā paccayehi pakārato nihito ṭhapito. Sabbasaṅgāhikavacananti sabbesaṃ catunnampi iriyāpathānaṃ saṅgaṇhanavacanaṃ, pubbe visuṃ visuṃ iriyāpathānaṃ vuttattā idaṃ tesaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā vacananti attho. Purimanayo vā iriyāpathappadhāno vuttoti tattha kāyo appadhāno anunipphādīti idha kāyaṃ padhānaṃ appadhānañca iriyāpathaṃ anunipphādaṃ katvā dassetuṃ dutiyanayo vuttoti evampettha dvinnaṃ nayānaṃ viseso veditabbo. Ṭhitoti pavatto.
把握威仪,其实就是把握有威仪的身体本身,因为威仪只是身体的一种特殊状态,所以说“以把握威仪而于身随观身而住”。因此,这里纯粹是依色蕴来提出集等。这个道理也适用于其余各品。“等”字在这里应当这样理解:像“见生起相者,以渴爱之集、业之集、食之集而见色蕴之生起”这样,把四种食也包含在内;同样,“以无明灭而色灭”等五种行相也摄在其中。其余部分,与前面所说的理路相同。巴利
Iriyāpathapariggaṇhanampi iriyāpathavato kāyasseva pariggaṇhanaṃ tassa avatthāvisesabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘iriyāpathapariggahaṇena kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti. Tenevettha rūpakkhandhavaseneva samudayādayo uddhaṭā. Esa nayo sesavāresupi. Ādināti ettha ādi-saddena yathā ‘‘taṇhāsamudayā kammasamudayā āhārasamudayā’’ti nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ passantopi rupakkhandhassa udayaṃ passatīti ime cattāro āhārā saṅgayhanti, evaṃ ‘‘avijjānirodhā rūpanirodhā’’tiādayopi pañca ākārā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
四正知品的注释巴利
Catusampajaññapabbavaṇṇanā
109 依四正知的方式而说。“正知者”,是指从各方面、以各种方式,或特别地、有差别地了知,所以叫正知;“正知”就是这种了知的状态,也就是如此生起的智慧。把四种正知合在一起,就是“四正知”,这里就是依这个而说。前进称为“向前”,所以说“向前”是指行走。同样,返回称为“退回”,所以说“退回”是指转身返回。而“转身返回”只是指转身这个动作本身;转身之后再走,那仍然只是行走。“向前带”是指以行走的方式把身体向前带。巴利
109.Catusampajaññavasenāti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.284; saṃ. ni. 5.368; dī. ni. abhi. ṭī. 2.214) samantato pakārehi, pakaṭṭhaṃ vā savisesaṃ jānātīti sampajāno, sampajānassa bhāvo sampajaññaṃ, tathāpavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Cattāri sampajaññāni samāhaṭāni catusampajaññaṃ, tassa vasena. Abhikkamanaṃ abhikkantanti āha ‘‘abhikkantaṃ vuccati gamana’’nti. Tathā paṭikkamanaṃ paṭikkantanti āha ‘‘paṭikkantaṃ vuccati nivattana’’nti. Nivattananti ca nivattimattaṃ, nivattitvā pana gamanaṃ gamanameva. Abhiharantoti gamanavasena kāyaṃ upanento.
正确地了知,就是正知。以这种正知去做自己该做的事,这样的人就是正知而行者,所以说“以正知做一切事务”。“正知”这个词就是“正知”的同义说法,前面已经讲过。所谓“令正知生起”,就是在前进等动作中,确实生起不迷乱的心。或者说,这个人具备正知者的行为,所以叫正知而行者。凡是与“法上的增长”这一意义相关联而运作的,就称为“有利益”,例如前进等行为。对有利益的事保持了知,就是有利益正知。对适合自己的、能带来帮助和利益的事保持了知,就是适合正知。在前进等动作中,在托钵的行境中,以及其他地方所发生的、不曾舍弃的、被称为业处的心境中了知,就是行境正知。在前进等动作中不迷乱,就是正知,即不迷乱正知。所谓“观察之后”,就是审察之后。巴利
Sammā pajānanaṃ sampajānaṃ, tena attanā kātabbassa karaṇasīlo sampajānakārīti āha ‘‘sampajaññena sabbakiccakārī’’ti. Sampajānasaddassa sampajaññapariyāyatā pubbe vuttāyeva. Sampajaññaṃ karotevāti abhikkantādīsu asammohaṃ uppādeti eva. Sampajānassa vā kāro etassa atthīti sampajānakārī. Dhammato vaḍḍhisaṅkhātena saha atthena pavattatīti sātthakaṃ, abhikkantādi. Sātthakassa sampajānanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Sappāyassa attano upakārāvahassa hitassa sampajānanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ abhikkamādīsu bhikkhācāragocare, aññatthāpi ca pavattesu avijahite kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte gocare sampajaññaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ. Abhikkamādīsu asammuyhanameva sampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ. Pariggaṇhitvāti paṭisaṅkhāya.
因此,这里是以有益正知来把握的义理。“义”是指依于法而增长。有人可能会怀疑:凡是被称为“有益”的行走,就一定适合吗?为了消除这种疑虑,所以接着开始说“先看塔庙”等等。“像彩绘的工艺品一样”:就像用彩绘做成的雕像,或者像靠机关装置做出来的精美雕像一样。“不如理观察”:是指以依于世俗的无知舍心,对所缘对象作不恰当的把取。关于这一点,经中说:“眼睛看见色之后,生起舍,那是愚者、痴者、凡夫的舍”等等。被大象等踩踏会带来生命危险;看见不适当的景象等,则会成为梵行的障碍。巴利
Tasminti sātthakasampajaññavasena pariggahitaatthe. Attho nāma dhammato vaḍḍhīti yaṃ sātthakanti adhippetaṃ gamanaṃ, taṃ sappāyamevāti siyā kassaci āsaṅkāti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘cetiyadassanaṃ tāvā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Cittakammarūpakāni viyāti cittakammakatapaṭimāyo viya, yantapayogena vā vicittakammapaṭimāyo viya. Asamapekkhanaṃ gehasitaaññāṇupekkhāvasena ārammaṇassa ayoniso gahaṇaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā uppajjati upekkhā bālassa mūḷhassa puthujjanassā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.308). Hatthiādisammaddena jīvitantarāyo, visabhāgarūpadassanādinā brahmacariyantarāyo.
从出家那天开始,比丘们随顺而行的言谈就成了常习;而不随顺的言谈,则被称为它的第二种。因此说:“两种言谈,过去从未说过。”巴利
Pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya bhikkhūnaṃ anuvattanakathā āciṇṇā, ananuvattanakathā pana tassā dutiyā nāma hotīti āha ‘‘dve kathā nāma na kathitapubbā’’ti.
“如此”是在回顾前面说过的“如果那样”等全部内容,而不是在说“男子对女人不净”这类正在讲述的话。因为瑜伽修行以它为生起之处,所以修习的所缘就叫作业处,因此说“名为业处的行境”。受持:按照取相生起的方式,以成就受持善巧来受持。执取:让业处持续运转,意思是直到托钵返回之前都一直精勤于业处。不放下:从受用食物之后,直到前往白天住处之前,不把业处搁到一边。巴利
Evanti ‘‘sace panā’’tiādikaṃ sabbampi vuttākāraṃ paccāmasati, na ‘‘purisassa mātugāmāsubha’’ntiādikaṃ vuccamānaṃ. Yogakammassa pavattiṭṭhānatāya bhāvanāya ārammaṇaṃ kammaṭṭhānanti vuccatīti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ gocara’’nti. Uggahetvāti yathā uggahanimittaṃ uppajjati, evaṃ uggahakosallassa sampādanavasena uggahetvā. Haratīti kammaṭṭhānaṃ pavatteti, yāva piṇḍapātapaṭikkamā anuyuñjatīti attho. Napaccāharatīti āhārūpabhogato yāva divāṭṭhānupasaṅkamanā kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paṭineti.
身体护理,就是洗脸等对身体打理的事。两三次盘腿坐,就是两三次坐下来的情形,也就是两三次热坐。因此说“让热气升起来”。以业处为首,就是以业处为最胜,把业处放在第一位,意思就是这样。这里显示的是接下来要说的“连钵也无知觉”那样的业处,或者说是不放弃随宜奉持的业处。因为认为“舍利塔比受用塔更重要”,所以按先前应做的行为说“礼敬塔庙”。正如在注疏中说:“如果菩提树枝妨碍塔庙,就应当移走。”巴利
Sarīraparikammanti mukhadhovanādisarīrapaṭijagganaṃ. Dve tayo pallaṅketi dve tayo nisajjāvāre, dve tīṇi uṇhāsanāni. Tenāha ‘‘usumaṃ gāhāpento’’ti. Kammaṭṭhānasīsenevāti kammaṭṭhānaggeneva, kammaṭṭhānaṃ padhānaṃ katvā evāti attho. Tena ‘‘pattopi acetano’’tiādinā (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.109) vakkhamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, yathāparihariyamānaṃ vā avijahitvāti dasseti. ‘‘Paribhogacetiyato sarīracetiyaṃ garutara’’nti katvā ‘‘cetiyaṃ vanditvā’’ti pubbakālakiriyāvasena vuttaṃ. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 809; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.128; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.275) ‘‘cetiyaṃ bādhayamānā bodhisākhā haritabbā’’ti vuttā.
为了以法摄受众人,心里想的是“如果我不说,谁来为他们说呢”,所以是出于对法的护念来摄受众人。因此,因为注疏师们说“法谈本来就是应该说的”,又因为不存在脱离了业处的法谈,所以说“因此”。在“随喜之后”这里,也要把“以业处为首”的意思带进来理解前后的关联。所谓“仅以所得来限定”,就是不区分“熟悉、不熟悉”等等,只按所得的程度来说。“怖畏”是指盗贼等外在的威胁所带来的恐惧。巴利
Janasaṅgahatthanti ‘‘mayi akathente etesaṃ ko kathessatī’’ti dhammānuggahena janasaṅgahatthaṃ. Tasmāti. Yasmā ‘‘dhammakathā nāma kathetabbāyevā’’ti aṭṭhakathācariyā vadanti, yasmā ca dhammakathā kammaṭṭhānavinimuttā nāma natthi, tasmā. Anumodanaṃ katvāti etthāpi ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasīsenevā’’ti ānetvā sambandho. Sampattaparicchedenevāti ‘‘paricito aparicito’’tiādivibhāgaṃ akatvā sampattakoṭiyāva. Bhayeti paracakkādibhaye.
业生火:这是指胃火而说的。因为被饥饿疲劳弄得身体疲惫,没有定力,所以无法进入业处的轨道。于其余处:指粥没有被取用的地方。接二连三:这是说明业处现前毫无间断的说法,就像箭一支接一支射出没有间断一样,这个业处也是如此。巴利
Kammajatejoti gahaṇiṃ sandhāyāha. Kammaṭṭhānavīthiṃ nārohati khudāparissamena kilantakāyattā samādhānābhāvato. Avasesaṭṭhāneti yāguyā aggahitaṭṭhāne. Poṅkhānupoṅkhanti kammaṭṭhānupaṭṭhānassa avicchedadassanavacanametaṃ, yathā poṅkhānupoṅkhapavattāya sarapaṭipāṭiyā avicchedo, evametassāpīti.
放弃了修行任务的人,在修习的实践中,因为没有圆满履行义务,就破坏了一切基础。就像经文里说的:“对诸欲没有离贪,对身体没有离贪,对诸色没有离贪,随心所欲地吃饱直到肚子撑满,沉溺于躺卧的快乐、侧卧的快乐、睡眠的快乐,发愿投生到某个天众群体而修梵行。”这就是所说的五种心的荒芜和心的束缚。行已,就是已转起。巴利
Nikkhittadhuro bhāvanānuyoge. Vattapaṭipattiyā apūraṇena sabbavatthāni bhinditvā. ‘‘Kāme avītarāgo hoti, kāye avītarāgo, rūpe avītarāgo, yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ anuyutto viharati, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ caratī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.320; ma. ni. 1.186) evaṃ vutta pañcavidhacetokhilavinibandhacitto. Caritvāti pavattitvā.
“自己爱乐”是指想要自己利益和安乐的人,意思就是有法欲的人。因为这里说的“法”就是利益,以法为因缘产生的就是安乐。或者也可以这样理解:在智者看来,法没有差别,而且属于自身所摄,所以法就叫“自己”;他们喜爱、希求这个法,所以叫“自己爱乐”。“优沙巴”就是二十杖的长度。“依彼想”就是依那块石头的想,知道“他们已经走了这么远”——这就是它的意思。同样的方法,就是“这位比丘”等在站立时所说的那一套,在坐着时也是同样的方法。即使因为担心后来的人吃不到饭,他也仍然增长如理作意。巴利
Attakāmāti attano hitasukhaṃ icchantā, dhammacchandavantoti attho. Dhammoti hi hitaṃ, tannimittakañca sukhanti. Atha vā viññūnaṃ nibbisesattā attabhāvapariyāpannattā ca attā nāma dhammo, taṃ kāmenti icchantīti attakāmā. Usabhaṃ nāma vīsati yaṭṭhiyo. Tāya saññāyāti tāya pāsāṇasaññāya, ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ āgatāti jānantāti adhippāyo. Soyeva nayoti ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādiko yo ṭhāne vutto, so eva nisajjāyapi nayo. Pacchato āgacchantānaṃ chinnabhattabhāvabhayenapi yonisomanasikāraṃ paribrūheti.
我要供养大精进,意思是:世尊为了我们而历经六年修成的难行苦行,我要尽自己所能来供养。因为依教奉行才是真正供养大师,不是用财物来供养。所谓只是站立和经行,这是就应当决意的威仪而言,并不是要否定在吃饭等时候必须坐下。巴利
Bahāpadhānaṃ pūjessāmīti amhākaṃ atthāya lokanāthena cha vassāni kataṃ dukkaracariyaṃ evāhaṃ yathāsatti pūjessāmīti. Paṭipattipūjā hi satthupūjā, na āmisapūjā. Ṭhānacaṅkamanamevāti adhiṭṭhātabbairiyāpathavasena vuttaṃ, na bhojanādikālesu avassaṃ kattabbanisajjāya paṭikkhepavasena.
走下道路之后,不该东张西望,而应先把各条道路看清楚,所以说“观察道路之后”。为了说明“以庄严的步态前行”所指的是什么,才说了“在那里”等话。巴利
Vīthiṃ otaritvā ito cito ca anoloketvā paṭhamameva vīthiyo sallakkhetabbāti āha ‘‘vīthiyo sallakkhetvā’’ti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuccati ‘‘pāsādikena abhikkantenā’’ti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
能亲证独觉菩提,前提是具足亲依止——应当这样理解前后文的关联。以下一切地方也都照此理解。其中,独觉菩提的亲依止圆满,是在二阿僧祇又十万劫中,积集与它相应的福德和智慧资粮;声闻菩提方面,上首弟子是一阿僧祇又十万劫,大声闻弟子只是十万劫,其余的人则是过去生中依离轮回之因而生起的抉择分善法。至于巴希亚·树皮衣者:他因为出生在外地、成长在外地,所以叫巴希亚;因为穿着树皮衣,所以叫树皮衣者。这位具寿——巴利
Paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti, yadi upanissayasampanno hotīti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha ito paresupi. Tattha paccekabodhiyā upanissayasampadā kappānaṃ dve asaṅkhyeyyāni satasahassañca tajjaṃ puññañāṇasambharaṇaṃ, sāvakabodhiyaṃ aggasāvakānaṃ ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ kappasatasahassañca, mahāsāvakānaṃ kappasatasahassameva, itaresaṃ atītāsu jātīsu vivaṭṭasannissayavasena nibbattitaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ kusalaṃ. Bāhiyo dārucīriyoti bahi visaye sañjātasaṃvaḍḍhatāya bāhiyo, dārucīrapariharaṇena dārucīriyoti ca samaññāto. So hi āyasmā –
因此,巴希亚,你应当这样修学:在看的时候,只是看;在听的时候,只是听;在思维的时候,只是思维;在认知的时候,只是认知。巴希亚,当你在看的时候只是看,在听的时候只是听,在思维的时候只是思维,在认知的时候只是认知,那时你就不依着于它。巴希亚,当你不依着于它时,你就不住在那里。巴希亚,当你不住在那里时,你就不在此世、不在彼世、也不在两者之间——这就是苦的尽头。仅凭这简短的开示,他就证得了阿拉汉果。巴利
‘‘Tasmā tiha te, bāhiya, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ ‘diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissati, sute… mute… viññāte viññātamattaṃ bhavissatī’ti. Yato kho te, bāhiya, diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissati, sute… mute… viññāte viññātamattaṃ bhavissati, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tena. Yato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tena, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tattha. Yato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tattha, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, nevidha na huraṃ na ubhayamantarena, esevanto dukkhassā’’ti (udā. 10) – ettakāya desanāya arahattaṃ sacchākāsi.
“那”指的是不迷惑。“如是”应当按现在所说的方式来理解。用“自己前进”这句话,是显示愚痴凡夫由于执取邪见,在前进时产生迷惑;而用“我前进”这句话,则是显示由于执取慢而产生迷惑。这两者若离开渴爱就不可能存在,所以也就同时显示了由执取渴爱而产生的迷惑。说了“如此不迷惑”之后,为了显示那种通过破除密集(概念)而达成的不迷惑,便说出“我前进”等话。其中,因为随行于风界的火界是抬脚的助缘——火界具有向上的性质,所以在抬脚时,风界随行于它。因此,为了显示这两界在此处因作用力而特别强盛,其余诸界则微弱,便说“每一……更强”。又因为随行于火界的风界是前移和侧移的助缘——横向作用的风界在前移和侧移中作用更为突出,所以火界随行于它。为了显示这两界在此处因作用力而特别强盛,其余诸界则微弱,便说“同样地,在前移和侧移中”。虽然随行与所随行确实有差别,但这里只是就火界和风界的体性而使用了“同样地”一词。其中,从已踏之处把脚抬起,叫“举起”;越过站立之处而向前运送,叫“前移”,目的是避开树桩等;为了避开已站稳的脚被碰撞而向侧面运送,叫“侧移”;在脚尚未站稳之前运送叫“前移”,此后叫“侧移”——这就是它们之间的差别。巴利
Tanti asammuyhanaṃ. Evanti idāni vuccamānākārena veditabbaṃ. Attā abhikkamatīti iminā andhaputhujjanassa diṭṭhiggāhavasena abhikkame sammuyhanaṃ dasseti, ahaṃ abhikkamāmīti pana iminā mānaggāhavasena, tadubhayaṃ pana taṇhāya vinā na hotīti taṇhāggāhavasenapi sammuyhanaṃ dassitameva hoti. ‘‘Tathā asammuyhanto’’ti vatvā taṃ asammuyhanaṃ yena ghanavinibbhogena hoti, taṃ dassento ‘‘abhikkamāmī’’tiādimāha. Tattha yasmā vāyodhātuyā anugatā tejodhātu uddharaṇassa paccayo. Uddharaṇagatikā hi tejodhātūti uddharaṇe vāyodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā imāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento ‘‘ekeka…pe… balavatiyo’’ti āha. Yasmā pana tejodhātuyā anugatā vāyodhātu atiharaṇavītiharaṇānaṃ paccayo. Tiriyagatikāya hi vāyodhātuyā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesu sātisayo byāpāroti tejodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā imāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento ‘‘tathā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesū’’ti āha. Satipi anugamanānugantabbatāvisese tejodhātu-vāyodhātu-bhāvamattaṃ sandhāya tathā-saddaggahaṇaṃ. Tattha akkantaṭṭhānato pādassa ukkhipanaṃ uddharaṇaṃ, ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamitvā purato haraṇaṃ atiharaṇaṃ khāṇuādipariharaṇatthaṃ, patiṭṭhitapādaghaṭṭanapariharaṇatthaṃ vā passena haraṇaṃ vītiharaṇaṃ, yāva patiṭṭhitapādo, tāva āharaṇaṃ atiharaṇaṃ, tato paraṃ haraṇaṃ vītiharaṇanti ayaṃ vā etesaṃ viseso.
因为跟着地界的水界,是“放下”的缘。水界的自性确实更重,所以在放下时,水界是跟着地界的。因此,为了说明这两界在这里作用力强,其余诸界作用力弱,就说“在放下……力量强”。再者,因为跟着水界的地界,是“安立”的缘。不仅在依止时,在安立时地界也有特别的作用,所以地界是跟着水界的;同样,在撞击动作中,因为要依靠地界才能完成阻挡,所以那里也是地界跟着水界。因此说“同样在安立与阻挡中也是如此”。“其中”指那个——此处指在那个前进的动作中,或指如前所述的举起等六个方面。“举起”指举起的刹那。色法与无色法,指以举起的方式生起的色法,以及能使其生起的无色法,它们不能到达移转,因为只停留一刹那而已。“各处”指无论在哪里生起,就在那里。因为诸法没有从此处到彼处的移动。“肢节、肢节”等语,是针对举起等各方面说的,应知这是依同类相续而说。因为色法的生起刹那极其迅速,比那些贪著行走的天子上下迎面奔跑时头上与脚上系缚的轭具相触还要更快。为了说明“如芝麻被炒时发出啪啪声而显示破坏,诸有为法也因生起而如此”,所以说“发出啪啪声”。因为已生起者必定坏灭。巴利
Yasmā pathavīdhātuyā anugatā āpodhātu vossajjanassa paccayo. Garutarasabhāvā hi āpodhātūti vossajjane pathavīdhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā tāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento āha ‘‘vossajjane…pe… balavatiyo’’ti. Yasmā pana āpodhātuyā anugatā pathavīdhātu sannikkhepanassa paccayo, patiṭṭhābhāve viya patiṭṭhāpanepi tassā sātisayakiccattā āpodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tathā ghaṭṭanakiriyāya pathavīdhātuyā vasena sannirumbhanassa sijjhanato tatthāpi pathavīdhātuyā āpodhātuanugatabhāvo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tathā sannikkhepanasannirumbhanesū’’ti. Tatthāti tasmiṃ abhikkamane, tesu vā vuttesu uddharaṇādīsu chasu koṭṭhāsesu. Uddharaṇeti uddharaṇakkhaṇe. Rūpārūpadhammāti uddharaṇākārena pavattā rūpadhammā, taṃsamuṭṭhāpakā arūpadhammā ca atiharaṇaṃ na pāpuṇanti khaṇamattāvaṭṭhānato. Tattha tatthevāti yattha yattha uppannā, tattha tattheva. Na hi dhammānaṃ desantarasaṅkamanaṃ atthi. Pabbaṃ pabbantiādi uddharaṇādikoṭṭhāse sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṃ sabhāgasantativasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Atiittaro hi rūpadhammānampi pavattikkhaṇo gamanassādānaṃ devaputtānaṃ heṭṭhupariyena paṭimukhaṃ dhāvantānaṃ sirasi pāde ca baddhadhuradhārāsamāgamatopi sīghataro. Yathā tilānaṃ bhajjiyamānānaṃ paṭapaṭāyanena bhedo lakkhīyati, evaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ uppādenāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭapaṭāyantā’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppannā hi ekantato bhijjantīti.
“与色一起”这句话,是就那些随着各自心的灭去而一同灭去的色法来说的,也就是在那个心之后的第十七个心生起的刹那所生起的色法。如果不是这样,假如色法和名法是同一刹那的,就会和“色是沉重变异、迟迟才灭”等说法相矛盾,也会和“比丘们,我看不到有任何别的法像心这样迅速转变”等经文相矛盾。因为心和心所法都有所缘的自性,它们在生起时,会尽自己的能力去显现作为自己所缘缘的那个对象;在完成各自的自性之后,随即灭去。而色法没有所缘,是需要被显现的。它们被显现的过程要经过十六个心才结束,所以认为它们有十六心刹那的寿命。三蕴只是以与快速识的境相合为缘,识则因为与境相合而快速转变;色法则因为以迟钝的大界为缘,所以转变迟缓。如实了知种种界的智,只有如来才具有。因此,前生缘只说是色法,后生缘也只说是色法,所以色法与名法同刹那的说法根本不合理。因此,应当按照上面所说的道理来理解这里的含义。巴利
Saddhiṃ rūpenāti idaṃ tassa tassa cittassa nirodhena saddhiṃ nirujjhanakarūpadhammānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, yaṃ tato sattarasamacittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppannaṃ. Aññathā yadi rūpārūpadhammā samānakkhaṇā siyuṃ, ‘‘rūpaṃ garupariṇāmaṃ dandhanirodha’’ntiādivacanehi (vibha. aṭṭha. 26) virodho siyā, tathā ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, yathayidaṃ citta’’nti evamādipāḷiyā (a. ni. 1.48). Cittacetasikā hi sārammaṇasabhāvā yathābalaṃ attano ārammaṇapaccayabhūtamatthaṃ vibhāvento eva uppajjantīti tesaṃ taṃsabhāvanipphattianantaraṃ nirodho, rūpadhammā pana anārammaṇā pakāsetabbā, evaṃ tesaṃ pakāsetabbabhāvanivatti soḷasahi cittehi hotīti taṅkhaṇāyukatā tesaṃ icchitā, lahuviññāṇavisayasaṅgatimattapaccayatāya tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ, visayasaṅgatimattatāya ca viññāṇassa lahuparivattitā, dandhamahābhūtapaccayatāya rūpadhammānaṃ dandhaparivattitā, nānādhātuyā yathābhūtañāṇaṃ kho pana tathāgatasseva, tena ca purejātapaccayo rūpadhammova vutto, pacchājātapaccayo ca tassevāti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ samānakkhaṇatā na yujjateva, tasmā vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo.
一个心生起,另一个心灭去。意思是:先前生起的心是另一个心,而它灭去时,是作为后一个心的无间等缘而灭去的,所以由它获得缘的另一个心才生起。如果这样的话,能不能在它们之间找到间隙呢?不能。所以说无间相续。就像波浪之间找不到间隙一样,那些不了解其中差别的人,就以为它们完全是同一个。心的相续流和色的相续流,就这样像河流中的水流一样,一个接一个不断地相续流转。巴利
Aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ,aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhatīti yaṃ purimuppannaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ aññaṃ, taṃ pana nirujjhantaṃ aparassa anantarādipaccayabhāveneva nirujjhatīti tato laddhapaccayaṃ aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ. Yadi evaṃ tesaṃ antaro labbheyyāti noti āha ‘‘avīcimanusambandho’’ti, yathā vīci antaro na labbhati, tadevetanti avisesavidu maññanti, evaṃ anu anu sambandho cittasantāno rūpasantāno ca nadīsotova nadiyaṃ udakappavāho viya vattati.
“向前看”就是ālokita(正视),所以解释说“正前方的观看”。因为无论走去、站住或坐下,只要朝着那个方向看,那就是ālokita。因此,跟着那个方向而转向别处的看,就是vilokita,所以解释说“vilokita名叫朝偏方向的观看”。在扫地、整理工具等事情中,有向下看的olokita;在举起、搬取等事情中,有向上看的ullokita;在避开从后面来的危险等事情中,有向后看的apalokita。因此说:“用这一项,那全部也都包括在内了。”巴利
Abhimukhaṃlokitaṃ ālokitanti āha ‘‘puratopekkhana’’nti. Yasmā yaṃdisābhimukho gacchati tiṭṭhati nisīdati vā, tadabhimukhaṃ pekkhanaṃ ālokitaṃ, tasmā tadanugataṃ vidisālokanaṃ vilokitanti āha ‘‘vilokitaṃ nāma anudisāpekkhana’’nti. Sammajjanaparibhaṇḍādikaraṇe olokitassa, ullokaharaṇādīsu ullokitassa, pacchato āgacchantaparissayassa parivajjanādīsu apalokitassa siyā sambhavoti āha ‘‘iminā vā mukhena sabbānipi tāni gahitānevā’’ti.
“身证者”是指以身亲证、直接体验的人。这位具寿者在修观的时候,就生起了勇猛心:“我正是因为不守护根门,才在教法中生起不乐等种种过失,我一定要好好制伏它!”他因此发起精进,具足强大的惭与愧,又因为在这方面反复修习,在守护根门方面达到了最高圆满。正因如此,导师才把他列为第一,说:“比丘们,在我的比丘弟子中,守护根门第一的,就是难陀。”巴利
Kāyasakkhinti kāyena sacchikatavantaṃ, paccakkhakārinanti attho. So hi āyasmā vipassanākāle eva ‘‘yamevāhaṃ indriyesu aguttadvārataṃ nissāya sāsane anabhiratiādivippakāraṃ patto, tameva suṭṭhu niggaṇhissāmī’’ti ussāhajāto balavahirottappo, tattha ca katādhikārattā indriyasaṃvare ukkaṃsapāramippatto, teneva naṃ satthā ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ indriyesu guttadvārānaṃ yadidaṃ nando’’ti (a. ni. 1.235) etadagge ṭhapesi.
看和望的时候,应当知道它们是有目的的、是适合的。因此,以“因为不舍离业处,所以就是行境正知”这句话所说的义理作为理由,再把它提起来。意思是:只应当依自己的业处来看和望,不应当在蕴等业处之外另找别的办法。而且,“看”等这些名称,实际上只是诸法本身活动的差别。为了说明如实地了知它即是无痴正知,所以说了“内部”等。巴利
Sātthakatā ca sappāyatā ca ālokitavilokitassa veditabbā. Tasmāti ‘‘kammaṭṭhānāvijahanasseva gocarasampajaññabhāvato’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ hetubhāvena paccāmasati. Attano kammaṭṭhānavaseneva ālokanavilokanaṃ kātabbaṃ, khandhādikammaṭṭhānā añño upāyo na gavesitabboti adhippāyo. Ālokitādisamaññāpi yasmā dhammamattasseva pavattiviseso, tasmā tassa yāthāvato jānanaṃ asammohasampajaññanti dassetuṃ ‘‘abbhantare’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“在第一个速行里……也不存在”这句话,是针对五门识的心路中不会生起“女人、男人”等贪染而说的。因为在五门心路里,由于对转向和确定不如理作意,面对可意的女人形象等所缘时就会生起贪爱,面对不可意的所缘时就会生起嗔恨;而在意门心路中,才会生起“女人、男人”这样的贪染。五门速行是它的根源。或者像前面所说的那样,一切有分心等也是如此,这样就说明了意门速行的遍知是以根源来说的。而“外来的”和“暂时的”,则是就五门速行新起和短暂的性质来说的。所谓上下依次破裂、坏灭,是说较低的和较高的前后相续地达到坏灭。那是指速行。它与那不相应,这是连接关系。“外来的”,就像客人一样。“暂时的”,是说这些法以有生灭的时限为寿命,所以叫暂时的。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamajavanepi…pe… na hotī’’ti idaṃ pañcadvāraviññāṇavīthiyaṃ ‘‘itthī puriso’’ti rajjanādīnaṃ abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha hi āvajjanavoṭṭhabbanānaṃ ayoniso āvajjanavoṭṭhabbanavasena iṭṭhe itthirūpādimhi lobho, aniṭṭhe ca paṭigho uppajjati, manodvāre pana ‘‘itthī puriso’’ti rajjanādi hoti, tassa pañcadvārajavanaṃ mūlaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ vā sabbaṃ bhavaṅgādi, evaṃ manodvārajavanassa mūlavasena mūlapariññā vuttā. Āgantukatāvakālikatā pana pañcadvārajavanasseva apubbabhāvavasena ittarabhāvavasena ca vuttā. Heṭṭhupariyavasena bhijjitvā patitesūti heṭṭhimassa uparimassa ca aparāparaṃ bhaṅgappattimāha. Tanti javanaṃ. Tassa na yuttanti sambandho. Āgantuko abbhāgato. Udayabbayaparicchinno tāvatako kālo etesanti tāvakālikāni.
这就是无痴正知。其中,当依五蕴来看、来望而智慧显现时,离开了这些蕴,还有谁是单独的看者、谁是单独的望者呢?“亲依止缘”这一说法,是依照经教的方式从间接角度说的。“俱生缘”只是一个举例,因为相互缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘等也都可以成立。巴利
Etaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ. Tatthāti pañcakkhandhavasena ālokanavilokane paññāyamāne tabbinimutto ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi. Upanissayapaccayoti idaṃ suttantanayena pariyāyato vuttaṃ. Sahajātapaccayoti nidassanamattametaṃ aññamañña-sampayutta-atthiavigatādipaccayānampi labbhanato.
据说有一种蛇类叫“珠宝蛇”。所谓“摇弄”,就是摇晃、摆动的意思,或者指做出娇媚的姿态。巴利
Maṇisappo nāma ekā sappajātīti vadanti. Laḷananti kampananti vadanti, līḷākaraṇaṃ vā laḷanaṃ.
生来体质偏热、燥热很重。由邪命而生的东西之所以不适用,是因为它会败坏戒律、带来损害。就像说“衣服也是无意识的”一样,通过“身体也是无意识的”这一说法来阐明身体是空、无我的——这个含义其实在前面“内部”等处已经说过了——这里是在说明对任何所得都能知足的理由。因此说了“所以”等话。“被四五个结击打”,就是被四五个结打过,或者被四五个结击打而失去美观。巴利
Uṇhapakatiko pariḷāhabahulo. Sīlassa vidūsanena ahitāvahattā micchājīvavasena uppannaṃ asappāyaṃ. Cīvarampi acetanantiādinā cīvarassa viya ‘‘kāyopi acetano’’ti kāyassa attasuññatāvibhāvanena ‘‘abbhantare’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvento itarītarasantosassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Catupañcagaṇṭhikāhatoti āhatacatupañcagaṇṭhiko, catupañcagaṇṭhikāhi vā hatasobho.
八种义,也就是八种不同的用途。就像承载大地的水,要靠承载它的风来维持;同样,吃下去的食物,也是靠风界才能停留在体内,所以说“依风界而住”。“前送”,是指把食物送到嘴边。“穿行”,是指从那里一直运送到腹部。或者,“前送”是指越过口门把食物带进去,“穿行”是指把食物从腹部向旁边移转。“翻转”,是指来回反复地搅动。在这里,食物的保持、翻转、粉碎和变干,都是与地界配合的风界在做,并不是单靠风界本身;因此这些也被说成是地界的功能。“保持湿润”,是指不让风等把它过度吹干,从而维持湿润的状态。“火界”,就是被称为消化火的火界,它消化进入内部的食物。“成为通道”,是指成为食物进入等的路径。“转向”,是指对寻求、吞食、已消化或未消化等情形加以作意和了知。正是这种能逐一了知这些情形的作用,才被称为“正确的精勤”。因为使寻求等得以实现的作用,也必然能成就对此对象的了知,二者是不相分离的。或者,依于正确的精勤、正确的行道之后,才能转向、作意;因为一切识的运转,都是以作意为先行的,所以才这样说。巴利
Aṭṭhavidhopi atthoti aṭṭhavidhopi payojanaviseso. Pathavīsandhārakajalassa taṃsandhārakavāyunā viya paribhuttassa āhārassa vāyodhātunāva āsaye avaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘vāyodhātuvaseneva tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Atiharatīti yāva mukhā abhiharati. Vītiharatīti tato yāva kucchi, tāva harati. Atiharatīti vā mukhadvāraṃ atikkāmento harati. Vītiharatīti kucchigataṃ passato harati. Parivattetīti aparāparaṃ cāreti. Ettha ca āhārassa dhāraṇaparivattanasaṃcuṇṇanavisosanāni pathavīdhātusahitā eva vāyodhātu karoti, na kevalāti tāni pathavīdhātuyāpi kiccabhāvena vuttāni. Allattañca anupāletīti vāyuādīhi atisosanaṃ yathā na hoti, tathā anupāleti allaādīhi atisosanaṃ yathā na hoti, tathā anupāleti allabhāvaṃ. Tejodhātūti gahaṇīsaṅkhātā tejodhātu. Sā hi anto paviṭṭhaṃ āhāraṃ paripāceti. Añjaso hotīti āhārassa pavesanādīnaṃ maggo hoti. Ābhujatīti pariyesanajjhoharaṇajiṇṇājiṇṇatādiṃ āvajjeti, vijānātīti attho. Taṃtaṃvijānananipphādakoyeva hi payogo ‘‘sammāpayogo’’ti vutto. Yena hi payogena pariyesanādi nipphajjati, so tabbisayavijānanampi nipphādeti nāma tadavinābhāvato. Atha vā sammāpayogaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ anvāya āgamma ābhujati samannāharati. Ābhogapubbako hi sabbopi viññāṇabyāpāroti tathā vuttaṃ.
从“行走”来说,是指为了乞食而朝乞食的村落走去。从“寻求”来说,是指在乞食的村落里为乞食而四处走动。从“受用”来说,是指吃下食物。从“住处”来说,是指胆汁等所依止的地方。所谓“住处”,意思是:即使它们同时运作,也由于业力的力量而各自固定,依照各自的界限互不混杂,在那里停留、安住、运转,所以叫“住处”,也就是停在胃上方的胆汁等。这个词本身就含有“界限”的意思。从“贮藏”来说,就像吃下的食物在这里堆积、停留,所以叫“贮藏”,也就是胃。从“未消化”来说,是指还没有被叫作消化火的业生之火消化。从“已消化”来说,是指吃下的食物已经消化的状态。从“结果”来说,是指由此产生的结果。从“流溢”来说,是指从各处渗漏出来。从“遍涂”来说,是指全面地涂抹。这里是简要的说明,详细内容应当从《清净道论注疏》中获取。巴利
Gamanatoti bhikkhācāravasena gocaragāmaṃ uddissa gamanato. Pariyesanatoti gocaragāme bhikkhatthaṃ āhiṇḍanato. Paribhogatoti āhārassa paribhuñjanato. Āsayatoti pittādiāsayato. Āsayati ettha ekajjhaṃ pavattamānopi kammabalavatthito hutvā mariyādavasena aññamaññaṃ asaṅkarato sayati tiṭṭhati pavattatīti āsayo, āmāsayassa upari tiṭṭhanako pittādiko. Mariyādattho hi ayamākāro. Nidheti yathābhutto āhāro nicito hutvā tiṭṭhati etthāti nidhānaṃ, āmāsayo. Tato nidhānato. Aparipakkatoti gahaṇīsaṅkhātena kammajatejena avipakkato. Paripakkatoti yathābhuttassa āhārassa vipakkabhāvato. Phalatoti nipphattito. Nissandatoti ito cito ca vissandanato. Sammakkhanatoti sabbaso makkhanato. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāya (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.294) gahetabbo.
还有其他疾病,比如耳痛、痔疮、瘘管等。“非处”是指不合适的地方,被人或非人所占据,比如田地、神庙等。因为已经被丢弃,所以既不属于自己,也不属于任何人,而且令人厌恶,因此也不属于别人。从水罐里,就是从竹筒等盛水器具里。那个,是指倒掉的水。巴利
Aññe ca rogā kaṇṇasūlabhagandarādayo. Aṭṭhāneti manussāmanussapariggahite ayutte ṭhāne khettadevāyatanādike. Nissaṭṭhattā neva attano kassaci anissajjitattā jigucchanīyattā ca na parassa. Udakatumbatoti veḷunāḷiādiudakabhājanato. Tanti chaḍḍitaudakaṃ.
长途威仪,是指持续很久、时间很长的威仪。中等威仪,是指以乞食等行为方式而进行的威仪。细碎威仪,是指在精舍或其他地方,以在此处彼处来回转身等动作而进行的威仪——他们是这么说的。有人说:关于“行,即行走”,前面是连同“前进”与“返回”一起举出,并以“行走”说明了身体向前、向后的移动;因此,这里所说的只是“行走”本身。巴利
Addhānairiyāpathā cirappavattikā dīghakālikā iriyāpathā. Majjhimā bhikkhācaraṇādivasena pavattā. Cuṇṇikairiyāpathā vihāre aññatthāpi ito cito ca parivattanādivasena pavattāti vadanti. ‘‘Gateti gamane’’ti pubbe abhikkamapaṭikkamaggahaṇena gamanenapi purato pacchato ca kāyassa atiharaṇaṃ vuttanti idha gamanameva gahitanti keci.
因为玛哈斯瓦长老的主张是这样:对于在每一种接续不断的威仪中现起的名法与色法,都是依着就在那里灭去的观察,而说为“正知而行”;而在这里,则是依正知与观行的方式来说的,因此说:“这正是玛哈斯瓦长老所说的不迷乱之任,是这部《念处经》所意指的。”不过在《沙门果经》中,四种正知全都可得,因为那段开示只是着眼于显示沙门果的殊胜。说“与念相应”,是为了表明:正如正知的作用是主要的,念的作用也是主要的,并不是为了仅仅显示念的存在。因为任何时候都不可能有脱离念的智生起。这些句子,就是关于正知的句子。别别解说,就是逐一分别解释。由此也说明,正如正知是主要的,念也是主要的。巴利
Yasmā mahāsīvattheravāde anantare anantare iriyāpathe pavattarūpārūpadhammānaṃ tattha tattheva nirodhadassanavasena sampajānakāritā gahitā, idañcettha sampajaññavipassanācāravasena āgataṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tayidaṃ mahāsīvattherena vuttaṃ asammohadhuraṃ imasmiṃ satipaṭṭhānabhutte adhippeta’’nti. Sāmaññaphale (dī. ni. 1.214; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.214; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.214) pana sabbampi catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ labbhati yāvadeva sāmaññaphalavisesadassanaparattā tassā desanāya. Satisampayuttassevāti idaṃ yathā sampajaññakiccassa padhānatā, evaṃ satikiccassāpīti dassanatthaṃ, na satiyā sabbhāvamattadassanatthaṃ. Na hi kadāci satirahitā ñāṇappavatti atthi. Etāni padānīti sampajaññapadāni. Vibhattānevāti visuṃ vibhattāneva. Imināpi sampajaññassa viya satiyāpi padhānataṃyeva vibhāveti.
还有一种说法:有的比丘在行走时,心里想着别的事、盘算着别的事而走;有的比丘则是不放弃业处而走。同样,有的比丘站着、坐着、躺着时,心里想着别的事、盘算着别的事而躺;有的比丘则是不放弃业处而躺。不过,仅凭这些还不明显,所以他们用经行来说明。比丘进入经行道,站在经行道的一端时,这样观察:在东端经行道生起的名法与色法,还没到达西端,就在那里灭了;在西端经行道生起的,还没到达东端,就在那里灭了;在经行道中间生起的,两端都没到达,就在那里灭了;在经行时生起的名色法,还没到达站立处,就在那里灭了;在站立时生起的,还没到达坐下处,就在那里灭了;在坐着时生起的,还没到达躺卧处,就在那里灭了。这样观察的时候,就在观察的当下,让心沉入有分。起身时,是带着业处才起身的。这样的比丘,就叫作在行走等威仪中正知而行的人。即使这样,在经中业处仍然不明显。所以,比丘在自己能力所及的范围内,经行、站立、坐下之后,躺卧时这样观察而睡:身体是无心的,床也是无心的;身体不知道我在床上躺着,床也不知道身体在我上面躺着;无心的身体躺在无心的床上。这样观察的时候,就在观察的当下,让心沉入有分。醒来时,是带着业处才醒来的。这样的人,就叫作在睡眠中正知的人。巴利
Aparo nayo – eko bhikkhu gacchanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento gacchati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva gacchati, tathā eko tiṭṭhanto nisīdanto sayanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento sayati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva sayati, etthakena pana na pākaṭaṃ hotīti caṅkamanena dīpenti. Yo hi bhikkhu caṅkamanaṃ otaritvā caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ ṭhito pariggaṇhāti ‘‘pācīnacaṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pavattā rūpārūpadhammā pacchimacaṅkamanakoṭiṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, pacchimacaṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pavattāpi pācīnacaṅkamanakoṭiṃ appatvā ettheva niruddā, caṅkamanamajjhe pavattā ubho koṭiyo appatvā ettheva niruddhā, caṅkame pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ṭhānaṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, ṭhāne pavattā nisajjaṃ, nisajjāya pavattā sayanaṃ appatvā etthevaniruddhā’’ti, evaṃ pariggaṇhanto pariggaṇhantoyeva cittaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otāreti, uṭṭhahanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva uṭṭhahati, ayaṃ bhikkhu gatādīsu sampajānakārī nāma hoti, evampi sutte kammaṭṭhānaṃ avibhūtaṃ hoti, tasmā yo bhikkhu yāva sakkoti, tāva caṅkamitvā ṭhatvā nisīditvā sayamāno evaṃ pariggahetvā sayati ‘‘kāyo acetano, mañco acetano, kāyo na jānāti ‘‘ahaṃ mañce sayito’ti, mañco na jānāti ‘‘mayi kāyo sayito’’ti, acetano kāyo acetane mañce sayito’’ti, evaṃ pariggaṇhantoyeva cittaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otāreti, pabujjhanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva pabujjhati, ayaṃ sutte sampajānakārī nāma hotīti.
由身体动作等所产生,并且属于那类状态,又因为是由转向作用所引发,所以称为速行;或者,一切在六门中运作的唯作运作,都称为唯作运作。当这种状态存在时,就称为清醒。能这样把握的人,就称为在清醒中正知的人。另外,把一日一夜分成六份,在其中五份里保持醒觉的人,也称为在清醒中正知的人。以解脱为根本而说法的人,舍弃三十二种畜生论,依止十种论题讲述适合的言论,就称为在言语中正知的人。在三十八种所缘中,随着心的喜好而运作作意的人,或者证入第二禅的人,就称为在沉默中正知的人。因为第二禅没有语行,所以特别称为沉默。前行等只是色法运作方式的差别,因此说应当只推求色蕴的生起与灭去。其余内容如前所述。巴利
Kāyādikiriyānibbattanena tammayattā āvajjanakiriyāsamuṭṭhitattā ca javanaṃ, sabbampi vā chadvārappavattaṃ kiriyāmayapavattaṃ nāma, tasmiṃ sati jāgaritaṃ nāma hotīti pariggaṇhanto jāgarite sampajānakārī nāma. Apica rattindivaṃ cha koṭṭhāse katvā pañca koṭṭhāse jaggantopi jāgarite sampajānakārī nāma hoti. Vimuttāyatanasīsena dhammaṃ desentopi bāttiṃsatiracchānakathaṃ pahāya dasakathāvatthunissitaṃ sappāyakathaṃ kathentopi bhāsite sampajānakārī nāma. Aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu cittaruciyaṃ manasikāraṃ pavattentopi dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannopi tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī nāma. Dutiyañhi jhānaṃ vacīsaṅkhāravirahato visesato tuṇhībhāvo nāma. Rūpadhammasseva pavattiākāravisesā abhikkamādayoti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpakkhandhasseva samudayo ca vayo ca nīharitabbo’’ti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
厌恶作意章的注释巴利
Paṭikūlamanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
110 以厌恶作意的方式,也就是由于令人厌恶的性质。可厌本身就是可厌,凡是具有可厌自性、可厌行相的,就以对它作意的方式。因为即使没有表示状态的词,状态的意义也能被理解,比如布的白。由于在《清净道论》中有说明,所以应该按照那里以及那部注释中所说的方式来理解。用布等材料像袋子一样捆扎而成的遮盖物,叫做包裹。明显的行相,是指超越概念施设之后,所现起的不净行相。为了显示iti这个词具有行相的含义而说了如是,接着为了从具体形态上显示那个原因,又说通过摄持头发等。巴利
110.Paṭikūlamanasikāravasenāti (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.377) jigucchanīyatāya. Paṭikūlameva paṭikūlaṃ yo paṭikūlasabhāvo paṭikūlākāro, tassa manasikaraṇavasena. Antarenapi hi bhāvavācinaṃ saddaṃ bhāvattho viññāyati yathā ‘‘paṭassa sukka’’nti. Yasmā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.182-183) vuttaṃ, tasmā tattha taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Vatthādīhi pasibbakākārena bandhitvā kataṃ āvaṭanaṃ putoḷi. Vibhūtākāroti paṇṇattiṃ samatikkamitvā asubhabhāvassa upaṭṭhitākāro. Iti-saddassa ākāratthataṃ dassento ‘‘eva’’nti vatvā taṃ kāraṇaṃ sarūpato dassento ‘‘kesādipariggahaṇenā’’ti āha.
界作意章的注释巴利
Dhātumanasikārapabbavaṇṇanā
111 以界作意:就是以地界等四界为所缘而生起的修习作意,也就是四界差别的意思。因为界作意、界业处、四界差别,在意义上其实是同一回事。屠牛者:就是为了谋生而杀牛的人。弟子:就是为了干活而住在他身边的人。站立这个词,在“站立或……”等语句里,是指具备站立等威仪状态,或者排除行走而表示安住于其余威仪;但在这里,它是指一般性地表示色身活动的方式,所以说“以四种威仪中任何一种方式而住立,称为随立”。其中,方式就是指站立等色身活动的方式。因为站立等被称为威仪的身行,是身体活动的道路、进行的途径,所以叫“威仪”。随立就是随其当下活动的样子。这里所说的住立,其实含有安置的意思,所以说“由随立及随安置故”。或者,住立是说明身体与站立威仪的连结,安置是说明与其他威仪的连结。又或者,住立是说明色法在每一刹那依各自的作用而安住,安置是说明由种种缘的作用、以种种方式被安置,这里也应该这样理解。观察:就是一再去观察,用智慧之眼剖析,分别地看见每一个部分。巴利
111.Dhātumanasikāravasenāti pathavīdhātuādikā catasso dhātuyo ārabbha pavattabhāvanāmanasikāravasena, catudhātuvavatthānavasenāti attho. Dhātumanasikāro dhātukammaṭṭhānaṃ catudhātuvavatthānanti hi atthato ekaṃ. Goghātakoti jīvikatthāya gunnaṃ ghātako. Antevāsikoti kammakaraṇavasena tassa samīpavāsī. Ṭhita-saddo ‘‘ṭhito vā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.263; a. ni. 5.28) ṭhānasaṅkhātairiyāpathasamaṅgitāya, ṭhā-saddassa vā gativinivattiatthatāya aññattha ṭhapetvā gamanaṃ sesairiyāpathasamaṅgitāya bodhako, idha pana yathā tathā rūpakāyassa pavattiākārabodhako adhippetoti āha ‘‘catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ yena kenaci ākārena ṭhitattā yathāṭhita’’nti. Tattha ākārenāti ṭhānādinā rūpakāyassa pavattiākārena. Ṭhānādayo hi iriyāpathasaṅkhātāya kāyikakiriyāya patho pavattimaggoti ‘‘iriyāpatho’’ti vuccanti. Yathāṭhitanti yathāpavattaṃ. Yathāvuttaṭṭhānamevettha ‘‘paṇidhāna’’nti adhippetanti āha ‘‘yathāṭhitattā ca yathāpaṇihita’’nti. Ṭhitanti vā kāyassa ṭhānasaṅkhātairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ. Paṇihitanti tadaññairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ. Ṭhitanti vā kāyasaṅkhātānaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ khaṇe sakiccavasena avaṭṭhānaparidīpanaṃ. Paṇihitanti paccayakiccavasena tehi tehi paccayehi pakārato nihitaṃ paṇihitanti evampettha attho veditabbo. Paccavekkhatīti pati pati avekkhati, ñāṇacakkhunā vinibbhujitvā visuṃ visuṃ passati.
现在,为了通过阐明“状态之义”来显示前面已经说过的内容,所以说了“就像屠牛者”等这些话。其中,“喂养”是指用米糠团、饭、棉籽等来饲养,使肉积聚、肥厚、增长。“被杀害后死去”:就是受到伤害之后死了。“死”就是刚死的那一刹那,因此说“就在那时”。“母牛”的想不会消失:因为那些肢节部分按照原来的排列方式,即使是在刚死的母牛身上,由于那些排列还没有坏掉,所以依这些肢节而生的“母牛”这个名称仍然存在。“剖开、分裂、分解”:巴利语 bīlā 是“部分”的意思,是把 va 音变成 ba 音,把 i 音变成 ī 音而成的。Bīlaso 就是一部分一部分地。Vibhajitvā 就是“从骨聚中把肉分离出来”,或者“把分离出来的肉分成一份一份”。因此说“肉的想生起”。即使是已经出家的人,对于还没有执取的业处也是如此。Ghanavinibbhoga 就是“对密集、相续、聚的作用加以分解、分离”。Dhātuso paccavekkhato 就是“通过作密集分解,对每一界、每一界,即地界等界,分别地观察”。Sattasaññā 就是“依我见而现起的想”,他们说这就是“想”;即使依世俗言说而现起的众生想,那时也应当消失,因为如实完成密集分解的缘故。这样存在时,依照所说的譬喻之义,所喻之义正好相合、相符。因此说“心只是依界而住立”。Dakkho 就是“灵巧的人”,对种种名称善巧,即如在屠宰场中,当具有尾、蹄、角等骨肉等支分聚合一而未分别时,有“母牛”的名称,分别时则没有;分别时则有“骨、肉”等支分的名称,他是这样了知的人。Catumahāpatho viya catuiriyāpatho 就是“像母牛站立的四大道一样,是身体活动的道路的四种威仪路”。因为这在《清净道论》(Visuddhi. 1.306)中已广说,所以在那里及其注释(Visuddhi. Mahāṭī. 1.306)中也应依照所说的方式来了知。巴利
Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ bhāvatthavibhāvanavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā goghātakassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha posentassāti maṃsūpacayaparibrūhanāya kuṇḍakabhattakappāsaṭṭhiādīhi saṃvaḍḍhentassa. Vadhitaṃ matanti hiṃsitaṃ hutvā mataṃ. Matanti ca matamattaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tāvadevā’’ti. Gāvīti saññā na antaradhāyati yāni aṅgapaccaṅgāni yathāsanniviṭṭhāni upādāya gāvīsamaññā matamattāyapi gāviyā, tesaṃ taṃsannivesassa avinaṭṭhattā. Vilīyanti bhijjanti vibhujjantīti bīlā bhāgā va-kārassa ba-kāraṃ, i-kārassa ī-kāraṃ katvā. Bīlasoti bīlaṃ bīlaṃ katvā. Vibhajitvāti aṭṭhisaṅghāṭato maṃsaṃ vivecetvā, tato vā vivecitamaṃsaṃ bhāgaso katvā. Tenevāha ‘‘maṃsasaññā pavattatī’’ti. Pabbajitassapi apariggahitakammaṭṭhānassa. Ghanavinibbhoganti santatisamūhakiccaghanānaṃ vinibbhujanaṃ vivecanaṃ. Dhātuso paccavekkhatoti ghanavinibbhogakaraṇena dhātuṃ dhātuṃ pathavīādidhātuṃ visuṃ visuṃ katvā paccavekkhantassa. Sattasaññāti attānudiṭṭhivasena pavattā saññāti vadanti, vohāravasena pavattasattasaññāyapi tadā antaradhānaṃ yuttameva yāthāvato ghanavinibbhogassa sampādanato. Evañhi sati yathāvuttaopammatthena upameyyattho aññadatthu saṃsandati sameti. Tenevāha ‘‘dhātuvaseneva cittaṃ santiṭṭhatī’’ti. Dakkhoti cheko taṃtaṃsamaññāya kusalo, yathājāte sūnasmiṃ naṅguṭṭhakhuravisāṇādivante aṭṭhimaṃsādiavayavasamudāye avibhatte gāvīsamaññā, na vibhatte, vibhatte pana aṭṭiṃmaṃsādiavayavasamaññāti jānanako. Catumahāpatho viya catuiriyāpathoti gāviyā ṭhitacatumahāpatho viya kāyassa pavattimaggabhūto catubbidho iriyāpatho. Yasmā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.306) vitthāritā, tasmā tattha taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.306) vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
九尸陀林篇章的注释巴利
Navasivathikapabbavaṇṇanā
112 112. 在坟场中被丢弃的、与膨胀等有关的、分门别类生起的谈论,以及那些谈论所指的膨胀等不净部分,结集者们安立了“坟场篇”这个名称。因此说“以坟场篇来分别”。从寿命灭尽之上,意思是从命尽之后,也就是死亡之后。“已升起的”,指胀起来的。因为膨胀,所以不断向上肿胀,这就是肿起。与白色、红色交错破裂而混杂的青黑色,或者是先前颜色变异而成的青黑色,青瘀就是青瘀,这里的“ka”音只是增加音节,没有别的意思,就像“黄色、红色”那样。因为可厌性,即令人憎恶性。或者说,为了显示这个“ka”音有可厌的意思,才说“可厌的青瘀”就是青瘀,正如“恶名声流布”那样。从破裂的地方,被乌鸦、鹭等啄食。“正在流出的脓”,指涌出的脓,到处滴流的脓,这是它的意思。“如此的状态”,就是正在流出脓的状态。巴利
112. Sivathikāya apaviddhauddhumātakādipaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ odhiso pavattānaṃ kathānaṃ tadabhidheyyānañca uddhumātakādiasubhabhāgānaṃ sivathikapabbānīti saṅgītikārehi gahitasamaññā. Tenāha ‘‘sivathikapabbehi vibhajitu’’nti. Uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānāti jīvitakkhayato upari maraṇato paraṃ. Samuggatenāti uṭṭhitena. Uddhumātattāti uddhaṃ uddhaṃ dhumātattā sūnattā. Setarattehi viparibhinnaṃ vimissitaṃ nīlaṃ vinīlaṃ, purimavaṇṇavipariṇāmabhūtaṃ vā nīlaṃvinīlaṃ, vinīlameva vinīlakanti ka-kārena padavaḍḍhanamāha anatthantarato yathā ‘‘pītakaṃ lohitaka’’nti (dha. sa. 616). Paṭikūlakattāti jigucchanīyattā. Kucchitaṃ vinīlaṃ vinīlakanti kucchanattho vā ayaṃ ka-kāroti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.316; a. ni. 5.213; mahāva. 285). Paribhinnaṭṭhānehi kākakaṅkādīhi. Vissandamānaṃ pubbanti vissavantaṃ pubbaṃ, tahaṃ tahaṃ paggharantapubbanti attho. Tathābhāvanti vissandamānapubbabhāvaṃ.
所谓“比丘”,就是指经里说的“看见身体被丢弃在坟场”的那个人,他就是比丘。他把自己的身体拿来跟那个作对比。“此身也是……”这些话说的是对比的方式。“命”指色法的命根,不过这里所说的非色法命根,其实只是识。“暖”指业生的火界。“具有这样腐烂的性质”,意思是说,它具有如此极度腐烂的性质,并不是像命等还没有消失时那样只是轻微的腐烂。将会变成那样,就是说会变成那样的状态,所以说“将会变成这种膨胀等的不同状态”。巴利
So bhikkhūti yo ‘‘passeyya sarīraṃ sivathikāya chaḍḍita’’nti vutto, so bhikkhu. Upasaṃharati sadisataṃ. Ayampi khotiādi upasaṃharaṇākāradassanaṃ . Āyūti rūpajīvitindriyaṃ, arūpajīvitindriyaṃ panettha viññāṇagatikameva. Usmāti kammajatejo. Evaṃpūtikasabhāvoti evaṃ ativiya pūtikasabhāvo, na āyuādīnaṃ avigame viya mattasoti adhippāyo. Ediso bhavissatīti evaṃbhāvīti āha ‘‘evaṃuddhumātādibhedo bhavissatī’’ti.
撕扯、撕扯:就是拔掉、拔掉。与残余的少许血肉相连:因为没有被完全吃尽,所以到处还连着剩下的一点点血肉。其他手骨:这是笼统地说明手骨散乱的情形;为了显示它们彻底散乱,就说乃至分裂成六十四块等。经年以上者:指已经过了一年以上的。那些则已满一周年,所以说逾年者。由于陈旧,坚固性消失而粉碎,这里就称为腐败;为了说明它是怎样变成这样的,就说在露天等。依被吃等方式,第二尸陀林篇等中所确定的含义已说,所以说应依被吃等方式来连接。巴利
Luñcitvā luñcitvāti uppāṭetvā uppāṭetvā. Sesāvasesamaṃsalohitayuttanti sabbaso akhāditattā tahaṃ tahaṃ sesena appāvasesena maṃsalohitena yuttaṃ. Aññena hatthaṭṭhikanti avisesena hatthaṭṭhikānaṃ vippakiṇṇatā jotitāti anavasesato tesaṃ vippakiṇṇataṃ dassento ‘‘catusaṭṭhibhedampī’’tiādimāha. Terovassikānīti tirovassaṃ gatāni. Tāni pana saṃvaccharaṃ vītivattāni hontīti āha ‘‘atikkantasaṃvaccharānī’’ti. Purāṇatāya ghanabhāvavigamena vicuṇṇatā idha pūtibhāvoti so yathā hoti, taṃ dassento ‘‘abbhokāse’’tiādimāha. Khajjamānatādivasena dutiyasivathikapabbādīnaṃ vavatthitatthā vuttaṃ ‘‘khajjamānādīnaṃ vasena yojanā kātabbā’’ti.
这里说的“正是这二者”,是用限定词把安止业处限定在此处,因为在其他段落里没有安止业处。正因为有“eva”这个词,才限定(排除)别处。因此应当看到,那两个段落具有观业处的性质这一点并没有被否定,因为从那里也能见到无常等。开示诸行过患的,就是墓园诸节,所以说“因为墓园省思是依随观过患而说的”。威仪等段落不导向安止,这一点很明显,所以说“其余十二种”。至于这里在意义上没有详细分别的内容,那是很容易理解的。巴利
Imānevadveti avadhāraṇena appanākammaṭṭhānaṃ tattha niyameti aññapabbesu tadabhāvato. Yato hi eva-kāro, tato aññattha niyameti, tena pabbadvayassa vipassanākammaṭṭhānatāpi appaṭisiddhāti daṭṭhabbā aniccādidassanato. Saṅkhāresu ādīnavavibhāvanāni sivathikapabbānīti āha ‘‘sivathikānaṃ ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttattā’’ti. Iriyāpathapabbādīnaṃ anappanāvahatā pākaṭā evāti ‘‘sesāni dvādasāpī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyamevāti.
受随观的注释巴利
Vedanānupassanāvaṇṇanā
113 在“乐受”这一说法里,“乐”的意思是:它能带来快乐,也就是让相应的心所和身体感到舒服、愉悦。或者说,它能好好地消化、破坏身体上和精神上的病痛,所以叫“乐”。另有一种解释是:它很容易提供机会,所以叫“乐”。“受”的意思是感受,即领纳所缘的味道。“正在感受”就是正在领纳。关于“欲”等,在讲威仪的部分已经说过了。有正知地感受,就是有正知的感受。巴利
113.Sukhaṃ vedananti ettha sukhayatīti sukhā, sampayuttadhamme kāyañca laddhassāde karotīti attho. Suṭṭhu vā khādati, khanati vā kāyikaṃ cetasikañca ābādhanti sukhā. Sukaraṃ okāsadānaṃ etissāti sukhāti apare. Vedayati ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavatīti vedanā. Vedayamānoti anubhavamāno. Kāmantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ iriyāpathapabbe vuttameva. Sampajānassa vediyanaṃ sampajānavediyanaṃ.
“只是名言而已”这句话,是在说明:当人正在感受乐受而说“我感受乐受”时,这只是名言层面的表达而已。“事所缘”是指以色等为所缘。因为色等所缘是受生起的依处,所以被称为“事”。“Assā”的意思是“可能会有”。除了诸法之外,并没有别的作者,为了显示诸法本身就是作者,所以说“只有受在感受”。“呻吟”:是指见到压制强大受冲力所带来的过患之后,为了给那个受一个宣泄的机会而发出呻吟。“平衡精进”:因为忍耐的精进过于强烈,所以把它降低,让它与定达到均等,这就是平衡精进。“与无碍解俱行”:是指与出世间的无碍解一起。或者,当世间无碍解生起时,在那时也具有能力,因此也说“与无碍解俱行”。“等首者”:就是“次第等首者”,意思是紧接在省察过程之后的那一过程中般涅槃。巴利
‘‘Vohāramattaṃ hotī’’ti etena ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti idaṃ vohāramattanti dasseti. Vatthuārammaṇāti rūpādiārammaṇā. Rūpādiārammaṇañhi vedanāya pavattiṭṭhānatāya ‘‘vatthū’’ti adhippetaṃ. Assāti bhaveyya. Dhammavinimuttassa aññassa kattu abhāvato dhammasseva kattubhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘vedanāva vedayatī’’ti āha. Nitthunantoti. Balavato vedanāvegassa nirodhane ādīnavaṃ disvā tassa avasaradānavasena nitthunanto. Vīriyasamataṃ yojetvāti adhivāsanavīriyassa adhimattattā tassa hāpanavasena samādhinā samarasatāpādanena vīriyasamataṃ yojetvā. Saha paṭisambhidāhīti lokuttarapaṭisambhidāhi saha. Lokiyānampi vā sati uppattikāle tattha samatthataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘saha paṭisambhidāhī’’ti. Samasīsīti vārasamasīsī hutvā, paccavekkhaṇavārassa anantaravāre parinibbāyīti attho.
就像对乐受那样,对苦受也要这样理解:正如“他感受乐……”等说法是在说明有正知的感受,对苦受也是如此。其中,“dukkhayati”就是带来苦,所以叫苦,意思是压迫、逼恼与受相应的心所和身体。或者,它恶劣地嚼碎、挖掘身心的安乐,所以叫苦。另有一种说法:因为它很难给出机会,所以叫苦。“非色业处”是指执取非色,意思是借着非色的法门投入观修。不过,通过色业处也能包含投入止修;而这里本意是指投入观修,为了说明这一点,所以说:“执取色,也就是这里所说的执取非色。”说到“四界差别”时,这里也要引出“大多”一词来连接。所谓“那两者”,是指四界差别的简略和详细两种方式。按简略作意的方式,见于《大念处经》;按详细作意的方式,则见于《教诫罗睺罗经》《界分别经》等。巴利
Yathā ca sukhaṃ, evaṃ dukkhanti yathā ‘‘sukhaṃ vedayatī’’tiādinā sampajānavediyanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, evaṃ dukkhampi. Tattha dukkhayatīti dukkhā, sampayuttadhamme kāyañca pīḷeti vibādhatīti attho. Duṭṭhuṃ vā khādati, khanati vā kāyikaṃ cetasikañca sātanti dukkhā. Dukkaraṃ okāsadānaṃ etissāti dukkhāti apare. Arūpakammaṭṭhānanti arūpapariggahaṃ, arūpadhammamukhena vipassanābhinivesanti attho. Rūpakammaṭṭhānena pana samathābhinivesopi saṅgayhati, vipassanābhiniveso pana idhādhippetoti dassento āha. ‘‘Rūpapariggaho arūpapariggahotipi etadeva vuccatī’’ti. Catudhātuvavatthānaṃ kathesīti etthāpi ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tadubhayanti catudhātuvavatthānassa saṅkhepavitthāradvayamāha. Saṅkhepamanasikāravasena mahāsatipaṭṭhāne, vitthāramanasikāravasena rāhulovāda- (ma. ni. 2.115-117) dhātuvibhaṅgādīsu (vibha. 174-175).
用“大多数”这个说法,也说明了依其他法来谈非色业处确实是存在的。为了把它分开详细说明,才说了“有三种……”等话。这里,“投入”指进入,“开始”是它的意思。因为这种分类只在开始阶段有,而思择则是在毫无遗漏地把握一切法之后才运作。所谓“把握了色业处时”,这是就通过色门投入观来说的;而通过非色门投入观,则大多是止行者所希望修习的。他先把握禅支,之后再把握其余诸法。“第一个投向”:一切心所都依于心,称为心的作用,所以说触是心的第一个投向。已生起的触,或者说心与心所的集合体被所缘接触时,就借着与触同时生起的受,在同一刹那感受;但触就像灯之于光一样,是受等的特殊缘,所以被说成似乎在前。这就是所谓的“安立所缘的特相”。关于“触者”,是指以接触的方式接触所缘。这种非色法虽然在某一方面并不粘着,却像眼对色、耳对声那样,心与所缘仿佛在接触、仿佛在撞击一般地运作。正因如此,它被称为“以撞击为作用”。巴利
Yebhuyyaggahaṇena tadaññadhammavasenapi arūpakammaṭṭhānakathāya atthitā dīpitāti taṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘tividho hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha abhinivesoti anuppaveso, ārambhoti attho. Ārambhe eva hi ayaṃ vibhāgo, sammasanaṃ pana anavasesatova dhamme pariggahetvā vattati. Pariggahite rūpakammaṭṭhāneti idaṃ rūpamukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, arūpamukhena pana vipassanābhiniveso yebhūyyena samathayānikassa icchitabbo, so ca paṭhamaṃ jhānaṅgāni pariggahetvā tato paraṃ sesadhamme pariggaṇhāti. Paṭhamābhinipātoti sabbe cetasikā cittāyattā cittakiriyabhāvena vuccantīti phasso cittassa paṭhamābhinipāto vutto, uppannaphasso puggalo, cittacetasikarāsi vā ārammaṇena phuṭṭho phassasahajātāya vedanāya taṃsamakālameva vedeti, phasso pana obhāsassa viya padīpo vedanādīnaṃ paccayaviseso hotīti purimakālo viya vuccati, yā tassa ārammaṇābhiniropanalakkhaṇatā vuccati. Phusantoti ārammaṇassa phusanākārena. Ayañhi arūpadhammatā ekadesena anallīyamānopi rūpaṃ viya cakkhu, saddo viya ca sotaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇañca phusanto viya saṅghaṭṭento viya ca pavattati. Tathāhesa ‘‘saṅghaṭṭanaraso’’ti vuccati.
感受所缘,就是以主宰者的身份、以完全遍熟的状态、以拥有者的身份去体验所缘的滋味。因为触等相应诸法对所缘的作用只是部分的,仅仅停留在触及的层面;而受则是以享受可喜之相等方式生起,所以它对所缘的作用是全面的。以触及等方式执取所缘,是部分地体验;以感受的方式执取,则是随心所欲地完全体验。这些执取方式各自的体性本来就是如此,所以不应该像对待受那样,因为触等各自执行自己的作用,就指责它们也有拥有者式的体验。关于“了知”,是指以判别的方式特别地了知。因为识就像一个人拿着量器去量可量的东西,对所缘加以判别并使之清晰显现,不像想那样仅仅停留在认知的层面。正因如此,通过识有时也能显现三相。然而,触等诸法各自变得明显,应当理解为是依靠由特殊条件所成就的先前作意。巴利
Ārammaṇaṃ anubhavantīti issaravatāya visavitāya sāmibhāvena ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavantī. Phassādīnañhi sampayuttadhammānaṃ ārammaṇe ekadeseneva pavatti phusanādimattabhāvato, vedanāya pana iṭṭhākārasambhogādivasena pavattanato ārammaṇe nippadesato pavatti. Phusanādibhāvena hi ārammaṇaggahaṇaṃ ekadesānubhavanaṃ, vedayitābhāvena gahaṇaṃ yathākāmaṃ sabbānubhavanaṃ evasabhāvāneva tāni gahaṇānīti na vedanāya viya phassādīnampi yathāsakaṃ kiccakaraṇena sāmibhāvānubhavanaṃ codetabbaṃ. Vijānantanti paricchindanavasena visesato jānantaṃ. Viññāṇañhi minitabbavatthuṃ nāḷiyā minanto puriso viya ārammaṇaṃ paricchijja vibhāventaṃ pavattati, na saññā viya sañjānanamattaṃ hutvā. Tathā hi anena kadāci lakkhaṇattayavibhāvanāpi hoti. Imesaṃ pana phassādīnaṃ tassa tassa pākaṭabhāvo paccayavisesasiddhassa pubbābhogassa vasena veditabbā.
即使某一法已变得明显,仍应执取一切可资思择的诸法,因为经中有“比丘们,应遍知一切”“比丘们,应自证知一切”等语。为了显示此点,才说“于此,对谁……”等。此处论中所说的“即于触等第五”,是一种限定;因为那四个非色蕴都包含在其中,执取它,也就执取了它们。所以要执取“触等第五”,是因为它通于一切心生起;而在其中执取触与思,便已含摄行蕴中的一切诸法,因为思是行蕴中最主要的。正如在经分别的行蕴分别中,以“眼触所生思”等语,仅对思作了分别;其他诸蕴则依其自性而被执取。巴利
Evaṃ tassa tasseva pākaṭabhāvepi ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, abhiññeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.46; paṭi. ma. 1.3) ‘‘sabbañca kho, bhikkhave, abhijāna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.26) ca evamādivacanato sabbe sammasanupagā dhammā pariggahetabbāti dassento ‘‘tattha yassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha phassapañcamakeyevāti avadhāraṇaṃ tadantogadhattā taggahaṇeneva gahitattā catunnaṃ arūpakkhandhānaṃ. Phassapañcamakaggahaṇañhi tassa sabbacittuppādasādhāraṇabhāvato, tattha ca phassacetanāggahaṇena sabbasaṅkhārakkhandhadhammasaṅgaho cetanāpadhānattā tesaṃ. Tathā hi suttantabhājanīye saṅkhārakkhandhavibhaṅge (vibha. 12) ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā cetanā’’tiādinā cetanāva vibhattā, itare pana khandhā sarūpeneva gahitā.
“依于所依处”这句话里,“所依处”这个词指的是业生身。怎么知道呢?回答说:“针对什么而说”等等。那么,是在哪里说的呢?在《沙门果经》里。“那”就是业生身。“没有脱离五蕴的名色”,这是从主导的角度说的。否则,名法确实也有脱离蕴而存在的。“以无明等为因”,就是以无明、渴爱、取等为因。在说了“随观的次第……而行”之后,为了显示强力观以及对他的策励和殊胜证得,接着说了“他……”等。巴利
Vatthuṃ nissitāti ettha vatthu-saddo karajakāyavisayoti kathamidaṃ viññāyatīti āha ‘‘yaṃ sandhāya vutta’’ntiādi. Kattha pana vuttaṃ? Sāmaññaphale. Soti karajakāyo. Pañcakkhandhavinimuttaṃ nāmarūpaṃ natthīti idaṃ adhikāravasena vuttaṃ. Aññathā hi khandhavinimuttampi nāmaṃ atthevāti. Avijjādihetukāti avijjātaṇhupādānādihetukā. Vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā…pe… vicaratīti iminā balavavipassanaṃ vatvā puna tassa ussukkāpanaṃ visesādhigamanañca dassento ‘‘so’’tiādimāha.
这里,在这第二念处的教导中,因为应当以受随观的方式来解说,世尊就以受来解说。并且,为了说明在前面所说的三种业处投入中,以受来投入业处比较容易,因为诸受的相状显著,所以说了“通过触……”等话。“并不明显”这句话,是针对那类人说的:对他们来说,从一开始就只有受更为显著地现起。这样一来,前面所说的“触是明显的,识是明显的”这些话就没有矛盾了。而“诸受的生起明显”,这是就乐受和苦受说的,因为它们的生起是粗显的,其他受不是这样。或者,因为可以通过总摄这两者来把握,对智者来说其他受的生起也是明显的,所以应当把这里的“诸受”看作不加区分地总括了一切受。“当乐生起时”等话,是在说明乐受的明显性。“在那个时候不感受苦受”,是指在具足乐受的那个时刻,确实不感受苦受,因为过去的苦受已经息灭,未来的苦受还未生起,这是依次第而说;而当下有苦受则是不可能的事,这一点已经说过。受只能安住在自身所作的刹那,所以是无常的。因为是由各种条件和合而成,所以是有为的。因为是依于所依、所缘等条件而生起,所以是缘起的。因为其本性是耗尽、衰败、坏灭、止息,所以应当看作尽法……乃至灭法。巴利
Idhāti imissaṃ dutiyasatipaṭṭhānadesanāyaṃ, tassā pana vedanānupassanāvasena kathetabbattā bhagavā vedanāvasena kathesi. Yathāvuttesu ca tīsu kammaṭṭhānābhinivesesu vedanāvasena kammaṭṭhānābhiniveso sukaro vedanānaṃ vibhūtabhāvatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘phassavasena hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na pākaṭaṃ hotīti idaṃ tādise puggale sandhāya vuttaṃ, yesaṃ ādito vedanāva vibhūtatarā hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Evañhi yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘phasso pākaṭo hoti, viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotī’’ti, taṃ avirodhitaṃ hoti. Vedanānaṃ uppattipākaṭatāyāti ca idaṃ sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Tāsañhi pavatti oḷārikā, na itarāya. Tadubhayaggahaṇamukhena vā gahetabbattā itarāyapi pavatti viññūnaṃ pākaṭā evāti ‘‘vedanāna’’nti avisesaggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yadā sukhaṃ uppajjatītiādi sukhavedanāya pākaṭabhāvavibhāvanaṃ. Neva tasmiṃ samaye dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedetīti tasmiṃ sukhavedanāsamaṅgisamaye neva dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti niruddhattā, anuppannattā ca yathākkamaṃ atītānāgatānaṃ , paccuppannāya pana asambhavo vuttoyeva. Sakiccakkhaṇamattāvaṭṭhānato aniccā. Sameccasambhuyya paccayehi katattā saṅkhatā. Vatthārammaṇādipaccayaṃ paṭicca uppannattā paṭiccasamuppannā. Khayavayapalujjananirujjhanapakatitāya khayadhammā…pe… nirodhadhammāti daṭṭhabbā.
五种欲乐因为会被烦恼接触,所以叫“味”;又因为以它们为所缘而与味同在,所以叫“有味的”。因此说“依于五种欲乐之味”。从这以后,是指向“有受”等经文,所以说“和身随观中所说的方式一样”。巴利
Kilesehi āmasitabbato āmisaṃ nāma pañca kāmaguṇā, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena saha āmisehīti āmisā. Tenāha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇāmisanissitā’’ti. Ito paranti ‘‘atthi vedanā’’ti evamādipāḷiṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayamevā’’ti.
心随观的注释巴利
Cittānupassanāvaṇṇanā
114 114. 从相应的角度来说,与正在生起的贪一起,所以叫“有贪”。因此说“与贪俱行”。“离贪”:在这里,按理说应该用与“有贪”这个词相对的“离贪”来表达,但因为这里指的是思惟行的范围,所以只取三地的心。因此说了“世间善和无记”之后,又用“然而这个”等话来说明这个意思。其余的两个嗔根、两个痴根,就是四种不善心。因为它们不与贪相应,所以根本没有“有贪性”;虽然由于以它们为因的性质,可能会有与贪俱存的状态,但也没有“离贪性”。所以它们脱离了这两种极端。因此说“既不偏向前面那个词,也不偏向后面那个词”。如果这样的话,会不会变成只了知一部分呢?不会,因为它们属于这两种极端的范畴。在不善根中,与痴一起生起、一起运作,所以叫“俱痴”。因此说“与疑俱行和与掉举俱行”。因为在这里确实是与痴一起存在,所以叫“俱痴”,由此也能确定前一个词的含义。所以说“然而因为……”等等。不过,由于极度愚痴,从个别的角度来说,因为痴特别多,可以叫“痴悗心”,所以与疑俱行和与掉举俱行这两种心,特别被称为“俱痴”;而其他不善心并不是这样,所以说“也这样转起”。因为与惛眠相应,被惛眠跟随、随逐,所以叫“有惛眠随逐”。这就是五种有行不善心,也就是“萎缩心”。之所以叫萎缩心,是因为它在面对所缘时,以收缩、萎缩的方式生起。由于特殊的缘,与强力的掉举一起生起、混在一起而运作,所以叫“与掉举俱行”。否则,一切不善心也都与掉举俱行。之所以叫“散开心”,是因为它极度以散乱的方式生起。巴利
114. Sampayogavasena (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.381) pavattamānena saha rāgenāti sarāgaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘lobhasahagata’’nti. Vītarāganti. Ettha kāmaṃ sarāgapadapaṭiyoginā vītarāgavasena bhavitabbaṃ, sammasanacārassa pana idhādhippetattā tebhūmakasseva gahaṇanti ‘‘lokiyakusalābyākata’’nti vatvā ‘‘idaṃ panā’’tiādinā tameva adhippāyaṃ vivarati. Sesāni dve dosamūlāni, dve mohamūlānīti cattāri akusalacittāni. Tesañhi rāgena sampayogābhāvato nattheva sarāgatā, tannimittakatāya pana siyā taṃsahitatālesoti nattheva vītarāgatāpīti dukavinimuttatā evettha labbhatīti āha ‘‘neva purimapadaṃ, na pacchimapadaṃ bhajantī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ padesikaṃ pajānanaṃ āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati dukantarapariyāpannattā tesaṃ. Akusalamūlesu saha moheneva vattatīti samohanti āha ‘‘vicikicchāsahagatañceva uddhaccasahagatañcā’’ti. Yasmā cettha saheva mohenāti samohanti purimapadāvadhāraṇampi labbhatiyeva, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Yathā pana atimūḷhatāya pāṭipuggalikanayena savisesaṃ mohavantatāya momūhacittanti vattabbato vicikicchuddhaccasahagatadvayaṃ visesato ‘‘samoha’’nti vuccati, na tathā sesākusalacittānīti ‘‘vaṭṭantiyevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sampayogavasena thinamiddhena anupatitaṃ anugatanti thinamiddhānupatitaṃ pañcavidhaṃ sasaṅkhārikākusalacittaṃ saṅkuṭitacittaṃ. Saṅkuṭitacittaṃ nāma ārammaṇe saṅkocanavasena pavattanato. Paccayavisesavasena thāmajātena uddhaccena sahagataṃ pavattaṃ saṃsaṭṭhanti uddhaccasahagataṃ, aññathā sabbampi akusalacittaṃ uddhaccasahagatamevāti. Pasaṭacittaṃ nāma sātisayaṃ vikkhepavasena pavattanato.
由于能镇伏烦恼、果报广大、相续长久,所以达到了广大的状态;或者因为由广大的胜欲等所引导、所趣入,所以称为“广大”。这是指属于色界和无色界地的心,因为世间没有比这更广大的。因此说“色无色界”。它的对立面只是“小”,所以说“非广大”,就是欲界。因为与能超越自身的更高之法共存,所以称为“有上”;与它相反的就是“无上”。应当结合这两方面来理解,所以说“有上”指欲界等等。以能镇伏对立面的定而正确地安立,就是“定的”。因此说“何者”等等。“何者”就是指何心。没有像前面所说的那样由定而安立,就是“未定的”。所以说“缺乏两种定”。以彼分解脱而解脱的,是欲界善心;以镇伏解脱而解脱的,是广大心。因此针对这两者说“以彼分解脱和镇伏解脱而解脱”。凡是没有这两种解脱的地方,就称为“缺乏两种解脱”。如果这样理解,可能会对出世间心也产生疑问,为了排除这一点,所以说“断……连存在的余地都没有”。而“没有余地”应当理解为是指思惟行而言。这里在义理上没有详细分别的内容,就按照前面所说的方式来处理。巴利
Kilesavikkhambhanasamatthatāya vipulaphalatāya dīghasantānatāya ca mahantabhāvaṃ gataṃ, mahantehi vā uḷāracchandādīhi gataṃ paṭipannanti mahaggataṃ. Taṃ pana rūpārūpabhūmikaṃ tato mahantassa loke abhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘rūpārūpāvacara’’nti. Tassa cettha paṭiyogī parittamevāti āha ‘‘amahaggatanti kāmāvacara’’nti. Attānaṃ uttarituṃ samatthehi saha uttarehīti sauttaraṃ, tappaṭipakkhena anuttaraṃ, tadubhayaṃ upādāya veditabbanti āha ‘‘sauttaranti kāmāvacara’’ntiādi. Paṭipakkhavikkhambhanasamatthena samādhinā sammadeva āhitaṃ samāhitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yassā’’tiādi. Yassāti yassa cittassa. Yathāvuttena samādhinā na samāhitanti asamāhitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ubhayasamādhirahita’’nti. Tadaṅgavimuttiyā vimuttaṃ, kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ. Vikkhambhanavimuttiyā vimuttaṃ, mahaggatanti tadubhayaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tadaṅgavikkhambhanavimuttīhi vimutta’’nti. Yattha tadubhayavimutti natthi, taṃ ubhayavimuttirahitanti gayhamāne lokuttaracittepi siyā āsaṅkāti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘samuccheda…pe… okāsova natthī’’ti āha. Okāsābhāvo ca sammasanacārassa adhippetattā veditabbo. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayamevāti.
法随观的注释巴利
Dhammānupassanāvaṇṇanā
诸盖部分的注释巴利
Nīvaraṇapabbavaṇṇanā
115 115. 因为要显示应断除等的法的分类,所以从五种方式解说了法随观,这个意思从巴利经文本身就能知道。为了点明这个意思,所以说“以五种方式开示法随观”。如果是这样,那为什么只以盖等来解说呢?因为所化者的意乐不同。有些所化者在应断除的法中,首先要详细解说诸盖,所以世尊在这里先为他们解说了对诸盖的法随观。同样,身随观也是以止为先行而开示的;之后,在应遍知的诸蕴、诸处,应修习的诸觉支,以及以应遍知等分类的诸谛上,开示了更进一步的教导。因此在这里,修止也只是为了观的目的。这个念处的开示是以观为核心、以观为主的。为了显示它是依观而分别解说的,所以说了“而且”等话。其中,应当理解为以蕴、处、苦谛而作的混合摄受。“想蕴和行蕴的摄受”这一句,通过“也”这个字,把全部五取蕴的摄受都总括进来了,因为其余的蕴都包含在其中。“黑与白不可能并立”——在了知的时候并不存在,所以说“因为恒常现行”。 “如同”是指以什么方式。然而,因为说了“欲贪的生起”,所以这只是欲贪的因的方式,从意义上说就是因本身,因此说“以什么因”。 “和”这个字是总括将要说的意思。巴利
115. Pahātabbādidhammavibhāgadassanavasena pañcadhā dhammānupassanā niddiṭṭhāti ayamattho pāḷito eva viññāyatīti tamatthaṃ ulliṅgento ‘‘pañcavidhenadhammānupassanaṃ kathetu’’nti vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā nīvaraṇādivaseneva niddiṭṭhanti? Veneyyajjhāsayato. Yesañhi veneyyānaṃ pahātabbadhammesu paṭhamaṃ nīvaraṇāni vibhāgena vattabbāni, tesaṃ vasenettha bhagavatā paṭhamaṃ nīvaraṇesu dhammānupassanā kathitā. Tathā hi kāyānupassanāpi samathapubbaṅgamā desitā, tato pariññeyyesu khandhesu āyatanesu, bhāvetabbesu bojjhaṅgesu pariññeyādivibhāgesu saccesu ca uttarā desanā desitā, tasmā cettha samathabhāvanāpi yāvadeva vipassanatthaṃ icchitā, vipassanāpadhānā vipassanābahulā ca satipaṭṭhānadesanāti tassā vipassanābhinivesavibhāgena desitabhāvaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha khandhāyatanadukkhasaccavasena missakapariggahakathanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saññāsaṅkhārakkhandhapariggahampīti pi-saddena sakalapañcupādānakkhandhapariggahaṃ sampiṇḍeti itaresaṃ tadantogadhattā. ‘‘Kaṇhasukkānaṃ yugandhatā natthī’’ti pajānanakāle abhāvā ‘‘abhiṇhasamudācāravasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathāti yenākārena. So pana ‘‘kāmacchandassa uppādo hotī’’ti vuttattā kāmacchandassa kāraṇākārova, atthato kāraṇamevāti āha ‘‘yena kāraṇenā’’ti. Ca-saddo vakkhamānatthasamuccayattho.
这里说的“在此”,是指前面“以及如同”等语句所说的内容。“即便是美”也包括欲贪。因为欲贪以自己执取的方式被称为“美”,又因为它是按那种方式生起的其他欲贪的相,所以也叫“美相”。“可意的”是指可爱的事物,或者是以可爱的方式被执取的色等美所缘。对于所期望的利益和安乐,成为不恰当手段的作意,就是“不恰当作意”。“彼”是指非如理作意。“在此”是指在应当成就的以及作为所缘的这两种美相之中。“食”是指缘。巴利
Tatthāti ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādinā vuttapade. Subhampīti kāmacchandopi. So hi attano gahaṇākārena ‘‘subha’’nti vuccati, tenākārena pavattanakassa aññassa kāmacchandassa nimittattā ‘‘subhanimitta’’nti ca. Iṭṭhaṃ, iṭṭhākārena vā gayhamānaṃ rūpādi subhārammaṇaṃ. Ākaṅkhitassa hitasukhassa anupāyabhūto manasikāro anupāyamanasikāro. Tanti ayonisomanasikāraṃ. Tatthāti nipphādetabbe ārammaṇabhūte ca duvidhepi subhanimitte. Āhāroti paccayo.
“不净”这个词也指不净禅那,这是省略了后面的词。应当知道,这种不净禅那是依十种没有识知的不净以及头发等身体部分而生起的。因为在《吉利玛南达经》(增支部 10.60)中说,对头发等生起的想就叫不净想。在这里,提到四种非如理作意和如理作意,应当知道是为了毫无遗漏地显示全部情况。在这些作意当中,这里所指的是对不净的事物作意为“净”或作意为“不净”;又因为它们与主要作意相随顺,所以其他的作意也包含在内。巴利
Asubhampīti asubhajjhānampi uttarapadalopena. Taṃ pana dasasu aviññāṇakāsubhesu, kesādīsu ca pavattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kesādīsu hi saññā asubhasaññāti girimānandasutte (a. ni. 10.60) vuttāti. Ettha ca catubbidhassa ayonisomanasikārassa yonisomanasikārassa ca gahaṇaṃ niravasesadassanatthaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tesu pana asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti, ‘‘asubha’’nti ca manasikāro idhādhippeto, tadanukūlattā vā itarepīti.
在十一种不净中,学习可厌之相——也就是按照在那里生起取相的方式去修,就是不净相的取学。致力于能带来近行定和安止定的不净修习,就是不净修习的致力。他们说,对于在饮食上知量的人,因为昏沉睡眠无法压倒他、找不到可乘之机,欲贪就被断除了。但是,如果有人能正确了知:依于食物的不净想,对食物消化变质之物的观察,对以食物为依托之物的观察,对胃中之物的不净性的观察,以及观察身体是靠食物维持的——那么,他才特别被称为在饮食上知量的人,而且他的欲贪必定会被断除。不净业处的帝须长老就是那位见到牙骨的人。按照阿毗达摩的方式,一切贪都属于欲欲盖,所以说“由阿拉汉道”。巴利
Ekādasasu (a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.16) asubhesu paṭikūlākārassa uggaṇhanaṃ, yathā vā tattha uggahanimittaṃ uppajjati, tathā paṭipatti asubhanimittassa uggaho. Upacārappanāvahāya asubhabhāvanāya anuyuñjanaṃ asubhabhāvanānuyogo. Bhojane mattaññuno thinamiddhābhibhavābhāvā otāraṃ alabhamāno kāmacchando pahīyatīti vadanti. Bhojananissitaṃ pana āhāre paṭikūlasaññaṃ, tabbipariṇāmassa, tadādhārassa, tassa ca udariyabhūtassa asubhatādassanaṃ, kāyassa āhāraṭṭhitikatādassanañca yo sammadeva jānāti, so visesato bhojane mattaññū nāma, tassa ca kāmacchando pahīyateva. Asubhakammikatissatthero dantaṭṭhidassāvī. Abhidhammapariyāyena (dha. sa. 1159, 1503) sabbopi lobho kāmacchandanīvaraṇanti āha ‘‘arahattamaggenā’’ti.
嗔也是:把先前生起的嗔相看作后来生起的嗔的原因。以遍满利益的方式而亲爱、柔软,所以称为“友”;存在于那位友之中,或者这属于友的,就是“慈”,对该慈。巴利
Paṭighampi purimuppannaṃ paṭighanimittaṃ parato uppajjanakapaṭighassa kāraṇanti katvā. Mejjati hitapharaṇavasena siniyhatīti mitto, tasmiṃ mitte bhavā, mittassa vā esāti mettā, tassā mettāya.
修慈心的人,要让慈心生起并持续运作,使慈心遍满众生的利益,这就是取慈心的相。关于“有界限、无界限、方向遍满”:按自己、所爱、朋友、无关者、怨敌来划分,就是有界限;打破界限之后,就是无界限;按一个个方向遍满,就是方向遍满——这是在取慈心相时应当了解的。或者,按住处、街道、村落等来作有界限的方向遍满;不指定住处等,只按东方等方向来作无界限的方向遍满。正是就这两种取相方式,才说“有界限、无界限、方向遍满”。取相应理解到近行定为止;对已取到的相反复练习,就是修习。其中,无界限遍满的慈,是依“一切众生、一切有息者、一切已生者、一切个体、一切有身者”这些类别,对每一类都发出“愿他们无怨、无嗔、无恼、安乐自护”这四种愿,因此有二十种。有界限遍满的慈,是依“一切女人、男人、圣者、凡夫、天、人、堕恶道者”这样以众生为界限来运作,成为七种或二十八种;或者以方向为界限,对十方运作,成为十种;又或者在每一个方向中,再按众生、女人或男人等,以及无怨、无嗔、无恼、安乐等差别来分,就成为四百八十种有界限遍满的慈,应当这样了解。巴利
Mettāyanassa sattesu hitapharaṇassa uppādanaṃ pavattanaṃ mettānimittassa uggaho. Odhisakaanodhisakadisāpharaṇānanti attaatipiyasahāyamajjhattaverīvasena odhisakatā, sīmāsambhede kate anodhisakatā, ekādidisāpharaṇavasena disāpharaṇatā mettāya uggahaṇe veditabbā. Vihāraracchāgāmādivasena vā odhisakadisāpharaṇaṃ, vihārādiuddesarahitaṃ puratthimādidisāvasena anodhisakadisāpharaṇanti evaṃ vā dvidhā uggahaṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘odhisakaanodhisakadisāpharaṇāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Uggaho ca yāva upacārā daṭṭhabbo, uggahitāya āsevanā bhāvanā. Tattha ‘‘sabbe sattā, pāṇā, bhūtā, puggalā, attabhāvapariyāpannā’’ti etesaṃ vasena pañcavidhā, ekekasmiṃ ‘‘averā hontu, abyāpajjā, anīghā, sukhī attānaṃ pariharantū’’ti catudhā pavattito vīsatividhā anodhisakapharaṇā mettā, ‘‘sabbā itthiyo, purisā, ariyā, anariyā, devā, manussā, vinipātikā’’ti sattodhikaraṇavasena pavattā sattavidhā aṭṭhavīsatividhā vā, dasahi disāhi disodhikaraṇavasena pavattā dasavidhā ca, ekekāya vā disāya sattādiitthādiaverādibhedena asītādhikacatusatappabhedā ca odhibhopharaṇā veditabbā.
由于那种不如理作意,不喜等状态才会生起,所以它就是面对不喜等状态时的不如理作意,以它为缘。因为这里说的是应当产生的基础。这个解释方式对后面几句也同样适用。厌倦是指对偏僻的坐卧处和殊胜的法生起想要改变、想要远离的状态。身体扭动是指身体以不正常的方式弯曲扭转。巴利
Yena ayonisomanasikārena aratiādikāni uppajjanti, so aratiādīsu ayonisomanasikāro, tena. Nipphādetabbe hi idaṃ bhummaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Ukkaṇṭhitā pantasenāsanesu adhikusalesu dhammesu ca uppajjanabhāvariñcanā. Kāyavināmanāti kāyassa virūpenākārena nāmanā.
由于它具有发起善法修行的本质,以及能令与善法对立之法枯竭的本质,所以从发勤界等生起的精进,被称为“初发勤精进”。因为仅仅最初发勤,还不能摧伏懈怠、获得力量,因此说“因出离懈怠而比它更强大”。又因为通过反复生起、不断修习,能带来一层比一层更殊胜的进步,变得极其有力,因此说“因一步步迈向更高的境地,而比那更强大”。巴利
Kusaladhammasampaṭipattiyā paṭṭhapanasabhāvatāya, tappaṭipakkhānaṃ visosanasabhāvatāya ca ārambhadhātuādito pavattavīriyanti āha ‘‘paṭhamārambhavīriya’’nti. Yasmā paṭhamārambhamattassa kosajjavidhamanaṃ thāmagamanañca natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kosajjato nikkhantatāya tato balavatara’’nti. Yasmā pana aparāparuppattiyā laddhāsevanaṃ uparūparivisesaṃ āvahantaṃ ativiya thāmagatameva hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavatara’’nti.
在过量进食时执取相,是指在过量进食时执取昏沉睡眠的相。意思是:心里分别“吃这么多会成为昏沉睡眠的原因,吃这么多就不会”,这就是在执取昏沉睡眠的原因和非原因。白天的太阳光,意思是:即使到了夜里,也仍然作意白天所执取的太阳光相。因为头陀支依靠精进,所以说“也依止头陀支的相应谈话”。巴利
Atibhojane nimittaggāhoti atibhojane thinamiddhassa nimittaggāho, ‘‘ettake bhutte thinamiddhassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, ettake na hotī’’ti thinamiddhassa kāraṇākāraṇaggāho hotīti attho. Divā sūriyālokanti divā gahitanimittaṃ sūriyālokaṃ rattiyaṃ manasikarontassapīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Dhutaṅgānaṃ vīriyanissitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhutaṅganissitasappāyakathāyapī’’ti.
悔恨也是这样,它表现为对已做和未做之事追悔不已,会令心不得平静,所以和掉举具有相同的特征。因此说“不寂静”,指的就是那种不寂静的状态,从实质上说,这就是掉举和悔恨。巴利
Kukkuccampi katākatānusocanavasena pavattamānaṃ cetaso avūpasamāvahatāya uddhaccena samānalakkhaṇamevāti ‘‘avūpasamo nāma avūpasantākāro, uddhaccakukkuccamevetaṃ atthato’’ti vuttaṃ.
多闻的人从文本和义理两方面去审察经教等内容时,由于能获得义味等利益,心不会散乱;又因为他能依照正确的方法修行、随顺而行并作出相应的补救,所以不会对已做或未做的事生起追悔。因此说:“由多闻……掉举与悔恨被断除。”应当知道,从多闻能断除掉举与悔恨这一点来说,同样地,通过遍问、持律、知理这些方式也能断除它们。亲近佛陀能带来佛陀所行的境界,因为它能使心寂静,所以说它能断除掉举与悔恨。但不应只着眼于佛陀本身,应当知道持律者和能消除悔恨的善知识也同样被称为能断除掉举与悔恨的人。再者,比丘的散乱大多数是以悔恨为因的,所以这里通过“对适合与不适合之法的遍问”等方式,正是从律的角度指出了遍问等。“在已断除的掉举与悔恨中”这一句,是以处格表示分述。因为悔恨与忧相应,所以论中说,它在未来通过不来道而不再生起。巴利
Bahussutassa ganthato atthato ca suttādīni vicārentassa atthavedādipaṭilābhasabbhāvato vikkhepo na hoti, yathāvidhipaṭipattiyā yathānurūpapaṭikārappavattiyā ca katākatānusocanañca na hotīti ‘‘bāhusaccenapi…pe… uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyatī’’ti āha. Yadaggena bāhusaccena uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati, tadaggena paripucchakatāvinayapakataññutāhipi taṃ pahīyatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Buddhasevitā ca buddhasīlitaṃ āvahatīti cetaso vūpasamakarattā uddhaccakukkuccapahānakārī vuttā. Buddhattaṃ pana anapekkhitvā vinayadharā kukkuccavinodakā kalyāṇamittā vuttāti daṭṭhabbā. Vikkhepo ca bhikkhuno yebhuyyena kukkuccahetuko hotīti ‘‘kappiyākappiyaparipucchāmahulassā’’tiādinā vinayanayeneva paripucchakatādayo niddiṭṭhā. Pahīne uddhaccakukkucceti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Kukkuccassa domanassasahagatattā anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo vutto.
它安住、持续在这里,所以叫“处”;是疑的处,所以叫“疑处”,也就是作为疑之因的法。或者说,“处”就是安住,疑是此(后生疑)的处,所以叫“疑处”;从实际含义来说,这就是疑本身。因为先前生起的疑,以同类因性,是后来生起的疑的不共(依处)。巴利
Tiṭṭhati pavattati etthāti ṭhānīyā, vicikicchāya ṭhānīyā vicikicchāṭṭhānīyā, vicikicchāya kāraṇabhūtā dhammā. Tiṭṭhatīti vā ṭhānīyā, vicikicchā ṭhānīyā etissāti vicikicchāṭṭhānīyā, atthato vicikicchā eva. Sā hi purimuppannā parato uppajjanakavicikicchāya sabhāgahetutāya asādhāraṇaṃ.
善与不善:从善巧所生的意义上说是善,与它相反的就是不善。凡是不善的,都有过失、不应亲近、卑下。凡是善的,都无过失、应当亲近、殊胜。不过,善法如果是由卑下的欲愿等发起的,那它也是卑下的;如果是由殊胜的欲愿等发起的,那它就是殊胜的。黑,就是暗黑,使心变得不光辉。白,就是洁白,使心变得光辉。或者说,因为出生于黑的种类,所以是黑;因为出生于白的种类,所以是白。这些黑与白本身就是有对碍的。因为黑法与白法完全相反,所以彼此有对碍;同样,白法相对于黑法也有对碍。再者,黑与白、以及有对碍,合起来就是黑、白、有对碍。比如乐受相对于苦受是有对碍的,苦受相对于乐受也是有对碍的。巴利
Kusalākusalāti kosallasambhūtaṭṭhena kusalā, tappaṭipakkhato akusalā. Ye akusalā, te sāvajjā asevitabbā hīnā ca. Ye kusalā, te anavajjā sevitabbā paṇītā ca. Kusalāpi vā hīnehi chandādīhi āraddhā hīnā, paṇītehi paṇītā. Kaṇhāti kāḷakā, cittassa apabhassarabhāvakaraṇā. Sukkāti odātā, cittassa pabhassarabhāvakaraṇā. Kaṇhābhijātihetuto vā kaṇhā, sukkābhijātihetuto sukkā. Te eva sappaṭibhāgā. Kaṇhā hi ujuvipaccanīkatāya sukkehi sappaṭibhāgā, tathā sukkāpi itarehi. Atha vā kaṇhasukkā ca sappaṭibhāgā ca kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā. Sukhā hi vedanā dukkhāyavedanāya sappaṭibhāgā, dukkhā ca vedanā sukhāya vedanāya sappaṭibhāgāti.
即便通过多闻和广泛请教,与八种事相关的疑也能被断除,但其余的疑都以对三宝的疑为根源,所以论师说“缘于三宝”。因为一旦通达了三宝的功德,“对导师有疑”等疑惑就不可能生起。而在律方面具有熟练通达,就能断除所说的“对学有疑”这种疑,因此说“对于在律中已修成自在者也是如此”。所谓“以可确信之信为本质的胜解增上者”,是指对可信之事,凭借那种称为能入之信、可投入的胜解而多所决断的人。应当知道,决断就是胜解的生起。或者说,由于信的倾向、俯就,就是决意、胜解。巴利
Kāmaṃ bāhusaccaparipucchakatāhi aṭṭhavatthukāpi vicikicchā pahīyati, tathāpi ratanattayavicikicchāmūlikā sesavicikicchāti katvā āha ‘‘tīṇi ratanāni ārabbhā’’ti. Ratanattayaguṇāvabodhe hi ‘‘satthari kaṅkhatī’’ti (dha. sa. 1008, 1123, 1167, 1241, 1263, 1270; vibha. 915) ādivicikicchāya asambhavoti. Vinaye pakataññutā ‘‘sikkhāya kaṅkhatī’’ti (dha. sa. 1008, 1123, 1167, 1241, 1263, 1270; vibha. 915) vuttāya vicikicchāya pahānaṃ karotīti āha ‘‘vinaye ciṇṇavasībhāvassapī’’ti. Okappanīyasaddhāsaṅkhātaadhimokkhabahulassāti saddheyyavatthuno anupavisanasaddhāsaṅkhātaadhimokkhena adhimuccanabahulassa . Adhimuccanañca adhimokkhuppādanamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saddhāya vā ninnapoṇatā adhimutti adhimokkho.
在“善相、不净相等等”这句话里,“善相等等、不净相等等”中的“等等”这个词,应当分别搭配。其中,第一个“等等”涵盖了瞋相等等,第二个“等等”涵盖了慈心解脱等等。这里其余应当说明的内容,按照前面已说的方法理解即可。巴利
Subhanimittaasubhanimittādīsūti ‘‘subhanimittādīsu asubhanimittādīsū’’ti ādi-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tattha paṭhamena ādi-saddena paṭighanimittādīnaṃ saṅgaho, dutiyena mettācetovimuttiādīnaṃ. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttanayamevāti.
蕴品注释巴利
Khandhapabbavaṇṇanā
116 116. 或者,诸蕴因为被诸取以成为所缘等方式而被执取,所以是取蕴。在“iti rūpaṃ”(如此色)这里,“iti”这个词与“idaṃ”(此)同义,因此论师依这个意思说“idaṃ rūpaṃ”(此色)。这个色从自相来说,是无余完全含摄的,所以说:“这就是全部色,除此之外没有别的色。”或者,“iti”是表示方式的不变词,因此用“iti rūpaṃ”这一表达,把色依四大种及所造色等方式所具有的一切种类差别,无余地含摄起来显示。从自性来说,就是从变坏的自性,以及从眼等、颜色等的自性来了知。在受等当中也应如此理解:应当依照“这是受,这就是全部受,除此之外没有别的受,他从自性了知受”等说法来配合;而“从自性”则是从领纳的自性、从乐等的自性等角度来了知。巴利
116. Upādānehi ārammaṇakaraṇādivasena upādātabbā vā khandhā upādānakkhandā. Iti rūpanti ettha iti-saddo idaṃ-saddena samānatthoti adhippāyenāha ‘‘idaṃ rūpa’’nti. Tayidaṃ sarūpato anavasesapariyādānaṃ hotīti āha – ‘‘ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito paraṃ rūpaṃ atthī’’ti. Itīti vā pakāratthe nipāto, tasmā ‘‘iti rūpa’’nti iminā bhūtupādādivasena yattako rūpassa bhedo, tena saddhiṃ rūpaṃ anavasesato pariyādiyitvā dasseti. Sabhāvatoti ruppanasabhāvato cakkhādivaṇṇādisabhāvato ca. Vedanādīsupīti ettha ‘‘ayaṃ vedanā, ettakā vedanā, na ito paraṃ vedanā atthīti sabhāvato vedanaṃ pajānātī’’tiādinā, sabhāvatoti ca anubhavanasabhāvato sātādisabhāvato cāti evamādinā yojetabbaṃ.
处品的注释巴利
Āyatanapabbavaṇṇanā
117 在“于六内处、六外处”这一句中,“六”这个词要分别搭配,理解为“于六内处、于六外处”。那么,为什么这两组都只说六个呢?这是为了确定六识身生起的门和所缘。具体来说:属于眼识过程的识身,生起的门就是眼处,所缘就是色处;其他几个也同理,各自对应各自的处。至于第六个,生起的门是称为有分意的那一部分意处,所缘则是与前五识不共的法处。
“眼”:因为能看,所以叫眼;意思是它能品尝色、让色显现清楚。
“耳”:因为能听,所以叫耳。
“鼻”:因为能嗅,所以叫鼻。
“舌”:味因为具有维持生命的特征而被称为生命,而召唤、呼取那个生命的就是舌。
“身”:因为它是种种应被呵责的有漏法生起的来源,所以叫身。
“意”:因为能了知、识知所缘,所以叫意。
“色”:因为会变坏、呈现各种颜色变化,并显示为到达心脏的状态,所以叫色。
“声”:因为依自己的条件被带动,成为耳识所能认知的对象,所以叫声。
“香”:因为能散发自己的气味、暗示自己的来源,所以叫香。
“味”:因为众生能品尝它,所以叫味。
“触”:因为能被接触,所以叫触。
“法”:因为能保持自己的特征,所以叫法。
而这一切都因为具有延展、伸展等意义,所以叫处。这里只是简略说明,详细解释应按照《清净道论》及其注释中所说的方式来理解。巴利
117.Chasu ajjhattikabāhiresūti (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.384) ‘‘chasu ajjhattikesu chasu bāhiresu’’ti ‘‘chasū’’ti padaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Kasmā panetāni ubhayāni chaḷeva vuttāni? Chaviññāṇakāyuppattidvārārammaṇavavatthānato. Cakkhuviññāṇavīthiyā pariyāpannassa hi viññāṇakāyassa cakkhāyatanameva uppattidvāraṃ, rūpāyatanameva ca ārammaṇaṃ, tathā itarāni itaresaṃ, chaṭṭhassa pana bhavaṅgamanasaṅkhāto manāyatanekadeso uppattidvāraṃ, asādhāraṇañca dhammāyatanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ. Cakkhatīti cakkhu, rūpaṃ assādeti vibhāveti cāti attho. Suṇātīti sotaṃ. Ghāyatīti ghānaṃ. Jīvitanimittatāya raso jīvitaṃ, taṃ jīvitamavhāyatīti jivhā. Kucchitānaṃ sāsavadhammānaṃ āyo uppattidesoti kāyo. Munāti ārammaṇaṃ vijānātīti mano. Rūpayati vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti rūpaṃ. Sappati attano paccayehi harīyati sotaviññeyyabhāvaṃ gamīyatīti saddo. Gandhayati attano vatthuṃ sūcetīti gandho. Rasanti taṃ sattā assādentīti raso. Phusīyatīti phoṭṭhabbaṃ. Attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentīti dhammā. Sabbāni pana āyānaṃ tananādiatthena āyatanāni. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.510-512) taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāya (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.510) ca vuttanayena veditabbo.
在“他了知眼”这句话里,这里的“眼”指的是净色眼,不是带附属的眼,也不是天眼之类,所以说“眼净色”。这是针对“那依四大种而生起的净色名为眼”这句话说的。“ca”这个词是用来集合下文将要说的内容。“依如实的作用与相”意思是:依不颠倒的自身作用和相,也就是依牵引诸色的作用,以及依能承受色法撞击的净色相。在“以眼和色为缘”等经文中,诸色处是整体集合起来才成为眼识生起的因缘,不是各自单独为缘;为了说明这个道理,所以用“色”的复数形式来表述。正是顺着这个说法,虽然这里也说“了知色”,但在解释时,按色的共性把一切色总括起来,说“外部的四等起色等”,用单数形式来表达这个意思。“依作用与相”在这里应当这样连接:依色作为眼识所缘的作用,以及依色撞击眼根的相。巴利
Cakkhuñcapajānātīti ettha cakkhu nāma pasādacakkhu, na sasambhāracakkhu, nāpi dibbacakkhuādikanti āha ‘‘cakkhupasāda’’nti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ cakkhu catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya pasādo’’ti (dha. sa. 596-599). Ca-saddo vakkhamānatthasamuccayattho. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇavasenāti aviparītassa attano rasassa ceva lakkhaṇassa ca vasena, rūpesu āviñchanakiccassa ceva rūpābhighātārahabhūtapasādalakkhaṇassa ca vasenāti attho. ‘‘Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe cā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425-426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-45; 4.54-55; kathā. 465, 467) samuditāniyeva rūpāyatanāni cakkhuviññāṇuppattihetu, na visuṃ visunti imassa atthassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘rūpe cā’’ti puthuvacanaggahaṇaṃ, tāya eva ca desanāgatiyā kāmaṃ idhāpi ‘‘rūpe ca pajānātī’’ti vuttaṃ, rūpabhāvasāmaññena pana sabbaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘bahiddhā catusamuṭṭhānikarūpañcā’’ti ekavacanavasena attho vutto. Sarasalakkhaṇavasenāti cakkhuviññāṇassa visayabhāvakiccassa ceva cakkhupaṭihananalakkhaṇassa ca vasenāti yojetabbaṃ.
“依两者”:依眼作为亲依止缘而成为缘,也依诸色作为所缘增上缘与所缘亲依止缘而成为缘;它缘于这两者。不过,这部经典注释虽然解说的是经,但凡属非权宜之说,都依阿毗达摩而成立,所以这里依阿毗达摩的方式开示诸结,说:“欲贪……乃至无明结”。其中,对诸欲的贪即是欲贪;欲即是贪,故称欲贪。这欲贪以束缚之义而成为结。因为,凡有此结者,此结便把其人连结、系缚于轮回之中。也就是说,它以苦连结众生,或以有等连结其他有等,或以业连结果报,所以称为结。嗔结等也应按各自相应的意义同样说明。至于“依作用与相”这一句,此处应如此理解:依其不令众生脱离轮回的自身作用,以及依前面所说的束缚之相。巴利
Ubhayaṃ paṭiccāti cakkhuṃ upanissayapaccayavasena paccayabhūtaṃ, rūpe ārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayavasena paccayabhūte ca paṭicca. Kāmañcāyaṃ suttantasaṃvaṇṇanā , nippariyāyakathā nāma abhidhammasannissitā evāti abhidhammanayeneva saṃyojanāni dassento ‘‘kāmarāga…pe… avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti āha. Tattha kāmesu rāgo, kāmo ca so rāgo cāti kāmarāgo, so eva bandhanaṭṭhena saṃyojanaṃ. Ayañhi yassa saṃvijjati, taṃ puggalaṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ saṃyojeti bandhati, iti dukkhena sattaṃ, bhavādike vā bhavantarādīhi, kammunā vā vipākaṃ saṃyojeti bandhatīti saṃyojanaṃ. Evaṃ paṭighasaṃyojanādīnampi yathārahaṃ attho vattabbo. Sarasalakkhaṇavasenāti ettha pana sattassa vaṭṭato anissajjanasaṅkhātassa attano kiccassa ceva yathāvuttabandhanasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa ca vasenāti yojetabbaṃ.
为了止息对“有”的乐味和对“见”的乐味,这里特别提出对“欲”的乐味。“受乐者”,是指在欲中寻求喜乐的人。“欣喜者”,是指带着伴随喜的渴爱而欢喜的人。这两个词都说明了作为强烈欲贪之因的欲贪生起。“此所缘”,是指这样微细、这样难以分辨的所缘。“常、恒”,这只是举例,像“执取为‘将会断灭、将会毁灭’”这类情况也应包括在内。“希求有者”,是指这样渴望的人:“在这样殊胜的福报有中,我们轻易得到了这可爱的所缘,所以未来也应当有福报有。”应这样连接:能获得这样的东西。“嫉妒者”,是指生起嫉妒心的人。“对他人悭吝者”,是指通过不与他人共享而行悭吝的人。以上全都是依前面所说的九种结而说。巴利
Bhavassāda-diṭṭhissāda-nivattanatthaṃ kāmassādaggahaṇaṃ. Assādayatoti abhiramantassa. Abhinandatoti sapppītikataṇhāvasena nandantassa. Padadvayenapi balavato kāmarāgassa paccayabhūtā kāmarāguppatti vuttā. Esa nayo sesesupi. Etaṃ ārammaṇanti etaṃ evaṃsukhumaṃ evaṃdubbibhāgaṃ ārammaṇaṃ. Niccaṃ dhuvanti etaṃ nidassanamattaṃ, ‘‘ucchijjissati vinassissatīti gaṇhato’’ti evamādīnampi saṅgaho icchitabbo. Bhavaṃ patthentassāti ‘‘īdise sampattibhave yasmā amhākaṃ idaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ sulabhaṃ jātaṃ, tasmā āyatimpi sampattibhavo bhaveyyā’’ti bhavaṃ nikāmentassa. Evarūpaṃ sakkā laddhunti yojanā. Usūyatoti usūyaṃ issaṃ uppādayato. Aññassa maccharāyatoti aññena asādhāraṇabhāvakaraṇena macchariyaṃ karoto. Sabbeheva yathāvuttehi navahi saṃyojanehi.
那个“因”,指的是辨别净相、嗔相等等,以及可意、不可意等色所缘,还有与这些所缘相应的非如理作意——这些就是各个结生起的因。说“以未断除之义而现起”,是针对那些没有被镇伏、没有被彻底根除、已经获得了生起基础的烦恼而说的。当前已经生起的状态,已经被“现行”这个词涵盖进去了。“以什么因”,是指以那被称为观与止的修习为因。因为这个因,能通过彼分断和镇伏断来断除它们。因为嫉妒和悭吝会导致堕入恶趣,所以说它们被初道所断除。如果是这样,那经里说的“由于完全断除三种结而成为入流者”,这句话又怎么理解呢?那是依照经的教说方式来讲的。因为经的教导是随顺引导的,而这里的注释是依阿毗达摩的方法来解释的,所以没有这个过失。“粗重的”,是指粗大的,因为它频繁生起、缠缚内心,而且程度猛烈。“与细共存的”,是指由于没有上述那种粗重性,而达到了细微、不明显的状态。这里也说明了掉举结的不生起,因为它与上述那些结不相分离。为了说明对于耳等诸处,依其自性、作用与相来了知,以及对于以它们为缘的诸结的生起等了知,这同样应按照已说过的道理来理解,因此说“同理”。巴利
Tañca kāraṇanti subhanimittapaṭighanimittādivibhāvaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādirūpārammaṇañceva tajjāyonisomanasikārañcāti tassa tassa saṃyojanassa kāraṇaṃ. Avikkhambhitaasamūhatabhūmiladdhuppannataṃ sandhāya ‘‘appahīnaṭṭhena uppannassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vattamānuppannatā samudācāraggahaṇeneva gahitā. Yena kāraṇenāti yena vipassanāsamathabhāvanāsaṅkhātena kāraṇena. Tañhi tassa tadaṅgavasena ceva vikkhambhanavasena ca pahānakāraṇaṃ. Issāmacchariyānaṃ apāyagamanīyatāya paṭhamamaggavajjhatā vuttā. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.241) suttapadaṃ kathanti? Taṃ suttantapariyāyena vuttaṃ. Yathānulomasāsanañhi suttantadesanā, ayaṃ pana abhidhammanayena saṃvaṇṇanāti nāyaṃ doso. Oḷārikassāti thūlassa, yato abhiṇhasamuppattipariyuṭṭhānatibbatāva hoti. Aṇusahagatassāti vuttappakāraoḷārikābhāvena aṇubhāvaṃ sukhumabhāvaṃ gatassa. Uddhaccasaṃyojanassapettha anuppādo vuttoyeva yathāvuttasaṃyojanehi avinābhāvato. Sotādīnaṃ sabhāvasarasalakkhaṇavasena pajānanā, tappaccayānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ uppādādipajānanā ca vuttanayeneva veditabbāti dassento ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti atidisati.
对于自己的法,是指对自己内在的处所摄的法,或者对自己内外两方面的法。在这个情况下,“以取内处”的意思是,通过把握内处这一途径,这样一来,就能毫无遗漏地把握自他相续中所有的处。“对于他人的法”,这里也是同样的道理。“关于色处”,是指具有十一种半分类的色自性的处。“于色蕴”,应按照在蕴中已说的方法引出,即引来连接。“于其余的蕴”,是指受蕴、想蕴、行蕴。所谓“按照已说的方法”,这一指摄揭示了如下差别:在色蕴中,是食的集;在识蕴中,是名色的集;在其余的蕴中,是触的集;而其他方面则是共通的。就像在蕴品中一样,在处品中,圣典里也没有提及出世间法后而予以否定的情况,因此说“出世间法不应被拿来”。巴利
Attano vā dhammesūti attano ajjhattikāyatanadhammesu, attano ubhayadhammesu vā. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ajjhattikāyatanapariggahaṇenāti ajjhattikāyatanapariggaṇhanamukhenāti attho, evañca anavasesato saparasantānesu āyatanānaṃ pariggaho siddho hoti. Parassa vā dhammesūti etthāpi eseva nayo. Rūpāyatanassāti aḍḍhekādasapabhedarūpasabhāvassa āyatanassa. Rūpakkhandhe vuttanayena nīharitabbāti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Sesakhandhesūti vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhesu. Vuttanayenāti iminā atidesena rūpakkhandhe āhārasamudayāti, viññāṇakkhandhe nāmarūpasamudayāti, sesakkhandhesu phassasamudayāti imaṃ visesaṃ vibhāveti, itaraṃ pana sabbattha samānanti. Khandhapabbe viya āyatanapabbepi lokuttaranivattanaṃ pāḷiyaṃ gahitaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘lokuttaradhammā na gahetabbā’’ti.
觉支品的注释巴利
Bojjhaṅgapabbavaṇṇanā
118 对于“应觉醒的众生”:是指从烦恼的睡眠中觉醒的众生,或者是指通达圣谛的众生。“于诸支”:是指于诸因,或者于诸部分。从生灭智生起开始,就称为安住于正觉之道,所以说“从开始修观者起,就是瑜伽行者,也就是正觉”。巴利
118.Bujjhanakasattassāti kilesaniddāya paṭibujjhanakasattassa, ariyasaccānaṃ vā paṭivijjhanakasattassa. Aṅgesūti kāraṇesu, avayavesu vā. Udayabbayañāṇuppādato paṭṭhāya sambodhipaṭipadāyaṃ ṭhito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘āraddhavipassakato paṭṭhāya yogāvacaroti sambodhī’’ti.
“念觉支的生起因缘”这个词的含义,应当依照前面讲“疑的生起因缘”时所说的方法来理解。这里说的因缘,就是如理作意。“于此”指的是在念上。这里的处格,要用在“应当成就的事”这个意义上。巴利
‘‘Satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā’’ti padassa attho ‘‘vicikicchaṭṭhānīyā’’ti ettha vuttanayena veditabbo. Tanti yonisomanasikāraṃ. Tatthāti satiyaṃ. Nipphādetabbe cetaṃ bhummaṃ.
念与正知合在一起,就叫念与正知。或者也可以说,以念为先导,对“前进”等有意义的行为状态加以把握的智慧,就是念与正知。它在一切情况下都能带来“有念而行”的状态,所以能促成念觉支的生起。就像舍弃敌对的法、修习随顺的法,能让尚未生起的善法生起一样,同样地,避开没有正念的人、亲近有正念而行的人,并在这一点上持续地投入和运用,就能促成念觉支的生起。这段经文就是用“念与正知”等说法来显示这个意思。巴利
Sati ca sampajaññañca satisampajaññaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.385; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.5.232; a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.418). Atha vā satipadhānaṃ abhikkantādisātthakabhāvapariggaṇhanañāṇaṃ satisampajaññaṃ. Taṃ sabbattha satokāribhāvāvahattā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya hoti. Yathā paccanīkadhammānaṃ pahānaṃ anurūpadhammasevanā ca anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya hoti, evaṃ satirahitapuggalavivajjhanā, satokārīpuggalasevanā, tattha ca yuttapayuttatā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya hotīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘satisampajañña’’ntiādinā.
对诸法的简择,或者于诸法之中的简择,就是法抉择;这个法抉择本身就是觉支,所以叫法抉择觉支。关于“善与不善诸法”等应当说明的内容,前面已经讲过了。其中,所谓“如理作意的数数修习”,就是指与智相应的心生起——它是依如实通达善等诸法各自的自性、作用、特相等而生起的。因为作意不颠倒,所以叫“如理作意”;由于心倾向于彼,转向也成为同类;它不断反复生起,就是“数数修习”。“为更多生起”是为了让它一再地生起;“为广博”是为了让它变得广大;“为圆满”是为了让它得到充分的修习。巴利
Dhammānaṃ, dhammesu vā vicayo dhammavicayo, so eva sambojjhaṅgo, tassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa. ‘‘Kusalākusalā dhammā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāroti kusalādīsu taṃtaṃsabhāvarasalakkhaṇādikassa yāthāvato avabujjhanavasena uppanno ñāṇasampayuttacittuppādo. So hi aviparītamanasikāratāya ‘‘yonisomanasikāro’’ti vutto, tadābhogatāya āvajjanāpi taggatikāva, tassa abhiṇhapavattanaṃ bahulīkāro. Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunabhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Pāripūriyāti paribrūhanāya.
“好问性”是指深入探究之后再发问的状态。亲近师长之后,透彻通达五部尼柯耶连同它们的注释,对于其中成为疑难关键的地方,就一一这样问:“尊者,这是什么意思?这个的含义是什么?”对这样询问蕴、处等义理的人,法抉择觉支就会生起。因此说“于蕴、界……乃至……数数修习”。巴利
Paripucchakatāti pariyogāhetvā pucchakabhāvo. Ācariye payirupāsitvā pañcapi nikāye saha aṭṭhakathāya pariyogāhetvā yaṃ yaṃ tattha gaṇṭhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ, taṃ taṃ ‘‘idaṃ bhante kathaṃ, imassa ko attho’’ti khandhāyatanādiatthaṃ pucchantassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. Tenāha ‘‘khandhadhātu…pe… bahulatā’’ti.
依处清净的作用:在这里,身体是心和心所生起的依止处,与身体相连的衣服等物,在此被称为“依处”。让这些依处变得清净,从而使它们能带给心安乐,这就是使它们清净的做法。因此说“内与外”等。“有过患之染”是指风等引发的过患染污。“被汗与尘垢所污”是指被汗水以及称为泥垢的身体污垢所沾染。“及”字也包含了其他令身体受苦的事物。“或坐卧具”:通过“或”字,应当知道也包含了钵等物品。当它们不净时,或者当它们成为所缘时——为什么对致力于修行的人,这些会成为所缘呢?这是就偶尔生起的心念来说的,因为那些心念会导致心一境性变得不清净。对于作为依止等条件的心与心所,“智亦”:这里的“亦”字是总括的意思。因此,不仅那依处本身不清净,智也会变得不清净;这表明依处不清净会导致依赖于它的心与心所不清净,就像所缘不清净会导致能缘不清净一样。巴利
Vatthuvisadakiriyāti ettha cittacetasikānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato sarīraṃ, tappaṭibaddhāni cīvarādīni ca idha ‘‘vatthūnī’’ti adhippetāni. Tāni yathā cittassa sukhāvahāni honti, tathā karaṇaṃ tesaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ajjhattikabāhirāna’’ntiādi. Ussannadosanti vātādiussannadosaṃ. Sedamalamakkhitanti sedena ceva jallikāsaṅkhātena sarīramalena ca makkhitaṃ. Ca-saddena aññampi sarīrassa pīḷāvahaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Senāsanaṃ vāti vā-saddena pattādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Avisade sati, visayabhūte vā. Kathaṃ bhāvanamanuyuttassa tāni visayo? Antarantarā pavattanakacittuppādavasenevaṃ vuttaṃ. Te hi cittuppādā cittekaggatāya aparisuddhabhāvāya saṃvattanti. Cittacetasikesu nissayādipaccayabhūtesu. Ñāṇampīti pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tena na kevalaṃ taṃ vatthuyeva, atha kho tasmiṃ aparisuddhe ñāṇampi aparisuddhaṃ hotīti nissayāparisuddhiyā taṃnissitāparisuddhi viya visayassa aparisuddhatāya visayīnaṃ aparisuddhiṃ dasseti.
令其平衡,是指在作用上既不缺也不多地运作。当因缘条件如此时,在所信之事上,由于胜解的作用特别突出,慧不明晰,而精进等又松弛无力,信根就变得强而有力。因此说“其余诸根软弱”——之所以这样说,是因为信根强而有力,而其余诸根软弱。不让相应诸法堕入懈怠一边,而是策励它们、给它们提供支持力量,这就是策励;策励本身就是它的作用,即策励的作用。“不能做”一语应当联系上下文来理解。到达所缘之后安住,或者说不放弃,就是现前。能对治散乱,或者依靠它使相应诸法不散乱,那就是不散乱。就像眼睛看色境一样,由于被强大的信根所压倒,它不能完成如实看见境域自性的“见”的作用。对于同时生起的诸法,要让它们各自发挥主导作用而同时运作,只有靠诸根一味平等才能达成目的,没有别的办法。巴利
Samabhāvakaraṇanti kiccato anūnādhikabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Yathāpaccayaṃ saddheyyavatthusmiṃ adhimokkhakiccassa paṭutarabhāvena paññāya avisadatāya vīriyādīnañca sithilatādinā saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘itarāni mandānī’’ti. Tatoti tasmā saddhindriyassa balavabhāvato itaresañca mandattā. Kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adatvā sampayuttadhammānaṃ paggaṇhanaṃ anubalappadānaṃ paggaho, paggahova kiccaṃ paggahakiccaṃ. ‘‘Kātuṃ na sakkotī’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhānaṃ, anissajjanaṃ vā upaṭṭhānaṃ. Vikkhepapaṭipakkho, yena vā sampayuttā avikkhittā honti, so avikkhepo. Rūpagataṃ viya cakkhunā yena yāthāvato visayasabhāvaṃ passati, taṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti balavatā saddhindriyena abhibhūtattā. Sahajātadhammesu indaṭṭhaṃ kārentānaṃ sahapavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ ekarasatāvaseneva atthasiddhi, na aññathā.
所以,这里是以“因”的身份,回头指出前面已经说过的那个意思。“那”指的是信根。所谓“通过观察法的自性”,是说:有人对可信之事的殊胜等功德过分信解,信根因此变得很强;对这样的人,就要通过分辨缘与缘所生等的差别,如实地加以审察。这样依照法性规律,从自性和作用去把握时,胜解就不会广泛活跃;这是因为,要以“这是这些法的自性”这样如实了知,慧的作用就显得格外强。因为在主导性的诸法中,信强时慧就弱,慧强时信就弱。因此说“要通过观察该法的自性……应当使它减弱”。所谓“通过不如彼作意”,意思是:不以那种使修行者信根变强的方式投入修行。这里,信根变强有两种情况:一是由于自身的缘特别,使它的作用超胜;二是由于精进等的作用微弱。其中,第一种情况已经说明了减弱的方法。至于第二种情况,则应以能使精进等作用敏锐的作意,使信根与它们平等一味,从而把它减弱,而不是以那种使精进等作用变弱、令信根变强的作意方式。按这个道理,其余诸根的减弱方法也应这样理解。巴利
Tasmāti vuttamevatthaṃ kāraṇabhāvena paccāmasati. Tanti saddhindriyaṃ. Dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇenāti yassa saddheyyavatthuno uḷāratādiguṇe adhimuccanassa sātisayappavattiyā saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ jātaṃ, tassa paccayapaccayuppannatādivibhāgato yāthāvato vīmaṃsanena. Evañhi evaṃdhammatānayena sabhāvasarasato pariggayhamāne savipphāro adhimokkho na hoti ‘‘ayaṃ imesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvo’’ti parijānanavasena paññābyāpārassa sātisayattā. Dhuriyadhammesu hi yathā saddhāya balavabhāve paññāya mandabhāvo hoti, evaṃ paññāya balavabhāve saddhāya mandabhāvo hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena…pe… hāpetabba’’nti. Tathāamanasikārenāti yenākārena bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ jātaṃ, tenākārena bhāvanāya ananuyuñjanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Idha duvidhena saddhindriyassa balavabhāvo attano vā paccayavisesavasena kiccuttariyato vīriyādīnaṃ vā mandakiccatāya. Tattha paṭhamavikappe hāpanavidhi dassito, dutiyavikappe pana yathā manasikaroto vīriyādīnaṃ mandakiccatāya saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena, vīriyādīnaṃ paṭukiccabhāvāvahena manasikārena saddhindriyaṃ tehi samarasaṃ karontena hāpetabbaṃ. Iminā nayena sesindriyesupi hāpanavidhi veditabbo.
瓦咖离长老的故事:这位具寿原本是信胜解者,已经积累了修行资粮,一心只想着亲见导师的色身,就这样安住着。导师教诫他说:“瓦咖离,你看见这副腐烂的色身有什么用?瓦咖离,见到法的人,就是见到了我”等等,并为他指定了业处。但他仍然不肯精勤用功,被导师遣离后,为了自我了断,便爬上了一处断崖。这时,导师就以他原本坐着的姿势,放光开示,让他看清其中的利害——巴利
Vakkalittheravatthūti so hi āyasmā saddhādhimuttāya katādhikāro satthu rūpakāyadassanapasuto eva hutvā viharanto satthārā ‘‘kiṃ te, vakkali, iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena, yo kho, vakkali, dhammaṃ passati, so maṃ passatī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.87) ovaditvā kammaṭṭhāne niyojitopi taṃ ananuyuñjanto paṇāmito attānaṃ vinipātetuṃ papātaṭṭhānaṃ abhiruhi. Atha naṃ satthā yathānisinnova obhāsagissajjanena atthānaṃ dassetvā –
“ 比丘满怀欢喜,对佛陀的教法生起净信;
他将证得寂静的境界,也就是一切行止息的安乐。”巴利
‘‘Pāmojjabahulo bhikkhu, pasanno buddhasāsane; Adhigacche padaṃ santaṃ, saṅkhārūpasamaṃ sukha’’nti. (dha. pa. 381);
说完偈颂后,世尊对婆迦梨说:“来吧,婆迦梨。”他就像被那不死甘露灌了顶一样,满心欢喜,随即开始修观。可是因为信根太强,他没能进入观的道路。世尊知道后,为了让他的诸根达到平衡,就帮他清理了业处,再重新教给他。他按照导师所教的方法努力修观,沿着圣道的次第,证得了阿拉汉果。因此说:“这里,瓦咖离长老的事可以作为例证。”巴利
Gāthaṃ vatvā ‘‘ehivakkalī’’ti āha. So tena amateneva abhisitto haṭṭhatuṭṭho hutvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapesi, saddhāya pana balavabhāvato vipassanāvīthiṃ na otarati. Taṃ ñatvā bhagavā tassa indriyasamattapaṭipādanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ sodhetvā adāsi. So satthārā dinnanayena vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggapaṭipāṭiyā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vakkalittheravatthu cettha nidassana’’nti.
“其他作用的区别”是指现前作用等各种不同作用的差别。“轻安等”的“等”字,涵盖了定觉支和舍觉支。“应当让它减弱”:就像信根过强时,可以通过观察法的自相使它减弱;同样,精进根过强时,可以通过修习轻安等使它减弱,因为轻安等属于定的范畴。也就是说,正如修习精进等能守护定根过强以免落入懈怠一样,轻安等能守护精进根过强以免落入掉举,从而绝对地使它减弱。因此说“应当通过修习轻安等让它减弱”。“索纳长老的事”是指身体娇嫩的索纳长老的故事。这位具寿从导师跟前领受业处之后,住在寒林中,他心想:“我的身体这么娇嫩,不可能舒舒服服地就证得究竟安乐。就算让身体疲劳受苦,也应当修行沙门法。”于是他只行站立与经行,专心致志地精勤。纵然脚底磨出水泡,他仍放下身体的感受,强行策励精进。由于过度激发精进,他反而无法证得殊胜的成就。导师来到那里,用调琴的譬喻来教诫他,开示了令精进平衡的方法,为他净化业处后,便去了灵鹫山。这位长老也依照导师所授的方法,将精进调到平衡,勤奋修习观,最终证得了阿拉汉果。因此说“应当举出索纳长老的事”。“其余诸根也是如此”是指念、定、慧诸根也是如此。巴利
Itarakiccabhedanti upaṭṭhānādikiccavisesaṃ. Passaddhādīti ādi-saddena samādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgānaṃ saṅgaho. Hāpetabbanti yathā saddhindriyassa balavabhāvo dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena hāyati, evaṃ vīriyindriyassa adhimattatā passaddhiādibhāvanāya hāyati samādhipakkhiyattā tassā. Tathāhi sā samādhindriyassa adhimattataṃ kosajjapātato rakkhantī vīriyādibhāvanā viya vīriyindriyassa adhimattataṃ uddhaccapātato rakkhantī ekaṃsato hāpeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘passaddhādibhāvanāya hāpetabba’’nti. Soṇattherassa vatthūti sukhumālasoṇattherassa vatthu. So hi āyasmā, satthu, santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sītavane viharanto ‘‘mama sarīraṃ sukhumālaṃ, na ca sakkā sukheneva sukhaṃ adhigantuṃ, kāyaṃ kilametvāpi samaṇadhammo kātabbo’’ti ṭhānacaṅkamameva adhiṭṭhāya padhānamanuyuñjanto pādatalesu phoṭesu uṭṭhitesupi vedanaṃ ajjhupekkhitvā daḷhavīriyaṃ karonto accāraddhavīriyatāya visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi. Satthā tattha gantvā vīṇūpamovādena ovaditvā vīriyasamatāyojanavidhiṃ dassento kammaṭṭhānaṃ sodhetvā gijjhakūṭaṃ gato. Theropi satthārā dinnanayena vīriyasamataṃ yojetvā bhāvento vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā arahatte patiṭṭhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘soṇattherassa vatthu dassetabba’’nti. Sesesupīti satisamādhipaññindriyesupi.
所谓“均等”,是指信与慧彼此之间不多不少、没有谁高谁低的状态,定与精进也是如此。就像信与慧各自都是起主导作用的法,从作用上说,尤其应当要求它们互不越界,因为二者势力均等时,安止才能成就;同样,定与精进分别偏向懈怠和掉举两边,当它们势力均等、互相扶持时,与它们相应的法就不会落入两个极端,安止才能真正成就。“强信者”等语句,是从反面来论证这个道理。它的意思是:一个人信力很强但智慧不明晰,就会变成盲目轻信,而不是经过审察的净信。这样的人会在不该信的地方生信,就像外道弟子一样。他会落入“欺诈分”,也就是诡诈那一类。如果信弱而智慧过度驰骋,就会被似是而非的理由所骗,臆想出“不必实际施舍财物,仅凭心中一念就能成就布施福业”之类的说法,心被干枯的思辨撕碎,听不进智者的教导,也无法被说服。因此说“就像由药引起的病一样,难以医治”。在这里,信与慧彼此均等能带来利益,不均等则带来损害;同样,定与精进彼此均等能带来不散乱,不均等则带来散乱。意思是:懈怠占了上风,就达不到安止。掉举占了上风,也是同样的道理。“这两者”指信与慧这一对、定与精进这一对。“应当使之均等”,就是应当使它们势力均等。巴利
Samatanti saddhāpaññānaṃ aññamaññaṃ anūnānadhikabhāvaṃ, tathā samādhivīriyānaṃ. Yathā hi saddhāpaññānaṃ visuṃ visuṃ dhuriyadhammabhūtānaṃ kiccato aññamaññānātivattanaṃ visesato icchitabbaṃ, yato nesaṃ samadhuratāya appanā sampajjati, evaṃ samādhivīriyānaṃ kosajjuddhaccapakkhikānaṃ samarasatāya sati aññamaññūpatthambhanato sampayuttadhammānaṃ antadvayapātābhāvena sammadeva appanā ijjhatīti. Balavasaddhotiādi vuttassevatthassa byatirekamukhena samatthanaṃ. Tassattho – yo balavatiyā saddhāya samannāgato avisadañāṇo, so mudhāpasanno hoti,na aveccappasanno. Tathā hi so avatthusmiṃ pasīdati seyyathāpi titthiyasāvakā. Kerāṭikapakkhanti sāṭheyyapakkhaṃ bhajati. Saddhāhīnāya paññāya atidhāvanto ‘‘deyyavatthupariccāgena vinā cittuppādamattenapi dānamayaṃ puññaṃ hotī’’tiādīni parikappeti hetupatirūpakehi vañcito, evaṃbhūto ca sukkhatakkaviluttacitto paṇḍitānaṃ vacanaṃ nādiyati, saññattiṃ na gacchati. Tenāha ‘‘bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hotī’’ti. Yathā cettha saddhāpaññānaṃ aññamaññaṃ samabhāvo atthāvaho, anatthāvaho visamabhāvo, evaṃ samādhivīriyānaṃ aññamaññaṃ avikkhepāvaho samabhāvo, itaro vikkhepāvaho cāti. Kosajjaṃ adhibhavati, tena appanaṃ na pāpuṇātīti adhippāyo . Uddhaccaṃ adhibhavatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tadubhayanti saddhāpaññādvayaṃ samādhivīriyadvayañca. Samaṃ kātabbanti samarasaṃ kātabbaṃ.
对于修定业处的人,也就是修止业处的人。这里说“这样”,意思是:当信心稍微强一点的时候,就是这个道理。“相信”是指不去想“仅仅靠‘地、地’这样作意,禅那怎么可能生起呢”,而是相信“正自觉者所说的修行方法一定会成功”,这样生起信心、让信心增长。“投入”是指并不是真的进入所缘,而是以胜解的方式认可、全身心投入。一境性应该强而有力,因为禅那以定为根本。“二者”是指定和慧。对于修定业处的人来说,因为定特别突出,慧也应该同样突出,所以说“也要均等”,意思是要处于平等的状态。这里说的“安止”是指世间的安止,正因为这样,论师才用不确定的语气说“也是会有的”。至于出世间的安止,则要求定和慧二者均等才能实现。正如经中所说:“他修习止与观,两者齐头并进。”如果说信与慧、定与精进特别需要均等,那念又怎样呢?回答说:然而,念在一切情况下都应该强而有力。“在一切情况下”是指在五种根中,即属于昏沉和掉举两方的五根。论师取掉举一方的一部分,说“信、精进、慧”。否则,喜也应该被取入。正因为这样,只说“与懈怠一方的定”,而没有说“与轻安、定、舍”。这里的“念”就是念。就像在一切王事中都投入的人叫一切事者。因为它在一切情况下都需要,论师在义注中就是这样说的。在一切情况下都投入的,是一切处者;或者,因为一切属于昏沉和掉举两方的觉支都应当被需要,所以是一切处者,正是一切处者才是一切处者。“心”是指善心。因为对于那善心来说,念是皈依处、是归宿,为了未达到的达到、未证得的证得。因此论师说“以守护为现起”等。巴利
Samādhikammikassāti samathakammaṭṭhānikassa. Evanti evaṃ sante, saddhāya thokaṃ balavabhāve satīti attho. Saddahantoti ‘‘pathavīti manasikāramattena kathaṃ jhānuppattī’’ti acintetvā ‘‘addhā sammāsambuddhena vuttavidhi ijjhissatī’’ti saddahanto saddhaṃ janento. Okappentoti ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā viya adhimuccanavasena avakappento pakkhandanto. Ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati samādhippadhānattā jhānassa. Ubhinnanti samādhipaññānaṃ. Samādhikammikassa samādhino adhimattatāya paññāya adhimattatāpi icchitabbāti āha ‘‘samatāyapī’’ti, samabhāvenapīti attho. Appanāti lokiyaappanā. Tathā hi ‘‘hotiyevā’’ti sāsaṅkaṃ vadati. Lokuttarappanā pana tesaṃ samabhāveneva icchitā. Yathāha ‘‘samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (a. ni. 4.17; paṭi. ma. 2.5). Yadi visesato saddhāpaññānaṃ samādhivīriyānañca samatā icchitā, kathaṃ satīti āha ‘‘sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭatī’’ti. Sabbatthāti līnuddhaccapakkhikesu pañcasu indriyesu. Uddhaccapakkhikekadese gaṇhanto ‘‘saddhāvīriyapaññāna’’nti āha. Aññathā pīti ca gahetabbā siyā. Tathā hi ‘‘kosajjapakkhikena samādhinā’’icceva vuttaṃ, na ‘‘passaddhisamādhiupekkhāhī’’ti. Sāti sati. Sabbesu rājakammesu niyutto sabbakammiko. Tenāti tenā sabbattha icchitabbatthena kāraṇena. Āha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Sabbattha niyuttā sabbatthikā, sabbena vā līnuddhaccapakkhiyena bojjhaṅgena atthetabbā sabbatthiyā, sabbatthiyāva sabbatthikā. Cittanti kusalacittaṃ. Tassa hi sati paṭisaraṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya. Tenāha ‘‘ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā’’tiādi.
对于“在蕴等种种分别中智慧尚未深入”这句话,意思是:即使因为广学多闻,他的智慧仍然没有安立在蕴、处等分别上。因为亲近多闻的人,能带来闻所成慧。即使是刚开始修观的人,由于安住在修所成慧中,也确定可以称为有智慧的人,所以说“等慧……亲近善知识”。由于所知法本身甚深,能辨别它的智慧也被说为甚深,因此说“在甚深的蕴等中运作的深慧”。那个所知法必须由这样的智慧去行持,所以是深智的行境;或者说,那智慧在那里依种种分别而运作,就是深智的行境,对它的省察就是“深慧的分别观察”。就像念达到圆满的人就是阿拉汉一样,慧达到圆满的人也是如此,所以说“以阿拉汉道,修习达到圆满”。对于精进等,也是同样的道理。巴利
Khandhādibhede anogāḷhapaññānanti pariyattibāhusaccavasenapi khandhāyatanādīsu appatiṭṭhitabuddhīnaṃ. Bahussutasevanā hi sutamayañāṇāvahā. Taruṇavipassanāsamaṅgīpi bhāvanāmayañāṇe ṭhitattā ekaṃsato paññavā eva nāma hotīti āha ‘‘samapaññāsa…pe… puggalasevanā’’ti. Ñeyyadhammassa gambhīrabhāvavasena tapparicchedakañāṇassa gambhīrabhāvaggahaṇanti āha ‘‘gambhīresu khandhādīsu pavattāya gambhīrapaññāyā’’ti. Tañhi ñeyyaṃ tādisāya paññāya caritabbato gambhīrañāṇacariyaṃ, tassā vā paññāya tattha pabhedato pavatti gambhīrañāṇacariyā, tassā paccavekkhaṇāti āha ‘‘gambhīrapaññāya pabhedapaccavekkhaṇā’’ti. Yathā sativepullappatto nāma arahā eva, evaṃ so eva paññāvepullappattopīti āha ‘‘arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūrī hotī’’ti. Vīriyādīsupi eseva nayo.
“把烧红的铁橛塞到他手里”等(《中部》3.250、267;《增支部》3.36)所说的五种束缚刑罚,对于已生在地狱的有情,大多数情况下是最先施行的;又因为在《天使经》等中,这种苦最初就被说到,所以说“从五种束缚刑罚开始”。“以车乘等时”中的“等”字,还包含其他被人和畜生逼恼的时候。“一佛间隔”这句话,是就那些在饿鬼中不断辗转受生的有情而说的;或者,某些饿鬼也像某些畜生一样,有那样长的寿命。确实如此,黑龙王就曾见过四位佛陀的容貌。巴利
‘‘Tattaṃ ayokhilaṃ hatthe gamentī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.250, 267; a. ni. 3.36) pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇaṃ niraye nibbattasattassa yebhuyyena sabbapaṭhamaṃ karontīti devadūtasuttādīsu tassā ādito vuttattā ca āha ‘‘pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇato paṭṭhāyā’’ti. Sakaṭavāhanādikāleti ādi-saddena tadaññaṃ manussehi tiracchānehi ca vibādhiyamānakālaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ekaṃ buddhantaranti idaṃ aparāparaṃ petesuyeva uppajjanakasattavasena vuttaṃ, ekaccānaṃ vā petānaṃ ekaccatiracchānānaṃ viya tathā dīghāyukabhāvato. Tathā hi kāḷo nāgarājā catunnaṃ buddhānaṃ adhigatarūpadassano.
像这样看见功德的人,就是说,一切出世间的和世间的殊胜成就,都只依靠精进才能得到,他就是如此在精进中惯于看见功德的人。行道,是指连同前行阶段在内的、通向涅槃的圣道修行道路。因为对比丘来说,为了脱离轮回,这是应当走、应当修的道路,所以叫作行道。多为身体强健之事的人,就是不管怎样都专心致力于让身体强健。团食,就是国土团食。供养资具的施主们在自己身上所作的善行,能靠自己的正确修行而变得有大果报,以这样的方式来回报和恭敬团食与乞食,就叫作敬团食。巴利
Evaṃ ānisaṃsadassāvinoti vīriyāyatto eva sabbo lokuttaro lokiyo ca visesādhigamoti evaṃ vīriye ānisaṃsadassanasīlassa. Gamanavīthinti sapubbabhāgaṃ nibbānagāminiṃ ariyamaggapaṭipadaṃ. Sā hi bhikkhuno vaṭṭanissaraṇāya gantabbā paṭipajjitabbā paṭipadāti katvā gamanavīthi nāma. Kāyadaḷhībahuloti yathā tathā kāyassa daḷhīkammapasuto. Piṇḍanti raṭṭhapiṇḍaṃ. Paccayadāyakānaṃ attani kārassa attano sammāpaṭipattiyā mahapphalabhāvassa karaṇena piṇḍassa bhikkhāya paṭipūjanā piṇḍāpacāyanaṃ.
“取出”是指从钵袋里取出来。“听到那个声音之后”:长老当时正站在茅草屋门口,凭五神通中的天耳通,听到了那位女施主说的话。人间福报、天界福报,最终是涅槃福报,这就是三种福报。“你能给予吗”:长老在心里问自己:“你能否凭她对你所作的布施功德和服务功德,加上遇到殊胜福田这一点,给予她一次次人间和天界的福报,最终还能给予她涅槃的福报呢?” “露出微笑”:他这样省察到最后,心里想“我已经轻轻松松超越了轮回之苦”,因为生起了这份欢喜,就露出了微笑。巴利
Nīharantoti pattatthavikato nīharanto. Taṃ saddaṃ sutvāti taṃ upāsikāya vacanaṃ paṇṇasāladvāre ṭhitova pañcābhiññatāya dibbasotena sutvā. Manussasampatti dibbasampatti ante nibbānasampattīti tisso sampattiyo. Dātuṃ sakkhissasīti ‘‘tayi katena dānamayena veyyāvaccamayena ca puññakammena khettavisesabhāvūpagamanena aparāparaṃ devamanussasampattiyo ante nibbānasampattiñca dātuṃ sakkhissasī’’ti thero attānaṃ pucchati. Sitaṃ karontovāti ‘‘akiccheneva mayā vaṭṭadukkhaṃ samatikkanta’’nti paccavekkhaṇāvasāne sañjātapāmojjavasena sitaṃ karonto eva.
行为不正的人,是指因为违犯了种姓之法、家族之法等,所以行为不正确。就像行为不正的儿子,由于这种不正的行为,成了家族传承之外的人,不能分享父亲留下的遗产;同样,懈怠的人也因为自己的懈怠,行为不正,不能分享应该从导师那里获得的圣财遗产。只有发起精进的人,因为行为正确,才能获得。精进觉支生起——这句话就是这样连接的。一切地方都是如此。巴利
Vippaṭipannanti jātidhammakuladhammādilaṅghanena asammāpaṭipannaṃ. Evaṃ yathā asammāpaṭipanno putto tāya eva asammāpaṭipattiyā kulasantānato bāhiro hutvā pitu santikā dāyajjassa na bhāgī, evaṃ kusītopi teneva kusītabhāvena asammāpaṭipanno satthu santikā laddhabbaariyadhanadāyajjassa na bhāgī. Āraddhavīriyova labhati sammāpaṭipajjanato. Uppajjati vīriyasambojjhaṅgoti yojanā. Evaṃ sabbattha.
所谓“大”,是指因为戒等功德而伟大、广阔、不与其他人共通。而他的这种功德的伟大,通过震动一万个世界而在世间广为人知;为了说明这一点,所以说了“尊师”等话。巴利
Mahāti sīlādīhi guṇehi mahanto vipulo anaññasādhāraṇo. Taṃ panassa guṇamahattaṃ dasasahassilokadhātukampanena loke pākaṭanti dassento ‘‘satthuno hī’’tiādimāha.
因为在世尊的教法中,作为出家者通过出家的方式就显现出释迦子的身份,所以为了显示佛子的身份,就说了“不混杂……”等话。巴利
Yasmā satthusāsane pabbajitassa pabbajjupagamena sakyaputtiyabhāvo sampajāyati, tasmā buddhaputtabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘asambhinnāyā’’tiādimāha.
远离懈怠的人,就是远离那些连修行的名目都全然不知、一味注重保养身体、吃饱了就躺卧享受安逸快乐、尽说些无意义闲话的人。亲近已发起精进、意志坚定的人,就是时常去亲近那些依照“白天经行、坐着”等教导,为了开展修行而奋发精进、勇猛坚毅的人。所以说“填饱肚子”等等。不过在《清净道论》里,没有取“省察出身高贵”和“省察同梵行者的高贵”这两项,而是取了“去除昏沉睡眠”和“省察正勤”这两项。其中,由于看到功德这一点,就已经包含了省察正勤,因为认识到世间和出世间的殊胜证得完全依赖于精进。去除昏沉睡眠也被包含在倾向于精进这一项里,因为对于策励精进的人来说,去除昏沉睡眠自然就能达成。在这里应当知道:去除昏沉睡眠、远离懈怠的人、亲近已发起精进的人、倾向于精进,这四项是通过破除对立面、提供助缘的方式使精进觉支生起;而省察恶趣等,则是通过激励的方式使精进觉支生起。巴利
Alasānaṃ bhāvanāya nāmamattampi ajānantānaṃ kāyadaḷhībahulānaṃ yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhādianuyuñjanakānaṃ tiracchānakathikānaṃ puggalānaṃ dūrato vajjanā kusītapuggalaparivajjanā. ‘‘Divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.423; 3.75; saṃ. ni. 4.120; a. ni. 3.16; vibha. 519; mahāni. 161) bhāvanārambhavasena āraddhavīriyānaṃ daḷhaparakkamānaṃ kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamanā āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanā. Tenāha – ‘‘kucchiṃ pūretvā’’tiādi. Visuddhimagge pana jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇā sabrahmacārimahattapaccavekkhaṇāti idaṃ dvayaṃ na gahitaṃ, thinamiddhavinodanatā sammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇatāti idaṃ dvayaṃ gahitaṃ. Tattha ānisaṃsadassāvitāya eva sammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇā gahitā hoti lokiyalokuttaravisesādhigamassa vīriyāyattatādassanabhāvato. Thinamiddhavinodanaṃ tadadhimuttatāya eva gahitaṃ, vīriyuppādane yuttappayuttassa thinamiddhavinodanaṃ atthasiddhameva. Tattha thinamiddhavinodana-kusītapuggalaparivajjana-āraddhavīriyapuggalasevana-tadadhimuttatā paṭipakkhavidhamanapaccayūpasaṃhāravasena, apāyapaccavekkhaṇādayo samuttejanavasena vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādakā daṭṭhabbā.
先前生起的喜,因为它是后来生起的喜的原因,所以说“喜本身就是喜觉支所依之法”。不过,由于这种喜反复生起、有多种多样,所以用复数来表述。按照它生起的方式去修习,就是令它生起的作意。巴利
Purimuppannā pīti parato uppajjanakapītiyā kāraṇabhāvato ‘‘pītiyeva pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā’’ti vuttā, tassā pana bahuso pavattiyā puthuttaṃ upādāya bahuvacananiddeso, yathā sā uppajjati, evaṃ paṭipatti, tassā uppādakamanasikāro.
佛随念以近行定为究竟,所以说“乃至近行”。遍满全身,是指由喜所产生的殊胜色法遍满全身。随念法功德的人,喜觉支也会生起,遍满全身而达到近行。同样,在其余随念以及观察能引生净信的经典时,也应这样配合理解,因为那些也属于解脱处,归入同一类。等至……现行,这是对寂止随念的说明。因为对于诸行,即使只是部分止息,智慧也能像完全止息时那样运作,所以这种修习作意能镇伏烦恼、带来近行定,具足那样的喜与悦,就成为喜觉支生起的原因。对于能引生净信的事物,由于缺乏净信的滋润,心就像谷壳一样坚硬,这种粗涩,应当知道是通过不恭敬的行为表现出来的,所以说由不恭敬的行为显示出粗涩。巴利
Buddhānussatiyā upacārasamādhiniṭṭhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘yāva upacārā’’ti. Sakalasarīraṃ pharamānoti pītisamuṭṭhānehi paṇītarūpehi sakalasarīraṃ pharamāno. Dhammaguṇe anussarantassapi yāva upacārā sakalasarīraṃ pharamāno pītisambojjhaṅgo uppajjatīti. Evaṃ sesaanussatīsu pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇāyañca yojetabbaṃ tassāpi vimuttāyatanabhāvena taggatikattā. Samāpattiyā…pe… samudācarantīti idañca upasamānussatidassanaṃ. Saṅkhārānañhi sappadesavūpasamepi nippadesavūpasame viya tathā paññāya pavattito bhāvanāmanasikāro kilesavikkhambhanasamattho hutvā upacārasamādhiṃ āvahanto tathārūpapītisomanassasamannāgato pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya hotīti. Pasādanīyesu ṭhānesu pasādasinehābhāvena thusasamahadayatā lūkhatā, sā tattha ādaragāravākaraṇena viññāyatīti āha ‘‘asakkaccakiriyāya saṃsūcitalūkhabhāve’’ti.
以身心不安的止息为特相的轻安,本身就是轻安觉支;这是针对轻安觉支的说明。巴利
Kāyacittadarathavūpasamalakkhaṇā passaddhi eva passaddhisambojjhaṅgo, tassa passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa.
“习惯受用殊胜的食物”,就是指习惯受用殊胜而适宜的食物。通过“享受适宜的气候与威仪之乐”这一说法,应当理解为采用适宜的气候与威仪。因为这三种适宜在受用时,能以令身体堪任的方式带来心的堪任,所以是两种轻安的因。众生无因所得的乐与苦,这是一种极端;认为是由自在天等不平等因所造成,这是第二种极端。不趋近这两种极端,而依各自的业力而生起,这就是中道。具备中舍的运用,这种状态就是“中舍运用性”。因为这种状态舍弃了紧张的身体,成为身体轻安的因,带来两种轻安。由此应当知道,这里已经说明了:远离紧张身体的人以及亲近轻安身体的人,能够成就这种轻安。巴利
Paṇītabhojanasevanatāti paṇītasappāyabhojanasevanatā. Utuiriyāpathasukhaggahaṇena sappāyautuiriyāpathaggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tañhi tividhaṃ sappāyaṃ seviyamānaṃ kāyassa kallatāpādanavasena cittassa kallataṃ āvahantaṃ duvidhāyapi passaddhiyā kāraṇaṃ hoti. Ahetukaṃ sattesu labbhamānaṃ sukhaṃ dukkhanti ayameko anto, issarādivisamahetukanti pana ayaṃ dutiyo, ete ubho ante anupagamma yathāsakaṃ kammunā hotīti ayaṃ majjhimā paṭipatti. Majjhatto payogo yassa hoti majjhattapayogo, tassa bhāvo majjhattapayogatā. Ayañhi pahāya sāraddhakāyataṃ passaddhakāyatāya kāraṇaṃ hontī passaddhidvayaṃ āvahati, eteneva sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanapassaddhakāyapuggalavasenānaṃ tadāvahanatā saṃvaṇṇitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
当以“已得定时的样态”的方式被把握时,先前生起的止本身就是止相。因为它在种种所缘中游转,所以有种种殊胜,这叫散乱,也就是掉举。同样地,它被说成以不安住为本质,以动摇为现起。由于缺乏一境性,它是散乱的对立面,所以叫不散乱,也就是定。这个本身就是相,应当像前面那样说。因此说“以不散乱之义,为不散乱相”。巴利
Yathāsamāhitākārasallakkhaṇavasena gayhamāno purimuppanno samatho eva samathanimittaṃ. Nānārammaṇe paribbhamanena vividhaṃ aggaṃ etassāti byaggo, vikkhepo. Tathā hi so anavaṭṭhānaraso bhantatāpaccupaṭṭhāno ca vutto. Ekaggatābhāvato byaggapaṭipakkhoti abyaggo, samādhi. So eva nimittanti pubbe viya vattabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘avikkhepaṭṭhena ca abyagganimitta’’nti.
事清净的作用和诸根均等的修习,已被说为能带来智慧;它们也能带来定,正是因为能带来定,所以才能带来智慧,因此说“事清净……应当了知”。巴利
Vatthuvisadakiriyā indriyasamattapaṭipādanā ca paññāvahā vuttā, samādhānāvahāpi tā honti samādhānāvahabhāveneva paññāvahabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘vatthuvisada…pe… veditabbā’’ti.
因为“作意修习”的善巧和“守护”的善巧不可分离,而“守护”的善巧又以它们为根本,所以说“相善巧,就是把握遍相(禅修对象)的善巧”。这里提到“遍相”只是举一个例子而已。应当知道:对于不净相等任何一种能生起禅那的相,把握它的善巧就是相善巧。巴利
Karaṇabhāvanākosallānaṃ avinābhāvato, rakkhaṇakosallassa ca tammūlakattā ‘‘nimittakusalatā nāma kasiṇanimittassa uggahaṇakusalatā’’icceva vuttaṃ. Kasiṇanimittassāti ca nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Asubhanimittassādikassapi hi yassa kassaci jhānuppattinimittassa uggahaṇakosallaṃ nimittakusalatā evāti.
“过于松懈的精进等”这里,“等”这个字涵盖了慧的运用微弱和喜悦不足。对治那沉滞之心的“策励”,就是通过发起法择觉支等,把沉滞的心从陷于昏沉中提振出来。世尊曾这样说:巴利
Atisithilavīriyatādīhīti ādi-saddena paññāpayogamandataṃ pamodavekallañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tassa paggahaṇanti tassa līnassa cittassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādisamuṭṭhāpanena layāpattito samuddharaṇaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,当心变得消沉迟钝的时候,就是修习择法觉支的时机,就是修习精进觉支的时机,就是修习喜觉支的时机。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为消沉迟钝的心,靠这些法就能很好地被振奋起来。比丘们,就好比有人想点燃一小堆火,他往里面放干草、干牛粪、干木柴,用嘴吹气,又不往上撒尘土。比丘们,那个人能点燃那堆小火吗?能。巴利
‘‘Yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya . Taṃ kissa hetu? Līnaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi susamuṭṭhāpayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletukāmo assa, so tattha sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni ca gomayāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni ca kaṭṭhāni pakkhipeyya, mukhavātañca dadeyya, na ca paṃsukena okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletunti? Evaṃ sante’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234).
在这里还要知道:法择觉支等觉支的修习,是依照各自对应的“食”而生起、发动的;这一点紧接着前文已经讲清楚了。巴利
Ettha ca yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā samuṭṭhāpanāti veditabbaṃ, sā anantaraṃ vibhāvitā eva.
“过度精进等”这里的“等”字,也把智慧作用强猛之人的过度欢喜和雀跃包含在内了。“抑制彼”,就是针对那颗掉举的心,通过发起定觉支等来对治,从而制止它陷入掉举。世尊也曾这样说过:巴利
Accāraddhavīriyatādīhīti ādi-saddena paññāpayogabalavataṃ pamoduppilāvanañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tassa niggahaṇanti tassa uddhatacittassa samādhisambojjhaṅgādisamuṭṭhāpanena uddhatāpattito nisedhanaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,当心掉举的时候,正是修习轻安觉支的时机,正是修习定觉支的时机,正是修习舍觉支的时机。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,掉举的心靠这些法就能很好地平息下来。比丘们,就好比有人想熄灭一大团火,他往里面投入湿草……甚至……再撒上尘土,比丘们,这个人能熄灭那团大火吗?尊者,能。巴利
‘‘Yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Uddhataṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi suvūpasamayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetukāmo assa, so tattha allāni ceva tiṇāni…pe… paṃsukena ca okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetunti? Evaṃ bhante’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234).
在这里也应当明白:轻安觉支等的修习,是各自按照它们相应的“食”而发起、现前的。其中,轻安觉支的修习已经讲过了,定觉支的修习现在正在讲,而另一个(舍觉支)接下来就会说到。巴利
Etthāpi yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena passaddhisambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā samuṭṭhāpanāti veditabbā. Tattha passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanā vuttā eva, samādhisambojjhaṅgassa vuccamānā, itarassa anantaraṃ vakkhati.
“慧的运用微弱”:是指慧的作用不明显。就像布施以无贪为主导,持戒以无嗔为主导,同样地,修习以无痴为主导。在这里,当慧不够强有力时,修习就不能前后带来殊胜;就像未经调理的食物,不能令修行者的心生起欢喜,因此那修习就变得没有滋味;同样地,由于没有正确地依循行道而修,便不能体验到寂止之乐,心也因此变得没有滋味。所以说“慧的运用……变得没有滋味”。对治它的方法是激发悚惧和激发净信。为了说明这一点,才说“八种悚惧事”等。其中,生、老、病、死,如其所应,在善趣和恶趣中都有;此外,还应看到由五种束缚等、饥渴等、互相伤害等其他原因所导致的恶趣之苦,而这一切都是依于那些众生的现生而说的,因此过去与未来时中的以轮回为根本的种种苦则已分别另说。然而,对于以食物和形色为生的众生,以及其中以努力所得果实为生的众生,他们与其他众生不共的谋生之苦,应知即是所取的第八种悚惧事。这称为在适当时候的激励:这是说,在应激励时,依前述方法,以悚惧与激发净信而正确地激励,即先引发悚惧而后激发净信,令修习之心满足。巴利
Paññāpayogamandatāyāti paññābyāpārassa appabhāvena. Yathā hi dānaṃ alobhappadhānaṃ, sīlaṃ adosappadhānaṃ, evaṃ bhāvanā amohappadhānā. Tattha yadā paññā na balavatī hoti, tadā bhāvanā pubbenāparaṃ visesāvahā na hoti, anabhisaṅkhato viya āhāro purisassa yogino cittassa abhiruciṃ na janeti, tena taṃ nirassādaṃ hoti, tathā bhāvanāya sammadeva avīthipaṭipattiyā upasamasukhaṃ na vindati, tenāpi cittaṃ nirassādaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāpayoga…pe… nirassādaṃ hotī’’ti. Tassa saṃveguppādanaṃ pasāduppādanañca tikicchananti taṃ dassento ‘‘aṭṭha saṃvegavatthūnī’’tiādimāha. Tattha jātijarābyādhimaraṇāni yathārahaṃ sugatiyaṃ duggatiyañca hontīti tadaññameva pañcavidhabandhanādi-khuppipāsādi-aññamaññavibādhanādihetukaṃ apāyadukkhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tayidaṃ sabbaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ paccuppannabhavanissitaṃ gahitanti atīte anāgate ca kāle vaṭṭamūlakadukkhāni visuṃ gahitāni. Ye pana sattā āhārūpajīvino, tattha ca uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino, tesaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ jīvikadukkhaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ saṃvegavatthu gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati samaye sampahaṃsanatāti ayaṃ sampahaṃsitabbasamaye vuttanayena tena saṃvejanavasena ceva pasāduppādanavasena ca sammadeva pahaṃsanā, saṃvegajananapubbakapasāduppādanena bhāvanācittassa tosanāti attho.
依止正行道,是指远离昏沉与掉举,通过寂止的行道而正确地、没有偏差地、如实地依止修习的行道。在“不昏沉”等说法中,因为懈怠一类的法没有过度增长,所以是不昏沉;因为掉举一类的法没有过度增长,所以是不掉举;因为慧的运用有力,并且证得了寂止之乐,所以是不无滋味;正因如此,心在所缘上平稳地持续运作,并且步入了寂止的行道。其中,因为不昏沉,所以在策励时不必费力;因为不掉举,所以在抑制时不必费力;因为不无滋味,所以在激励时不必费力;由于不昏沉与不掉举,心在所缘上平稳运作;由于不无滋味,步入寂止行道。或者应当这样理解:由于平稳运作,所以不昏沉、不掉举;由于寂止的行道,所以不无滋味。这称为在适当时候的舍置观察:在应舍置观察之时,克服了名为“干预”的对立面——即对修习之心进行策励、抑制、激励的作用——而作观察。巴利
Sammāpaṭipattiṃ āgammāti līnuddhaccavirahena samathavīthipaṭipattiyā ca sammā avisamaṃ sammadeva bhāvanāpaṭipattiṃ āgamma. Alīnantiādīsu kosajjapakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ anadhimattatāya alīnaṃ, uddhaccapakkhiyānaṃ anadhimattatāya anuddhataṃ, paññāpayogasattiyā upasamasukhādhigamena ca anirassādaṃ, tato eva ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ samathavīthipaṭipannañca. Tattha alīnatāya paggahe, anuddhatatāya niggahe, anirassādatāya sampahaṃsane na byāpāraṃ āpajjati, alīnānuddhatatāhi ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ, anirassādatāya samathavīthipaṭipannaṃ. Samappavattiyā vā alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ, samathavīthipaṭipattiyā anirassādanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati samaye ajjhupekkhanatāti ayaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbasamaye bhāvanācittassa paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu byāvaṭatāsaṅkhātaṃ paṭipakkhaṃ abhibhuyya pekkhanā vuccati.
由于能压制住对立面,又能成为观智的基础,所以即使是近行定,也足以完成让这个人达到心一境性的任务。因此,就两者功能同等的意义,经文说“或近行,或安止”。巴利
Paṭipakkhavikkhambhanato vipassanāya adhiṭṭhānabhāvūpagamanato ca upacārajjhānampi samādānakiccanipphattiyā puggalassa samāhitabhāvasādhanamevāti tattha samadhurabhāvenāha ‘‘upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā’’ti.
关于“舍觉支的立足处诸法”这句话,在这里应当说明的内容,可以按照前面所说的来理解。巴利
Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammāti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttānusārena veditabbaṃ.
通过断除随顺与违逆而达到的中舍状态,是舍觉支生起的原因,因为这种中舍存在时舍觉支才能成就,不存在时便不能成就。而这种中舍状态按所缘对象分为两种,所以说“对有情的中舍”和“对诸行的中舍”。在修习轻安觉支时,对这两者的抵触都已被排除,因此为了显示断除随顺这一方面,才说了“对有情的中舍”等话。正因如此,论中说“远离对有情和诸行有执著纠缠之人”。对于舍来说,贪特别是它的对立面。正如论中所说:“舍是贪多者的清净之道。”(《清净道论》1.269)巴利
Anurodhavirodhavippahānavasena majjhattabhāvo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa kāraṇaṃ tasmiṃ sati sijjhanato, asati ca asijjhanato, so ca majjhattabhāvo visayavasena duvidhoti āha ‘‘sattamajjhattatā saṅkhāramajjhattatā’’ti. Tadubhaye ca virujjhanaṃ passaddhisambojjhaṅgabhāvanāya eva dūrīkatanti anurujjhanasseva pahānavidhiṃ dassentena ‘‘sattamajjhattatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatā’’ti. Upekkhāya hi visesato rāgo paṭipakkho. Tathā cāha ‘‘upekkhā rāgabahulassa visuddhimaggo’’ti (visuddhi. 1.269).
以两种方式,即随观业属于自己和我空这两种原因。说“唯二”,是为了限定,因为两者数量相等。无主就是非我所性。如果真有自我,那么由于它有所归属,衣和其他任何东西就可以称为我所;然而那样的自我根本不存在,这就是意旨所在。不久存,指不能持久、不长久、短暂,也就是无常的意思。暂时,是它的同义词。巴利
Dvīhākārehīti kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇaṃ attasuññatāpaccavekkhaṇanti imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi. Dvīhevāti avadhāraṇaṃ saṅkhyāsamānatāya. Assāmikabhāvo anattaniyatā. Sati hi attani tassa kiñcanabhāvena cīvaraṃ aññañca kiñci attaniyaṃ nāma siyā, so pana koci natthevāti adhippāyo. Anaddhaniyanti na addhānakkhamaṃ, na ciraṭṭhāyi ittaraṃ aniccanti attho. Tāvakālikanti tasseva vevacanaṃ.
“这是我的”这种想法,就是在做“我所”的执取;他以“这是我的”这种渴爱抓住它、安住其中。“他们把它当作财富”,就是把财物、资具作成。巴利
Mamāyatīti mamattaṃ karoti, ‘‘mama’’nti taṇhāya pariggayha tiṭṭhati. Dhanāyantāti dhanaṃ drabyaṃ karontā.
这段念处的开示是依前分道来说的,指的是前分觉支,所以说“摄持觉支的念是苦谛”。巴利
Ayaṃ satipaṭṭhānadesanā pubbabhāgamaggavasena desitāti pubbabhāgiyabojjhaṅge sandhāyāha ‘‘bojjhaṅgapariggāhikā sati dukkhasacca’’nti.
四谛品注释巴利
Catusaccapabbavaṇṇanā
119 所谓“如自性”,是指不颠倒的自性,也就是逼迫相;或者说,无论哪种自性,都如其自性,因此这里的意思就是变坏、坚硬等自性。“能生、能等起”,是指能生起转起相之苦,能等起相状。“前渴爱”,是指在苦生起之前就已存在的渴爱。巴利
119.Yathāsabhāvatoti aviparītasabhāvato bādhanalakkhaṇato, yo yo vā sabhāvo yathāsabhāvo, tato, ruppanādikakkhaḷādisabhāvatoti attho. Janikaṃ samuṭṭhāpikanti pavattalakkhaṇassa dukkhassa janikaṃ nimittalakkhaṇassa samuṭṭhāpikaṃ. Purimataṇhanti dukkhanibbattito puretarasiddhaṃ taṇhaṃ.
当灭以“自身相续所摄的苦集不再生起”这一状态被把握时,灭也就显得仿佛为自身相续所摄,因此说“自己的四谛”。说到“他人的”,这里的道理也是一样。所以世尊说:“就在这只有一寻长、有想、有心意的身体里,我施设世间,施设世间集,施设世间灭,施设趣向世间灭的道路。”(相应部1.107)那么,初修业者怎样把握灭谛呢?他通过传闻等所成立的行相来把握;这样一来,即使就出世间的觉支而言,如此把握也不相违。“如其可能”的意思是随其可能;这是说,除了灭谛之外,依其余诸谛而知生灭。巴利
Sasantatipariyāpannānaṃ dukkhasamudayānaṃ appavattibhāvena pariggayhamāno nirodhopi sasantatipariyāpanno viya hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘attano vā cattāri saccānī’’ti. Parassa vāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘imasmiṃyeva byāmamatte kaḷevare sasaññimhi samanake lokañca paññapemi, lokasamudayañca paññapemi, lokanirodhañca paññapemi, lokanirodhagāminipaṭipadañca paññapemī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.107). Kathaṃ pana ādikampiko nirodhasaccāni pariggaṇhātīti? Anussavādisiddhamākāraṃ pariggaṇhāti, evañca katvā lokuttarabojjhaṅge uddissapi pariggaho na virujjhati. Yathāsambhavatoti sambhavānurūpaṃ, ṭhapetvā nirodhasaccaṃ sesasaccavasena samudayavayā veditabbāti attho.
“有肉的骨锁”等九种坟场中,七种因为以骨为业处,其余膨胀相等则纯粹以其自性为业处,所以说这九种坟场都是安止业处。所谓“只有两种”,就是指入出息和三十二分身这两种。所谓“倾向”,是指观的倾向,也就是对所应思择的诸法的摄持。威仪和瞻前顾后等,只是色法的不同状态而已,不能用来思择,就像表色等一样。因为盖和觉支从一开始就不应被摄持,所以说“在威仪……不生起”。就像用头发等名目来摄持那些属于它们的法一样,用威仪等名目摄持的是处于那些状态的色法;而通过盖等名目,摄持的则是与它们相应、以它们为依止的法。玛哈斯瓦长老说“在威仪等当中也会生起倾向”,用意就在这里。至于“这些到底存在吗”等话,是为了显示对初学者来说,威仪等的自性并不是所想要的,因为遍知确实是以未遍知为先导的。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṃ samaṃsa’’ntiādikā satta sivathikā aṭṭhikakammaṭṭhānatāya itarāsaṃ uddhumātakādīnaṃ sabhāvenevāti navannaṃ sivathikānaṃ appanākammaṭṭhānatā vuttā. Dveyevāti ‘‘ānāpānaṃ, dvattiṃsākāro’’ti imāni dveyeva. Abhinivesoti vipassanābhiniveso, so pana sammasanīyadhamme pariggaho. Iriyāpathā ālokitādayo ca rūpadhammānaṃ avatthāvisesamattatāya na sammasanupagā viññattiādayo viya. Nīvaraṇabojjhaṅgā ādito na pariggahetabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘iriyāpatha…pe… na jāyatī’’ti. Kesādiapadesena tadupādānadhammā viya iriyāpathādiapadesena tadavatthā rūpadhammā pariggayhanti, nīvaraṇādimukhena ca taṃ sampayuttā taṃnissayadhammāti adhippāyena mahāsīvatthero ‘‘iriyāpathādīsupiabhiniveso jāyatī’’ti āha. Atthi nu kho metiādi pana sabhāvato iriyāpathādīnaṃ ādikammikassa anicchitabhāvadassanaṃ. Apariññāpubbikā hi pariññāti.
137 137. 确实,在“诸比丘,在此……”等开示与简说中,处处都提到了比丘,这是为了显示修习需要有比丘的身份;然而,为了表明这一教导是普遍适用于所有人的,所以就说“诸比丘,无论何人”,并不只是针对比丘。为了表达这个意思,才说“无论何人,比丘或……”。所谓“正智”,是指不被见道所识的界限所限制而通达的最上道慧,它同时也是果,所以是最高果,因此说“正智就是阿拉汉果”。即使在很短的时间内,也显示了教法具有导出的性质,这就是为了建立这样的关联。巴利
137. Kāmaṃ ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’tiādinā uddesaniddesesu tattha tattha bhikkhuggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, taṃ paṭipattiyā bhikkhubhāvadassanatthaṃ, desanā pana sabbasādhāraṇāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yo hi koci, bhikkhave’’icceva vuttaṃ, na bhikkhuyevāti dassento ‘‘yo hi koci, bhikkhu vā’’tiādimāha. Dassanamaggena ñātamariyādaṃ anatikkamitvā jānantī sikhāppattā aggamaggapaññā aññā nāma, tassa phalabhāvato aggaphalampīti āha ‘‘aññāti arahatta’’nti. Appatarepi kāle sāsanassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ dassentoti yojanā.
138 所谓“导出”,就是结论。巴利
138.Niyyātentoti nigamento.
《根本五十经复注》巴利
Mūlapaṇṇāsa-ṭīkā
1 2 3